JP7457440B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Slot machines have been known as one type of gaming machine (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-016110

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance of a gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solving means (the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses).
The present invention (17th embodiment)
It has a non-internal medium state (non-RT), an internal medium state (RT1), and a special game state (1BB operation (RB operation)),
If you win a special combination (1BB) in a non-internal medium state game and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination does not stop and display, the next game will be an internal medium state game, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination will be played. The system is configured so that the next game when is displayed in a stopped state is a game in a special game state.
There is a case where there is a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section in the game in the non-internal state,
There is a case where there is a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section in the game in the internal medium state,
In the non-internal state, there is a case (winning number "0" in Figure 216) where the special role is won, the prescribed role (winning E) is not won, and the specific role (replay B) is not won as a result of the lottery in the non-internal state. death,
In the non-internal state, there is a case where the special role (1BB) is won and the prescribed role (winning E) is won as a result of the winning lottery (winning numbers "60" to "71" in FIG. 217).
There is no case where the special role is not won and the prescribed role is won as a result of the lottery in the non-internal state,
In the non-internal state, there is a case where the special role is not won and the specific role is won as a result of the lottery (winning number "2" in Figure 216).
There is no case where a special role is won and a prescribed role is won as a result of the winning role lottery in the internal state,
In the internal medium state, there are cases where the special role is not won and the prescribed role is won as a result of the lottery (winning numbers "60" to "71" in FIG. 219).
In the internal medium state, there is a case where the special role is not won and the specific role is won as a result of the lottery (winning number "2" in Figure 218),
If the result of the lottery in the normal section of the non-internal state is that the special role is won and the prescribed role is not won, it will move to the advantageous section,
If the result of the lottery in the normal section of the non-internal state is the winning of the special role and the winning of the specified role, it will move to the advantageous section,
If the result of the lottery in the normal section of the non-internal state is that the special role is not won and the specific role is won, it will not move to the advantageous section,
If the result of the lottery in the normal section of the internal medium state is that the special role is not won and the prescribed role is won, it will not move to the advantageous section,
If the result of the lottery in the normal section of the internal medium state is that the special role is not won and the specific role is won, it will not move to the advantageous section,
The probability of not winning the special role and winning the specific role as a result of the lottery in the internal medium state (number "8") is The probability of winning is higher than the probability of winning (number "4"),
In a game that shifts from a normal section to an advantageous section, a mode (initial normal mode) can be set based on the result of the winning lottery (step S495 in FIG. 232(a)),
In the game following the game that has transitioned from the normal section to the advantageous section, a predetermined lottery (normal mode lottery) based on the set mode and game state can be executed (step S503 in FIG. 233(a)),
A new mode (Heaven B preparation mode) that is newly set based on the result of a predetermined lottery in a situation where the normal section of the internal medium state has transitioned to an advantageous section of the internal medium state (other than first thing in the morning) is the normal section of the non-internal medium state. A mode that is more advantageous than the newly set mode (Normal A, Normal B, Normal C, or Heaven A mode) is set based on the result of a predetermined lottery in the situation (first thing in the morning) where the mode has shifted from the internal medium state to the advantageous section. It is easily structured,
The probability of transitioning from a normal section to an advantageous section in a game in an internal medium state (input number "57968") is lower than the probability (input number "65532") of transitioning from a normal section to an advantageous section in a game in a non-internal medium state. It is characterized by being

According to the present invention, the performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on a reel in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the display window and each reel and active lines, and (B) is a diagram showing the names of symbol positions. It is a diagram (1) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payout pieces, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing a condition device, winning combination, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing the condition device, winning combination, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram (4) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table in 1st Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of gaming states in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing variation conditions of the gaming state in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window when the small win A1 condition device is activated, when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and when the small win C1 condition device is activated and when the small win B1 condition device is activated and when the small win C ... the left win C2 condition device is activated, respectively. This is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win C2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, it is a diagram showing symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the small win D1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated. In the first embodiment, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the minor winning A1 condition device to the minor winning F2 condition device are activated, only the symbol on the middle reel is a diagram showing a symbol combination in which the “PB=1” arrangement is set. . In the first embodiment, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the minor win A1 condition device to the minor win F2 condition device are activated, this is a diagram showing a symbol combination in which only the right reel symbol is in the “PB=1” arrangement. . In the first embodiment, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the minor role A1 condition device to minor role F2 condition device are activated, only the symbol on the left reel is a symbol combination in which “PB=1” is arranged. . In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 01, (2) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 02, and (3) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 02. 03 is a diagram showing the stopping number at the time of winning. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 04, (2) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 05, and (3) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 05. 06 is a diagram showing the stopping number when winning a prize. It is a figure showing the pattern arrangement of the reel in a 2nd embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the second embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table in 2nd Embodiment. A transition diagram of the game state in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation condition of the gaming state in 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, (1) is the first stop on the left when the small win A1 condition device is activated, the first stop on the left when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and the first left when the small win C1 condition device is activated. It is a diagram showing the symbols of the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window when stopped, and (2) is a diagram showing the symbols of the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window when the small role C1 condition device is activated. It is a diagram showing possible symbols on the left reel. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement of the reel in the modification of 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. In the modification of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, (1) is the first stop on the left when the small role A1 condition device is activated, the first stop on the left when the small role B1 condition device is activated, and the small role C1 It is a diagram showing the symbols of the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window at the first stop on the left when the condition device is activated, and (2) is the second left reel after the first stop in the middle when the small role C1 condition device is activated. It is a diagram showing symbols on the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window when stopped. In the modified examples of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small winning combination 01, and (2) is a diagram showing the stopping roll when winning a small winning combination 02. Yes, and (3) is a diagram showing the stopping number when winning the small winning combination 03. In a variant of the first and second embodiments, (1) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 04 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 05 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 06 is won. It is a figure explaining the structure of main CPU, ROM, and RWM in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in the used area of RWM in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the RWM usage area in the third embodiment. 35 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the RWM usage area in the third embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 34. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board in the third embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and P in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in a third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the third embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 2 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the third embodiment. _SC_LED_DSP2) and the signal output from the output port 6, and (C) is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the program start process (M_PRG_START) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR) in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in 3rd Embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flashing request flag generation process (S_LED_FLASH) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the blinking/nonapplicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ratio display timer update processing (S_RATE_TIME) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flashing bit test frequency table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 5 in a modified example of the third embodiment. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and signals output from output ports 3 and 6 in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit and the like for executing interrupt processing in a fourth embodiment. A program example for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission in the fourth embodiment is shown, in which (A) and (B) show a main processing program, and (C) show an interrupt processing program. It is a flowchart which shows a program start (M_PRG_START) in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in a 4th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an initialization process (M_INI_SET) according to the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR) in a 4th embodiment. 12 is a time chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, and shows an example in which the main processing does not have an interrupt prohibition period. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, and shows an example in which the main processing has an interrupt prohibition period. 12 is a time chart showing an example (Example 1) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a time chart showing an example (Example 2) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a time chart showing an interrupt cycle when there is no interrupt prohibition period in main processing in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a diagram showing an example in which an interrupt prohibition period in main processing is set between interrupt processing 1 and interrupt processing 2 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example (Example 1) in which the timing at which interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is an interrupt prohibition period in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example (Example 2) in which the timing at which interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is an interrupt prohibition period in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (example 3) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt prohibited period in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a time chart showing the relationship (Example 1) between the rotation of the reels and error detection and notification in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the process of FIG. 76 (Example 1). It is a time chart (Example 2) showing a case where settings are changed after an error is detected during rotation of the reels in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the process of FIG. 78 (Example 2). 13 is a time chart showing a case (example 3) in which multiple errors are detected during setting confirmation in the fifth embodiment. 81 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 80 (Example 3). FIG. In the fifth embodiment, a time chart showing a case (Example 4) in which the first error and the second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 stop and before the start switch is operated (game start)). be. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 82 (Example 4). FIG. 23 is an external perspective view showing a main control board, a socket, and a main chip not yet mounted in the socket in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a plan view (a view viewed vertically downward from above) showing the main chip attached to the socket in more detail. FIG. 85 is an arrow view (front view) seen from the Z1 direction in FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a view in the direction of arrow Z2 (side view) in FIG. 85; (A) is a diagram showing enlarged product names and company names, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along arrow Z3-Z3 in (A). 11A and 11B are cross-sectional views showing the relationship between three types of step portions. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship (Example 1) of the board|substrate and predetermined|prescribed electronic component in 7th Embodiment, (A) shows a top view, and (B) shows a front view. (A) is a view seen from the Z4 direction in FIG. 90(A), and (B) is a view seen from the Z5 direction (bottom side of the connector) in FIG. 90(B). be. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship (Example 2) of the board|substrate and predetermined|prescribed electronic component in 7th Embodiment, (A) shows a top view, and (B) shows a side view (enlarged view). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the positional relationship (Example 3) between a board and a predetermined electronic component in a seventh embodiment, in which (A) shows a front view (mounting surface of a predetermined electronic component), and (B) shows a side view. (C) shows a back view. 94 is a diagram showing a modification of Example 3 in FIG. 93, in which (A) shows a front view (mounting surface of a predetermined electronic component), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view. It is a figure which shows the 1-chip microprocessor in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in ROM in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the memory map in the built-in RWM in more detail in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams for explaining an interrupt initial setting address in the eighth embodiment, in which (A) is a diagram showing data details of the interrupt initial setting address, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt priority levels and interrupt priority setting values. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating vector address values and data values stored in the vector addresses in the eighth embodiment, where (A) shows the vector address values, and (B) shows the relationship between interrupt factors and automatic allocation values. The relationship is shown, and (C) shows an example of the data value of the vector address. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a process from when the power is turned on until when the mode transitions to a user mode in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a program starting from "0000H" in a program area in a use area of a built-in ROM in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example when the vector address is "00F4H" in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process called by a RST command in the eighth embodiment, where (A), (B), and (C) show example 1, example 2, and example 3, respectively. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing program code area setting addresses and their data values in the eighth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the type of role, the probability of winning, the number of coins paid out for each order in which the stop switches are pressed, etc., and (b) is a diagram showing the ball-paying performance of biased roles. In the ninth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the flow of effects (Example 1) when the stop switches are operated in the recommended pressing order during the advantageous section and non-AT. This figure shows the flow of presentation (example 1) when the stop switch is operated in a non-recommended pressing sequence during a favorable zone and non-AT in the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the flow of effects (Example 2) when the stop switches are operated in the recommended pressing order during the advantageous section and non-AT. In the ninth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the flow of effects (Example 2) when the stop switches are operated in a non-recommended pressing order during an advantageous section and non-AT. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating the transition of (image) layers when a recommended image is displayed in the ninth embodiment. 110 is a diagram following FIG. 110. In the ninth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when the bet operation and start switch operation are performed after the demonstration display (when there is no replay winning), and (a) is the recommended push. (b) shows the non-recommended push order. In the ninth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when the start switch is operated 60 seconds after the replay winning, and (a) shows the recommended pressing order. , (b) shows the non-recommended pressing order. In the ninth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when the bet operation is performed within 3 seconds after the full stop and the start operation is performed 60 seconds after the full stop; ) indicates the recommended pressing order, and (b) indicates the non-recommended pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows main processing in a 9th embodiment. 116 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process in step S181 of FIG. 115. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the production group number setting process in step S182 of FIG. 115. In the ninth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the relationship between a winning combination (biased combination), an instruction monitor, and an image display. 12 is a flowchart showing temporary storage processing 1 in the ninth embodiment. This is a flowchart continuing from Figure 119. 121 is a flowchart showing another example of FIG. 120. 12 is a flowchart showing temporary storage processing 2 in the ninth embodiment. 123 is a flowchart following FIG. 122. It is a side sectional view of the slot machine in a 10th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine in a 10th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing (1) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in a 10th embodiment. An explanatory diagram (2) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (3) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. It is an explanatory view (4) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. It is an explanatory view (5) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (6) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. It is an explanatory view (7) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. It is an explanatory view (8) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram (9) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a time chart (1) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 12 is a time chart (2) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is a time chart (3) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a time chart (4) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and released in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart (5) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and released in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a time chart (6) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment. FIG. It is a time chart (7) showing the operation mode when detecting and canceling an error in the tenth embodiment. It is a time chart (8) showing the operation mode when detecting and canceling an error in the tenth embodiment. It is a time chart (1) showing the operation mode when the power is turned off during door open notification in the tenth embodiment. It is a time chart (2) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during door open notification in the tenth embodiment. It is a time chart (3) showing the operation mode when the power is turned off during door open notification in the tenth embodiment. 11 is a time chart showing example 1 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment. It is a time chart which shows example 2 of error notification in an 11th embodiment. 11 is a time chart showing example 3 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment. 11 is a time chart showing an example (Example 4) in which power is cut off while the first error occurs in the eleventh embodiment. This is a time cheat showing an example (5) in which the power is cut off during the occurrence of the first error in the eleventh embodiment, and is a modification of FIG. 149. It is a time chart which shows example 6 of error notification in an 11th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows example 7 of error notification in an 11th embodiment. 11 is a time chart showing example 8 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment. 11 is a time chart showing example 9 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 7 is an external perspective view showing a slot machine in a twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, it is a figure showing a door key and a door key cylinder, (a) is a front view showing the door cylinder, and (b) is a side view showing a state in which the door key is inserted from the door key insertion slot. FIG. 12 is a front view showing the positional relationship between the door key insertion slot and the door key in the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, (a) is a front view illustrating various dimensions of a door key cylinder, and (b) is a plan view and a side view illustrating dimensions of a power plug. It is a schematic diagram explaining the locking device in a 12th embodiment, and is a front view seen from the inside of the front door toward the outside (player side). FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a state when the cam is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 159 in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a state when the cam is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 159 in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a front view showing a structure in which the door key is locked in that position after opening the front door in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a setting key and a setting key cylinder in the twelfth embodiment, (a) is a side view showing the setting key inserted, and (b) is a side view showing the setting key rotated 90 degrees clockwise. FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the rotation angle of the door key and the setting key and the rotation torque corresponding to the rotation angle in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure showing the production stage in a 13th embodiment. It is a figure showing the types of effects in a 13th embodiment. In the thirteenth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the event name, the number of cuts, and the number of branches of production 01, production 03, and production 14. In the thirteenth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the event name, the number of cuts, and the number of branches of production 15, production 16, and production 17. In the thirteenth embodiment, it is a diagram showing event names, number of cuts, and number of branches of production 18, production 20, production 21, and production 22. In the thirteenth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the event name, the number of cuts, and the number of branches of a performance 23, a performance 24, and a performance 25. It is a front view showing an outline of the configuration including the image display device, reel, stop switch, and speaker in the 14th embodiment, and a table of push order images when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated. It is a figure which shows an example. 12 is a flowchart showing text image display processing by the sub control board in the fourteenth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the text image display processing when the small win A1 condition device (left, center, right correct bell 1) to the small win F2 condition device (right, center, left correct bell 2) are activated during the AT in step S400 of Figure 172. It is a flowchart which shows the text image display process when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated during AT in step S430 of FIG. 172. 13 is a flowchart showing power restoration processing by the sub control board in the fourteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing power-off processing by the sub-control board in the fourteenth embodiment. In the 14th embodiment, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct press order is notified, and when the stop switch is operated in the notified press order (when the press order matches), the press order image is displayed. It is a figure showing an example of a display. This figure shows an example of a push order image displayed when the small win A1 condition device (left, center, right correct bell 1) in the 14th embodiment is activated to notify the correct push order, and a stop switch different from the stop switch that should be operated first is operated first (when the first stop push order does not match). In the 14th embodiment, the correct press order is notified when the small role D1 condition device (middle right left correct answer bell 1) is activated, and a table of press order images when the stop switch is operated in the notified press order (when the press order matches) It is a figure which shows an example. In the 14th embodiment, when the small role D1 condition device (center right left correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified, and when a stop switch different from the stop switch that should be operated second is operated second (second stop FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of displaying a press order image (when the press order does not match). When the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) in the 14th embodiment is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified, the power supply is cut off without any stop switch being operated, and then the power supply is stopped. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the press order image when restarting. This figure shows an example of the display of a push order image when the small win A1 condition device (left, center, right correct bell 1) in the 14th embodiment is activated to notify the correct push order, a stop switch different from the stop switch that should be operated first is operated first (first stop push order mismatch), the power supply is cut off without the second stop operation being performed, and then the power supply is resumed. In the 14th embodiment, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct press order is notified, and after the stop switch is operated in the notified press order (press order matches), the power is turned on before medal payout. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a push order image when the supply of power is cut off and then the supply of power is restarted. This figure shows an example of the display of a push order image when the small prize A1 condition device (left, center, right correct bell 1) in the 14th embodiment is activated to notify the correct push order, the stop switch is operated in the notified push order (push order matches), the power supply is cut off after the medals are paid out, and then the power supply is resumed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the "!" image when the stop operation is performed in the press order of the left middle right when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated in the 14th embodiment. This figure shows an example of the display of the "!" image when a stop operation is performed in the middle, right, left push order when the small win I condition device (watermelon) is activated in the 14th embodiment. Display example of the "!" image when the power supply is cut off without any stop switch being operated when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated in the 14th embodiment, and then the power supply is restarted FIG. In the 14th embodiment, when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated, the power supply is cut off without the second stop operation being performed after the first stop, and then the power supply is restarted. It is a figure showing an example of a display of an image. 13 is a flowchart showing power restoration processing by the sub-control board in the fifteenth embodiment. When the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated in the 15th embodiment, the correct answer pressing order is notified, and after the stop switch that should be operated first is operated first (first stop pressing order matches), FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a press order image when the power supply is cut off without a second stop switch operation (second stop operation) and then the power supply is restarted. When the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated in the 15th embodiment, the correct answer pressing order is notified, and after the stop switch that should be operated first is operated first (first stop pressing order matches), It is a diagram showing a display example of a press order image when the power supply is cut off without the operation of the second stop switch (second stop operation) being performed, and then the power supply is restarted. The push order image displayed at the time is different from that shown in FIG. 191. In the 15th embodiment, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified, and the stop switch that should be operated second is operated second (second stop pressing order matching) FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a press order image when the power supply is cut off without a third stop switch operation (third stop operation) and then the power supply is restarted. In the 15th embodiment, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified, and the stop switch that should be operated second is operated second (second stop pressing order matching) 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a press order image when the power supply is cut off without a third stop switch operation (third stop operation) being performed, and then the power supply is restarted; FIG. The push order image displayed when the power is restored is different from that shown in FIG. 192. In the 15th embodiment, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified, and the stop switch that should be operated second is operated second (second stop pressing order matching) 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a press order image when the power supply is cut off without a third stop switch operation (third stop operation) being performed, and then the power supply is restarted; FIG. The push order image displayed when the power is restored is different from that shown in FIG. 192. In the 15th embodiment, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified, and the stop switch that should be operated second is operated second (second stop pressing order matching) 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a press order image when the power supply is cut off without a third stop switch operation (third stop operation) being performed, and then the power supply is restarted; FIG. The push order image displayed when the power is restored is different from that shown in FIG. 192. This figure shows an example of the push order image displayed when the small prize A1 condition device (left, center, right correct bell 1) in the 15th embodiment is activated to notify the correct push order, and after the stop switch that should be operated second is operated second (matching the second stop push order), the power supply is cut off without the third stop switch being operated (third stop operation), and then the power supply is resumed.The push order image displayed when the power is restored is different from that shown in Figure 195. This figure shows an example of the display of an "!" image when the power supply is cut off without any stop switches being operated during operation of the small win I condition device (Suica) in the 15th embodiment, and then the power supply is resumed. When the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated in the 15th embodiment, after the reel (first stop reel) corresponding to the first operated stop switch is stopped, the second stop switch is operated (second stop operation). FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a "!" image when the power supply is cut off without being performed, and then the power supply is restarted. It is a flowchart showing text image display processing when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) to small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) is activated during AT in the 16th embodiment. In the 16th embodiment, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct answer press order is notified, and when a stop switch different from the stop switch that should be operated first is operated (first stop press FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of display of a press order image (when the order does not match). In the 16th embodiment, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct answer press order is notified, and when a stop switch different from the stop switch that should be operated first is operated (first stop press 200 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display of a press order image (when the order does not match), and the press order image displayed when the first stop press order does not match is different from that shown in FIG. 200. In the 16th embodiment, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified, and when a stop switch different from the stop switch that should be operated second is operated second (second FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of displaying a press order image (when the stop press order does not match). In the 16th embodiment, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified, and the stop switch that is different from the stop switch that should be operated first is operated first (the first stop pressing order This figure shows an example of the display of the press order image when the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch operation (second stop operation) being performed (mismatch), and then the power supply is resumed. be. When the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated in the 16th embodiment, the correct answer pressing order is notified, and a stop switch different from the stop switch that should be operated second is operated second (second stop This is an example of the display of the press order image when the power supply is cut off without the operation of the third stop switch (third stop operation) after pressing the button (press order mismatch), and then the power supply is restarted. It is a diagram. When the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated in the 16th embodiment, the correct answer pressing order is notified, and a stop switch different from the stop switch that should be operated second is operated second (second stop This is an example of the display of the press order image when the power supply is cut off without the operation of the third stop switch (third stop operation) after pressing the button (press order mismatch), and then the power supply is restarted. 204, the push order image displayed when the power is restored is different from FIG. 204. It is a figure showing the pattern arrangement of the reel in a 17th embodiment. It is a diagram showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. (1) in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. (2) in the seventeenth embodiment. A figure showing the winning pattern combinations and payout numbers, etc. (3) in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure showing the pattern combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, etc. (4) in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a figure showing the pattern combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, etc. (5) in the seventeenth embodiment. A figure showing the winning pattern combinations and payout numbers, etc. (6) in the 17th embodiment. A figure showing the winning pattern combinations and payout numbers, etc. (7) in the 17th embodiment. It is a diagram showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. (8) in the seventeenth embodiment. A diagram showing RT transition in the 17th embodiment. A figure showing a non-RT number table (1) in the 17th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a non-RT number table (2) in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (1) of RT1 in 17th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (2) of RT1 in 17th Embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number setting table (1) during RB operation in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the position number table (2) during RB operation in 17th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an accessory condition device and a small role and replay condition device (1) in a 17th embodiment. A diagram showing the small winnings and replay condition device (2) in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure showing a small winning combination and a replay condition device (3) in a 17th embodiment. A diagram showing the small winnings and replay condition device (4) in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure showing a small winning combination and a replay condition device (5) in a 17th embodiment. It is a figure showing a small winning combination and a replay condition device (6) in a 17th embodiment. A diagram showing the small winnings and replay condition device (7) in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure showing a small winning combination and a replay condition device (8) in a 17th embodiment. It is a figure showing production group number in a 17th embodiment. This is a figure explaining the expected value for irregular button press orders and button press orders when the performance group number is "8" in the 17th embodiment. In the seventeenth embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing normal section lever processing, and (b) is a diagram showing initial normal mode lottery. In the seventeenth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of normal modes, and (b) is a diagram showing the numbers of the normal mode lottery for the first game in the advantageous section. FIG. 23A is a diagram showing types of normal modes, and FIG. 23B is a diagram showing transition probabilities of each normal mode, in the seventeenth embodiment. In the 17th embodiment, it is a flowchart showing a "red 7" matching pseudo game performance. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section continuous production in a 17th embodiment. A diagram showing the transition of a difference counter and a hit stop counter in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between a difference counter, a stop counter, and power cutoff in the seventeenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing the flow from power-on to main processing in the seventeenth embodiment. 240 is a flowchart showing error processing in step S513 of FIG. 239. A flowchart showing the complete function calculation process in step S525 of Figure 239. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an image foretelling the operation of a complete function in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a section for notifying the operation of a complete function in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of displaying a complete function operation on the entire surface in the seventeenth embodiment. In the seventeenth embodiment, it is a diagram showing a complete function activation image. In the 17th embodiment, it is a diagram showing a case where the stop counter reaches "19000" during the special game state. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power cutoff in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power cutoff in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power cutoff in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power cutoff in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power cutoff in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power cutoff in the seventeenth embodiment. In the seventeenth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example in which a hopper empty error occurs during automatic payment in a game where the complete function is activated after payout. In the seventeenth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example in which a hopper empty error occurs during automatic payment in a game where the complete function is activated after payout. 12 is a flowchart showing sub-side power restoration processing in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) in an 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows counting related processing in an 18th embodiment.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
“Bet” refers to betting medals (gaming media) in order to play a game. To bet medals, the player either inserts actual medals through the medal slot 47, or operates the bet switch 40 to bet credited (accumulated) medals.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as "storage")" is different from the above-mentioned "bet" and refers to the storage of medals inside the slot machine 10. In this specification, "credit" is used in a meaning that does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "insertion" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Further, the "regular number" refers to the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game where the specified number is "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the number of bets "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the number of bets "1".
Note that for convenience of explanation, the "prescribed number" may be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to something other than the "specified number." For example, in a game with a specified number of "2" or "3", when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the bet number is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Care" means that the player inserts medals from the medal slot 47 (described later).
"Care bet" means that the player bets on medals by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47.
"Care credit" means that the player credits the medals (adds credits) by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47.

“Bet medal” refers to a medal that has been bet on.
"Reserved medals" refer to medals that have been credited (reserved).
A "storage bet" is a bet by which a player operates the bet switch 40 (described later) to place a part or all of the credited medals within the bettable range for the game in order to play the game. It means to do something.
"Automatic bet" refers to automatically betting the number of medals bet in the previous game by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when a replay wins.
Here, the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that it has stopped on the active line; the same applies hereinafter) is referred to as "winning a small winning combination".
On the other hand, the "Regulations Concerning Certification and Type Testing of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules")" states that when a symbol combination corresponding to replay is displayed in a stopped state, a conditional device related to replay is activated. This is interpreted as not "winning".
However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combination), and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is sometimes referred to as "replay winning."
“Settlement” refers to paying out bet medals and/or stored medals to the player. In this embodiment, the payment process is executed when the payment switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" refers to paying out medals to the player based on the winning combination, or paying out medals based on the above-mentioned settlement. When paying out medals to a player based on a winning combination, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)), and paying out. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled so that, for example, "50" medals are credited as a limit number, and medals in excess of "50" are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "granting." Therefore, the "number of payouts" may be referred to as the "number of grants."

The "gaming medium" is a medal in this embodiment, but in the case of an enclosed type (ECO) gaming machine, for example, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the gaming medium. Furthermore, "electronic information" refers to, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the amount of money, and part or all of that electronic information can be used to play a game on a gaming machine. Credit can be placed on a gaming machine as gaming media for playing games.
Note that "gaming media" may also be referred to as "gaming value."

Furthermore, when the game medium is electronic information, "paying out medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the game machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not only mean actually paying out medals from the hopper 35 (described later), but also crediting electronic information for the payout corresponding to the winning combination to the game media credit device ( It also includes processing for adding (addition).

When the game progresses from "N-1" game, "N" game, "N+1" game, etc. ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When the game is a game number "N", the game with the game number is referred to as the "current game". In addition, the "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, a numerical value with "(B)" appended to the end of the number (especially 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, numbers with "(H)", "H", or "h" appended to the end of the numbers mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numerical value that indicates "16" in decimal is written as "00010000 (B)" in binary, and "10 (H)", "10H", or "10h" in hexadecimal. . Further, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is written as "16 (D)" as necessary.
However, if it is clear whether it is a binary number, decimal number, or hexadecimal number, "(B)", "(D)", "(H)", "H" or "h" respectively. The trailing symbol may be omitted.

In addition, the probability that a desired symbol can be stopped on the active line from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving pieces) rate (PB).
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (with an operation timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on an active line within the range of the maximum number of moving pieces), the target symbol will be stopped on an active line (an effective timing). PB≠1 means that it is not possible to pull the ball up to the line.
On the other hand, no matter what position the reels 31 are at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), it is possible to always stop (draw) the target symbol on the active line. It is called "PB=1".

Further, the "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on an active line).
Furthermore, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that has a payout or has a large payout amount, an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that transitions (promotes) to an advantageous RT, or an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that does not transition (fall) to an unfavorable RT, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 produces an advantageous/disadvantageous game result (symbol combination that stops on a winning line). The "advantageous operation mode" is also called the correct operation mode or the correct push order.

"Games in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" include, for example, games in which multiple types of small winning combinations (bells) with different payout numbers are won (so-called "push order bells"). ), this corresponds to the case where the type of winning small winning combination (bell) differs (the number of payouts differs) depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Also, for example, in a game in which multiple types of replays are won (double replay wins, so-called "push order replay" games), RT changes depending on the type of winning replay.

The "instruction function" means a function that instructs the player how to operate the stop switch 42. The instruction function is, in principle, a function for instructing the player on an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
Note that "display" means to visually show the contents of the "instruction", and "notification" means to notify the player of the contents of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function."

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "activation of the instruction function," but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "instruction function activation." It may also be referred to as "operation".
For example, if the order of pressing the bell is 6 selections, the payout when the bell is won will be 1, 3, 4, 10, or missed (non-winning) depending on the order of pressing. Assume that
Here, notifying the pressing order for winning a 10-card combination is notifying an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "operation of an instruction function."
On the other hand, notifying the pressing order for winning a 1-card, 3-card, or 4-card winning combination may be referred to as "notification of an advantageous operation mode (activation of an instruction function)" or "advantageous operation mode It does not have to be "notice of".

The pressing order for winning a 4-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of payouts is "4" for the number of bets "3", and the difference in the number of coins for the game is "+1", this is an operation mode that increases the difference in number of coins, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the pressing order for winning a 3-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "3", and the difference number is maintained as it is (does not decrease the difference number), this is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation state.

Furthermore, similarly, the pressing order for winning a 1-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. Furthermore, this is an operation mode in which the number of payouts is "1" for the number of bets "3", reducing the difference in the number of coins. However, since it can be said to be an operating mode that does not miss out on winnings, it may not be said to be a disadvantageous operating mode.

In this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated when the push order bell is won, the operation mode (correct answer push order) in which the combination with the largest number of payouts wins is notified.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) during the advantageous section approaches the upper limit (2400 (D)), but there is still room in the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value described later). It is conceivable that when the push order bell is won, the push order for winning a 3-card winning combination or a 4-card winning combination is notified as described above, and the difference counter value is controlled so as to maintain the current status.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one prescribed number. For example, assume that the specified number of instruction functions to be activated is set to "3". In this case, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3" during AT, when the game is started with a bet number of "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the bet number "2", the instruction function cannot be activated even if the push order bell is won.

The "gaming section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section." In addition, the No. 5.9 machine had a "waiting section" (a gaming section that won the advantageous section lottery but has not yet transitioned to the advantageous section), but under the current No. 6 machine rules, the "waiting section" etc. is not provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and game sections other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
"Normal section" refers to signals related to the instruction function, specifically the press order instruction number and winning/replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct press order), which will be described later, on the peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80). ), and refers to a game period that does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of winning combinations, it is also possible to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section (by lottery, etc.).

In the normal section, the instruction function must not be activated, so the push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function Since the signal related to this is not transmitted to the peripheral board, the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 cannot display (notify) an advantageous operation mode.

On the other hand, the "advantageous zone" is a play zone that has the capability related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated), and specifically refers to a play zone in which, when the instruction function is activated, a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when push order instruction information is displayed so that the instruction content (the operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified on the main control board 60. In other words, the advantageous zone is a play zone in which the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a play zone in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output effects that contradict the instructions given by the main control board 60 or the signals related to the instruction functions that it has received.

Moreover, even if the advantageous section is a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, there is no need to activate the instruction function.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may be always operated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification gaming state) is a gaming state in which the operating mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game where the gaming result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operating mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, AT is always during the advantageous section and is never performed during the non-advantageous section.

Further, in a game where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantage/disadvantage in the game result, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%), but the AT may notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 at all times (at 100%), In order to keep the game within the range defined by the rules, it is conceivable not to notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even if the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
For example, if the difference counter approaches the upper limit value during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 will not be notified temporarily in order to prolong the life of AT. (not activating the instruction function) is also conceivable.

The relationship between the advantageous zone and the AT can be set in various ways. For example, the first setting is "advantageous zone = AT". In this case, winning the advantageous zone and winning the AT are equivalent. The AT starts from the first play in the advantageous zone. The AT ends when the advantageous zone ends.

A second method is to set "AT≠advantageous section".
In this case, simply moving to an advantageous section will not satisfy the AT start (execution) conditions, and on the condition that it is in an advantageous section, whether or not to execute AT is determined by lottery etc. When it is decided to execute the AT, the AT may be executed until a predetermined termination condition for the AT is satisfied. In addition, if it is non-AT when moving to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to the normal section, omen, CZ (chance zone (period where it is easy to win AT)), etc.

When transitioning to a precursor after transitioning to an advantageous section, the transition may be made to the actual precursor, and after a predetermined number of games of the actual precursor are completed, the transition may be made to AT. Alternatively, at the time of transition to an advantageous section or after a transition to an advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery whether to use a real omen or a false omen, and if it is determined to be a real omen, the transition to AT may be made after the main omen ends. . Further, when it is determined that the false sign is false, the advantageous zone may be maintained after the false sign ends, or the advantageous zone may be shifted to the normal zone.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated. Alternatively, if the AT ends but the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not met, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

Further, when starting the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, a lottery etc. related to the advantageous section is not executed.
Furthermore, when starting the advantageous section, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, it is determined (by lottery, etc.) whether to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section. This can be mentioned.
Furthermore, if a predetermined end condition is set for an advantageous section, and the predetermined end condition for an advantageous section is met, even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or the remaining number of games in AT) is reached, at that point One example is to end the advantageous section at .

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous section means that the difference counter value described below exceeds "2400 (D)" or that the advantageous section clear counter (remaining number of games in the advantageous section) described below is " 0". When any of these conditions is met, it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, the AT ends at the same time as the advantageous section ends.

In the advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as a "section indicator") 77, which will be described later, is turned on. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at all times during the advantageous section, or may be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" includes, for example, when the instruction function is activated in a gaming state in which the game is in an advantageous section and the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1". Note that once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous section.

In addition, "Section Sim (simulation) ball payout rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even when winning the "PB ≠ 1" combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed). If there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the push order bell is won, the high bell that will give the maximum payout) will be selected. This is the ball payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. In calculating the section Sim ball payout rate, the balls (number of payouts) due to accessory actions (1BB action, etc.) are not included. In addition, in a game that won a replay, if the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts will be counted as "0", and in a replay based on a winning replay (the next game of the game that won a replay), the number of bets will be counted as "0". It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts as "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for games that win replays and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "gaming state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds 1" includes RT and main game states in which the section Sim ball payout rate is set to exceed "1."
Here, examples of RTs in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" include RTs with a high replay winning probability.
Furthermore, assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback sections, etc. are usually provided as the main game state, the main game state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1" is AT.

When ending the advantageous section, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous section, for example, during the game end check process described later, or during the game start setting process for the next game of the last game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. do. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing by executing an initialization process for the advantageous section display LED flag, which will be described later.

Examples of "processing related to favorable zones" include the following processing.
1) Drawing lots for (transition to) advantageous zones 2) Updating (subtracting, clearing) the advantageous zone clear counter
3) Update the difference counter (calculate, clear)
4) Updating the advantageous zone type flag 5) Controlling the advantageous zone display LED 77 (updating the advantageous zone display LED flag)

In addition, the "processing related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (a specification that ends the AT when the remaining number of games becomes "0"), the AT game number counter is updated (subtracted, added, cleared)
4) In the case of a difference number management type AT (a specification that ends the AT when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), update the AT difference number counter (subtract, add, clear)

According to the current rules, it is stipulated that both the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one gaming state (RT) in one prescribed number, except for the following. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the specified number is "3", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function can be executed, and when the specified number is "2", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed. And so.
However, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to update the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, regardless of the specified number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIG. 26, which will be described later), in other words, in the game when the conditional device is not activated, It is determined that such processing (advantageous section transition lottery) will not be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process related to the advantageous section may be executed even if the lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result is non-winning, if the probability of non-winning is more than a predetermined value (when the probability is not extremely low; for example, "1/17500" or more), the instruction function is applied. The process (AT lottery process) is made executable.

Furthermore, if the result of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone will be entered from the next game. Therefore, in a game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is executed and the advantageous zone is won, the notification of the correct button press order (processing related to the instruction function) cannot be executed.
However, it is acceptable to perform the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific role lottery result is obtained, it may be determined to be an advantageous zone and an AT (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also referred to as a "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display") 74 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and has a two-digit identification segment (which of the following five items is displayed). (LED for displaying the calculated ratio using a predetermined symbol, etc.) and a two-digit ratio segment (LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either advantageous section ratio (cumulative total) (7U.) or designated accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous role ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Accessory ratio (cumulative total) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative total), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the accessory ratio (cumulative total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting is continued until the number of games has reached at least "175,000". When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" the number of games played, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a flashing display, and when it is greater than "175,000" the number of games, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a lighting display. Even after the total number of games exceeds "175,000", the total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets, where one set is "400" times.

The "advantageous section ratio" refers to the ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section to all gaming sections (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section between them is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Further, the "instruction-inclusive accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts. In addition, in a slot machine that is not equipped with an accessory, the "instruction included accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included accessory counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function was activated" is based on the operation of the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order displayed by the activation of the instruction function, for example, when 10 bells are won, "10" is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.
On the other hand, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is pressed in a different order from the displayed order and one bell is won, for example, "1" will be displayed on the instruction-included accessory counter. is added.
Similarly, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 was pressed in a different order from the displayed pressing order, the instruction-included accessory counter is not added to. In other words, the count value from the previous game remains the same.

In addition, when winning the common bell during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when winning the push order bell, and the instruction function is activated in the same way as when winning the push order bell. There are also cases where it is not activated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts for the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts will be added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct pressing order using images or sounds.

In addition, as special bonuses (accessories), BB (first type accessory continuous operation device; first type big bonus), RB (first type special accessory; regular bonus), and MB (second type accessory continuous operation device) Actuating device; Type 2 Big Bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is executed continuously. Furthermore, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds a predetermined number, the RB game ends. Further, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds a predetermined number, the BB game ends.

The MB is a device that can continuously operate the CB (second type special role). In other words, the CB game is executed continuously during the MB game. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the role selection means 61, all minor roles are won in duplicate, and for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31), the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Furthermore, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds a predetermined number, the MB game ends.

Furthermore, when a special prize is won, the winning information of the special prize is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special prize stops on the active line.
A game in which a special role has not been won is called a "non-internal" game, and a game in which a special role has been won but the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role has not stopped on the active line, that is, a special role has been won. A game in which information is carried over is called "internal play."

Furthermore, when BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line (BB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the BB game starts from the next game. During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases as the RB game is executed continuously. When the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds a predetermined number, the BB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the BB game.

Furthermore, if the BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop on the active line, the winning information on the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which BB winning information is carried over is called "BB internal".
Note that the timing of transition to the inside of the BB can be set as appropriate. For example, in the game in which the BB was won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the BB, or in the game in which the BB was won, the reels were not moved to the inside of the BB, and in the next game, the reels 31 were moved to the inside of the BB. You may move it inside.

Furthermore, when RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on the active line (RB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the RB game starts from the next game. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small prize increases. When the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds a predetermined number, the RB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the RB game.

Furthermore, if the RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on a winning line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on a winning line. The game state in which the winning information of the RB is carried over is called "inside RB".
The timing of the transition into the RB can be set appropriately, similar to the timing of the transition into the BB. For example, the transition into the RB may be made after all the reels 31 have stopped in the game in which the RB has been won, or the transition into the RB may not be made in the game in which the RB has been won, but may be made in the next game.

Furthermore, if the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line (MB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the MB game will start from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is executed continuously. When the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds a predetermined number, the MB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the MB game.
Furthermore, if the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which MB winning information is carried over is called "MB internal".

"RT" means that the type (number) of winning combinations to be drawn and the winning probability are unique to the lottery, and "RT transition" means a transition from one RT to another RT. This means that the winning probability of at least one replay to be drawn will vary.
Therefore, the type of replay and the probability of winning for one RT are values specific to that RT, and the types of replay and the probability of winning for one RT will never be the same. do not have. However, it is acceptable for one RT and another RT to have the same total replay winning probability.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, in this specification, "RT" includes non-RT.

The "continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special bonus (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation relative to the total number of payouts."
For example, if the total number of payouts in the number of games played is ``6000'' is ``2000 pieces'', and the number of payouts when the ``Class 1 special bonus (RB)'' is activated is ``500 pieces'', then The ratio (6000 games) is 25 (%).

In addition, the "role ratio" refers to the ratio of the payout number when the role is activated to the total payout number. Here, "role" includes the above-mentioned first-class special role, as well as the second-class special role (CB), MB (also called 2BB. Second-class role continuous operation device. CB operates continuously.), and SB (single bonus).
In addition, in gaming machines that do not have the functions corresponding to the above five items, the ratio segment will be displayed as "--".
For example, if the reel is not equipped with an "RB (first type special reel)," there is no continuous reel ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is displayed as "--."
As described above, the management information display LED 74 displays five types of ratios, but displays a test pattern at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Further, the rules stipulate that the advantageous section ratio and the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio should be 70% or less. Furthermore, it is stated that the ratio of accessories should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the ratio of consecutive accessories should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Note that a gaming machine with a specification in which the advantageous section ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7U" type, and a gaming machine with a specification in which the instruction-included accessory ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7P" type. A gaming machine with an advantageous section is either of the "7U" type or the "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of advantageous sections to all game sections must be 70% or less, but in the "7P" type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is It is sufficient to make it 70% or less of the number of payouts, and for example, the entire period or most of the game period may be an advantageous period.

For example, when moving to a non-advantageous section, the settings should be set so that there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous section lottery, and the setting should be set so that the probability of winning the advantageous section lottery is approximately 100% (for example, about 98%). Alternatively, it may be set to have a high probability (for example, 70%) of winning the advantageous section lottery.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery) by referring to the setting value itself, but the "7P" type can perform processing related to the instruction function by referring to the setting value itself. Is possible.

Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to a pachinko game machine as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, as in the case of a slot machine (player type gaming machine). Then, the base value in real time (during measurement) for each ``60,000'' out balls (``base value'' indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls) and the ``60,000 out balls''. ” The base values of the first, second, and third base values are displayed sequentially for each item. For example, the real-time base value identification segment is displayed as "bL.", the previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b1.", and the two previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b2." and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko gaming machines.

<First embodiment>
In the first embodiment, in a game in which multiple types of small winning combinations (bells) with different payout numbers are won repeatedly (a game in which the so-called "push order bell" is won), a prize is won depending on the operation mode (press order) of the stop switch 42. This is a slot machine in which the game result (number of coins paid) is advantageous/disadvantageous due to different types of small winning combinations (symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on active lines).
The first embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment.
Typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10 include a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (this does not mean that it includes only those shown in FIG. 1).

1, a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection part to which signals from the operation switches and the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection part to which signals are transmitted to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, input peripheral devices are represented by arrows pointing from the signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 50, and output peripheral devices are represented by arrows pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game, etc.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for playing the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC with a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. The controller controls the drive and pays out when winning a prize.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and registers is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being installed inside the MPU.
Note that an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, a medal inserted through a medal insertion port 47 is sent to the inside of a medal selector.
As shown in Figure 1, the medal selector is provided with a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and a deposit sensor 44 (a pair of deposit sensors 44a and 44b) (but is not limited to these), which are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
A medal inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is configured to be detected first by the passage sensor 46 .

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is for allowing/disallowing the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, it forms a medal passageway through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are returned from the payout opening. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector (an opening leading to the medal return port) to form a medal passage for guiding the medals to the hopper 35 side. and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 disables the insertion of medals during the game (from when the reels 31 start rotating until all the reels 31 stop and when a winning combination ends the payout corresponding to the winning combination). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when no game is being played.

Inside the medal selector, a throw-in sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the throw-in sensor 44 is made up of a pair of throw-in sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance apart, and is configured so that a medal is detected by one throw-in sensor 44a and then detected by the other throw-in sensor 44b a predetermined time later. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of throw-in sensors 44 turn on/off, it is determined whether the correct medal has been inserted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 also includes a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switches 42, and operation switches operated by the player. A settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply, "switch")" is used to turn on/off an electric signal based on the operation of the operating body by the player (operator) (receiving external force). It refers to a device (including an electric circuit and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of the operating body operated by the player.

When the operating switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operating switch is in the off state). Then, when a player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body thereof), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Note that, contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the operation switch is in the on state. You may.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is lever-shaped (therefore also referred to as a "start lever (switch) 41"), and includes a bet switch 40, a stop switch 42, and a settlement switch. The operating body 43 has a push button shape (therefore, it is also referred to as a "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", and "settlement button (switch) 43").

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, for example, and when the operation of the operation switch is not permitted, the LED of the operation switch emits red light, for example, to indicate to the player the permitted/not permitted state of the operation switch.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the stop switches 42 can be operated, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that they can be operated. Shown below. When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. Thereafter, the remaining stop switches 42 become operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 that has been controlled to stop ends and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 is turned off. Later. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. Although the LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not been operated yet are still emitting red light, they are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. This embodiment includes a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal, and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (maximum number, specified number).
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

The specified number is determined in advance depending on, for example, when the reel is inactive/active. Specifically, it is set to three medals when the reel is inactive, when SB is active, and when 1BB is active, and two medals when 2BB is active. Operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice allows two medals to be inserted, and operating it three times allows three medals to be inserted. Also, when the specified number is three medals, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows three medals to be inserted at once, and when the specified number is two medals, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows two medals to be inserted at once. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when less than the specified number has already been bet, bet processing is performed so that the number of medals bet is three.

Further, the start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player to stop the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals bet and/or stored (credit) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Note that in reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other with a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (relay board, etc.). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquisition number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

In addition, the acquired number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number obtained by the player) when winning a winning combination, and, like the credit number display LED 76, it is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit. .
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to turn off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but when an error occurs, it also functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (indicates advantageous push order) in a game in which the push order is notified during the AT. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquisition number, error content, and push order instruction information. However, it is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED for displaying push order instruction information.
During the AT, notification of advantageous button pressing sequences is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 and the like of the symbol display device.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, a motor 32 that drives each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 that detects the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65, which will be described later.
Here, the reel 31 consists of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.
Note that the left reel 31 may be referred to as the first reel 31, the middle reel 31 may be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 may be referred to as the third reel 31.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and has a reel tape attached to its outer periphery on which a number of types of symbols (symbols constituting symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed.
Each reel 31 is provided with one index (it may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, etc. Each index is detected by a reel sensor 33. A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When an index detects (breaks) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment the index is detected can be detected. Furthermore, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, how many pulses should the (stepping) motor 32 be driven to stop the symbol at the number of symbols ahead, counting from the symbol on the reference position, on the effective line? It becomes possible to identify whether the

Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal dispensing device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when dispensing medals from the hopper 35 from a dispensing port, and a dispensing motor 36 for detecting medals dispensed from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cleaned and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal input port 47 are stored in the hopper 35.
In this embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance apart. Then, when a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member is moved by the medal. The dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by movement of a predetermined moving member. Based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within a predetermined time range, it is determined whether the medals are correctly paid out.

For example, if it is not detected that the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an on signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet) or inserts medals from the medal slot 47 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a prescribed number of medals for the game being bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, it performs a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and drives and controls all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31. Control it to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, the player presses a stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to that stop switch 42, and performs stop control of the reel 31 related to that motor 32 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the role selection means 61 (the result determined by the internal selection means).

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line (when the winning combination is achieved), medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role selection means 61 selects (determines, selects) the winning number. Here, the "selection of the winning number by the role selection means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the Entertainment and Amusement Act Regulations (regulations on the certification of gaming machines and the inspection of models, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as the "Regulations"). The result of the selection by the role selection means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the Regulations. Therefore, the role selection means 61 is also referred to as the "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the Regulations.
When the winning number is determined by the role selection means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the role condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition devices and the role condition devices that are operable in the game are determined. For this reason, the role selection means 61 is also called a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning role determination (lottery or selection) means, etc.

The winning lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means for lottery (hardware random numbers, etc.), a random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number extracting means based on the random number extracted by the random number extracting means. and winning number determining means for determining the winning number.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal notation). The random number is a random number that continues counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle by a counter that counts once every 200n (nano) seconds, for example, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number is Continue counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table to be described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When one of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag for that winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that there are two cases of winning a winning combination: a case where there is only one winning combination (single winning) and a case where there are multiple winning combinations (multiple winning).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the winning combination lottery means 61 (when a push order bell or a push order replay is won). decision).
The “push order” of the press order instruction numbers selected here means a press order (correct press order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when a push order bell is won, it refers to the push order (correct answer push order) that makes the higher bell win the prize. In addition, when a replay double win occurs, it refers to the push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or the push order that does not allow the RT to fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique push order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-mentioned obtained number display LED 78 with push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically "=*"("*"=1, 2, . . .) information is displayed. In this manner, the function of displaying push order instruction information when a conditional device having an advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an instruction function.
In addition, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 controls the sub control board at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it displays an image of the correct pressing order on the image display device 23.

Note that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous interval (AT). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. Note that in the normal section, it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number.

The performance group number selection means 64 is for selecting the performance group number corresponding to the winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Here, the performance group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the game. The number is sent to the sub control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs a performance related to the winning combination based on the received performance group number. The effect group number, unlike the above-mentioned push order instruction number, is selected every game and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

Further, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning numbers of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the performance group number for each game, it is possible to output the performance based on the received performance group number. However, even if the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the presentation group number, so the sub-control board 80 will not notify the correct press order based on the presentation group number. . On the other hand, during AT, when a push order bell or a push order replay is won, a push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Further, after the winning numbers are determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the winning flag in the current game, and generates a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the winning flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is The drive is controlled so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

For example, in a game where at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 enables the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (the winning flag is on) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are stopped so as to be stopped on the line, and the reels 31 are stopped so as not to stop symbol combinations corresponding to combinations other than winning combinations (winning flags are turned off) on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of the stopping control of the reel 31" means within the range of the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)).
In this embodiment, the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed of approximately 80 rotations per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 are stopped is set to within 190 ms, except for a specific reel 31 (for example, the center reel 31) during MB operation. As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to four symbols, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. As a result, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of stop control of the reels 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined active line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined active line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol of the combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the predetermined active line, the reels 31 will be stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is controlled to be stopped on a predetermined valid line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number will stop on the active line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so that symbol combinations of winning combinations that do not correspond to the winning numbers are not stopped on the active line (kick-off stop control).
Furthermore, in a game where multiple winning combinations are won (for example, when the push order bell is won), the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed and the timing at which the stop switches 42 are operated. According to a predetermined priority order, control is performed to stop the drawing of symbols related to the most prioritized winning combination.

The winning determination means 66 determines, when the reels 31 are stopped, whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 that has stopped on the active line is a symbol combination that corresponds to any winning combination.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the active line. Specifically, from the condition device activated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination that will stop on the active line before the reel 31 actually stops is determined in advance. Or, after the reels 31 have stopped, the symbol combinations that have stopped on the active line are determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the production output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, press order instruction number (only when AT is in progress and a winning number with the correct press order is won). , performance group number, RT (game status) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on winning combinations, etc.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and while waiting for the game.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) unidirectionally communicates with the sub-control board 80 through parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) necessary for output.
Note that the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used together.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the following performance peripheral devices such as the performance lamps 21 as shown in Fig. 1 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the performance peripheral devices are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data etc. that is acquired when the sub-CPU 85 controls the performance.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data, such as those used when conducting lotteries related to performance, as performance data.

The effect lamps 21 are made of, for example, LEDs, and are lit in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. Note that the production lamp 21 includes a back lamp that is placed on the inner circumference side of each reel 31 and illuminates the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols visible from the display window) from behind. They include a fluorescent light that illuminates the symbols on the reels 31 from above, a frame lamp that is placed in front of the front door of the slot machine 10, and that flashes when a winning combination is won.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when predetermined conditions are met in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effect images during the game (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game, etc.). It displays game information (the number of games played and the number of coins won when the accessory is activated or during the advantageous period (AT), etc.).

In this embodiment, the "special prize (accessory object)" includes "1BB (first-class accessory continuous operating device; first-class big bonus)" and "RB (first-class special accessory; regular bonus)". Be prepared. Therefore, the "special game" includes the "1BB game" and the "RB game."
Furthermore, in this embodiment, "1BB" includes two types: "1BB-A" and "1BB-B". Hereinafter, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B" will be collectively referred to as "1BB."

During the 1BB game, the RB game is executed continuously.
In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to RB is not set. Therefore, during the 1BB game, the RB game is executed continuously without the symbol combinations corresponding to the RB being stopped and displayed.

In addition, during the RB game, each game, a "1-card winning combination ALL" or "small winning combination ALL" is won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. As a result, during the RB game, that is, during the 1BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination is higher than during the non-internal and 1BB internal.
Furthermore, during the RB game, the specified number (the number of medals bet with which you can start the game) becomes "3", and you win "1-card role ALL" with a probability of "60535/65536", and "1 ” medals will be paid out. Therefore, during the RB game, that is, during the 1BB game, the player's medals decrease.
Further, the RB game ends when the game is played "2" times, when there are "2" wins, or when the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied. That is, the termination condition for the RB game is set to be that the game has been played "2" times, that there has been a prize winning "2" times, or that the termination condition for the 1BB game is satisfied.

Further, the 1BB game continues until the cumulative number of acquired medals (number of medals paid out, number given) exceeds "210", and ends when the cumulative number of acquired medals exceeds "210". That is, the termination condition for the 1BB game is set that the cumulative number of acquired medals exceeds "210".
Then, when the RB game ends, if the 1BB game ending condition is not satisfied, the RB game is executed again. In this way, during the 1BB game, the RB game is executed continuously.
Further, when the RB game ends, if the 1BB game ending condition is satisfied, the 1BB game ends and the game moves to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, when the 1BB game termination condition is satisfied during the RB game, the RB game is terminated, the 1BB game is terminated, and the game shifts to non-internal mode.

Further, the winning combination lottery means 61 determines the "winning number" by lottery. Therefore, the winning number lottery means 61 is also referred to as "winning number lottery (determination, selection) means". Furthermore, once the winning number is determined, a "conditional device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. Then, when a conditional device number is generated, the conditional device corresponding to the conditional device number is activated, and the symbol combination of the winning combination corresponding to the activated conditional device can be stopped and displayed on the active line (winning the winning combination).

Moreover, the "condition device number" includes the "accessory condition device number" and the "minor role and replay condition device number."
Furthermore, the "accessory condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a special winning combination (accessory object), and in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, which will be described later, includes "1" to "2". .
Furthermore, the "minor prize and replay condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a minor prize or replay, and in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 described later, "1" to "18" are used. Equipped with.

Furthermore, when a special winning combination is won, the accessory condition device corresponding to the winning of the special winning combination becomes operable. For example, if you win 1BB, the 1BB condition device becomes operational.
Furthermore, when a small winning combination is won, a small winning combination condition device corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination becomes operable, and when a replay is won, a replay condition device corresponding to the winning of the replay becomes operable. For example, if the small winning combination A1 is won, the small winning combination A1 condition device becomes operable.

In addition, if you win a special role whose winning information can be carried over to the next game, the winning of that special role will continue until the symbol combination corresponding to that special role is stopped and displayed on the active line (the special role wins). Carry the information over to your next game.
Furthermore, when a special winning combination is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination is not displayed on the active line, it is called "internal winning". In other words, a game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over is referred to as "internal winning".

In contrast, a game in which the winning information of a special role that can be carried over to the next game or later is not won is called a "non-internal game". In other words, a game in which the winning information of a special role is not carried over is called a "non-internal game".
In this embodiment, the game in which a special role is won is included in the "non-internal" category, but the game in which a special role is won may also be included in the "internal" category.
"1BB" is a special role that allows the winning information to be carried over to the next game or later, and when "1BB" is won but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the winning line, it is called "inside 1BB."

Further, the "special game" is also referred to as "accessory object operation". For example, "1BB game" is also referred to as "1BB operation", and "RB game" is also referred to as "RB operation".
Furthermore, "when the accessory is not activated" includes a state where the accessory condition device is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to the activated accessory condition device is not stopped and displayed on the activated line.
For example, when the "1BB condition device" is not activated, or when the "1BB condition device" is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed on the active line, the "1BB not activated" ”. In other words, when "1BB" has not been won, or when "1BB" has been won but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not stopped and displayed on the active line (while inside 1BB), "1BB not activated""time".

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, "1BB" includes two types, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B", and "accessory condition device" includes "1BB-A condition device" and "1BB-A condition device". It is equipped with two types of "1BB-B condition devices".
Furthermore, the winning combination for the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and the winning combination for the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B".

Furthermore, in the "1BB-A condition device", the lottery is held only when 2 medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2") and when 3 medals are inserted (when the medal bet is "2") during non-internal mode. When the number is "3"), no lottery is held. That is, in non-internal mode, the "1BB-A condition device" becomes a lottery target when two medals are inserted, but it is not a lottery target when three medals are inserted.
On the other hand, in the "1BB-B condition device", the lottery is held only when 3 medals are inserted (when the bet number of medals is "3") and when 2 medals are inserted (medals When the number of bets is "2"), no lottery is held. That is, in non-internal mode, the "1BB-B condition device" becomes a lottery target when three medals are inserted, but it is not a lottery target when two medals are inserted.

Further, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (winning is possible).
Furthermore, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is stopped and displayed on the active line, it will become a "1BB-A winning" and no medals will be paid out in this game, but next time. Shift from game to "1BB-A game" (when 1BB-A is activated).
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop and display on the active line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will shift to "1BB-A inside".
Then, in "1BB-A inside", when two medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (winning possible), but "1BB-A inside" When three medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Furthermore, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (a prize can be won).
Furthermore, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is stopped and displayed on the active line, it will become a "1BB-B winning" and no medals will be paid out in this game, but next time. The game shifts to "1BB-B game" (when 1BB-B is activated).
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the next game will shift to "1BB-B inside".
Then, in "1BB-B inside", when 3 medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (winning possible), but "1BB-B inside" When two medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Further, the "setting value" relates to the player's advantage, and in this embodiment, although not shown, there are six stages, setting 1 to setting 6. The higher the set value is, the higher the player's advantage becomes.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off, and the power is turned on in this state, a transition is made to a setting change state (setting change mode) in which the set value can be changed. At this time, initialization processing (RWM clear processing) for initializing a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is executed.
Further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the setting value cannot be changed, but the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed is entered.

In addition, in this embodiment, the starting condition for the "advantageous section" is that the winning number "1" (small role A1 condition device) to winning number "18" (replay condition This is set to indicate that you have won (determined) one of the following devices.
That is, in the non-advantageous section, if one of the winning numbers "1" (small role A1 condition device) to winning number "18" (replay condition device) is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the game shifts to the advantageous period. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the conditions for ending the "advantageous section" are that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" and that the advantageous section clear counter (remaining number of games in the advantageous section) reaches "0". It is set to indicate that the game has been played, or that the notification game (AT) has ended.
In other words, when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous section exceeds "2400", the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches "1500", or the notification game (AT) ends, the advantageous section ends and the non-advantageous section ends. to move to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning one of the winning numbers "1" (small role A1 condition device) to winning number "18" (replay condition device) in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 during non-internal play. is "50536/65536".
Therefore, even if the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section, after that, in the "1" game to "2" game, the winning number "1" (small role A1 condition device) to the winning number "18" (replay If you win one of the conditions (condition device), you will move to the advantageous section.

In addition, in this embodiment, when one of the winning numbers "13" (small role G condition device) to winning number "15" (small role I condition device) is won (determined) in the lottery by the role lottery means 61. Then, AT lottery is executed. “Small role G condition device” to “Small role I condition device” have a relatively low probability of activation (winning), and are called “rare role” or “rare minor role”. . The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "Small role G condition device" to "Small role I condition device" are activated is set to ``10''%.
Furthermore, if you win the AT lottery, you will be given the right to play the notification game. Then, when the player has the right to execute the notification game and the conditions for starting the notification game are met, the notification game is started.

Further, in this embodiment, the initial value of the number of games of the notification game is set to "50" games. When the right to execute the notification game is granted and the conditions for starting the notification game are satisfied, the notification game is executed for "50" games.
Furthermore, in the case where the user already has the right to execute the notification game, when winning the AT lottery, the number of rights to execute the notification game is added (added). For example, if you have "2" rights to execute the notification game, you can execute the notification game for "(50 games + 50 games =) 100 games".

Furthermore, when the AT lottery is won during execution of the notification game, the remaining number of games of the notification game is added (added). For example, when the AT lottery is won when the number of remaining games in the notification game is "20" games, the remaining number of games in the notification game is "(20 games + 50 games =) 70 games".
Further, the operation of the instruction function and the presentation suggesting the push order can be executed only during the advantageous section, and the operation of the instruction function and the presentation suggesting the push order cannot be executed during the non-advantageous section. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated and the push order suggestion effect is performed, it is assumed that the area is advantageous.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, in this embodiment, each reel 31 consists of "20" pieces. That is, each reel 31 has the number of symbols "20".
Further, in FIG. 2, the symbol numbers are also illustrated. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with symbol number "0" is "Blue 7".

Further, in this embodiment, the time from the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops is set within "190" ms. As a result, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops becomes "4" symbols.
For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the "Replay" numbered "1" on the left reel 31 passes the active line, the symbol will be moved up to "4" from the concerned symbol, and the symbol will move to "5". It is possible to stop on the valid line up to the number "Red 7".
Therefore, by arranging ``4'' specific symbols at ``5'' symbol intervals on one reel 31, the specific symbols can always be stopped on the active line no matter when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replay" is placed at numbers "1", "6", "11", and "16". That is, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with "5" symbol intervals and "4" symbols. Therefore, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated on the left reel 31, the "replay" can always be stopped on the active line.
In this way, a symbol arrangement that can always stop the target symbol on the active line no matter at what timing the stop switch 42 is operated is referred to as a "PB=1" arrangement.
In contrast, the symbol arrangement is "PB≠1" where the target symbol cannot be stopped on the active line unless the stop switch 42 is operated at an appropriate timing (within the maximum number of symbols moved from the active line). It is called.

On the left reel 31, in addition to "Replay", "Bell" and "Watermelon" are also arranged as "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the left reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", and "Watermelon" are consecutively (in order) arranged in "4" positions. Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", and "Watermelon" are consecutively arranged at numbers "1" to "3", consecutively arranged at numbers "6" to "8", consecutively arranged at numbers "11" to "13", and consecutively arranged at numbers "16" to "18".

In addition, on the left reel 31, the "blue 7" at number "0", the "red 7" at number "5", the "black BAR" at number "10", and the "white BAR" at number "15" combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR", or "white BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on an active line.

Similarly, on the left reel 31, the "cherries" numbered "4", "9" and "14", and the "blank" numbered "19" are "PB = 1" with the sum of these "4" symbols. It is the arrangement. Therefore, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "cherry" or "blank" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line.

In addition, on the left reel 31, "Cherry/Blank" is placed on "Watermelon", "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is placed on "Cherry/Blank", and "Blue 7 ``Replay'' is placed above ``/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR''. That is, on the left reel 31, "Cherry/Blank" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged between "Watermelon" and "Replay".
As a result, on the left reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry/Blank" are displayed consecutively at "4" locations ( (in order). Specifically, on the left reel 31, “Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR”, “Replay”, “Bell”, “Watermelon” and “Cherry/Blank” are numbered “0” to “4”. ” are placed consecutively (in order), “5” to “9” are also placed consecutively, “10” to “14” are placed consecutively, and “15” is placed consecutively (in order). ~It is also placed consecutively at number "19".

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", and "Watermelon" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", and "Watermelon" are consecutively arranged at "4" locations. Specifically, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay" and "Watermelon" are consecutively arranged in numbers "0" to "3", and "5" to "8". '', consecutively placed in numbers ``10'' to ``13'', and consecutively placed in numbers ``15'' to ``18''.

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, the “Blue 7” at number “4”, the “Red 7” at number “9”, the “black BAR” at number “14”, and the “white BAR” at number “19” are The total number of "4" symbols is "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, no matter at what timing the middle stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Black BAR", or "White BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the active line. .

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is placed between "Watermelon" and "Cherry" (above "Watermelon" and below "Cherry"). .
As a result, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", "Watermelon" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are displayed consecutively (in order) at "4" locations. It is located. Specifically, on the middle reel 31, “Cherry”, “Bell”, “Replay”, “Watermelon” and “Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR” are numbered “0” to “4”. are placed consecutively (in order), are placed consecutively in numbers "5" to "9", are placed consecutively in numbers "10" to "14", and are placed consecutively in numbers "15" to "19" are also placed consecutively.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", and "Cherry" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", and "Cherry" are arranged consecutively (in order) at "4" locations. Specifically, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", and "Cherry" are arranged consecutively (in order) at number "19" and numbers "0" to "2". , placed consecutively in numbers "4" to "7", consecutively arranged in numbers "9" to "12", and arranged consecutively in numbers "14" to "17". has been done.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the "Blue 7" at number "3", the "Red 7" at number "8", the "black BAR" at number "13", and the "white BAR" at number "18" are The total number of "4" symbols is "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, no matter at what timing the middle stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Black BAR", or "White BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line. .

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is placed between "Cherry" and "Replay" (above "Cherry" and below "Replay"). .
As a result, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are displayed consecutively (in order) at "4" locations. It is located. Specifically, on the right reel 31, “Replay”, “Bell”, “Watermelon”, “Cherry” and “Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR” are numbered “19” and “0”. ~ It is placed consecutively (in order) at number "3", it is also placed consecutively at numbers "4" to "8", it is arranged consecutively at numbers "9" to "13", and " Numbers 14" to 18" are also consecutively arranged.

FIG. 3(A) is a diagram showing the display window 18, the positional relationship of each reel 31, and the effective line (display line that displays symbol combinations).
The reel 31 arranged inside can be seen through the display window 18.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that "3" consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 18.
As a result, when each reel 31 is stopped, "3" consecutive symbols of each reel 31 can be seen stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window 18, respectively. Therefore, when all the reels 31 are stopped, a total of "9" symbols (pieces) can be seen from the display window 18.
In addition, in FIG. 3(A), the number at the bottom right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

FIG. 3B illustrates the names of the symbol positions in this embodiment.
The positions of the "3" symbols displayed in the display window 18 when each reel 31 stops are referred to as the "top row,""middlerow," and "bottom row" from top to bottom. Furthermore, the positions of the "3" symbols displayed in the display window 18 when the left reel 31 stops are referred to as the "upper left row,""middle left row," and "lower left row" from top to bottom. Similarly, the positions of the "3" symbols displayed in the display window 18 when the center reel 31 stops are referred to as the "upper middle row,""middle middle row," and "lower middle row" from top to bottom, and the positions of the "3" symbols displayed in the display window 18 when the right reel 31 stops are referred to as the "upper right row,""middle right row," and "lower right row" from top to bottom.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3(A), valid lines are set for "9" symbols visible from the display window 18.
Here, the "valid line" is a line where symbols are lined up when the reels 31 are stopped, a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a symbol combination, and a symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations. This is the line that will win the prize when the line stops on that line.
Furthermore, the term "invalid line" refers to a symbol combination line that is not set as a valid line and is not a target for establishing a symbol combination.
In any gaming state and any number of bets, the active line in this embodiment is a straight line that passes through "middle left row" - "middle middle row" - "middle right row" as shown in FIG. 3(A). "Middle line" is the only line, and all other lines are invalid.

For example, the "upper line" is a straight line that passes through "upper left row" - "upper middle row" - "upper right row", the "lower line" is a straight line that passes through "lower left row" - "lower middle row" - "lower right row", A linear "down-right line" passing through "upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "lower right row", a straight "up-right line" passing through "lower left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row", A small chevron-shaped "Koyama line" passing through "lower left row" - "middle middle row" - "lower right row", "small V line" with a small V-shape passing through "upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row", In this embodiment, all of the "bent lines" in the form of curved lines passing through "upper left row" - "middle middle row" and "middle right row" are invalid lines.

The valid line and the invalid line are collectively referred to as the "symbol combination line."
Note that the position and number of active lines may be varied for each gaming state or number of bets. For example, in a specific game state, the downward-sloping line may be the active line. Furthermore, for a specific number of bets, there may be a plurality of active lines ("5" lines: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an upward line to the right, and a downward downward line to the right).

4 and 5 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as winning combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the winning combination drawing means 61), symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in this embodiment.
The winning combinations are broadly divided into special winning combinations, replay winning combinations, and small winning combinations.
A symbol combination corresponding to each role and the number of medals to be paid out when a winning combination is achieved are also determined. When all the reels 31 come to a stop, if a symbol combination corresponding to any of the roles stops on an active line (the role is a winning combination), the number of medals corresponding to that role is paid out (a dividend (profit) is awarded).
However, the number of coins to be paid out when a special combination is won is set to 0. In addition, in the case of a replay, coins are automatically inserted, and the player can play again.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the gaming states of this embodiment include non-internal, 1BB internal (1BB-A internal, 1BB-B internal), and 1BB gaming (1BB-A gaming). , 1BB-B game). Also, during the non-internal period, there are two lottery items when two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2") and when three medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3"). are different.
In FIGS. 4 and 5, "2 medals" indicates "when two medals are inserted", and "three medals" indicates "when three medals are inserted". Also, "inside" means "inside 1BB (inside 1BB-A and inside 1BB-B)", and "inside 1BB" means "inside 1BB (inside 1BB-A, and in 1BB-)". B) is displayed.

The winning numbers "1" to "82" shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 correspond to small winnings. In this embodiment, the small winnings include "82" types of "small winnings 01" to "small winnings 82".
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, "Small win 01" to "Small win 82" are played when two medals are inserted in a non-internal position, when three medals are inserted in a non-internal position, when a 1BB internal game is played, and when a 1BB game is played. Any of these will be eligible for a lottery, and the corresponding symbol combinations will be displayed on the active line (winning).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, "Small win 01" to "Small win 06" are when two medals are inserted in non-internal, when three medals are inserted in non-internal, during 1BB internal, and during 1BB game. In both cases, the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals awarded) at the time of winning is set to "10".
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, "Small win 07" to "Small win 78" are when 2 medals are inserted in non-internal, 3 medals are inserted in non-internal, 1BB internal, In both the 1BB game and the 1BB game, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) at the time of winning is set to "1".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, "Small win 79" to "Small win 82" are played when two medals are inserted in a non-internal position, when three medals are inserted in a non-internal position, during a 1BB internal game, and during a 1BB game. In both cases, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) at the time of winning is set to "3".

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 01" is only one type of symbol number "1", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all "3" reels 31 arranged in "PB=1" (which can always be displayed on a pay line regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 19(1) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 01" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small win 01" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "downward right line" (invalid line) passing through the "upper left"-"middle middle"-"lower right".

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 02", which is the winning number "2", and there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 03", which is the winning number "3". In addition, there is only one type of symbol combination "4" which corresponds to "minor prize 04", and there is only one symbol combination which corresponds to "minor prize 05" which is symbol combination number "5". Furthermore, there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 06", which is the winning number "6".
Further, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winning combination 02" to "minor winning combination 06", the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", similarly to "minor winning combination 01". In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 02" to "minor winnings 06" all have "3" symbols on the reels 31 in the "PB=1" arrangement, similar to "minor winnings 01". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19 (2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 02" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (valid line) (when winning "Small win 02"), , "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "upper line" (invalid line) passing through "upper left row" - "upper middle row" - "upper right row".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19 (3), which will be described later, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 03" is "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell", and when winning "Small win 03", ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is stopped and displayed on the ``middle line'' (valid line).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 04" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (valid line) (when winning "Small win 04"), , "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "upward right line" (invalid line) passing through "Lower left row" - "Middle middle row" - "Upper right row".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 05" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (valid line) (when winning "Small win 05"), , "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "Oyama line" (invalid line) passing through "Lower left row" - "Middle middle row" - "Lower right row".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (3), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 06" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (valid line) (at the time of winning of "minor combination 06") , "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "lower line" (invalid line) passing through "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right".

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to “minor win 07”, which is the win number “7”, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are each arranged in “PB=1”, but the symbols on the middle reel 31 The symbols are arranged in such a way that PB≠1.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 07" is such that the symbols on "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1" (the operation timing of the stop switch 42 The symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (middle reel 31) are arranged in "PB≠1" (when the stop switch 42 is operated). This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols that are sometimes stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the timing and sometimes not.

There is only one symbol combination that corresponds to “minor role 08”, which is the role number “8”, and there is only one symbol combination that corresponds to “minor role 09”, which is the role number “9”, and “small role 09”. There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "10", which is the winning number "10".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 08" to "minor winnings 10" are all similar to "minor winnings 07", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in "PB = 1", respectively. However, the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 08" to "minor winnings 10" are all symbols on "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31), similar to "minor winnings 07". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which the symbol is arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (middle reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "small win 11" with the win number "11", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are each arranged in "PB=1", but on the right reel 31 The symbols are arranged in such a way that PB≠1.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 11" consists of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reels 31 (left reel 31 and middle reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1", and other This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on "1" reel 31 (right reel 31) arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

There is only one type of symbol combination that corresponds to “Small role 12”, which is the role number “12”, and there is only one type of symbol combination that corresponds to “Small role 13”, which is the role number “13”, and “Small role 13”. There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "14".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 12" to "Small win 14" are all similar to "Small win 11", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in "PB = 1", respectively. However, the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 12" to "minor winnings 14" are all symbols on "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and middle reel 31), similar to "minor winnings 11". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which the symbol is arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (right reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "small win 15" with the win number "15", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are each arranged in "PB=1", but on the left reel 31 The symbols are arranged in "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 15" consists of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1", and other This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

There is only one type of symbol combination that corresponds to “Small role 16”, which is the role number “16”, and there is only one type of symbol combination that corresponds to “Small role 17”, which is the role number “17”, and “Small role 17”. There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "18".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 16" to "Small win 18" are all similar to "Small win 15", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in "PB = 1", respectively. However, the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 16" to "Small win 18" are all symbols on "2" reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31), similar to "Small win 15". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which the symbol is arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 19" is only one type of role number "11", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 20" is only one type of role number "20". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 21" is only one type of role number "21", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 22" is only one type of role number "22".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 19" to "Small Winning 22", like "Small Winning 11" to "Small Winning 14", are such that the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winnings 19" to "Small Winnings 22", like "Small Winnings 11" to "Small Winnings 14", are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31) are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the right reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 23", which is the prize number "23", and there is only one kind of symbol combination, which corresponds to the "minor prize 24", which is the prize number "24". Further, there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 25", which is the prize number "25", and there is only one kind of symbol combination, which corresponds to "minor prize 26", which is the prize number "26".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 23" to "Small win 26" are similar to "Small win 15" to "Small win 18", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are "PB= 1" arrangement, but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 23" to "Small win 26" are similar to "Small win 15" to "Small win 18", and the symbol combinations correspond to "2" reels 31 (middle reel 31 and A pattern in which the symbols on the right reel 31) are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 27", which is the winning number "27", and there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 28", which is winning number "28". Further, there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 29", which is the winning number "29", and there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 30", which is the winning number "30".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 27" to "Small win 30" are similar to "Small win 07" to "Small win 10", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are "PB= 1" arrangement, but the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 27" to "minor winnings 30" are similar to "minor winnings 07" to "minor winnings 10", and the symbol combinations correspond to "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and The symbols on the right reel 31) consist of symbols arranged in a “PB=1” arrangement, and the symbols on the other “1” reel 31 (middle reel 31) are arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" is only one type, which is the symbol number "31". The symbols on the center reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" is a symbol combination in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (middle reel 31) is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 32" to "minor win 46", each of the win numbers "32" to "46".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 32" to "Small win 46" all have the symbols on the middle reel 31 in the "PB=1" arrangement, similar to "Small win 31". The symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged such that "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 32" to "Small win 46" are all similar to "Small win 31", with "1" symbol on reel 31 (middle reel 31) being "PB= This is a symbol combination consisting of a symbol with a "1" arrangement, and symbols on the other "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) with a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

There is only one symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 47", which is the win number "47", and the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The symbols are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 47" consists of symbols in which "1" symbols on reel 31 (right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1", and other "2" symbols This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on the reels 31 (left reel 31 and middle reel 31) in an arrangement of "PB≠1".

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winnings 48" to "minor winnings 62", respectively, with winning numbers "48" to "62".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 48" to "Small win 62" all have the symbols on the right reel 31 in the "PB=1" arrangement, similar to "Small win 47". The symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 48" to "minor winnings 62" are all similar to "minor winnings 47", in which "1" symbol on reel 31 (right reel 31) is "PB= This is a symbol combination consisting of a symbol with a "PB≠1" arrangement, and symbols on the other "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and middle reel 31) with a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 63" is only one type, which is the symbol number "63". The symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" is a symbol combination in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) is in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winnings 64" to "minor winnings 78", respectively, with winning numbers "64" to "78".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 64" to "minor winnings 78" all have the symbols on the left reel 31 in the "PB=1" arrangement, similar to "minor winnings 63". The symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 64" to "minor winnings 78" are all similar to "minor winnings 63", in which "1" symbol on reel 31 (left reel 31) is "PB= This is a symbol combination consisting of a symbol with a "1" arrangement, and symbols on the other "2" reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) with a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

There is only one symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 79" with the win number "79", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are each arranged in "PB=1", but on the left reel 31 The symbols are arranged in "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 79" consists of symbols in which "2" symbols on reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1", and other This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 79" is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle line) (when winning "Small win 79"), "lower left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row""Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" will be stopped and displayed on the "line rising to the right" (invalid line) passing through "."

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 80" with the win number "80", and similarly to "Small win 79", the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are each arranged in "PB = 1" However, the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 80" is the same as "minor prize 79", in which the symbols on "2" reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of a symbol that is arranged in the same manner as ``PB≠1'', and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in "PB≠1".
Also, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 80" is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle line) (at the time of winning of "Small win 80"), the "lower left row" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" is stopped and displayed on the "line rising to the right" (invalid line) passing through "Middle middle row" - "Top right row".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 81" is only one type, the prize number "81", and the symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 81" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 81" is "cherry"-"cherry"-"cherry", and when the "small win 81" is won, "cherry"-"cherry"-"cherry" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line).

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 82" with the winning number "82", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement.
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 82" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Winning 82" is "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Watermelon", and when winning "Small Winning 82", "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" is placed on the "middle line" (valid line). "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" stops displaying.

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "Replay", the winning number "83", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay" is "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay", and when "Replay" wins, "Replay" - "Replay" - “Replay” stops displaying.

As shown in Figure 5, "Replay" becomes a lottery target when two non-internal medals are inserted, three non-internal medals are inserted, and 1BB internal, and the corresponding symbol combination is on the active line. Although it is possible to stop display (win), it is not subject to lottery during the 1BB game, and therefore, the corresponding symbol combination will not be stopped and displayed (win) on the active line.
Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is stopped and displayed (wins), medals are automatically inserted and the game can be played again.

The winning numbers "84" and "85" shown in FIG. 5 correspond to special winning combinations (official objects). In this embodiment, there are two types of special winnings: "1BB-A" and "1BB-B".
As shown in FIG. 5, "1BB-A" becomes a lottery target only when two medals are inserted, and is not a lottery target when three medals are inserted. On the other hand, "1BB-B" becomes a lottery target only when three medals are inserted, and is not a lottery target when two medals are inserted.

In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is only one type, which is the role number "84", and the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" configuration.
As described above, in this embodiment, the winning combination of the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line (can win a prize).

Then, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is stopped and displayed on the active line, it will become a "1BB-A winning" and no medals will be paid out in this game, but next time. Shift from game to "1BB-A game".
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop and display on the active line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will shift to "1BB-A inside".

In addition, in this embodiment, when two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" can be activated independently (single winning), and in the game in which the "1BB-A condition device" is activated independently, the "1BB-A condition device" can be activated independently. The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in the game where the "1BB-A conditional device" is activated alone, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped on the active line. If it is not displayed, the next game will shift to "1BB-A Inside".
Furthermore, if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61 when two medals of "1BB-A inside" are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in this embodiment, , since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning part lottery means 61 for "1BB-A inside", once it moves to "1BB-A inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will be on the active line. It never stops showing up.

In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is only one type, the winning number "85", and like "1BB-A", the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". However, the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".
As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B", and when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the winning combination of "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B". The symbol combination corresponding to “-B” can be stopped and displayed on the active line (winning is possible).

Then, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is stopped and displayed on the active line, it will be a "1BB-B winning" and no medals will be paid out in this game, but next time. Shift from game to "1BB-B game".
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the next game will shift to "1BB-B inside".

In addition, in this embodiment, when three non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-B condition device" can be operated independently (single winning), and in the game in which the "1BB-B condition device" is operated independently, " The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in the game where the "1BB-B conditional device" is activated alone, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped on the active line. If it is not displayed, the next game will shift to "1BB-B Inside".
Furthermore, if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61 when three medals of "1BB-B inside" are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in this embodiment, , since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning part lottery means 61 for "1BB-B inside", once it moves to "1BB-B inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will be on the active line. It never stops showing up.

For each of the above-mentioned roles, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role does not stop and display on the active line in a game where the winning role is won, the roles that will be carried over from the next game and the roles that will not be carried over are determined. .
In this embodiment, the hand carried over is 1BB (“1BB-A” and “1BB-B”). In this embodiment, the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB are all set to "PB≠1", so even if 1BB is won, the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB will not be stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB is (There may be cases where the winner does not win). When 1BB is won, the winning information of 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later until 1BB is won.

On the other hand, when a minor win or replay is won, the winning combination is only valid for the current game, and the winning information is not carried over to the next game or later. In other words, in a game in which such a combination is won, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed on an active line, but regardless of whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on an active line, the right to the winning combination will be extinguished at the end of the game.

6 to 9 are diagrams showing the conditioner in this embodiment.
6 to 8 show the small winning combination and replay condition device in this embodiment.
In the notes column of FIGS. 6 and 7, "push order 123" indicates the push order of "left middle right," and "push order 132" indicates the push order of "left middle right." Further, the "push order 213" indicates the push order of "middle left/right", and the "push order 231" indicates the push order of "middle right/left". Furthermore, the "push order 312" indicates the push order of "right, left, center", and the "push order 321" indicates the push order of "right, center, left".

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the small winning combination condition devices correspond to the small winning combination and replay condition device number "17" from the "small winning combination A1 condition device" corresponding to the small winning combination and replay condition device number "1". It has 17 types, including the "small win ALL condition device".
In addition, "Small role A1 condition device" to "Small role I condition device" are subject to lottery when 2 medals are inserted in non-internal, 3 medals are inserted in non-internal, and in 1BB internal ( However, during the 1BB game, the lottery will not be held (the lottery will not be held).

Furthermore, the "1-coin role ALL condition device" is subject to a lottery (a lottery is held) when two medals are inserted while not inside the reel, when three medals are inserted while not inside the reel, when inside the 1BB reel, and when playing with the 1BB reel.
Furthermore, the "small prize ALL condition device" is not subject to a lottery (lottery is not held) when two medals are inserted while not inside, when three medals are inserted while not inside, or when inside 1BB, but is only subject to a lottery (lottery is held) during 1BB play.

Here, the following method may be used to control the reel 31 to stop when multiple types of small winning combinations with different numbers of medals are won.
As a first priority, when all the symbols (on the reel 31) constituting a winning symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.
Next, when it is not possible to stop and display all the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination on the active line (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is "quantity priority" or The reels 31 are controlled to stop using either "number priority".

Furthermore, "Priority on the number of medals" means that among the symbol combinations of winning combinations that have been won repeatedly, the symbol on the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination with the highest number of medals paid out is given priority and stopped and displayed on the active line (drawing ) to say something.
On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols on the reel 31 are given priority and stopped and displayed on the active line so that the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line is maximized.

In this embodiment, when the "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are activated, a state where multiple types of small wins (bells) with different payout numbers of medals are won repeatedly (so-called "push order bell") ).
When the pressing order bell is won, the reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority given to the number of pieces when the pressing order is correct, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped with priority given to the number of pieces when the pressing order is incorrect.
As a result, when the push order bell is won, the type of small winning combination (symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line) will differ depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, and this will affect the game result (number of medals paid out). There will be advantages/disadvantages.

The "small win A1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of FIG.
When the winning number "1" is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination and replay condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "1". Then, the "small win A1 condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "1" is activated.
Furthermore, when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, the player is in a state where the seven types of small winning combinations listed in the winning combination column in FIG. 6 are won multiple times.

Furthermore, when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "left middle right (123)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order.
Then, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "Left, middle right (123)", the probability of "1/1" is (always) " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small winning combination 01" (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs, the "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row due to number priority, when the second middle stop occurs, the "bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row, and when the third right stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" to be displayed stopped on an active line with "PB=1".

In this way, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, the left reel 31 is stopped first and the center reel 31 is stopped second, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 01" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small prize A1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the activated line.
As shown in FIG. 19(1) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on a downward sloping line to the right (inactive line).

Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle stage (valid line).
As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Black BAR" or "White BAR" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, "Replay" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Bell" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, at the first stop on the left when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR", "Replay" and "Bell" on the left reel 31 are stopped within the display window 18. Display.

In addition, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up “Small win 01” are one type of “Replay”, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 that make up “Small win 01” are one type of “Bell”, and “Small win 01” is one type of “Bell”. The symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the winning combination "01" is one type of "Watermelon".
In this way, by setting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that makes up the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the press order is correct when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. At times, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line can be reduced.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left, right, center (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 07" or "small win 08" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left, "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row. After that, at the second stop on the right, in order to make it possible to win either "Small win 07" or "Small win 08" by giving priority to the number of pieces, move "Bell" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 to the middle right row. Stop and display. Thereafter, when the middle third stop occurs, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, since "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at number "4", any symbol from number "0" to "4" on the middle reel 31 is on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".

Similarly, since "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 is placed only on the number "9", any symbol from "5" to "9" on the middle reel 31 is located on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is in the middle position, "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle stage). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Blue 7" or "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "Small win 07" or "Small win 08". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 01" (10 pieces paid out) is given priority to the number of pieces. When the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small role 07" or "Small role 08" (both pay out one medal) that pays out a smaller number of medals than the one that is stopped on the active line. Make it displayable.

Also, when the first stop on the left, the press order is correct, but when the second stop on the right, the press order is incorrect, the symbol is different from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that makes up "Small role 01". , and the "Bell" which is the symbol of "PB=1" on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 from stopping and displaying on the active line, so "Small role 01" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "minor winnings 07" and "minor winnings 08" are one type of "replay", and "minor winnings 07" and "minor winnings 08" The symbol on the right reel 31 that makes up the symbol is one type of "bell".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" or "small win 32" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, at the first center stop, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the center middle row based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second left stop, the "red 7" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, and at the third right stop, the "red 7" or "blue 7" (both PB≠1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is placed only at number "5", any symbol from number "1" to "5" on the left reel 31 is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , "Red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

Also, since "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is placed only on number "8", any symbol from number "4" to "8" on right reel 31 is located on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated at times, "Red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

Furthermore, since "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 is placed only on number "3", any symbol on number "19" or number "0" to "3" on right reel 31 is on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is in the upper position, "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle row on the right). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 stopping to appear in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the right reel 31 stopping to appear in the middle right row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor symbol 31" or "minor symbol 32" stopping to appear on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated and the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 01" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the number of pieces being prioritized. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 31" or "minor winning combination 32" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the pressing order is incorrect when the middle first stop occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small winning combination 01", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the middle reel 31 ``Watermelon'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from stopping and displaying on the active line, so "Small win 01" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "Small win 31" and "Small win 32" are one type of "Red 7", and "Small win 31" and "Small win 32" are of one type. The symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes ``Watermelon'' is one type.
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated.

When the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)", and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

When the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle (312)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 53" or "Small win 53" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 54" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the right, the "cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second left stop, the "white BAR" (PB≠1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the middle third stop occurs, the "black BAR" or "of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed. "White BAR" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 is placed only at number "15", so any symbol from number "11" to "15" on the left reel 31 is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".
Also, since the "black BAR" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at number "14", any symbol from numbers "10" to "14" on the middle reel 31 is located on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated at times, the "black BAR" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at number "19", any symbol from number "15" to "19" on the middle reel 31 is located on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated while the player is in the middle position, the "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle stage). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability that the "white BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row. Since the probability of being able to make it happen is "1/2", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 53" or "Small win 54" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 01" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 53" or "minor winning combination 54" (both of which pay out one medal) that pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the right, the symbol is different from the symbol on the right reel 31 (watermelon) that constitutes "small winning combination 01", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the right reel 31 ``Cherry'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 from stopping and displaying on the active line, so "Small role 01" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "minor winnings 53" and "minor winnings 54" are of one type, "white BAR", and "minor winnings 53" and "minor winnings 54" are of one type. The symbol on the right reel 31 that makes up the symbol "Cherry" is one type.
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated.

When the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "Right Middle Left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "Right Left Middle (312)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 53" or "Small win 54" (both pay out 1 piece) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 01,""Small win 07,""Small win 08," and "Small win A1 condition device." These are symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination 31, 32, 53, or 54.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 07" and "small win 08" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "2" reels 31 are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 31", "small prize 32", "small prize 53" and "small prize 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 consist of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". ” arrangement, and the other “1” symbols on the reel 31 are larger than the number (2) of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in “PB≠1”.

In addition, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 stop, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the pay line.
Furthermore, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop results in an incorrect answer, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

In addition, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated and the first stop on the left, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left), and when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated At the first stop in the middle, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row), and at the first stop on the right when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed. "Cherry" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row).
Therefore, when the "Small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the "1BB-B inside"" When the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line.

Also, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is "Blank" - "Red 7" - "Replay", and "Small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" This is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of the reels 31 with priority given to the number of symbols during operation.
For example, since the symbol on the middle reel 31 of "1BB-A" is "Red 7", among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "Small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A internal" is activated, The number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the reel 31 is "Red 7" is "2". Therefore, the number of symbols on the middle reel 31 is the same as the number of symbol combinations that are "watermelon", so in the game when the "small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A internal medium" is activated, at the first stop in the middle (press When the order is incorrect), the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line by giving priority to the number of pieces.

Further, the symbol on the left reel 31 of "1BB-A" is "blank", and is a symbol that is not used in the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated. Therefore, the symbols on the left reel 31 of "1BB-A" do not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority on the number of symbols when the "small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated.
Similarly, the symbol on the right reel 31 of "1BB-A" is a "replay" symbol, which is an unused symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated. Therefore, the symbols on the right reel 31 of "1BB-A" do not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority on the number of symbols when the "small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated.

Similarly to the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is also reeled with priority on the number of pieces when the "small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-B inside" is activated. It is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of 31.
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is controlled to stop the reel 31 with priority on the number of pieces when "Small win A2 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated. It is a pattern combination that has no effect.
Similarly, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is the stop control of the reel 31 with priority on the number of pieces when "Small win A2 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" of "1BB-B inside" is activated. It is a pattern combination that does not affect.

In this embodiment, there are two types of "1BB": "1BB-A" and "1BB-B". When two medals are inserted, "1BB-A" is drawn, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when three medals are inserted, a lottery of "1BB-B" is carried out, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to use one type of "1BB" and always set the number of medals to be "3". In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is a symbol that does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority on the number of pieces when "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" of "1BB inside" is activated. A combination is preferred.

The "Small role A2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6, and when the "Small role A2 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "Small role A2 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "Left middle right (123)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order, just like when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated. becomes.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 01" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, center (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 09" or "small win 10" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the number of symbols.

When the "Small win A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left/right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 33" or "Small win 33" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 34" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 33" or "Small win 34" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 49" or "small win 50" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 49" or "small win 50" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)."

The "Small Prize A2 Condition Device" replaces the "Small Prize 07" and "Small Prize 08" of the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 09" and "Small Prize 10", replaces the "Small Prize 31" and "Small Prize 32" of the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 33" and "Small Prize 34", and replaces the "Small Prize 53" and "Small Prize 54" of the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 49" and "Small Prize 50".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated.

The "Small role B1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6, and when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "left and right middle (132)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left, right, medium (132)", the probability of "Small win 02" is (always) "1/1" due to number priority The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the middle left row by giving priority to the number of coins. When the second right stop is made, "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row, and when the middle third stop is made, "Cherry" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed. Display the stop in the middle row. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 02" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, the number of winnings is given priority and it corresponds to the "small win B1 condition device". The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 02" which pays out "10" which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19 (2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 02" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, "Bell" - "Bell" - ""Bell" stops and displays.

Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle stage (valid line).
As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Black BAR" or "White BAR" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, "Replay" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Bell" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, at the first stop on the left when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR", "Replay" and "Bell" on the left reel 31 are stopped within the display window 18. Display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 02" is only one type, "Replay", the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 02" is only one type, "Cherry", and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 02" is only one type, "Replay".
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that is displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 11" or "small win 12" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left, "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row. After that, when the middle second stop occurs, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle row in order to make it possible to win either "small winning combination 11" or "small winning combination 12" due to quantity priority. Stop and display. Thereafter, at the third stop on the right, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 is placed only at number "13", so any symbol from number "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is placed only at number "18", any symbol from number "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is located on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated while the player is playing, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "small win 11" or "small win 12". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped first and the middle reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 02" (10 pieces paid out) is given priority to the number of pieces. When the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 11" or "small role 12" (both pay out 1 coin) that pays out a smaller number of medals is stopped on the active line. Make it displayable.

Also, when the left first stop is correct, the press order is correct, but when the middle second stop is the press order is incorrect, the symbol is different from the symbol (cherry) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small winning combination 02". , and the "Bell" which is the symbol of "PB=1" on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so that "Small role 02" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 11" and "small win 12" is only one type, "replay", and the symbol on the center reel 31 constituting the "small win 11" and "small win 12" is only one type, "bell".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left/right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 35" or "Small win 35" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 36" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle stage by giving priority to the number of pieces. At the second left stop, the "Black BAR" (PB≠1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed at the middle left row, and when the right third stop is made, the "Black BAR" or "Black BAR" of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed. "White BAR" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is placed only at number "10", so any symbol from number "6" to "10" on the left reel 31 is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

In addition, since the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only on number "13", unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is "1/4".

Furthermore, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is only positioned at number "18", unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is located on an active line, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed on the middle right row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 stopping to be displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping to be displayed in the middle right row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 35" or "small win 36" stopping to be displayed on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 02" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 35" or "minor winning combination 36" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first middle reel stops, a "watermelon" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (cherry) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 02" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "cherry" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the pay line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor prize 02" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "Small win 35" and "Small win 36" are of one type, "Black BAR", and "Small win 35" and "Small win 36" are of one type. The symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes ``Watermelon'' is one type.
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" or when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set such that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 35" or "Small win 36" (both pay out 1 piece) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

When the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, left, middle (312)", the probability of "Small win 47" or "Small win 47" is "1/8" due to number priority. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 48" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the right, the "cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second left stop, "Red 7" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the middle third stop occurs, "Red 7" or "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 is stopped. "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As described above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".
Also, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row is "1/4", and the probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row is also "1/4". Since it is "1/4", the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/2".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 47" or "minor winning combination 48" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 02" (payout of 10 pieces) is stopped on the active line due to quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 47" or "minor winning combination 48" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel stops on the right, a "cherry" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (replay) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 02" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "Replay" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the pay line, thereby preventing the "Small Win 02" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. The symbol on the right reel 31 that makes up the symbol "Cherry" is one type.
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small role B1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order "right left middle (312)". In the same way as when, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 47" or "Small win 48" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8'' by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 14 described later, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the pay line when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 02", "small prize 11", "small prize 12", "small prize 35", "small prize 36", "small prize 47" or "small prize 48".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all "3" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 11" and "minor prize 12" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on the reels 31 arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 35", "minor prize 36", "minor prize 47", and "minor prize 48" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are composed of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is greater than the number of symbol combinations (2) consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the other "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the pay line when all three reels 31 stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop results in an incorrect answer, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

In addition, when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left), and when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated At the first stop in the middle, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row), and at the first stop on the right when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed. "Cherry" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row).
Therefore, when the "Small role B1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the "1BB-B inside"" When the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line.

The "Small role B2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6, and when the "Small role B2 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "Small role B2 condition device" is activated, the same as when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "Left/Middle (132)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order. Become.

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, center (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 02" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 13" or "small win 14" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the number of symbols being given priority.

When the "Small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Medium left and right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 37" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 38" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 37" or "Small win 38" (both pay out 1 piece) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

When the "Small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, left, middle (312)", the probability of "Small win 57" or "Small win 57" is "1/8" due to number priority. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 58" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role B2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order of "right left middle (312)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 57" or "Small win 58" (both pay out 1 piece) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

The "Small prize B2 condition device" replaces the "small prize 11" and "small prize 12" of the "Small prize B1 condition device" with "Small prize 13" and "Small prize 14", replaces the "Small prize 35" and "Small prize 36" of the "Small prize B1 condition device" with "Small prize 37" and "Small prize 38", and replaces the "Small prize 47" and "Small prize 48" of the "Small prize B1 condition device" with "Small prize 57" and "Small prize 58".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

The "small prize C1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 6, and when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 6 are overlappingly won.
When the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "center, left, right (213)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Medium left and right (213)", the probability of "Small win 03" is (always) "1/1" due to number priority The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle stage by giving priority to the number of coins. When the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the third stop is on the right, the "bell" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed. Display stop in the middle right row. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 03" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03", which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win C1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the activated line.
As shown in FIG. 19(3) described later, when "small win 03" is won, "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are displayed stopped on the middle line (effective line).

In addition, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and then, When the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle stage (effective line).
As a result, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "replay" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, "Bell" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "Replay", "Bell" and "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 are stopped. The image is stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting "minor prize 03" is one type of "bell", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting "minor prize 03" is also of "bell". There is only one type, and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting “Small Win 03” is also one type of “Bell”.
In this way, by setting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated in the pressing order and the correct answer is correct, the "small role C1 condition device" is activated. At times, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line can be reduced.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)", there is a probability of "1/2" of "small win 15" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 16" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle row at the first stop in the middle. After that, at the second stop on the right, in order to make it possible to win either "Small win 15" or "Small win 16" due to quantity priority, move "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 to the middle right row. Stop and display. Thereafter, at the third stop on the left, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is placed only at number "5", any symbol from number "1" to "5" on the left reel 31 is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , "Red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

Similarly, since "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is placed only on the "0" number, any of the symbols "16" to "19" or "0" on the left reel 31 is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is in the upper position, "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "Small win 15" or "Small win 16". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 03" (10 pieces paid out) is given priority to the number of pieces. The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 15" or "Small win 16" (both pay out one coin) that pays out a smaller number of medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line is stopped on the active line. Make it displayable.

In addition, when the first stop in the middle, the pressing order is correct, but when the second stopping on the right, the pressing order is incorrect, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that makes up "Small Role 03". , and the "Watermelon" symbol of "PB=1" on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small role 03" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbols on the middle reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 15" and "Small Winning 16" are one type of "Bell", and "Small Winning 15" and "Small Winning 16" There is one type of symbol on the right reel 31, which is "Watermelon".
In this way, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed when the press order is correct at the first stop in the middle, but the press order is incorrect at the second stop on the right. By setting the types of symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the middle left row due to the number of pieces. When the second middle stop, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row, and when the right third stop, the right "Red 7" (PB≠1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row.

As shown in Figure 2, since "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 is placed only on number "9", any symbol from number "5" to "9" on the middle reel 31 is on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".

Also, since "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at number "4", any symbol from numbers "0" to "4" on the middle reel 31 is located on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated at times, "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".

Furthermore, since "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is placed only on the number "8", any symbol from numbers "4" to "8" on the right reel 31 is located on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated at times, "Red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability of having a "red 7" or "blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is "1/2", and the probability of having a "red 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the right middle row is "1/4", so the probability of having a symbol combination corresponding to a "small win 63" or a "small win 64" stop on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "minor win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 03" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "small winning combination 63" or "small winning combination 64" (both of which pay out one medal) that pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the left, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor role 03" and the symbol "PB = 1" on the left reel 31. ``Replay'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "small role 03" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting the "minor winnings 63" and "minor winnings 64" are one type of "replay", and the symbols "minor winnings 63" and "minor winnings 64" are of one type. There is one type of symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Red 7".
In this way, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the left are determined. By using one type for each type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small role C1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center right (123)". In the same way as when, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 63" or "Small winning combination 64" (both one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle (312)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 51" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 52" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the right, the "Cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second left stop, the "black BAR" (PB≠1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the middle third stop occurs, the "black BAR" of the middle reel 31 or " "White BAR" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is placed only at number "10", so any symbol from number "6" to "10" on the left reel 31 is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

As described above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the middle reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/4," and the probability of the "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is also "1/4."
From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the left middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 51" or "small win 52" being stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small winning combination C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 03" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the number of pieces being prioritized. A symbol combination corresponding to a "small winning combination 51" or "small winning combination 52" (both of which pay out one medal) that pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the right, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small role 03", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the right reel 31 ``Cherry'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the right reel 31 from stopping and displaying on the active line, so "Small role 03" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "Small win 51" and "Small win 52" are of one type, "Black BAR", and "Small win 51" and "Small win 52" are of one type. The symbol on the right reel 31 that makes up the symbol "Cherry" is one type.
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination C1 condition device is activated.

When the "small role C1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order "right left middle (312)". In the same way as when, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 51" or "Small win 52" (both pay out 1 piece) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 03,""Small win 15,""Small win 16," and "Small win C1 condition device." These are symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination 51, 52, 63, or 64.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 03" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 15" and "minor prize 16" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on the reels 31 arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 51", "minor winnings 52", "minor winnings 63", and "minor winnings 64" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are composed of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". ” arrangement, and the other “1” symbols on the reel 31 are larger than the number (2) of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in “PB≠1”.

Also, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged in "PB = 1" will be stopped and displayed on the active line. .
Furthermore, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is a correct answer, but if the second stop is an incorrect answer, the "PB=1" arrangement will be made at the first and second stops. At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, if the answer is incorrect at the first stop, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement is displayed on the active line at the first stop, and at the second stop At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the pay line (middle left), when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the pay line (middle middle), and when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, a "cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the pay line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line, and when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

The "Small role C2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6, and when the "Small role C2 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "Small role C2 condition device" is activated, the same as when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "middle left/right (213)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order. Become.

When the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Medium left and right (213)", the probability of "Small win 03 The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle right left (231)", there is a probability of "1/2" of "Small win 17" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 18" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

When the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "Small win 65" or "Small win 65" due to number priority. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 66" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small role C2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left, middle (132)", but the stop switches 42 were also operated in the order of pressing "left, center, right (123)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 65" or "Small win 66" (both one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "small win 55" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 56" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small role C2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "Right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order of "Right left middle (312)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 55" or "Small win 56" (both one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

The "Small Prize C2 Condition Device" replaces the "Small Prize 15" and "Small Prize 16" of the "Small Prize C1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 17" and "Small Prize 18", replaces the "Small Prize 51" and "Small Prize 52" of the "Small Prize C1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 55" and "Small Prize 56", and replaces the "Small Prize 63" and "Small Prize 64" of the "Small Prize C1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 65" and "Small Prize 66".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

The "Small role D1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7, and when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the 7 types of small roles that were presented twice.
When the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle right left (231)", the probability of "Small win 04" is (always) "1/1" due to number priority The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, when the middle first stop occurs, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle stage by giving priority to the number of winnings. When the second stop on the right is made, "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row, and when the third stop on the left is made, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed. Display stop in the middle left row. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 04" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, it corresponds to the "small role D1 condition device" by giving priority to the number of winnings. The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 04" which pays out "10" which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 04" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, "Bell" - "Bell" - is displayed on the upward-rightward line (invalid line). The "bell" stops displaying.

In addition, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the center reel 31 is stopped first, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle row (active line), and then, when the right reel 31 is stopped second, the "replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle row (active line), and then, when the left reel 31 is stopped third, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle row (active line).

As a result, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the middle reel 31 is stopped first, the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, a "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, a "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and a "cherry" or "blank" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the center reel 31 is stopped first, the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, the "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry/blank" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

Also, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 04" are one type of "Watermelon", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 04" are one type of "Bell", The symbols on the right reel 31 constituting "Hand 04" are one type of "Replay".
In this way, by setting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that makes up the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the press order is correct when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, the "small role D1 condition device" is activated. At times, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line can be reduced.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 19" or "small win 20" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15 described later, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, at the first center stop, the "bell" (PB = 1) of the center reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the center middle row, and then at the second left stop, the "bell" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the left middle row to enable either "small win 19" or "small win 20" to be won, based on the number of pieces being given priority. After that, at the third right stop, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the right middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 is placed only at number "13", so any symbol from number "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is placed only at number "18", any symbol from number "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is located on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated while the player is playing, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "small win 19" or "small win 20". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 04" (10 pieces paid out) is given priority to the number of pieces. When the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 19" or "small role 20" (both pay out 1 coin) that pays out a smaller number of medals is stopped on the active line. Make it displayable.

In addition, when the first stop in the middle, the press order is correct, but when the second stop on the left is the incorrect press order, the symbol is different from the symbol on the left reel 31 (watermelon) that constitutes "small role 04". , and the "Bell" which is the symbol of "PB=1" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small role 04" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the pattern on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 19" and "small win 20" is only one type of "bell", and the pattern on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 19" and "small win 20" is also only one type of "bell".
In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is correct when the middle first stop is made but the push order is incorrect when the left second stop is made, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 67" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 68" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is set to the middle left row due to the number priority. When the second middle stop is made, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row, and when the right third stop is made, the right The "black BAR" (PB≠1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row.

As mentioned above, the probability that the "black BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4", and the "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. The probability of being able to do so is "1/4", and the probability that the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", and the "black BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row. Since the probability that it can be made is "1/4", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 67" or "Small Win 68" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "minor win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 04" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 67" or "minor winning combination 68" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the left, the symbol is different from the symbol on the left reel 31 (watermelon) that constitutes "small winning combination 04", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the left reel 31 ``Replay'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "small role 04" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 67" and the "small win 68" is only one type, "replay", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 67" and the "small win 68" is only one type, "black BAR".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the left first stop is incorrect in the push order when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small role D1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center right (123)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 67" or "Small win 68" (both 1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8'' by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the right, the "cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second left stop, "Black BAR" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the middle third stop occurs, "Red 7" or " "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability that the "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4". The probability of being able to do so is "1/4", and the probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row. Since the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 59" or "Small win 60" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 04" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to number priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 59" or "minor winning combination 60" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the right, the symbol is different from the symbol on the right reel 31 (replay) that constitutes "Small win 04", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the right reel 31 ``Cherry'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Replay" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small role 04" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "minor prize 59" and "minor prize 60" are one type of "black BAR", and the symbols on the right reel 31 constituting "minor prize 59" and "minor prize 60" are of one type, "black BAR". The pattern is one type of "cherry".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small role D1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order of "right left middle (312)". In the same way as when, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 59" or "Small winning combination 60" (both 1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 04,""Small win 19,""Small win 20," and "Small win D1 condition device." These are symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination 59, 60, 67, or 68.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 04" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 19" and "minor prize 20" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on the reels 31 arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 59", "minor winnings 60", "minor winnings 67", and "minor winnings 68" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are composed of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is greater than the number of symbol combinations (2) consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and one symbol on another reel 31 is arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Also, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged in "PB = 1" will be stopped and displayed on the active line. .
Furthermore, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is a correct answer, but if the second stop is an incorrect answer, the "PB=1" arrangement will be made at the first and second stops. At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, if the answer is incorrect at the first stop, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement is displayed on the active line at the first stop, and at the second stop At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated and the first stop on the left, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left), and when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated At the first stop in the middle, the "Bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row), and at the first stop on the right when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" on the right reel 31 is displayed. "Cherry" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row).
Therefore, when the "Small role D1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the "1BB-B inside"" When the small role D1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-B'' is not stopped and displayed on the active line.

The "Small role D2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7, and when the "Small role D2 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "Small Role D2 Condition Device" is activated, the pressing order of "Middle Right Left (231)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order, just like when the "Small Role D1 Conditioning Device" is activated. Become.

When the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle right left (231)", the probability of "Small win 04" is (always) "1/1" due to number priority The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left center (213)", there is a probability of "Small win 21" or "Small win 21" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 22" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

When the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 69" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 70" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small role D2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center right (123)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 69" or "Small win 70" (both 1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8'' due to quantity priority. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle (312)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 59" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 60" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role D2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order of "right left middle (312)". In the same way as when, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 59" or "Small winning combination 60" (both 1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

“Small role D2 condition device” replaces “Small role D1 condition device” “Small role 19” and “Small role 20” with “Small role 21” and “Small role 22”, and “Small role D1 condition device” "Small win 59" and "Small win 60" are replaced with "Small win 61" and "Small win 62", and "Small win D1 condition device""Small win 67" and "Small win 68" are replaced with "Small win 61" and "Small win 62". This has been replaced with "Small win 69" and "Small win 70".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

The "minor role E1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7, and when the "minor role E1 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, left, middle (312)", the probability of "Small win 05" is (always) "1/1" due to number priority The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, when the right first stop occurs, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of winnings. When the second left stop, "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the middle third stop, "Bell" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed. Display the stop in the middle row. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 05" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, it corresponds to the "small win E1 condition device" by giving priority to the number of winnings. The symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 05" which pays out "10" which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small role 05" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, "Bell" - "Bell" - ""Bell" stops and displays.

In addition, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle right row (effective line), and when the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row (effective line).
As a result, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, a "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, a "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and a "cherry" or "blank" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
That is, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, and then the "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry/blank" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up "Small win 05" are one type of "Watermelon", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 that make up "Small win 05" are one type of "Bell", and there is one type of symbol on the left reel 31 that makes up "Small win 05". The symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the winning combination "05" is one type of "Watermelon".
In this way, by setting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that makes up the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the press order is correct when the "minor winning E1 condition device" is activated, the "minor winning E1 condition device" is activated. At times, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line can be reduced.

When the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right center left (321)", there is a probability of "1/2" of "Small win 23" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 24" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, "Watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row. After that, when the middle second stop occurs, in order to make it possible to win either "small winning combination 23" or "small winning combination 24" due to quantity priority, the "replay" (PB = 1) of the middle reel 31 is moved to the middle middle row. Stop and display. Thereafter, at the third stop on the left, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the left middle row is "1/4", and that "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the left middle row. The probability of doing so is 1/4.
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "Small win 23" or "Small win 24". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the middle reel 31 is stopped second, then due to quantity priority, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 23" or "small win 24" (both paying out 1 coin), which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
In addition, if the push order is correct when the first reel stops on the right, but is incorrect when the second reel stops on the middle reel, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 05" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" of the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" of the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor win 05" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 23" and "Small Winning 24" is one type of "Watermelon", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 23" and "Small Winning 24" is one type of "Watermelon". The pattern is one type of "replay".
In this way, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed when the press order is correct at the first stop on the right, but the press order is incorrect at the second stop in the middle. By setting the right reel 31 and middle reel 31 to one type of symbol each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 71" or "small win 72" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop, a "REPLAY" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second middle stop, a "RED 7" or "BLUE 7" (both PB≠1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row, and at the third right stop, a "BLACK BAR" (PB≠1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row is "1/4", and that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row. The probability of being able to do so is "1/4", and the probability that the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", and "Black BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row. Since the probability that it can be made is "1/4", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 71" or "minor prize 72" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win E1 condition device", due to the priority of the number of medals, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 71" or "small win 72" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel stops on the left, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 05" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor win 05" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 71" and "small win 72" is only one type, "replay", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 71" and "small win 72" is only one type, "black BAR".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the left first stop is incorrect in the push order when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 71" or "small win 72" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, middle, right (123)."

When the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left and right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 43" or "Small win 43" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 46" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle stage by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the left second stop is made, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the right third stop is made, the right "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row.

As described above, the probability that the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 will be stopped and displayed in the left middle row is "1/4", and the probability that the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 will be stopped and displayed in the left middle row is also "1/4". In addition, the probability that the "red 7" on the right reel 31 will be stopped and displayed in the right middle row is also "1/4", and the probability that the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 will be stopped and displayed in the right middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the left middle row is "1/2". The probability that the "red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row is "1/4", and the probability that the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 43" or "small combination 46" can be stopped and displayed on the activated line is "1/8".

In this way, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 05" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the number of pieces being prioritized. A symbol combination corresponding to a "small winning combination 43" or "small winning combination 46" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Also, if the pressing order is incorrect when the middle first stop occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small winning combination 05", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the middle reel 31 ``Watermelon'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small win 05" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, there are two types of symbols on the left reel 31 that constitute "small winnings 43" and "small winnings 46", "black BAR" and "white BAR", and "small winnings 43" and "small winnings 46" are There are two types of symbols on the right reel 31, “Red 7” and “Blue 7”, but there is only one type of symbol on the middle reel 31, “Watermelon”, which makes up “Small win 43” and “Small win 46”. It is.
In this way, by reducing the number of types of symbols on the middle reel 31 to one type, which constitutes the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated. ” The number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when activated can be reduced.

When the "small role E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set such that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 43" or "Small win 46" (both pay out 1 piece) is displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 05,""Small win 23,""Small win 24," and "Small win E1 condition device." These are symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination 43, 46, 71, or 72.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 05" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 23" and "minor prize 24" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on the reels 31 arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 43", "minor winnings 46", "minor winnings 71", and "minor winnings 72" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols that are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1" is arranged, and the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role E1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are composed of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". ” arrangement, and the other “1” symbols on the reel 31 are larger than the number (2) of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in “PB≠1”.

Furthermore, when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all three reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged in "PB=1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is a correct answer, but if the second stop is an incorrect answer, the "PB=1" arrangement will be made at the first and second stops. At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, if the answer is incorrect at the first stop, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement is displayed on the active line at the first stop, and at the second stop At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the left reel stops first, "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the middle reel stops first, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the right reel stops first, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line, and when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

The “minor role E2 condition device” includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column in Figure 7, and when the “minor role E2 condition device” is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column in Figure 7 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "Small role E2 condition device" is activated, the same as when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "Right, left, center (312)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order. Become.

When the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle (312)", the probability of "Small win 05" is (always) "1/1" due to number of coins priority. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right center left (321)", there is a probability of "1/2" of "Small win 25" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 26" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

When the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 77" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 78" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role E2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "left and right middle (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order of "left middle right (123)". In the same way as when, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 77" or "Small win 78" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8'' by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left/right (213)", the probability of "Small win 44" or "Small win 44" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 45" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)", and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set such that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 44" or "Small win 45" (both pay out 1 piece) is displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

“Small role E2 condition device” replaces “Small role E1 condition device” “Small role 23” and “Small role 24” with “Small role 25” and “Small role 26”, and “Small role E1 condition device” is replaced with “Small role E1 condition device”. "Small win 43" and "Small win 46" in "Small win 44" and "Small win 45" are replaced, and "Small win E1 condition device""Small win 71" and "Small win 72" are replaced with "Small win 44" and "Small win 45". This has been replaced with "Small win 77" and "Small win 78".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

“Small win F1 condition device” includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column in Figure 7, and when the “small win F1 condition device” is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column in Figure 7 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the 7 types of small roles that were presented twice.
When the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "Right middle left (321)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right middle left (321)", the "Small win The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "06" (10 coins paid) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the right first stop occurs, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of winnings. When the second middle stop, "Replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row, and when the third left stop, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed. Display stop in the middle left row. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 06" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06", which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win F1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the activated line.
As shown in FIG. 20(3) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 06" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the lower line (inactive line).

Also, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "Small role F1 condition device" is activated, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row (active line), and then, When the middle reel 31 is stopped second, "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and then when the left reel 31 is stopped third , the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row (active line).

As a result, when the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third. "Bell" is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Cherry" or "Blank" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, when the "Small role F1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, the "bell" of the left reel 31 is stopped. ”, “Watermelon” and “Cherry/Blank” are stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up “Small win 06” are one type of “Watermelon”, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 that make up “Small win 06” are one type of “Replay” and “Small win 06”. The symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the winning combination "06" is one type of "Watermelon".
In this way, by setting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that makes up the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the press order is correct when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the "small win F1 condition device" is activated. At times, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line can be reduced.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" or "small win 28" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15 described later, when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, the right reel 31 displays a "watermelon" (PB = 1) in the right middle row, and at the second left stop, the left reel 31 displays a "bell" (PB = 1) in the left middle row to allow either the "small prize 27" or the "small prize 28" to be won, based on the number of pieces. After that, at the third middle stop, the center reel 31 displays a "red 7" or a "blue 7" (both PB ≠ 1) in the middle middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row is "1/4", and that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row. The probability of doing so is 1/4.
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle reel is "1/2", so it corresponds to "Small win 27" or "Small win 28". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 06" (10 pieces paid out) is given priority to the number of pieces. When the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 27" or "small role 28" (both payout 1 coin) that pays out a smaller number of medals is stopped on the active line. Make it displayable.
Also, when the first stop on the right, the press order is correct, but when the second stop on the left, the press order is incorrect, the symbol is different from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that makes up "Small role 06". , and the "Bell" which is the symbol of "PB=1" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small role 06" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 27" and the "small win 28" is only one type, "watermelon", and the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 27" and the "small win 28" is only one type, "bell".
In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 and the left reel 31 that form the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the first right stop is the correct push order but the second left stop is incorrect, by limiting the type of patterns to one each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 75" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 76" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop, the left reel 31 will have a "replay" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the left middle row, based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second middle stop, the middle reel 31 will have a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) stopped and displayed in the middle row, and at the third right stop, the right reel 31 will have a "red 7" (PB ≠ 1) stopped and displayed in the right middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability that the "black BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4", and the "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. The probability of being able to do so is "1/4", and the probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", and the "red 7" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row. Since the probability of being able to make it happen is "1/4", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 75" or "Small win 76" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win F1 condition device", due to the priority given to the number of medals, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 75" or "small win 76" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel stops on the left, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 06" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor win 06" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 75" and "small win 76" is only one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 75" and "small win 76" is only one type, "red 7."
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the first left stop is incorrect in the push order when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small role F1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center right (123)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 75" or "minor winning combination 76" (both 1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8'' due to quantity priority. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Medium left and right (213)", the probability of "Small win 39" or "Small win 39" is "1/8" due to number priority. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 40" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small role F1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle stage by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second stop on the left, "Red 7" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the third stop on the right, "Black BAR" or ""WhiteBAR" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As mentioned above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle left row is "1/4", and that "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle right row. The probability of being able to do so is "1/4", and the probability that the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle left row is "1/4", and "Black BAR" or "White BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle right row. Since the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 39" or "Small win 40" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (payout of 10 pieces) is stopped on the active line due to quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 39" or "minor winning combination 40" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Also, if the pressing order is incorrect when the middle first stop occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol on the middle reel 31 (replay) that constitutes "small winning combination 06", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the middle reel 31 ``Watermelon'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Replay" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small win 06" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting "minor prize 39" and "minor prize 40" is one type of "red 7", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting "minor prize 39" and "minor prize 40" is one type, "red 7". The pattern is one type of "watermelon".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role F1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small role F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set such that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 39" or "Small win 40" (both pay out 1 piece) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 15 described later, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the pay line when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 06", "small prize 27", "small prize 28", "small prize 39", "small prize 40", "small prize 75" or "small prize 76".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all "3" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 27" and "minor prize 28" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination in which the symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 39", "minor prize 40", "minor prize 75", and "minor prize 76" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols that are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1" is arranged, and the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role F1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are composed of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". ” arrangement, and the other “1” symbols on the reel 31 are larger than the number (2) of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in “PB≠1”.

In addition, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the pay line when all "3" reels 31 stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged in "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop results in an incorrect answer, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

In addition, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop occurs, "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the middle first stop occurs, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the right first stop occurs, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line, and when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

The "minor role F2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of FIG. 7, and when the "minor role F2 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of FIG. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the 7 types of small roles that were presented twice.
When the "Small role F2 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "Right center left (321)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order, just like when the "Small role F1 condition device" is activated. becomes.

When the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right middle left (321)", the "Small win The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "06" (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle (312)", the probability of "Small win 29" or "Small win 29" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left middle right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "small win 73" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 74" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small role F2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "Left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "Left and center right (123)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 73" or "Small win 74" (both pay out 1 piece) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left/right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 41" or "Small win 41" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 42" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)", and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 41" or "Small win 42" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

“Small role F2 condition device” replaces “Small role F1 condition device” “Small role 27” and “Small role 28” with “Small role 29” and “Small role 30”, and “Small role F1 condition device” "Small win 39" and "Small win 40" in "Small win 41" and "Small win 42" are replaced, and "Small win F1 condition device""Small win 75" and "Small win 76" are replaced with "Small win 41" and "Small win 42". This is replaced with "Small win 73" and "Small win 74".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

As shown in FIG. 8, the "Small win G condition device" includes "Small win 79" and "Small win 80" as winning combinations, and when the "Small win G condition device" is activated, "Small win G condition device" ” and “Small win 80” are won twice.
When the "Small win G condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 79" or "Small win 80" (both "PB≠1") is placed on the active line regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that they are stopped and displayed.

Specifically, when the left stops, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row (effective line), and when the middle stops, the middle "Cherry" (PB=1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and when the right stops, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the right middle row (effective line). .
As mentioned above, the probability that the "black BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability that the "white BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4". The probability of doing so is 1/4.

Therefore, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/2", so " The probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 79" or "Small win 80" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".
However, if you operate the left stop switch 42 at the timing when the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed on the display window 18 (aiming at "black BAR"), the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 will be displayed. (No. 10) or "White BAR" (No. 15) can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line). In this case, since "Cherry" on the middle reel 31 and "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 are both arranged in "PB=1", it is possible to always win "minor prize 79" or "minor prize 80".
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 79" or "Small win 80" is stopped and displayed on the active line, "Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" will be stopped and displayed on the upward-right line (invalid line). do.

As shown in FIG. 8, the "small win H condition device" includes "small win 81" as a winning combination, and when the "small win H condition device" is activated, the "small win 81" is won. Become.
When the "small win H condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are stopped so that the symbol combination (PB≠1) corresponding to "small win 81" is stopped and displayed on the active line, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. Control.

Specifically, when the left stops, the "cherry" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row (effective line), and when the middle stops, the "cherry" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed. ) is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and when the right stop is made, "cherry" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the right middle row (effective line).
As shown in FIG. 2, the "cherries" on the left reel 31 are arranged at three locations: "4", "9", and "14". Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated while any of the symbols numbered "0" to "14" on the left reel 31 is located on the active line, the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is activated. It can be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row), but the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols ``15'' to ``19'' on the left reel 31 is located on the active line. In this case, the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row).

Therefore, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability that the "cherry" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row) is "3/4", so the "small winning" The probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "81" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "3/4".
However, if you operate the left stop switch 42 at the timing when the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed on the display window 18 (aiming at "black BAR"), the "9" number on the left reel 31 will be displayed. Alternatively, "cherry" numbered "14" can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line). In this case, since the "cherries" on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are both arranged in "PB=1", it is possible to always win the "small winning combination 81".
In addition, when winning "Small win 81", "Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" is stopped and displayed on the middle line (valid line).

As shown in FIG. 8, the "Small win I condition device" includes "Small win 82" as a winning combination, and when the "Small win I condition device" is activated, the "Small win I condition device" is in a state where "Small win 82" has been won. Become.
When the "Small win I condition device" is activated, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small win 82" is (always) placed on the active line with a probability of "1/1". The reels 31 are stopped and displayed so as to be stopped and displayed.

Specifically, when the left stops, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row (effective line), and when the middle stops, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed. It is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and when stopping on the right, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the right middle row (effective line).
Furthermore, when winning the "Small Winning 82", "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" are stopped and displayed on the middle line (valid line).

The "1-card winning ALL condition device" includes all 1-card winning combinations ("Small winning combination 07" to "Small winning combination 78"), and when the "1-card winning ALL condition device" is activated, all the winning combinations are You will be in a state where you have won a single role twice.
When the "1-card winning ALL condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to any of "small winning combination 07" to "small winning combination 78" is stopped on the active line according to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so as to be displayed.
It should be noted that when the "1-card winning ALL condition device" is activated, any one of "small winning combination 07" to "minor winning combination 78" (all "1-card payout") will be won, and there will be no non-winning.

The "Small win ALL condition device" includes all the small wins ("Small win 01" to "Small win 82") as winning combinations, and when the "Small win ALL condition device" is activated, all the small wins are included. You will be in a state where you have been selected twice.
When the "Small win ALL condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to any of "Small win 01" to "Small win 06" is stopped and displayed on the active line according to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42. The reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the reel 31 is stopped.
It should be noted that when the "minor winning ALL condition device" is activated, any one of "minor winnings 01" to "minor winnings 06" (all "10 pieces paid out") will be won, and there will be no non-winning.

As shown in FIG. 8, there is only one type of "replay condition device", which is the small winning combination and replay condition device number "18".
As shown in FIG. 8, the "replay condition device" includes "replay" as a winning combination, and when the "replay condition device" is activated, the "replay" is won.
When the "replay condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "replay" is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. Thus, the reel 31 is controlled to stop.

Specifically, when the left stops, "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row (effective line), and when the middle stops, "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is displayed. It is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and when the right stop is made, the "replay" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the right middle row (effective line).
Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is stopped and displayed on the active line, medals are automatically inserted and the game can be played again.
In addition, when a prize is won with "Replay", "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay" is stopped and displayed on the middle line (valid line).

Fig. 9 shows a reel condition device. As shown in Fig. 9, in this embodiment, the reel condition device is provided with two types of reel condition devices: a "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to the reel condition device number "1", and a "1BB-B condition device" corresponding to the reel condition device number "2".
As shown in FIG. 10, the "1BB-A condition device" is only eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted that are not in the internal state, and is not eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted that are not in the internal state.
In contrast, the "1BB-B condition device" is only eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted that are not inside the box, and is not eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted that are not inside the box.

In addition, when two non-internal medals are inserted, if the winning number "19" is won in the lottery by the prize lottery means 61, the prize condition device number "1" is generated from the winning number "19", The "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to accessory condition device number "1" is activated.
On the other hand, when the winning number "20" is won in the lottery by the prize drawing means 61 when three non-internal medals are inserted, the prize condition device number "2" is generated from the winning number "20". Then, the "1BB-B condition device" corresponding to accessory condition device number "2" is activated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination of the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line.
When the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is displayed stopped on an active line, a "1BB-A win" occurs, and although no medals are paid out in the current game, the game transitions to "1BB-A game" from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on the pay line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-A inside".

If the role selection means 61 does not result in a winning result when two medals are inserted "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on the active line. However, in this embodiment, the role selection means 61 does not result in a non-winning result while "inside 1BB-A", so once the game moves to "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

Moreover, during "1BB-A game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to "RB" is not set, and during "1BB-A game", the symbol combination corresponding to "RB" is not stopped and displayed, and "RB game" is performed. are executed continuously.
In addition, during "RB gaming", only two types of "1-card role ALL condition device" and "small role ALL condition device" are subject to lottery by the role lottery means 61, and every game, "1-card role ALL condition device" Or, either the "small role ALL condition device" is activated. For this reason, the probability of winning a small winning combination is higher when "RB game is in progress", that is, when "1BB-A game is in progress" than when it is not inside or "while inside 1BB-A".

Furthermore, while playing RB, the specified number (bet number of medals that can start playing) becomes 3, and the 1-card hand ALL condition device is activated with a probability of 60535/65536. Then, "1" medal is paid out. Therefore, while "RB gaming", that is, "1BB-A gaming", the player's medals decrease.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when the "2" games are played, when there are "2" wins, or when the end conditions of the "1BB-A game" are met. In other words, the end condition for the "RB game" is set to be that "2" games have been played, that there have been "2" winnings, or that the end conditions for the "1BB-A game" have been met. has been done.

In addition, the "1BB-A game" continues until the cumulative number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number given) exceeds "210", and ends when the cumulative number of medals acquired exceeds "210". . That is, the end condition for the "1BB-A game" is set that the cumulative number of acquired medals exceeds "210".
Then, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again. In this way, the "RB game" is executed continuously during the "1BB-A game".
Furthermore, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied, the "1BB-A game" ends and the game moves to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, if the termination conditions for "1BB-A game" are met during "RB game", the "RB game" will be ended, "1BB-A game" will be ended, and the transition will be made to non-internal mode. do.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B", and when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on an active line.
When the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is displayed stopped on an active line, a "1BB-B win" is achieved, and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game will transition to a "1BB-B game" from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed stopped on the pay line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-B inside".

Note that if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61 when three medals of "1BB-B inside" are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in this embodiment, , since there is no possibility of non-winning in the role lottery means 61 for "1BB-B inside", once it moves to "1BB-B inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will be on the active line. It never stops showing up.

Furthermore, during the ``1BB-B game'', the ``RB game'' is executed continuously, similar to the ``1BB-A game''.
Furthermore, similar to the "1BB-A game", the "1BB-B game" continues until the cumulative number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number of awards given) exceeds "210", and the number of acquired medals increases. The process ends when the cumulative total exceeds 210 pieces.
Then, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Furthermore, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is satisfied, the "1BB-B game" ends and the game moves to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, if the termination conditions for "1BB-B game" are met during "RB game", the "RB game" will be ended, "1BB-B game" will be ended, and the transition will be made to non-internal mode. do.

FIG. 10 is a diagram (number table) showing the number of winning numbers to be placed for each game state in this embodiment.
In Fig. 10, "2" indicates "when two medals are inserted", and "3" indicates "when three medals are inserted". In addition, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB-A" and "inside 1BB-B", and "in 1BB" indicates "1BB-A in play" and "1BB-B in play".

Dividing the numbers shown in FIG. 10 by "65536" gives the probability of winning for each winning number.
For example, in Figure 10, since the number set for the winning number "1" when two non-internal medals are inserted is "2500", the probability of winning the winning number "1" when two non-internal medals are inserted becomes "2500/65536".
For example, if the winning number "1" is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning number and replay condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "1", and the small winning number and replay condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "1". 1” is activated.

As shown in FIG. 10, for "Small role A1 condition device" to "Small role I condition device", non-internal and internal (inside 1BB-A, inside 1BB-B) are subject to lottery, but During 1BB (during 1BB-A game, 1BB-B game), it is not eligible for lottery.
In addition, the "1-card ALL condition device" is a lottery target in all gaming states.
Furthermore, the "Small role ALL condition device" is the opposite of the "Small role A1 condition device" to "Small role I condition device", and the "Small role ALL condition device" is drawn only during 1BB (during 1BB-A game, 1BB-B game). Non-internal and internal (1BB-A internal, 1BB-B internal) are not eligible for the lottery.

Furthermore, the "replay condition device", like the "small role A1 condition device" to "small role I condition device", is eligible for lottery for non-internal and internal (1BB-A internal, 1BB-B internal) However, during 1BB (during 1BB-A game, 1BB-B game), it is not eligible for lottery.
Furthermore, the "1BB-A condition device" becomes a lottery target only when two non-internal medals are inserted, and is not a lottery target in other gaming states.
On the other hand, the "1BB-B condition device" becomes a lottery target only when three non-internal medals are inserted, and is not a lottery target in other game states.

In other words, when two medals are inserted into the non-internal space, the "1BB-A condition device" is subject to the lottery, but the "1BB-B condition device" is not subject to the lottery.
In contrast, when three medals are inserted into the non-internal space, the "1BB-B condition device" is subject to the lottery, but the "1BB-A condition device" is not subject to the lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, in any game state, the winning number "1" to "20" is selected by the lottery selection means 61, and there is no case of a non-winning number.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in this embodiment will be explained.
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state in this embodiment, and FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the changing conditions of the gaming state in this embodiment.
In FIG. 12, "∞" (infinite) in the number of times column means that there is no upper limit for the number of times that can be played for each gaming state, and the number of times that the game can be played in that gaming state until the transition condition described in the change opportunity column is met. means to maintain (continue).

The main control means 50 determines whether or not the transition conditions for the gaming state are satisfied when all the reels 31 are stopped in every game, and when it is determined that the transition conditions for the gaming state are satisfied, the main control means 50 causes the gaming state to transition. Control.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to non-internal mode. When shipped from the factory, it transitions to non-internal. Further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off, and the power is turned on in this state, the setting change state is entered. At this time, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed and the process transitions to non-internal mode.

The non-internal state is maintained until the "1BB-A condition device" or "1BB-B condition device" is activated. As described above, when two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" is selected as a lottery target, and when three non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-B condition device" is selected as a lottery target.
Then, when two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" is activated (1BB-A winning), and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB-A winning). Then, the game shifts to "1BB-A game" (1BB-A operation).
On the other hand, when the ``1BB-A condition device'' is activated when two non-internal medals are inserted, but the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-A'' does not stop and display on the active line, the ``1BB-A internal condition device'' is activated. ”.

In addition, if "1BB-A inside" is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61 when two medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but when three medals are inserted, Sometimes, even if the prize lottery means 61 does not win, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop and display on the active line.
However, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning combination lottery means 61 in "1BB-A inside", once it shifts to "1BB-A inside", after that, "1BB-A inside" will not be won. Since the symbol combination corresponding to "-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, "1BB-A inside" will continue to be maintained.

Also, when 3 non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-B condition device" is activated (1BB-B winning), and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB-B winning). Then, the game shifts to "1BB-B game" (1BB-B operation).
On the other hand, when the ``1BB-B condition device'' is activated when three non-internal medals are inserted, if the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-B'' does not stop and display on the active line, the ``1BB-B internal condition device'' is activated. ”.

In addition, if "1BB-B inside" is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61 when 3 medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but when 2 medals are inserted, Sometimes, even if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" does not stop and display on the active line.
However, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning combination lottery means 61 in "1BB-B inside", once it shifts to "1BB-B inside", after that, "1BB-B inside" will not be won. Since the symbol combination corresponding to "-B" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, "1BB-B inside" will continue to be maintained.

Furthermore, during "1BB-A game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when the "2" games are played, when there are "2" wins, or when the end conditions of the "1BB-A game" are met.
Furthermore, the "1BB-A game" continues until the cumulative number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number given) exceeds "210", and ends when the cumulative number of medals acquired exceeds "210". .

When the "RB game" is ended, if the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Also, when the "RB game" ends, if the ending condition for the "1BB-A game" is satisfied, the "1BB-A game" ends and the game moves to a non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, and the "1BB-A game" is ended and a transition is made to a non-internal state.

Furthermore, during the ``1BB-B game'', the ``RB game'' is executed continuously, similar to the ``1BB-A game''.
Furthermore, similar to the "1BB-A game", the "1BB-B game" continues until the cumulative number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number of awards given) exceeds "210", and the number of acquired medals increases. The process ends when the cumulative total exceeds 210 pieces.

Then, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Furthermore, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is satisfied, the "1BB-B game" ends and the game moves to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, if the termination conditions for "1BB-B game" are met during "RB game", the "RB game" will be ended, "1BB-B game" will be ended, and the transition will be made to non-internal mode. do.

Next, using Figures 13 to 20, we will explain the characteristics of the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" in this embodiment are activated, and the characteristics of the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" are activated.
Figure 13 (1) is a diagram showing the patterns on the left reel 31 that can be displayed stopped in the display window 18 when the left first stop occurs when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, when the left first stop occurs when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, and when the left first stop occurs when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated.
FIG. 13 (2) shows the symbols on the left reel 31 that can be displayed in the display window 18 when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left second stop occurs after the middle first stop occurs.
Figure 14 is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize C2 condition device" are activated, and Figure 15 is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small prize D1 condition device" to the "small prize F2 condition device" are activated.

FIG. 16 shows a symbol combination in which only the symbol on the middle reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "minor win A1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" are activated. It is a diagram.
FIG. 17 shows a symbol combination in which only the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the “PB=1” arrangement among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the “minor role A1 condition device” to “minor role F2 condition device” are activated. It is a diagram.
FIG. 18 shows a symbol combination in which only the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the “PB=1” arrangement among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the “minor role A1 condition device” to “minor role F2 condition device” are activated. It is a diagram.

FIG. 19(1) is a diagram showing the stop number when winning "Small win 01", and FIG. 19(2) is a diagram showing the stop number when winning "Small win 02". (3) is a diagram showing the stop rolls when winning "Small Win 03".
FIG. 20(1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning "Small win 04", and FIG. 20(2) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning "Small win 05". (3) is a diagram showing the stop rolls when winning "Small win 06".

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left middle right (123)", the probability is "1/1" due to number of winnings priority. The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small winning combination 01" (10 coins paid) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, in order to win the "small win 01", the "replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left row (valid line). Display.
As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, as shown in FIG. There is a case where "Replay" (No. 11) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, “Black BAR” (No. 10), “Replay” (No. 11) and “Bell” (No. 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed within the display window 18.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left, right, middle (132)", there is a probability of "1/1" due to number of tickets priority. The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small winning combination 02" (10 coins paid) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, in order to win "small role 02", the "replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left stage (valid line). Display.

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, as shown in FIG. There is a case where "Replay" (No. 11) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, "Black BAR" (number 10), "Replay" (number 11) and "Bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed within the display window 18.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle Left/Right (213)", the probability of "1/1" is given by priority on the number of coins. The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small winning combination 03" (10 coins paid) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, at the first stop in the middle when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB = 1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped at the middle middle stage (effective line) in order to win "small win 03". Then, at the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle stage (valid line) in order to win "small winning combination 03".

As a result, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the second stop on the left after the first stop in the middle, as shown in FIG. , "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, “Replay” (No. 11), “Bell” (No. 12) and “Watermelon” (No. 13) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed within the display window 18. Further, the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed within the display window 18.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of pressing "left middle right (123)", the probability is "1/8" due to number priority. Then, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 63" or "minor winning combination 64" (one coin paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, in order to make it possible to win "small win 63" or "small win 64", the "replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is activated. Display stop in the middle left row.

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, as shown in FIG. There is a case where "Replay" (number 11) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Bell" (12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, "Black BAR" (number 10), "Replay" (number 11) and "Bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed within the display window 18.

In this way, the first left stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and the left first stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated. When stopped, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18, as shown in FIG. 13 (1). shall be.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating conditional device (the lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 that is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop. .

In addition, when the “small win C1 condition device” is activated, when the left second stop occurs after the center first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 13 (2), “REPLAY” (No. 11), “BELL” (No. 12), and “WATERMARK” (No. 13) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped in the display window 18, but the “BLACK BAR” (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is not displayed as stopped in the display window 18.
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, different symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed in the display window 18 when the first reel stops on the left (when the push order is incorrect) and when the second reel stops on the left after the first reel stops in the middle (when the push order is correct).

When the "minor prize C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor prize 03", and ``Replay'', which is the symbol ``PB=1'' on the left reel 31, is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from stopping and displaying on the active line, so "minor role 03" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up "Small win 63" and "Small win 64" are one type of "replay", and the symbols on the right reel 31 that make up "Small win 63" and "Small win 64" are one type of "replay". There is one type of pattern: "Red 7".
In this way, the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed at the first left stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated are determined respectively. By using one type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated.

Furthermore, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4", and "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64" The probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31, which constitutes "Small Winning 64", can be stopped and displayed on the active line is also "1/4", and it constitutes "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64". The probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is also "1/4".
As a result, the winning probability (acquisition rate) of a single winning combination when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small winning combination C1 condition device" is activated can be lowered to "1/8", which in turn lowers the ball payout rate per game. Since it can be lowered, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left middle right", that is, the left reel 31 is stopped first, and the second When the middle reel 31 is stopped at the third time and the right reel 31 is stopped at the third time, "10", which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "small role A1 condition device", is paid out. The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 01" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up "Small win 01" are one type of "Replay", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 that make up "Small win 01" are one type of "Bell"; The symbol on the right reel 31 constituting "Small Win 01" is one type of "Watermelon".

Furthermore, "Replay" on the left reel 31 that makes up "Small win 01" has a "PB=1" arrangement, and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 that makes up "Small win 01" also has a "PB=1" arrangement. ``Watermelon'' on the right reel 31 that constitutes ``Small Win 01'' is also placed in ``PB=1''.
In this way, the symbols on each reel 31 constituting the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated are set to "PB=1", and the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. The symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" is activated by setting the number of symbols on each reel 31 to one type, which constitutes the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the push order is correct during activation. can be reduced in number.

The "small win A2 condition device" is also the same as the "small win A1 condition device."
As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small role A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left middle right", that is, the left reel 31 is stopped first, and the middle reel is stopped second. When the reel 31 is stopped and the right reel 31 is stopped third, a "small win" that pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals corresponding to the "small win A2 condition device" The symbol combination corresponding to "01" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As mentioned above, the symbols on each reel 31 constituting "minor prize 01" are arranged in "PB=1", and the type of symbol on each reel 31 constituting "minor prize 01" is one type. . Thereby, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination A2 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

Also, as mentioned above, the straight line that passes through "upper left row" - "upper middle row" - "upper right row" is the "upper row line", and passes through "middle left row" - "middle row" - "middle right row". A straight line is defined as a "middle line", and a straight line passing through "lower left tier" - "lower middle tier" - "lower right tier" is defined as a "lower tier line". Furthermore, a straight line passing through "upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "lower right row" is a "down-right line", and a straight line passing through "lower left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row" Let the line be the ``right-up line'', and the small mountain-shaped line passing through the ``lower left step'', ``middle middle step'', and ``lower right step'' be the ``small mountain line''. In this embodiment, only the "middle line" is a "valid line", and the others are "invalid lines".

Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), when the symbol combination ("Replay" - "Bell" - "Watermelon") corresponding to "Small win 01" is stopped and displayed on the active line ("Small win 01") When winning a prize), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "down-right line" (invalid line) passing through "Top left row" - "Middle middle row" - "Bottom right row".
Also, as shown in Figure 19 (2), when the symbol combination ("Replay" - "Cherry" - "Replay") corresponding to "Minor Role 02" is stopped and displayed on the active line ("Minor Role 02") When winning a prize), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "upper line" (invalid line) passing through "upper left row" - "upper middle row" - "upper right row".

Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 03" is "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell", and when "Small win 03" is won, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line) as shown in FIG. 19 (3).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (1), when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04"("watermelon"-"bell"-"replay") is displayed stopped on an active line (when "small win 04" is won), "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are displayed stopped on an "upward-right line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left row"-"middle middle row"-"upper right row".

Also, as shown in Figure 20 (2), when the symbol combination ("Watermelon" - "Bell" - "Watermelon") corresponding to "Small win 05" is stopped and displayed on the active line ("Small win 05") (When winning a prize), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "Oyama line" (invalid line) passing through "Lower left row" - "Middle middle row" - "Lower right row".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (3), when the symbol combination ("Watermelon" - "Replay" - "Watermelon") corresponding to "Small win 06" is stopped and displayed on the active line ("Small win 06") (when winning a prize), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "lower line" (invalid line) passing through "lower left row" - "lower middle row" - "lower right row".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (1), when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 04" is stopped and displayed on the active line (when "minor prize 04" wins), "cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed. may be stopped and displayed within the display window 18 (upper left row).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 05" is stopped and displayed on the active line (when "minor winning combination 05" is won), "cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed. ” may be stopped and displayed in the display window 18 (upper left row).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (3), when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 06" is stopped and displayed on the active line (at the time of winning of "minor prize 06"), the "cherry" on the left reel 31 may be stopped and displayed within the display window 18 (upper left row).
In the present embodiment, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 are stopped and displayed on the active lines of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31. It is not a symbol combination that will win a prize regardless of the symbol drawn.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line, it does not have a winning symbol combination regardless of the symbols stopped and displayed on the active line on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31. . In other words, when a predetermined symbol on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line, a prize is won regardless of the symbols stopped and displayed on the active line on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31.There is no so-called single-shot winning combination. .

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a case where the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the first stop on the left when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated. However, there is a case where the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the pressing order is correct when the "Small win D1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" is activated.

Here, in this embodiment, an AT lottery is executed in a game in which the winning number "13" or "14" is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. In addition, in a game where the winning number "13" is won, the "small win G condition device" is activated and the "cherries" are aligned on the "small win 79" or "small win 80" (invalid line). ) can be won, and in the game where the winning number "14" is won, the "Small win H condition device" is activated and "Small win 81" ("Cherry" is aligned on the middle line (valid line)) is won. It becomes possible. Therefore, when the "cherries" line up on the upward-sloping line (invalid line) or the middle line (valid line), the player expects to win the AT lottery.

In addition, in the conventional slot machine 10, in the winning combination, a winning combination related to cherries and a special winning combination (bonus) may be won at the same time (duplicate winning), or when a winning combination related to cherries is won, an AT lottery is performed, and a winning combination related to cherries is also won. When a "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 (upper left row, middle left row, or lower left row) in a game, regardless of the stopped display symbols on the active line of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31, the cherry will be displayed. It is known that he will win prizes for his role. In such a slot machine 10, when a "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 and a winning combination related to cherries is won, the player expects to win a special winning combination or an AT lottery.

However, in this embodiment, the "cherry" on the left reel 31 may be stopped and displayed in the display window 18 even when the pressing order is correct when the "small win D1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated. However, at this time, the left reel 31 is at the second or third stop, and at that point two or three "bells" are aligned on the invalid line.
As a result, the player is made to recognize that the winning combination is related to the bell, and even if the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations such as winning in the AT lottery. I try not to let it happen.

As mentioned above, in the example shown in FIG. 20(1), the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 (upper left row), but at this time, it is stopped and displayed on the active line. What is present is a symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 04". The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 04" is "Watermelon" - "Bell" - "Replay", which is a winning symbol regardless of the stopped display symbols on the active line of the middle reel 31 and right reel 31. It's not a combination. That is, the stop result shown in FIG. 20(1) is not a stop result that results in a prize regarding cherries, nor is it a stop result that results in a so-called single-shot prize. The stop results shown in FIGS. 20(2) and (3) are also the same as the stop results shown in FIG. 20(1).

In addition, as shown in Figure 14, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 01,""Small win 07,""Small win 08," and "Small win A1 condition device." These are symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination 31, 32, 53, or 54.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 01" can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is correct.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 07" and "minor prize 08" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination in which the symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1". The symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 07" and "small winning combination 08" are correct in the pressing order at the first stop, but can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order becomes incorrect at the second stop.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 31", "minor winnings 32", "minor winnings 53", and "minor winnings 54" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols that are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1" is arranged, and the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1". The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 31", "Small win 32", "Small win 53", and "Small win 54" can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order becomes incorrect at the first stop.

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 consist of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". ” arrangement, and the other “1” symbols on the reel 31 are larger than the number (2) of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in “PB≠1”.

Also, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged in "PB = 1" will be stopped and displayed on the active line. .
Furthermore, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is a correct answer, but if the second stop is an incorrect answer, the "PB=1" arrangement will be made at the first and second stops. At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, if the answer is incorrect at the first stop, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement will be stopped and displayed on the active line at the first stop, and at the second stop At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

The symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each of the condition devices "Small win A2 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are activated are also the same as in the "Small win A1 condition device."
The symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each condition device from “Small role A2 condition device” to “Small role F2 condition device” is activated are when “1” symbols on reel 31 are arranged in “PB=1”. , and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are arranged in "PB≠1", and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are "PB= A symbol combination consisting of a symbol with a "PB≠1" arrangement and another "1" symbol on the reel 31 with a "PB≠1" arrangement, and "3" symbols on the reel 31 It has a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in "PB=1".

In addition, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each condition device from "Small win A2 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, "1" symbol on the reel 31 is "PB = 1 The number of symbol combinations is "4", which is made up of symbols arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each condition device from "Small win A2 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, "2" symbols on the reel 31 are "PB= The number of symbol combinations is "2", consisting of a symbol arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the other "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each condition device from “Small win A2 condition device” to “Small win F2 condition device” is activated, “3” symbols on the reel 31 are “PB=1 The number of symbol combinations made up of symbols arranged in this manner is "1".
Then, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. The number of symbol combinations consists of "2" symbols on the reels 31 arranged in "PB=1", and the other "1" symbols on the reels 31 in "PB≠1". The number of symbol combinations made up of symbols arranged in the arrangement and "3" symbols on the reel 31 is greater than the number of symbol combinations made up of the symbols arranged "PB=1".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the medal corresponding to the "small win A1 condition device" is determined according to the subsequent stop operation. The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 01" which pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of paid out coins can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01" is selected according to the subsequent stop operation. A symbol combination corresponding to ``Small Win 31'' or ``Small Win 32'' that pays out ``1'' medal less than when ``Small Win 31'' or ``Small Win 32'' is paid out on the active line can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01" is displayed according to the subsequent stop operation. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 53" or "minor winning combination 54" which pays out "1" medal less than when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 31" and "minor prize 32" is "watermelon". The “Watermelon” on the middle reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to “small winning combination 01”, and “PB=1” is arranged on the middle reel 31. This is the design.
As a result, when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated and the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop in the middle, it is possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and the "bell" on the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being missed. " can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "minor combination 01" can be prevented from winning.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 31" and "Small win 32" is one type of "Red 7", which corresponds to "Small win 31" and "Small win 32". The symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting the symbol combination is one type of "watermelon".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 53" and "minor winning combination 54" is "cherry". The “cherry” on the right reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to “small winning combination 01”, and “PB=1” is arranged on the right reel 31. This is the design.
As a result, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated and the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the right, it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and the "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 can be prevented. ” can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so it is possible to prevent “minor winning combination 01” from winning.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" and "small win 54" is only one type, "white BAR," and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" and "small win 54" is only one type, "cherry."
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the medal corresponding to the "small win C1 condition device" is determined according to the subsequent stop operation. The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 03" which pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of paid out coins can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "minor win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 03" is determined according to the subsequent stop operation. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 63" or "minor winning combination 64" which pays out "1" medal less than when "minor winning combination 64" is stopped and displayed on the effective line can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbols on the left reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 63" and "minor winnings 64" are "replay". The "replay" on the left reel 31 is a symbol different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 03", and "PB=1" is arranged on the left reel 31. This is the design.
As a result, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated and the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the left, it is possible to prevent the "Replay" of the left reel 31 from being missed, and the "Bell" of the left reel 31 is not missed. ” can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so it is possible to prevent “minor winning combination 03” from winning.

14, the symbols on the middle reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" are "red 7" or "blue 7." The "red 7" or "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03," and is a symbol that is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration on the middle reel 31.
14, the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is "red 7". The "red 7" on the right reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03", and is a symbol arranged in "PB ≠ 1" on the right reel 31.

The symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is only one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is only one type, "red 7."
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on a winning line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the left reel 31 has a part where "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11), and "Bell" (No. 12) are arranged in this order. .
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13(1), when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop occurs, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay" (number 11) and "Bell" (number 12) can be stopped and displayed within the display window 18.
Furthermore, among the "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, "Replay" that is stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "Small win 63". and symbols on the left reel 31 that constitute a symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 64".

And, as shown in FIG. 13(1), when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is activated, and when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is also performed, the "small role C1 condition device" is activated. "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 are stopped within the display window 18, similar to the first stop on the left when the "condition device" is activated. Make it displayable.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating conditional device (the lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 that is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, for the "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win B2 condition device", the correct answer pressing order is "Left center right" or "Left center right". That is, the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win B2 condition device" are correct in the pressing order at the time of the first left stop.
Here, the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win B2 condition device" are referred to as the "left first stop correct answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 31", "Small win 32", "Small win 53", and "Small win 54" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 33,""Small win 34,""Small win 49," and "Small win 50." is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning B1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 35", "Small Winning 36", "Small Winning 47" and "Small Winning 48" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning B2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 37", "Small Winning 38", "Small Winning 57" and "Small Winning 58" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "left first stop correct answer group" that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is "16", which is made up of symbols that are arranged in such a way that the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".

Also, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the "small role C1 condition device" to the "small role D2 condition device" have the correct push order of "middle left and right" or "middle right and left". In other words, the "small role C1 condition device" to the "small role D2 condition device" are correct in the push order at the time of the first middle stop.
Here, the "small prize C1 condition device" to the "small prize D2 condition device" are referred to as the "middle first stop correct answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 51", "Small win 52", "Small win 63", and "Small win 64" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 55", "Small win 56", "Small win 65", and "Small win 66" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 59", "Small win 60", "Small win 67", and "Small win 68" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 61", "Small win 62", "Small win 69", and "Small win 70" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "medium first stop correct answer group" that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is "16", which is made up of symbols that are arranged in such a way that the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, for the "Small win E1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device", the correct answer press order is "Right left middle" or "Right middle left". That is, the "small win E1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are correct in the pressing order at the time of the first stop on the right.
Here, the "small win E1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are referred to as the "right first stop correct answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 43", "Small win 46", "Small win 71", and "Small win 72" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 44", "Small win 45", "Small win 77", and "Small win 78" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 39", "Small win 40", "Small win 75", and "Small win 76" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 41", "Small win 42", "Small win 73", and "Small win 74" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "right first stop correct answer group" that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is "16", which is made up of symbols that are arranged in such a way that the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, "Small win C1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" can be used to select "middle left and right,""middle right left,""right left middle," or "right middle left." Correct answer will be pressed in order. That is, the "small win C1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" become incorrect in the pressing order at the time of the first left stop.
Here, the "small win C1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are referred to as the "incorrect answer group at the first stop on the left".

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 63" and "Small win 64" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 65" and "Small win 66" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 67" and "Small win 68" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 69" and "Small win 70" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "minor prize E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 71" and "minor prize 72" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 77" and "Small win 78" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 75" and "Small win 76" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 73" and "Small win 74" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "left first stop incorrect answer group" that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1" The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged such that "PB≠1" is "16".
That is, as shown in FIG. 18, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 63" to "Small win 78" can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the condition device included in the "left first stop incorrect answer group" is activated. This is a symbol combination in which the symbols (replay) on the left reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in "PB≠1". This is a symbol combination consisting of the symbols that are present. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win B2 condition device" and "Small win E1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are "left center right" , "Left-right middle", "Right-left middle", or "Right-center left" are the correct answer pressing order. That is, "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win B2 condition device" and "Small win E1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are incorrect in the pressing order at the time of the middle first stop.
Here, "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win B2 condition device" and "Small win E1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are referred to as "incorrect answer group at middle first stop".

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 31" and "Small Winning 32" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning A2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 33" and "Small Winning 34" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 35" and "Small win 36" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win B2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 37" and "Small win 38" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 43" and "Small win 46" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 44" and "Small win 45" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 39" and "Small win 40" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 41" and "Small win 42" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on a pay line when the condition device is activated, which are included in the “middle first incorrect solution group”, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the middle reel 31 is in the “PB=1” arrangement and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “16”.
16, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 31" to "small win 46" are symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on a pay line when a condition device included in the "middle first stop incorrect solution group" is activated, and are symbol combinations in which the symbol (watermelon) on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win D2 condition device" can be used to select "left middle right,""left middle right,""center right left," or "center right left." Correct answer will be pressed in order. That is, "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win D2 condition device" become incorrect in the pressing order at the time of the first stop on the right.
Here, the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win D2 condition device" are referred to as the "right first stop incorrect answer group".

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 53" and "Small win 54" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 49" and "Small win 50" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 47" and "Small win 48" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win B2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 57" and "Small win 58" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 51" and "Small win 52" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 55" and "Small win 56" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 59" and "Small win 60" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 61" and "Small win 62" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "right first stop incorrect answer group" that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1" The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "16".
That is, as shown in FIG. 17, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 53" to "Small win 62" can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the condition device included in the "right first stop incorrect answer group" is activated. This is a symbol combination in which the symbol (cherry) on the right reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 are arranged in "PB≠1". This is a symbol combination consisting of the symbols that are present. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

Then, ``Correct answer group at the first stop on the left'', ``Correct answer group at the first stop in the middle'', ``Correct answer group at the first right stop'', ``Incorrect answer group at the first stop on the left'', and ``Incorrect answer group at the first stop in the center''. As explained in "Correct Answer Group" and "Incorrect Answer Group at First Stop on the Right," "1" symbols on the reel 31 consist of symbols arranged in "PB=1", and the other "2" By setting the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB≠1" to "16", the "minor win A1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" are activated. The number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed at times can be reduced.

In other words, the condition devices included in the "incorrect answer group at the first stop in the middle" (small role A1 condition device, minor role A2 condition device, minor role B1 condition device, minor role B2 condition device, minor role E1 condition device, minor role In the game when the E2 condition device, the small win F1 condition device, the small win F2 condition device are activated, the pressing order becomes incorrect at the time of the middle first stop. Then, for a symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed at the first stop of the middle in a game when the conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group at the first stop of the middle" is activated, the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1" and There is one type (watermelon), and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are both arranged so that "PB≠1".

Furthermore, in order to give priority to the number of symbols to win the symbol combination (1 piece) that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is correct in the game when the conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group when stopping the middle first" is activated, The number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed at the first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) in the game when the conditional devices included in the "incorrect answer at one stop group" is activated is set to "2" for each conditional device. ” pieces.
Thereby, it is possible to minimize the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed at the first stop in the game when the conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group at the first stop in the middle" is activated.
The "incorrect answer group at the first stop on the left" and the "incorrect answer group at the first right stop" are the same as the "incorrect answer group at the first stop in the center."

Here, in conventional slot machines, a specification called an accelerator AT or the like is known. A slot machine equipped with this accelerator AT is equipped with a plurality of types of push order bells, and each push order bell is provided with a high bell and a cheap bell with different symbol combinations.
It should be noted that the term "high bell" refers to a bell that pays out a large number of coins and is won when the push order bell is won and the push order is correct. Furthermore, the term "cheap bell" means a bell with a small number of payouts that can be won if the pressing order bell is won and the pressing order is incorrect.
In addition, during non-internal and internal games, a lottery is held for winning combinations that include all the bells in the push order, and if each push order bell is won and the push order is correct, the corresponding higher bell will be won and the push order bell will be won. If the answer is incorrect, the higher bell will not win, but any corresponding lower bell will be able to win.

On the other hand, during the special game, the lottery for the push order bells is not held, but instead, the lottery for the small role ALL is held in which all high and low bells are won at the same time (duplicate winning). In a game in which the small winning combination ALL is won, one of the higher bells wins a prize.
Then, set the winning probability of the small winning combination ALL during the special game to be higher than the winning probability of each push order bell in the non-internal medium and internal medium, and set the lottery results other than winning the small winning combination ALL as non-winning, Alternatively, it is assumed that all one-card roles are won multiple times.
As a result, while the winning probability of each high bell and each cheap bell during the special game is higher than the winning probability of each high bell and cheap bell during non-internal and internal games, players can The number of medals is decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, by setting the winning probability of each push order bell (small role A1 condition device to small role F2 condition device) in non-internal and internal medium, each high bell The probability of winning for (minor prizes 01 to 06) is set as "5000/65536."
In addition, by setting the winning probability of the small win ALL (small win ALL condition device) during the special game to "5001/65536", each high prize bell (small win 01 to small win 06) during the special game can be won. The probability is set as "5001/65536".
However, the winning probability of each small role during the special game can be set to be higher than the winning probability of each small role during non-internal and internal. /65536".

By the way, the slot machine equipped with the above-mentioned conventional accelerator AT is equipped with multiple types of push order bells, as well as high and low bells with different symbol combinations for each push order bell. Problems have arisen in that the total number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when a sequential bell is won increases, and that it becomes difficult for the player to understand the symbol combinations corresponding to high bells.
Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, by appropriately setting the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed in the game when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated, Minimizes the total number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed during play when the "Small role A1 condition device" to "Small role F2 condition device" are activated, and supports "Small role 01" to "Small role 06" To make it easy for a player to understand the stopped number when a symbol combination is stopped and displayed on an active line.

<Second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, in a game in which multiple types of small winning combinations with different numbers of coins to be paid out are won, the type of winning small winning combinations differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, so that the game result (number of coins paid out) is advantageous/disadvantageous. This is a slot machine in which this occurs, and the symbol arrangement is different from that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the second embodiment.
The symbol arrangement of the reel 31 in the second embodiment is such that the "bells" numbered "12" and "17" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 2 are replaced with "bell A", and The "bells" at numbers "2" and "7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell B", and the "bells" on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are all replaced with "bell A". It is something that Other than that, it is the same as the symbol arrangement of the reel 31 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.
In addition, in the first embodiment, the "bell" on the left reel 31 was arranged in "PB=1", but in the second embodiment, the "bell A" on the left reel 31 was arranged in "PB≠1". , “Bell B” on the left reel 31 is also placed in “PB≠1”. However, in the second embodiment, the two symbols "Bell A" and "Bell B" on the left reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

FIGS. 22 and 23 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as the winning combinations corresponding to the winning numbers drawn by the winning lottery means 61), symbol combinations, and the number of coins to be paid out in this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the gaming states of this embodiment include non-internal, 1BB internal, and 1BB gaming. Further, in this embodiment, there is only one type of special winning combination, "1BB".
In FIGS. 22 and 23, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB", and "inside 1BB" indicates "in 1BB game".

The symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 01", "minor winnings 04", and "minor winnings 05" are those in which the "bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "bell A".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "minor win 02" and "minor win 06" are the same as in the first embodiment.
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 03" replaces "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A/Bell B", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A/Bell B". " has been replaced with "Bell A."

The symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 07" to "minor winnings 10" are those in which the "bell" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "bell A".
The symbol combinations corresponding to “Small Win 11” to “Small Win 14” are those in which “Bell” on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with “Bell A”.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 15" is as follows: "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A". It has been replaced with .
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 16" is as follows: "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A". It has been replaced with .
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 17" is as follows: "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell B", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A". It has been replaced with .
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 18" is as follows: "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Red 7", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A". It has been replaced with .

The pattern combinations corresponding to "Small Winning Symbol 19" to "Small Winning Symbol 22" are obtained by replacing the "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A/Bell B" and by replacing the "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 23" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 24" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 25" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell B."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 26" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 27" is the one in which "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "red 7".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 28" is the one in which "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "blue 7".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 29" is the one in which "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "black BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30" is the one in which "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 32" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 33" is obtained by replacing the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Bell B."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 34" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 35" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A" and by replacing the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "blue 7".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 36" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR" and by replacing the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "blue 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 37" is as follows: "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell B", and "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Red 7". ” has been replaced.
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 38" is as follows: "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Red 7", and "White BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Red 7". ” has been replaced.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 39" is the one in which "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 40" is as follows: "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR", and "White BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Black BAR". ” has been replaced.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 41" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell B" and by replacing the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 42" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 43" is as follows: "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A", and "Red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR". ” has been replaced.
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 44" is as follows: "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR", and "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR". ” has been replaced.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 45" is as follows: "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell B", and "Red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Black BAR". ” has been replaced.
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 46" is as follows: "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Red 7", and "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Black BAR". ” has been replaced.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 47" to "small prize 82" and "replay" are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is the same as the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, the "small role condition device" and the "replay condition device" are the same as in the first embodiment, and the "1BB condition device" is the same as the "1BB-A condition device" in the first embodiment. .

FIG. 24 is a diagram (number table) showing the number of winning numbers to be placed for each game state in the second embodiment.
In FIG. 24, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB" and "in 1BB" indicates "in 1BB play."
As in the first embodiment, dividing the numbers shown in FIG. 24 by "65536" gives the winning probability of each winning number.

As shown in FIG. 24, "Small role A1 condition device" to "Small role I condition device" are eligible for lottery during non-internal and internal (inside 1BB), but during 1BB (during 1BB playing) Not eligible for lottery.
In addition, the "1-card ALL condition device" is a lottery target in all gaming states.
Furthermore, the "Small role ALL condition device", contrary to the "Small role A1 condition device" to "Small role I condition device", is eligible for lottery only during 1BB (during 1BB game), and is eligible for lottery only during non-internal and internal Medium (1BB internal medium) is not eligible for lottery.

Furthermore, like the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize I condition device," the "replay condition device" is subject to a lottery when it is not in the internal state and when it is in the internal state (within 1BB), but is not subject to a lottery when it is in 1BB (during 1BB play).
In addition, the "1BB condition device" is only an object of the lottery when it is not inside the game, and is not an object of the lottery in any other game state.
In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in any game state, the winning number "1" to "20" will be selected by the role selection means 61, and there will be no non-winning numbers.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment, and FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the changing conditions of the gaming state in the present embodiment.
In Figure 26, "∞" (infinite) in the number of times column means that there is no upper limit set for each gaming state, and the number of plays in that gaming state will continue until the transition condition described in the change opportunity column is met. means to maintain (continue).

The main control means 50 determines whether or not the transition conditions for the gaming state are satisfied when all the reels 31 are stopped in every game, and when it is determined that the transition conditions for the gaming state are satisfied, the main control means 50 causes the gaming state to transition. Control.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to non-internal mode. When shipped from the factory, it transitions to non-internal. Further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off, and the power is turned on in this state, the setting change state is entered. At this time, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed and the process transitions to non-internal mode.

While not inside, it is maintained until the "1BB condition device" is activated.
Then, when the "1BB condition device" is activated (1BB winning) while it is not inside, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB winning), the transition to "1BB game" (1BB activation) occurs. .
On the other hand, if the "1BB condition device" is activated while not inside, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not stopped and displayed on the active line, the state shifts to "1BB inside".

Moreover, when "1BB inside" is not won by the combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
However, in this embodiment, since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning combination lottery means 61 for "1BB inside", once it moves to "1BB inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" will be on the active line. Since it will not be stopped and displayed, it will continue to maintain "inside 1BB".

Furthermore, during "1BB game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when the "2" games are played, when there are "2" wins, or when the end conditions of the "1BB-A game" are met.
Further, the "1BB game" continues until the cumulative number of acquired medals (number of medals paid out, number given) exceeds "210", and ends when the cumulative number of acquired medals exceeds "210".

Then, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Furthermore, when the "RB game" ends, when the end condition of the "1BB game" is satisfied, the "1BB game" is ended and the game moves to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, when the termination condition of the "1BB game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, the "1BB game" is ended, and the game shifts to the non-internal state.

Next, using FIG. 27, the characteristic points of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" etc. are activated in the second embodiment, and the reel when the "small win A1 condition device" etc. are activated The characteristic points of No. 31 stop control will be explained.
Figure 27 (1) is displayed at the first stop on the left when the small win A1 condition device is activated, the first stop on the left when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and the first stop on the left when the small win C1 condition device is activated. It is a diagram showing symbols on the left reel that can be stopped and displayed within the window.
FIG. 27(2) is a diagram showing symbols on the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window at the second left stop after the middle first stop when the small winning combination C1 condition device is activated.
In FIG. 27, the two-dot chain line passing through the middle left stage, middle middle stage, and right middle stage indicates the effective line. The same applies to FIG. 29, which will be described later.
In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, and the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of pressing "left middle right (123)", priority is given to the number of pieces. , the symbol combination (PB =1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line.
In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, in order to win the "small win 01", the "replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left row (valid line). Display.

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 27 (1). , "Replay" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row, and the As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row. There is a case where "Bell B" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, 6) and "Bell B" (number 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

When the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, middle (132)", the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor combination 02" which pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to "" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, at the first stop on the left when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, in order to win "Small win 02", the "Replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left row (valid line). Display.

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 27 (1). , "Replay" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row, and the As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row. There is a case where "Bell B" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, 6) and "Bell B" (number 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

When the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)", the "small role C1 condition device The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small win 03" which pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to "" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, at the first stop during the operation of the "Small win C1 condition device", in order to win "Small win 03", move "Bell A" (PB = 1) of the middle reel 31 to the middle middle row (effective line). Then, at the second stop on the left, move "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the left reel 31 ("PB = 1" arrangement with the total of 2 symbols) to the left in order to win "Small role 03". Display stop in the middle row (effective line).

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the second left stop after the first middle stop, as shown on the left side of FIG. 27(2), "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row, as shown on the right side of FIG. 27(2), "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row.

In other words, "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell A" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay" (No. 6), "Bell B" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped in the display window 18. Also, "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped in the display window 18 either.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both of which pay out one coin) is stopped and displayed on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
In addition, when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row to make it possible to win "small prize 63" or "small prize 64".

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 27 (1). , "Replay" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row, and the As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row. There is a case where "Bell B" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, 6) and "Bell B" (number 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In this way, the first left stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and the left first stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated. When stopped, as shown in FIG. 7'' (number 5), ``Replay'' (number 6), and ``Bell B'' (number 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating conditional device (the lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 that is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop. .

In addition, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the second left stop after the first stop in the middle, as shown in FIG. ” (No. 12) and “Watermelon” (No. 13), or “Replay” (No. 6), “Bell B” (No. 7) and “Watermelon” (No. 8) on the left reel 31 are stopped in the display window 18. Make it displayable. In this case, "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" on the left reel 31 are not displayed. (No. 5) is also not stopped and displayed in the display window 18.
In this way, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the left side stops when the left first stops (when the pressing order is incorrect) and when the left second stops after the middle first stop (when the pressing order is correct). Different symbols on reels 31 are stopped and displayed in a display window 18.

When the "minor prize C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor prize 03", and ``Replay'', which is the symbol ``PB=1'' on the left reel 31, is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line. It is possible to prevent "Small win 03" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up "Small win 63" and "Small win 64" are one type of "replay", and the symbols on the right reel 31 that make up "Small win 63" and "Small win 64" are one type of "replay". There is one type of pattern: "Red 7".
In this way, the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed at the first left stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated are determined respectively. By using one type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated.

Furthermore, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4", and "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64" The probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31, which constitutes "Small Winning 64", can be stopped and displayed on the active line is also "1/4", and it constitutes "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64". The probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is also "1/4".
As a result, the winning probability (acquisition rate) of a single winning combination when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small winning combination C1 condition device" is activated can be lowered to "1/8", which in turn lowers the ball payout rate per game. Since it can be lowered, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In addition, at the first stop on the left when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, And at the time of the second left stop after the middle first stop when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18. Thereby, it is possible to prevent players from having excessive expectations.

Although the first and second embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the second embodiment, the "bells" numbered "12" and "17" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell A", and the "bells" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell A". ” and “7” are replaced with “Bell B”, and all “Bells” on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with “Bell A”, but the symbol replacement is , but not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 28, "Replay" of numbers "11" and "16" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Replay A", and "1" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Replay A". ” and “Replay” in numbers “6” may be replaced with “Replay B”.
Also, the "cherries" numbered "9" and "14" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "cherry A", and the "cherry" numbered "4" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "cherry A". It may be replaced with "Cherry B".

Furthermore, all "replays" on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "replay A", and all "cherries" on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "cherry A". may be replaced with
Other than that, the symbol arrangement is the same as that of the reel 31 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.
In the first embodiment, the "replay" on the left reel 31 was arranged in "PB=1", but in the modified example shown in FIG. 28, "replay A" on the left reel 31 was arranged in "PB≠1". , and "Replay B" on the left reel 31 is also arranged in "PB≠1". However, in the modification shown in FIG. 28, "Replay A" and "Replay B" on the left reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1" with the sum of the two symbols.

Furthermore, since the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 is replaced as shown in FIG. 28, the symbols constituting the symbol combinations of the winning combinations in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 4 to 5 can be replaced as appropriate.
For example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 01" is "Replay A/Replay B" - "Bell" - "Watermelon", and the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 02" is "Replay A/Replay B". - "Cherry" - "Replay A".
Further, even if the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 is replaced as shown in FIG. 28, the small winning condition device, replay condition device, and 1BB condition device can be the same as in the first embodiment.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)" while the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small prize 01" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small prize A1 condition device", is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" based on the number of medals being given priority.
In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, in order to win "small win 01", "Replay A" or "Replay B" (the two symbols combined form a "PB=1" arrangement) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line).

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 29 (1). , "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row, and the display shown in FIG. 29 (1) As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and There is a case where "Bell" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, “Black BAR” (No. 10), “Replay A” (No. 11) and “Bell” (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or “Red 7” (No. 5) and “Replay B” on the left reel 31. (No. 6) and "Bell" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left and right middle (132)", the "small win B1 The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small winning combination 02" that pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "condition device" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, at the first stop on the left when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, in order to win "Small win 02", "Replay A" or "Replay B" on the left reel 31 (the total of the two symbols is "PB = 1” arrangement) is stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line).

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 29 (1). , "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row, and the display shown in FIG. 29 (1) As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and There is a case where "Bell" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, “Black BAR” (No. 10), “Replay A” (No. 11) and “Bell” (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or “Red 7” (No. 5) and “Replay B” on the left reel 31. (No. 6) and "Bell" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In addition, when the "small winning combination C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)", the "small winning combination C1 The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small winning combination 03" that pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "condition device" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, at the first stop in the middle when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB = 1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped at the middle middle stage (effective line) in order to win "small win 03". Then, at the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle stage (valid line) in order to win "small winning combination 03".

As a result, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the second stop on the left after the first stop in the middle, "Replay A" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 is displayed as shown on the left side of FIG. is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row, As shown on the right side of FIG. 29 (2), "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, and "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row. , there is a case where "Watermelon" (number 8) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.

In other words, "Replay A" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay B" (No. 6), "Bell" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped in the display window 18. Also, "Cherry A" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped in the display window 18, and "Cherry B" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped in the display window 18 either.

In addition, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left middle right (123)", the "small role A symbol combination corresponding to "63" or "minor combination 64" (one payout in either case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, "Replay A" or "Replay B" of the left reel 31 is set so that "Small win 63" or "Small win 64" can be won. (“PB=1” arrangement with 2 symbols total) is stopped and displayed in the middle left row.

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 29 (1). , "Replay A" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row. As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and There is a case where "Bell" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, “Black BAR” (No. 10), “Replay A” (No. 11) and “Bell” (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or “Red 7” (No. 5) and “Replay B” on the left reel 31. (No. 6) and "Bell" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In this way, the first left stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and the left first stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated. When stopped, as shown in FIG. 7'' (number 5), ``Replay B'' (number 6), and ``Bell'' (number 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating conditional device (the lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 that is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop. .

29(2), when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the left second stop after the center first stop, "Replay A" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay B" (No. 6), "Bell" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18. In this case, "Cherry A" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed stopped in the display window 18, and "Cherry B" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed stopped in the display window 18 either.
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, different symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed in the display window 18 when the first reel stops on the left (when the push order is incorrect) and when the second reel stops on the left after the first reel stops in the middle (when the push order is correct).

When the "minor prize C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor prize 03", and On the left reel 31, "Replay A" or "Replay B", which is a symbol arranged in "PB=1" in total of two symbols, is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent "Replay A" or "Replay B" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line. It is possible to prevent "Small win 03" from winning.

In addition, at the first stop on the left when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, And at the second stop on the left after the middle first stop when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, "Cherry A" on the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and the left reel 31 is "Cherry B" is also not stopped and displayed within the display window 18. Furthermore, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, "Cherry A" on the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18 even at the second stop on the left after the middle first stop, and the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed. "Cherry B" is also not stopped and displayed within the display window 18. Thereby, it is possible to prevent players from having excessive expectations.

(2) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the middle line is an effective line, but the effective line is not limited to the middle line, and the number of effective lines is not limited to "1".
For example, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the upper line can be set as a valid line, and the other lines can be set as invalid lines.
Further, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 01" can be "bell" - "replay" - "cherry". In this case, when winning "Small Win 01", "Bell" - "Replay" - "Cherry" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and the line descending to the right (invalid line) is displayed as shown in Figure 30 (1). ), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is stopped and displayed, so the number of stops can be the same as when winning "Small win 01" in the first embodiment.

Similarly, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 02" can be "bell" - "bell" - "bell". In this case, when winning "Small win 02", "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line) as shown in FIG. 30 (2), so in the first embodiment It is possible to make the stopping number the same as when winning "Small win 02".
Further, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 03" can be "watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon". In this case, when winning "Small Win 03", "Watermelon" - "Replay" - "Watermelon" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line) and the middle line (invalid line) as shown in Figure 30 (3). Since "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is displayed in a stopped state, the stopped number can be the same as in the first embodiment when "Small winning combination 03" is won.

Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 04" can be "cherry" - "replay" - "bell". In this case, when winning "Small Win 04", "Cherry" - "Replay" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and the line rising to the right (invalid line) is displayed as shown in Figure 31 (1). ), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is stopped and displayed, so the number of stops can be the same as when winning "Small win 04" in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 05" can be "cherry"-"replay"-"cherry". In this case, when winning "Small win 05", "Cherry" - "Replay" - "Cherry" will be stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and the small mountain line (invalid line), as shown in Figure 31 (2). Since "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is displayed in a stopped state, the stopped number can be the same as that when winning "Small win 05" in the first embodiment.

Further, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 06" can be "cherry"-"watermelon"-"cherry". In this case, when winning "Small Win 06", "Cherry" - "Watermelon" - "Cherry" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line) and the lower line (invalid line) as shown in Figure 31 (3). Since "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is displayed in a stopped state, the stopped numbers can be the same as in the first embodiment when "Small win 06" is won.

Further, for example, the lower line can be made an effective line, or the downward-sloping line can be made an effective line.
Furthermore, for example, "5" lines, including an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an upward line to the right, and a downward downward line to the right, can be used as valid lines.

(3) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, "3" reels 31, that is, the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, are provided, but the number of reels 31 is not limited to "3". .
For example, "4" reels 31, ie, the first reel 31, the second reel 31, the third reel 31, and the fourth reel 31, may be provided side by side. In this case, "4" stop switches 42 from the first stop switch 42 to the fourth stop switch 42 can be provided corresponding to the "4" reels 31, respectively.

(4) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the number of coins to be paid out for the minor prize that will be won when the press order is correct when the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize F2 condition device" is activated is set to "10". However, the number of sheets is not limited to this, and for example, the number of sheets may be "8" or "15".
(5) In the first and second embodiments, the payout number of minor prizes that can be won when the press order is incorrect when the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize F2 condition device" is activated is set to "1". Although the number of sheets is not limited to this, for example, the number of sheets may be "2" or "3".

(6) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, there are 12 condition devices from “Small win A1 condition device” to “Small win F2 condition device” that give an advantage/disadvantage to the game result depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. Although the types are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be six types, for example, "Small win A condition device" to "Small win F condition device."
(7) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" is activated is "left middle right", "left middle right", Six choices were made: "center left and right,""center right left,""center right left," and "center right left."'', ``first stop is on the right, second and third stops are optional'', and ``first stop is on the right, second and third stops are optional''.

(8) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. By setting the winning probability of the conditional device) to "2500/65536", the winning probability of "Small win 01" in non-inside and inside was set to "5000/65536".
Similarly, by setting the winning probabilities of winning numbers "3" (small role B1 condition device) to winning numbers "12" (small role F2 condition device) in non-internal and internal conditions to ``2500/65536,'' respectively. , the probability of winning "Small Role 02" to "Small Role 06" in non-internal and internal matches was set to "5000/65536," respectively.
In addition, by setting the winning probability of winning number "17" (small win ALL condition device) during the special game to "5001/65536", winning of "small win 01" to "small win 06" during the special game is possible. The probabilities were set to ``5001/65536''.

However, the winning probability of each small role during the special game can be set to be higher than the winning probability of each small role during non-internal and internal. ), that is, the winning probability of "minor prize 01" to "minor prize 06" during the special game, may be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

(9) In the first and second embodiments, when the push order bell is won (when the "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are activated), the correct press order is "left center right", " There are 6 choices: ``Left/Middle'', ``Middle Left/Right'', ``Middle Right Left'', ``Right Left Middle'', and ``Right Middle Left'', each with a different high-eye bell for each correct answer press order. The winning combinations (in the above embodiment, "minor winnings 01" to "minor winnings 06") are made to win.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the high-order bell may be of three types, "small winning combination 01" to "small winning combination 03". When the press order is correct when the "Small role A1 condition device", "Small role A2 condition device", "Small role B1 condition device" and "Small role B2 condition device" are activated ("Left center right" or "Left center right") ”), “Small win 01” may be awarded. Similarly, when the press order is correct when the "Small role C1 condition device", "Small role C2 condition device", "Small role D1 condition device" and "Small role D2 condition device" are activated ("Middle left and right" or "Middle right left" ”), “Small win 02” may be awarded. In addition, when the press order is correct when the "Small role E1 condition device", "Small role E2 condition device", "Small role F1 condition device" and "Small role F2 condition device" are activated ("Right left center" or "Right center left ”), “Small win 03” may be awarded.

In this case, it is only necessary to set the winning probability of each small role during the special game to be higher than the winning probability of each small role during non-internal and internal. When the winning probability of winning number "12" (small role F2 condition device) to winning number "12" (small role F2 condition device) is set to "2500/65536", winning number "17" (small role ALL condition device) during the special game The probability of winning can be set to, for example, "10000/65536."

(10) In the first and second embodiments, when the push order bell is won (when the "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are activated), the correct press order is "left center right", " Six choices were made: "center left and right," "center left and right," "center right left," "center right left," and "center right left." "The third stop is optional" (left --), "The first stop is on the right, the second and third stops are optional" (middle --), "The first stop is on the right, and the second and third stops are optional." ” (right--).

In this case, three types of bells can be provided for the correct pressing order: a "left correct bell condition device" where "left --" is the correct pressing order, a "middle correct bell condition device" where "middle --" is the correct pressing order, and a "right correct bell condition device" where "right --" is the correct pressing order.
Then, when the button press order is correct when the "left correct bell condition device" is activated, "small prize 01" is awarded, when the button press order is correct when the "middle correct bell condition device" is activated, "small prize 02" is awarded, and when the button press order is correct when the "right correct bell condition device" is activated, "small prize 03" is awarded.
In this case, when the winning probability of the winning number corresponding to the "left correct bell condition device,""middle correct bell condition device," and "right correct bell condition device" in the non-interior and interior states is set to "5000/65536," the winning probability of the winning number corresponding to the "small prize ALL condition device" during special play can be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

(11) In the first and second embodiments, a slot machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to, for example, a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine).
Here, the enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) can eliminate the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37), for example. Further, the medal slot 43 and the medal selector can also be made unnecessary. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) awarded by winning combinations are stored in the stored number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the storage number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (a maximum of "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).

<Third embodiment>
The third embodiment includes a power switch 11, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153.
Furthermore, the door switch 17 , the setting key switch 152 , and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 .

The power switch 11 is a switch operated to turn on/off the power.
In the following description, turning on the power switch 11 is sometimes referred to as "turning on the power,""turning on the power," or "resuming the supply of power."
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 is sometimes referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the supply of power."

The door switch 17 is a switch that detects the opening of the front door 12 , and is attached to the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 .
The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are checked, when an error occurs, when medals are replenished, etc.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on. Thereby, opening of the front door 12 can be detected.
Note that by setting the door switch 17 to be turned on when the front door 12 is closed and turned off when the front door 12 is open, the front door 12 can be turned off. The opening may be detected.

The setting key switch 152 is a switch used to transition to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed (also referred to as a "setting change mode" or "setting change in progress"), or to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed (also referred to as a "setting confirmation mode" or "setting confirmation in progress").
By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on (also referred to as the "first mode"), and by rotating the setting key 90 degrees counterclockwise from this state, the setting key switch 152 is turned off (also referred to as the "second mode").

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that also serves as the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153.
The setting change switch 153 is a switch operated when changing a setting value in a setting change state.
Further, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to return to the state before the error occurred (cancel the error state) after removing the error that has occurred.
Furthermore, the RWM clear switch 153 is a switch operated when initializing (clearing) a predetermined storage area in the RWM 53.

In the following description, it will be referred to as the "setting change (reset) switch 153," as the "setting change switch 153," as the "reset switch 153," and as the "RWM clear switch 153."
In addition, various switches such as the setting key switch 152 and the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 may be referred to as being "operated" when they are on, and as being "not operated" when they are off.
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are integrated, but this is not limiting, and the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 may be provided separately.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the "gaming section" includes a "normal section" and an "advantageous section."
The "normal section" is a game section in which it is prohibited to send signals related to the instruction function to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80), and it does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (instruction function is not activated) during the game period. That is, the normal section is a game section in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not notified. Note that the normal section is sometimes referred to as a "non-advantageous section."
The "advantageous section" is a game section that has performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). That is, the advantageous section is a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (for example, the order in which the correct answer is pressed) can be notified.

Furthermore, the third embodiment includes an advantageous section display LED 77 that can display to the player that it is an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. That is, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is off, it indicates that it is a normal section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it indicates that it is an advantageous section. In this manner, in the third embodiment, the display mode of the advantageous section display LED 77 (lights off or on) and the game section (normal section or advantageous section) correspond in a one-to-one relationship.
For example, as shown in FIG. 31, the segment P of digit 4a of the acquisition number display LED 78 can be used as the advantageous section display LED 77. Further, an advantageous section display LED 77 may be provided separately from the acquisition number display LED 78.

Note that even when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on immediately, but after the transition to the advantageous section, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is (When starting the notification), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on. In this case, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it indicates an advantageous section, but when the advantageous section display LED 77 is off, there are two cases: a normal section and an advantageous section.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the configurations of the main CPU 55, ROM 54, and RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
A main CPU 55, an RWM 53, and a ROM 54 are provided on the main control board 50.
Further, as shown in FIG. 32, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and a main CPU 55 is provided within this chip. Furthermore, the main CPU 55 has a built-in memory, and this built-in memory includes a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. Furthermore, the addresses of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 are continuous.

The storage area of the ROM 54 has a used area and an outside area, and the used area and the outside area each have a control area and a data area.
Here, the "use area" is a storage area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
Further, the "control area" is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored, and is also referred to as a "program area."
Furthermore, the "data area" is a storage area in which information other than the program is stored, and is a storage area in which data used when executing the program is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside use area" is a storage area in which information not related to the progress of the game is stored, such as a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74, which will be described later, a program used during testing, and This is a storage area where programs for preventing fraud are stored.
Furthermore, the "outside of the used area" includes a control area and a data area, similar to the used area. The control area of the used area is sometimes referred to as a "first control area" or "first program area," and the control area outside the used area is sometimes referred to as a "second control area" or "second program area."
Furthermore, the program stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the used area is referred to as the "first program", and the program stored in the control area (second control area, second program area) outside the used area is referred to as the "first program". The program stored in the second program may also be referred to as the "second program."

While the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference (access) to data stored in the data area of the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted, while the used area of the ROM 54 is Reference to data stored in external data areas is prohibited.
Similarly, while the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference to the data stored in the data area outside the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted, but the Reference to data stored in the data area of the used area is prohibited.

The storage area of the RWM 53, like the ROM 54, has a used area and an outside used area, and each of the used area and the outside used area has a work area and a stack area.
As shown in FIG. 32, addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are used areas, addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are unused areas, and addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" are outside the used area.

While the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference (access) and rewriting (overwriting) of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 are permitted. However, data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 is allowed to be referenced but not rewritten.
Similarly, while the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference and rewriting of data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 is permitted. , the data in the used area of the RWM 53 is allowed to be referenced but not rewritten. This is to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

In addition, in order to prevent data in the used area of the RWM 53 from being rewritten (overwritten) due to program runaway while a program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, the used area of the RWM 53 is An unused area is provided between the area and the outside area.
Furthermore, if an interrupt process occurs while a program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, the data in the used area of the RWM53 may be rewritten (overwritten) by the interrupt process. While the (second program) is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the ROM 54 has a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the outside area.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 32, the RWM 53 has an unused area and the like in addition to the used area and the unused area.

Further, among the storage areas of the entire built-in memory, areas other than the ROM 54 and RWM 53 include a built-in register area, an unused area, and the like.
Further, the built-in register area is provided with, for example, A register to L register, a transmission register, and the like.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 32, the address of the used area is set in the range of "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)".
Note that the data shown in FIG. 33 is for use in explaining the third embodiment, and the data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

Address "F000(H)" is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0(H)" to "5(H)" is stored as the setting value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N" which is the set value data plus "1" as the set value.

Address “F001(H)” is a 1-byte storage area where setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is stored. When the set value is "N", "N-1" is stored in the address "F000(H)" as the set value data (_NB_RANK). Then, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the setting value data (_NB_RANK) is stored at address "F001(H)" as setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).

In this embodiment, the set values are "1" to "6", and the address "F000(H)" has set value data (_NB_RANK) of "0(D)" to "5(D)". Any value from "1(D)" to "6(D)" is stored in address "F001(H)" as set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP), and , the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 as the setting value.

Address “F010(H)” is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit number data.
Here, in this embodiment, a value obtained by converting the number of credits into a decimal number is stored as the number of credits data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example). , is data for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits (“2” in this example). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the stored data values are in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 that stores the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as display data of the credit number display LED 76.

Address “F011(H)” is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the acquisition number data, similarly to the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digits. It is data.
In this embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, so the payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored as the winning number data. Specifically, when a small winning combination is won and medals are paid out, the acquired number data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data, "01" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040(H)" which will be described later, "8(H)" is stored, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, and the payout number data is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the time of medal payout ( (including addition to credits) is decremented by "1" in the order of "8" → "7" → ... → "0" according to the number of payouts.
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored in the address "F011 (H)" is, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8"``1'' is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up in the order of "0" → "1" → "2" → . . . → "8".

Further, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 while changing the settings. Therefore, during the setting change, display data for displaying "88" as the acquisition number data is stored during the setting change. By displaying "88" on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is possible to identify from the front side of the gaming machine that the settings are being changed. Furthermore, by lighting "88" and all segments, it is possible to confirm that there are no segment defects (that there are no segments that cannot be lit).
The upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out is 15, so when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it can be understood that this is not a display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, when the condition for instructing the specified number (the number of medals to be bet in this game) is met, the number of medals acquired is The specified number is instructed (displayed, notified) on the display LED 78.
In this embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 to indicate the specified number "2". Therefore, when specifying the specified number, specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data.

Furthermore, when a push order bell or the like is won during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Therefore, when displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data.
For example, when displaying the push order instruction information in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Further, when a predetermined error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition number data.
For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as acquisition number data.

Address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replay and accessories are activated.
For example, when 1BB is in operation, the D2 bit of the operating state flag is set to "1". Further, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the operation state flag is set to "1".

Address “F040(H)” is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data is data that indicates a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. When a small winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored, and a medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out (adding "1" to the number of credits, or actually paying out one medal (from the hopper 35)), the payout number data is subtracted by "1". That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041 (H)" is the storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted every time one medal is paid out, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, that value is maintained until the medal payout number update process for the next game. For example, when a small winning combination of 8 pieces is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game, when no winning combination is won, as the payout number data buffer. "0" is overwritten.

Address "F042(H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet when a replay is won, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
Address "F043(H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored.

Address "F044(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which status display LED lighting data is stored.
As shown in FIG. 36A, which will be described later, in the third embodiment, on the display board 75, the status display LEDs 79 include a 1 bet display LED 79a, a 2 bet display LED 79b, a 3 bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, and a game start display LED 79d. It includes six LEDs: a display LED 79e and a replay display LED 79f.
The status display LED lighting data is data indicating whether or not to light up three of the six LEDs: the game start display LED 79d, the input display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f.

As shown in FIG. 33, the D0 bit of the status display LED lighting data is assigned to the game start display LED 79d, the D1 bit is assigned to the input display LED 79e, and the D2 bit is assigned to the replay display LED 79f. There is. Each bit of this status display LED lighting data matches each bit of the LED display counter 1 of FIG. 40(A), which will be described later.
Then, "1" is set in the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on, and "0" is set in the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off.
For example, when the game start display LED 79d is turned on and the input display LED 79e and replay display LED 79f are turned off, "00000001 (B)" is stored as the status display LED lighting data.

Address “F051(H)” is a 1-byte storage area where LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated every interrupt.
Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and in this embodiment, it is composed of one 7-segment display. Among the digits of this embodiment, digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit number (storage number) display LED 76, and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76. Furthermore, digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, and digit 5 corresponds to the setting value display LED 73.
Further, each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned to the D0 bit as a digit 1 signal, the D1 bit as a digit 2 signal, . . . , the D4 bit as a digit 5 signal. In the first interrupt processing, dynamic lighting of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 1 is lit.

In the third embodiment, the LED display counter 1 has a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to ... (for each interrupt), the LED display counter 1 updates by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 to the right by one digit. In addition, in the interrupt following interrupt "5", the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting one digit to the right, but at the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter 1 is initialized to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 repeats the values "5" → "4" → ... → "1" → "5" → "4" → ... for each interrupt process. In other words, five interrupts make up one cycle.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is
"N" interrupt number: 00010000 (B)
“N+1” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
“N+3” interrupt: 00000010 (B)
“N+4” interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
“N+6” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the third embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. Then, the output of the digit 5 signal enables digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) to light (digits 1 to 4 are turned off). At the time of the next interrupt process, the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", the digit 4 signal is output, and digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED D78) can be turned on (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are turned off).

Address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag takes a value corresponding to normal mode, setting change mode, or setting confirmation mode.
In the third embodiment, during normal operation, digits 1 to 4 are lit and digit 5 is not lit, so it takes the value "00001111 (B)". Furthermore, while changing settings and confirming settings, digit 5 is lit and digits 1 to 4 are not lit, so the value is "00010000 (B)".

Address "F061 (H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when the section is a normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section.
Note that the timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

Address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "1".
Note that the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, it is not necessary to light up the advantageous section display LED 77.
Specifically, firstly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but may be turned on afterwards (during the advantageous section).
Second, when transitioning to an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on, and if the end condition of the advantageous section is met before the conditions for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even once. You may end the advantageous section without turning on the light.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when operating the instruction function (notifying the correct pressing order) in a gaming state where it is an advantageous section and the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1", the advantageous section is displayed. Turn on LED 77.
Furthermore, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous section.
Further, during the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous section, a process for turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed. Specifically, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process of initializing the advantageous section display LED flag storage area (the process of clearing the advantageous section display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reels 31 start rotating, until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the stop switch 42 can be operated,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating,
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended), but before the payment switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning combination for the game must have been determined, so the period before the start switch 41 is operated (before the winning combination lottery) is excluded. .
When lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination is drawn. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

Address "F063 (H)" is the storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played during the advantageous section. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value when transitioning to the advantageous section. Further, the advantageous section clear counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous section but also during the normal section. However, the minimum value is "0". For this reason, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", a counter is used in which even if "1" is subtracted, the value after the subtraction becomes "0". Therefore, during the normal period, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when the game moves to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so in the next game, the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)".
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at most, so it is composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

Address "F065(H)" is the storage area of the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section, and is also referred to as "MY counter".
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores "a value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference in the number of sheets becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, that value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number of sheets ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

The difference number counter is required to count the cumulative value of the difference number of coins at least during the advantageous period, and does not need to count during the non-advantageous period (normal period).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that it is in an advantageous zone, a process is required to determine whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone for each game. For this reason, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated even during a non-advantageous zone (normal zone). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone for each game, simplifying the process.

Furthermore, even when the difference number of coins becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of coins becomes data of a carry-down, the difference number counter value is updated. However, if the difference counter value is negative data as a result of the calculation, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example, (the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)"
2nd game: Number of bets “3”, number of payouts “9”, difference counter after calculation “0006 (H)” (no correction)
3rd game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
5th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
will be updated as follows.
In addition, even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value that reflects the number of differences of the game concerned will be changed again. Since this is a calculated result, this case also corresponds to "updating" the difference counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value with a digit drop, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). Note that a method for determining whether a downgrade has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the number of payouts is larger than the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example in a game during the normal period, the difference counter value will increase by the number of payouts when there is a payout based on winning a small role, but after that, the number of payouts will increase. If it becomes less than the number of bets, it will eventually become "0".

Address “F067(H)” is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT, and set to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 in FIG. 46, which will be described later. Further, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the final AT game, and is executed, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50) to be described later. Furthermore, the data that is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes an AT flag.

Address "F068 (H)" is the storage area of the AT play count counter (_CT_ART). The AT play count counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of plays during the AT (including ART). Unlike the favorable zone clear counter, when the AT play count counter becomes "0", it stops counting (subtracting) thereafter.
The AT game count counter is updated (decremented) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated (step S281 in FIG. 46) during the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46).

In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", so the AT game counter is configured as a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is a maximum of "255 (D)" or less, the AT game counter may be configured as a 1-byte counter.
When the AT is started (or when the state transitions to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT play count counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when the AT is won. Also, after the initial value is determined, the number of AT plays may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is met during the AT, the number of AT plays may be increased, and when a lottery for adding the number of AT plays is won, the number of AT plays may be increased. In this case, the increase is added to the AT play count counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous period.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the number-of-games management type AT is illustrated, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided in place of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of AT, an initial value of the difference number of sheets that can be acquired is set. In addition, if you win an additional prize, the difference in the number of additional tickets will be added. Then, each time there is a payout, the difference number of coins for the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.

The 48-byte storage area at addresses "F1D0(H)" to "F1FF(H)" is a stack area of the used area.

Here, the management information display LED 74 is also called a "rotation ratio monitor" or a "ratio display", and is composed of four LEDs (digits 6 to 9 in order from the left side).
Furthermore, among the four LEDs that make up the management information display LED 74, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are also called "identification segments" and are used to display the type of information. The two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are also called "ratio segments" and are used to display the calculated ratio.

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Upper digit of the identification segment Digit 7: Lower digit of the identification segment Digit 8: Upper digit of the ratio segment Digit 9: Sometimes referred to as the lower digit of the ratio segment.

In the third embodiment, the management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the following six items of information 1) to 6) as management information at predetermined time intervals.
1) Ratio of accessories including instructions (cumulative total) (7 pages)
2) Continuous role ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous role ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Accessory ratio (cumulative total) (7A.)
6) Condition ratio of accessories, etc. (cumulative total) (5H.)

For example, when displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative total), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the accessory ratio (cumulative total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting is continued until the number of games has reached at least "175,000".
When the cumulative total is less than ``175,000'' number of games, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by blinking display, and when it is more than ``175,000'' number of games, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by lighting display.
Even after the total number of games exceeds "175,000", the total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets, where one set is "400" times.

The "instruction-inclusive accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
In addition, in a slot machine that is not equipped with an accessory, the "instruction included accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
Further, the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included accessory counter.

Regarding the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function was activated," for example, when a 15-card winning combination is won based on the stop switches 42 being operated in the displayed pressing order in the game in which the instruction function is activated. adds the payout number "15" to the instruction-included accessory counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.
For example, in a game where the minor winning combination condition device A1 to minor winning combination A6 condition device were activated during a 1BB game and the instruction function was activated (the correct answer pressing order (the pressing order in which 15 winning combinations were won) was displayed), the displayed When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order (correct answer pressing order) and a 15-card winning combination (any of the small winning combinations 01 to 06) is won, the payouts are made to the instruction-included accessory counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter. Add the number of sheets “15”.

On the other hand, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different push order than the displayed push order, for example, when a 3-card winning combination is won, the instruction-included accessory counter and the total payout ( Cumulative total) Add the payout number "3" to the counter.
For example, in a game where the minor winning condition device A1 to minor winning combination A6 condition device were activated during a 1BB game and the instruction function was activated (the correct pressing order was displayed), the pressing order different from the displayed pressing order (incorrect pressing When the stop switch 42 is operated in the order (order), and a 3-card winning combination (any of the small winnings 13 to 24) is won, the number of payouts "3" is displayed on the instruction-included winnings counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter. ” is added.

In addition, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different push order from the displayed push order, and the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won), the instruction-included role counter and The total payout (cumulative total) counter has the same value as the previous game.
For example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect pressing order, the winning combination is configured to be non-winning (none of the winning combinations is winning). During the 1BB game, the small winning combination condition device A1 to the small winning combination A6 condition device were activated and the instruction function was activated (the correct pressing order was displayed). When the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 is operated in the previous game, the values of the designated combination counter and the total payout (accumulation) counter will be the same as the previous game. .

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different push order from the displayed push order and a winning combination is missed, the instruction-included role counter and the total payout are By executing the process of adding the payout number "0" to the (cumulative) counter, the values of both counters are made to be the same value as the previous game.
When a winning combination is missed, the process of adding up the number of paid-out coins may be skipped, but in this case, before the process of adding up the number of paid-out coins, a process for determining whether or not a winning combination has been missed is included, and it is determined that the winning combination has been missed. In this case, it is necessary to configure the program to skip the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out, which increases the usage of the ROM 54 and increases the processing load on the main CPU 55.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when a winning combination is missed, a process of adding the payout number "0" to both counters is executed. As a result, the values of both counters can be set to the same values as in the previous game without including the process of determining whether or not a winning combination has been missed, so the usage of the ROM 54 can be reduced, and the processing of the main CPU 55 can be reduced. The burden can also be reduced.

"Continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special accessory (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts.
For example, if the total number of payouts in the number of games played is ``6000'' is ``2000 pieces'', and the number of payouts when the ``Class 1 special bonus (RB)'' is activated is ``500 pieces'', then The ratio (6000 games) is 25 (%).

The "accessory object ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts.
Here, the term "accessory object" refers to the above-mentioned first-class special accessory (RB), second-class special accessory (CB), and MB (also referred to as 2BB). Device. CB (continuous operation), SB (single bonus) are included.

The "accessory object status ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of games played when the accessory object is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the total number of games played.
Further, the sum of the number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous operation device is activated is counted by the accessory status counter.
In addition, in the above six items, if a gaming machine is not equipped with a function corresponding to that item, the ratio segment is displayed as "--" by lighting up.
For example, if "RB (Class 1 special accessory)" is not provided, there is no continuous accessory ratio, so when displaying ratio display numbers "2" and "4", the ratio segment is set to "--" ” is displayed on the display.

According to the rules, the ratio of designated accessories should be set to less than 70%, the ratio of accessories should be set to less than 70%, the ratio of continuous accessories should be set to less than 60%, and the ratio of accessories, etc. status should be set to less than 50%. There is.
By looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Further, in order to enable equipment external to the slot machine 10, such as the hall computer 200, to grasp various ratio information, the various ratio information may be configured to be outputtable as an external signal.
For example, the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) data, accessory ratio (cumulative) data, and accessory state ratio data displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) are used as external signals. It may be configured to be outputtable. At this time, a predetermined number of games (for example, "17,500 times" for continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) data and accessory ratio (cumulative) data, accessory ratio data including instruction, and accessory state ratio data (for example, "175,000 times"), predetermined information different from the current ratio information (for example, "FF (H)", etc.) is output as an external signal, and the predetermined number of games is played. If the conditions are met, various ratio information may be output as external signals.
Furthermore, advantageous section ratio data that is not displayed on the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor) may also be configured to be outputtable as an external signal. In this case, an advantageous section game count counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section and a storage area for advantageous section ratio data indicating the ratio of the number of games played in the advantageous section to the total number of games may be provided outside the usable area of the RWM 53.

34 and 35 are diagrams showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 32, addresses outside the used area are set in the range of "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)".
Note that the data shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is for use in explaining the third embodiment, and the data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The 400 game counter at address "F210(H)" adds the number of games played every 400 games. This 400 game counter is a counter that cycles from "0" to "399 (D)" and is incremented by "1" every game. If "1" is added when the value of the 400 game counter is "399 (D)", the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0".

Note that, contrary to the above, "399 (D)" may be set as the initial value of the 400 game counter, and "1" may be subtracted every game. In this case, when the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0", it is determined that 400 games have been played. Then, when the value of the 400 game counter is "0", "1" is subtracted, and the initial value "399 (D)" is set in the 400 game counter.

The ring buffer number at address "F212(H)" is used to specify which ring buffer the number of medals paid out in a given game should be added to.
Specifically, at address "F212(H)", one of "0" to "14(D)" is stored as the ring buffer number.

Addresses "F213(H)" to "F230(H)" are the storage areas for total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. Total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are made up of 15 ring buffers. Each total payout ring buffer is made up of 2 bytes. For example, total payout ring buffer 0 is made up of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", with address "F213(H)" being the lower digit and address "F214(H)" being the upper digit. In Figures 34 and 35, for storage areas with a byte count of 2 or more, the lowest address number is displayed.

One ring buffer stores the total number of coins paid out during 400 games. For example, the payout numbers for the 1st to 400th games are stored at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)," and the payout numbers for the next 401st to 800th games are stored at the address "F215(H)." H)” and “F216(H)”.
Here, whether or not the 400th game has been played is determined by referring to the 400 game counter at the address "F210(H)" mentioned above. Further, to which ring buffer value the number of medals paid out in the game is to be added (updated) is determined by referring to the ring buffer number of the address "F212(H)".

Then, when the total payout numbers for the first through 400th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", the total payout numbers for the 5601st through 6000th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)". Next, when the 6000th game ends, the data stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the payout numbers for the 6001st through 6400th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)".

Note that the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 each consist of 2 bytes. If the maximum number of coins paid out in one game is "15", the maximum number of coins paid out during 400 games is 6000 coins, which can be stored with a storage capacity of 2 bytes.
This point is the same for successive accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, which will be described later.

Further, addresses “F231(H)” to “F24E(H)” are storage areas of continuous accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14.
Furthermore, addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are storage areas of accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14.

The total number of games counter at addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter that stores the number of games (cumulative), and is composed of 3 bytes. The total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes because it is necessary to count "175000(D)" games as the cumulative number of games.
The total number of plays counter continues counting even if the number of plays exceeds "175,000 (D)" plays, and stops counting when it reaches 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF (H)").

The instruction-included reel counter at addresses "F270(H)" to "F272(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the reel is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated, and is composed of 3 bytes.
The total payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of medals paid out during 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out per game in 6000 games, the total comes to 90,000 medals, so it can be counted in 3 bytes (the same applies to the continuous payout (6000 times) counter and the payout (6000 times) counter described later).

The continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F276(H)" to "F278(H)" is a counter that counts the number of coins paid out when consecutive accessory objects are activated during 6000 games.
The accessory payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F279(H)" to "F27B(H)" is a counter that counts the number of coins paid out when the accessory is activated during 6000 games.

Then, when there is a payout when the continuous accessory is not activated and the accessory is not activated, only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (added), and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout counter are updated (added). (6000 times) The counter is not updated.
In addition, when there is a payout when the continuous accessory is not activated and the accessory is activated, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter are updated, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter is updated. is not updated.
Furthermore, when there is a payout during continuous accessory object operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
First of all, when there is a payout of medals from the first game to the 6000th game, the total payout (6000 times) will be determined depending on when the continuous accessory is activated/non-activated, and when the accessory is activated/non-activated. ) counter, continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and accessory payout (6000 times) counter.
At the end of the 6000th game, the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times) are calculated. After this calculation, the number of payouts during the 400 games from before "400 x 15-1" games (5999 games) to before "400 x 15-400" games (5600 games) is calculated as follows: times) counter value, continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value, and accessory payout (6000 times) counter value.

For example, when the 6000th game is played, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is cleared. Furthermore, the payout numbers from the 6001st game to the 6400th game are added to total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th game is played, the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F231 (H) to F232 (H)) value is subtracted from the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game when the continuous accessory is activated is added to the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th game is played, the value of the accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of accessory payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts when the accessory is activated from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the accessory payout ring buffer 0 and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter.

More specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the payout numbers for the following number of games:
Total payout ring buffer 0: "1" game time to "400" game time Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game time to "800" game time Total payout ring buffer 2: "801" game time to "1200" game time Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201" game time to "1600" game time Total payout ring buffer 4: "1601" game time to "2000" game time Total payout ring buffer 5: "2001" game time to "2400" game time Total payout ring buffer 6: "2401" game time to "2800" game time Total payout ring buffer 7: "2801" game time to "3200" game time Total payout ring buffer 8: "3201" game time to "3600" game time Total payout ring buffer 9: "3601" game time to "4000" game time Total payout ring buffer 10: "4001" game time to "4400" game time Total payout ring buffer 11: "4401" game time to "4800" game time Total payout ring buffer 12: "4801" game time to "5200" game time Total payout ring buffer 13: "5201" game time to "5600" game time Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game time to "6000" game time Total payout (6000 times) counter: "1" game time to "6000" game time

Assuming that the 6000th game has been completed, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the number of coins paid out during each number of games.
Further, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter and the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 match.
Here, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ1, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 is Z1,
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ1-Z1
Execute the calculation.
Also,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
Execute the calculation.
In other words, the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 games from before 5999 (400 x 15-1) games to before 5600 (400 x 15-400) games, is calculated as the total payout ( 6000 times) The process of subtracting from the value "Σ1" stored in the counter is executed.

Next, the process of clearing the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 games from before 5999 (400 x 15-1) games to before 5600 (400 x 15-400) games. Execute.
After calculating in this way, the 6001st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6001st game to the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6001st game to the 6400th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 0, and Total payout (6000 times) is added to the counter.

Next, assuming that the 6400th game has been completed, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payout coins for the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: “6001” game to “6400” game Total payout ring buffer 1: “401” game to “800” game:
Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game Total payout (6000 times) counter: "401" game to "6000" game, and "6001" game to "6400" game

Similarly to the above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ2, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2, then
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ2-Z2
shall be.
and,
Total payout ring buffer 1 = 0
shall be.
After calculating in this way, the 6401st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6401st game to the 6800th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6401st game to the 6800th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 1, and, Total payout (6000 times) is added to the counter. Repeat the above process.

Further, although the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been described, the same processing as above is performed when the accessory is activated or when the continuous accessory is activated.
Specifically, when the accessory is activated, the total payout ring buffer 0 to 14 is replaced with the accessory payout ring buffer 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the accessory payout (6000 times) counter. Execute processing. Note that when the accessory is activated, as described above, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

Similarly, when the continuous accessory is activated, the total payout ring buffer 0 to 14 is replaced with the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter. Execute the specified processing. In addition, during continuous accessory operation, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14, any of the accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter. Updates will also be made.

The total payout (cumulative) counter at addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts, and counts the total number of payouts during at least "175,000 (D)" games. .
Similarly, the consecutive accessory payout (cumulative total) counters at addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts during continuous accessory object activation, and similarly to the above, At least "175,000 (D)" The number of payouts when continuous accessory objects are activated during the game is counted.

Furthermore, similarly, the accessory payout (cumulative) counters at addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts when the accessory is activated, and as above, at least "175,000 (D)" Counts the number of payouts when the accessory is activated during the game.
Note that the three types of payout (6000 times) counters mentioned above subtract the number of payouts from 5999 games ago to 5600 games ago every 400 games, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters subtract the value. There's nothing to do.

Note that the three types of payout (cumulative) counters are composed of three bytes. For example, assuming that in 175,000 games, 15 coins were paid out for each game, the result would be "175,000×15=2,625,000", which is smaller than the value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

The accessory state counters at addresses "F285(H)" to "F287(H)" are counters that count the total number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous activation device is activated. Yes, it consists of 3 bytes.
The instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data of the address "F288 (H)" is the ratio of the total number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, to the total number of payouts. This is a storage area for storing physical ratios.

The continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) data at the address "F289(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when continuous accessory objects are activated to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
The accessory ratio (6000 times) data at address "F28A(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.

The continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) data at the address "F28B(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts during continuous accessory object activation to the total number of payouts in the total number of games.
The accessory ratio (cumulative total) data at the address "F28C(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts in the total number of games.

The reel state ratio data at address "F28D (H)" is a memory area that stores the reel state ratio, which is the ratio of the sum of the number of games played when the reel is activated and the number of games played when the reel continuous activation device is activated to the total number of games played.
The calculation result buffer at address "F28E(H)" is a storage area that temporarily stores the calculation results during ratio calculation processing.

The count upper limit flag of address "F28F(H)" is the total number of games counter (addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)") or the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C(H)" to This flag is turned on when the storage capacity of "F27E(H)" is at the upper limit value (3 bytes full, that is, "FFFFFF(H)").
Of the 1 byte (8 bits) data, the "D0" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of games played, and the "D1" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of coins to be paid out. Bits “D2” to “D7” are unused in the third embodiment.
For example, when the total number of games counter has reached the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag becomes "00000001 (B)".

If the payout number upper limit buffer at address "F290 (H)" exceeds 3 bytes full when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter, the value after addition will be 3 bytes full. This is a storage area that stores the value of .
For example, if the total payout (cumulative) counter value before the payout in the game is "FFFFFE (H)" and the number of payouts in the game is "8 (H)", the counter value is set to "8 (H)". )” will result in overflow. Therefore, in order to prevent overflow of the total payout (cumulative) counter value, a value is calculated to make the total payout (accumulation) counter value 3 bytes full, and the calculation result is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, "FFFFFE(H)"+"1(H)"="FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

The blinking request flag at address "F291(H)" is a flag for identifying an object that satisfies the blinking display condition when displaying the discrimination segment and ratio segment.
Regarding the instructed feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio, when the total number of plays (the value stored in the total number of plays counter) is less than "175,000", the identification segment is controlled to flash.
For the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times), when the total number of plays (the value stored in the total number of plays counter) is less than "6000", the identification segment is controlled to flash.

The ratio of designated accessories, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory status ratio should originally be the ratios over 175,000 games (to reduce variation). is the ratio calculated based on the number of games played less than 175,000 games, the identification segment is displayed blinking to indicate this.
Similarly, the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times) are originally ratios for 6000 times, but when they are calculated based on the number of games played less than 6000 times, To indicate this, the identification segment is displayed blinking.

In addition, for the designated accessory ratio, accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "70" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink. .
Furthermore, regarding the continuous accessory ratio (total) and the consecutive accessory ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink.
Furthermore, regarding the state ratio of accessories, etc., when the displayed value is "50" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to be displayed blinking.

The reason why the slot machine of this embodiment is set as described above is that the designated accessory ratio and accessory ratio are designed to be less than 70%, and the continuous accessory ratio is set to 60%. It is designed to be less than 50%, and the condition ratio of accessories etc. is designed to be less than 50%, and when the actual measured value is not within the designed value range, the ratio segment will blink. This is to let people know that by doing so.

In addition, in the blinking request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the instructed accessory ratio blinking flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) blinking flag,..., the D7 bit corresponds to the 175000 times blinking flag.
For example, when the calculated accessory ratio with instructions is less than "70", the D0 bit of the blinking request flag is "0", and when it is greater than "70", the D0 bit of the blinking request flag is "1". ”.
Similarly, when the calculated continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) is less than "70", the D1 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0", and when it is greater than "70", the D1 bit of the blinking request flag The bit becomes "1".

In addition, when the calculated accessory status ratio is less than "50", the D5 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0", and when it is greater than "50", the D5 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1". ”.
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "6000", the D6 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1", and when it is greater than "6000", the D6 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0". Become.
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "175,000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1", and when it is greater than "175,000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0". .

The ratio display number at address "F292(H)" is a storage area that stores a number corresponding to the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process.
When the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process is the designated accessory ratio, "1" is stored in the ratio display number of address "F292(H)". Similarly, when it is a continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), it stores "2", when it is an accessory ratio (6000 times), it stores "3", and when it is a continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) "4" is stored, when it is the accessory ratio (cumulative total), "5" is stored, and "6" is stored when it is the accessory state ratio.

The blinking switching flag at address "F293(H)" is a flag for determining whether to turn on or off when displaying the identification segment or ratio segment blinking during the interrupt processing.
In this embodiment, when displaying blinking, it is set to repeat lighting and extinguishing every approximately 0.3 seconds. Then, for about 0.3 seconds while the lights are on, the blinking switching flag is "0" (a value that indicates lighting), and for about 0.3 seconds while the lights are off, the blinking switching flag is "1" (a value indicating that the lights are off). It is set so that

The display switching time of address "F294(H)" is a counter that counts approximately 5 seconds, which is the time for displaying one ratio, and is updated by "1" every time an interrupt process is performed.
In this embodiment, display of accessory ratio with instructions (approximately 5 seconds) → accessory consecutive ratio (6000 times) display (approximately 5 seconds) → ... → accessory ratio (cumulative) display (approximately 5 seconds) → Object condition ratio display (approximately 5 seconds)→instruction accessory ratio (approximately 5 seconds)→... continues to be displayed repeatedly.
Therefore, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether approximately 5 seconds have elapsed, that is, whether the display ratio switching time has been reached.

As mentioned above, the blinking switching time of address "F296(H)" is a counter that counts approximately 0.3 seconds when displaying the identification segment or ratio segment, and every time an interrupt process is performed. This is a counter that is updated to "1".

Address "F297(H)" is a 1-byte storage area where LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is stored.
The LED display counter 2 is a counter for determining which digit among digits 6 to 9 is to be lit, and is continuously updated every interrupt. Regarding each bit of the LED display counter 2, the D0 bit is assigned to a digit 6 signal, the D1 bit is assigned to a digit 7 signal, the D2 bit is assigned to a digit 8 signal, and the D3 bit is assigned to a digit 4 signal. In the first interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 6 to 9 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 2 is lit.

In the third embodiment, the LED display counter 2 has a value of "00001000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to ... (for each interrupt), the LED display counter 2 updates by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter 2 to the right by one digit. In addition, in the interrupt following interrupt "4", the LED display counter 2 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting one digit to the right, but at the time of this interrupt, the LED display counter 2 is initialized to "00001000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 2 repeats the values of "4" → "3" → "2" → "1" → "4" → ... for each interrupt process. In other words, one cycle consists of four interrupts.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 2 is
"N" interrupt number: 00001000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
“N+2” interrupt: 00000010 (B)
“N+3” interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00001000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
:
becomes.

In the third embodiment, four interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 6 to 9 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00001000 (B)", a digit 9 signal is output. Then, by outputting the digit 9 signal, digit 9 (lower digit of the ratio segment) can be lit. At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00000100 (B)", a digit 8 signal is output, and digit 8 (higher digit of the ratio segment) can be lit. Also, when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", the digit 7 signal is output and digit 7 (lower digit of the identification segment) can be lit, and when the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)" , a digit 6 signal is output, and digit 6 (upper digit of the identification segment) can be lit.

The RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" is a storage area in which RWM checksum data calculated by RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) during power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is stored.
Here, "RWM checksum data" is also referred to as "complement data", "error detection data" or "error detection information", and is from address "F000(H)" of the used area of RWM 53 to When added to the data of "F1FF(H)" and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area, it becomes "0". The value is
In other words, the data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM53 and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"("F2A0(H)") outside the used area are When the "RWM checksum data (complement data)" of "F2A0(H)" is added to the added value of the data of "F2A0(H)", it becomes "0". In other words, the added value of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" becomes "0".

The power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" is a flag for determining whether the power-off processing has been executed normally, and is stored at the time of the power-off processing.
When the power-off process is executed normally, "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off process completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF), and when the power-off process is not executed normally, the power-off process completed flag is stored. A value other than "55 (H)" is stored as (_SF_POWER_OFF).

The power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" is a flag for determining whether the checksum calculation result of RWM53 and the power-off processing completed flag are normal, and is used to start the program. It is stored during processing.
The calculation result of the checksum of RWM53 is normal (the sum of the data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM35 (excluding "F2A0(H)"), and the RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)" If the result of adding is "0") and the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). is memorized.
On the other hand, if at least one of the RWM53 checksum calculation result and the power-off processing completion flag is not normal (abnormal), "00 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). be remembered.

The stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (_SB_STACK2) at address "F2A3 (H)" is a storage area (_SB_STACK2) where the stack pointer of the used area is stored (saved) when a program (second program) outside the used area is executed. buffer).
Here, the "stack area" refers to a storage area of the RWM 53 in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).
Furthermore, the "stack pointer" is used to hold an address indicating the save (storage) destination of data in the stack area.

Then, when executing a program (second program) outside the used area, the stack pointer of the used area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, and the program (second program) outside the used area is terminated. When returning to the program (first program), the stack pointer of the used area is restored from the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2.

The 24-byte storage area at addresses "F3E8(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is a stack area outside the used area.

Next, the initialization of data in the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area will be described.
The data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized simply by cutting off/restarting the power supply (turning the power on/off, turning the power switch 11 on/off).
Even when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the used area of the RWM 53 and outside the used area are maintained without being initialized.

Furthermore, it is assumed that an operation for transitioning to a setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed, and it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred. In this case, the answer is "Yes" in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, which will be described later, and the process advances to step S2711, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change at the time of power-off recovery abnormality is set. Furthermore, since this is a power-off recovery abnormality, "Yes" is determined in step S2712 in FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ”), and the entire range outside the used area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)”) are initialized.
When returning from an unrecoverable error state, the RWM 53 initialization process is executed in the same range as when it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred after performing an operation for transitioning to a setting change state.

Further, it is assumed that an operation for transitioning to a setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The conversion range is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” initialization processing is executed.

Therefore, when the operation to shift to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 and the address "F210 ( The data of "H)" to "F291(H)" are maintained without being initialized.
In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then switch to the setting change state. When the power-off recovery is determined to be normal, the management information display LED 74 will display the instruction-included accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

Further, it is assumed that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, the answer in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The conversion range is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” initialization processing is executed.

In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. Therefore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then turn off the setting key switch 152. and turn on the power with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and when it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 will display the first display item of various ratio information. Display starts from certain instruction-included accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1").

Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the operation to shift to the setting change state is performed. The initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed in the same range as when it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal.
Therefore, even if you do not have the setting key or do not move to the setting change state, the same range as when the power-off recovery is determined to be normal after performing the operation to move to the setting change state. Then, the RWM 53 can be initialized.

In addition, at the end of the favorable zone, an initialization process is performed on a predetermined range of the usage area of RWM53 (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 33) where data related to the favorable zone is stored.
In addition, even if the advantageous period ends, the address "F292 (H)" of the RWM 53 is not initialized. For this reason, even if the advantageous period ends when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and an initialization process is performed for a predetermined range (for example, addresses "F061 (H)" to "F068 (H)" in FIG. 33) of the use area of the RWM 53 in which the data related to the advantageous period is stored, the display item displayed on the control information display LED 74 will be the role ratio (cumulative) data followed by the role etc. state ratio data (ratio display number "6").

Further, it is assumed that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. That is, assume that the power is turned on and off normally. In this case, since the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed, the used area and data outside the used area of the RWM 53 at the time of power-off are maintained.
For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then press the setting key switch 152 and reset. When the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the state will be restored to the state at the time of power-off, so the management information display LED 74 will first display the The object ratio (cumulative) data is displayed, and then the accessory condition ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after the accessory ratio (cumulative) data, is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, and it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred. In this case, "Yes" is determined in step S2708 of FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to step S2801, where the irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed (an irreversible error state occurs), so the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed. . Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 is executed, interrupt processing is prohibited (step S1490 in FIG. 43), and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off ( Step S1495 in FIG. 43).
For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then press the setting key switch 152 and reset. When the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and it is determined that a power-off recovery error has occurred, interrupt processing is prohibited and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off. The management information display LED 74 remains off.

Note that, for example, in the irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, "8" may be displayed in each of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74. In this case, turn off the power, then turn on the power with both the setting key switch 152 and reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and if it is determined that a power failure recovery error has occurred, the management information display LED 74 "8888" is displayed.

Further, for example, even if the process moves to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, interrupt processing may not be prohibited, and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 may be maintained without being turned off. In this case, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then press the setting key switch 152 and reset. Even if the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state and it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred, the management information display LED 74 will first display the accessory ratio (cumulative) data. Next, accessory state ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after accessory ratio (cumulative total) data, is displayed.

FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the third embodiment, a display board 75 includes a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79.
The credit number display LED 76 is composed of digit 1 (upper digit) and digit 2 (lower digit), and the earned number display LED 78 is composed of digit 3 (upper digit) and digit 4 (lower digit). Furthermore, digits 1 to 4 use a 7-segment display without dot segments.
Note that digits 1 to 4 may be configured using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be lit.

In addition, the status display LED 79 includes a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, an input display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f, which are composed of six LEDs. .
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 36, the advantageous section display LED 77 is constructed using a segment P of digit 4, as shown in FIG.
Further, although the setting value display LED 73 does not appear in FIG. 36, it is provided on the main control board 50 as shown in FIG. 1, and is composed of digit 5. Digit 5 also uses a 7 segment display without dot segments.
Note that the digit 5 may be configured using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be lit.

As shown in FIG. 36(B), the management information display LED 74 displays digit 6 (upper digit of the identification segment), digit 7 (lower digit of the identification segment), digit 8 (upper digit of the ratio segment), and digit 9 (lower digit of the ratio segment). digit).
Further, digits 6 to 9 use a 7-segment display with dot segments (segment P).
Furthermore, the segment P of digit 7 (lower digit of the identification segment) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clearly mark the separator between the information type (identification segment) and the ratio (ratio segment).

FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating details of digits and segments in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, the 7-segment display for digits 1-5 itself consists of segments A-G and does not include a dot segment (segment P).
However, the segment P of digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d, the segment P of digit 2 constitutes the input display LED 79e, the segment P of digit 3 constitutes the replay display LED 79f, and the segment P of digit 4 constitutes the game start display LED 79d. constitutes an advantageous section display LED 77.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) are provided for outputting digit signals, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) are provided for outputting segment signals. It is characterized by
In the third embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided.
Furthermore, the segment for digits 1 to 5 is referred to as segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segment for digits 6 to 9 is referred to as segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).

In addition, in the third embodiment, output port 3 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals), and output port 6 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals).
Furthermore, in the third embodiment, output port 4 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals), and output port 7 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals).
When digits 1 to 5 are to be illuminated, a digit signal is output from output port 3 and a segment 1 signal is output from output port 4 .
When digits 6 to 9 are to be illuminated, a digit signal is output from output port 6 and a segment 2 signal is output from output port 7 .

Next, an external signal will be described. An "external signal" is a signal that is outputted to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as the hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in the hall) via the external terminal board 100.
As shown in Fig. 38, in the third embodiment, external signals 1 to 6 are output from output port 5. Specifically, a "setting change signal" is assigned to bit D0 (external signal 1) of output port 5, and a "setting confirmation signal" is assigned to bit D1 (external signal 2). The signals shown in Fig. 38 are also assigned to bits D2 to D5.

The "settings changing signal" is an external signal indicating that settings are being changed and that settings have been changed. The setting change signal is output continuously during the setting change and at the end of one game after the setting change (all reels 31 stop and until the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 46). This is to reliably notify the outside that the setting has been changed.When the D0 bit of the output port 5 is "1", the setting changing signal is on (the setting is being changed, or one game after the setting has been changed). In addition, when the D0 bit is "0", it means that the setting change signal is off (the setting is not being changed, and the game after the setting change is not ending). shows.

The "setting confirmation signal" is an external signal indicating that the settings are being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal is output during setting confirmation. When the D1 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the setting confirmation signal is on (the setting is being confirmed), and when the D1 bit is "0", the setting confirmation signal is off. Yes (settings are not being checked).

"Fraud detection signal 1" is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when the door switch 17 is on (when the opening of the front door 12 is detected), the fraud detection signal 1 is output. When the D2 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is on (the door switch 17 is on, the front door 12 is open), and the D2 bit is "0". This indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is off (the door switch 17 is off, the front door 12 is closed).

"Fraud detection signal 2", like fraud detection signal 1, is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when a recoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 2 is output. When the D3 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 2 is on (recoverable error state), and when the D3 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 2 is off. (not a recoverable error state).

"Fraud detection signal 3", like fraud detection signals 1 and 2, is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 3 is output. When the D4 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is on (an unrecoverable error state), and when the D4 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 3 is turned on. Indicates that it is off (not in an unrecoverable error state).

The "security signal" is an external signal indicating that any one of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is on. When outputting any of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3, a security signal is also output at the same time. When the D5 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the security signal is on (one of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is being output); When the D5 bit is "0", it indicates that the security signal is off (none of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are output).

As described above, the setting change in progress signal is continuously outputted until the end of one game after the setting change. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, both the setting change in progress signal and the setting confirmation in progress signal are output. Specifically, for example, assume that the setting change state is finished and a situation is reached in which medals (game media, game value) can be bet. At this time, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on with the bet number being "0", both a setting changing signal and a setting confirming signal are output.
Furthermore, when outputting any one of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3, a security signal is also output. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit of the output port 5 are turned on (“1”). After that, if you end the setting confirmation state before the end of the first game after changing the settings, the D0 bit and D5 bit of output port 5 will remain on (“1”), and the D1 bit will be off (“0”). become. When the first game after the setting change is completed, the D0 bit and D5 bit of the output port 5 are also turned off ("0").

Next, lighting control for digits 1 to 9 will be explained.
The lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) is controlled by LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 50, which will be described later. Further, the LED display control process (I_LED_OUT) is a process performed by a program (first program) for the used area.

On the other hand, the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) is controlled by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) of FIG. 52, which will be described later. Further, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program (second program) outside the usage area.
In the third embodiment, digits 1 to 5 control lighting according to a program in the used area (first program), and digits 6 to 9 control lighting according to a program outside the used area (second program). The output ports used are separated.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, the segment has digits 1 to 9, and the segment of digits 1 to 5 is defined as segment 1 (segment 1A to 1P), and the segment of digits 6 to 9 is defined as segment 2 (segment 2A to 2P). .
Segments 1A to 1G of digit 1 constitute the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d.
Further, segments 1A to 1G of digit 2 constitute the lower digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 2 constitutes the input display LED 79e.

Furthermore, the segments 1A to 1G of digit 3 constitute the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78, and the segment 1P of digit 3 constitutes the replay display LED 79f.
Further, segments 1A to 1G of digit 4 constitute the lower digits of the number-of-achievement display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.
Further, segments 1A to 1G of digit 5 constitute a setting value display LED 73.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 6 constitute the upper digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

Further, segments 2A to 2G of digit 7 constitute the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and segment 2P of digit 7 constitutes a digit separator display LED.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 8 constitute the upper digits of the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 9 constitute the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

40A is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 3. Also, FIG. 40B is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 6. Furthermore, FIG. 40C is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment.
In this example, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 33) is provided in the usage area of RWM 53, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 35) is provided outside the usage area of RWM 53.

LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is a counter for outputting digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal at each interruption, and is a counter with 5 interrupts per cycle.
Furthermore, LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is a counter for outputting the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal at each interruption, and is a counter with 4 interruptions per cycle.
In this manner, in the third embodiment, an LED display counter for lighting up digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting up digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently.
In addition, since the cycles of the two LED display counters are different, the timing at which digits 1 to 5 are lit differs from the timing at which digits 6 to 9 are lit.

The LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted, and is stored at address "F052(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 (see FIG. 33).
As shown in FIG. 40(C), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which the D0 bit corresponds to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., the D4 bit corresponds to the digit 5 signal. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag is made to match the bit of output port 3 shown in FIG.
Additionally, as shown in Figure 40(C), digits 1 to 4 can be lit during normal operation (digit 5 is off), and digit 5 can be lit while changing settings or checking settings (digits 1 to 4 are off). (lights out). In addition. “Normal” refers to waiting for games and during games.

Then, in the interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 in the used area and the value of the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" is the digit that lights up in the current interrupt processing. Become.
For example, if the value of LED display counter 1 of the used area is "00001000 (B)" and the value of the LED display request flag is "00001111 (B) (normal medium)", if the two are ANDed, "00001000 (B)", and only the digit 4 signal becomes "1".
Also, while changing settings or checking settings, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal turns on (LED display counter 1 in the used area is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4, The setting value display LED 73 (digit 5) can be lit.

Next, recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors will be explained.
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered from without turning the power on or off. For example, as a recoverable error,
"HP" error: Medal jamming (retention) error in the hopper 35 "HE" error: Empty medal error in the hopper 35 "H0" error: Abnormality in the payout sensor 37 of the hopper 35 "CE" error: Medal retention error in the medal selector "CP" error: Error in incorrect passage of medals in the medal selector "CH" error: Abnormality in the passage sensor 46 located in the medal selector "C0" error: Malfunction in the input sensor 44 located in the medal selector " Examples include "C1" error: Abnormal medal insertion error "FE" error: Sub tank full "dE" error: Front door 12 opened.
Note that recoverable errors are not limited to those described above.

In step S457 of interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47, which will be described later, reading processing of the input port 51 is executed, and input signals from various switches (start switch 41, etc.) and various sensors (throwing sensor 44, etc.) are read. Thereafter, various types of data (level data, rising data, falling data) are generated based on the read input signal and stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. After that, in step S463 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR), input error check processing is executed, and when any recoverable error is detected by referring to the above various data, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is set. is stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53.

In addition, in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46), the error detection flag is checked before the operation of the start switch 41 is detected and after all the reels 31 have stopped. If any bit of the error detection flag is "1", it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the progress of the game is stopped, and a recoverable error state is entered.
In addition, if a recoverable error occurs between the operation of the start switch 41 when a specified number of medals have been bet and the time when all the reels 31 have stopped, game progress may be continued until all the reels 31 have stopped, and after all the reels 31 have stopped, game progress may be stopped and a recoverable error state may be entered before the medal payout process is executed.
Furthermore, when it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, error information about the occurred recoverable error is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This display of error information (error display) is performed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG.

When a recoverable error occurs, when the cause of the recoverable error is removed by the administrator (hall clerk) and the reset switch 153 is operated, the recoverable error state is canceled and the progress of the game is resumed. .
In this manner, when a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated without turning the power on/off or operating the setting key switch 152. It is possible to cancel the recoverable error state and return to a state in which the game can proceed.

In contrast, an "irrecoverable error" is a serious error that cannot be recovered from unless the power is turned off and an operation for moving to a setting change state is performed (turning the power on with the setting key switch 152 turned on).
"E1" error: When recovery from power interruption is not normal (when there is a power interruption recovery abnormality) (when "Yes" is determined in step S2712 in FIG. 41 described later)
"E5" error: When the stopped symbol is not normal when the reel 31 stops (when a display error occurs)
"E6" error: When the setting value is not within the normal range (when a setting value error occurs) (when "No" is returned in step S458 of FIG. 47)
"E7" error: When a random number error occurs ("Yes" in step S460 of FIG. 47)
etc.
Incidentally, the unrecoverable errors are not limited to those mentioned above.

No matter which non-recoverable error occurs, error information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, when an "E1" error occurs, "E" is displayed in digit 3 and "1" is displayed in digit 4. The same message is displayed when other non-recoverable errors occur.
In addition, the process in step S2715 in the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 (program of used area (processing by the first program)).
Furthermore, when the reels 31 stop, it is determined that the stopped symbols are not normal (a display error has occurred), and the "E5" error is determined during the main processing (M_MAIN) (Fig. 46). (processing by the program (first program)).

On the other hand, it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range (a set value error has occurred), and the "E6" error is determined in step S458 during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. (processing by the second program).
Similarly, it is determined that the random number value is not normal (a random number error has occurred) and that it is determined to be an "E7" error. (processing by a second program).
When it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in the program (first program) in the used area, unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of FIG. 43, which will be described later, is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in a program outside the used area (second program), unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51, which will be described later, is executed.

When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is cut off (turn off the power, turn off the power switch 11), and then the power supply is restarted (by turning on the setting key switch 152). Turn on the power and turn on the power switch 11). As a result, the answer in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process advances to step S2711. Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48, which will be described later, is not executed, so "Yes" is determined in step S2712 in FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, which will be described later, the entire range including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the used area of the RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") ), and the entire range outside the used area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)”) are initialized. After that, the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 in FIG. If the set value is reset here, the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 46).
In this way, when an unrecoverable error occurs, by turning off the power and then turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the unrecoverable error state can be canceled and the game can proceed. can be restored to a state where it is possible.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 50, but when an unrecoverable error occurs, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. Display control (I_LED_OUT) is also not executed. When an unrecoverable error occurs, an error display is performed by the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51.
Furthermore, when returning from a recoverable error state, the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area are maintained without being initialized, but when returning from an unrecoverable error state, the used area and the used area of the RWM 53 The entire range of data outside is initialized.
Note that when returning from a recoverable error state, data such as an error detection flag stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 may be initialized.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment.
When the power is turned on (power switch 11 is turned on, power supply is restarted), the program starts from the program start process shown in FIG. 41.
In FIG. 41, when the program is started in step S2701, in the next step S2702, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. .

Next, the process advances to step S2703, and the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the RWM 53.
Specifically, in step S2703, the data of addresses “F000(H)” to “F1FF(H)” in the used area of the RWM 53 and the data of addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” outside the used area are Add data.
That is, data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added.
When the result is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal, and when the result is not "0", the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is judged to be abnormal (abnormal). ).

Also, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) of address "F2A1(H)" of RWM 53 is "55(H)" or not. If it is "55(H)", it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is normal, and if it is not "55(H)", it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is abnormal (abnormal).
In this embodiment, when the power-off process is performed, a power-off process completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is set to address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 (step S2784 of RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 49). Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off process completion flag set during the power-off process is a normal value ("55(H)").

In addition, in step S2703, the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal (the result of adding the data in the used area and the data outside the used area of the RWM 35 is "0"), and the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is normal. When it is the value ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is stored in the address "F2A2 (H)" of the RWM 53 as power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).
On the other hand, in step S2703, if at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completed flag is not normal (abnormal), the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is set to "00 (H )” is stored in the address “F2A2(H)” of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2704.

Proceeding to step S2704, the main control board 50 restores the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) saved in step S2702. Then, the process advances to the next step S2705.

Here, the program for the program start process is stored in a control area (first control area, first program area) of the used area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the program start process is the first program.
On the other hand, the program for the checksum calculation process of the RWM 53 in step S2703 is stored in a control area (second control area, second program area) outside the used area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the checksum calculation process in step S2703 is the second program.

Therefore, in FIG. 41, in the program start process which is the process by the program (first program) in the used area, when the process proceeds to step S2703, checksum calculation of the RWM 53 which is the process by the program (second program) outside the used area. When the process is executed and the checksum calculation process is completed, the process returns to the program start process, which is the process by the program (first program) of the used area.
Also, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is used by the RWM53. The AF register is saved in the stack area of the area, and the AF register is restored when the process by the program outside the used area (second program) is finished and the process is returned to the process by the program in the used area (first program).

Proceeding to step S2705, the main control board 50 acquires the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) from the address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S2706.

Proceeding to step S2706, the main control board 50 determines whether the door switch signal is on. As described above, when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door switch signal is turned on. If it is determined that the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is in an open state), the process advances to the next step S2707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is in a closed state), the process advances to step S2715.

In step S2707, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch signal is on. As described above, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the setting key switch signal is turned on. If it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process advances to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the process advances to step S2708.

Proceeding to step S2708, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a power-off recovery abnormality. Specifically, when the value of the A register (power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) acquired in step S2705) is "55 (H)," it is determined that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the next step S2709. . On the other hand, when the value of the A register is "00 (H)", it is determined that the power-off recovery is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S2801, which is an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP). Note that the specific contents of the irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.

In step S2709, the main control board 50 sets reset determination data. Specifically, "7" is stored in the D register. Then, the process advances to the next step S2710.
Proceeding to step S2710, the main control board 50 determines whether the reset switch signal is on. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are configured as an integrated switch. Then, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the reset switch signal is turned on, and the process advances to step S2713. On the other hand, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the reset switch signal is turned off, and the process proceeds to power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721. Note that the specific contents of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) will be described later.

Proceeding to step S2711, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for the power-off recovery abnormality. In this embodiment, when the power-off recovery is abnormal (the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "00 (H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is included. The used area and the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") are set as the initialization range. Note that the initialization range is specified by the start address of the initialization range and the number of bytes. Then, the process advances to the next step S2712.

In step S2712, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a power-off recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is the same as step S2708. When it is determined that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, "7", which is the data for determining the setting change state, is stored in the D register, and the process proceeds to the next step S2713, where it is determined that there is a power-off recovery abnormality. If so, the process advances to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Note that the specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.

In step S2713, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal power recovery. In this embodiment, when the power recovery is normal (power recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "55(H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are not initialized (cleared) and are maintained. For this reason, in step S2713, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range. As described above, the initialization range is specified by the start address and number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2714.

In step S2714, the main control board 50 determines whether the settings can be changed. In this embodiment, the settings cannot be changed during the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46), including while the reels 31 are rotating. , the settings cannot be changed flag is turned on. Then, in step S2714, it is determined whether the settings can be changed by determining whether the settings change prohibition flag is on. When it is determined that the settings cannot be changed (the settings cannot be changed), the process advances to the next step S2715, and when it is determined that the settings can be changed, the process advances to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.
It should be noted that the settings may be always enabled to be changed without providing a period during which the settings cannot be changed, and therefore without providing a setting change prohibition flag.

Proceeding to step S2715, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a power-off recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is the same as step S2708. If it is determined that a power-off recovery error has occurred, the process advances to step S2801 for an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP), and if it is determined that a power-off recovery error has not occurred, the process proceeds to power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721. . Note that the specific contents of the power return processing (M_POWER_ON) and the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721 in FIG.
First, in step S2722, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. In this embodiment, the stack pointer is saved during power-off processing (step S2774 of power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48). Then, in step S2722, the stack pointer saved at the time of power-off processing is restored.

Proceeding to the next step S2723, the main control board 50 executes a read process of the input port 51. As a result, each data in the input port 51 is updated to the latest data.
In the next step S2724, the main control board 50 clears the power-off processing completion flag, and then proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 46), where the processing of this flowchart ends.
In this embodiment, after the process of step S2724 is executed, the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 47 is started before proceeding to the main process (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 46).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
The program for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is stored in the used area of the ROM 54, and the program for unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is stored outside the used area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is the first program, and the program for irreversible error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is the second program.

Furthermore, in unrecoverable error processing, interrupt processing is prohibited.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that does not normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (such as updating data in the RWM 53 based on an input signal from the input port 51 or sending a control command to the sub-control board 80) , control based on the signal output from the output port based on the data of the RWM 53), etc., interrupt processing is prohibited in unrecoverable error processing.

Here, the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is a process performed by the first program, and when the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is started, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is first executed in step S1490, which disables interrupts. prohibited.
On the other hand, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is a process performed by the second program, and since execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited while the second program is running, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) There is no processing to disable interrupts after the start.

In FIG. 43, when the process advances to step S1491, the main control board 50 sets error display data for the lower digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data for lighting up digit 4 (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") ("00001000 (B)") in the H register.
Next, the process advances to step S1492, and the main control board 50 sets error display data for the upper digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data for lighting up digit 3 (data in which only the digit 3 signal is ``1'') (``00000100(B)'').

Furthermore, in step S1492, the main control board 50 stores segment data ("01111001B") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of the irrecoverable error in the E register.
Note that before proceeding to unrecoverable error processing, segment data for displaying the lower digit of the unrecoverable error is stored in the L register. For example, when the unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the lower digit (digit 4) is "1", so the L register contains segment data ("00000110B") for displaying "1". is memorized.
In the following example, it is assumed that the current unrecoverable error 1 is an "E1" error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values are as follows at this point:
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100 (B)")
E register value: Segment data (“01111001(B)”) to display “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of unrecoverable errors
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
L register value: Segment data (“00000110 (B)”) to display “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
becomes.

In the next step S1493, the main control board 50 sets the address of the output port to be cleared and the number of output ports. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared in unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) are output ports 0 to 7, and since an address is set for each output port, the address and the number of output ports (8 ).
In the next step S1494, the main control board 50 sequentially turns off the outputs of output ports 0 to 7. Specifically, for output ports 0 to 7, the output is turned off (“00000000(B)”) one output port at a time.

In the next step S1495, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next output port. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1". For example, when the address of output port 0 is "00F1(H)", the address of output port 1 "00F2(H)" is set as the next address.
Next, the process advances to step S1496, and the main control board 50 determines whether the outputs of all output ports have been turned off, that is, whether the outputs up to output port 7 have been turned off. If it is determined that the process has not finished, the process returns to step S1494, and if it is determined that the process has finished, the process proceeds to step S1497. In this way, the processes of steps S1494 to S1496 are repeated until the outputs of all output ports are turned off, and when it is determined that the outputs of all output ports are turned off, the process advances to step S1497.

By turning off all output ports in this way, all active signals that were output before this process is executed are turned off. As a result, all the LEDs including digits 1 to 9 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, set value display LED 73, management information display LED 74) are turned off, so that burn-in of the LEDs can be prevented.

Additionally, if an unrecoverable error occurs while the excitation signal for the motor 32 is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the excitation signal for the motor 32 will continue to be output until the unrecoverable error is cleared. However, by turning off all output ports, the excitation signal for the motor 32 is turned off, so that seizure of the motor 32 can be prevented.
Furthermore, if an unrecoverable error occurs while the blocker signal is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the medal detection process will not be executed, but the blocker 45 remains on (medals are not sent to the hopper). However, by turning off all output ports, the blocker 45 is turned off and the inserted medals are returned, so the medals are swallowed. Swallowing can be prevented.

In the next step S1497, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display an error in the upper digits. Output port 3 outputs the data stored in the D register, and output port 4 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, the process advances to step S1498, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. Here, the length of time to wait depends on the performance of the LED, but it may be set to about "0.1 ms", for example. Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by, for example, the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed. Then, the process advances to the next step S1499.

In step S1499, the main control board 50 turns off the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4 (“0”). This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, the process advances to step S1500, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. This is a process to ensure that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of output ports 3 and 4 are turned off (“0”).

Next, the process advances to step S1501, and the main control board 50 switches between the upper digit and the lower digit.
Specifically, the DE register value and HL register value are exchanged. This results in
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100 (B)")
E register value: Segment data (“01111001(B)”) to display “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of unrecoverable errors
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
L register value: Segment data (“00000110 (B)”) to display “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
<After replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
E register value: Segment data (“00000110 (B)”) to display “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of unrecoverable errors
H register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100 (B)")
L register value: Segment data (“01111001(B)”) to display “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of unrecoverable errors
becomes.

Then, the process advances to step S1502, and the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display an error in the lower digits. Similarly to step S1497, output port 3 outputs the D register value, and output port 4 outputs the E register value. As a result, output port 3 outputs "00001000 (B)" (data with only digit 4 signal as "1") that lights up digit 4, and output port 4 outputs a segment to display "1". Data “00000110(B)” is output.

Next, the process advances to step S1503, and the main control board 50 executes a standby process to prevent flicker. This process is similar to step S1498.
Next, the process advances to step S1504, and the main control board 50 turns off ("0") the outputs of output ports 3 and 4, similarly to step S1499.
In the next step S1505, the main control board 50 executes a standby process to prevent flickering. This process is similar to step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

As a result of the above processing, for example, in the case of an "E1" error, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly displayed at predetermined time intervals.
Note that the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by the interrupt process (I_INTR), but as described above, in the event of an unrecoverable error, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed (prohibited), and as shown in FIG. As shown, an irreversible error is displayed by arithmetic processing using registers and hardware configuration.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731 in FIG.
The main control board 50 first initializes the specified address of the RWM 53 in step S2732, sets (specifies) the next address in the initialization range of the RWM 53 in the next step S2733, and then proceeds to the next step S2734. After proceeding, it is determined whether initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53. If it is determined that the initialization has not been completed, the process returns to step S2732, and if it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2735. As a result, the processes of steps S2732 to S2734 are repeated until the initialization of the entire initialization range of the RWM 53 is completed.

As described above, in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, the initialization range (start address and number of bytes of the initialization range) of the RWM 53 is set.
Then, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is performed for the initialization range of the used area out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713.
Note that the processing of steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) is executed by the program (first program) of the used area. Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is performed only for the initialization range of the used area among the initialization range of the RWM 53.

If it is determined that the initialization has been completed in step S2734, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S2735, and saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. let
Proceeding to the next step S2736, the main control board 50 initializes the initialization range outside the used area among the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Execute.

As described above, in steps S2732 to S2734, the used area of the initialization range of the RWM 53 is initialized, but in step S2736, the area outside the used area of the initialization range of the RWM 53 is initialized. .
Note that the process of step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the used area. Therefore, in step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range outside the used area among the initialization range of the RWM 53.
When the initialization of the initialization range outside the used area is completed in step S2736, the process proceeds to the next step S2737, where the main control board 50 stores the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) saved in step S2735. ) is restored. Then, the process advances to the next step S2738.

In step S2738, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to reset. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the answer is "Yes" in step S2710 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. In this embodiment, in step S2709 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, "7" is stored in the D register as reset determination data. Furthermore, when "Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 41, "7" is maintained in the D register, and when "No" is determined in step S2710 of FIG. 41, the D register is cleared ("0" is stored). . Then, in step S2738 of FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the D register is "7", and if the D register is "7", it is the reset time ("Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 41). It is determined that this is the case, and the process advances to step S2739. On the other hand, when the D register is "0", it is determined that it is not the reset time ("No" in step S2710 of FIG. 41), and step S2739 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2740.

Proceeding to step S2739, the main control board 50 sets the display at the time of reset. Specifically, "70 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F011 (H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "70" can be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2739, and the administrator (hall clerk) is notified that it is time to reset. be able to.

Proceeding to the next step S2740, the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2740 indicates whether it is a reset or a setting change. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2740, making it possible for the sub-control board 80 to determine whether it is a reset or a setting change.

Note that in this embodiment, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 is started at a timing after executing the process in step S2740 and before proceeding to the process in step S2741. In other words, the process of initializing the initialization range of the RWM 53 (the process of steps S2732 to S2734 and S2736 in FIG. 44) has been completed before the interrupt process (I_INTR) starts. This configuration prevents interrupt processing (I_INTR) from being executed while the RWM 53 is being initialized. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the contents of the RWM 53 from being changed (rewritten or overwritten) due to interrupt processing (I_INTR) while the RWM 53 is being initialized.

In the next step S2741, the main control board 50 judges whether or not it is time to reset. Specifically, this is the same as in step S2738. If it is determined that it is not time to reset, the process proceeds to step S2742, and if it is determined that it is time to reset, the process skips step S2742 and proceeds to step S2743.
When the process proceeds to step S2742, the main control board 50 executes a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). The specific contents of this process will be described later. Then, when the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) ends, the process proceeds to the next step S2743.

In step S2743, the main control board 50 determines whether the standby time has elapsed. This waiting time is for waiting for the setting command to be sent. If it is determined that the standby time has elapsed, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S2744, sets the initialization wait time, and executes a 2-byte time wait process (wait process) in the next step S2745. . The processing in steps S2744 and S2745 is for waiting for the initialization of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 to be completed.

When the 2-byte time waiting process is completed, the process advances to the next step S2746, and the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2746 indicates that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has been completed and the setting value. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2746, so it is confirmed that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) is completed and the setting The value can be determined on the sub-control board 80 side.

Proceeding to the next step S2747, the main control board 50 clears (stores "0") the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2747.
When the clearing of the acquisition number data in step S2747 is completed, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) in step S248, and the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 in FIG.
When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is started, first in step S2751, the main control board 50 obtains the setting value data (_NB_RANK) from the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores this in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2752, the main control board 50 generates set value display data. Specifically, in step S2752, the A register value is first stored in the C register, and then "1" is added to the A register value. Then, the process advances to the next step S2753.
As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6", and the setting value data is managed as "0" to "5", and when the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as set value data. Therefore, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the setting value data "N-1" is used as the setting value display data.

Proceeding to step S2753, the main control board 50 stores the generated setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2753, the A register value is stored in the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2754.
In step S2754, the main control board 50 executes interrupt wait processing. This process is a process that waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. This is because by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once, the CPU waits for the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 to turn off (“0”).

In other words, when the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is operated (turned on), the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 turns on ("1"). Thereafter, if the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed even once, the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned off (“0”).
However, after the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 turns on (“1”), the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is looped multiple times before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed. If this happens, the process of adding "1" to the set value data will be repeated.
Therefore, by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once in step S2754, the processes in steps S2752 to S2758 are looped multiple times, and the process of adding "1" to the set value data is repeatedly executed. This prevents this from happening.
Then, in step S2754, the process waits until one interrupt time has elapsed, and then proceeds to the next step S2755.

Note that when the level data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 was "1" during the current interrupt processing, , the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 becomes "1".
Furthermore, if the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The rising edge data of the signal becomes "0".

Similarly, if the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of reset switch 153 becomes "0".
In addition, if the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 was "1" during the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the falling data of the signal of reset switch 153 becomes "1".
The other switches such as the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the setting key switch 152, and the like are similar to the reset switch (setting change switch) 153.

In step S2755, the main control board 50 judges whether it is the time to start the setting confirmation. This process is a process for judging whether it is the time to confirm the setting or the time to change the setting. In this embodiment, when the number of bets before the start of the game is "0" and the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register. Then, in step S2755, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is judged whether the A register value is "1". Then, when the A register value is "1", it is judged that it is the time to confirm the setting, and the process proceeds to step S2760, and when the A register value is not "1" (when the D register value is "0" or "7"), it is judged that it is not the time to confirm the setting (it is the time to change the setting), and the process proceeds to step S2756. Then, after judging whether the A register value is "1" or not, the C register value is stored in the A register. As described above, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the setting value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes the setting value data.
When the power is restored (when the power is turned on and the program start process (M_PRG_START) begins), the A register through the L register are set to their initial values ("0").

Proceeding to step S2756, the main control board 50 refers to the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, when the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S2759. On the other hand, when the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process advances to step S2757.

In step S2757, the main control board 50 refers to the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, when the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been operated, the process advances to step S2758. On the other hand, when the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 is not operated, the process returns to step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2758, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the set value data. Specifically, "1" is added to the A register value. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. Then, when "Yes" in step S2757, that is, when it is determined that the setting change (reset) switch 153 has been operated, "1" is added to the setting value data. Note that when the A register value becomes "6" due to the addition, the A register value is rewritten to "0". Then, the process returns to step S2752.

Further, when proceeding to step S2759, the main control board 50 stores the setting value data. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. Then, even when the answer is "Yes" in step S2756 and the process proceeds to step S2759, the A register value remains the set value data. Then, in step S2759, the A register value is stored in the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. Thereby, the setting value data can be stored in the RWM 53.

Proceeding to the next step S2760, the main control board 50 refers to the falling data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the falling data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 becomes "1", that is, until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. When becomes "1", that is, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the process advances to step S2761.

In step S2761, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at the address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Moreover, when the process according to this flowchart is completed when changing settings, the process proceeds to step S2743 in FIG. 44.

Here, the transition to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress) will be explained.
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on (on), the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open), and the number of bets is "0", the setting key switch is When 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register, and the state shifts to a setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (the setting value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current setting value can be confirmed. Further, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends and the state returns to the state where medals can be bet.

More specifically, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch 152 is on at a timing before the operation of the start switch 41 is detected. Then, when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and the number of bets is "0", if it is determined that the setting key switch 152 is on, the setting change confirmation shown in FIG. 45 is confirmed. Proceed to processing (M_RANK_CTL). Further, steps S2751 to S2754 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45 are as described above.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the number of bets before the start of a game is "0", when the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register. Then, when the process proceeds to step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start setting confirmation. Specifically, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether the A register value is "1". Then, when the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to start setting confirmation ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2760.

Thereafter, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. During that time, the current setting value continues to be displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Then, if it is determined in step S2760 that the setting key switch 152 is off, the process proceeds to step S2761, where the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process of this flowchart ends.
Also, when the processing according to this flowchart is terminated during setting confirmation, the process proceeds to the next step in the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) which is the process of determining whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on (whether or not to transition to the setting confirmation state).

In this way, in the third embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process can be executed by the same module. That is, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are created by the same module. Then, based on the information stored in the D register, it is determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
In addition, the determination as to whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be made based on information stored in another register rather than the D register, and the determination as to whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be made based on information stored in RWM53.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the third embodiment. The main process is a process for one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. The stack pointer refers to the area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power outage (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when a power outage occurs, and the stack pointer is set and is a process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, a game start setting process is carried out, which includes generating, updating, storing, etc. of an operating state flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medals are read in. This is a process for reading the number of medals currently bet, and the bet number data or the automatic bet number data is read.
In the next step S274, it is determined whether or not there are any bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S273.

When it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on, and when it is on, processing such as shifting to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
In step S276, management processing of the inserted medals is performed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the medals have been taken care of, and determining whether or not the payment switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S277, soft random number updating processing is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" at a time) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the winning combination lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of "0" to "65535(D)". Note that as an updating method, processing may be performed in which an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) that is incremented at the time of an interrupt) is added to the value before updating.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Note that even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, "No" is determined in step S278.

In step S279, processing upon reception of the start switch is executed. This process is a process that sets a flag that settings cannot be changed, sets an output request when the reel 31 starts rotating, and sets the number of outputs for outputting a medal input signal as an external signal to a hall computer, etc. .
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared. This causes the acquisition number display LED 78 to display "00" (or to turn off).

Next, the process advances to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes a process of updating the number of AT games. This process is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games is determined based on the winning combination lottery result by the winning lottery processing in step S282. For example, when a rare combination is won, the number of additional AT games may be determined. Therefore, when adding the number of AT games and adding the additional amount to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 46).
Note that after accepting the start switch (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281, but this is not limited to this, and after the winning combination lottery process in step S282 or after all reels 31 are stopped (step S290 onwards). The AT game number counter may also be updated.
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when it has an AT difference number counter, the AT difference number counter is activated after all reels 31 have stopped and after the medal payout process due to winnings has been completed (after step S300). Update.

In step S282, the role selection means 61 executes a role selection when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when an operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number value at the time of role selection is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any of the winning roles using the role selection table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section transition lottery process. In this embodiment, an AT lottery is also executed during the advantageous section transfer lottery.
Next, the process advances to step S284, and a push order instruction number is set. This process generates a push order instruction number and displays push order instruction information when activating the instruction function in the game during AT (displaying the push order instruction number on the acquired number display LED 78). It is processing.

In the next step S285, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process executes processing to determine whether or not the minimum gaming time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing a timer value of the minimum playing time, and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834≈4099 ms)". In step S279, if it is determined that the minimum playing time is "0", an initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum playing time (timer value). Then, the minimum gaming time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing. When the process advances to step S285 for the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0", the process advances to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start rotating the reel 31. When the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, acceptance of stopping the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not an operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all the reels 31 have stopped and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, it returns to step S287.

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S290.
Note that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off the light may be provided as segment data and that data may be output.

In step S291, symbol display is determined. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the active line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304; if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 usually does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of symbol display determination, when a symbol that should not originally be displayed (a kicking symbol) is displayed on the active line, it is determined that there is an abnormality and an irreversible error process is executed.

If it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293, where an update process for the payout number is executed. This process is a process for storing the payout number for the game as the payout number data and the payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. Next, the process proceeds to step S295, where an interrupt waiting process is performed. In the next step S296, the interrupt process is prohibited. By the processes of steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is prohibited immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. Next, the process advances to step S298, and ratio setting processing is executed. This "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, etc. in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor). Then, in step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and in the next step S300, interrupts are permitted (restarted). In this manner, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited before the process is executed.

Note that interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of ratio set processing because ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the used area, and when a program outside the used area is being executed in the main processing. This is because if interrupt processing is inserted into the program, programs in the used area and programs outside the used area will coexist, making the processing complicated.

Next, the process advances to step S301, and a game end check process is performed. This process is a process for clearing the condition device (winning combination) flag and the like. The process then proceeds to step S302, where an output request is set at the end of the game, and a control command set 1 is performed at the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 is finished, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment.
In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in Fig. 47, after step S452, the process proceeds to step S2770, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred. If it is determined that a power outage has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2771, where the main control board 50 executes a power outage process (I_POWER_DOWN). On the other hand, if it is determined that a power outage has not occurred, the process skips step S2771 and proceeds to step S454.

In this way, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). Therefore, when interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed because interrupts are disabled or because a program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) ) is also not executed. Note that the specific contents of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) will be described later. When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is completed, the process advances to step S454.

In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in Fig. 47, the process proceeds from step S455 to step S2821, where the main control board 50 executes the LED display control (I_LED_OUT). In this manner, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). The specific content of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) will be described later.
Then, when the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is ended, the process proceeds to step S2765, where the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the usage area of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2221, where the main control board 50 executes ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

Here, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is a process for controlling the lighting of the credit number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, the set value display LED 73 (digits 1 to 5), etc. ) is executed by
On the other hand, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), and is executed by a program (second program) outside the usage area. The specific contents of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) will be described later. When the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is completed, the process advances to step S458.

In step S458, the main control board 50 determines whether the set value is within the normal range. Specifically, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) stored at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is read and stored in the A register. Next, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "5" ("5" is subtracted from the A register value), and it is determined whether the carry flag is set to "1". Then, when the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range (the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"), and when the carry flag = "1" determines that the set value data is not within the normal range. Then, when it is determined that it is within the normal range, the process advances to step S459, and when it is determined that it is not within the normal range, the process advances to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) of step S2811.

In the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, if "No" in step S458 or "Yes" in step S460, the process advances to step S2811, and the main control board 50 performs the unrecoverable error processing 2. Execute (S_ERROR_STOP). The specific contents of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.
Furthermore, in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, if "No" in step S460, the process advances to step S2766, and the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register) in step S2765. flag register)). Then, the process advances to step S457.

Here, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, the processes of step S2221, step S458, step S459, and step S460 are executed by a program (second program) outside the used area.
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is set in step S2765. The AF register is saved in the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53, and when finishing the processing by the program outside the used area (second program) and returning to the processing by the program in the used area (first program). Bring it back.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 in FIG.
When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is started, first, in step S2772, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process is a process for saving various registers to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53.

Proceeding to the next step S2773, the main control board 50 clears all output ports 52. This turns off the output of all output ports 52, and for example, when the motor 32 is driving (while the reels 31 are rotating) or the hopper motor 36 is driving (while paying out medals), Stop its drive.
In the next step S2774, the main control board 50 stores the stack pointer at a predetermined address in the work area of the RWM 53's used area. Note that the stack pointer saved in step S2774 is restored in step S2722 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. 42.

Proceeding to the next step S2775, the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to step S2776, and the main control board 50 executes RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET). The specific contents of the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) will be described later. When the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is completed, the process advances to the next step S2777, and the main control board 50 restores the AF register saved in step S2775. Then, the process advances to the next step S2778.

The RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is executed by a program outside the used area (second program).
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the used area of RWM53 in step S2775, and when processing by the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and processing returns to the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored in step S2777.

When the process proceeds to step S2778, the main control board 50 prohibits access to the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2779, where the main control board 50 goes into a reset wait state (loop processing state). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 in FIG.
When the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is started, the main control board 50 first saves the stack pointer (SP register) to a specific address in the work area outside the used area of the RWM 53 in step S2781. , In the next step 2782, a stack pointer ("F400(H)") outside the used area is set, and when the process proceeds to the next step S2783, a plurality of registers are saved to the stack area outside the used area of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2784.

Here, in step S2781, the stack pointer (SP register) is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in FIG. 35).
As mentioned above, the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is a process performed by a program outside the used area (second program), so while the program outside the used area (second program) is being executed, the program in the used area is The stack pointer used in the (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program (first program) in the used area.
Furthermore, in step S2782, the stack pointer (address "F400(H)") outside the used area is stored in the stack pointer (SP register).
Furthermore, in step S2783, various registers are saved to a stack area outside the used area.

Proceeding to step S2784, the main control board 50 sets a power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53. Here, when the power-off processing is executed, "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).
Note that when the power is restored, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared (set to "0") in step S2724 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. 42. Therefore, after executing the process of step S2724, the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "00(H)". If the power-off processing is not executed, the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is not set, so the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "00(H)".
Proceeding to the next step S2785, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2786.

Proceeding to step S2786, the main control board 50 sets the start address (“F000(H)”) of the used area of the RWM 53 in an address specification register (for example, B register), and proceeds to the next step S2787. , sets the number of bytes of the used area of the RWM 53 (checksum calculation number) in the register for the number of calculations (for example, C register), and proceeds to the next step S2788. , set initial data ("00000000(B)").

Then, proceeding to the next step S2789, the main control board 50 executes a checksum calculation process for the used area of the RWM 53.
In this embodiment, the used area of RWM 53 is set to the range of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)", and the processes of steps S2789 and S2790 are repeated until it is determined in the next step S2790 that the checksum calculation process has been completed up to address "F1FF(H)" of RWM 53. This causes the checksum of the used area of RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") to be calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in step S2789, the data indicated by the address designation register (B register) value is subtracted from the checksum calculation register (D register) value. In the next step S2790, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the used area of the RWM 53 has been completed, and the process advances to step S2791. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", the value of the register for address designation (B register) is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2789.

When the checksum calculation process for the area used by RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2791, where the main control board 50 sets the first address ("F210(H)") outside the area used by RWM 53 in the address specification register (B register), and in the next step S2792, sets the number of bytes outside the area used by RWM 53 (the number of checksum calculations) in the calculation count register (C register).

Then, the process advances to the next step S2793, and the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the area outside the RWM 53's use area.
In this embodiment, the areas outside the RWM 53's use area are set to addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", and the checksum is calculated up to the address "F3FF(H)" of the RWM 53 in the next step S2794. The processing in steps S2793 and S2794 is repeated until it is determined that the processing has ended. As a result, the checksum outside the used area of the RWM 53 (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the process advances to step S2793, the checksum calculation result of the used area of the RWM 53 is stored in the checksum calculation register (D register). Then, in step S2793, the data indicated by the address specification register (B register) value is subtracted from the checksum calculation register (D register) value. In the next step S2794, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the area outside the used area of the RWM 53 has been completed, and the process advances to step S2795. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", the address specification register (B register) value is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2793.

In this manner, in this embodiment, RWM checksum data (also referred to as complement data, error detection data, or error detection information) is calculated by executing the processes of steps S2785 to S2794.
As mentioned above, this RWM checksum data (complement data) includes data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53, and address "F210(H)" outside the used area. ~ "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") is a value that becomes "0" when added to the added value of the data.

When the checksum calculation process outside the area used by the RWM 53 is completed, the process advances to step S2795, and the main control board 50 stores (saves) the RWM checksum data (complement data) at the address "F2A0 (H)" of the RWM 53. )do.
Proceeding to the next step S2796, the main control board 50 restores the register saved in step S2783, and in the next step S2797, restores the stack pointer saved in step S2781. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 in FIG.
First, in step S2822, output ports 3 and 4 (FIG. 38) are turned off. The output port 3 is an output port corresponding to the digit 1 signal to the digit 5 signal, and the output port 4 is an output port corresponding to the segment 1A to segment 1P signals. By outputting "00000000 (B)" for these output ports 3 and 4, output of digits 1 to 5 is temporarily disabled. This prevents different LEDs from appearing to be lit at the same time (overlapping display) even for a moment when switching the LED display (afterimage prevention).

In the next step S2823, the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) of the used area (FIG. 33 and FIG. 40(A)) is updated. Updating the LED display counter 1 is a process of shifting the bit "1" by one digit to the right. This updated value is stored in the address "F051(H)" (FIG. 33) of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to step S2824.

In step S2824, it is determined whether the value of LED display counter 1 is "00000000 (B)". If it is determined that the value is "00000000(B)", the process advances to step S2825. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "00000000(B)", step S2825 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2826.

In step S2825, the LED display counter 1 is initialized. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000 (B)" and is stored at the address "F051 (H)" of the RWM 53 (FIG. 33). Then, the process advances to step S2826.
In step S2826, the values of the LED display counter 1 (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 33) and the LED display request flag (address "F052(H)" in FIG. 33) stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of LED display counter 1 is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.

Next, the process advances to step S2827, and a segment display confirmation set for the digit to be displayed this time is performed. In this process, the A register value (the value of the LED display request flag) and the E register value (the value of the LED display counter 1) are ANDed to create data for the LED to be lit this time.

for example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
becomes.
Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. Furthermore, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

Next, the process advances to step S2828, and it is determined whether the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the value of the LED display counter 1 and the value of the LED display request flag) is "0". Here, if it is "0", it is determined that there is no display request ("No"), and the process advances to step S2844. On the other hand, if it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2829.

In step S2829, error display data is acquired. When an error occurs, error display data is stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53. Then, in step S2829, error display data is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the B register.
In the next step S2830, LED segment table 2 is set. This embodiment includes an LED segment table 1 that stores data for displaying alphabetic characters on a 7-segment display, and an LED segment table 2 that stores data for displaying numbers on a 7-segment display. These are stored in the used area of the ROM 54. Note that a description of the specific configurations of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 will be omitted. Then, in step S2830, the start address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S2831, where the set value display data (address "F001(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S2832, and it is determined whether there is a request to display a set value. Specifically, it is determined whether the D4 bit (bit corresponding to digit 5) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1"("00010000(B)"). If the D4 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a setting value display request ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D4 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no setting value display request ("No"), and the process advances to step S2833.

In step S2833, the credit number data (address "F010(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2834, an offset for upper digits is obtained. This process executes an operation to divide the A register value (credit number data obtained in step S2833) by "10 (decimal number)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder value in the C register. This is the process of

In the next step S2835, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the number of credits. Specifically, it is determined whether the D0 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". If the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process advances to step S2836.

Proceeding to step S2836, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the number of credits. Specifically, it is determined whether the D1 bit (bit corresponding to digit 2) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". If the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2842. On the other hand, when the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process advances to step S2837.

In step S2837, the acquisition number data (address "F011(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2838, it is determined whether an error is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether the B register value is "0" or not, and if it is "0", it is determined that an error is not displayed ("No"), and the process advances to step S2840. On the other hand, if the B register value is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2839.

In step S2839, LED segment table 1 is set. When proceeding to step S2839, the HL register stores the top address of LED segment table 2 for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display, but when an error is displayed, an English character corresponding to the type of error is displayed on the 7-segment display. Therefore, in step S2839, the top address of LED segment table 1 for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display is read, and this value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the top address of LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register instead of the top address of LED segment table 2 set in step S2830.

In the next step S2840, an offset for the upper digits is obtained. When proceeding to step S2840, the A register stores the acquisition number data acquired in step S2837, and the B register stores the error display data acquired in step S2829. Then, if an error has not occurred, an operation is performed to divide the acquisition number data stored in the A register by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register. On the other hand, if an error has occurred, an operation is performed to divide the error display data stored in the B register by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In the next step S2841, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to digit 3) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". If the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D2 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number ("No"), and the process advances to step S2842.

In step S2842, an offset for lower digits is obtained. This process is a process for storing data stored in the C register in the A register. At the time of proceeding to step S2842, the quotient calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840 is stored in the A register, and the remainder calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840 is stored in the C register. Then, in step S2842, the C register value (remainder of division) is stored in the A register.

Next, the process advances to step S2843 to obtain segment output data. Specifically, the data stored in the HL register (the start address of LED segment table 2 stored in step S2830 or the start address of LED segment table 1 stored in step S2839) and the data stored in the A register ( (offset value corresponding to the display data) is added, and data corresponding to the address after the addition is obtained from the LED segment table 1 or 2 of the ROM 54 and stored in the D register.

Next, the process advances to step S2844, and it is determined whether there is a request to display segment P.
Specifically, first, the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 (E register value) is "1" (lighting timing of digit 4), and the advantageous section display LED flag (address "F062 (H )") is "1". Then, when the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", it is determined that there is a display request for segment P ("Yes"), and step Proceed to S2845.
On the other hand, when the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no display request for the segment P ("No"), and step S2845 is skipped and the process advances to step S2846.

Next, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is not "1", the following process is performed.
An AND operation is performed on the LED display counter 1 (E register value) and the status display LED lighting data (obtained from address "F044(H)" of RWM 53 in FIG. 33), and it is determined whether the result of the AND operation is "0". If the result of the AND operation is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request for segment P ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845. On the other hand, if the result of the AND operation is "0", it is determined that there is no display request for segment P ("No"), and step S2845 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2846.

Proceeding to step S2845, segment P output data is set. Specifically, the segment output data (D register value) acquired in step S2843 and "10000000 (B)" are ORed, and the OR operation result is stored in the D register. As a result, the D7 bit (bit corresponding to segment P) of the segment output data becomes "1".

Then, the process advances to the next step S2846, where the digit signal is output from output port 3 and the segment signal is output from output port 4. Specifically, the data stored in the E register (LED display counter 1) is output as a digit signal from the output port 3, and the data stored in the D register (segment output data) is output as a segment signal from the output port. Output from 4. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).
As mentioned above, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is a process performed by the second program, and since execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited while the second program is running, it is impossible to recover from. No interrupt disable processing is provided after the start of error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). Other than this point, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is similar to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43.
Note that in FIG. 51, the same steps as those in FIG. 43 are given the same step numbers.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG.
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed during interrupt processing (I_INTR). Also, in a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, between the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 46) and the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during a game), and in a recoverable error state, Since the interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed, so that various ratio information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

When the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) process is started, the main control board 50 first stores the stack pointer (SP register) in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in FIG. 35) in step S2461. to be memorized.
As mentioned above, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program (second program) outside the used area, so while the program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, the program (second program) in the used area is executed. The stack pointer used in the first program is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the used area (the first program).

In the next step S2462, the main control board 50 sets the stack pointer outside the usage area. This process is a process of storing "F400(H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process saves various registers to a stack area outside the used area.
Next, the process advances to step S2464, and the main control board 50 executes flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH). This process is a process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, and is a process for updating the blinking request flag (address "F291(H)").

In the next step S2465, the main control board 50 updates the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME). This process is the process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and includes the blinking switching flag (address "F293(H)"), display switching time (address "F294"), and blinking switching time (address "F296(H)"). This is the process of updating the .
In the next step S2466, the main control board 50 performs ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 56, which will be described later, and is a process for actually displaying (turning on or off) the ratio in the interrupt process.

Next, the process advances to step S2467, and the main control board 50 restores the register. This process is a process for restoring the various registers saved in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. This process is a process of storing the stack pointer saved in step S2461, that is, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, this process causes the tap pointer to indicate the address of the used area. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the settings change state, the settings confirmation state, the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during the game), and return Even in a possible error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, so ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed.
Therefore, even in the setting change state, setting confirmation state, start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in FIG. 46) to game end check processing (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during gaming), and in a recoverable error state, the ratio By the display preparation process (S_DSP_READY), it is possible to sequentially display various ratios regarding information types and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed regardless of whether the door switch 17 is on or off (whether the front door 12 is open or closed). That is, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed).
Therefore, whether the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) or off (the front door 12 is closed), the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

In response, an unrecoverable error occurs, and the unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed, and the game progress is stopped. In the stopped state), interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited and ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is not executed. Therefore, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) are Various ratios related to game results will no longer be displayed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in an unrecoverable error state, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Turn off outputs 0 to 7 (“00000000(B)”).

As a result, in an unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is "00000000 (B)". Therefore, all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off until the irreversible error state is canceled and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted.
The fact that all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off is a characteristic of an unrecoverable error state, and this indicates to the manager (hall clerk) that the unrecoverable error state You can let us know what happened.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of FIG.
When starting the flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) process, the main control board 50 first sets the number of repetitions and initial values in step S2481. This process is a process of storing "6 (H)" in the B register and "0" in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions "6" is a value for determining whether or not the ratio segments of six items blink.

In the next step S2482, the main control board 50 sets the address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the flashing/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a blinking/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). The blinking/non-applicable item determination value table defines predetermined values for the ratios of six items, respectively. For example, the instruction-included accessory ratio of "70" means that the display is blinked when the instruction-included accessory ratio is "70" or higher.
As shown in FIG. 54, the start address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table is "2500 (H)". Therefore, "2500 (H)" is stored in the DE register.

Furthermore, "non-applicable item" refers to the fact that the function (performance) corresponding to the item is not provided. For example, in a gaming machine that is not equipped with "RB (first class special accessory)", the continuous accessory ratio is not displayed, so when the continuous accessory ratio is displayed, "--" is displayed in the ratio segment by lighting.
In the third embodiment, the ratio of all six items is displayed, but when there is a non-applicable item, "DE( H)".

For example, in a gaming machine that is not equipped with "RB (Class 1 Special Accessory)", the addresses "2502(H)" and "2504(H)" are replaced with "60(H)" in FIG. , "DE(H)" is stored.
In this way, any gaming machine, such as one that does not have a "RB (Class 1 Special Accessory)", can be managed simply by modifying some data in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table. Control processing is included to enable lighting control of information. Therefore, the control program can be easily used in other products.
Note that the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to "DE(H)".

In the next step S2483, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the ratio data. This process is a process of storing the address ("F28D(H)" in FIG. 35) where the accessory state ratio data is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S2484, and the main control board 50 acquires the blinking or non-applicable item determination value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the A register value.

In the next step S2485, the main control board 50 determines whether the item value is not applicable. In this process, "DD(H)" is subtracted from the A register value, and when the operation result is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
In other words, when the item is not applicable, as described above, "DE(H)" is stored in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table, so "1" is subtracted from "DE(H)". After that, if "DD(H)" is further subtracted, it becomes "0" and the zero flag becomes "1".

In addition, when a specified value other than "DE(H)" is stored as a value corresponding to a non-applicable item, for example, "specified value - 1 - (specified value - 1)" is calculated, and if the result of the calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined to be a non-applicable item value.
In addition, the "predetermined value" may be a value exceeding "70 (H)" in the case of the instructed reel ratio, reel ratio (cumulative), and reel ratio (6000 times), a value exceeding "60 (H)" in the case of the continuous reel ratio (cumulative) and continuous reel ratio (6000 times), and a value exceeding "50 (H)" in the case of the reel etc. state ratio.
If it is determined that the value is not a non-corresponding item value, the process proceeds to the next step S2486, and if it is determined that the value is a non-corresponding item value, step S2486 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2487.

In step S2486, the main control board 50 acquires ratio data. This process is a process of storing data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, the main control board 50 stores the ratio data or non-applicable item values. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that this process has the following meaning.

When there is a non-applicable item, no data is stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 in which the ratio data is stored before the above-mentioned saving process.
For example, if the reel does not have an "RB (first type special feature)", the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289(H)") and the consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) data (address "F28B(H)") are stored as "00(H)".

Although the details will be described later, when displaying the ratio in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in the address. At that time, if "00 (H)" is stored in the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) data, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74 will be "00" is displayed. In order to prevent this, "--" is displayed by storing the value of the A register ("DD(H)" in this embodiment) obtained in step S2485 as ratio data.
Note that this program processing is also designed so that it can be used in common by gaming machines that have non-applicable items and gaming machines that do not have non-applicable items.

In the next step S2488, the main control board 50 performs a blinking determination. This process is a process of subtracting data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. It should be noted that if the result of this calculation is a downgrade, the carry flag becomes "1".
Although the details will be described later, when the carry flag = "1", it means that the item is lit in a non-blinking manner when displaying the item, and when the carry flag = "0", This means that it lights up in a blinking manner when displaying the item.

Next, the process advances to step S2489, and the main control board 50 generates a blinking request flag. This processing performs arithmetic processing to rotate and shift the carry flag and C register value to the left.
Specifically, if the carry flag value is "CY" and the C register value is "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0",
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Perform the calculation as follows.

For example, if the C register value is the initial value "00000000(B)" as shown in step S2481 and the carry flag is "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000(B)"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
The calculation is performed as follows.
Therefore, the C register value becomes "00000001(B)."
This C register value ultimately becomes the blink request flag.
In other words, the processing of step S2488 is a processing of storing information in a register (memory area) that determines whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item in question by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table.

In the next step S2490, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the next ratio data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value in the first blinking determination is "F28D(H)" (accessories state ratio data) as described above. Here, if "1" is subtracted, the HL register value becomes "F28C(H)" (accessory ratio (cumulative) data), which is the subject of the second blinking determination.

In the next step S2491, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This process is a process of adding "1" to the DE register value. For example, when "2500 (H)" is initially stored as the DE register value, this process changes it to "2501 (H)".
Here, as shown in FIG. Blinking/non-applicable item determination values are stored in addresses "2500 (H)" to "2505 (H)" in order of accessory ratio.
As a result, a loop process (step Through S2484 to S2492), the target address can be specified, thereby simplifying the process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2492, where the main control board 50 determines whether the repetition has ended. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The value of the B register is decremented by "1."
(2) If the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the repetition has not ended.
Here, since the B register value is set to "6" in the first step S2481, the number of repetitions becomes "6." If it is determined that the repetition has ended, the process proceeds to step S2493, and if it is determined that the repetition has not ended, the process returns to step S2484.
In this manner, blinking determination is performed for six items.

After completing the flashing determination for the six items and proceeding to step S2493, the main control board 50 acquires the total number of games counter value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Store the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the A register.
As described above, the total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes, and "F26D(H)" is the storage area for storing the first digit, and its value is stored in the L register.
Further, "F26E(H)" is a storage area for storing the second digit, and its value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is a storage area for storing the third digit, and its value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, the main control board 50 determines whether the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "0". This process determines whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", the process advances to step S2495, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S2496.
In step S2495, the main control board 50 determines whether 6000 games have elapsed. This process subtracts "6000 (D)" from the HL register value (lower 2 byte data of the total number of games counter). As a result of this calculation, if there is a downgrade, the carry flag becomes "1". Then, when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 6000 games have not elapsed, and the process advances to step S2497.
On the other hand, if it is determined that 6000 games have elapsed, the process advances to step S2496.

In step S2496, the main control board 50 updates the flashing request flag data. This process is to set the D6 bit of the C register to "1". Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the flashing request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. 35 (however, at this point, the bit is in an inverted state). Therefore, when 6000 games have passed, a process is executed to set the D6 bit to "1".

In the next step S2497, the main control board 50 determines whether the upper one byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more). Here, processing is performed to subtract "3" from the A register value. If there is no downturn in this subtraction, the carry flag≠“1”. When the carry flag≠"1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more).

The reason for doing this is to first compare the upper 1 byte with "3" in order to determine whether or not the number of games has reached 175,000. Here, "175000 (D)" is "2AB98 (H)" in hexadecimal, so it is inevitable that the A register value exceeds "2" (A register value is "3" or more). Specifically, it can be seen that the value of the total number of games counter exceeds "175,000 (D)".
In step S2497, if the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" and the process proceeds to step S2500; if the carry flag = "1", the total It is determined that the upper 1 byte of the number of games counter does not exceed "2" and the process advances to step S2498.

In step S2498, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is "2". This process subtracts "2" from the A register value, and if it is determined that the value is not "0", it determines that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is not "2". If it is determined that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is not "2", the process proceeds to step S2501, and if it is determined that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is "2", the process proceeds to step S2499.

In step S2499, the main control board 50 determines whether 175,000 games have elapsed. Specifically, "AB98(H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and if there is a downgrade as a result of this operation, the carry flag becomes "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 175,000 games have not yet elapsed.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2500, and if it is determined that 175,000 games have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2500, the main control board 50 updates the flashing request flag data. This process sets the D7 bit of the C register to "1". The D7 bit of the C register corresponds to the D7 bit (175000 game blinking flag) of the blinking request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. Then, the process advances to step S2501.

In step S2501, the main control board 50 generates a blinking request flag and executes the following processes.
(1) Store “01111111(B)” in the A register.
(2) An exclusive OR (XOR) is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the result is stored in the A register.

Before the process of step S2501 is executed, as described above, the blinking item (bit) among the data stored in the C register stores "0." For example, when 175,000 games have been played, the D7 bit becomes "1" as described above. In other words, when 175,000 games have not been played, the bit becomes "0."
Therefore, a blink request flag is generated by inverting the bit of the C register value so that the item (bit) to be blinked becomes "1".

In the next step S2502, the main control board 50 stores the blinking request flag generated in step S2501. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking request flag ("F291(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F291(H)" in FIG. 35).
As a result, items that blink become "1" and items that do not blink become "0". In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is expressed as "1" or "0", and the blinking request flags regarding eight items including whether or not to blink are stored at address "F291(H)" in FIG. be remembered.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG.
When starting the process of updating the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME), the main control board 50 first updates the display switching time in step S2511. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address storing the display switching time ("F294(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the subtraction result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cycles between "0" and "2144 (D)" when expressed as a display switching time in decimal notation.

Therefore, if the process is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144(D)" (860(H)) is stored as the display switching time.
Further, when the process is performed when the flag is "0" and "2144(D)" (860(H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
Note that since the interrupt process is executed every 2.235 ms, the flag changes from "0" to "2144 (D)" approximately every 4792 ms, and the carry flag becomes "1".
As a result, the ratio display contents are switched approximately every 5 seconds.

In the next step S2512, the main control board 50 determines whether the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is to determine whether or not the carry flag was set to "1" in the process of step S2511, and when the carry flag was set to "1", it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed.
When it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process advances to step S2513, and when it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S2518.

In step S2513, the main control board 50 saves the blinking switching time. This process stores "134(D)(86(H))" in the address (blinking switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (i.e., "F296(H)").
That is, when it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching time is saved. The blinking switching time of 2.235×134=299.49 (ms) is stored.

Next, the process advances to step S2514, and the main control board 50 turns off the blinking switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking switching flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Store "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the blinking switching flag is "0", it means the light is on, and when it is "1", it means the light is off.
That is, at the timing when the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching flag becomes "0" (lit).

Next, the process advances to step S2515, and the main control board 50 updates the ratio display number. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value.
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 ("F292(H)" in FIG. 35) corresponding to the ratio display number is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that cycles between "0" and "5" for the ratio display number. Therefore, if the process is performed when the ratio display number is "5", "0" is stored as the ratio display number. Furthermore, if the process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S2516, the main control board 50 determines whether the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, when the carry flag = "1", it is determined that the ratio display number is not "0". In other words, if the process of step S2515 is executed when the ratio display number is "5", the carry flag ≠ "1" (= "0"), and at this time, it is determined that the ratio display number is "0". do.

Then, in step S2516, if it is determined that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process advances to step S2517, and if it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S2517, the main control board 50 corrects the ratio display number. This process is a process of adding "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F292(H)" in FIG. 35). Through this process, when "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". As a result, the ratio display number cycles through "1" to "6". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

If it is determined in step S2512 that the display switching time has not elapsed and the process proceeds to step S2518, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switching time. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the blinking switching time ("F296(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the subtraction is stored at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cyclically cycles between "0" and "134 (D)" when expressed as a decimal number as the blinking switching time.
Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switching time is "0", "134(D)" (86(H)) will be stored as the blinking switching time.
Moreover, when the process is performed at "0", and "134(D)" (86(H)) is stored as the blinking switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, the process advances to step S2519, and the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switching time has elapsed. This determination is made by determining whether the carry flag is "1" or not, and when the carry flag≠"1", it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed. When it is determined that the blinking switching time has elapsed, the process advances to step S2520, and when it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S2520, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking switching flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the stored data at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the added result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that cycles between "0" and "1" for the blinking switching flag. Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switching flag is "1", "0" is stored as the blinking switching flag.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG.
When the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) starts, the main control board 50 first acquires the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 35) in step S1471. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and storing it in the D register.

In the next step S1472, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether there is a request to display any of digits 6 to 9. Specifically, the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in the D register and "00001111(B)" are ANDed. If the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process advances to step S1475.
Note that in the third embodiment, the result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter 2 and "00001111(B)" will never be "0", so the result in step S1472 will never be "No".

In the next step S1475, the ratio display number (address "F292(H)" in FIG. 35) is obtained. This process executes a process of obtaining the ratio display number and storing it in the A register, and further storing the A register value in the E register.
Here, the number of times to check the blinking bit, which will be described later, is determined based on the ratio display number. For example, the following is given:
Example 1)
Ratio display number is "1": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the ratio of indicated features.
Example 2)
Ratio display number is "2": Obtain the number of blinking bit inspections for the continuous feature ratio (6000 times).
Example 3)
Ratio display number is "5": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the reel ratio (total cumulative).
Example 4)
Ratio display number is "6": The number of blinking bit checks for the reel status ratio is obtained.
Furthermore, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the flashing bit test frequency table is set. In this process, an address obtained by subtracting "1" from the start address of the flashing bit test count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) is stored in the HL register.
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the flashing bit test frequency table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
As shown in FIG. 57, a predetermined value (for example, the value corresponding to the designated accessory ratio is "8 (H)") is stored for each ratio.
The first address is "2510(H)". Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

It should be noted that the "blinking bit test count" is a value indicating how many bits from the D0th bit the bit to be tested is reached in the blinking request flag of the address "F292(H)".
For example, in FIG. 57, "8 (H)" is stored in the designated accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total), accessory ratio (cumulative total), and accessory state ratio. , is a value for determining whether or not the value of the 8th D7 bit counting from the D0 bit is "1" in the blinking request flag. The D7th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 175,000 times, and when the D7th bit is "1", the instruction included accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio The identification segments of (cumulative total), accessory ratio (cumulative total), and accessory state ratio are to be blinked.

In addition, in FIG. 57, "7 (H)" is stored in the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times), but this is from the D0th bit in the blinking request flag. This value is used to determine whether or not the value of the seventh D6 bit is "1". The D6th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 6000 times, and when this D6th bit is "1", the continuous role object ratio (6000 times), The identification segment with the accessory ratio (6000 times) will be flashed.

In the next step S2532, the main control board 50 sets the number of identification segment blinking bit tests. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250F (H) + 3 (H) = 2512 (H) (=HL register value)
7(H) (=B register value)
becomes.

In other words, "250F(H)" becomes the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F292(H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit inspection table and store it in the address. This makes it possible to obtain the data that has been
In the above example, "7 (H)", which is the information for determining whether to blink the identification segment when the accessory ratio (6000 times) is stored in the address "2512 (H)", is obtained. be done.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1476, where the main control board 50 sets the identification segment offset table. This process stores the top address of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) in the HL register. The top address is "2520(H)", and the value obtained by subtracting "1" from this address, which is "251F(H), is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1477, the main control board 50 acquires the identification segment offset value. This process is a process of reading from the identification segment offset table using the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as an offset value.
Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520(H)", which is "251F(H)" plus "1(H)", is stored in the HL register and stored at the corresponding address. "7A(H)", which is the data obtained, is stored in the A register. Also, when the ratio display number is "2", "2521(H)", which is "251F(H)" plus "2(H)", is stored in the HL register, and the data stored at the address is "6B(H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) (request to display digit 6). Here, it is determined whether the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits), the process advances to step S1482, and if there is no display request, the process advances to step S1479.

In step S1479, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (request to display digit 7). Here, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), the process advances to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process advances to step S2533.

In step S2533, the main control board 50 sets the number of ratio segment blinking bit tests. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the B register.
Here, the ratio display number acquired in step S1475 is stored in the E register. Therefore, the same value is stored in the E register, A register, and B register.
Next, the process advances to step S1480. Note that the process proceeds to step S1480 when there is no request to display the ratio (1000 digits) and ratio (100 digits), that is, when there is no request to display the identification segment (when displaying the ratio segment). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is obtained.
In step S1480, the main control board 50 obtains a numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register. For example, when the E register value is "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the instruction-included accessory ratio data is acquired.

Acquisition of specific ratio data is as follows.
(1) In the HL register, store the value (“F287(H)”) obtained by subtracting “1” from the address of the RWM 53 where the designated accessory ratio data is stored (“F288(H)” in Figure 35). do.
(2) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(3) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In other words, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored is calculated (specified) using "F287(H)" as the reference address and the ratio display number as the offset value, and the data stored at the RWM address is stored in the register (storage area). can be retrieved (memorized).

As a result of this process, the A register contains instructional accessory ratio data, continuous accessory ratio data (6000 times), accessory ratio data (6000 times), continuous accessory ratio data (cumulative), accessory ratio data (cumulative ), an offset value for displaying any one of the accessory state ratios is stored. Note that this offset value (A register value) is used when obtaining ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, the process advances to step S1481, and the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display a ratio (one digit) (request to display digit 9). This process is a process of determining whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1". If there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the process advances to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process advances to step S1482.
Note that when there is no request to display the ratio (1 digit) in step S1481, there is a request to display the ratio (10 digits).

Through the above processing, if there is a request to display the ratio (1000's digit) or the ratio (10's digit), the flow proceeds to step S1482; if there is a request to display the ratio (100's digit) or the ratio (1's digit), the flow proceeds to step S1483.
In step S1482, the main control board 50 sets the offset for the upper digits. The reason for proceeding to step S1482 is to light up the upper digits of the identification segment or ratio segment. At this point, the A register stores the identification segment offset value (step S1477) or the ratio data (step S1480). Then, the following process is executed.

(1) Swap the lower 4 bits and upper 4 bits stored in the A register.
For example, if the data before swapping is "0011/1001(B)" (where "/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), swapping the lower 4 bits with the upper 4 bits results in "1001/0011(B)."
(2) The value of the A register is ANDed with "00001111(B)" and the result is stored in the A register. This process masks the upper 4 bits (setting them to "0") so that the lower 4 bits of the A register can be used as an offset value.
Of the 1-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the upper 4 bits correspond to the upper offset value, and the lower 4 bits correspond to the lower offset value. Therefore, by performing the above process, an offset value for acquiring the upper segment data is generated.

In the next step S1483, the main control board 50 sets a ratio display segment data table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register. The start address is "2530(H)", and "2530(H)" is stored in the HL register. Note that a description of the specific structure of the ratio display segment data table will be omitted.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1484, where the main control board 50 acquires the segment output data. This process adds the A register value (offset value) to the HL register value (top address of the ratio display segment data table), and stores the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition in the E register.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; top address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
If
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) (display data for "5")
It becomes.

Next, the process advances to step S1485, and the main control board 50 determines whether segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when displaying digits 6 to 9, segment P (dot) of digit 7 is always displayed, so when there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), it is determined that segment P is displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a request to display a ratio (1 digit), a ratio (10 digits), and a ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that there is no request to display the segment P.

Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P, and if it is not "1", it is determined that there is no request to display segment P. Specifically, the following process is executed.
(1) Store “00000010(B)” in the A register.
(2) The A register value and the D register value (the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in step S1471) are ANDed. If the result of this AND is not "0", it is determined that a display request for segment P has been made.
If it is determined that a display request for segment P has been made, the process proceeds to step S1486; if it is determined that a display request has not been made, the process proceeds to step S2534.

In step S1486, the main control board 50 sets output data corresponding to the segment P. Segment P corresponds to bit D7 of the 8-bit data, so the segment data (E register value) obtained in step S1484 is ORed with "10000000 (B)", and the result of the operation is stored in E register. Remember.

In the next step S2534, the main control board 50 acquires the blink request flag. This process is to store the data of the blink request flag (address "F291 (H)" in FIG. 35) in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2535, where the main control board 50 performs a blink bit check. This process shifts the A register to the right by "1" and stores the overflow result in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag = "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag = "1".

In the next step S2536, the main control board 50 determines whether the inspection has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the test has ended.
When it is determined that the examination has been completed, the process advances to step S2537, and when it is determined that the examination has not been completed, the process returns to step S2535.
Through the above processing, the value of the blinking request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times initially stored in the B register, and the result of overflowing at that time is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the blinking request flag is "10000000 (B)" (the 175000th blink flag of the D7th bit is on) and the B register value is "8 (H)",
1st time: “10000000 (B)” → “01000000 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 8-1 = 7 (H)
2nd time: “01000000 (B)” → “00100000 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 7-1 = 6 (H)
3rd time: "00100000 (B)" → "00010000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6-1 = 5 (H)
4th time: "00010000 (B)" → "00001000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5-1 = 4 (H)
5th time: "00001000 (B)" → "00000100 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4-1 = 3 (H)
6th time: "00000100 (B)" → "00000010 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (H)
7th time: “00000010 (B)” → “00000001 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 2-1 = 1 (H)
8th time: “00000001 (B)” → “00000000 (B)”, carry flag = “1”
B register value = 1-1 = 0 (H)
becomes.

In step S2537, the main control board 50 determines whether the blink request flag is on. This process determines whether the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has ended, and if it is "1", it determines that the blink request flag is on. If it is determined that the blink request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2538, and if it is determined that the blink request flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S2538, the main control board 50 determines whether the flashing switching flag is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data of the blinking switching flag (address "F293(H)" in FIG. 35) in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is "0" (second zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the blinking switching flag is not on.
When it is determined that the flashing switching flag is on, the process advances to step S2539, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step S1487.
Note that from steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the blinking request flag is off (“No” in step S2537), the process does not proceed to step S2538, so even if the blinking switching flag is on, the light will not go out.
b) Even if the blinking request flag is on (“Yes” in step S2537), if the blinking switching flag is off (“No” in step S2538), the light is turned on.
c) If the blinking request flag is on (“Yes” in step S2537) and the blinking switching flag is on (“Yes” in step S2538), the process advances to step S2539, and the light is turned off.

In step S2539, the main control board 50 clears the segment data. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the E register.
Here, the B register value is always "0" when it is determined in step S2536 that the test is completed. Therefore, this process is a process of setting "0" in the E register. In other words, when the blinking request flag is on (“1”) and the blinking switching flag is on (“1”, i.e., off), the interrupt processing turns off the display to be lit, so the segment In order to set the data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)", the process of step S2539 is executed. Then, the process advances to step S1487.

In step S1487, the main control board 50 outputs the segment signal from the output port 7 and the digit signal from the output port 6 in order to output the digit signal and the segment signal. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Exchange the DE register value and HL register value.
Here, a digit signal is stored in the D register. Furthermore, the E register stores segment signals. and,
Swap the data stored in the D register with the data stored in the H register,
The data stored in the E register and the data stored in the L register are exchanged.
This results in
A digit signal is stored in the H register,
The segment signal is stored in the L register.
(2) Output the L register value to output port 7 and output the H register value to output port 6.
This ends the processing according to this flowchart.

Next, an operation when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the third embodiment is operated will be described.
When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs (for example, a medal retention error in the medal selector ("CE" error), etc.), the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is operated to release the recoverable error state.
In this case, as described above, even if the recoverable error state is released, the data in the used area of RWM53 and outside the used area are maintained without being initialized, and the data relating to the favorable zone is also maintained without being initialized, so the favorable zone display LED77 also remains lit.
When recovering from a recoverable error state, data relating to errors such as error detection flags stored in a specified address of the RWM 53 may be initialized.

On the other hand, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is on and a medal can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off and the setting key switch 152 is then turned off. Assume that the power is turned on under the condition that , and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated).
In this case, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The result is "No", and the result in step S2710 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change during normal power-off recovery is set.

Also, since medals can be bet in this situation, the setting change impossible flag is off, so step S2714 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of FIG. 44, the initialization process is performed for the addresses "F001 (H)" to "F1FF (H)" in the use area of RWM 53 and the addresses "F292 (H)" to "F3FF (H)" outside the use area. Therefore, the data related to the advantageous zone is initialized, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off. However, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address "F000 (H)" is not initialized and is maintained, so the setting value is not changed. Furthermore, since it is reset, step S2741 of FIG. 44 becomes "Yes", and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is skipped, so the setting change state is not entered. After that, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 46), and the game returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

In this way, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and a medal can be bet and a recoverable error state occurs, if the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the recoverable error state, It is possible to maintain the game in an advantageous section.
On the other hand, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is on and a medal can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off once and then the reset switch 153 is turned on. When the power is turned on, the recoverable error state can be canceled and the game can be resumed from the normal period instead of the advantageous period.
This allows the manager (hall clerk) to select whether to maintain the game in the advantageous section or restart the game from the normal section.

Also, for example, if a player stops playing in the advantageous zone (in the middle of playing in the advantageous zone), if the next player is allowed to play in the middle of playing in the advantageous zone, the player will be too advantageous.
On the other hand, changing the settings while the hall is open is not advisable, as it may stimulate players' gambling instincts.
Furthermore, if the gaming machines are turned off and stopped from operating while the hall is open, the operating rate of the gaming machines will decrease, which is undesirable from the perspective of the hall's management.
Therefore, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is on and medals can be bet, the power is turned off once, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on. This allows the game to be resumed from the normal zone without changing the settings.

In addition, under a situation in which medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated). , suppose the power is turned on.
In this case, it becomes possible to shift to a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress), and then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and the setting change state ends, medals can be bet. Return to the situation.

Specifically, in a situation where medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated). Under these circumstances, when the power is turned on, "Yes" is determined in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, and the process advances to step S2711. Furthermore, since this is not an abnormal time for power-off recovery, the answer in step S2712 is "No", and the process advances to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change in normal power-off recovery is set. Furthermore, since the situation is such that medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so "Yes" is determined in step S2714, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, since it is not reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 becomes "No", and proceeds to step S2742 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). Then, since it is not the time to start the setting confirmation, step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45 becomes "No", and the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is repeated until step S2756 becomes "Yes". In other words, the setting change state is entered. After that, when the start switch 41 is operated, step S2756 becomes "Yes", and further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, step S2760 becomes "Yes", and the setting change state ends. Then, through the processing of steps S2743 to S2747 in FIG. 44, proceeds to step S248 of the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), and returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

In addition, as described above, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46), including during the rotation of the reels 31, are performed. During this period, the settings cannot be changed, and during this period, the settings cannot be changed flag is turned on.
Then, the power is turned off when the setting change prohibition flag is on, and then the power is turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. 41, the result is "No" in step S2714 of FIG. 41, so the process does not proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, and therefore does not proceed to the setting change state.

In contrast, when medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so when the power is turned off in this situation, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, if the power is turned on, step S2714 in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process moves to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731, making it possible to move to the setting change state.

Further, as described above, when the power-off recovery is normal, if an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state, the process advances to step S2713 in FIG. ” to “F1FF(H)” and addresses outside the used area “F292(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are set. Further, the initialization range of the usage area of the RWM 53 includes the credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) of the address "F010(H)" and the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) of the address "F043(H)".

Therefore, in situations where medals can be bet, the number of bets is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", the power is turned off. If the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered. When the game ends and the situation becomes such that medals can be bet, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, if the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and medals can be bet. When this situation occurs, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off. 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, if the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and the medal is bet. When the situation becomes possible, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on, and the setting key switch 152 is reset. If the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered while the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet. , the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, under a situation in which medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on (operated). , suppose the power is turned on. In this case, it becomes possible to execute the initialization process of a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and after the initialization process is executed, it becomes possible to bet medals without shifting to the setting change state.

Specifically, the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned off in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. If it is turned on, the result in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The initialization range of RWM 53 is set. Furthermore, since the situation is such that medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and the address "F292(H)" outside the used area ~"F3FF(H)" initialization processing is executed.
Also, since it is a reset time, the answer is "Yes" in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. Thereafter, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, and the state returns to the state where medals can be bet.

Furthermore, the power is turned off when the setting change prohibition flag is on, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, since the answer is "No" in step S2714 of FIG. 41, the process does not proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, and therefore, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed.

On the other hand, under a situation in which medals can be bet, the settings cannot be changed flag is off, and under such a situation, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is off, and the reset switch ( When the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the result is "Yes" in step S2714 in FIG. Processing is executed.

Further, the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, in step S2713 of FIG. 41, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set to the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF" outside the used area. (H)" is set. This initialization range is the same as the initialization range that is set when an operation for transitioning to a setting change state is performed during normal power-off recovery.

In other words, under the condition that the power-off recovery is normal (not abnormal power-off recovery), the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned off. When the power is turned on, the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, and the RWM 53 is turned on in the same range as when the power is turned on. Initialization processing is executed.

In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the setting key switch 152 is not operated, and therefore even if the setting key is not in possession of the device, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed to the same extent as when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed without transitioning to the setting change state, but within the same scope as when transitioning to the setting change state.

Therefore, in situations where medals can be bet, the number of bets is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", the power is turned off. If the power is then turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then , when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

In addition, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the bet number is one of "1" to "3", and the credit number is "0", and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the bet number becomes "0" and the credit number also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is any value between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and reset. Even if the power is turned on while the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and after that, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets is becomes "0", and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Suppose that That is, it is assumed that the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. In this case, it becomes possible to shift to a setting change state, and then the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

41, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), in step S2707 it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is on, and then in step S2710 it is determined whether the reset switch signal is on. That is, first it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is on, and then it is determined whether the reset switch signal is on.
Therefore, when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the result in step S2707 is "Yes", and the process does not proceed to step S2710. In other words, when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the setting key switch 152 is given priority. Then, when the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Fig. 44, the result in step S2741 is "No", and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, so that it is possible to transition to the setting change state.

Further, assume that the setting value "M" (for example, "2") is first displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when the setting change state is entered. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM53 is "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of "F001(H)" is "M". It is.
It is assumed that the setting change switch 153 is then operated and the setting value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of RWM53 remains "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of "F001(H)" is " N”.

Furthermore, assume that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the setting value "N" is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. In this case, since the start switch 41 has not been operated, the set value data after the change is not saved (memorized) at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, so the value of "F000(H)" is "M -1" is maintained. Furthermore, since the start switch 41 has not been operated and the setting key switch 152 has not been turned off, the power is turned off without completing the setting change state (staying in the setting change state).

It is assumed that the power is then turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. In this case, the power is simply turned on and off, and the used area and data outside the used area of the RWM53 are maintained without being initialized, so the settings will return to the same state as when the power was turned off. return to the state. Additionally, “M-1” is stored in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address “F000(H)” of RWM53, and “N” is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of “F001(H)”. Therefore, when the setting change state is restored, the setting value "N" is displayed on the setting value display LED 73.

In contrast, suppose that when the setting change state is entered, the setting value display LED 73 first displays the setting value "M" (for example, "2"). Then, the setting change switch 153 is operated, causing the setting value display LED 73 to display the setting value "N" (for example, "3"). Furthermore, suppose that while the setting value display LED 73 displays the setting value "N," the power is turned off without operating the start switch 41. Up to this point, the situation is the same as above. Now suppose that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.

In this case, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 is "No", and the result in step S2710 is "Yes", so the process advances to step S2731 to initialize the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change during normal power-off recovery. The conversion range is set. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and the address "F292(H)" outside the used area ~"F3FF(H)" initialization processing is executed. Therefore, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is maintained as "M-1".
Also, since it is a reset time, the answer is "Yes" in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. Thereafter, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, where it becomes possible to bet medals. At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is maintained as "M-1", so the set value becomes "M".

Further, assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
In this case, in an unrecoverable error state, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed, and therefore the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed, so when the power is turned off, the power-off processed flag is not set, and the RWM checksum No data is saved either.

Furthermore, since the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 is "No", and the process advances to step S2708. Further, since the power-off processing completion flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved, the answer is "Yes" in step S2708, and the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, if the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state and then turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the power will be turned off again. , an unrecoverable error state occurs.

Although the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 does not proceed to step S2710, so the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON) is not executed, and the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is not executed.
Also, while the processing by the second program is being executed, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed, and the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed either, so if the power is turned off while the processing by the second program is being executed, when the power is turned on thereafter, the power-off processing completion flag is not set, and the RWM checksum data is not saved, so that the result in step S2708 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. In other words, an unrecoverable error state is entered.

In addition, if the power is turned off while the program outside the area of use (second program) is executing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "No", step S2708 becomes "Yes", and the program proceeds to step S2801, so that the program in the area of use (first program) executes unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).

Similarly, while the program (first program) in the used area is executing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch ) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Therefore, irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed by the program (first program) in the used area.

Also, assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off.
In this case, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2711, and the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change at the time of the power interruption recovery abnormality is set. Also, since the power interruption recovery abnormality has occurred, the result in step S2712 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, initialization process is performed for the entire range (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the used area of RWM 53, and the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)". As a result, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 becomes "0", and the setting value becomes "1".

Also, since it is not the time of reset, "No" is returned in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742, and shifts to the setting change state.
Assume that in this setting change state, the power is turned off without operating the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153. In this case, since interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed in the setting change state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed.
It is assumed that the power is then turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In this case, since it is not a power-off recovery abnormality, the result is "No" in step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41. Furthermore, since the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the result in step S2710 is "Yes". Then, the process advances to step S2713, and the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change when the power-off recovery is normal is set.

Further, since the setting change prohibition flag is off, "Yes" is determined in step S2714 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Further, since it is a reset time, "Yes" is determined in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is skipped. Therefore, this time, there is no transition to the setting change state. Thereafter, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, where it becomes possible to bet medals. At this time, the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0" as described above, so the set value becomes "1".

Also, in this embodiment, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in step S2771 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 . Further, in step S2776 of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48, RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is executed. Then, in the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) of FIG. 49, RWM checksum data (complement data) is calculated by executing the processing of steps S2785 to S2794, and the calculated RWM checksum data is transferred to the step S2795. In the process, it is stored in the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53.

As mentioned above, this RWM checksum data includes data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53, and data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") is a value that becomes "0" when added to the added value of the data.

In this embodiment, even if a recoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state (an error detection flag is turned on and the progress of the game is stopped) is entered, the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed as described above. Therefore, even if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off) in the recoverable error state, the power cutoff process (I_POWER_DOWN) can be executed.
In contrast, if an irrecoverable error occurs and an irrecoverable error state occurs (a state in which the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the irrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed and game progress stops), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited as described above. For this reason, if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off) during an irrecoverable error state, the power down processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed.

In this way, when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, by not executing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN), when the power is turned on afterwards, the program start process (FIG. 41) M_PRG_START), it can be determined in step S2708 that a power-off recovery error has occurred, and the process can proceed to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, simply turning the power on and off will cause the unrecoverable error state to occur again.
When an unrecoverable error state occurs, unless you turn off the power and perform an operation to transition to the setting change state (turn on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on), It is possible to make it impossible to return to a state in which medals can be bet (a state in which the game can be played).

Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, even if the power is turned off and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, In step S2708, it is determined that there is a power failure recovery error, and the process proceeds to step S2801, which is an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP), so it does not proceed to the main process (M_MAIN) (Fig. 46), so it is in a state where medals can be bet. Unable to return to a state where the game can proceed.

Also, even if a recoverable error occurs and the game is in a recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and the game stops progressing), it is possible to execute interrupt processing (I_INTR), but it is not recoverable. When a possible error occurs and an unrecoverable error state occurs (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 43 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 51 is executed and the progress of the game is stopped). , interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited.
Furthermore, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) controls the lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, earned number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73), and the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74). The ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR).

Therefore, in a recoverable error state, since the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Therefore, even in a recoverable error state, error information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), and management information is displayed by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY). It is possible to sequentially display various ratios regarding information types and game results on the LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).

On the other hand, in an unrecoverable error state, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited, so the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) are not executed.
Therefore, during a non-recoverable error state, the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) is displayed by the non-recoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Display error information.

Also, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51, the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off ("00000000 (B)").
As a result, during the unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) will remain at "00000000 (B)", so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed.
Digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain off, which is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall attendant) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following can be made.
(1) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the output of output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off. (“00000000(B)”) so that all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, the manner in which digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are displayed in an unrecoverable error state is not limited to this.

For example, during an unrecoverable error state, "8" may be displayed in each of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74. That is, the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "8888".
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a modification of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and corresponds to FIG. 51.
In FIG. 58, steps that are different from those in FIG. 51 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 51 are assigned the same step numbers.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 51 will be mainly explained.

In the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in FIG. Output.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000001 (B)" (data in which only the digit 6 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals). is "1") is output.

Next, the process advances to step S1507, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. The length of the standby period depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to about "0.1 ms", for example. For example, store a predetermined value (for example, "255") in the B register, subtract this value using the internal system clock, and when the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, and the next The process advances to step S1508.

In step S1508, the main control board 50 turns off the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 (“00000000(B)”). This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, the process advances to step S1509, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. This process is to ensure that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are turned off.

Proceeding to the next step S1510, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 7 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs “00000010(B)” (data in which only the digit 7 signal is “1”), and output port 7 outputs “01111111(B)” (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are “1”).
Steps S1511 to S1513 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, in step S1514, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 8 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs “00000100(B)” (data in which only the digit 8 signal is “1”), and output port 7 outputs “01111111(B)” (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are “1”).
Steps S1515 to S1517 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, in step S1518, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 9 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs “00001000(B)” (data in which only the digit 9 signal is “1”), and output port 7 outputs “01111111(B)” (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are “1”).
Steps S1519 to S1521 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509. After the process of step S1521 is executed, the process returns to step S1497.

In this manner, "8" may be displayed in each of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 during an unrecoverable error state.
The display of all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 as "8" is a characteristic peculiar to an unrecoverable error state, and this causes the administrator (hall clerk) to indicate that it is impossible to recover. It is possible to notify that an error condition has occurred.

Note that the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "---" instead of "8888". That is, only the segments G of digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Further, the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "...". That is, only the segments P of digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Furthermore, the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "8.8.8.8." That is, as shown in FIG. 30(a) or (c), all segments of digits 6 to 9 (segments A to G and P) may be lit.

(2) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are turned off ("00000000(B)"), so that digits 6 to 9 of management information display LED 74 all remain off.
However, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 51, the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 may be maintained rather than being turned off ("00000000(B)"). In this case, the display of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will be as follows:

As described above, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are dynamically lit with four interrupts as one cycle. Therefore, for example, when "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74, digit 9 is "5", digit 8 is "6", digit 7 is "P.", Digit 6 "7" lights up sequentially. For example, assume that an unrecoverable error state occurs in a situation where digits 6 to 8 of the management information display LED 74 are turned off and digit 9 is lit with "5". In this case, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) stops while the signals (digit signals and segment signals) that cause digits 6 to 8 to go out and digit 9 to display "5" are being output from output ports 6 and 7. do.

Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000 (B)" (data in which the digit 9 signal is "1" and the others are "0"), and output port 7 outputs "01101101 (B)" (segment The interrupt processing (I_INTR) stops while the 2G, 2F, 2D, 2C, and 2A signals are "1" and the others are "0" data, and then output from output ports 6 and 7. The signals (data) to be rewritten will no longer be rewritten.
Therefore, the output of the signals (digit signals and segment signals) from output ports 6 and 7 is maintained until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted. remains off, and digit 9 remains illuminated with "5".

Similarly, assume that an unrecoverable error state has occurred when digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is lit to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 are off.
In this case, until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed, the signals (digit signal and segment signal) that cause digit 6 to light up and digits 7 to 9 to be turned off will continue to be output from output ports 6 and 7, so digit 6 will light up and digits 7 to 9 will remain turned off.

Further, for example, assume that the unrecoverable error process 2 is executed by the second program in a situation where "7" is lit and displayed in digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 and digits 7 to 9 are turned off. Assume that in the unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program, the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained without being turned off. In this case, as described above, the signal (digit signal and segment signal) that causes digit 6 to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 to turn off continues to be output from output ports 6 and 7. "7" is displayed on digit 6, and digits 7 to 9 remain unlit.

When the power is turned off in this state, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 go out. After that, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 in the off state, "Yes" is determined in step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Processing is executed. In this case, the process does not proceed to the initialization process in step S2731, so the data in the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized. Therefore, data regarding the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)") etc.) are also maintained without being initialized.

Here, it is assumed that in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is made executable without being prohibited. In this case, since the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 is performed by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt process (I_INTR), digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are first set to The ratio information immediately before the possible error processing 2 is executed, that is, "7P.65" (instruction accessory ratio, ratio display number "1") is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 for, for example, "2000 ms" immediately before the unrecoverable error process 2 is executed by the second program. In this case, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted in the unrecoverable error process by the first program, "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74, and "4791.84ms" is displayed. -Displayed for "2000ms" = "2791.84ms". Thereafter, the display items with the ratio display number "2" onwards are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).

In this way, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted during unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio information will be displayed from where it left off immediately before unrecoverable error processing 2 was executed by the second program. is started (resumed).
On the other hand, if interrupt processing (I_INTR) is disabled in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) will not be executed, so digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 will be disabled. -9 remains off.

As described above, for the instructed role ratio, continuous role ratio (cumulative), role ratio (cumulative), and role etc. state ratio, when the total number of plays is less than "175,000", the identification segment is displayed flashing. For the continuous role ratio (6,000 times) and role ratio (6,000 times), when the total number of plays is less than "6,000", the identification segment is displayed flashing. For the instructed role ratio, role ratio (cumulative), and role ratio (6,000 times), when the displayed value is "70" or more, the ratio segment is displayed flashing. For the continuous role ratio (cumulative) and continuous role ratio (6,000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or more, the ratio segment is displayed flashing. For the role etc. state ratio, when the displayed value is "50" or more, the ratio segment is displayed flashing. When displayed flashing, the light is turned on and off repeatedly every 0.3 seconds.

For this reason, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may all be turned off. For example, assume that an unrecoverable error state has occurred when digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are all turned off, that is, when the outputs from output ports 6 and 7 are "00000000(B)" (off).
In this case, the output from output ports 6 and 7 will remain “00000000 (B)” (off) until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed, so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off.

The display mode of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 as described above is a display mode specific to an unrecoverable error state. It is possible to notify that a possible error condition has occurred.

(3) In the above embodiment, on the condition that the power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, and the power is turned on (when transitioning to the setting change state) and the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed to the same extent when the power is turned on.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on (when transitioning to a setting change state) under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, The initialization range of the RWM 53 may be different depending on when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
For example, when the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initial state of the RWM 53 is the same as that at the end of the advantageous period. You may also perform conversion processing.
Specifically, initialization processing is executed for a predetermined range of the used area of the RWM 53 (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 33) in which data related to advantageous sections are stored, and Ranges other than the above (for example, credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) for address "F010 (H)" in Figure 33, bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) for "F043 (H)", etc.) can be maintained without being initialized. .
In any case, the initialization range when the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on is set to be narrower than the initialization range when transitioning to the setting change state. It is preferable.

(4) In the above embodiment, it is determined whether the set value is within the normal range in step S458 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. Proceeded to 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, it may be determined whether the set value is within the normal range at the timing immediately after it is determined that the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46).

(5) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned off while in the setting change state, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the state transitions to a state in which medals can be bet, without transitioning to the setting change state.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the power is turned off while in the setting change state, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, the power is turned on in a state in which an unrecoverable error state may occur.

Specifically, for example, a setting change state flag is provided, and when the setting change state is entered, the setting change state flag is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and when the setting change state termination conditions are met, Clear the setting change status flag.
Then, when the power is turned off with the settings changed and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, in step S2714 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Determine whether the setting change state flag is on. If it is determined that the setting change state flag is on, the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, and the process is set to an unrecoverable error state.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the set value from being set even though the operation for finalizing the set value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) has not been performed.

(6) In the above embodiment, the address “F000(H)” of the RWM 53 stores any one of the values “0(D)” to “5(D)” as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). That is, the setting value data was managed as "0(D)" to "5(D)".
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the address "F000(H)" of the RWM53 may store any value from "1(D)" to "6(D)" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). good. That is, the setting value data may be managed as "1(D)" to "6(D)".

When transitioning to a setting change state, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 is cleared (to "0"), and when an operation to confirm the setting value is performed (for example, turning on start switch 41), any one of values "1(D)" to "6(D)" may be stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53.
In this case, if the power is turned off while the setting has been changed, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it may be determined in step S458 of FIG. 47 that the setting value is not within the normal range (a setting value error has occurred), and the process may proceed to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811, causing an unrecoverable error state.

(7) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1P signal) is output from output port 4, the digit signal for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signal) is output from output port 6, and the segment signal for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signal) is output from output port 6. It was output from output port 7.
When lighting digits 1 to 5, the digit signal was output from the output port 3, and the segment 1 signal was output from the output port 4. Further, when lighting digits 6 to 9, a digit signal was output from output port 6, and a segment 2 signal was output from output port 7. In other words, the output ports to be used are divided into digits 1 to 5, which control lighting according to the program in the used area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, which control lighting according to the program outside the used area (second program). Ta.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, digits 1 to 5 control lighting according to a program in the used area (first program), and digits 6 to 9 control lighting according to a program outside the used area (second program). , the output port may also be used.
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a modification of the output port in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 59, segment signals for digits 1 to 9 (segment A to P signals) may be output from output port 3. Also, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals) are output from output port 2, and digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 4. can do.
In this case, during an unrecoverable error state, by turning off the output of output port 4 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) ("00000000 (B)"), digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 You can leave all lights off.

(8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) for outputting digit 1 signals to digit 5 signals is provided in the usage area of RWM53, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) for outputting digit 6 signals to digit 9 signals is provided outside the usage area of RWM53. In other words, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently. However, this is not limited to the above.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a modified example of the LED display counter in the third embodiment.
60, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) with 5 interrupts per cycle may be provided in the usage area of RWM 53, and based on the value of this LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1), digit 1 signals to digit 5 signals may be output, as well as digit 6 signals to digit 9 signals. In other words, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 may be combined into one.

In this case, in step S1471 of the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in FIG. 56, the value of the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is acquired and stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether there is a ratio display request. Specifically, the value of LED display counter 1 stored in the D register and "11110000 (B)" are ANDed, and when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and step S1475 If the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

Here, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00001000 (B)", "00000100 (B)", "00000010 (B)", or "00000001 (B)", the AND operation result is "0". Therefore, it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process advances to step S1475.
On the other hand, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the AND operation result does not become "0", so it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. In this case, since the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 are maintained, the display mode of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 is the same as the display mode during the previous interrupt processing. For example, if "7" was displayed in digit 6 during the previous interrupt processing, "7" is also displayed in digit 6 during the current interrupt processing.

Note that when it is determined in step S1472 that there is no ratio display request, the output of output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off. (“00000000(B)”) and all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may be turned off.

(9) For example, under the condition that the power-off recovery is normal (not an abnormal power-off recovery), the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. Even if the initialization range of the RWM 53 is changed depending on when the power is turned on and when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, good.
Specifically, when the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, for example, the usage area is set as the initialization range of the RWM 53. Set the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address “F000(H)” of RWM53 and addresses “F210(H)” to “F291(H)” outside the used area are not initialized (cleared). maintain.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set to, for example, the address "F000(H)". The entire range of the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK), and addresses outside the used area "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" ”. In this case, addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared), but the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address "F000(H)" Initialize (clear). Note that in this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) becomes "0", so the setting value becomes "1". Thereby, the setting value can be changed to "1" simply by shifting to the setting change state.

Also, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned on. Even when the power is turned on while both are on, both can be made to be able to shift to a setting change state.

(10) In the above embodiment, the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal power-off recovery is the addresses “F001(H)” to “F1FF(H)” in the used area of the RWM 53, and the address “F292” outside the used area. (H)” to “F3FF(H)” were set.
However, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above-mentioned range, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the slot machine 10.

For example, the initialization range of the RWM 53 can be varied according to the contents of the action status flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53 in FIG.
Specifically, for example, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030 (H)" is "1" and 1BB is in operation, the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of address "F030 (H)" can be excluded from the initialization range of RWM53.
In contrast, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030 (H)" is "0" and 1BB is not in operation, the initialization range of RWM53 can include the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of address "F030 (H)".

(11) In the above embodiment, interrupt processing is prohibited in step S1490 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, interrupt processing may not be prohibited in unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
Specifically, when the answer is "Yes" in step S2708 or S2715 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. good.

Even while the irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 can be executed, and the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 and the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 are executed. It may be possible.
As a result, digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, earned number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73) and digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) are turned on even while unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed. Control may be executable.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the operation for transitioning to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the address of the RWM 53 is "F292(H)" (ratio display number) is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then switch to the setting change state. When the operation is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 will display the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information The display LED 74 first displays specific information different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then displays the instruction-containing accessory, which is the first display item of various ratio information. The display may start from the ratio data (ratio display number "1").
As a result, it is possible to check whether all the segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit, so it is possible to check whether there is a failure in the segment or whether the signal line of the segment is disconnected.
Similarly, when an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state and it is determined that a power-off recovery error has occurred, the management information display LED 74 will first display a ratio such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." Specific information different from the information may be displayed, and then display may be started from the instruction-included accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of the various ratio information.

(13) For example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is turned off. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is also turned on. In any case, when the power is turned on with It is possible to display specific information that is different from the .

After that, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) indicate the on/off status of various switches when the power was turned on, and whether it was determined that the power-off recovery was normal or that the power-off recovery was abnormal. Display information accordingly. This makes it possible to check whether all segments of digits 6 to 9 light up when the power is turned on, making it possible to check whether there is a segment failure or whether the segment signal line is disconnected. be able to.

Also, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned off, the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 also turned on, "8888" or "8. 8.8.8.'', but when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off. , it is not necessary to display the above specific information on the management information display LED 74.

(14) In the above embodiment, when the operation for transitioning to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the RWM 53 Initializes data related to lighting control of management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)", etc.) did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an operation is performed to shift to a setting change state and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, data (for example, address " The ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297(H)", etc.) may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then perform an operation to shift to the setting change state. Assume that it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off, that is, the accessory ratio ( Cumulative) data is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) for, for example, "1000ms" just before turning off the power. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 displays the accessory ratio (cumulative) data from "4791.84ms" to "1000ms". ”=displayed for “3791.84ms”. Thereafter, the display items with the ratio display number "6" and onwards are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and the power-off recovery is determined to be normal and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off is Display starts (resumes) from where it left off.

(15) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management in the RWM 53 The data related to the lighting control of the information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of the address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)") has been initialized. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information in the RWM 53 The data related to the lighting control of the display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of the address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)") is not initialized. may be maintained at

For example, when the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor) is displaying the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2"), turn off the power, and then turn off the setting key switch 152. , and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 will first display the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off, that is, the continuous accessory ratio. (6000 games) data is displayed.

Also, assume that the continuous role object ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor) for, for example, "3000ms" just before turning off the power. . In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the continuous role object ratio (6000 games) data is displayed on the management information display LED 74 as "4791.84ms" - Displayed for "3000ms" = "1791.84ms". Thereafter, the display items with the ratio display number "3" onwards are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted. When the power is turned off, the display starts (resumes) from the continuation of the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off.

(16) In the above embodiment, settings cannot be changed during the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during the game), including while the reels 31 are rotating. , and during this time, the setting cannot be changed flag was turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the settings may be always changeable without providing a period during which the settings cannot be changed, and therefore without providing a setting change prohibition flag.

(17) In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not a power outage has occurred in step S2770 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. I_POWER_DOWN), and when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred, the process skips the power outage process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 and proceeds to step S454.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed during the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 47, and the occurrence of a power-off is detected, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. A separate interrupt process may be executed, and a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) may be executed in this separate interrupt process.
In this case, if a power outage is detected while the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Figure 47 is being executed, another interrupt process will not be activated while the interrupt process (I_INTR) is being executed, and the interrupt process (I_INTR) will be activated. After the completion of the process, another interrupt process is started, and a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in this other interrupt process.

(18) In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there are parrots that use game balls as gaming media, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) without using physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines. The present invention can be applied.

Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment relates to interrupt processing and an interrupt prohibited period. Note that the "interrupt (processing)" is also called a "timer interrupt (processing)", but will be simply called an "interrupt (processing)" in the following description.
In addition, in the interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, an interrupt inhibition period may be set. As explained in the third embodiment, the interrupt processing includes a maskable interrupt (INT) that can be inhibited and a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) that cannot be inhibited, but the "interrupt" in the fourth embodiment refers to a "maskable interrupt" that can set an interrupt inhibition period. When referring to a "non-maskable interrupt", the word "interrupt" is not abbreviated to "non-maskable interrupt".
The “interrupt disabled period” is also called an “interrupt disabled section” or an “interrupt disabled state.” Similarly, the “interrupt enabled period” is also called an “interrupt enabled section” or an “interrupt enabled state.”
In addition, in the present specification and claims, "when" is used as a general term including any of "before ('before' includes 'immediately before'),""at the same time as ('after' includes 'immediately after')," and "after ('after' includes 'immediately after')." Specifically, for example, "when starting interrupt processing" includes "before (immediately before) starting interrupt processing,""at the same time as starting interrupt processing," and "after (immediately after) starting interrupt processing."

The information processing executed by the gaming machine 10 includes a main process (FIG. 46) that is executed once for each game, and a process that interrupts the main process during the execution of the main process and temporarily exits the main process and is executed. and interrupt processing (FIG. 66, which will be described later). Interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Note that although this embodiment is configured to proceed to main processing after the initialization processing is completed (see FIG. 65), program start processing (FIG. 63), power recovery processing (FIG. 64), and initialization processing (FIG. 65) and other processing before the game starts may also be included in the concept of main processing.

FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit 500 and the like for executing interrupt processing. The timer circuit 500 is built into the main chip (MPU (main CPU 55)) of a one-chip microprocessor.
The timer circuit 500 includes a PTC 8-bit counter (hereinafter simply referred to as "8-bit counter") 501, a PTC prescaler register (also referred to as "PTC prescaler setting register", hereinafter simply referred to as "prescaler register") 502, and a PTC counter setting register. (also referred to as a "PTC count value setting register", hereinafter simply referred to as a "counter setting register") 503, and a PTC interrupt flag (hereinafter simply referred to as an "interrupt flag") 504.

The 8-bit counter 501 is a counter consisting of 8 bits (1 byte) for measuring the timing of interrupt processing. When the power is turned on (the power supply (switch) is turned on), "0" is set in the 8-bit counter 501. The timing at which "0" is set in the 8-bit counter 501 is, for example, before the program is started or at the same time as the program is started, as shown in FIG. 63, which will be described later.

The prescaler register 502 is a built-in register in which a setting value for selecting a clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 can be set. Specifically, it is a built-in register that can set how many times the system clock (SCK) is divided and supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 (once every time). For example, if the system clock is "16" MHZ and "143" is set in the prescaler register 502,
16 (MHZ) / 143 = approximately "111.8881" KHZ
serves as the clock source for the 8-bit counter 501.
Further, the system clock (SCK) is a clock supplied to the main chip (MPU). It is configured to be able to execute various programs (instructions) based on the system clock.

Counter setting register 503 is a built-in register that can set the count value of 8-bit counter 501. Specifically, it is a built-in register that can set how many times the clock number from the prescaler register 502 is input before interrupt processing is executed. For example, as described above, if the clock source of the 8-bit counter 501 is approximately "111.8881" KHZ and the clock of approximately "111.8881" KHZ is input "125" times, the 8-bit counter 501 times out. It shall be.
in this case,
125/111.8881 (KHZ) = approximately "1.117" ms
Interrupt processing becomes executable at the cycle of .
Further, after setting a value in the counter setting register 503, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 starts to be updated based on the clock from the prescaler register 502 (for example, subtraction by "1", addition by "1", etc.).
Note that the value of the prescaler register 502 may be stored before the program (instruction) that stores the value of the counter setting register 503.

After the power is turned on, the initial value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0". When, for example, "125" is written to the counter setting register 503, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from "0" to "125", and the update of the 8-bit counter 501 starts from the time it reaches "125". . As described above, "1" is subtracted approximately every "111.8881" KHZ. Then, when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "1" and is updated, it becomes "125".
Therefore,
"0" (when power is turned on) → "125" → "124" → ... → "2" → "1" → "125" → "124" → ...
Repeat.
In other words, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" when the power is turned on, and does not become "0" at other times, but cycles through values between "125" and "1".

Further, the time when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (immediately before the update or the moment of the update) corresponds to the timeout of the 8-bit counter 501.
The period from which the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from "125" to "1" is approximately "1.117" ms, as described above, and this is the interrupt processing cycle (interrupt cycle. "Tc" in FIG. 71, which will be described later). ).

Also, for example, when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "n" (n = any value from "1" to "125"), the power is turned off and then turned on. When this occurs, the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" as described above.
In this manner, the 8-bit counter 501 cycles between "125" and "1" while the power is on, and never reaches "0" again. It becomes "0" only when the power is turned off and then turned on again.
On the other hand, even if the power is turned off when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is any value between "125" and "1", the next time the power is turned on, the initial value of the 8-bit counter 501 will be becomes "0". In this way, the time from when the power is turned on until the 8-bit counter 501 first times out can be made constant, and compared to the case where the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is memorized when the power is turned off. The time before the first timeout can be increased.

On the other hand, a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is provided with a storage area for a timer. For example, as a timer,
A timer to measure "4.1" seconds, which is the shortest time for one game,
A timer for determining errors,
Examples include timers used to output test signals. These timer values are backed up when the power is turned off, are maintained even during the power off, and when the power is turned on again, return to the values before the power was turned off.
In this way, the timer value provided in the RWM 53 is configured so that it can maintain the value before the power is turned off, whereas the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is always "0" when the power is turned on. "become.

Furthermore, even if the main processing or interrupt processing goes out of control or processing takes an unexpected amount of time, the 8-bit counter 501 will not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1."
Furthermore, even during interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1".
Furthermore, even during an interrupt disabled period, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can circulate between "125" and "1".

At least one interrupt-disabled period is provided during the main processing. For example, in FIG. 46, there is an example between step S296 and step S300. Note that the purpose of prohibiting interrupts here is to prohibit interrupt processing during the ratio setting process in step S298.
The reason why interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of ratio set processing is that ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the used area, and interrupt processing is disabled when a program outside the used area is executed in main processing. This is because when processing is started, program processing within the used area and program processing outside the used area are mixed (simultaneously running in parallel), making the processing complicated.

Although not shown, examples of disabling interrupts in addition to the above include:
a) When transmitting a control command from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, when writing the control command to the control command buffer or updating the write pointer of the control command, an interrupt is generated before or after these processes. If processing is prohibited,
b) If the blocker signal is turned on (medal acceptance permitted state) and the blocker state is turned on (the input display LED is lit), and interrupt processing is prohibited before and after that,
c) When turning off the blocker signal (medal acceptance refusal state) and turning off the blocker state (turning off the input display LED), if interrupt processing is prohibited before and after that,
d) When executing the process of setting the number of outputs of the medal bet signal, if interrupt processing is prohibited before and after the process,
e) When executing the process of setting the number of outputs of the medal payout signal, interrupt processes may be prohibited before and after the process.

The purpose of a) above is to prevent malfunctions (such as writing to an address different from a normal write address) due to interrupt processing being executed during control command write processing.
In addition, in b) and c) above, if an interrupt process occurs between the process of turning the blocker signal on or off and the process of turning the blocker state on or off, one will be in the on state and the other will be in the off state. This is to prevent an inconsistency in which, for example, an ON signal is output to the blocker but an ON signal is not output to the input display LED (the light is turned off).
Furthermore, the above d) and e) are intended to prevent the medal bet signal or medal payout signal from being updated due to interrupt processing being executed during the process of setting the medal bet signal or medal payout signal.

The interrupt flag 504 is a flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
The interrupt flag 504 is set (turned on) when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (when the 8-bit counter 501 times out). The timing for canceling (turning off) the set interrupt flag 504 is arbitrary. For example, the timing for canceling (turning off) the set interrupt flag 504 is as follows:
a) when executing interrupt processing, or b) when setting predetermined information (hereinafter simply referred to as "information") indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request notification signal (hereinafter simply referred to as an "interrupt request signal") in an interrupt wait monitor register 301 (described later).

The interrupt wait monitor register 301 is one of the built-in registers of the MPU that can store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 is set. When 8-bit counter 501 times out, interrupt flag 504 is set. When the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
In the following, "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301" will be simply referred to as "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.""Information indicating what has happened is stored."
Then, an interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55 via the interrupt wait monitor register 301, making it possible to execute interrupt processing. Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared when the main CPU 55 accepts the interrupt request (when it executes interrupt processing).

Here, "a situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is expressed as follows:
a) A situation where there is an interrupt request b) A situation where a predetermined flag related to an interrupt request is turned on (“1”) c) A predetermined flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is turned on (“1”) It is also sometimes referred to as the situation where
Similarly, "a situation where information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is expressed as follows:
a) A situation where there is no interrupt request b) A situation where a predetermined flag related to an interrupt request is off (“0”) c) A predetermined flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is off (“0”) It is also sometimes referred to as the situation where

In a situation where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, if the 8-bit counter 501 times out again, it is determined that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out again. Although the interrupt request signal based on the interrupt request signal is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is not saved again based on the interrupt request signal (in this case, the interrupt request signal ).

In a state where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, interrupt processing is not started during an interrupt inhibition period, but the state where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is maintained. Even in this state, the circulation of the 8-bit counter 501 continues without interruption. Then, when about "1.117" ms has passed and the 8-bit counter 501 times out again, if the interrupt inhibition period continues, the state where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated remains. Here, regardless of whether the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, processing for setting the interrupt flag 504 may be executed. Alternatively, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, it may be determined whether or not information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, processing to set the interrupt flag 504 may not be executed, and if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, processing to set the interrupt flag 504 may be executed.
In the following description, it is assumed that when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, processing is executed to set the interrupt flag 504 regardless of whether or not the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

Furthermore, when the interrupt disabled period ends, if the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, interrupt processing is started and the information is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Clear the information. As a result, when starting interrupt processing, a situation arises in which the interrupt wait monitor register 301 does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
Therefore, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during the period in which the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores the interrupt wait monitor register 301 after the interrupt prohibition period ends. The number of times the interrupt process is executed is limited to "1" based on the fact that the register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
Note that the 8-bit counter 501 continues to cycle through the values "m" to "1" even during interrupt processing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the one-chip microprocessor is provided with an interrupt prohibition flag 302. The interrupt prohibition flag 302 in the fourth embodiment corresponds to the IFF1 register.
The IFF1 register is a register for determining permission or prohibition of maskable interrupts. Further, the IFF2 register is a register used to restore the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt, or to restore by a RETEX instruction after execution of a CALLEX instruction.

When (maskable) interrupt processing is executed, both the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are set to "0" in order to change the interrupt enabled state to the interrupt disabled state. When the IFF1 register is "0", it indicates that interrupts are disabled. Then, at the end of the interrupt processing, the state changes from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state, so immediately before the end of the interrupt processing, an instruction (EI instruction) to enable the interrupt is executed, and both the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are set to "1". Make it. When the IFF1 register is "1", it indicates that interrupts are enabled.

The interrupt prohibition period is first set in the main process. For example, in FIG. 46, it is between step S296 and step S300.
Second, the interrupt prohibition period is set during execution of interrupt processing. For example, as shown in FIG. 66, which will be described later, when interrupt processing is executed, the IFF1 register and IFF2 register become "0". As described above, this is to prohibit duplicate interrupts in interrupt processing.

In a situation where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, if the IFF1 register is "1", when the interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55 Then, the main CPU 55 receives an interrupt request signal. In other words, interrupt processing is executed.
On the other hand, in a situation where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, if the IFF1 register is "0", an interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55. At this time, the main CPU 55 does not accept the interrupt request signal. In other words, no interrupt processing is performed. In this case, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 maintains storage of information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, and continues to output the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55. Then, when the IFF1 register changes from "0" to "1" (when the interrupt permission period begins), interrupt processing is executed based on the interrupt request signal.
Note that when executing interrupt processing based on an interrupt request signal, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, is cleared. In other words, the output of the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55 is stopped.

Next, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register and IFF2 register will be explained using a simple program.
FIG. 62 shows an example program for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission. In the figure, (A) and (B) show the main processing program, and (C) shows the interrupt processing program.
In FIG. 62(A), the "DI" instruction is an instruction for disabling interrupts. Further, the "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling interrupts.
Further, "AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary programs (commands).
When the "DI" instruction is executed, both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "0", and the interrupt is disabled.

Thereafter, when the programs "AAAA" and "BBBB" are executed, and then the "EI" instruction is executed, both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "1", and the interrupt is enabled.
The program "CCCC" after the "EI" command includes, for example, the "RET" command. In this case, the interrupt becomes executable after the "RET" instruction is executed (ie, after the "CCCC" is executed). Note that the condition is that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at least immediately after the "RET" instruction.
As described above, even if the interrupt enable instruction "EI" is executed, interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction (in this example, "CCCC"; for example, "RET") is executed. The command after the permission command "EI" can be reliably executed.

In FIG. 62(B), the "CALLEX" instruction disables interrupts and calls the specified address, regardless of whether interrupts are enabled or disabled at that time. This is an order to do so.
In addition, the "RETEX" instruction sets the interrupt state to the state before the "CALLEX" instruction and returns ("RET") (returns to the state before "CALLEX"), in other words, the next instruction after "CALLEX" This is an instruction that executes returning to (the program at the return address).

Here, when the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value becomes "0" and the IFF2 register value does not change.
Furthermore, when the "RETEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value, and the IFF2 register value does not change.
Since the "RETEX" instruction includes the "RET" instruction, interrupt processing can be executed immediately after the "RETEX" instruction.
For example, if the IFF1 register value is "1" and the IFF2 register value is "1" immediately before the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value is "0" and the IFF2 register value is "1" by the "CALLEX" instruction. 1”. Further, by the "RETEX" instruction, the IFF1 register value becomes "1" and the IFF2 register value becomes "1". In this way, by having the IFF2 register, it is possible to return to the IFF1 register value and IFF2 register value before the "CALLEX" instruction was executed.

In FIG. 62(C), when executing an interrupt process (maskable interrupt (INT)), both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "0". As a result, interrupts (multiple interrupts) are disabled. Therefore, the "DI" instruction is not necessary when starting interrupt processing.
Furthermore, when ending the interrupt processing, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the end of the interrupt processing, that is, immediately before the "RETI" instruction, in order to change the state from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. This "EI" instruction causes both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value to become "1".

Note that when the "RETI" instruction is executed thereafter, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value, and the IFF2 register value does not change, similarly to the above-mentioned "RETEX" instruction.
From the above, the IFF1 register and IFF2 register are
When starting interrupt processing: IFF1=0, IFF2=0
↓
“EI” instruction: IFF1=1, IFF2=1
↓
“RETI” command: Changes to IFF1=IFF2, IFF2=maintain.
The configuration is such that interrupt processing can be executed after the "RETI" command. This prevents the interrupt processing from being executed redundantly, such as the interrupt processing being executed immediately after the "EI" command and then the interrupt processing being executed after the "RETI" command.

The data retention/clearing due to power on/off in the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), and the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is as follows.
An example of the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is a "timer storage area for measuring '4.1' seconds, which is the shortest time for one game". However, the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above-mentioned "timer storage area for measuring '4.1' seconds, which is the shortest time for one game", and may be a predetermined timer storage area capable of measuring various predetermined times, such as a "storage area for a standby timer for displaying a game standby state". The predetermined timer storage area may be a 1-byte storage area or a multiple-byte storage area.

a) When the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not satisfied When the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are all cleared (become "0"). In contrast, the specified timer storage area of the RWM 53 is not cleared.
For example, assume that the power is turned off under the condition that the value stored in a predetermined timer storage area of the RWM 53 is "X" and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "Y." In this case, if the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the value stored in the timer storage area is "X" and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is restored to "0."

b) When the power is turned on to transition to a setting change state due to the setting change conditions being met. In this case, not only the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), but also a specified timer memory area of the RWM 53 are cleared (become "0").
Therefore, the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt waiting monitor register 301, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are cleared (become "0") when the power is turned on, regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is met (whether or not the setting change state is entered).
On the other hand, the specified timer memory area is not cleared (does not become "0") when the power is turned on and the setting change state is not entered because the setting change conditions are not satisfied, but is cleared (becomes "0") when the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered because the setting change conditions are satisfied.

As described in the third embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is turned on by inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. When the power is turned on in this state, in FIG. 63, which will be described later, it is determined that the door switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2706) and the setting key switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2707). , and other predetermined conditions are satisfied, the process moves to the initialization process of step S2863 (FIG. 65, which will be described later). Then, in step S2742 in FIG. 65, the process moves to setting change confirmation processing (see FIG. 45; also referred to as setting change confirmation mode, setting change confirmation state, setting change confirmation (processing), etc.).
The satisfaction of the conditions for transitioning to the setting change confirmation process corresponds to the above-mentioned "power-on time when transitioning to the setting change state due to the satisfaction of the setting change conditions".

Furthermore, the above is an example in which the gaming machine is the slot machine 10. On the other hand, when the game machine is a pinball game machine (pachinko game machine), "setting change conditions are met" means that the door switch (frame release switch) signal is on and the setting change key switch signal is on. It is on and corresponds to the reset switch being on. In a pinball game machine (pachinko game machine), when it is determined that all of these three conditions are satisfied, the setting change condition is satisfied and the machine moves to a setting change state.
In addition, in a pinball game machine (pachinko game machine), when the door switch (frame release switch) signal is on, the setting change key switch signal is on, and the reset switch is off, the (setting (Although the change conditions are not met), the settings confirmation conditions are met and the state shifts to the settings confirmation state.

As described above, when the power is turned off, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is not held (the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" when the power is restored). Thereby, the time from when the power is turned on until the first interrupt processing is started can be made constant. Also, the update cycle of the 8-bit counter 501 (8.9375 microseconds) is shorter than the update cycle of the RWM 53 timer value (interrupt processing cycle: 1.117 ms). , the effect caused by clearing the 8-bit counter 501 is slight on the gaming machine as a whole.
For this reason,
a) The value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off is retained, and when the power is turned on, the 8-bit counter 501 restarts counting from the value when the power was turned off (the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is backed up) ) and
b) A configuration in which the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" when the power is restored (this embodiment)
When compared with , even with the configuration b) above, recovery can be achieved with an error within "1" interrupt. In the configuration b) above, there is no need for means for backing up the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off.

Next, the on/off timing of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF register) will be explained based on a flowchart.
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing program start (M_PRG_START) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the third embodiment. In FIG. 63, the same steps as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 63, step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined.
When the program is started in step S2701, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0", and the IFF1 register and IFF2 register are "0". Since the IFF1 register is "0", interrupts are disabled until the IFF1 register becomes "1".

In step S2861, the counter setting register 503 is set to an initial value "m".
In the fourth embodiment, as examples of setting the initial value "m" in the counter setting register 503, an example of setting the initial value "m" before the execution of the RWM abnormality determination process and an example of setting the initial value "m" after the execution of the RWM abnormality determination process are shown. Note that the "RWM abnormality determination process" here is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the RWM 53 before the power is turned off, and corresponds to the processes of steps S2708, S2712, and S2715. Step S2861 in FIG. 63 is an example of setting the initial value in the counter setting register 503 before the RWM abnormality determination.
As described above, the initial value "m" is, for example, "125." When the initial value is set in the counter setting register 503, the 8-bit counter 501 starts updating the count value, and continues to update the count value until the power is turned off.
In this manner, when the power is turned on and the program is started, interrupts are initially disabled, and if an initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 before an RWM abnormality is determined, the 8-bit counter 501 starts updating based on that value.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) (step S2862 in FIG. 63) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 42 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 64, the same steps as those in FIG. 42 are given the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 64, step numbers different from those in FIG. 42 are underlined.
The power recovery process in FIG. 64 shows an example in which the counter setting register 503 is set after the RWM abnormality is determined.
In this example, after step S2724, the process advances to step S2871, and the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503.

When setting the initial value to the counter setting register 503 in step S2861 of FIG. 63 (when setting the counter setting register 503 before RWM abnormality determination), the process of step S2871 of FIG. 64 is not performed. On the other hand, when step S2861 in FIG. 63 is not performed (when the counter setting register 503 is set after RWM abnormality determination), if the process does not proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2863 in FIG. In S2871, the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503.
After step S2871, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt process immediately before the power-off (FIG. 66 described later).The power-off process is executed in the interrupt process (step S2771 in FIG. 66), and when the power is turned off, the interrupt at that The return address of the process is stored. After the power recovery process shown in FIG. 64, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt process and continues the interrupt process. In step S2892 of the interrupt processing (FIG. 66), the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "1", and the interrupt is enabled.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating before the RWM abnormality is determined, the 8-bit counter 501 is updated earlier than when updating the 8-bit counter 501 is started after the RWM abnormality is determined. (Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.) Therefore, an interrupt enable instruction (EI instruction) executed after RWM abnormality determination can be executed. This allows interrupt processing to be executed without delay when a request occurs.
On the other hand, if the configuration is such that updating of the 8-bit counter 501 is started after the RWM abnormality is determined, the IFF1 register may become "1" due to noise etc. before the RWM abnormality is determined, or when the power is turned on. Even if a problem occurs where the IFF1 register becomes "1" (a problem resulting in an unintended interrupt enable state), the 8-bit counter 501 has not timed out before the RWM abnormality is determined (an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt wait monitor register 301). (No information indicating that a signal has been generated is stored.) Therefore, no interrupt processing is executed before the RWM abnormality is determined. In other words, it is possible to prevent RWM data from changing from before the power is turned off due to interrupt processing before RWM abnormality determination. Thereby, RWM abnormality can be accurately determined.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) (step S2863 in FIG. 63) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 44 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 65, the same steps as those in FIG. 44 are given the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 65, step numbers different from those in FIG. 44 are underlined.
In FIG. 63, when the determination is "Yes" in step S2712 or the determination is "Yes" in step S2714, the process moves to the initialization process in FIG. 65.
In this initialization process, after the AF register is restored in step S2737, a counter setting register is set in step S2881. This process is an example of executing the counter setting register set after RWM abnormality determination, and is an example of executing the counter setting register set when proceeding to the initialization process (without proceeding to the power recovery process).

In step S2740, a setting command set process is executed. This process is a process for storing a control command in the control command buffer in order to send a control command to the sub-control board 80 to start the setting change confirmation process (step S2742). As described above, interrupt processes are inhibited before writing the control command to the control command buffer or updating the write pointer of the control command, and are permitted after these processes are completed.
Therefore, in step S2740,
(1) DI (IFF1 = 0, IFF2 = 0)
(2) The actual setting command set (processing for writing control commands to the control command buffer, updating the write pointer of the control commands, etc.)
(3) EI (IFF1=1, IFF2=1)
Each process (instruction) is executed.
As described above, when the program proceeds from the start of the program (FIG. 63) to the initialization process (FIG. 65), the interrupts are permitted by the "EI" command in the set command set in step S2740. In this way, the state is changed from the interrupts prohibited state to the interrupts permitted state by using the process of executing the interrupts disable command (DI) and interrupts enable command (EI) before and after the process.

Note that the setting command set in step S2746 is a process for transmitting an end command of the setting change confirmation process to the sub control board 80, and similarly to step S2740, the "DI" command and the "EI" command are set at the beginning and end of the process, respectively. Execute commands.

As described above, when writing a value to the counter setting register 503 after RWM abnormality determination, it is possible to prevent interrupt processing from starting due to a malfunction or the like while RWM abnormality determination is being performed. Note that when interrupt processing is started, RWM data may be updated.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 47 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 66, the same steps as those in FIG. 47 are given the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 66, step numbers different from those in FIG. 47 are underlined.
When interrupt processing is started, the IFF1 register and IFF2 register become "0". This results in an interrupt disabled state (duplicate interrupt disabled state).
In step S452 of FIG. 47, initial processing including prohibition of duplicate interrupts is executed, but in the case of the fourth embodiment, register value saving processing is executed in step S2891.

Further, after restoring the register value in step S469, the "EI" instruction is executed in step S2892. As a result, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "1", and the interrupt is enabled.
Furthermore, in the final step S2893, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value by a "RETI" instruction corresponding to a return instruction. Also, the IFF2 register value is maintained.
As described above, the interrupt is enabled by the "EI" command in step S2892, but the interrupt processing is enabled after the next "RETI" command in step S2893.
Note that after the "RETI" instruction is completed, if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the main processing program (return Resume from address). On the other hand, after the "RETI" instruction is completed, if the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt process is executed again.

Next, the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing will be explained using a time chart.
FIG. 67 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. FIG. 67 shows an example in which the main processing does not have an interrupt prohibition period.
In FIG. 67, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0" when the power is turned on, but the counter value "m" is set by the counter setting register setting process described above. The counter value "m" is "125" in the above example. Then, as in the above example, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is decremented by "1" at a clock of approximately "111.8881" KHZ (every "8.9375" microseconds).

When the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1", it returns to "m". The time when it is updated from "1" to "m"("T1" in the figure) is the "timeout" of the 8-bit counter 501, and when the timeout occurs, the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. In the figure, the OFF state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored, and the ON state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored (the same applies to the following Figures 68 to 75).
When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 and the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set (interrupt enabled state), interrupt processing is started.
Note that even at the moment when information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, some processing (instruction) is being executed in the main processing, and the interrupt processing starts when the processing (instruction) ends. In other words, the actual processing in the main processing and the interrupt processing do not run simultaneously in parallel. The example in Fig. 67 shows an example in which, after information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", the interrupt processing starts at timing "T2".

Furthermore, when starting interrupt processing, an interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set. This corresponds to "IFF1=0, IFF2=0" shown on the right side of step S2890 in FIG. 66. Then, when the interrupt processing is finished, the set state of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is released. This process corresponds to the process related to step S2892 in FIG. 66 (IFF1=1, IFF2=1).
In the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, "the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set" means that at least IFF1 becomes "1" (IFF2 may be "0" or "1"). Point. Furthermore, "the set state of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is canceled" or "the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is not set" means that at least IFF1 becomes "0" (IFF2 is "0"). It can be either "0" or "1").

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. FIG. 68 shows an example in which the main process has an interrupt prohibition period.
In FIG. 68, the timing "T0" which is the start of the interrupt prohibition period corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction shown in FIG. 62. Further, the timing "T3" at which the interrupt prohibition period ends corresponds to the "EI" command or the "RETEX" command shown in FIG. 62. Similarly, in FIG. 69 and subsequent figures, the start of the interrupt prohibition period corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction, and the end of the interrupt prohibition period corresponds to the "EI" instruction or the "RETEX" instruction.
The example in FIG. 68 shows an example in which an interrupt prohibition period is set in the main process at a timing "T0" which is a timing before "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out. Even in this case, the point that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out is the same as the example in FIG. 67. .
On the other hand, at timing "T1", it is still the interrupt prohibition period and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set, so the interrupt processing is not started. However, even after that, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

Thereafter, the interrupt disable period ends at timing "T3". As a result, "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set", so interrupt processing can be executed. In the example of Fig. 67, an example is shown in which interrupt processing is started at timing "T4".
If timing "T3" corresponds to the "EI" instruction and an interrupt process is started at timing "T4" after execution of one more instruction (for example, a "RET" instruction), a time lag of one instruction occurs between timing "T3" and "T4". In contrast, if a "CALLEX" instruction is executed at timing "T0" and a "RETEX" instruction is executed at timing "T3", interrupt process is started immediately after execution of the "RETEX" instruction without executing one more instruction, so no time lag occurs between timing "T3" and "T4".
When the interrupt process is started, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. On the other hand, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set to disable duplicate interrupts.

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing an example (1) in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing.
In this example, after starting the interrupt prohibition period at timing "T0", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1", the interrupt flag 504 is set, and an interrupt request signal is generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. This is an example in which information indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2". At timing "T2", the interrupt prohibition period has not yet ended. The details will be described later, but when the interrupt cycle (timeout cycle of 8-bit counter 501) is "Tc" and the designed period of interrupt processing is "Tp", the designed maximum period of the interrupt disable period is "Tc". −Tp”. Therefore, normally, when an interrupt prohibition period is started immediately after interrupt processing is finished, the next interrupt period arrives after the end of the interrupt prohibition period.

On the other hand, if the main processing goes out of control, or if the main processing to be executed during the interrupt disabled period takes longer than necessary, the 8-bit counter 501 will be counted twice within the interrupt disabled period, as shown in FIG. There may be cases where a timeout occurs.
Even in such a case, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update the count value as long as the system clock is normal, and sets the interrupt flag 504 when a timeout occurs. In the example of FIG. 69, the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1", the interrupt flag 504 is set, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. It shows.
Thereafter, even if the interrupt prohibition period continues, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update the count value if it is normal, and when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set and an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt wait monitor register 301. If information indicating that a signal has been generated is already stored, that state is maintained.
Next, when the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T3" (interrupt enabled state is entered), interrupt processing becomes executable. Then, at "T4", interrupt processing is started, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, is cleared. Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 until the 8-bit counter 501 times out next time and the interrupt flag 504 is set.

As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the interrupt disabled period, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 only once. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the interrupt disabled period, the number of timeouts is not counted. Then, after the interrupt disabled period ends, the number of interrupts executed based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is one.
In other words, the interrupt process is not executed repeatedly (successively) "n" times based on the 8-bit counter 501 timing out "n" times (n≧2).
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main process from being unable to be executed during the interrupt process being repeated several times in succession after the interrupt disabled period ends.
Whenever the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set, and the interrupt flag 504 is released at a predetermined timing thereafter.

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example (2) in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing.
In FIG. 70, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", and based on this information, interrupt processing is started at timing "A1". An example is shown in which an unexpected time is required or a runaway occurs in one of the processes, and the interrupt process is not completed before the next timeout of the 8-bit counter 501 (timing "T2").
This example shows an example in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out twice (at timings "T2" and "T3") during interrupt processing that started at timing "A1." During interrupt processing, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Further thereafter, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T3", the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, remains stored.

Thereafter, when the interrupt processing ends at timing "A2", the next interrupt processing is immediately executed because the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated at that point. do. In other words, the interrupt processing is executed continuously without executing the main processing. Furthermore, when executing the interrupt process, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, is cleared (timing "T4").
Next, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T5", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. On the other hand, the interrupt processing started at timing "A2" ends before timing "T5". As a result, the next interrupt process is started based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T5".
As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing executed after the interrupt processing is completed will not cause the interrupt request signal to be generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. This is only done once based on the fact that information indicating that the event occurred is stored. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing will not be executed multiple times in succession after the interrupt processing is completed. Further, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during execution of the interrupt process, the number of timeouts is not counted.

Next, the execution timing of interrupt processing will be explained.
71 to 75 described below show interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 (however, in the example of FIG. 74, interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 3), but interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 are All processes are the same (the interrupt process shown in FIG. 66). Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 71, after starting interrupt processing 1 (interrupt processing shown in FIG. 66), interrupt processing 2 (same processing as interrupt processing 1) is started after "Tc" has elapsed. It means that.
FIG. 71 is a time chart showing the interrupt cycle, etc. when there is no interrupt prohibition period in the main process.
As mentioned above, the interrupt cycle "Tc" is the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the system clock is "16" MHZ, the value of the prescaler register 502 is set to "143", and the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to "125". This is the period from when the value changes to "125" to the next value, which corresponds to about "1.117" ms.

As shown in Fig. 71, if there is no interrupt inhibition period during the period in which interrupt processing is executed four times, the interrupt processing is executed for each interrupt cycle "Tc". In the example of Fig. 71, an example is shown in which interrupt processing is started at the timings of "A1", "A2", "A3", and "A4". The time "Tp" required for one interrupt processing differs depending on the contents of the interrupt processing, but the design value of the interrupt processing time "Tp" is at least a time shorter than the interrupt cycle "Tc"(Tp<Tc).
Also, similarly to the above example, during the interrupt processing, interrupts are disabled and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

Note that, as is clear from FIG. 71, no matter what value the 8-bit counter 501 has, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 will not return to "m" due to execution of the interrupt process, and the interrupt process will not return to "m". The value continues to be updated at regular intervals.
Further, in FIG. 71, the period (time) of each interrupt process is illustrated as being constant (Tp), but in reality, the period of the interrupt process is not necessarily constant. For example, the current interrupt processing may take longer than the previous interrupt processing.

FIG. 72 shows an example in which an interrupt prohibition period in the main process is set between interrupt process 1 and interrupt process 2. Interrupt processing 1 starts at timing "A1", and after interrupt processing 1 ends at timing "A1'", the interrupt disable period of the main process starts at timing "T1", and the interrupt disable period starts at timing "T2". This is an example in which the process has ended (interrupts have been enabled). Here, the timing "T2" is before the start timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing 2. Note that, as is clear from FIG. 72, if the interrupt prohibition period is "Td", "Td<Tc-Tp". In this way, if the interrupt disable period falls between the end of an interrupt process and the next interrupt process, the timing of interrupt processing is limited by the interrupt disable period even if the interrupt disable period is set. It never happens. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72, even if the interrupt prohibition period is set after the end of interrupt processing 1 and before the start of interrupt processing 2, the interrupt is disabled when the interrupt period "Tc" arrives after the start of interrupt processing 1. Process 2 can be started.
In particular, when the interrupt disable period "Td" that satisfies "Td<Tc-Tp" is the designed maximum period of the interrupt disable period, when the interrupt process ends and returns to the main process, the interrupt is immediately disabled in the main process. When a period is set, it can be set so that the start timing of the next interrupt process arrives after the end of the interrupt prohibition period.

FIG. 73 is a time chart showing an example (Example 1) in which the timing at which the interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is the interrupt prohibition period.
This example shows an example in which the interrupt prohibition period for the main process is set at timing "T1" after interrupt processing 1 ends and before timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing arrives. Note that the timing "A2" is after the interrupt cycle "Tc" has elapsed from the start timing "A1" of the interrupt processing 1.
During the interrupt prohibition period, the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set. Therefore, when timing "A2" arrives, interrupt processing cannot be started because the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set. In the figure, the two-dot chain line indicates the interrupt process assuming that interrupt process 2 is started at timing "A2" (it is not actually started).
On the other hand, immediately before timing "A2" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, so information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.

Thereafter, when the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T2", the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is unset. Further, at timing "T2", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated remains stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. As a result, at timing "T2", the interrupt is enabled, and the second interrupt processing 2 is started. FIG. 73 shows an example in which interrupt processing 2 is started at timing "A5". When interrupt processing 2 is executed, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. Furthermore, when interrupt processing 2 is executed, an interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

Next, at the timing "A5'" at which the interrupt processing 2 ends, the timing "A3" at which the third interrupt processing 3 is started has not yet arrived. Therefore, interrupt processing 3 can be started when timing "A3" arrives.
From the above, interrupt processing 2 cannot be executed at timing "A2", but interrupt processing 2 can be executed at subsequent timing "A5", and interrupt processing 3 can be executed at timing "A3", so interrupt processing at this point The number of times is the same as when there is no interrupt prohibition period.

In this way, the interrupt cycle "Tc" is kept constant regardless of whether or not there is an interrupt prohibition period, so that the interrupt cycle "Tc" can be kept constant. Furthermore, even if interrupt processing cannot be performed due to the interrupt prohibition period, updating of the 8-bit counter 501 will not be affected.
Furthermore, at the end of the interrupt prohibition period, if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, interrupt processing is executed without waiting for the next interrupt cycle. However, updating of the 8-bit counter 501 is not affected.

FIG. 74 is a time chart showing an example (Example 2) in which the timing at which the interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is during the interrupt prohibition period.
In this example, after interrupt processing 1 ends, the interrupt prohibition period of the main processing starts at timing "T1" before timing "A2" of next interrupt processing 2 arrives. As a result, the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.
Therefore, at timing "A2", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, but since the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is also set, interrupt processing cannot be executed. .

When the interrupt period "Tc" has elapsed from timing "A2" and timing "A3" has arrived, the interrupt inhibition period is still ongoing. Therefore, at timing "A3", the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, but the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is also set, so interrupt processing cannot be executed. Note that at timing "A3", the 8-bit counter 501 times out, but there is no change in the situation in which the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
After timing "A3", when the interrupt disable period ends at timing "T2", the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released. At this point, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Thereafter, at timing "A6", interrupt processing 2 is started. When interrupt processing 2 is started, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

In this example, the timing "A6'" when interrupt processing 2 ends is before timing "A4", i.e., the point when "3 x Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1". Therefore, after interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A6'", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T3", and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. This causes interrupt processing 3 to start at the following timing "A4". When interrupt processing 3 starts, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated that is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

As described above, interrupt processing cannot be executed when "Tc" has elapsed from timing "A1" (timing "A2"), and when "Tc" has elapsed from that point (timing "A3"), but interrupts are prohibited. Immediately after the period ends at timing "T2", interrupt processing 2 is executed. There is no interrupt prohibition period, and interrupt processing 3 can be executed at timing "A4" when interrupt processing 4 would normally be executed. As a result, interrupt processing can be executed three times between timing "A1" and timing "A4", which is one less than the number of interrupt processing (four times) when there is no interrupt prohibition period.
Furthermore, at timing "A4", the interrupt cycle "Tc" from timing "A1" is not broken. Furthermore, the update status of the 8-bit counter 501 remains unchanged and constant.

FIG. 75 is a time chart showing an example (Example 3) in which the timing at which the interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is the interrupt prohibition period.
In this example, after the end of interrupt processing 1, the interrupt prohibition period starts at timing "T1" before the next interrupt processing timing "A2" arrives, and the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T2". be. In other words, during the interrupt prohibition period, timing "A2" at which interrupt processing 2 would normally be executed arrives. At timing "A2", the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set, so interrupt processing cannot be executed.
However, since the 8-bit counter 501 times out just before timing "A2" arrives, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "A2".
Next, when the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T2", the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is unset. Note that at this point, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Therefore, interrupt processing 2 is started at the subsequent timing "A7".

Meanwhile, during the execution of interrupt processing 2, timing "T3" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. However, since interrupt processing 2 is being executed at this point in time, overlapping interrupts are not possible. In other words, interrupt processing 3 cannot be executed at timing "A3", which is the timing when interrupt processing 3 would normally be executed.
When interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A8", the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is released from being set. At this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Therefore, interrupt processing 3 starts immediately at timing "A8". In other words, no program (instruction) in the main processing is executed between interrupt processing 2 and interrupt processing 3, and interrupt processing 3 starts immediately after interrupt processing 2 ends.
However, when interrupt processing 2 ends, the IFF1 register becomes "1" by the "EI" instruction in step S2892 in Fig. 66, and the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released. Next, when the "RETI" instruction is executed in step S2893, the interrupt processing in step S2890 is started again, and when this interrupt processing starts, the IFF1 register becomes "0", and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. Therefore, the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released for just a moment between interrupt processing 2 and interrupt processing 3.
When the interrupt process 3 is started, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.
When interrupt processing 3 ends, timing "A4" (when "3 x Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1"), which is the start timing of interrupt processing 4, has not yet arrived.

After interrupt processing 3 is completed, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Since the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is not set at this point, interrupt processing becomes executable. Therefore, interrupt processing 4 is started at timing "A4". When interrupt processing 4 is started, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.
In this way, four interrupt processings can be started when "3 x Tc" elapses from timing "A1", and the same number of interrupt processings as if there was no interrupt prohibition period for the main processing is executed. can do.

As described above, if the timing to start interrupt processing is an interrupt disabled period, the next interrupt processing is started immediately after the interrupt disabled period ends. Furthermore, if an interrupt cycle arrives during execution of the next interrupt process, the next interrupt process is started immediately after the next interrupt process ends. With this configuration, it is possible to minimize the decrease in the number of interrupts and quickly return to a situation where interrupt processing is started when the original interrupt cycle arrives.

Although the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and can be modified in various ways as described below.
(1) In the fourth embodiment, in order to set the interrupt cycle to approximately "1" ms when the system clock is "16" MHZ, the prescaler register 502 is set to "143", and the counter setting register 503 is set to "143". The value of is set to "125". Therefore, the set value of the prescaler register 502 and the counter setting register 503 vary depending on how much the interrupt cycle is set, and are not limited to the above values. Note that the system clock is not limited to "16" MHZ, and can be set to various values such as "12" MHZ, "24" MHZ, etc., for example.
For example, if the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to "250" under the above conditions, the interrupt period is
250/(16/143)=2.234(ms)
It can be done.
In this case, even if the value of the counter setting register 503 is "250", the value can be within 1 byte.
On the other hand, the counter setting register 503 may have, for example, a 2-byte storage area instead of a 1-byte storage area. If the counter setting register 503 is a 2-byte storage area, the 8-bit counter 501 may be replaced by a 16-bit counter 501.

(2) In Figs. 63, 64, and 65, the counter setting register is set before and after an RWM abnormality is determined, but the timing of the counter setting register is not limited to those shown in Figs. 63, 64, and 65. It is sufficient to execute the counter setting register set process by the timing at which you want to start the interrupt process.

(3) Initialization processing (FIG. 65) At the time of transition, the processing to set the IFF1 register to "1" (processing to enable interrupts) uses the setting command set in step S2740, but is not limited to this. , for example, executing the "EI" command after step S2747. In this way, even if each process during the initialization process consists only of processes that do not have "DI" and "EI" instructions, as in steps S2740 and S2746, the interrupts can be enabled. becomes possible.
(4) The fourth embodiment is applicable not only to slot machines but also to pinball gaming machines (pachinko gaming machines), mahjong ball gaming machines, casino machines, and the like.

<Fifth embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to error history display.
FIG. 76 is a time chart showing the relationship (Example 1) between the rotation of the reel 31 and error detection (occurrence) and notification. Note that "while the reels are rotating" in this embodiment indicates a situation where at least one reel 31 is rotating. Moreover, "stopping of the reels" indicates that all the reels 31 have stopped.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error occurs, the error is detected with almost no time lag. In other words, in this embodiment, "when an error occurs" and "when an error is detected" are approximately equal.

Furthermore, the "error" in this embodiment corresponds to the "recoverable error" in the other embodiments described above.
76 shows an example in which an error is detected during rotation of the reel 31. The types of errors in this case include, for example, a selector error (such as an error in the passage sensor 46 due to medal retention or an error in the input sensor 44) and a hopper error (such as an error in the payout sensor 37 due to an abnormal payout).

Note that while the reel 31 is rotating, no medals are accepted, and even if medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, they are returned by the blocker 45. However, if a fraudulent act (goto act) is performed while the reels 31 are rotating, there is a possibility that a selector error will be detected. Further, while the reels 31 are rotating, the hopper 35 is not driven, so no medals are paid out, but there is a possibility that the hopper 35 is driven and the medals are paid out due to fraudulent activity.
As described above, there are cases where an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating.

When the main control board 50 detects an error (time t0), it turns on the corresponding bit (the bit corresponding to the detected error) of the abnormal input flag provided in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, the main control board 50 sends a notification that an error has been detected (an error command) to the sub-control board 80, but the transmission timing in this embodiment is at the time of error notification ("t1" in FIG. 76). . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an error command may be transmitted when an error is detected, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG.
The main control board 50 determines whether or not an error is detected in the interrupt processing. Specifically, it is determined whether the bit of the above-mentioned abnormal input flag is on. This determination is executed, for example, in step S463 (input error check process) in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 47.

Also, when an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80, this is done, for example, by the control command sending process of step S464 in the interrupt process of FIG.
In the case where an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 immediately upon detection of an error, the command may be sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after the abnormal input flag bit is turned on. Alternatively, in the case where an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 after all the reels 31 have stopped (at the timing of reporting an error), the command may be sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after all the reels 31 have stopped.

When all the reels 31 are stopped and an error command is received, the sub control board 80 notifies the user of the error using the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23. If an error command is transmitted at time t1 in FIG. 76, the sub-control board 80 notifies the error after all reels 31 have stopped. In other words, no error is reported while the reels 31 are rotating.
Note that on the main control board 50 side as well, if an error occurs when all the reels 31 are stopped, an error notification is performed. For example, "En"("n" is an integer, and the value indicates the type of error) may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Then, when the error factor is removed and the reset switch 153 (see the third embodiment, not shown in FIG. 1) is operated, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 end the error notification. In other words, when the error factor is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated, the state returns to the state before the error was detected, provided that no error is detected. Therefore, even if the error factor is removed, the state before the error detection will not be restored unless the reset switch 153 is operated. Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated and no error is detected, the abnormal input flag bit stored in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is turned off.
Furthermore, the sub control board 80 stores error history (data) in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83, and displays the error history when requested. Note that the error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning the power on and off or changing settings. Unless a serious error (unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM of the sub-control board 80, the error history will not be erased.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example in which the error history including the progress of FIG. 76 (Example 1) is displayed as an image on the image display device 23, and two types of examples are shown as (A) and (B).
In the fifth embodiment, power off, power on, door open, and door close are not errors themselves, but are displayed together with the error history.
Further, when the setting confirmation state or the setting change state is entered, it is not displayed on the error history screen, but is displayed on a setting change history screen (not shown) that is separate from the error history screen.
Furthermore, although the history of detected errors is displayed, recovery from errors is not displayed on the error history screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and error recovery may also be displayed on the error history screen.

The error history can be displayed, for example, in the setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation process in this embodiment is similar to the setting change confirmation process shown in FIG. 45 (third embodiment). Specifically, as explained in the third embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a situation where the number of bets is "0" while waiting for the game (before the start of the game), the D It is set so that "1" is stored in the register. Then, in step S2755 in FIG. 45, the main control board 50 stores the D register value in the A register, and determines whether the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", the main control board 50 determines that it is time to confirm the settings, and proceeds to step S2760. After determining whether the A register value is "1", the C register value is stored in the A register. As described in the third embodiment, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the setting value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes set value data.

In this way, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a situation where the number of bets waiting for the game is "0", the setting confirmation state is entered. When the setting confirmation state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and a menu screen for the administrator of the gaming machine 10 is displayed on the image display device 23. In this menu, there is an "Error History" item, and if you select "Error History" with the cross keys and make a decision operation (in this case, turn on the push button), the screen shown in Figure 77 will appear. An error history screen is displayed.

For example, in FIG. 77(A), "January 29, 2021, 13:27:45", which is the time of the XX error with error number "003", corresponds to time t1 in FIG. 76. In other words, if the error is reported at time t1 after 3 minutes have elapsed from the time when the error was detected (time t0 in the figure), the actual This means that an error has been detected.
However, as described above, by displaying the start date and time of error notification as the time of error, even if an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating and it takes time from the time of detection of the error to the time of notification, Since there is no discrepancy between the timing when the error is reported and the displayed error time, the administrator may be made aware that there is a problem with the gaming machine 10, or there is a possibility that fraud has been committed. You can prevent it from being recognized as such.
As mentioned above, when displaying the time of recovery from an error in the error history, "XX error recovery" is displayed together with the time in the diagram between error numbers "001" and "002". .

In FIG. 77(A), the date and time when the sub-control board 80 started error notification is displayed as the error time. The sub-control board 80 stores error details and time in association with each other. Information regarding time is acquired using, for example, an RTC (real-time clock) function provided in the sub-control board 80.
On the other hand, FIG. 77(B) is an example in which the elapsed date and time from the current time is displayed as the time. In this way, the actual time may be displayed as shown in FIG. 77(A), or the elapsed time and date from the current time may be displayed as shown in FIG. 77(B).
Furthermore, although "time" is displayed in the example of FIG. 77, "notification time", "occurrence time", "detection time", etc. may be displayed.
However, even if "occurrence time" or "detection time" is displayed, the actual error occurrence time or detection time is not displayed, but is actually the time when error notification started.

76, if an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the detected error cannot be immediately notified because the reel 31 is still rotating, and so the error is notified after the reel 31 has stopped. If an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the error is not notified while the reel 31 is rotating because the progression of the game (stopping the reel 31 while it is rotating) takes priority over notifying the error.
On the other hand, when an error is detected when the reels 31 are not rotating (for example, during game standby after all reels 31 have stopped), an error command is immediately sent to the sub-control board 80, and the error is notified by the sub-control board 80 (corresponding to the first error in FIG. 82 described later). Therefore, in this case, the time displayed in the error history will be the same as the time when the error was detected.

Example 2 in FIG. 78 is a time chart showing a case where the settings are changed after an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating.
Here, in the third embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a setting change prohibition flag. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reels 31 start rotating), the setting change prohibition flag is turned on, and when all the reels 31 stop, the setting change prohibition flag is turned off. In this case, when the setting change prohibition flag is on, the setting change state cannot be entered. When the power is turned off while the reel 31 is rotating, it is stored that the settings cannot be changed flag is on, and even if the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, (settings cannot be changed flag (starts up with ``on''), it does not change settings.
In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the setting change prohibition flag in the third embodiment is not provided. Therefore, if the power is turned off while the reel 31 is rotating and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the setting change state can be entered.

When an error is detected during rotation of the reel 31, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit of the abnormal input flag provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50, as described above.
Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the reel 31 is rotating, the supply of power to the motor 32 that drives the reel 31 is shut off, and the reel 31 then stops rotating. Next, when the front door is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 44, the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 45).

Here, when the initialization process (FIG. 44) is executed, the abnormal input flag in the storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is also initialized ("RWM clear when changing settings" in FIG. 78). . Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 is started up through the setting change state, the error data detected before the setting change process is erased. Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 starts up after going through the setting change state, an error detected before transitioning to the setting change state (an error based on data stored in the abnormal input flag) is not notified.

As described above, as in Example 2 of Figure 78, when an error is detected while the reel 31 is spinning and then the setting change state is entered, if an error is detected while the reel 31 is spinning and before the transition to the setting change state is made, the error detection data is erased by the RWM clear process in the setting change state, and therefore the error will not be notified after the setting change process state ends.
In addition, in this example 2, by passing through the setting change state, the data of the error detected before moving to the setting change state is erased, so that no error command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 after the setting change state ends. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the first interrupt process is after step S2740 as shown in FIG. 44. In this case, since the initialization process has already been executed in step S2732, the error command stored before the power cut is erased at the time the first interrupt process is executed. Therefore, even if the process moves to the interrupt process (FIG. 47) and the control command transmission process of step S464 in FIG. 47 is executed, no error command is sent to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, the error is not stored as error history in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, nor is it displayed.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the error history screen of FIG. 78 (Example 2). In FIG. 79, the power off with error number "004" corresponds to time t3 in FIG. 78. Further, power-on with error number "003" corresponds to time t4 in FIG. 78.
In this example, after the power is turned off, the door is opened, and the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and then the power is turned on, so that the opening of the door is detected at the same time as the power is turned on. Then, a setting change process is performed between error numbers "001" and "002", and then the door is closed. Note that, as described above, the setting change process is not displayed on the error history screen.

As described above, the data of any errors detected before the transition to the setting change state (before the power is turned off) is erased, so the error is not notified even after the setting change state ends, and is not displayed in the error history.
Therefore, since errors that have not been notified are not displayed as error history, it is possible to ensure consistency between notified errors and errors displayed as history, and to prevent misunderstandings by the administrator. In other words, errors that have not been notified will not be displayed as error history.

FIG. 80 is a time chart showing a case (Example 3) in which multiple errors are detected during the setting confirmation state.
In FIG. 80, the transition from the game standby state to the setting confirmation state is the same as described above.
In this example, it is assumed that the first error is detected first, and then the second error is detected during the setting confirmation state. Examples of the first error and the second error include a selector error (an error related to the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44), a hopper error (an error related to the dispensing sensor 37), and the like, as described above.
When the first error and the second error are respectively detected during the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 stores information regarding the type of detected error in the storage area of the RWM 53 at the time when the error is detected. Remember.
In the setting confirmation state, similarly to when the reel 31 is rotating, even if an error is detected, the error is not reported, and the error is notified after the setting confirmation state ends. This is to give priority to control processing of the setting confirmation state over error notification.

When the main control board 50 ends the setting confirmation state, first, it transmits an error command based on the detection of the second error to the sub control board 80 (at time t5 in the figure). The sub control board 80 notifies the second error based on receiving the error command. In other words, when errors are detected in the order of the first error and the second error in the setting confirmation state, the errors are notified in the order of the second error and the first error after the setting confirmation state ends (in the order of detected errors). and vice versa). Note that when the sub control board 80 receives a second error command from the main control board 50, it stores the content of the second error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83 as an error history in association with the notification start date and time.
The notification of the second error by the sub control board 80 continues until the cause of the second error is removed, and when the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the second error has been removed, it issues a command to that effect. It is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the command, it ends the notification of the second error.

Furthermore, when the cause of the second error is removed, the main control board 50 then transmits an error command based on the detection of the first error to the sub-control board 80 (time t6 in the figure). The sub-control board 80 notifies the first error based on receiving the error command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command for the first error from the main control board 50, it stores the content of the first error as an error history in a specified storage area of the RWM 83, linking it to the notification start date and time.
The notification of the first error continues until the cause of the first error is removed, and when the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the first error has been removed, it transmits a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it ends the notification of the first error.
As in example 1 of Figure 76, when a first error is detected, a command for a first error may be sent to the sub-control board 80 (dotted line in the figure), and when a second error is detected, a command for a second error may be sent to the sub-control board 80 (dotted line in the figure).

Here, in Example 3 of FIG. 80, it is assumed that the priority of notification of the first error and the second error are the same (there is no priority in notification).
On the other hand, there are cases where a priority level is determined for error notification. For example, if the notification priority of the first error is higher than the notification priority of the second error, the notification of the first error is performed first after the setting confirmation state ends, and the cause of the first error is removed. A second error will be notified.
Further, in this case, the first error is displayed first, and the second error is displayed after that in the error history in the order in which the errors are reported.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the error history in Example 3 of FIG. In this example, after the door with error number "004" is opened, a setting confirmation state is entered, and at the end of this setting confirmation state, a second error with error number "003" is detected. Note that the "setting confirmation state" may or may not be displayed in the error history.
Then, when the cause of the second error is removed, the first error is then notified. The first error is displayed in the error history as error number "002" (time t6 in FIG. 80). In this way, the order of the second error and the first error in the error history matches the order of the notified errors. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the difference between the error notification order and the history display order, and to prevent the administrator from being misled.
As described above, in this embodiment, if multiple errors occur in a situation where error notification is not possible, when the situation becomes such that error notification is possible, the error will be notified sequentially starting from the error detected later. It is designed to do so.

FIG. 82 is a time chart showing a case (Example 4) in which the first error and the second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 have stopped and before the start switch 41 is operated (before the game starts)). be.
During game standby, the reels 31 are not rotating or the settings are being checked, so if an error is detected, the detected error can be immediately notified.
First, when the main control board 50 detects a first error while waiting for a game, it transmits a command for the first error to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the first error command, it starts notifying the first error (time t7 in the figure). The received first error information is stored in the error history in association with the notification start time information.
When the second error is detected after the first error is detected and before the cause of the first error is removed (during notification of the first error), the main control board 50 performs the same operation as in the above example, as will be described later. Similarly, it is transmitted to the sub control board 80 at the timing when the second error notification becomes possible (time t8 in the figure). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a command for the second error may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the time when the second error is detected (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure).

When the cause of the first error is removed, the main control board 50 transmits information to that effect to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating that the cause of the first error has been removed, it ends the notification of the first error.
On the other hand, when the main control board 50 detects that the cause of the first error has been removed, it transmits a second error command to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the second error command, it starts notifying the second error (time t8 in the figure). The received second error information is stored in the error history in association with the notification start time information.
When the cause of the second error is removed, the main control board 50 transmits information to that effect to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives information indicating that the cause of the second error has been removed, it ends the notification of the second error.
As described above, when errors are detected in the order of the first error and the second error while waiting for the game, unlike during the setting confirmation state, the first error and the second error are notified in the order. This is because there is no need to suspend notification of the first error when the first error is detected, and notification of the first error can be started immediately.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the error history in Example 4 of FIG. 82. In this example 4, when the first error is notified, the history of the first error is displayed at the error number "004". The time of the first error with error number "004" corresponds to time t7 in FIG. Furthermore, when the cause of the first error is removed, the second error is then notified and displayed with error number "002". The time of the second error with error number "002" corresponds to time t8 in FIG. 82.
Therefore, the notification order of the first error and the second error matches the error history order.

Although not illustrated in this embodiment, if errors are detected consecutively, the following processing is carried out.
For example, when a medal retention error in the selector (an error in the insertion sensor 44) is detected during game standby, a medal retention error command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. In response, the sub-control board 80 notifies the user of the medal retention error.
Next, suppose that after the administrator removes the medal retention error, but before operating the reset switch 153, he or she inserts a medal through the medal insertion slot 47, causing a medal retention error to occur again. In this case, the main control board 50 does not resend the medal retention error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the administrator removes the medal retention error again and operates the reset switch 153, it is determined whether or not the cause of the error has been removed, and if it is determined that the cause of the error has been removed, information to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this information, it ends the notification of the medal retention error.

In this way, for example, even if two medal retention errors are detected on the main control board 50 side, before the reset switch 153 is operated, a medal retention error command will be sent only once to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the error history by the sub-control board 80 will show only one medal retention error.
Although the above example was given of a medal retention error, the same applies to other errors that can be resolved by operating the reset switch 153 after the cause of the error has been removed.

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to the structure of a main control board 50, a socket (also referred to as a "chip socket") 56, and a main chip 55.
Note that in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described later, "mounting" refers to various electronic components (CPU, ROM, RAM, resistors, connectors, 7 This refers to making it function (operate) as an electronic circuit by soldering it (segment display, etc.) or attaching it to a socket.
Further, the "main chip 55" in this embodiment is a chip that includes a main CPU 55 and a built-in memory, and further has a ROM 54 and an RWM 53 within this built-in memory, as described in FIG. 32 (third embodiment). Refers to a chip microprocessor.

FIG. 84 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50, the socket 56, and the main chip 55 not installed in the socket 56 in the sixth embodiment.
The socket 56 is provided with the main chip 55 and is used to electrically connect the main chip 55 and the main control board 50. The socket 56 is mounted at a predetermined position on the main control board 50. Although the details will be described later, the socket 56 is made of a transparent resin material (as long as the internal cavity 56a is visible, and it may be semi-transparent). A pin insertion opening 56c into which a pin 55a (terminal) of the main chip 55 is inserted is formed on the top surface of the socket 56.
Note that the reason why the resistor 50a is also shown in the main control board 50 in FIG. 84 is to compare the height of the resistor 50a and the height of the notch 56e of the socket 56. Details of this point will be described later.

FIG. 85 is a plan view (viewed vertically downward from above) showing the main chip 55 attached to the socket 56 in more detail. Moreover, FIG. 86 is an arrow view (front view) seen from the Z1 direction in FIG. 85. Furthermore, FIG. 87 is an arrow view (side view) seen from the Z2 direction in FIG. 85.
Here, in FIG. 85, the "upper side of the drawing" and the "lower side of the drawing" are respectively defined as shown.
In this example, the main chip 55 has 71 pins 55a. Here, "pin 55a (1)" refers to the first pin 55a, "pin 55a (2)" refers to the second pin 55a, ..., "pin 55a (71)" Assume that it refers to the 71st pin 55a.

The main chip 55 has recesses 55b cut out in a substantially arc shape at approximately the center of the upper and lower edges in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the figure).
Of the 71 pins 55a, the first pin 55a (1) to the 35th pin 55a (35) are provided on the lower longitudinal edge of the main chip 55, except for the portion where the recess 55b is formed. Similarly, the 36th pin 55a (36) to the 71st pin 55a (71) are provided on the upper longitudinal edge of the main chip 55, except for the portion where the recess 55b is formed.
Of the first to seventy-first pins 55a, the seventeenth (pin 55a(17)), the thirty-fifth (pin 55a(35)), the fifty-fourth (pin 55a(54)), and the seventy-first (pin 55a(71)) are GND (ground) lines. The pins other than these four are signal lines.

Here, the 35th pin 55a (35) is located at the right end of the lower edge of the main chip 55, and the 71st pin 55a (71) is located at the left end of the upper edge of the main chip 55. Furthermore, the 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), which are the GND lines, are located adjacent to the recessed portion 55b.
When the operator grips the main chip 55, the operator first holds and holds the vicinity of the 35th pin 55a (35) and the 71st pin 55a (71). By having a corner), the GND line can be located near the GND line, and the number of signal lines touched by the operator's fingers can be reduced accordingly.

Second, it is possible to hold the main chip 55 so as to grasp the vicinity of the recessed portions 55b on the lower and upper edges of the main chip 55. Since the main chip 55 has the recessed portion 55b, it becomes easier to hold the main chip 55. Furthermore, when holding the concave portion 55b, by holding the vicinity of the 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), it is possible to hold the vicinity of the GND line in the same way as above. Therefore, the number of signal lines touched by the operator's fingers can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, a two-dimensional code 55e is printed in the left region on the top surface of the main chip 55. In addition, a model number sticker 55f showing the model number of the gaming machine 10 is attached to the right region. The region where the two-dimensional code 55e is printed and the region where the model number sticker 55f is attached are flat surfaces (surfaces without steps). In particular, displaying the two-dimensional code 55e on a flat surface makes it easier to read the two-dimensional code. Also, providing the model number sticker 55f on a flat surface makes it easier to read the information displayed on the model number sticker 55f. Furthermore, attaching the model number sticker 55f to a flat surface makes it less likely to peel off.
Furthermore, a substantially semicircular step 55c is formed on the left edge of the main chip 55. This step 55c as well as steps 55d and 55i described below are all recessed from the surface.
The step portion 55c is formed in a substantially semicircular recessed area.
Further, a step portion 55d is formed in the vicinity of the step portion 55c and at a position closer to the pin 55a(1). The step portion 55d is formed by recessing an area formed in a substantially circular shape, and the number "1" is displayed within the substantially circular area. The portion of the number "1" may be recessed further than the substantially circular area, or conversely, may be formed in a convex shape from the substantially circular area (however, it does not protrude above the surface of the main chip 55). Furthermore, although the number "1" is shown in this example, other numbers, symbols, etc. may be used.

On the top surface of the main chip 55, between the two-dimensional code 55e and the model number sticker 55f, a product name 55g (bold-lined text in the figure) and a company name 55h (dotted-lined text in the figure) are displayed. The product name 55g is printed. Further, the company name 55h has a stepped portion 55i.
FIG. 88(A) is an enlarged view of the product name 55g and company name 55h. Further, (B) in the same figure is a sectional view taken along the arrow Z3-Z3 in (A).
As shown in FIG. 88, a region corresponding to the thickness of the line of the company name 55h is recessed from the surface, forming a stepped portion 55i.
FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the stepped portion 55c (semicircular portion), the stepped portion 55d (circular portion with the number “1” displayed inside), and the stepped portion 55i.
When the depth of the stepped portion 55c is D1, the depth of the stepped portion 55d is D2, and the depth of the stepped portion 55i is D3, the magnitude relationship is “D1>D2>D3”. In this way, by making the depths of the three step portions 55c, 55d, and 55i different, counterfeiting is made difficult.
Furthermore, since the depths of the plurality of step portions 55c, 55d, and 55i are different, an operator can grasp the mounting direction of the main chip 55 by feeling the top surface of the main chip 55.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 88(A), at least a part of the product name 55g is arranged to overlap with the company name 55h. In this example, "B" and "C" in the product name overlap with "A" in the company name, "D", "E" and "F" in the product name overlap with "B" in the company name, and "B" in the product name overlaps with "A" in the company name. The letter "G" overlaps with the letter "C" in the company name.
In other words, the characters "BCDEFG" of the product name "ABCDEFG" are arranged so as to overlap the stepped portion 55i. Displaying the product name 55g in this way makes counterfeiting difficult.
For example, if an attempt is made to form a company name 55h with a stepped portion 55i after printing the product name 55g, the portion of the product name 55g that overlaps with the stepped portion 55i may be erased.
On the other hand, when attempting to print the product name 55g after forming the company name 55h having the stepped portion 55i, the portion of the product name 55g that overlaps with the stepped portion 55i may not be printed clearly.

Furthermore, hidden characters 55j are displayed within the characters of the product name 55g. The size of each character of the hidden characters 55j is less than or equal to the line thickness of the characters of the product name 55g.
As shown in FIG. 88(A), the character "A" of the hidden character 55j is displayed within the line of the character "C" of the product name 55g. Similarly, the character "B" of the hidden character 55j is displayed within the line of the character "D" of the product name 55g, and the character "C" of the hidden character 55j is displayed within the line of the character "E" of the product name 55g. ing.
Further, among the characters "A", "B", and "C" of the hidden characters 55j, the characters "A" and "C" of the hidden characters 55j are arranged so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of the company name 55h.
Therefore, the letter "C" of the product name 55g and the letter "A" of the hidden character 55j are displayed so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of the letter "A" of the company name 55h.
Similarly, the letter "E" of the product name 55g and the letter "C" of the hidden character 55j are displayed so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of the letter "B" of the company name 55h.
This configuration makes counterfeiting more difficult. Furthermore, by checking the presence or absence of the hidden characters 55j, it is possible to determine whether or not it is forged.

The main body of the socket 56 is made of, for example, a transparent resin material, as described above. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 87, socket pins 56d (terminals) are provided inside the socket 56 at positions corresponding to the pins 55a of the main chip 55 to be mounted. In addition, in FIG. 87, only the 35th socket pin 56d (35) and the 36th socket pin 56d (36) are shown, and the illustration of the socket pin 56d is omitted in FIG. 86, but the socket pin 56d is It has socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) connected to pins 55a(1) to 55a(71) of the chip 55, respectively.
By soldering the socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of the socket 56 to the main control board 50, the socket pins 56d and the main control board 50 are electrically connected, and the socket 56 is connected to the main control board 50. will be implemented.
Furthermore, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the pins 55a(1) to 55a(71) of the main chip 55 and the socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of the socket 56 are electrically connected to each other. Connected. Thereby, the main chip 55 and the main control board 50 are electrically connected. After the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the main chip 55 is coupled so that it cannot be easily pulled out from the socket 56.

As shown in FIG. 85, on the surface of the main control board 50, around the area where the socket 56 is mounted, a mark number 50b and a mark 50c are printed.
The mark numbers 50b include four: a mark number 50b(1) displaying the number "1", a mark number 50b(35) displaying the number "35", a mark number 50b(36) displaying the number "36", and a mark number 50b(71) displaying the number "71".
These four mark numbers 50b(1), 50b(35), 50b(36), and 50b(71) correspond to pins 55a(1), 55a(35), 55a(36), and 55a(71) of the main chip 55, respectively. Specifically, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55, the pin 55a(1) is located near the mark number 50b(1), the pin 55a(35) is located near the mark number 50b(35), the pin 55a(36) is located near the mark number 50b(36), and the pin 55a(71) is located near the mark number 50b(71).

Furthermore, on the surface of the main control board 50, between the landmark number 50b(1) and the landmark number 50b(35), there are six marks 50c(5), 50c(10), and 50c(15). , a mark 50c (20), a mark 50c (25), and a mark 50c (30) are printed. These marks 50c are printed with dots.
In FIG. 85, when viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55 with the main chip 55 attached to the socket 56, a mark 50c (5) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a (5) of the main chip 55. is located, a mark 50c (10) is located substantially directly below the pin 55a (10), a mark 50c (15) is located substantially directly below the pin 55a (15), and a mark is located substantially directly below the pin 55a (20). 50c (20) is located, the mark 50c (25) is located substantially directly below the pin 55a (25), and the mark 50c (30) is located substantially directly below the pin 55a (30).

On the other hand, on the surface of the main control board 50, between the landmark number 50b (36) and the landmark number 50b (71), there are seven marks 50c (40), 50c (45), 50c (50), A mark 50c (55), a mark 50c (60), a mark 50c (65), and a mark 50c (70) are printed. These marks 50c are printed with dots in the same way as the above-mentioned marks 50c.
In FIG. 85, when viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55 with the main chip 55 attached to the socket 56, the main control board 50 is located almost directly above the pins 55a (40) of the main chip 55. The mark 50c (40) is located almost directly above the pin 55a (45) of the main chip 55, and the mark 50c (50) is located almost directly above the pin 55a (50). The mark 50c (55) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (55), the mark 50c (60) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (60), and the mark 50c (60) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (65). The mark 50c (65) is located so that the mark 50c (70) is located substantially directly above the pin 55a (70).

With the above configuration, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56 and viewed from directly above, the pin number of the main chip 55 can be easily known. For example, in FIG. 85, it can be easily determined that the pin 55a (36) of the main chip 55 located almost directly below the landmark number 50b (36) is the "36th" pin. Further, for example, the pin 55a (17) (GND) is easily the "17" pin 55a due to the landmark number 50b (1), the landmark 50c (5), the landmark 50c (10), and the landmark 50c (15). I understand that.

In FIG. 85, a step portion 56b (56b(1) and 56b(71)) is formed at the left end of the surface (top surface) of the socket 56. The stepped portion 56b(1) has a substantially rectangular region recessed from the surface, and the number “1” is displayed within the substantially rectangular region. Note that the amount of recess of the step portion 56b is arbitrary, but for example, it may be set to be approximately the same as the amount of recess of the step portion 55c of the main chip 55.
Further, the number "1" of the stepped portion 56b(1) is displayed rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85. Therefore, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the number “1” displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 and the number “1” displayed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 are The direction is shifted by 90 degrees. By doing this, if the main chip 55 and the socket 56 are viewed in the orientation shown in FIG. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 will be in the correct orientation.
Therefore, when the main control board 50 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in the orientation shown in FIG. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 can be seen in the correct orientation. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in an orientation rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the orientation in the drawing shown in FIG. You can see "1" in the correct direction. Therefore, no matter which orientation the main control board 50 is attached to the gaming machine 10, the numbers on either the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 or the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 should be viewed in the correct orientation. This makes it easier to confirm the pin number when attaching the main chip 55 to the socket 56.

Note that the orientation of the main chip 55 can also be confirmed by looking at the position of the stepped portion 55c. That is, in the main chip 55, the side having the stepped portion 55c is the side with pin numbers "1" and "71".
Further, when the main chip 55 is viewed from above, the outer shape of the main chip 55 is chamfered only at the lower left corner in FIG. The chamfered corner side has pin number "1". Therefore, the position of pin number "1" can be easily confirmed by simply checking the chamfered corner.

Furthermore, the stepped portion 56b (71) has a substantially rectangular region recessed from the surface, and a number “71” is displayed within the substantially rectangular region. Similarly to the number "1" of the stepped portion 56b (1), the number "71" of the stepped portion 56b (71) is also displayed rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85.
When the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the first pin 55a(1) of the main chip 55 is located near the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56, and The th pin 55a (71) (GND) is located near the stepped portion 56b (71) of the socket 56.

The stepped portion 56b(1) and the stepped portion 56b(71) of the socket 56 are also configured to have recesses and numbers are displayed within the recessed areas, making it difficult to forge the socket 56.
Further, the number of pins 55a of the main chip 55 is "71", that is, an odd number, and in FIG. 85, the number of pins 55a is "35" on the lower side and "36" on the upper side. Since the socket 56 side also has a shape into which these pins 55a are inserted, the main chip 55 cannot be installed in the opposite direction (the side with 36 pins 55a is inserted with the side having 36 pins 55a facing downward in the figure). Thereby, incorrect attachment can be prevented. Also, when attaching the main chip 55 to the socket 56, the number “1” displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 and the number “1” displayed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 are By matching these, it becomes possible to mount the main chip 55 in the socket 56 in the correct orientation.

Furthermore, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the number "1" on the stepped portion 56b(1) makes it easy to identify that the pin 55a(1) of the main chip 55 is the "1" pin 55a. can be confirmed. Similarly, from the number "71" on the stepped portion 56b (71), it can be easily confirmed that the pin 55a (71) (GND) of the main chip 55 is the "71" pin 55a.

As shown in Fig. 86, two notches 56e (height H1) are formed on the bottom surface of the socket 56 in the longitudinal direction. Also, as shown in Fig. 87, a notch 56f (height H2) is formed on the bottom surface of the socket 56 in the lateral direction. These notches 56e and 56f allow visual confirmation that no unauthorized parts are attached to the bottom surface of the socket 56. As described above, since the main body of the socket 56 is made of a transparent or translucent resin material, it is possible to visually confirm that no unauthorized parts are attached inside (the hollow portion 56a). Furthermore, the notches 56e and 56f allow visual confirmation that no unauthorized parts are attached to the contact surface between the socket 56 and the main control board 50.
87, socket pins 56d are provided inside socket 56. Therefore, if height H1 of notch 56e is higher than necessary in the longitudinal direction of socket 56 (the side on which socket pins 56d are aligned), it becomes possible to insert a wire or the like through notch 56e, which may lead to fraudulent activity.

However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the height H1 of the notch 56e is lower than the height H3 of the resistor 50a mounted on the main control board 50 (H1<H3). Specifically, the height H1 of the notch 56e is, for example, less than 1 mm, and the height H3 of the resistor 50a is, for example, about 1 to 3 mm. It is assumed that the height H3 of the resistor 50a is the resistor with the lowest height among the plurality of types of resistors mounted on the main control board 50.
As described above, the socket 56 is configured such that it is difficult to insert a foreign object such as a wire through the notch 56e. Thereby, it is difficult to access the socket pin 56d through the notch 56e, so it is possible to suppress tribbing.

<Seventh embodiment>
The seventh embodiment relates to the positional relationship between a board and an electronic component.
In the seventh embodiment, the term "board" includes, in addition to the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 described above, other control boards connected to the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, relay boards, etc. It will be done.
In addition, "electronic components" include (cable) connectors, 7-segment displays, and the like. If the electronic component is a 7-segment display, for example, a setting value display LED 73 (1 digit), a credit number display LED 76 (2 digits), an earned number display LED 78 (2 digits), a management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 (4 digits) (see FIGS. 1 and 36).
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the "front surface" of the board refers to the surface on which a predetermined electronic component is mounted (so-called "component surface"), and the "back surface" refers to the surface opposite to the surface on which a predetermined electronic component is mounted. It refers to the side surface (so-called "solder surface").

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, by providing a predetermined amount of gap between the board and the bottom surface of the predetermined electronic component (the surface facing the board), unauthorized components can be removed between the bottom surface of the predetermined electronic component and the board. This makes it possible to visually confirm whether or not any of the following items are attached. In a situation where the board is attached to the gaming machine 10, the gap may not be easily visually confirmed depending on the mounting position, although this varies depending on the position where the board is attached.
However, when assembling the gaming machine 10 or during maintenance after installing the gaming machine 10, the operator can easily visually check the gap.
Furthermore, as will be described later, by illuminating the gap with an LED, it becomes possible to check the gap even in a dimly lit environment after the board is attached to the housing of the gaming machine 10.

90A and 90B are diagrams showing a positional relationship (example 1) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, where (A) is a plan view and (B) is a front view.
The “predetermined electronic component” in this example 1 corresponds to the connector 57 .
91(A) is a view seen from the Z4 direction in FIG. 90(A), with the circuit board omitted, and FIG. 91(B) is a view seen from the Z5 direction (the bottom side of the connector) in FIG. 90(B), with the circuit board omitted.
90, a connector 57 is mounted on the board. The connector 57 corresponds to a cable connector for connecting to another board (for example, the main control board 50) via a cable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a plurality of leg portions 57a are formed on the bottom side of the connector 57. As a result, the entire range of the bottom surface of the connector 57 does not come into contact with the board, only the feet 57a of the connector come into contact with the board, and there is a constant distance between the bottom surface of the connector 57 (excluding the feet 57a) and the surface of the board. A gap is formed. In other words, the connector 57 is arranged so as to float above the substrate surface by the height of the foot portion 57a.
With this configuration, it is possible to visually check the gap between the connector 57 and the board, and it is possible to check whether any unauthorized parts or the like are attached.

The lead wires 57b of the connector 57 are arranged in two rows as shown in FIG. 91(B), and are arranged so as to avoid the leg portions 57a. As a result, when viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 90(B) or when viewed from the back side as shown in FIG. 91(A), it is possible to visually check that the foot portion 57a and the lead wire 57b do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to correctly determine whether any unauthorized parts or the like are attached to the gap between the board and the connector 57.
Further, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the lead wire 57b is configured to be visible when viewed from behind the connector 57, but when viewed from directly above the connector 57, as shown in FIG. 90(A). The lead wire 57b is configured so as not to be visible.
For example, if this board is installed inside the gaming machine 10 (for example, inside the housing, on the back of the front door, etc.), it will be installed in a manner that looks like the one shown in Figure 90(A) when the front door is opened. If so, the lead wire 57b of the connector 57 cannot be visually seen from that position, thereby improving security.

92A and 92B are diagrams showing a positional relationship (example 2) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, where (A) shows a plan view and (B) shows a side view (enlarged view).
The board in Example 2 corresponds to the display board 75 shown in Fig. 36 (third embodiment). The "predetermined electronic components" correspond to the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78.
To briefly explain the outline of the display board 75 once again, as shown in FIG. 1, the display board 75 is a board that is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and therefore it is preferable that the display board 75 is provided with anti-tamper measures.

As shown in FIG. 92, a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 are mounted on the display board 75. Each of these consists of two 7-segment displays (upper digit and lower digit) arranged in parallel.
Further, on the display board 75, six status display LEDs 79 are mounted below the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 in FIG. 92(A). These are independent LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 92(B), the credit number display LED76 and the acquired number display LED78 have a foot (foot 78a in the case of the acquired number display LED78) on the bottom surface, similar to the connector 57 shown in FIG. 90, and the height of this foot 78a is formed to be "H4". As a result, when the acquired number display LED78 is mounted on the display board 75, a gap "H4" is formed between the bottom surface of the acquired number display LED78 and the top of the display board 75. This is also true for the credit number display LED76.

When the status display LED 79 (FIG. 92(B) shows the game start display LED 79d, but this applies to all status display LEDs 79) is mounted on the display board 75, the lead wire of the status display LED 79 is soldered to the display board 75 in the same manner as the connector 57, but the gap "H5" between the bottom surface of the status display LED 79 and the display board 75 at that time is almost "0" or very small. Therefore, the gap "H4" between the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 and the display board 75 is larger than the gap "H5" between the bottom surface of the status display LED 79 and the display board 75 (H5<H4). With this configuration, it becomes possible for the light emitted when the status display LED 79 is turned on to illuminate the gap "H4" between the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 and the display board 75.

In particular, the status display LED 79 is located so close to the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 that the light when the status display LED 79 is turned on reaches the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78. This makes it possible to visually check the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 using the light when the status display LED 79 is turned on.
For example, in a situation where a medal is bet, at least one of the 1 bet display LED 79a, 2 bet display LED 79b, and 3 bet display LED 79c lights up, so if you bet a medal, the bottom of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed.

In addition, if the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off while medals are being bet, when the power is turned on again, the bet number data before the power cut is read and the gaming machine 10 is restarted. Sometimes, at least one of the 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, or 3-bet display LED 79c lights up again. Therefore, by simply turning on the power, the LEDs can be turned on, and the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed.
Note that the above is not limited to the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c, but also applies to other LEDs. For example, after the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the replay display LED 79f will remain lit until the next game is started, and even if the power is turned off and on in this situation, the gaming machine 10 will At startup, the replay display LED 79f lights up again. Therefore, the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed using the light when the replay display LED 79f is turned on.
The display board 75 is attached to the back side of the front door of the gaming machine 10, and a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are arranged so as to be visible from the control panel 12c.
Under the situation where the display board 75 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in this way, even if the status display LED 79 is turned on, it may not be easy to visually check the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78. There is. Therefore, while the display board 75 is electrically connected to the gaming machine 10 (the display board 75 is connected with a harness), the display board 75 is removed from the front door, and the operator removes the display board 75 from the front door. If you hold it in your hand and turn on the status display LED 79, you can easily visually check the bottom of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the positional relationship (Example 3) between the board and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, in which (A) shows the front surface (mounting surface of the predetermined electronic component), and (B) (C) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view.
The board of this example 3 corresponds to the main control board 50. Further, the “predetermined electronic component” corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74. The management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is the same as that shown in FIG. 1 (first embodiment) and FIG. 36(B) (third embodiment).

First, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example of Fig. 93 is composed of four independent seven-segment displays (digits in Fig. 36(B)) arranged side by side. Also, each seven-segment display has a DP (decimal point) (segment P in Fig. 37) like the example of Fig. 36(B).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 93B, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, like the other examples of the seventh embodiment, is provided with feet (not shown in FIG. 93) on the bottom surface, so that there is a gap between the bottom surface of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 and the surface of the main control board 50. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to visually check whether or not an illegal part is attached to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74.

Furthermore, on the back side of the main control board 50, in the area where the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached on the front side, a boundary line 50d having approximately the same dimensions as the external shape of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is printed. If the color of the main control board 50 is, for example, green, the boundary line 50d is displayed, for example, in white to make it easier to see. Furthermore, a DP mark 50e is also printed in a position corresponding to the DP of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 on the front side. The DP mark 50e is displayed, for example, in white, just like the boundary line 50d.

With this configuration, it is possible to confirm whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached to the correct position on the main control board 50. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is correctly attached to the front surface position corresponding to the boundary line 50d on the back side of the main control board 50. Furthermore, if the external dimensions of the boundary line 50d are made approximately the same as the external dimensions of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, a different 7-segment display (for example, a 7-segment display with a different number of digits) is not attached. You can check whether
Furthermore, by checking the positions of the four DP marks 50e on the back side of the main control board 50 and the positions of the DPs on each 7-segment display of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, the management information display LED ( It is possible to check whether the role ratio monitor) 74 is mounted in the correct direction.

94 is a diagram showing a modification of Example 3 in FIG. 93, in which, similarly to FIG. 93, (A) shows a surface view (mounting surface of a predetermined electronic component), and (B) shows a side view. , (C) shows a back view.
The management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example of FIG. 94 is different from the example of FIG. 93 in that it is an integrally formed 4-digit 7-segment display (each digit cannot be separated). . In other words, this management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is one component.
In such a case, only the outer shape of the boundary line 50d on the back surface of the main control board 50 is printed (displayed), and the boundary lines for each digit are not printed. Therefore, the number of parts can be easily confirmed depending on whether the boundary line 50d in FIG. 93(B) or the boundary line 50d in FIG. 94(B) is printed.

On the other hand, as for the DP marks 50e, the number of DP marks provided on the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 are printed at positions corresponding to the respective DP positions. This makes it possible to check whether the four-digit management information display LED (rotation ratio monitor) 74 is correctly installed and whether the management information display LED (rotation ratio monitor) 74 is oriented correctly.

Although the fifth to seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description and can be modified in various ways, such as the following.
A. Fifth Embodiment (1) The number of error histories to be stored or displayed is arbitrary depending on the storage capacity of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. For example, the error history may be stored without being deleted until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached, and all of the stored error history may be displayed. When the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached, the oldest data in the error history is sequentially deleted.
Further, for example, information that has passed a predetermined number of days (for example, half a year, one year, etc.) from the current time may be deleted from the error history data. Alternatively, error history data is stored until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores error history is reached (it is preferable to configure the system so that these error histories can be checked in some way). Regarding the display of the history, for example, only the history within one month from the current time may be displayed.

(2) Although not illustrated in the above embodiment, when an error occurs while the reel 31 is rotating, the power is turned off before the reel 31 stops, and then the power is turned on (the setting change state is (when not migrated), the process is as follows.
Note that when the power is turned off after detecting an error, the data of the error is stored in the abnormal input flag as described above.
After the power is turned on, if the computer starts up without transitioning to the setting change state, the process proceeds to step S2721 (power return process) in the process of FIG. 41 (program start). Then, after step S2724 in FIG. 42 (power recovery process), an interrupt process occurs, and the error command stored before the power is turned off is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it starts reporting the error. The time of the error history for the error is the time when notification of the error started.

(3) The error details and times shown on the error history screen are merely examples, and are not limited to these. For example, door opening and door closing do not need to be displayed in the error history. Furthermore, it is not necessary to display power on/off in the error history. On the other hand, when the state changes to the settings change state or the settings confirmation state, some information may be displayed on the error history screen together with the time so that the user can understand the fact.
Furthermore, the time may be any of those that display the day and time, those that display the month, day and time, and those that display the year, month, day and time.

(4) The error history screen can be displayed in the setting confirmation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by performing a predetermined operation when opening the door, it is possible to switch to the store manager mode, and the error history screen can be displayed in the store manager mode. It may be possible to display the error history screen (the setting key may not be necessary for displaying the error history screen).
Alternatively, on the contrary, the error history screen may not be displayed unless the setting change state is entered.
(5) In a situation where an error is being reported, the error notification may be terminated even if the reset switch 153 is not operated when the cause of the error is removed. Alternatively, even if the cause of the error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where an error is being reported, the error notification continues until a predetermined time has elapsed from that point, The error notification may be configured to end after the predetermined time has elapsed.

B. Sixth Embodiment (1) Two stepped portions 56b (1) and 56b (71) were provided in the socket 56, and characters "1" and "71" were displayed, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if only the stepped portion 56b(1) is provided, for example, it is possible to align with the number “1” of the stepped portion 55d in the main chip 55.
(2) In addition to the four landmark numbers 50b, thirteen landmarks 50c are displayed on the main control board 50, but the invention is not limited to this, and only the landmark numbers 50b may be displayed. Furthermore, the landmark numeral 50b may be only the landmark numeral 50b(1), or only the landmark numerals 50b(1) and 50b(71). Even if only the landmark number 50b (1) is used, it is possible to align it with the number "1" on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55.

(3) In the above embodiment, the main chip 55 is provided with a recessed portion 55b, a model number sticker 55f is attached, and a two-dimensional code 55e, product name 55g, company name 55h, and hidden characters 55j are displayed (printed). , these do not necessarily mean that they are essential requirements for the main chip 55.
(4) In the above embodiment, the number of pins of the main chip 55 is "71", but the number is not limited to this, and may be an even number (for example, "72"). Furthermore, when using an odd number of lines, the number is not limited to "71", but may be, for example, "75" (32+33). The number of pins of the main chip 55 is determined by the number of signal lines and GND (ground) required.

(5) The cutouts 56e and 56f of the socket 56 are not necessarily essential. However, it is preferable to provide a notch 56e or 56f in at least one location on the bottom of the socket 56 so that the gap between the bottom of the socket 56 and the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed. Moreover, even if the notches 56e and 56f are provided, it is not essential that they have the heights described above.
(6) The socket 56 can also be formed from an opaque material. However, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud, it is preferable to use a transparent or translucent material that allows the inside to be visually viewed.
(7) The stepped portion 55i of the company name 55h is not necessarily an essential requirement. Even if the company name 55h is provided, it may be a character without a step. Furthermore, the depths of the stepped portions 55c, 55d, and 55i (D1, D2, and D3 in FIG. 89) may be partly the same (for example, D1=D2 and D1≠D3), or all of the depths may be the same (for example, D1=D2 and D1≠D3). They may be the same (D1=D2=D3).

(8) The orientation of the characters on the stepped portions 56b (1) and 56b (71) was rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise with respect to the character “1” on the stepped portion 55d and the character of the landmark numeral 50b. Not limited. The orientation of the characters on the stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) may be the same as the orientation of the character “1” on the stepped portion 55d and the landmark numeral 50b.
Alternatively, the characters on the stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise in FIG. The orientation may be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85.
(9) In the main chip 55, the pin numbers of the GND (ground) lines are No. 17, No. 35, No. 54, and No. 71, but are not limited to these. For example, No. 1, No. 35, No. 36, and No. 71 may be used as GND (ground) lines. Alternatively, pins 17, 18, 53, and 54 (all pins adjacent to the recessed portion 55b) may be used as GND (ground) lines.

C. Seventh Embodiment (1) The foot portion (for ensuring a gap with the substrate) provided at the bottom of a predetermined electronic component may have any shape. For example, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the foot portions 57a of the connector 57 are formed in a line shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. Approximately cylindrical foot portions are provided at the four corners of a predetermined electronic component. It's okay. This applies not only to the connector 57 but also to the 7-segment display (FIGS. 92, 93, and 94).
(2) As shown in FIG. 92(B), "H5" is illustrated as the gap between the bottom surface of the LED and the board, but in reality, the bottom surface of the LED and the board are almost in contact, and the LED The gap between the bottom surface and the substrate is approximately 0.

(3) In the examples of FIGS. 93 and 94, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is illustrated, but the display board 75 shown in FIG. 92 can be similarly configured. It is possible. For example, if the credit number display LED 76 is made up of two 7-segment displays arranged side by side, a boundary line 50d corresponding to the two 7-segment displays arranged side by side is displayed on the back side of the display board 75. , and two DP marks 50e are displayed.
In addition, when the credit number display LED 76 is an integrated 7-segment display that connects the upper and lower digits, a boundary line 50d indicating its outer shape is displayed on the back surface of the display board 75, and two A DP mark 50e is displayed. This also applies to the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, it is possible to configure the setting value display LED 73 consisting of, for example, one digit in a similar manner. In this case, on the back side of the board (the main control board 50 or the board on which the set value display LED 73 is mounted), a boundary line 50d corresponding to the outer shape of the set value display LED 73 is displayed, and one DP mark 50e is displayed. be done. Note that when the setting value display LED 73 does not have a DP, only the boundary line 50d is displayed on the back surface of the board.

<Eighth embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to timer interrupt processing and vector addresses (also referred to as "interrupt vector addresses").
In the eighth embodiment, words and phrases are used as follows.
(1) "Timer interrupt processing" in the eighth embodiment is the same as "interrupt processing (I_INTR)" in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 66). In the following description of the eighth embodiment, "timer interrupt processing" may be simply abbreviated as "interrupt processing" if necessary.
(2) "Address value" refers to the numerical value of an address in the built-in memory. For example, in FIG. 96, which will be described later, the "vector address value" is "0004H". Note that in this specification, the term "address" and the term "address" may be referred to as necessary, but these terms have the same meaning.

(3) "Data value of address" refers to the value of data stored at the address. For example, the above-mentioned "vector address" actually consists of 2-byte addresses "0004H" and "0005H", but when referring to the "data value of vector address", the addresses "0004H" and "0005H" are used. A data value (a 2-byte (16-bit) value) stored in a .
(4) Add "H" to the address value. "H" indicates hexadecimal number "hex". Further, "B" is attached to the bit value stored at the address. "B" indicates a "bit" of a binary number.
Furthermore, when indicating a 2-byte bit value (16-bit value), a "/" is added between the upper byte (8 bits) value and the lower byte (8 bits) value. For example, "00000000/00000100B".

(5) On the other hand, a register does not have an address, and the "value of a register" refers to the value of the data stored in that register.
(6) In this embodiment, the storage areas in the built-in memory are referred to as the "program area", "data area", "register area", "program management area", "work area", and "stack area". However, without being limited to these, they may also be referred to as the "program area", "data area", "register area", "program management area", "work area", and "stack area", respectively.
The "program region" is also called a "program code region" or a "program code area."

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") in the eighth embodiment. This one-chip microprocessor is mounted on the main control board 50 in FIG. 1, and is a one-chip version of the RWM 53, ROM 54, and main CPU 55.
In FIG. 95, the chip includes a main CPU 55 (same as in FIG. 1) and a built-in memory. Note that various hardware other than these two hardware is provided within the chip, but explanations and illustrations thereof are omitted.
The built-in memory includes a built-in ROM 54 having a range of addresses "0000H" to "3FFFH" (16384 bytes), and a built-in RWM 53 having a range of addresses "F000H" to "F3FFH" (1024 bytes).
The built-in ROM 54 is the same as "ROM54" in FIG. 1, and the built-in RWM 53 is the same as "RWM53" in FIG.

Furthermore, the internal memory includes a function setting register area and a function control register area as internal memory register areas.
The function setting register area is a storage area for registers for operation settings including interrupt processing (for example, initial settings for interrupt processing, etc.). Specific examples of registers (including counters) stored in the function setting register area include the prescaler register 502 and counter setting register 503 in Fig. 61 (fourth embodiment). Furthermore, although not shown in Fig. 95, a register for setting the maximum value of random numbers, etc. are also provided in the function setting register area.
As in the fourth embodiment, the prescaler register 502 is a register in which a setting value for selecting a clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 can be set.
The counter setting register 503 is a built-in register capable of setting the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 .

The function control register area is a storage area for registers that manage monitoring and control, such as monitoring interrupt processing and storing random values. For example, in FIG. 61 (fourth embodiment), an interrupt wait monitor register 301, an 8-bit counter 501, and an interrupt flag 504 are provided in the function control register area.
Similar to the fourth embodiment, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is a register for storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 is set.
The 8-bit counter 501 is a storage area for a counter value consisting of 8 bits (1 byte) for measuring the timing of interrupt processing.
Interrupt flag 504 is a flag indicating that 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
Note that the built-in memory register area is not limited to the function setting register area and the function control register area shown in FIG. 95.

On the other hand, the main CPU 55 includes a CPU register area. This CPU register area is a register area different from the built-in memory register area provided in the built-in memory.
The CPU register area is provided with general-purpose registers A, B, C, D, E, F, H, and L registers. Note that the F register is a flag register.
Further, the Q register is a register that stores the upper address "F0H" of the work area (see FIG. 97) among the used areas of the built-in RWM 53, and is used when issuing instructions. It is used in an instruction to read data whose upper address is "F0H" from the storage area of the built-in RWM 53.
Furthermore, the I register is a register called an interrupt page address register, which will be described in detail later, and is a register for determining the upper byte value of a vector address.

The interrupt prohibition flags (IFF1, IFF2) 302 are the same as those shown in FIG. 61 (fourth embodiment). The IFF1 register is a register for determining permission or prohibition of maskable interrupts. Further, the IFF2 register is a register used to restore the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt, or to restore by a RETEX instruction after execution of a CALLEX instruction.
Note that, in addition to the above-mentioned registers, various registers such as a Q register and a U register are provided, but illustration and description thereof are omitted in the eighth embodiment.

Further, the registers, counters, and flags shown in FIG. 95 are merely examples, and are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, although the 8-bit counter 501 is provided in the function control register area, it is not limited thereto, and may be provided in the CPU register area within the main CPU 55 or may be configured by a circuit. Furthermore, the interrupt flag 504 may be of any type as long as it has the function of storing on/off status, and may be provided in, for example, a CPU register area instead of within the function control register area, or may be configured by a circuit. In addition, the prescaler register 502, counter setting register 503, and interrupt wait monitor register 301 can be similarly provided in the CPU register area or other area in the built-in memory, or can be configured by a circuit.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the memory map in the built-in ROM 54 in FIG. 95 in more detail.
The built-in ROM 54 has a used area and an unused area.
The "use area" is a storage area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
Furthermore, the "outside use area" is a storage area in which information not related to the progress of the game is stored, such as a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor), and information used during testing. This is a storage area where programs, fraud prevention programs, etc. are stored.
The used area and the non-used area of the built-in ROM 54 are provided with a program area and a data area, respectively.
The "program area" is also referred to as a "control area" and is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored.
Furthermore, the "data area" is a storage area in which information other than programs is stored, and is a storage area in which data used when the program is executed is stored.

Here, as shown in parentheses in FIG. 96, the "use area" may be referred to as the "first area". Furthermore, the "outside use area" may be referred to as the "second area".
The program area of the used area may also be referred to as a "first program area" or a "first control area." Further, the data area of the used area may be referred to as a "first data area."
Furthermore, the program stored in the program area of the used area may be referred to as a "first program."
Similarly, the program area outside the used area may be referred to as a "second program area" or a "second control area." Furthermore, the data area outside the used area may be referred to as a "second data area."
Furthermore, the program stored in the program area of the area outside the used area may be referred to as a "second program."

As shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, there is an unused area (address "11FFH") between the program area of the used area and the data area, but this unused area is eliminated and the program area of the used area is It may be arranged so that the data area is continuous.
In addition, there is an unused area (addresses "1DF7H" to "1FFFH") between the used area and the outside area, but the unused area is removed so that the used area and the outside area are continuous. May be placed.
Furthermore, regarding the area outside the used area, the program area and the data area are arranged consecutively, but like the used area, there is an unused area of 1 byte or more between the program area and the data area. You may do so.
Note that the used area and the non-used area may be defined so as to refer only to the program area and data area, and to exclude unused areas. On the other hand, when there is an unused area between the program area and the data area, such as the used area in FIG. 96, the unused area may also be referred to as the used area (or area outside the used area).

In addition to the above-mentioned used area, non-used area, and unused area, the built-in ROM 54 is provided with a memory area for storing the company name, date, model name (of the gaming machine 10), etc., and a program management area.
In the above, the vector address (0004H) described in detail below is provided in the program area of the usage area in this embodiment.
Also, the program code area start/end addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) are provided in the program management area.
The program management area includes program code area setting addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and an interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), which will be described later.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the memory map within the built-in RWM 53 in FIG. 95 in more detail.
Similar to the area of the built-in ROM 54, the area of the built-in RWM 53 includes a used area (which may be referred to as a "first area") and an area outside the used area (which may be referred to as a "second area"). It is provided. The concepts of these “used area” and “outside area” are the same as in the case of the built-in ROM 54.
Further, the used area and the non-used area of the built-in RWM 53 have a work area, an unused area, and a stack area, respectively.
The work area (also referred to as the "first work area") and the stack area (also referred to as the "first stack area") in the usage area are the programs (for the progress of the game) stored in the program area of the usage area of the built-in ROM 54. A storage area used (updated, referenced) during the execution of related programs.

Similarly, a work area (also referred to as a "second work area") and a stack area in an area outside the used area is also referred to as a "second stack area". ) is used (updated, (referenced) storage area.
Note that the "stack area" is a storage area in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).

Next, the interrupt initial setting address will be explained.
First, "vector address" refers to an address that stores the start address (top address) of a timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) that is executed when a timer interrupt processing factor occurs. In other words, the vector address does not store the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) itself, but refers to an address that stores the location (starting address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR).
The "interrupt initial setting address" is an address that stores data that allows the value of the vector address to be specified. In particular, in this embodiment, the vector address cannot be specified only by the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address, but the value of the vector address is specified based on the value of the I register and the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address. possible.

FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating the interrupt initial setting address. In the figure, (A) is a diagram showing the details of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt priority order and the interrupt priority setting value.
As explained with reference to FIG. 96, the interrupt initial setting address is provided in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, and in this embodiment, the address is "3FDAH" (1 byte). However, this is an example and is not limited to this.
After the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the data value stored in this interrupt initial setting address is read, and the data value is used to determine the vector address.

98A, the upper 4 bits (A7 bits to A4 bits) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address have a value that is predetermined as a vector address setting value, which is "0000B" in this embodiment. This vector address setting value constitutes a part of the vector address value, as will be described later.
In this embodiment, the vector address setting value is set to "0H (0000B)", but it is not limited to this and can be set to various values such as "8H (1000H)" or "FH (1111B)".
In addition, the A3 and A2 bits in the data value of the interrupt initial setting address are fixed values, and are set to "00B" in this embodiment. Note that, as will be described in detail later, this fixed 2-bit value is configured to be checked (in security mode) when the gaming machine 10 is started, and if the 2-bit value is not "00B", an error occurs.
Moreover, this fixed value is not limited to "00B", but can be set to various values such as "11B".
Furthermore, the two lowest bits A1 and A0 of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address are an interrupt priority setting value.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98B, four types of interrupt priority setting values are provided: "00B", "01B", "10B", and "11B".

FIG. 98B shows the relationship between interrupt priority setting values and interrupt causes.
In this embodiment, there are five types of interrupt causes, "IR0" to "IR5", and the smaller the number at the end of the interrupt cause, the higher the interrupt priority. In other words, the interrupt cause "IR0" has the highest interrupt priority, and the interrupt cause "IR5" has the lowest interrupt priority.
The types of interrupts include "PTC0" to "PTC2", "RX0" to "RX1", and "XINT". Here, "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used in timer interrupt processing, and "PTC2" in particular corresponds to the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value. As a result, the interrupt priorities become "PTC0", "PTC1", "PTC2", "XINT", "RX0", and "RX1" in descending order of priority.
Further, when "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, the A1 bit and the A0 bit of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address become "01B".
As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the interrupt initial setting address is "3FDAH", and the data value of the interrupt initial setting address is "00000001B".

FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating vector address values and data values stored at the vector addresses.
FIG. 99(A) shows vector address values.
In this embodiment, the vector address is provided in the program area of the used area in the built-in ROM 54 and is 2 bytes.
As shown in FIG. 99(A), the vector address value has an upper 1 byte value that is an I register value, and a lower 1 byte value that includes a vector address setting value and an automatic allocation value.

Here, the I register value in this embodiment is "00H". As shown in FIG. 95, the I register is provided in the CPU register area, and is set to "00H" after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In other words, immediately after the gaming machine 10 is powered on, each register value provided in the CPU register area is cleared. Thereafter, unless a value other than "00H" is stored in the I register, the I register value remains "00H".
In this embodiment, no value is set in the I register after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, the I register value maintains "00H".
Therefore, the value of the upper 1 byte of the vector address is "00H".

Next, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A7 to A4 bit values correspond to the A7 to A4 bit values (vector address setting value) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH). As shown in FIG. 98(A), in the data value of the interrupt initial setting address, the A7 to A4 bit values are "0000B", so this value becomes the A7 to A4 bit value of the lower byte of the vector address.

Further, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A3 to A0 bit values are automatically assigned values.
FIG. 99(B) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt factors and automatic allocation values. As shown in FIG. 98(B), in this embodiment, "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, and the priority of the interrupt factor of PTC2, which is the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment, is "IR2". ”.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99(B), the automatically assigned values for the interrupt factor "IR2" and the interrupt "PTC2 (I_INTR)" are "0100B" (04H). This "0100B" becomes the A3 to A0 bit value of the vector address value.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the value of the vector address is
"00000000/00000100B" = "0004H"
becomes.
As a result, in FIG. 96, "0004H" becomes the vector address in the storage area of the built-in ROM 54 starting from "0000H".
Note that since the value of the vector address is 2 bytes as described above, the vector address is actually "0004H" and "0005H".

FIG. 99(C) is a diagram showing an example of data values of vector addresses. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored starting from "1134H" in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM 54. In other words, the start address of the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is "1134H".
Therefore, the data value of the vector address (0004H) becomes "1134H".
When storing "1134H" in a 2-byte vector address, the lower byte value "34H" is stored in the first "0004H" and "11H" is stored in the next "0005H".
This results in
0004H:34H (00110100B)
0005H:11H (00010001B)
is memorized.

When the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the main CPU 55 starts up, it is possible to recognize where the vector address is located based on the data value of the interrupt initial setting address and the I address value.
Specifically, since the upper four bits of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) are "0000B", the upper four bits of the lower byte of the vector address are "0000B".
In addition, since the value of the interrupt priority setting value, which is the value of the lowest 2 bits of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), is "01B", the value of the lowest 4 bytes of the lower byte of the vector address corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2) is assigned to "0100B" by the interrupt controller.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the value of the I register becomes "00H", so the value of the upper byte of the vector address becomes "00000000B".
From the above, the main CPU 55 determines that the vector address (the address where the first address of "I_INTR" is stored) corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2, which corresponds to timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment) is "0004H".
Therefore, from the data value stored in the vector address, it is possible to recognize at which address the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored (the starting address of the timer interrupt processing program).

Note that the process of setting "00H" to the I register is not executed after the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the CPU register area on the main CPU 55 side in FIG. 95 is initialized, so that the I register value becomes "00H" like the other register values.
Furthermore, when the register is initialized after the power is turned on, "F0H" is stored in the Q register. When "F0H" is stored in the Q register, when specifying the upper address "F0H" in the storage area of the built-in RWM 53, the Q register is specified.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) of PTC2 enters, the program at the address corresponding to the data (1134H) stored in the vector addresses ("0004H" and "0005H") (i.e., the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR)) is called. In other words, the program code for timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the process from turning on the power to transitioning to user mode in this embodiment.
First, before the power is turned on (when the power is off), "XSRST" is "L (low)". Here, "XSRST" indicates the operating status of the main CPU 55, and when the main CPU 55 is in a situation where it should not operate (stopped), "XSRST=L" (when the main CPU 55 is stopped ).
When the power is turned on in this situation, the system reset is canceled and when the power is stably supplied, the main CPU 55 changes from "L (low)" to "H (high)" in terms of the circuit. .

Next, the registers in the CPU register area are initialized and it is determined whether there is a PROM mode request. Here, "PROM mode" refers to a mode in which data is written to ROM (ROM is burned). When it is determined that there is a request to shift to PROM mode, the mode shifts to PROM mode, and when it is determined that there is no request to shift to PROM mode, the mode shifts to security mode. Note that gaming machines installed on the market are configured so that after the system reset is released, it is determined that there is no request to shift to PROM mode.
In the security mode, a security check is performed, and when it is determined that the security check is OK, the process shifts to the user mode, and when it is determined that the security check is NG, the execution (processing) is stopped.
As a security check in the security mode, the program code area setting address of the program management area, the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), etc. are read. Then, a self-diagnosis is performed to check whether there is a setting error in the program management area. Also, in this security mode, the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) is read and the vector address value is recognized.

Here, the data of the interrupt initial setting address is read, and if the value of the fixed value (A3 and A2 bits) is not "00B" in FIG. 98(A), it is determined that the program management area is a setting error.
If it is determined that the security check is OK in the security mode, then the mode shifts to the user mode.
This user mode corresponds to program processing starting from "0000H" in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM 54.
Note that in FIG. 100, "running outside the designated area" will be described later.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of a program starting from "0000H" in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM 54.
Here, in this embodiment, special call instructions and normal call instructions are provided as call instructions by the main CPU 5.
The special call instruction is called the "RST instruction" and the normal call instruction is called the "CALLF instruction."
The RST instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 1-byte (4-cycle) program. On the other hand, the CALLF instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 2-byte (4-cycle) program. Therefore, the number of bytes for writing the RST instruction is smaller than the number of bytes for writing the CALLF instruction, so using the RST instruction can reduce the program capacity more than using the CALLF instruction. Therefore, programs that are called frequently are called using the RST command.

Here, the "program that is called frequently" includes, for example, a program that is called many times (multiple times) in one game.
However, "programs that are called frequently" include, for example, programs that are called at least once per game, and programs that are not necessarily called at least once per game but are likely to be called during a game. It will be done.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, addresses that can be called using the RST command are limited to predetermined addresses.
Specifically, the "predetermined address" is
0008H
0010H
0018H
0020H
0028H
0030H
0038H
0040H
It is composed of eight parts:
It should be noted that these eight addresses are merely examples, and the values (numbers) and numbers of the "predetermined addresses" can be set to various values depending on the chip specifications, etc.

By storing programs that can be called by the RST command in the eight addresses mentioned above, the program capacity can be reduced.
On the other hand, as described above, the program area of the used area starts from "0000H", and the power-on program is stored from this "0000H". The power-on program corresponds to, for example, "program start processing (M_PRG_START)" shown in FIG. 41 (third embodiment).

Further, as described above, the vector address is "0004H".
Therefore, as shown in FIG.
0000H: Power-on program (start program)
:
0004H: Vector address:
0008H: Program 1 called by RST command
:
0010H: Program 2 called by RST command
:
0018H: Program 3 called by RST command
:
0020H: Program 4 called by RST command
:
0028H: Program 5 called by RST command
:
0030H: Program 6 called by RST command
:
0038H: Program 7 called by RST command
:
0040H: Program 8 called by RST command
:
This is the arrangement of data (including instructions and programs).

Further, a jump instruction requires a capacity of 3 bytes in this embodiment. Therefore, a jump command is stored in "0001H" to "0003H", and "0050H", for example, is designated as the jump destination address. After "0050H", a program continuing from "0000H" is stored.
Here, a program that includes the jump command may be referred to as a power-on program, or a program that does not include the jump command may be referred to as a power-on program.
As a result, it is possible to start the power-on program at "0000H", jump to "0050H" with the next jump instruction at "0001H", and continue executing the power-on program from "0050H".
With this setting, the vector address can be placed at "0004H" while starting the power-on program from "0000H". Furthermore, the RST command can be placed at "0008H", "0010H", etc. while starting the power-on program from "0000H".

In addition, in the continuation of the power-on program, it is determined whether or not to shift to the setting change mode, for example.
Here, since the voltage is unstable when the power is turned on, there is a possibility that the jump instruction will not be executed normally. If the jump instruction is not executed normally, it may take a long time to shift to the setting change mode, or it may not shift to the setting change mode. Therefore, if you turn on the power after performing an operation to enter setting change mode (for example, by operating a setting key), and you do not enter setting change mode by the estimated time (T), , it can be determined that the program containing the jump instruction was not executed normally. When the administrator determines that the setting change mode will not be entered by the estimated time (T), the gaming machine 10 is powered on again. When the power is turned on again, the program goes through the security mode again and starts from address "0000H".
Further, it is preferable that the jump command of the power-on program is executed from "0000H" to "0007H". This is to enable the use of "0008H" as the RST command.

Further, when storing the program 1 called by the RST command in "0008H", the program 1 has a capacity of 8 bytes from "0008H" to "000FH", or a program that requires a capacity of less than 8 bytes is arranged.
Similarly, when storing the program 2 called by the RST command in "0010H", the program 2 has a capacity of 8 bytes from "0010H" to "0017H", or a program that requires a capacity of 8 bytes or less is arranged.

Here, if the program 2 consists of, for example, 4 bytes of "0010H" to "0013H", the addresses of "0014H" to "0017H" may be used in any way.
For example, first, addresses "0014H" to "0017H" may be set as unused areas ("00000000B" is stored).
Second, other programs that fit within 4 bytes may be stored in "0014H" to "0017H".
Furthermore, thirdly, a continuation program of the power-on program starting from "0000H" is stored in "0014H", and a jump instruction (address where the continuation program of "0014H" is stored) is stored in "0015H" to "0017H". (jump command) may be memorized.

The above also applies to "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H" and "0040H".
For example, when storing the program 4 called by the RST command in "0020H", if the program 4 has a capacity of 14 bytes from "0020H" to "002DH", the program that calls "0028H" by the RST command 5 may not be provided. However, if the program called by the RST command exceeds 8 bytes, it is preferable to store it after "0040H" where there is no limit to the program capacity. With this configuration, eight programs can be stored as programs that can be called by the RST command.
In addition, when the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, the method of arranging the program is not only to store it after "0040H" but also to store it from "0020H" to "0024H" in the above example. However, there is a method in which a jump command is stored in "0025H" to "0027H" and the jump command is used to jump to "0040H" or later. By doing so, a program that can be called by the RST command can be stored in "0028H". If such a method is adopted, even if the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, it is possible to provide eight programs called by the RST instruction.
In the example of FIG. 101, an instruction to jump to "0050H" is stored in "0001H", and a program continuing from "0000H" is stored after "0050H".

In this embodiment, the vector address is set to "0004H", but the present invention is not limited to this.
Here, the upper byte of the vector address value is the value of the I register. As in this embodiment, the process of setting a specific value in the I register is not executed after power-on, and the I register is initialized as a register of the main CPU 55 and remains in a state of "00H", so the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "00H". However, this is not limited to the above, and if the process of setting a specific value in the I register is executed after power-on and the I register is initialized, the upper byte value of the vector address can be set to the specific value.
However, as shown in FIG. 96, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register will be in the range of "00H" to "11H".
As will be described later, vector addresses are not limited to being provided in the program area of the used area, but can also be provided in the data area of the used area, the program area of an area outside the used area, or the data area of an area outside the used area.

However, when executing processing for setting a specific value in the I register after initializing the I register after the power is turned on, a program capacity corresponding to that amount is required. For example, if the specific value is "02H", it is necessary to initialize the I register after power-on, and then provide "LD I,02H" (instruction (program) to load "02H" into the I register). If the program requires a capacity of 2 bytes, for example, the program storage area will be consumed accordingly.
On the other hand, when using the initialized value "00H" as the I register value as in this embodiment, there is no need to set a specific value in the I register, so the program storage area is saved accordingly. You can save money. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced by setting the upper byte value of the vector address to "00H".

Furthermore, when the I register value is "00H", the value of the vector address is not limited to "0004H". Specifically, the vector address value can be set to any value other than "00FEH" and "00FFH" and the address to be called by the RST instruction (such as the above-mentioned "0008H" and "0010H"). For example, it can be set to "00F4H". If the lower 4-bit value of the lower byte of the vector address is "0100B (4H)", the automatically assigned value of this embodiment shown in FIG. 99B can be used as is.
Also, when the upper 4-bit value of the lower byte of the vector address is set to "FH" (1111B) as described above, the upper 4-bit value (vector address setting value) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) in Figure 98 (A) becomes "1111B".

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example when the vector address value is "00F4H". In this case, since "0004H" is not a vector address, a power-on program can be stored in "0000H" to "0004H".
In addition, if 3 bytes are required as the program capacity for a jump instruction, place the jump instruction in the 3-byte storage area from "0005H" to "0007H", and place the jump instruction in the 3-byte storage area from "0005H" to "0007H", and place the jump instruction at "0008H", which is called by the RST instruction as in Figure 101. Program 1 can be stored.

Next, a program called by the RST command, that is, a program called multiple times in one game will be explained.
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of processing called by the RST command, and (A), (B), and (C) show example 1, example 2, and example 3, respectively.
Example 1 in FIG. 103(A) is a flowchart showing control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). This process corresponds to, for example, the process in step S303 in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), and is a process for setting command data to be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
Furthermore, although not shown, in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), the operating state (whether or not the BB operating symbol is displayed, whether the replay operating symbol is displayed, etc.) in the game start setting process in step S272 An output request is set, and control command set 1 is executed.
Similarly, although not shown, in the start switch acceptance process in step S279 in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), an output request at the start of reel rotation is set and control command set 1 is executed.

In FIG. 103(A), first, in step S151, the main control board 50 executes interrupt prohibition processing. In the next step S152, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) is executed. The process then proceeds to step S503, where the interrupt processing prohibited in step S151 is canceled (ie, interrupts are enabled). Through the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited while control command set 2 is being executed.
Although detailed processing of control command set 2 will be omitted, this processing is processing for writing control commands. Furthermore, since interrupt processing is prohibited while the control command set 2 is being executed, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by interrupt processing being executed during the control command writing process.

Example 2 in FIG. 103(B) is a flowchart showing interrupt wait processing (R_INTR_WAIT). This process corresponds to, for example, step S2754 in FIG. 45 (third embodiment) or step S295 in FIG. 46 (third embodiment).
First, in step S161, the main control board 50 obtains an interrupt counter value. This process is a process of storing the interrupt counter value in the A register. Note that a 16-bit (2-byte counter) interrupt counter value is stored at a predetermined address in the working area of the used area of the built-in RWM 53, and in step S161, the value stored at the lower 8-bit address is stored. is stored in the A register.
In the next step S162, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the lower 8 bits of the interrupt counter value has changed. Specifically, the value of the lower 8 bits is subtracted from the A register value, and if the operation result is not "0" (zero flag = "0"), it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that there has been a change, the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that there has been no change, the process of step S162 is continued.

Example 3 in FIG. 103(C) is a flowchart showing countdown (R_CNT_DOWN). This process includes, for example, the process of subtracting the advantageous section clear counter in step S301 (game end check process) in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), and the timer value in step S455 (timer measurement) of FIG. 47 (third embodiment). This is used for processing to update the number of AT games during AT games, or for updating the number of AT games (not shown) during AT games.
In this process, the counter value is subtracted by "1" in step S171, and the process of this flowchart is ended.
Note that the three processes shown in FIG. 103 are examples of processes that are called multiple times in one game, and are not limited to these three processes, and may include many more processes. Then, a program that has a program capacity that can be stored within the above-mentioned address and that is called many times in one game is set to be called by the RST command.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing program code area designation addresses and their data values. Note that although this address will be referred to as a "program code area designation address" below, it may also be referred to as a "program code area setting address."
As shown in FIG. 96, in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, addresses "3FD3H" to "3FD8H" are set as program code area designation addresses.
The main CPU 55 determines that the program code stored within the address range specified in the program code area is normal when it is executed, and determines that the program code stored outside the address range specified in the program code area is normal. When the program code in the above is executed, it is determined that there is an abnormality (running outside the specified area). When the main CPU 55 determines that there is an abnormality (running outside the designated area), it generates a reset.
In other words, a reset is generated when a program code (instruction) stored outside the specified area is called (instruction fetched).

This is done for the following reasons.
The first reason is that there is a risk of fraudulent activity in which malicious program code is stored in an area other than the original program area, and the malicious program code is skipped from the original program area with a jump instruction and executed. This is because there is.
The second reason is that a runaway may occur when the voltage is unstable immediately after the power is turned on, or a runaway may occur due to heat, and instructions may be sent to an area other than the program area. Specifically, for example, when an instruction to jump from address A to address B is included, if the instruction is not executed accurately, instructions stored after address B may not be executed within the design time. In such a case, the power should be turned off once and then turned back on (rebooted).

FIG. 100 also illustrates the processing when the vehicle travels outside the designated area.
As shown in FIG. 100, when running outside the designated area is detected during execution of the user mode, a reset is generated. In this case, the main CPU 55 initializes the register and executes the user mode again via the security mode (executes the program from address "0000H").
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when a reset is generated by detecting running outside the designated area, the process may be executed from the user mode without going through the security mode after initializing the register.
Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 100, the presence or absence of a PROM mode request is determined after registers are initialized, but this is not the only option. It may also be possible not to judge the presence or absence of.
However, when a reset is generated by detecting running outside the designated area, the registers are always initialized.

FIG. 104(A) is a diagram showing addresses for specifying the end address of program code area 1. "Program code area 1" corresponds to the program area of the used area in FIG. Note that "program code area 2", which will be described later, corresponds to the program area of the area outside the used area in FIG. 96.
Here, as shown in FIG. 96, the address range of the program area of the used area is "0000H" to "11FEH". Therefore, in this embodiment, the start address "0000H" is not determined, but only the end address "11FEH" is determined. In this way, a storage area (2 bytes) for determining the start address "0000H" becomes unnecessary.
If only the end address is determined and the start address is not determined, the main CPU 55 will inevitably recognize the range from the start address to the end address of the built-in memory as program code area 1. In fact, since the program code area 1 (the program area of the used area) starts from "0000H", there is no problem even if the main CPU 55 recognizes it as described above.

The end address of the program code area 1 is stored in addresses "3FD3H" and "3FD4H" (2-byte area) of the program management area. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the lower byte is stored at address "3FD3H" and the upper byte is stored at address "3FD4H".
Therefore, "FEH" (11111110B) is stored in the address "3FD3H", and "11H" (00010001B) is stored in the address "3FD4H".

FIG. 104(B) is a diagram showing addresses for specifying the start address of program code area 2.
Addresses for specifying the start address of program code area 2 are set to "3FD5H" and "3FD6H". As shown in FIG. 96, the address range of the program area outside the used area is "2000H" to "245DH". Therefore, the start address of program code area 2 is "2000H".
Therefore, "00H" (000000000B) is stored in the address "3FD5H", and "20H" (00100000B) is stored in the address "3FD6H".

FIG. 104(C) is a diagram showing addresses for specifying the end address of program code area 2. Addresses for specifying the end address of program code area 2 are set to "3FD7H" and "3FD8H".
Then, "5DH" (01011101B) is stored in the address "3FD7H", and "24H" (00100100B) is stored in the address "3FD8H".

As described above, under the situation where the end address of program code area 1 and the start and end addresses of program code area 2 are stored in the program management area, the main CPU 55 stores the program code within these designated address ranges. When the program is being executed, it is determined to be normal, but when program code outside the specified address range is executed, it is determined to be abnormal.

Note that it is also possible not to specify the program code area. In this case, "0000H" is stored in all of the program code area 1 end address, program code area 2 start address, and program code area 2 end address.
For example, if you specify the address of only program code area 1 and do not specify the address of program code area 2, set the end address of program code area 1 to "11FEH" as shown in FIG. 104, and start the program code area 2. The address and end address may be set to "0000H".

Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) Although vector addresses are provided in the program area of the used area, it is also possible to provide vector addresses in the data area of the used area, for example. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "12H", after the power is turned on, a process is executed to store "12H" in the I register.
Further, vector addresses may be provided in the program area outside the used area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "20H", after the power is turned on, a process is executed to store "20H" in the I register.
Furthermore, vector addresses may be provided in the data area outside the used area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "24H", after the power is turned on, a process is executed to store "24H" in the I register.
In addition, when a vector address is provided in the data area of the used area, when a vector address is provided in the program area of the area outside the used area, and when a vector address is provided in the data area of the area outside the used area, the vector Simply reading the data value stored at the address will not result in a trip outside the designated area and will not cause a reset.

(2) The data value stored in the vector address, i.e., the top address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored, can be set arbitrarily. In the example of Fig. 99(c), it is set to "1134H", but it is not limited to this. In addition, the top address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored may be later than the vector address or earlier than the vector address.
(3) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, two address ranges are defined as the executable range (runnable area) of the program code. However, this is not limited to this, and only one address range may be defined.
Furthermore, when determining the executable range of program code in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM 54, in the above embodiment only the end address is determined and no starting address is determined, but this is not limited to this and both the starting address and the end address may be determined.

(4) In the above embodiment, the addresses storing the program called by the RST command are "0008H", "0010H", "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H", and "0040H", but the address is not limited to these eight addresses. However, it is preferable that the upper byte of the address where the program called by the RST instruction is stored is set to "00H".
By doing this, by providing a module that is called multiple times in one game near the start address (0000H), at the development stage, the module is designed first, and other modules are designed later ( (examination) becomes possible.

(5) The relationship between the address at which a program called by the RST instruction is stored and the vector address is as follows:
First, as shown in FIG. 101, a vector address may be placed before all addresses storing programs called by the RST instruction.
Secondly, as shown in FIG. 102, a vector address may be placed after all addresses that store programs called by the RST instruction.
Thirdly, a vector address may be placed (e.g., "0026H" and "0027H") between one address (e.g., "0020H") that stores a program called by the RST instruction and another address (e.g., "0028H") that stores a program called by the RST instruction.

In this case, if the vector address is placed within the program area of the used area (within the range of "0000H" to "00FFH"), there is no need to set the upper byte value of the vector address in the I register after power is turned on. In other words, by setting the I register value to "00H", the program capacity can be reduced.
Further, as shown in FIG. 99(B), the A3-A0 bit value in the lower 1 byte of the vector address value is "0100B" in this example. Therefore, at this point, the vector address value becomes "00000000/#####0100B"("#" is any value of "0" or "1").
Here, the above "###B" (vector address setting value) is "0000B" in the example of FIG. 99(A). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and "###B" may be set to "1000B (8H)" or "1111B (FH)", for example.
When "###B" is "1000B (8H)", the vector address value is "00000000/10000100B", and when "####B" is "1111B (FH)", the vector address value is "00000000/10000100B". The address value becomes "00000000/11110100B".

(6) The upper byte value of the vector address value is the I register value, which is "00H". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the upper byte of the vector address may be set to a value other than "00H", for example, "02H", although this partially overlaps with what has been described above. In this case, after turning on the gaming machine 10 and initializing the I register, a process of storing "02H" in the I register is executed.
In particular, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the used area in the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register, that is, the upper byte value of the vector address, may be in the range of "00H" to "11H".

However, each time the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the I register is initialized (becomes "00H"), so after the initialization, a process is executed to store, for example, "02H" in the I register again. . As described above, for example, a program code "LD I,02H" is provided to execute the process of storing "02H" in the I register.
On the other hand, if the value of the upper byte of the vector address is "00H" as in this embodiment, the I register value will be "00H", so the gaming machine 10 is powered on and the I register is initialized. After that, there is no need to store the specific value in the I register. In other words, there is no need to provide the program code "LD I,00H". Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced accordingly.

(7) The various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments and the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations. It is.

<Ninth embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to a gaming machine that includes biased winning combinations (expected number of medals obtained) that differ depending on the operation mode (pressing order and/or operation timing) of the stop switch 42.
A "biased combination" is one in which the winning combination differs depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, and has a unilaterally advantageous pressing order and another pressing order (unilaterally disadvantageous pressing order). However, in a game in which a winning combination is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a unilaterally advantageous pressing order, compared to the case where the stop switch 42 is operated in another pressing order, the This is a hand with a high expected value of the number of medals acquired (an expected value that does not take into account the expected value related to AT).
Furthermore, the order of pressing the stop switch 42 includes sequential pressing (left first stop) and irregular pressing (middle first stop or right first stop). "Jun" corresponds to an irregular push.

A biased role is composed of a plurality of types of small roles, and the winning of a biased role corresponds to the overlapping win of a plurality of types of small roles. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a one-sidedly advantageous pressing order when a biased role is won (when a plurality of types of small roles are won overlapping), the small role with the largest payout number (hereinafter referred to as "high-eye") can be won by the number priority control (see the first embodiment). On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than the one-sidedly advantageous pressing order when a biased role is won, the small role other than the small role with the largest payout number (hereinafter referred to as "low-eye") can be won by the number priority control (see the first embodiment). Note that when the number priority control is executed, the high-eye generally wins with "PB=1".
In contrast, when quantity priority control is performed,
a) When the low-ranked player wins with "PB=1",
b) There are cases where a low number wins with "PB ≠ 1" or where no small role wins (missing out on a winning role).

Furthermore, for the "biased role," the correct push orders are not evenly allocated to the six push orders, and when the biased role is won, operating the stop switch 42 with the irregular push orders described above is configured to be unilaterally advantageous. For this reason, when the biased role is won, there is a unilaterally advantageous push order (irregular push orders) and other push orders (unilaterally disadvantageous push orders (normal push orders)). Also, "biased" indicates that the advantageous push orders are biased toward the irregular push orders.
Specifically, in a game in which a biased role is won, the percentage of winning a high number when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in the normal order is set to "R1 (%)", and the percentage of winning a high number when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in the irregular order is set to "R2 (%)".
"R1 <R2"
It is configured so that:
In particular, in the ninth embodiment, R1 is set to 0(%).

FIG. 105(a) is a diagram showing the type of winning combination, winning probability, the number of coins paid out for each press order of the stop switch 42, etc. in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 105(b) is a diagram showing the ball payout performance of the biased winning combination. FIG. Similar to the first embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated, a winning lottery is performed by the winning lottery means 61, and the winning combination shown in FIG. 105 is configured to be won with the winning probability shown in the same figure. In addition, in FIG. 105, the special winning combination (bonus winning combination) is omitted.
In FIG. 105, the biased combinations correspond to biased Bell 1 to biased Bell 4, rare combination A, and rare combination B.
Here, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, as a so-called push order bell,
Role number "1": Small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1)
Role number "2": Small role A2 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 2)
Role number "3": Small role B1 condition device (right and left middle correct answer bell 1)
Role number "4": Small role B2 condition device (right and left middle correct answer bell 2)
Role number "5": Small role C1 condition device (center left/right correct answer bell 1)
Role number "6": Small role C2 condition device (center left/right correct answer bell 2)
Role number "7": Small role D1 condition device (center right left correct answer bell 1)
Role number "8": Small role D2 condition device (center right left correct answer bell 2)
Role number "9": Small role E1 condition device (right/left middle correct answer bell 1)
Role number "10": Small role E2 condition device (right/left middle correct answer bell 2)
Role number "11": Small role F1 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 1)
Role number "12": Small role F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2)
has been established.

As shown in FIG. 10, the winning probabilities of the winning numbers 1 to 12 are all set to be the same (set number "2500").
As a result, no matter what order the player presses the game in during the game, there will be no advantage/disadvantage in the expected value of the number of medals obtained based on the winning combination numbers "1" to "12".
In other words, the expected value of the number of medals obtained according to the push order bell is the same in the case where the game is completed by pressing sequentially and when the game is played by irregular presses.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, in the biased combination, there is no case where the pressing order is correct in the order of pressing (the case where the high number wins), and only irregular pressing is the correct pressing order.
In other words, when winning a biased combination, the correct press order is limited to irregular presses, so if the player completes the game by pressing the stop switch 42 in the normal order, When winning a biased combination, the higher number will not be awarded.

The hands that make up Biased Bell 1 to Biased Bell 4 are all 1-card, 2-card, and 7-card winnings. Then, when any one of the biased bells is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order of the irregular presses, the 7-card winning combination with the higher bell will be won with "PB=1" due to number priority control. . On the other hand, when any of the biased bells is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing which is the incorrect pressing order, the 1-card or 2-card winning combination with the lower bell is determined by number priority control. Win a prize with “PB=1”. In addition, when any one of the biased bells is won, if it is an irregular push but the order of the wrong push is incorrect, the 1-card winning combination with the lower bell is won with "PB=1" due to number priority control.
That is, in this example, no matter which order the stop switch 42 is pressed when winning a biased bell, there will be no loss of winnings.

To explain more specifically, for example, when the biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switches 42 are operated in the correct pressing order of the middle, left, and right, a 7-card winning combination is won with "PB=1". On the other hand, when the biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect release order of center right-left, right-left middle, or right-center left, a one-card winning combination will be won with "PB=1". ing.
On the other hand, when the biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order (left middle right or left right middle), the 1-card or 2-card winning is "PB=1". Win a prize. Whether a 1-card winning combination or a 2-card winning combination is won depends on the operating timing of the stop switch 42. This also applies to the winnings of Bias Bell 2 to Bias Bell 4.

Similarly, when biased bell 2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order of center, right, and left, "PB=1" will be awarded, and if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order of center, left, right, center, or right, center, "PB=1" will be awarded, and a 1-coin role will be awarded.
In addition, when biased bell 3 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order of right, left, and center, "PB=1" will be awarded, and if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order of center left/right, center right/left, or right/center left, "PB=1" will be awarded, and a 1-coin role will be awarded.
Furthermore, when biased bell 4 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order of right, center, left, a 7-coin role is won with "PB=1", and if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order of center left/right, center right/left, or right/left/center, a 1-coin role is won with "PB=1".

Every game, biased bells 1 to 4 have a total probability of 4/5 to win. Here, when you press in order when winning a biased bell, suppose that the 1-card role has a 50% probability of winning, and the 2-card role has a 50% probability of winning, and if you play by pressing in order every game, then , the expected number of medals earned based on the bias bell is
4/5 x 1/2 x 1 + 4/5 x 1/2 x 2 = 1.2 (sheets)
becomes.
On the other hand, if you use irregular presses every game, the expected number of medals earned based on the biased bell is
4/5 x 1/4 x 7 + 4/5 x 3/4 x 1 = 2.0 (sheets)
becomes.

Moreover, the rare role A and the rare role B are types of biased roles. Rare role A and rare role B are both roles including a 1-card role and a 12-card role.
As shown in FIG. 105, when the rare combination A or rare combination B is won, if the stop switch 42 is pressed in order, the pressing order is incorrect, and "PB=1" is a one-card combination (low ) will win the prize.
On the other hand, when the rare combination A or rare combination B is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press, the pressing order is correct, and a 12-card combination (high prize) is won with "PB=1".
The combined winning probability of rare roles A and B is "1/125", so in the case of first push, the expected number of medals earned based on rare roles A and B is:
1/125 x 1 = 0.008 (sheet)
becomes.
On the other hand, in the case of an irregular push, the expected number of medals earned based on rare role A and rare role B is:
1/125 x 12 = 0.096 (sheet)
becomes.
From the above, in a game when a biased combination is won, the expected value of the number of medals acquired in the game is one-sidedly advantageous if the irregular push is made, and one-sided disadvantageous if the sequential push is made (FIG. 105(b)).

The winnings other than the biased winnings include a common bell, a watermelon, and a replay.
The common bell does not have the concept of correct/incorrect pressing order, and no matter which pressing order the stop switch 42 is operated, a 6-card winning combination is won (PB=1).
In addition, the watermelon is a small prize that can be won regardless of the order in which the keys are pressed when it is won, but it is a prize that cannot be won. Therefore, in FIG. 105, "5 coins (when winning a prize)" or "0 coins (when winning a prize)" are displayed. However, depending on the symbol arrangement and the timing of operating the stop switch 42, there may be a difference in the ease of winning a prize, but we will not explain this point.
The common bell has a payout of 6 pieces and a winning probability of 1/88.
Furthermore, when the number of watermelons to be paid out is 5 (if no one is missed), the probability of winning is "1/200". For watermelons, assuming that winnings are 50% and losses are 50%, the expected value of the total number of medals won for common bells and watermelons is:
6 x 1/88 + 5 x 1/200 x 1/2 ≒ 0.081 (sheets)
It is.

From the above, the expected number of medals earned based on all roles when playing games in order is:
1.2+0.008+0.081=1.289 (sheets)
becomes.
On the other hand, the expected number of medals earned based on all roles when playing the game with irregular presses is:
2.0+0.096+0.081=2.177 (sheets)
becomes.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of medals acquired is larger when pressing irregularly than when pressing sequentially.
Further, in the ninth embodiment, the number of bets (also referred to as "regular number") is "3 (bets)." For this reason, even if the game is played by irregular pressing every game, the expected value of the number of medals acquired per game will not become positive.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, like the other embodiments described above, there is a normal section (non-advantageous section) and an advantageous section. Further advantageous sections include non-AT and AT. Non-ATs include non-CZs and CZs (in which the AT winning expectation is higher than non-CZs).
In the normal section, the AT lottery (in the following description of the ninth embodiment, it will be referred to as the AT lottery including the CZ lottery) is not executed. On the other hand, during an advantageous section and non-AT, an AT lottery is executed. The AT lottery can be executed when rare combination A and rare combination B (hereinafter, rare combination A and rare combination B are collectively referred to simply as "rare combination") are won.
Note that the AT lottery may be executed also when a common bell or a watermelon is won, but in the ninth embodiment, for the sake of simplifying the explanation, the AT lottery can be executed only when a rare combination is won.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in the normal order when a rare combination is won, the winning expectation of the AT (also called the "winning probability", "winning ratio", "winning expectation value", etc.) is "P1", and when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in the irregular order when a rare combination is won, the winning expectation of the AT is "P2".
P1>P2
For this reason, since it is not known when a rare role will be won during play, in order to increase the probability of winning the AT in the advantageous zone and non-AT, it is advantageous for the player to always play the game by pushing in order (FIG. 105(b)).
In addition, the winning expectation rate "P2" of the AT may be a value exceeding "0", or may be "0". In the ninth embodiment, "P2=0" is set.

The AT lottery is conducted based on the start switch 41 being operated and a rare role being won (step S283 in Figure 115 described later), so the stop switch 42 has not yet been operated at the time the AT lottery is executed.
Therefore, for example, when a rare role is won, the AT lottery is held at the timing of the rare role win (when the start switch 41 is operated), and if the AT is won and the current game was an irregular press, the AT win is invalidated (the AT win is discarded) when the current game is completely stopped (which may be at the end of the current game or the start of the next game).

As described above, if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular presses when winning a biased combination, the expected value of the number of medals acquired in that game will be higher than when the stop switch 42 is operated by sequential presses.
However, as mentioned above, when winning a biased combination in an advantageous section and non-AT, when the stop switch 42 is pressed sequentially, the right to AT may be granted. When operated, AT rights are not granted.
For this reason, the total ball output performance (the entire game) including the balls output at AT is higher in the sequential push than in the irregular push (FIG. 105(b)).
For this reason, in the ninth embodiment, the order of pressing (first stop on the left) is referred to as the "recommended order of pressing", and the order of irregular pressing (first stop in the middle or first stop on the right) is referred to as "not recommended". 105(b)).
"Recommended" means that if the game is played in the advantageous section and non-AT in the pressing order, the expected value of the total number of medals acquired (for the entire game) will be higher than in other pressing orders.

However, pushing in order is only a "recommendation" and not a "command" or the like. In other words, the irregular push is "not recommended" and not "prohibited" or the like.
In the ninth embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended press order in an advantageous section and a non-AT, a recommended image (which may also be referred to as a "predetermined image" or a "specific image") is displayed.
Here, the "recommended image" is an image that informs the player that the forward pressing is the recommended pressing order, in other words, that the forward pressing is the pressing order that is advantageous to the player. Note that the recommended image display is a display that informs the player of the recommended pressing order, and is different from a warning display. When the stop switch 42 is operated with an irregular press, no penalty will be imposed on the next game or later, and the player will not be disadvantaged. However, as described above, the AT winning expectation level in the game is different between a game in which the stop switch 42 is operated by sequential pressing and a game in which the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing.
Therefore, by displaying a recommended image, the purpose is to inform the player that if the stop switch 42 is operated with an irregular press, the expected value of the total number of medals acquired (for the entire game) will decrease. Here, "the expected value of the total number of medals acquired for the entire game decreases" means, for example, that the expected value of AT winnings decreases, or that the expected value of the number of medals acquired during AT when winning AT decreases. , this corresponds to an increase in the number of ceiling games until AT winning.
In addition, "recommended images" include, for example, "Pushing left (pushing in order) is recommended", "Pushing left (pushing in order) is advantageous", "Pressing left (pushing in order) is more likely to win AT" Examples of images include: However, the recommended images include various images other than those mentioned above.

In a game where the stop switch 42 is pressed in sequence, the recommended image is not displayed. On the other hand, in a game where the stop switch 42 is irregularly pressed in an advantageous section and non-AT, the recommended image is displayed at the time of the first stop. Further, even if the recommended image is displayed, the display ends at least at the start of the next game (when the start switch 41 is operated). However, it is also possible to end the display of the recommended image when the current game is completely stopped or when a bet operation is made for the next game. In this case, it is preferable to perform a process of matching the internal control state and the effect image at the timing when the recommended image display ends. With this configuration, the period for which the recommended images are displayed is shortened, which may cause players to feel troubled or to avoid situations where other players see the recommended images and play on a machine in a non-recommended push order. It is possible to prevent the later performance from decreasing due to knowing that this is the case.
Further, a sound for notifying the recommended pressing order may be output together with the recommended image or in place of the recommended image. Below, examples of appropriate and inappropriate examples of notification of recommended press order including display of recommended images will be given.
(1) Examples of inappropriate press order notifications a) Displaying "Irregular presses prohibited" is inappropriate as notification of recommended press order. This is because the word "prohibited" falls under the expression of a warning. In the gaming machine 10, it is possible to inform the player of the recommended order of pressing the stop switches 42, but since it is up to the player to decide how to press the stop switches 42, it is possible to inform the player of the recommended order of pressing the stop switches 42. This is because it is inappropriate to prohibit it.

b) Displaying "DANGER" is inappropriate as a notification of the recommended pressing order. This is because, like the above-mentioned "prohibition," it falls under the expression of a warning.
c) Displaying a black and yellow striped pattern, displaying a prohibition mark (a red straight line diagonally downward to the right inside a red circle), displaying an "x", etc. are in the recommended pressing order. It is inappropriate as a notification. This is because these images are recognized as warnings, dangers, prohibitions, etc. according to social conventions.
d) The output of a sound similar to a buzzer or alarm is inappropriate as a notification of the recommended pressing order. This is because, according to conventional wisdom, it is recognized as a warning sound or a forbidden sound. However, it is of course possible to output a sound such as a buzzer or an alarm when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10 such as a medal selector error or a hopper error.

(2) Appropriate example of notification of recommended press order a) Displaying “Left press (press in order) is recommended” as shown above is optimal for the player (maximizes profit for the player) Since the game method (pressing order) is notified, it is appropriate to notify the recommended pressing order.
b) Outputting a stop sound of the reels 31 that is different from the normal one is appropriate as a notification of the recommended pressing order. If the sound is generally used as a performance of the gaming machine 10, it does not fall under the warning sound.
c) Turning off the backlight of the reels 31 after all the reels have stopped is appropriate as a notification of the recommended pressing order. This is because, similarly to the above, this is a level that is generally used as an effect on the gaming machine 10.

d) Darkening the LCD screen is appropriate as a notification of the recommended pressing order. This is due to the same reason as c) above. Note that the timing of the darkening may be at the time of the first stop, at the time of the second stop, at the time of full stop, or after the full stop.
e) Not outputting the stop sound of the reels 31 is appropriate as a notification of the recommended pressing order. This is due to the same reason as c) above. Note that the stop sound may not be output only during the first stop, the stop sound may not be output during the first stop and the second stop, or the stop sound may not be output at all. Furthermore, it is also appropriate to not output the winning sound of the combination as a notification of the recommended pressing order.

f) When a continuous performance spanning multiple games is being output, it is appropriate to interrupt the progress of the continuous performance when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended pressing order as a notification of a recommended pressing order. This is due to the same reason as c) above.
g) In the case where the remaining number of games is displayed during the warning, it is appropriate to not display a subtraction of the remaining number of games as a notification of the recommended pressing order. In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended pressing order during the sign, the subtraction process of the remaining number of games during the sign is not executed in terms of internal control. This is because even if this is done, the information is merely informed of the facts and does not fall under the category of a warning or the like.

h) Displaying an image and/or outputting a sound saying "You are pressing irregularly" is appropriate as a notification of the recommended pressing order. This is because, as in g) above, this is merely a notification of a fact and does not fall under the category of a warning.
i) Displaying an image that says, "If you press in the correct order, the AT performance will increase and the base will go down. If you press irregularly, the AT performance will decrease and the base will go up." is appropriate as a notification of the recommended pressing order. This is for the same reason as g) above.
j) Display of the number of games played since the specified conditions (for example, the transition to an advantageous section or the start of a new cycle related to lottery such as AT) (for example, the number of games played after the transition to an advantageous section, etc.) The number of games played or the remaining number of games until the end of the cycle related to the lottery such as AT), the predetermined game (for example, one game in the advantageous section or one cycle related to the lottery such as AT) Based on the fact that an operation was performed in a non-recommended push order in a game (game), it is appropriate to not display an addition or a subtraction display regarding the number of games played, as a notification of a recommended push order.
In addition, after moving to the advantageous section, if the prescribed number of games or the prescribed number of cycles are exhausted but the game is not controlled to an advantageous gaming state such as AT, the game will be forcibly controlled to an advantageous gaming state such as AT. A relief function (also referred to as a "ceiling") is known.
When the above-mentioned predetermined game is operated in a non-recommended press order, internal control does not perform addition processing (in the case of an increment counter) or subtraction processing (in the case of a decrement counter) of the number of games related to the rescue function. , a subtraction process is executed for the advantageous section clear counter. The reason is the same as g) above.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (Example 1) when the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order (pressing order) during an advantageous section and non-AT. In the figure, the time series is in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d).
In this example, it is assumed that the current stage is displayed on the image display device 23 during the advantageous section and non-AT. The stage has a normal stage and a high probability stage, and is set so that when the stage is high probability, the AT winning expectation level is higher than when it is normal. Furthermore, when a rare combination is won in a situation where the stage is normal, a lottery will be held to determine whether the stage should be promoted from normal to high. The following example shows an example when the stage is promoted from normal to high accuracy.
In (a) of the figure, before the start of the game, a pre-game start effect is displayed on the image display device 23. Also, the stage at this point is normal.
Then, as shown in (b) in the figure, when the start switch 41 is operated and the rare combination is won, a stage promotion suggestion performance is started.

Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the recommended pressing order is established at this point, so the recommended image is not displayed and the left (first) A stage promotion suggestion performance is developed as a performance when the stop switch 42 is operated. In addition, this example shows an example in which a stage promotion suggestion effect develops when the stop switch 42 is operated for the first time. ), it goes without saying that the performance does not have to change.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, when all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, an effect indicating that the stage promotion was successful is output as an effect after all the reels 31 are stopped. Then, the stage changes from the usual one with high accuracy.
As described above, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order, the recommended images are not displayed.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the flow of the effect (example 1) when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended press order (irregular press) in the example of FIG. 106. In this example, by winning the rare role, the player won a lottery to promote the stage from normal to high accuracy, but because the pressing order was not recommended, the winning was invalidated and the stage did not advance to high accuracy. . In the figure, the time series is in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d)→(e)→(f) (the same applies to FIGS. 108 to 111 below).
In FIG. 107, (a) and (b) are the same as FIGS. 106(a) and (b). Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the first stop is in the non-recommended pressing order, the main control board 50 transmits the command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 determines that the first stop is a non-recommended press order based on the received command, it displays a recommended image. This recommended image is an image that covers almost the entire image display area of the image display device 23, and the stage promotion suggestion effect up to that point is hidden by the recommended image and becomes invisible.

Note that after the recommended image is displayed, the sound output from the speaker 22 may be the sound corresponding to the previous effect image (that is, the same sound as in the case of FIG. 106), or the sound corresponding to the previous effect image. It is also possible to interrupt the process and output the audio for the recommended image. As the sound for the recommended image, for example, a sound such as "Press left is recommended" may be output once or repeatedly multiple times. Furthermore, while outputting the sound corresponding to the previous performance image, a sound corresponding to the recommended image such as "Push left is recommended" may be outputted over the sound.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, even if all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the recommended image is maintained.
Further, as shown in (e) in the figure, the display of the recommended image is maintained even when a bet operation is performed. Further, as shown in (f) in the figure, when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the recommended image ends at that timing, and the display returns to the image before the recommended image was displayed.
Note that the example in FIG. 107 is an example in which the start switch 41 is operated within 3 seconds from the complete stop in (d) in the figure. This is because, as will be described later, when a recommended image is displayed, a demonstration display will be executed after 3 seconds have elapsed from the time of full stop. Regarding this point, the same applies to FIGS. 109 and 111.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (Example 2) when the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order (pressing order) during an advantageous section and non-AT.
In this example, character images are displayed on the image display device 23 (corresponding to characters A, B, and C in (a) in the figure), and when a rare combination is won, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to acquire a new character. Execute. Then, when the number of characters reaches a predetermined number (for example, "5"), the game shifts to CZ or gives preferential treatment to AT lottery. In the following example, a new character D is acquired by winning a rare combination.
(a) in the figure shows the situation before the start of the game. In this situation, a pre-game presentation is being output, and characters A, B, and C are displayed as images.
Next, the process advances to (b) in the figure, and it is assumed that the start switch 41 is played and the rare combination is won. As a result, the character acquisition performance is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 1C, when the first stop operation is performed in the recommended push order, the recommended push order is confirmed at this point, so the recommended image is not displayed, and the character acquisition effect develops as the effect at the first stop. Note that, although this example shows an example in which the character acquisition effect develops when the first stop switch 42 is operated, it goes without saying that the effect does not have to change between the start of the game and the first stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 1D, when all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 stop, an effect in which character D is newly acquired (successful acquisition effect) is output as the effect after all the reels 31 stop. Then, in addition to the characters A, B, and C that have been acquired up until now, the newly acquired character D is displayed.
Furthermore, when a bet operation is performed, the display shifts to a pre-game performance, as shown in FIG. 1(e). Next, the display advances to FIG. 1(f), and when the start switch 41 is operated, a game start performance for the game is output.
In this way, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the recommended image is not displayed. Furthermore, the newly acquired character D is displayed as is in the next game.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the flow of effect (Example 2) when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended pressing order (irregular pressing) in the example of FIG. 108. In this example, as in Example 1 above, the character acquisition lottery was won by winning the rare combination, but since the pressing order was not recommended, the winning was invalidated and the number of characters was not increased.
In FIG. 109, (a) and (b) are the same as FIGS. 108(a) and (b). Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the first stop is operated in the non-recommended press order, the recommended image is displayed and the previous effects are hidden.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, even if all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the recommended image is maintained.
Further, as shown in (e) in the figure, the display of the recommended image is maintained even when a bet operation is performed. Further, as shown in (f) in the figure, when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the recommended image ends at that timing, and the image returns to the image before winning the rare combination (the image in which no character has been acquired).

FIGS. 110 and 111 are diagrams illustrating the state of the (image) layer when the recommended image is displayed. FIG. 111 is a diagram following FIG. 110.
The examples in FIGS. 110 and 111 correspond to example 1 in FIG. 107.
Note that in FIGS. 110 and 111, both the front layer and the rear layer are not limited to one layer, but are actually composed of a plurality of layers.
In this example, the recommended image is output using the front layer, and the normal effect image is output using the rear layer.

In the figure, the front layer is transparent before the game starts in (a) and when the start switch is operated in (b). Therefore, the player can only see the performance image on the rear layer.
Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop being the non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image is displayed using the front layer. Furthermore, the recommended image of the front layer makes the rear layer invisible to the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7(c), even when the recommended image is displayed on the front layer, the performance on the rear layer is not stopped and is output (displayed) as is. The image of the rear layer in FIG. 106(c) corresponds to the effect image in FIG. 106(c).

Next, even at the time of complete stop (d) in FIG. 111, the recommended image of the front layer is maintained as it is. In addition, in the rear layer at this time, the presentation in the recommended pressing order is progressing, and the stage promotion success presentation and the state in which the stage has moved with high accuracy are output. This image corresponds to FIG. 106(d). However, since the rear layer is not visible to the player while the recommended image is being displayed, the stage promotion success effect is not visible to the player.
Next, the process advances to (e) in the figure, and even if a bet operation is performed, the display of the recommended image is maintained. Also, the rear layer at this time advances to the effect image at the time of bet operation. Also, at this point, the high accuracy status after promotion to the stage is displayed.

Next, proceed to (f) in the figure, and when the start switch 41 is operated (when the game starts), at this point, the internal control state (the normal stage is maintained because the operation was performed in a non-recommended push order) and the production image A process is executed to match the . This returns the stage to normal. Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the recommended image ends and the front layer becomes transparent. As a result, the player can view the image display contents of the rear layer at this point.
By controlling the image display as described above, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended order, the recommended image can be displayed on the front layer without stopping the image display in the recommended order. , program processing can be simplified. In addition, during periods when the internal control state and the production image do not match, the recommended image is displayed on the front layer and the production image on the rear layer becomes invisible to the player. There is no possibility that the person will misidentify the information.
Note that instead of returning the image when the start switch 41 is operated, the image may be returned when the bet is operated (timing shown in FIG. 111(e)). Specifically, at the time of a bet operation, at this point, a process is executed to match the internal control state (the normal stage is maintained because the operation was performed in a non-recommended press order) and the performance image. This returns the stage to normal. On the other hand, when a bet operation is made, the display of the recommended image on the front layer ends, so the player can see the image display content on the rear layer at this point.
Further, in the above example, a front layer is provided in advance, and the front layer is made transparent during a period when a recommended image is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front layer may be arranged such that there is no front layer during the period when the recommended image is not displayed, and the front layer is arranged only during the period when the recommended image is displayed.

Next, the relationship between recommended images, gaming status, gaming period, and number of bets will be explained.
1. Relationship between Recommended Images and Gaming Status In the ninth embodiment, in the non-special gaming status, a special winning combination (bonus winning combination) is drawn. When a special winning combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination is stopped and displayed, a transition is made to a special game (a special game state is entered).
The ninth embodiment has 1BB-A and 1BB-B as special winnings, similar to the first embodiment (see FIG. 5).
During 1BB-A operation and 1BB-B operation, RB is in continuous operation (FIG. 9). During the continuous RB operation, as shown in FIG. 8, the winning number "17" is won every game, and the winning ALL condition device is activated. In a game where the winning ALL condition device is activated, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed (there is no advantage/disadvantage depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed), there are 10 winning combinations (minor winnings 01 to 06; see FIG. 4). The reels 31 are controlled to stop so as to win a prize.
Further, while 1BB-A is in operation and 1BB-B is in operation, the AT lottery is controlled not to be executed.
From the above, there is no recommended pressing order in the game when 1BB-A is operating and 1BB-B is operating. Therefore, in a game when 1BB-A is in operation and 1BB-B is in operation, the recommended image is not displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press. In a game while 1BB-A is in operation or 1BB-B is in operation, the player can play the game in any desired pressing order. Note that the game during 1BB-A operation and 1BB-B operation (RB continuous operation) is configured so that the expected value of the number of medals obtained is the same regardless of the order in which the buttons are pressed.

Further, during AT, the recommended image is not displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press. During AT, in principle, when a biased combination is won, the correct pressing order is announced, and the player follows the correct pressing order, so irregular pressing is performed in the game. Of course, the recommended image is not displayed in this case.
Further, during AT, even if the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press in a game other than a game in which a winning combination is won, for example, a game in which a winning combination is not won, the recommended image is not displayed.

2. Relationship between Recommended Images and Game Sections In the ninth embodiment, like the other embodiments described above, there are non-advantageous sections (normal sections) and advantageous sections.
In the advantageous section, the AT lottery can be executed, but in the non-advantageous section, the AT lottery is not executed. Therefore, in the non-advantageous section, there is no recommended pressing order that would be advantageous in the AT lottery. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is irregularly pressed during the non-advantageous section, the recommended image will not be displayed.
From this, if the recommended image is not displayed even if you press an irregular button in the normal state (special gaming state or non-AT state), the player will be informed that the current game is in a non-advantageous period and that the AT lottery will be executed. It is now possible to suggest that this is not the case.
Although a detailed explanation will be omitted in the ninth embodiment, during the non-advantageous section (normal section), a lottery to move to the advantageous section is executed, and for example, except when the result of the internal lottery is non-winning. It is set up so that you can win a lottery to move to an advantageous section. For this reason, for example, even if the difference in the number of coins exceeds 2,400 in an advantageous section and the advantageous section shifts to a non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is usually about one to several games. Therefore, even if the player knows that it is a non-advantageous section (confirms that the advantageous section display LED 78 is off) and makes an irregular press, the expected increase in medals is small and can be ignored. That's about it.
Further, contrary to the above, a recommended image may be displayed when the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press even in a non-advantageous section. With this configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section based on whether or not the recommended image is displayed at the time of an irregular press. Furthermore, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even if it is an advantageous section, or if a lamp (section indicator) indicating that the section is advantageous is not provided, the effect can be more effectively exhibited. .

3. Relationship between the recommended image and the number of bets (specified number) In the ninth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment (see FIGS. 4 and 5), the game is played with either the number of bets "2" or the number of bets "3". is possible.
The bet number "3" is the bet number advantageous to the player. In other words, the number of bets "3" is the recommended number of bets.
Let the AT winning expectation level (winning ratio, winning probability) when playing a game with a bet number of ``3'' be ``P1'', and the AT winning expectation level when playing a game with a bet number of ``2'' as ``P2''. When I did,
P1>P2
It is.
In particular, P1>P2×1.5
It is.
Therefore, even if the game is played with a bet number of "2", the AT winning expectation level will not be more advantageous than when the game is played with a bet number of "3".
In particular, in the ninth embodiment, when a game is played with the number of bets "2", the AT lottery is not executed regardless of the result of the internal lottery (in the program processing, the AT lottery process is not passed through). There is. That is, "P2=0".

Furthermore, the probability of winning each role when playing the game with the number of bets ``2'' is 2/3 or less compared to the winning probability of each role when playing the game with the number of bets ``3''. Set. As a result, even if the game is played with the number of bets "2", the expected value of the number of medals won will not exceed the number of bets.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when the bet number is "2", the AT lottery is not executed regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. Even if the switch 42 is operated, the recommended image is not displayed. This is because if the recommended image is displayed even though the AT lottery is not executed, there is a risk that the player will be confused. In addition, if the recommended image is not displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregularly pressing the stop switch 42 even though it is in an advantageous zone and non-AT, the player is informed that the number of bets for the game is "2". It can make you realize things.

Next, demonstration image display (hereinafter simply referred to as "demonstration display") will be explained.
After all stops (or after the end of the payout process if there is a medal payout process), if no operation to advance the game (bet operation) is performed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the display on the image display device 23 is There is a case where the performance display at the end of the game shifts to a demonstration display (examples in which the display does not shift to the demo display will be described later). The demo display is, for example, a promotional video that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 10.
In the ninth embodiment, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order and when the stop switches 42 are operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the time after the reels 31 have completely stopped until the transition to the demonstration display is The times are set differently.
Specifically, the stop switches 42 are operated in a non-recommended pressing order, and the reels 31 are completely stopped or at a certain timing after the complete stop (at the start of payout, at the end of payout, for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) from the full stop). The time from when the reels 31 are completely stopped to when the reel 31 moves to the demo display is defined as "t1", and the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order until the reel 31 is completely stopped or a certain timing after the reel 31 is completely stopped until the demo display is switched to the demo display. When the time of is set as "t2",
t1<t2
is set to .

That is, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the non-recommended order of presses, the transition to the demonstration display occurs sooner than when the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended order of presses.
The reason for this setting is to shift from displaying the recommended image to demonstration display as early as possible, thereby making it as difficult as possible to notice that the stop switches 42 have been operated in the non-recommended pressing order. When a player selects a game machine on which to play, if the recommended image is displayed, it can be seen that the stop switch 42 has been operated in the non-recommended press order, so some kind of penalty has occurred. This is because there is a risk that the player may mistakenly believe that the player is playing the game at the game machine and avoid playing the game at the game machine.
As mentioned above, in a game where the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended press order, even if you win a role that is eligible for the AT lottery, it will not be an AT win (or even if you win an AT, it will be invalid). ), and no penalty will occur after the next game in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order. However, in the No. 5 machine (conventional gaming machine), if an irregular push was performed, the penalty (such as not holding an AT lottery between predetermined games, etc.) may continue even after the next game, so it is the same as in the case of the No. 5 machine. It is undesirable for recommended images to continue to be displayed for longer than necessary, as this may lead to confusion as to whether a penalty has occurred.

Further, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order and the demo display is entered, the demo display is canceled by a bet operation (medal insertion operation) and the display returns to the normal display (game standby performance display).
On the other hand, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended pressing order and the demo display is entered, the demo display will not be canceled by a bet operation (medal insertion operation) and the demo display will continue. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the game is started, the display returns to the normal display (game standby effect display).
In addition, after the recommended image is displayed, when the time "t2" has elapsed since the full stop and the display is shifted to the demo display, the layer for the demo display is placed even before the layer that displays the recommended image. . As a result, the display of the recommended image is not visible to the player during the demonstration display.
Even if a bet operation is performed, the display of the recommended image and the demonstration display are maintained. Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, both the recommended image display and the demo display are erased, and a normal display layer located further behind the recommended image display is displayed.
Note that the examples in FIGS. 107, 109, and 111 show examples in which the recommended image display returns to the normal display without shifting to the demo display. In other words, this is an example in which the start switch 41 is operated after the complete stop and before time "t2" has elapsed.

Next, the transition to demo display will be explained using a time chart.
Figure 112 shows the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu (screen) display when the bet operation and start switch (abbreviated as "Start" in Figures 112 to 114) are operated after the demonstration is displayed. This is a time chart showing the time when there is no replay winning. (a) in the figure is an example when the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order, and (b) in the figure is an example when the stop switches 42 are operated in the non-recommended pressing order.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, a push button is connected to the sub-control board 80. The push button is also called a production button, chance button, operation button, decision button, sub button, menu button, etc.
In addition, a lamp (push button lamp) is provided inside the push button, which lights up when the push button is valid and turns off when the push button is invalid, so that the player can visually check whether the button is turned on or off. There is. Thereby, the player can determine whether or not the push button is valid by checking whether the push button lamp is lit or not.
The first use of the push button is to display an effect that prompts the user to operate the push button, and to develop the effect when the operation of the push button is detected.
A second method is to display a menu by operating the player while waiting for a game. In addition, in the menu, it is possible to display, for example, the issuance of a two-dimensional code for so-called MySlot, the game flow, the payout table, etc. When the push button lamp is on, the menu can be displayed; when the push button lamp is off, the menu cannot be displayed.

In FIG. 112(a), it is assumed that the normal performance is displayed at the time of the first bet operation.
Furthermore, during a predetermined period during which the demonstration display is not being executed during the normal performance (for example, from the time of bet operation until 5 seconds have elapsed after all stops), it is not possible to shift to the menu. Therefore, the push button lamp is off.
The above state is maintained until 5 seconds have passed after the game is started (start switch 41 is operated), all stop switches 42 are operated, and all reels 31 are stopped. Note that this "5 seconds" is just an example, and various settings can be made, such as "3 seconds" and "10 seconds".

Further, although only "normal performance" is displayed from the start of the game to the end of the game, the content of the performance changes as the game progresses.
When 5 seconds have elapsed after a complete stop, the push button lamp lights up. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the menu can be displayed (transition to the menu is possible). When the push button is operated while the push button lamp is lit, the menu can be displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the push button is not operated (the menu is not displayed).

Further, when it is determined that 60 seconds have elapsed since the reels 31 came to a complete stop, the image display is switched from the normal performance display to the demonstration display. Note that this "60 seconds" is an example, and various settings such as "20 seconds" and "30 seconds" can be made. However, in general, the demonstration display occurs after the push button lamp is turned on.
Here, in FIG. 112(a), the demonstration display is executed on the condition that no bet is placed. Therefore, it is assumed that no winnings have been made in the replay in the game (no automatic bets have been made), and no medals have been inserted.
When a bet operation is performed (or a medal is inserted) while the demo display is being executed, the demo display is ended and the normal performance is started. Additionally, with the transition to normal performance, menu display will no longer be possible and the push button lamp will also turn off.

Unlike FIG. 112(a), FIG. 112(b) is an example in which the stop switches 42 are operated in a non-recommended pressing order.
In FIG. 112(b), when the middle stop switch 42 is operated as the first stop and the order of pressing becomes non-recommended, the image display is switched from the normal effect display to the recommended image display at that point. As described above, the recommended image display layer is placed before the normal effect display layer.
Then, when three seconds have elapsed since the complete stop, the recommended image display is switched to the demonstration display. Note that "3 seconds" is an example, and may be "5 seconds" or the like. As described above, in the case of the recommended push order, the display is switched to the demonstration display 60 seconds after the full stop, but in the non-recommended push order, the display is switched to the demonstration display 3 seconds after the full stop. With this, it is possible to quickly switch to the demo display after all stops in the non-recommended press order, so if a player finishes the game with the relevant game, when another player sees this game machine. There is a high possibility that it has already been displayed as a demo. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the stop switches 42 were operated in the non-recommended pressing order in the previous player's last game.

In addition, during the recommended push order, the demo display transitioned to the normal performance display depending on the bet operation. On the other hand, in the non-recommended press order, even if a bet operation (medal insertion operation) is performed, the demo display does not shift to the normal effect display (and the recommended image display which is a layer behind the demo display). Therefore, for example, even if another player inserts medals into this game machine after finishing a game with a non-recommended push order, the normal effect display (and the recommended image display, which is a layer behind the demo display) will not be displayed. will not migrate.
Then, when a bet operation is performed and the start switch 41 is operated (when the game starts), the demo display (and the recommended image display which is a layer after it) ends, and the normal performance state is reached. to move to.

Furthermore, when a small winning combination is achieved, the winning number is displayed on the winning number display LED 78 (Figure 1). This winning number display is cleared, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the payout process, or when the demo display begins (60 seconds after the full stop). However, for example, when a biased bell is achieved, the stop switch 42 is operated using a non-recommended pressing sequence, and a 7-coin winning combination is achieved, the winning number display LED 78 displays "07." Similarly, when a rare combination is achieved, the stop switch 42 is operated using a non-recommended pressing sequence, and a 12-coin winning combination is achieved, the winning number display LED 78 displays "12."

However, if that player ends the game after winning 7 or 12 coins, the next player may see "07" or "12" displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 of the gaming machine. may be discovered. As a result, there is a possibility that the next player will avoid playing the game at that gaming machine.
Therefore, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the non-recommended pressing order, a 7-card winning combination or a 12-card winning combination is won, and the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order. It is preferable to clear the number of acquisitions displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 earlier than the time. For example, in FIG. 112(b), the display on the acquired number display LED 78 may be cleared at the timing of transitioning to the demo display 3 seconds after the complete stop.
Note that when the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 may be cleared when a predetermined time has elapsed after all stops. Alternatively, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order, the display of the winning number display LED 78 may be maintained until the bet operation for the next game, and the display of the winning number display LED 78 may be cleared by the bet operation.

FIG. 113 is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display at the time of replay winning (at the time of automatic bet). (a) in the figure is an example where the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order, and (b) in the figure is an example where the stop switches 42 are operated in the non-recommended pressing order.
In FIG. 113(a), if an automatic bet is made based on a winning replay after the full stop, the state will be the same as in FIG. 112(a), so the image display will continue to display the normal effect, and the full stop The demo display will not be executed even after 60 seconds have passed. As a result, the push button lamp will not light up and the menu will not be displayed.
On the other hand, in FIG. 113(b), when the stop switches 42 are operated in the non-recommended pressing order at the first stop, the recommended image is displayed at that point, as in FIG. 112(b).
Furthermore, when 3 seconds have passed after the complete stop, the recommended image display shifts to the demonstration display. Therefore, in this respect, replay winning is different from recommended pressing order in which no demo display is performed.
This demonstration display continues while automatic bets are placed, and when the start switch 41 is operated (the game is started), the demo display shifts to the normal performance display.

FIG. 114 is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when the bet operation (including the medal insertion operation) is performed within 3 seconds after the full stop and the start operation is performed 60 seconds after the full stop. It is. (a) in the figure is an example where the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order, and (b) in the figure is an example where the stop switches 42 are operated in the non-recommended pressing order.
In FIG. 114(a), if a bet operation is performed before 3 seconds have elapsed after the full stop, the same post-bet state as in FIG. Even after 60 seconds have elapsed, the display does not shift to the demo display. As a result, the push button lamp will not light up and the menu will not be displayed.

On the other hand, in Figure 114 (b), if the first stop is operated in a non-recommended push order, the recommended image is displayed at that point, as in Figure 112 (b).
Furthermore, even if a bet operation is performed within 3 seconds after a total power outage, the recommended image display is maintained. Next, when 3 seconds have passed after a total power outage, the recommended image display is switched to a demo display. In other words, even if a bet operation is performed, the recommended image display is limited to the time when 3 seconds have passed after a total power outage, and when 3 seconds have passed after a total power outage, the recommended image display is switched to a demo display.
As explained above, when using the recommended pressing order, either the display will switch to a demo display 60 seconds after the full stop (Figure 112 (a)), or the normal display will remain even after 60 seconds have passed since the full stop (Figure 113 (a) or Figure 114 (a)).
In contrast, when a non-recommended button press sequence is used, the recommended image will be displayed at the first stop, and when three seconds have passed since the full stop, the display will switch to a demo display.

As mentioned above, FIGS. 112(b), 113(b), and 114(b) are all limited to advantageous sections and non-AT, and are limited to non-advantageous sections (normal sections), AT, and special During the gaming state, the recommended image will not be displayed even if the button is pressed irregularly. Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press during the non-advantageous section (normal section), during AT, or during the special game state, Fig. 112 (a), Fig. 113 (a), and Fig. 114 ( It is the same as a).
In addition, as shown in Figure 112(a), in the recommended press order (when replay does not win), a demonstration display is performed 60 seconds after all stops. In some cases, the demo display may not be performed even if the Therefore, the example of FIG. 112(a) does not mean that a demonstration display is always performed 60 seconds after a complete stop.
Furthermore, even if the demo display is not displayed (the menu is not displayed) when the buttons are operated in the recommended order of presses, such as during continuous production or CZ, etc., if the operations are performed in the non-recommended order of presses. will perform a demonstration display 3 seconds after the machine has stopped completely.
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 112(b), 113(b), and 114(b), in this embodiment, the start operation ends the demonstration display and the recommended image display and returns to the normal effect display. This is because the effect display contents are switched at the time of the start operation (a new effect command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80). On the other hand, in the case where the content of the effect display is configured to be switched by a bet operation, the normal effect display may be returned to by the bet operation. In this case, a new production command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 during the bet operation.
When adopting any of the above, the demonstration display and the recommended image display are ended when or after the effect display contents match the internal control state, and the difference between the effect display contents visible to the player and the internal control state is ensured. prevent this from occurring.

Next, the transmission of the push order instruction number and the transmission of the presentation group number will be explained.
As in the first embodiment, the push order instruction number corresponds to the correct push order (the push order for winning the high winning combination) when winning a winning combination with an advantageous push order (biased combination in the ninth embodiment). This is the number to Similarly to the first embodiment, when a winning combination is drawn by the winning combination drawing means 61 and a biased combination is won, the push order instruction number selection means 63 (FIG. 1) selects the push order instruction number corresponding to the won biased combination. select.
When the pressing order of the biased combination is set to 6 options, the pressing order instruction number is, for example, similar to the third embodiment,
Left middle right Correct answer: Press order instruction number “A1”
Right/left middle correct answer: Press order instruction number “A2”
Middle left/right Correct answer: Press order instruction number “A3”
Center right left Correct answer: Press order instruction number "A4"
Right, left, middle Correct answer: Press order instruction number “A5”
Right center left Correct answer: Press order instruction number “A6”
One example is that.
However, in the ninth embodiment, when a biased bell is won, the correct answer press order is an irregular press (4 choices), so for example,
Middle left/right correct answer: Press order instruction number “A1”
Center right left Correct answer: Press order instruction number “A2”
Right, left, middle Correct answer: Press order instruction number “A3”
Right middle left Correct answer: Press order instruction number "A4"
You can also use it as
Furthermore, when winning a rare combination, any number from among the above-mentioned push order instruction numbers "A1" to "A4" may be selected. Alternatively, a push order instruction number may be provided that indicates an irregular push when winning a rare combination.

Similarly to the first embodiment, when the main control board 50 wins a biased combination during AT (a game in which instructions are given), the main control board 50 selects the push order instruction number and displays the number of wins displayed on the LED 78 (instruction monitor). Displays push order instruction information corresponding to the order instruction number. For example, when the push order instruction number is "A1", "=1" may be displayed as the push order instruction information similarly to the third embodiment.
Furthermore, when displaying the push order instruction information, the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the push order instruction number, it can output information regarding the correct push order. In other words, the command corresponding to the push order instruction number transmitted by the main control board 50 is a command that can specify the correct push order. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it displays an image of the correct pressing order on the image display device 23.
In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 can only send the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80 during the advantageous period and AT. Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 during an advantageous period and other than during AT, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. Note that it is not necessary to select the push order designation number except in the advantageous section and during AT.

On the other hand, similarly to the first embodiment, the performance group number is a number corresponding to the winning number, and is information that enables the sub-control board 80 to output a performance corresponding to the winning combination.
To select a performance group number not only for a game in which a winning combination is won, but also for a game in which a winning combination is not won.
In addition, the performance group number selected in a game in which a winning role has an advantageous push order is information indicating that a role with an advantageous push order has been won, and from the performance group number It is configured so that the order cannot be specified.
The performance group number selection means 64 (FIG. 1) selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning combination and can transmit it to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the performance group number, it can output a performance related to the winning combination based on the information.

Here, the main control board 50 may send the production group number to the sub-control board 80 in the following example.
a) Example 1
In games other than games in which the biased winning combination is won, a performance group number is selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
On the other hand, in a game in which a winning combination is won, the performance group number is not selected and is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. However, in a game in which a biased combination is won, the presentation group number may be selected but not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
b) Example 2
Regardless of the winning combination result (including games in which the biased winning combination is won), the performance group number is selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

The main control board 50 does not transmit the winning numbers corresponding to the winning combinations to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub control board 80 cannot know the winning numbers of the winning combination. However, since the sub-control board 80 can receive the performance group number, it can output the performance corresponding to the winning combination based on the received performance group number. Furthermore, if the sub-control board 80 is designed not to receive the performance group number when winning a biased combination, it is possible to infer that the game has won the biased combination if the performance group number is not received. It is now possible to practically identify the games that have been played.
Even if the main control board 50 is designed not to transmit the production group number when winning a biased combination, during AT, it transmits a push order instruction number to the sub control board 80 when winning a biased combination. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can output an effect regarding the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

In addition, in the first embodiment, even when the push order bell (corresponding to the biased combination in the ninth embodiment) is won, the performance group number is uniformly transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
However, there is a doubt that transmitting the performance group number to the sub-control board 80 when winning a biased combination corresponds to an instruction. This is because the game when the biased combination is won has a unilaterally advantageous push order, so the transmission of the performance group number corresponding to the winning of the biased combination can be interpreted as the transmission of instruction information. Furthermore, if it is interpreted that instruction information is being transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, the instruction monitor must be displayed, and the medals acquired in the game must be displayed with instructions. This is because it is necessary to add it to the accessory ratio (see the first embodiment).
Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, the above example 1 is adopted, and the performance group number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80 when the biased combination is won. However, as described above, since the performance group number is not transmitted only when the biased combination is won, the sub control board 80 can infer that the biased combination has been won in a game in which the performance group number is not received.
Here, in the example of FIG. 105, the total winning probability of the biased combinations when the number of bets is "3" is "101/125", which exceeds "1/2" (half of all games). By setting the winning probability of the biased combination to a high probability in this way, the number of games that do not require transmitting the production group number increases, so the number of transmitted commands can be reduced.
On the other hand, by making the winning probability of the sum of the biased combinations high, it is possible to lower the normal base and improve the ball payout performance of AT, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Depending on the winning probability of the biased role and the expected value of the number of medals obtained, if you want to send the production group number when the biased role is won, please indicate the pressing order (also called "stop order") (light up the instruction monitor). There was an idea that it should be included in the ratio of designated accessories.
However, at present, when a biased role is won, even if the performance group number is sent, it is possible to do so without instructing the pressing order (without lighting up the instruction monitor) and not including it in the instruction-inclusive role ratio. It is thought that this is the case when the following three conditions are met.
1) Under the condition that the press position is random (no "eye press"), the expected value for each press order (6 ways in the case of 3 reels) based on all hands (including losers) is the specified number (bet) number (usually "3") or less.
2) Do not suggest the order or position of the buttons through presentation, etc. For example, an effect using a color that is displayed only in a game in which a biased combination is won may not be possible because it suggests the pressing order.
3) The same production group including biased roles, under the condition that they always play in a way that takes a high value (a way to always take a low value one-card role, etc. even if it is an incorrect release order) The expected value for each push order when winning the small role group to which the number is assigned is all below the specified number.
By configuring to satisfy 1) to 3) above, even if the production group number is fraudulently obtained when winning a biased combination, the expected number of medals obtained during irregular presses will be less than the specified number, so it will be possible to prevent fraud. It is possible to prevent the act of increasing the number of medals. Here, "when winning a small role group" means "when winning any of the small roles included in the small role group".

The above points will be explained in more detail with reference to FIG. 105(a).
First, in the following explanation,
Set the pressing order of "left middle right" to "pressing order 1",
Set the pressing order of "left/right middle" to "pressing order 2",
Set the pressing order of "middle left and right" to "pressing order 3",
Set the pressing order of "middle right left" to "pressing order 4",
Set the pressing order of "Right Left Middle" to "Press Order 5",
The pressing order of "right middle left" is set as "pressing order 6".
(See FIG. 105(a)).
Also,
The expected value of the number of medals obtained in push order 1 based on all roles is "E1",
Let the expected value of the number of medals obtained in push order 2 based on all roles be "E2",
The expected value of the number of medals obtained for pressing order 3 based on all roles is "E3",
The expected value of the number of medals obtained for pressing order 4 based on all roles is "E4",
The expected value of the number of medals obtained for push order 5 based on all roles is "E5",
The expected value of the number of medals obtained for pressing order 6 based on all roles is set as "E6".
At this time,
E1=Σ{(Number of coins obtained when operating each winning combination in the press order 1) x (Winning probability of each winning combination)}
E2=Σ{(Number of coins obtained when operating each winning combination in the press order 2) x (Winning probability of each winning combination)}
E3=Σ{(Number of coins obtained when operating each winning combination in the press order 3) x (Winning probability of each winning combination)}
E4=Σ{(Number of coins obtained when operating each winning combination in the press order 4) x (Winning probability of each winning combination)}
E5=Σ{(Number of coins obtained when operating each winning combination in the push order 5) x (Winning probability of each winning combination)}
E6=Σ{(Number of coins obtained when operating each winning combination in the press order 6) x (Winning probability of each winning combination)}
It is.
and,
E1≦Specified number E2≦Specified number E3≦Specified number E4≦Specified number E5≦Specified number E6≦Specified number The above conditions 1) are satisfied.

The expected number of medals earned based on all the roles when the stop switch 42 is operated in a predetermined push order is the medal based on all the roles when the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific push order different from the predetermined push order. When the number of acquired coins is more than "0.1" than the expected value, the predetermined pressing order is a unilaterally advantageous pressing order, and the specific pressing order is a unilaterally disadvantageous pressing order. There is a way of thinking.
When the expected value of the number of medals acquired based on all combinations differs for each push order, each push order is distinguished as either a one-sided advantageous push order or a one-sided disadvantage.
In the ninth embodiment, as described above, the expected value of the number of medals obtained ("E1" and "E2") based on all the roles when the game is played in order of push ("Push order 1" and "Push order 2") ) is "1.289" medals, which is the expected value of the number of medals obtained ("E3" to "E6") based on all roles when playing the game with irregular pushes ("Push order 3" to "Push order 6"). ”) is “2.177” pieces,
2.177-1.289=0.888>0.1
Therefore, "push order 1" and "push order 2" are push orders that are unilaterally disadvantageous, and "push order 3" to "push order 6" are unilaterally advantageous push orders.

Here, in an actual gaming machine, for example, when comparing "Push Order 3" and "Push Order 4" to "Push Order 6" (one-sided advantageous push orders), medals can be earned based on all roles. There are specifications in which the expected value of the number of sheets is strictly different.
Specifically, for example, if you operate in "Push Order 3", you can draw the symbols related to the special combination (bonus combination), but in "Press Order 4" to "Push Order 6", you can draw the symbols related to the special combination. With specifications that do not draw, if you operate with "Push Order 3", a special winning combination may be won and the number of coins paid out may be "0", while with "Push Order 4" to "Push Order 6" When operated, a special winning combination may not be won, but a small winning combination (for example, a one-card winning combination) may be won, and the number of coins paid out may be "1".
In such a case, strictly speaking, the expected value of the number of medals obtained based on all combinations will be different between "Pushing order 3" and "Pushing order 4" to "Pushing order 6". Therefore, if the error in this expected value is "0.01" or less, it is considered that the same "unilaterally advantageous pressing order" exists.
That is, in this example, if the error between "E3" and "E4" to "E6" is "0.01" or less, "Press order 3" and "Press order 4" to "Press order 6" are There is no advantageous or disadvantageous relationship between them.

here,
E1=E2=A
E3=B
E4=E5=E6=C
As,
B-A≧0.1
C-A≧0.1
0<CB≦0.01
When , "push order 3" and "push order 4" to "push order 6" are uniformly "unilaterally advantageous push order" compared to "push order 1" and "push order 2". It is assumed that In addition, here we have explained an example where the expected value of the number of medals earned based on all roles is different between pressing orders that are unilaterally advantageous, but in this case, the expected value of the number of medals earned based on all roles is different between pressing orders that are unilaterally disadvantageous. The same applies to cases where the expected values are different. In this case, if the error in the expected number of medals obtained based on all roles between the unilaterally unfavorable pressing orders is 0.01 or less, then they are uniformly in the unilaterally unfavorable pressing order. It is assumed that there is.
As mentioned above, even if the pressing order is one-sidedly advantageous (disadvantageous), the expected value of the number of medals earned based on all roles may differ, so whether the above condition 1) is satisfied or not. The judgment is made based on the fact that the expected value of the number of medals obtained in each push order based on all roles ≦ the specified number, rather than the ``expected value of the sequential push and the expected value of the irregular push ≦ the specified number.''
For the same reason, when determining whether or not the condition 3) above is met, the expected value of the number of medals obtained for each push order when winning small role groups to which the same performance group number is assigned is calculated. calculate.

In order to determine whether the condition 3) above is met, when calculating the expected number of medals obtained for each push order, we always try to hit higher, so for example, from biased bell 1 to biased bell 4. Please note that when you win, if you play the game in "push order 1" or "push order 2", you will definitely get a two-card combination.

(Examples of when it is necessary to indicate the pressing order and include it in the ratio of the role with instructions)
As small role groups to which the same performance group number including biased roles is assigned, there are small role group A consisting of biased bell 1 to biased bell 4, and small role group B consisting of rare role A and rare role B.
Here, the ratio of the number of small roles in the small role group A is,
Biased Bell 1: Biased Bell 2: Biased Bell 3: Biased Bell 4
= 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/5
= 1:1:1:1
Therefore,
Probability of winning biased bell 1 when winning small role group A = Probability of winning biased bell 2 when winning small role group A = Probability of winning biased bell 3 when winning small role group A = Probability of winning biased bell 4 when winning small role group A = 1/4
It becomes.

Therefore, if the expected number of medals to be won for push order 1 to push order 6 when winning small role group A is E1 (A) to E6 (A), respectively,
E1(A) = 2 x 1/4 x 4 = 2
E2(A) = 2 x 1/4 x 4 = 2
E3(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
E4(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
E5(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
E6(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
Since all of E1(A) to E6(A) are equal to or less than the prescribed number (here, "3"), the above condition 3) is satisfied.
On the other hand, the ratio of the number of small roles in small role group B is,
Rare role A: Rare role B
= 1/250: 1/250
= 1:1
Therefore,
Probability of winning rare role A when winning small role group B = Probability of winning rare role B when winning small role group B = 1/2
It becomes.

Here, if the expected number of medals obtained in push order 1 to push order 6 when winning small role group B are E1 (B) to E6 (B), respectively,
E1(B)=1×1/2×2=1
E2(B)=1×1/2×2=1
E3(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E4(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E5(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E6(B)=12×1/2×2=12
Therefore, E3(B) to E6(B) become larger than the specified number (here, "3").
Therefore, in this example, when transmitting the production group numbers of minor role group A and minor role group B, when winning minor role group A, the pressing order is not instructed, and it is not included in the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio. However, if you win the small prize group B, it is necessary to give instructions on the order of pressing and also include it in the bonus ratio including instructions.

(An example where the pressing order is not specified and is not included in the ratio of games with instructions)
Another example will be given to illustrate this point.
In FIG. 105(a), there is a small role group C (biased role group) consisting of biased bell 1 to biased bell 4, rare role A, and rare role B, as a small role group to which the same performance group number including biased roles is assigned. The ratio of the number of small roles in this small role group C is,
Biased Bell 1: Biased Bell 2: Biased Bell 3: Biased Bell 4: Rare Role A: Rare Role B
= 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/250: 1/250
= 50:50:50:50:1:1
It becomes.
This means:
Probability of winning biased bell 1 when winning small role group C = Probability of winning biased bell 2 when winning small role group C = Probability of winning biased bell 3 when winning small role group C = Probability of winning biased bell 4 when winning small role group C = 50/202
And then,
Probability of winning rare role A when winning small role group C = Probability of winning rare role B when winning small role group C = 1/202
It becomes.

Therefore, if the expected value of the number of medals obtained in push order 1 to push order 6 when winning small role group C is E1 (C) to E6 (C), respectively,
E1(C)=2×50/202×4+1×1/202×2≒1.990
E2(C)=2×50/202×4+1×1/202×2≒1.990
E3(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
E4(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
E5(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
E6(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
Therefore, the expected number of medals obtained when winning small role group C is less than the specified number (here, "3") for all press orders, and the condition 3) above is satisfied, so in addition to this, If the above conditions 1) and 2) are met, even if the production group number of small role group C is transmitted, the pressing order will not be instructed and it will be included in the instruction-inclusive role role ratio. You may choose not to have one.
In this way, the expected value of the number of medals obtained when winning a small role group that is assigned the same performance group number, including biased roles, is less than the specified number for all pressing orders. ) is the condition.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing main processing in the ninth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 46 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 115, step numbers of different processes are underlined compared to FIG. 46.
In the main process of FIG. 115, after a winning combination lottery process is executed in step S282, a push order instruction number set is performed in step S181 based on the winning combination lottery result, and a production group number setting is performed in the next step S182. be done. The rest is the same as the process in FIG. 46.
Although the presentation group number setting process is not described in FIG. 46, this only means that the presentation group number setting process is omitted, and does not mean that it is not provided.
Further, in step S283, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed during a non-advantageous section, and an AT lottery is executed during an advantageous section and non-AT. Furthermore, during AT, an AT additional lottery and an AT continuation lottery are executed. However, when the number of bets in the current game is "2", the above-mentioned lottery is not executed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process in step S181 in FIG.
In FIG. 116, in step S191, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section. Here, for example, in FIG. 33, the determination is made by determining the value of the advantageous section type flag at address "F061(H)". When it is determined that the vehicle is in an advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S192, and when it is determined that the vehicle is not in an advantageous zone, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In the next step S192, the condition device number (small winning combination and replay condition device number) of the current game is acquired. When the winning combination lottery process is executed in step S282 of FIG. 115, a conditional device number corresponding to the winning number is generated and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, so that information is acquired.

Then, in the next step S193, it is determined whether or not the biased combination has been won in the current game. This process is performed by determining whether the conditional device number acquired in step S192 is the conditional device number corresponding to the biased combination. When it is determined that the biased combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S194, and when it is determined that the biased combination has not been won, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S194, the main control board 50 determines whether the current game is a game in which push order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor. When it is determined that the game is a game that displays push order instruction information, the process advances to step S195, and when it is determined that the game is not a game that displays push order instruction information, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S195, a push order instruction number is acquired. This process is a process of specifying a press order instruction number corresponding to the conditional device number, based on the conditional device number acquired in step S192. Next, the process advances to step S196, and the obtained push order instruction number is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S197, the push order instruction number is stored in the acquisition number data of the RWM 53. This storage area corresponds to address "F011(H)" in FIG. 33 (third embodiment), for example. When the push order instruction number is stored in the acquisition number data, in the LED display control (step S2821, FIG. 50) of the subsequent interrupt process (FIG. 47), the push order number corresponding to the push order instruction number stored in the acquisition number data is Order instruction information is displayed.
Then, the process advances to step S198, where a press order instruction number output request is set, and the control command set 1 is performed at the next step S199. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting a push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
As described above, in a game where a biased combination is won and push order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor, the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the effect group number setting process in step S182 in FIG. 115. In addition, this example is an example in which the production group number is not selected and is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a game in which a winning combination is won.
In FIG. 117, in step S201, the condition device number of the current game is acquired. This process is similar to step S192 in FIG. 116 described above. In the next step S202, it is determined whether or not a biased combination has been won in the current game. This process is similar to the process in step S193 in FIG. 116 described above. When it is determined that a biased combination has been won, the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that a biased combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, the main control board 50 acquires the performance group number corresponding to the condition device number of the current game based on the condition device number acquired in step S201. Next, the process advances to step S204, and the acquired performance group number is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53.
Then, the process advances to step S205 to set a production group number output request, and in the next step S206, control command set 1 is performed. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting the production group number to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

From the above, in this example, when a biased combination is won, the production group number is not saved and is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. On the other hand, in cases other than winning a biased combination (that is, including when the combination is not won), the production group number is stored and transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Further, the flow shown in FIG. 117 is executed regardless of whether it is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section.
In this example, since the process of saving the performance group number is not executed when a biased combination is won, there is no need to provide a performance group number corresponding to the winning of a biased combination. Alternatively, a performance group number corresponding to the winning of the biased role is prepared, and when the biased role is won, the performance group number corresponding to the win of the biased role is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, but the performance group number corresponding to the winning of the biased role is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. You may choose not to send the number.
However, as mentioned above, if the expected value of the number of medals acquired per game is less than the specified number "3", the interpretation is adopted that sending the production group number to the sub-control board 80 does not correspond to an instruction. If so, it is also possible to select the performance group number corresponding to the winning of the biased combination and transmit it to the sub-control board 80 when the biased combination is won. In this case, the process of step S202 is unnecessary.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the relationship between the biased winning combination and the indication monitor and image display in the ninth embodiment.
In the event that a biased role is won during a non-advantageous period, the instruction monitor is not displayed. In particular, the instruction monitor is not displayed when a rare role is won. This is because the AT lottery is not executed even if a rare role is won during a non-advantageous period. Also, since the instruction monitor is not displayed, images related to the push order are not displayed.
On the other hand, in the advantageous section, the display on the indicator monitor, etc. differs depending on whether it is non-AT or AT.
Even if you win a biased bell during a favorable zone and non-AT, the instruction monitor is off. Also, no image display regarding the push order is performed.
On the other hand, in a game in which a biased bell is won during the advantageous zone and AT, the instruction monitor is turned on and the push order instruction information corresponding to the biased bell that has been won is displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 23 displays the correct push order.

Further, when winning a rare combination during an advantageous period and non-AT, the instruction monitor is turned on and push order instruction information corresponding to the order push is displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 23 displays an image of "1--" indicating the first stop on the left as the correct pressing order. Here, when the rare combination is won, the expected value of the number of medals acquired in the game is higher when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing than when the stop switch 42 is pressed sequentially. However, since it is more advantageous for the total number of balls to be pushed in order (FIG. 105(b)), even if it is a non-AT, the order of push corresponding to the advantageous push order is notified.
Further, when winning a rare combination in an advantageous section and during AT, the instruction monitor is turned on and push order instruction information corresponding to irregular presses is displayed. Since the AT lottery is not performed during AT, an irregular push with a high expected value of the number of medals acquired in the game is displayed. Further, the image display device 23 displays an image of the irregular presses as the correct press order. Therefore, when winning a rare combination during an advantageous period, both non-AT and AT display the instruction monitor and display the correct pressing order on the image display device 23, but the displayed pressing order will be different. .

Therefore, in step S194 of Fig. 116, when a biased bell is won during a non-AT, it is judged as "No", but when a rare role is won during a non-AT, it is judged as "Yes". In addition, when a biased bell or rare role is won during an AT, it is judged as "Yes".
Furthermore, if a rare role is won, the result in step S194 is judged as "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S195. If the player is not in the AT, a push order instruction number corresponding to pressing the buttons in order is obtained, and if the player is in the AT, a push order instruction number corresponding to pressing the buttons in an irregular order is obtained.

Next, temporary storage processing in the ninth embodiment will be explained. Two types of methods (temporary storage processing 1 and temporary storage processing 2) will be described below. It should be noted that both non-CZ and CZ (gaming states where AT winning expectations are higher than non-CZ), which will be explained below, are advantageous periods.
1. First method (temporary storage processing 1)
In the ninth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, when the start switch 41 is operated, a combination lottery process (step S282) is performed, and furthermore, as shown in step S283, a lottery etc. regarding AT is performed. Note that the AT-related lottery includes the CZ-related lottery. The number of drawings related to AT is not limited to one, but usually a plurality of types of drawings are performed.
Note that a lottery regarding AT may be referred to as a "lottery regarding instructions", "a lottery regarding ball output performance", etc.

In the ninth embodiment, as a lottery regarding AT in non-CZ,
1) AT lottery 2) CZ lottery 3) Stage lottery shall be carried out. It should be noted that the expectation level of winning CZ and AT is different for each stage (low probability of winning, high probability of winning, etc.).
In addition, as a lottery regarding AT in CZ,
4) AT lottery 5) CZ counter 1 lottery 6) CZ counter 2 lottery shall be executed.
In the ninth embodiment, points are given to the player during the CZ, and depending on the accumulated points, preferential treatment is given to the AT lottery, or the AT lottery is determined. The CZ counter 1 lottery is a lottery for the number of points to be given during CZ.
Further, in the ninth embodiment, the initial number of games of CZ is set to a predetermined value, and a lottery is performed on the CZ counter 2 as a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games of CZ during CZ.

In the ninth embodiment, after executing the AT-related lottery as described above, the lottery results are temporarily stored, and when the conditions for the actual storage are met, the temporarily stored information is permanently stored.
Further, as temporary storage means, a temporary storage area 1, a temporary storage area 2, and a temporary storage area 3 are provided in the storage area of the RWM 53.
When the above-mentioned lottery 1) to 3) are executed during non-CZ, the lottery results are stored in temporary storage area 1, temporary storage area 2, and temporary storage area 3, respectively.
On the other hand, when the above-mentioned lotteries 4) to 6) are executed during CZ, the respective lottery results are stored in temporary storage area 1, temporary storage area 2, and temporary storage area 3, respectively.
In other words, different lottery results are stored in temporary storage area 1, temporary storage area 2, and temporary storage area 3 depending on whether the game is in non-CZ or CZ.

Further, the main control board 50 transmits the information stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this information, it can output effects corresponding to the information.
Here, the sub-control board 80 cannot determine which information is stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 only when the information is transmitted.
On the other hand, the sub control board 80 is capable of determining whether the current gaming state is non-CZ or CZ based on other commands sent from the main control board 50.
Therefore, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the received information is the AT lottery result during the non-CZ, the CZ lottery result based on whether the CZ is in progress, and the information stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3. It is possible to output performances corresponding to each lottery result by determining whether the result is a stage lottery result, an AT lottery result during CZ, a CZ counter 1 lottery result, or a CZ counter 2 lottery result.

In addition, the main storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is as follows:
1) This memory area for storing the AT lottery results (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 1")
2) This memory area for storing the CZ lottery results (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 2")
3) This memory area for storing the stage lottery results (hereinafter referred to as “this memory area 3”)
4) This memory area stores the lottery results of the CZ counter 1 (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 4").
5) This memory area stores the lottery results of the CZ counter 2 (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 5").
are provided respectively.
In the ninth embodiment, when a biased role is won, the above-mentioned lottery 1) to 3) or 4) to 6) is executed, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the lottery result is reflected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the lottery result is cleared (discarded) (not reflected).

119 and 120 are flowcharts showing the temporary storage process 1 described above. FIG. 120 is a flowchart following FIG. 119. In the flowcharts of FIGS. 119 and 120, it is assumed that the area is advantageous and non-AT (AT is selected by lottery).
In FIG. 119, in step S312, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S313. Incidentally, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated in step S312, a winning combination lottery is executed, but the process is omitted in this flowchart.
In the next step S313, the main control board 50 determines whether the current game is in CZ. If it is determined that CZ is not in progress, the process advances to step S314, and if it is determined that CZ is in progress, the process advances to step S320.
The example shown in FIG. 33 includes an AT flag, but in addition to this AT flag, a CZ flag for determining whether the current gaming state is CZ is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. (not shown in FIG. 33). Then, based on the value of this CZ flag, it is determined whether or not the current game is in CZ.

In step S314, the main control board 50 randomly selects whether or not to perform AT. Then, the process proceeds to step S315, and the lottery result in step S314 is stored in the temporary storage area 1 (temporary storage).
In the next step S316, the main control board 50 makes a lottery as to whether or not to execute CZ. Then, the process proceeds to step S317, and the lottery result in step S316 is stored in the temporary storage area 2 (temporary storage).
In the next step S318, the main control board 50 executes a stage lottery. Here, in the ninth embodiment, in the advantageous section and non-AT, there are multiple stages with different expectations of winning CZ and AT, and a lottery is performed to determine which stage to stay in based on the lottery result. . For example, it includes a stage with a low expectation of AT winning, a stage with high expectation of AT winning, a stage with high expectation of CZ winning, etc.
Next, the process advances to step S319, and the lottery result in step S318 is stored in the temporary storage area 3 (temporary storage). Then, the process advances to step S326.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S313 that the CZ is in progress and the process proceeds to step S320, the main control board 50 executes an AT lottery. This lottery is the same as the lottery in step S314. Then, the process proceeds to step S321, and the lottery result of step S320 is stored in the temporary storage area 1 (temporary storage). This process is also the same as step S315.

In the next step S322, the main control board 50 executes the CZ counter 1 lottery. Next, the process advances to step S323, and the lottery result of step S322 is stored in the temporary storage area 2 (temporary storage).
In the next step S324, the main control board 50 executes the CZ counter 2 lottery. Next, the process proceeds to step S325, and the lottery result in step S324 is stored in the temporary storage area 3 (temporary storage). Then, the process advances to step S326.

In step S326, the main control board 50 transmits information on temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80. This process is a process for executing the control command set 1 and the like described above.
As described above, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery regarding AT is executed, stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3, and the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, so that the sub-control board 80 receives this information. Based on this, it becomes possible to output the performance at the start of the game (before the stop switch 42 is operated).
Next, the process advances to step S327, and the main control board 50 determines whether the first (initial) stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S328. In step S328, the press order information is updated.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, press order information is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. The press order information is 1-byte data consisting of “aabbcc00(B)”,
"aa": Value of the first (first operated) stop switch 42 "bb": Value of the second (second operated) stop switch 42 "cc": Third (third operated) ) is the value of the stop switch 42.
moreover,
Value corresponding to left stop switch 42: 01 (B)
Value corresponding to middle stop switch 42: 10 (B)
Value corresponding to right stop switch 42: 11 (B)
shall be.
Therefore, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the left-center-right press order, the press order information is as follows.
01000000 (B): When stopping first on the left ↓
01100000 (B): When the second middle stop ↓
01101100(B): Updated in the order of 3rd stop on the right.
Therefore, in step S228, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the press order information is updated to "01000000(B)". Alternatively, for example, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the press order information is updated to "10000000 (B)".

Next, the process advances to step S329, and the main control board 50 determines whether the stop switches 42 have been operated in the recommended pressing order (pressing order). This determination is made based on the above-mentioned press order information. Here, "01000000 (B)" is provided as definition data for determining whether the stop switches 42 are operated in the recommended pressing order (pressing order). This definition data has the same value as the press order information when the left stop switch 42 is first operated.
Then, the value of the definition data is subtracted from the value of the press order information updated in step S328, and it is determined whether or not it becomes "0". If the subtraction result becomes "0", it is determined that the left stop switch 42 was operated first.
Note that, in addition to subtraction, it is sufficient to determine whether the push order information updated in step S328 and the value of the definition data are the same value. ), and if the result of the calculation is "0", it can be determined that the two are the same value.

for example,
Pressing order information: 01000000 (B) (left stop switch 42 is operated first)
Definition data: 01000000 (B)
If so, performing an "XOR" operation on these two results in "00000000(B)." Since the operation result is "0," it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 is the left stop switch 42.
on the other hand,
Press order information: 10000000 (B) (middle stop switch 42 is operated first)
Definition data: 01000000 (B)
If so, the "XOR" operation of the two results in "11000000(B)." Since the operation result is not "0," it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 is not the left stop switch 42.

If it is determined in step S329 that the pressing order is the recommended pressing order, the process advances to step S331 in FIG. 120, and if it is determined that the pressing order is not the recommended pressing order, the process advances to step S330.
In step S330, the main control board 50 transmits the first stop information to the sub control board 80, and proceeds to the next step S331. The information transmitted here is information corresponding to the operation being performed in the non-recommended press order. On the other hand, the main control board 50 does not transmit the first stop information to the sub control board 80 when the operations are performed in the recommended order of presses. When the sub-control board 80 receives the first stop information, it can be determined that the operations were performed in a non-recommended press order, and therefore controls the display of the recommended image.

In step S331, the main control board 50 determines whether the second stop switch 42 has been operated. If it is determined that the second stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S332.
In step S332, the main control board 50 updates the push order information. For example, when the first stop switch 42 is on the left, the press order information is "01000000 (B)", so the next time the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the press order information is "01100000 (B)". Update to.
On the other hand, for example, when the first stop switch 42 is in the middle, the press order information is "10000000 (B)", so the next time the right stop switch 42 is operated, the press order information is "10110000 (B)". )".

Next, the process advances to step S333, and the main control board 50 determines whether the third stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the third stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S334.
In step S334, the main control board 50 updates the press order information. For example, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the left-center-right order, the press order information is updated from "01100000(B)" to "01101100(B)".
On the other hand, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of middle, right, left, for example, the press order information is updated from "10110000(B)" to "10110100(B)".

Next, the process advances to step S335, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the biased combination has been won in the current game. As explained in the first embodiment, when a winning combination is drawn, the drawing result is stored in the "small winning combination and replay condition device number" provided in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, so read this data. It is determined whether or not one of the biased roles has been won.
When it is determined in step S335 that the biased combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S336, and when it is determined that the biased combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S345.

In step S336, the main control board 50 generates a first stop reel identification flag. Here, the "first stop reel identification flag" is a flag for determining which reel 31 the first stop reel 31 (synonymous with the first stop switch 42) is. 42 is a flag for determining whether or not it has been operated. Since only the information of the first stop switch 42 is stored in the press order information updated at the time of step S328, which stop switch 42 is the first stop switch 42 (that is, the first reel 31) is immediately known. can be judged. On the other hand, since the press order information updated at step S334 includes information on the three stop switches 42, it is necessary to calculate which stop switch 42 is the first stop switch 42. Can not. For this reason, a first stop reel identification flag for determining which reel 31 is the first stop reel 31 is generated.

In order to generate the first stop reel identification flag, the values of the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 may be masked with respect to the press order information updated at step S334.
For example, if the masking data is "11000000 (B)" and the push order information "aabbcc00 (B)" and the masking data "11000000 (B)" are logically ANDed, the first stop reel specific flag "aa000000" is set. (B)" is generated.
In the next step S337, the main control board 50 determines whether the push order for the current game is the recommended push order. This determination is similar to step S329. The first stop reel specific flag "aa000000 (B)" generated in step S336 and the definition data "01000000 (B)" are "XOR" operated, and if the operation result is "0", it is determined that the recommended pressing order is However, if the calculation result is not "0", it is determined that it is not the recommended pressing order.

If it is determined in step S337 that the pressing order is the recommended one, the process advances to step S338, and if it is determined that the pressing order is not the recommended pressing order, the process advances to step S345.
In step S338, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the current game is in CZ. If it is determined that the game is not in CZ, the process proceeds to step S339; if it is determined that it is in CZ, the process proceeds to step S342. .
In step S339, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the main storage area 1 (main storage).
In the next step S340, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 2 in the main storage area 2 (main storage).
In the next step S341, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 3 in the main storage area 3 (main storage).
Then, the process advances to step S345.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S338 that CZ is in progress and the process proceeds to step S342, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the main storage area 1 (main storage).
In the next step S343, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 2 in the main storage area 4 (main storage).
In the next step S344, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 3 in the main storage area 5 (main storage).
Then, the process advances to step S345.

In step S345, the main control board 50 transmits the information stored in main storage areas 1 to 3 or main storage areas 1, 4, and 5 to the sub control board 80. As a result, in a game in which a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the updated information in the main storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game. On the other hand, if you win a biased combination and the stop switch 42 is not operated in the recommended push order, the information in this storage area will not be updated, so the same information as the information sent in the previous game will be used as sub. It is transmitted to the control board 80.

Further, the sub control board 80 determines whether the transmitted information is in the CZ mode based on the transmitted information on the main storage areas 1 to 3 or the main storage areas 1, 4, and 5. It determines what kind of information it is and controls the output of the performance based on the result.
Next, the process advances to step S346, and the main control board 50 clears the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 (sets them to "0"). In the next step S347, the main control board 50 clears the push order information (sets it to "0"). Furthermore, in the next step S348, the main control board 50 clears the first stop reel identification flag (sets it to "0"). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing another example of temporary storage processing 1 in FIG. 120. In FIG. 121, step numbers that are different from the process in FIG. 120 are underlined.
Although not shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, whether or not the recommended pressing order is determined is performed multiple times (for example, about 5 times) after the process of step S337. Then, each time, as shown in step S337, if an "XOR" operation is performed between the first stop reel specifying flag and the definition data, the program capacity increases. Therefore, after performing the determination process in step S337, if it is the recommended press order, the process advances to step S351 and "0" is stored as the irregular game determination data, and if it is not the recommended press order, the process advances to step S352 and is stored as the irregular game determination data. Remember "1". Then, the determination as to whether or not the recommended pressing order after step S337 is made is made by determining whether or not the irregular game determination data is "0". For example, if "1" is subtracted from the irregular game judgment data and the zero flag becomes "1", it can be determined that the irregular game judgment data (before subtraction) is "1" (not in the recommended pressing order). becomes.
This makes it possible to simplify and speed up the process of determining whether or not the order of pressing is recommended.
Furthermore, at the end of this process, a process of clearing the irregular game determination data (setting it to "0") is executed in step S353.

2. Second method (temporary storage process 2)
In this example, it is assumed that three types of count values A, B, and C are drawn as a lottery regarding AT during an advantageous period and a non-AT period. Then, the lottery result of each count value is added to the count value for each game and up to the previous game.
For example, the count values A, B, and C up to the previous game are respectively,
Count value A=X
Count value B=Y
Count value C=Z
and
The lottery results for count values A, B, and C in this game are, respectively.
Count value A=a
Count value B=b
Count value C=c
, when the count values A, B, and C in the current game are updated,
Count value A=X+a
Count value B=Y+b
Count value C=Z+c
becomes.

Then, for example, when the count value A reaches the first value, it is decided to execute the AT lottery, when the count value B reaches the second value, it is decided to execute the AT lottery, and when the count value C reaches the second value, it is decided to execute the AT lottery. When the third value is reached, a transition is made to CZ.
Further, the reflection of the lottery result of the count value in the current game (addition of each count value) is limited to when a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order. In other cases, the lottery result of the count value in the current game is not reflected.
Furthermore, unlike the first method, in the second method, the temporary storage area and the main storage area correspond to each other on a one-to-one basis. therefore,
Temporary storage area 1 and main storage area 1 for storing count value A
Temporary storage area 2 and main storage area 2 for storing count value B
Temporary storage area 3 and main storage area 3 for storing count value C
Equipped with.
Here, the above three types of temporary storage area and main storage area are illustrated, but the number is not limited to this, and in reality, more count values are drawn, and the temporary storage area and main storage area are used to store the count value. An area is provided. Therefore, in reality,
Temporary storage area 4 and main storage area 4 for storing count value D
Temporary storage area 5 and main storage area 5 for storing count value E
:
Equipped with.

FIGS. 122 and 123 are flowcharts showing the temporary storage process 2 described above. FIG. 123 is a flowchart following FIG. 122.
In FIG. 122, in step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S363. In addition, when the start switch 41 is operated, a winning lottery process is executed.
In step S363, the main control board 50 copies the value (count value A) of the main storage area 1 to the temporary storage area 1. In the next step S364, the main control board 50 copies the value (count value B) of the main storage area 2 to the temporary storage area 2. Furthermore, in the next step S365, the main control board 50 copies the value (count value C) of the main storage area 3 to the temporary storage area 3.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the value of the temporary storage area "N" (N=1, 2, 3) and the value of the main storage area "N" become the same value.

In the next step S366, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for the count value A. Note that the lottery for count value A, the lottery for count value B and the lottery for count value C, which will be described later, are executed based on the winning combination lottery results.
In the next step S367, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result of the count value A to the temporary storage area 1. For example, when the lottery result for count value A is "a" and the value of temporary storage area 1 up to that point is "X", the value of temporary storage area 1 is updated to "X+a".
In the next step S368, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for count value B. Next, the process advances to step S369, and the main control board 50 adds the lottery result of count value B to the temporary storage area 2.
In the next step S370, the main control board 50 performs a lottery for the count value C. Next, the process advances to step S371, and the main control board 50 adds the lottery result of the count value C to the temporary storage area 3.

Next, the process advances to step S372, and the main control board 50 transmits information on temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80. This process is a process for executing the control command set 1 and the like described above.
As described above, when the start switch 41 is operated, the lottery results of count values A to C are transmitted to the sub-control board 80, so the sub-control board 80 uses this information to determine when the game starts (when the stop switch 42 is It becomes possible to output the performance (before the operation is performed).
Next, the process advances to step S373, and the main control board 50 determines whether the first (initial) stop switch 42 has been operated. If it is determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S374. In step S374, similar to the temporary storage process 1 described above, press order information ("aa000000(B)") corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is stored.

Next, the process proceeds to step S375 in Fig. 123, where the main control board 50 judges whether the stop switches 42 have been operated in the recommended push order (whether the left stop switch 42 has been operated first). This process is made based on the push order information. As with the temporary storage process 1, this process subtracts the value of the definition data from the value of the push order information to judge whether it becomes "0".
If it is determined in step S375 that this is the recommended pressing order, the process proceeds to step S377, and if it is determined that this is not the recommended pressing order, the process proceeds to step S376.
In step S376, the main control board 50 transmits the first stop information to the sub-control board 80, and proceeds to step S377. The information transmitted here is information corresponding to the operation being performed in a non-recommended push order. When the sub-control board 80 receives the first stop information, it can determine that the operation has been performed in a non-recommended push order, and therefore performs control to display the recommended image.

In step S377, the main control board 50 determines whether the second stop switch 42 has been operated. If it is determined that the second stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S378.
In step S378, the main control board 50 updates the press order information corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42.
Next, the process advances to step S379, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the third stop switch 42 has been operated. If it is determined that the third stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S380.
In step S380, the main control board 50 updates the press order information corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42.
Next, the process proceeds to step S381, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not a biased combination has been won in the current game. Similarly to the above, based on the "minor winning combination and replay condition device number" stored in the RWM 53, it is determined whether any of the biased winning combinations has been won.
When it is determined in step S381 that the biased combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S382, and when it is determined that the biased combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S387.

In step S382, the main control board 50 generates a first stop reel specification flag. The first stop reel specification flag is generated by performing a logical AND operation on the push order information updated in step S380 and the masking data, in the same manner as in the temporary storage process 1, to generate the first stop reel specification flag "aa000000(B)".
In the next step S383, the main control board 50 judges whether the push order for the current game is the recommended push order or not. It performs an "XOR" operation on the first stop reel specification flag "aa000000 (B)" and the definition data "01000000 (B)". If the operation result is "0", it is judged to be the recommended push order, and if the operation result is not "0", it is judged to be not the recommended push order.
If it is determined that this is the recommended button press order, the process proceeds to step S384; if it is determined that this is not the recommended button press order, the process proceeds to step S387.
In step S384, the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary memory area 1 in the real memory area 1.
In the next step S385, the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary memory area 2 in the real memory area 2.
In the next step S386, the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary memory area 3 in the real memory area 3.
Then, proceed to step S387.

In step S387, the main control board 50 transmits the values stored in main storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80. As a result, in a game in which a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the updated value stored in the main storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game. On the other hand, in a game in which a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is not operated in the recommended pressing order, the information stored in the main storage area is not updated, so the main storage area that was transmitted in the previous game is not updated. The same information is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
Next, the process advances to step S388, and the main control board 50 clears the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 (sets them to "0"). In the next step S389, the main control board 50 clears the push order information (sets it to "0"). Furthermore, in the next step S390, the main control board 50 clears the first stop reel identification flag (sets it to "0"). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

According to the above temporary storage processing 1 and temporary storage processing 2, the lottery result when the start switch 41 is operated can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 before it is determined whether the push order is the recommended pressing order or not. On the 80 side, it becomes possible to execute an effect at the start of the game based on these lottery results.
However, it is necessary to provide a storage area for temporary storage.
In addition, after all stops, it is necessary to judge whether or not the biased combination has been won and whether or not it is in the recommended pressing order.
Furthermore, in the method of temporary storage processing 1, since the storage area for temporary storage is shared, the storage area for temporary storage can be minimized. However, on the sub-control board 80 side, it is not possible to determine what kind of information it is just by transmitting the information stored in the temporary storage area, so a process is required to determine what kind of information it is.
Furthermore, in the method of temporary storage processing 1, once the results are saved in the temporary storage area, other lottery results for the game cannot be saved in the temporary storage area.
On the other hand, in the method of temporary storage processing 2, information to be stored can be stored one-to-one between temporary storage and permanent storage. However, it is necessary to provide as many temporary storage areas and permanent storage areas as the number of data to be saved.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 123, similarly to FIG. 121, when it is determined in step S383 that it is the recommended pressing order (similar to step S351 in FIG. 121), the irregular game determination data is set to "0". , when it is determined that it is not the recommended pressing order (similar to step S352 in FIG. 121), the irregular game determination data may be set to "1".
In this case, after step S390, the irregular game determination data is cleared (similar to step S353 in FIG. 121).

Although the ninth embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description and can be modified in various ways, such as the following.
(1) In the above embodiment, the non-recommended pressing order (the unilaterally advantageous pressing order) is the irregular pressing of the first stop in the middle or the first stop on the right. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the middle first stop or the right first stop may be used. Furthermore, as a non-recommended push order (one-sided advantageous push order), it is also possible to set only the first left stop or a push order that includes the first left stop. For example, the first stop in the center may be set as the recommended push order, and the first left stop and the first right stop may be set as the non-recommended push order.
Further, the recommended pressing order is not limited to specifying only the first stop, and for example, the recommended pressing order may be "left center right." In this case, when the "left/right middle" operation is performed, it is preferable to display the recommended image at the second stop (right).

(2) In the above embodiment, a recommended image can be displayed in order to inform the player that the push order is not recommended (that the push order is not recommended). However, the display method for informing the player that the order of presses is not recommended is not limited to displaying the recommended image. For example, instead of displaying a new recommended image, the effect image may be changed. For example, the screen may be darkened (reducing the visibility of the image) to notify the player that the push order for the current game is not the recommended push order.
In addition, when informing the player that the screen is not in the recommended pressing order by darkening the screen, if there is a discrepancy between the displayed content and the internal state, the visibility of the displayed content may be significantly reduced. Although there is no problem, it is preferable to make the displayed content completely invisible.
Furthermore, it may be possible to notify that the pressing order is not the recommended one by setting the lighting and blinking pattern of the production lamp 21 provided in the gaming machine (slot machine 10) to a unique pattern.
Furthermore, a sound output from the speaker 22 may be used to notify that the pressing order is not the recommended one.

(3) The display area of the recommended images can be set in various ways. For example, the recommended images can be displayed so as to cover the entire image display area of the image display device 23.
Secondly, the recommended image may be displayed in a partial range of the image display area of the image display device 23 .
However, when a recommended image is displayed, if there is a discrepancy between the display content and the internal state, it is preferable to display the recommended image so that the display content (the portion including the discrepancy) is hidden.

(4) In the ninth embodiment, the order of pressing the stop switch 42 is determined at the time of the first stop, and if the order is correct, it is determined that the order is the recommended order. However, this is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to determine whether the order is the recommended order or not based on the stop results. In this case, the order of pressing the stop switch 42 is not determined.
In addition, when determining whether or not the recommended push order is selected based on the winning combination, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the winning combination differs between the recommended and non-recommended push orders even if the winning combination is the same (same winning flag).
However, when determining the recommended push order based on the stop results, it is difficult to make such a determination unless all reels 31 stop. For this reason, the stop results are checked when all reels stop, and the recommended image is displayed only when it is determined that the stop results are based on a non-recommended push order.
Therefore, when displaying a recommended image at the first stop point, it is preferable to determine whether or not the recommended pressing order is based on the pressing order of the stop switch 42.

(5) The biased bell shown in FIG. 105 is a small combination with essentially four choices in the pressing order. However, the number of choices is not limited to this, and it is also possible to further increase the number of choices by changing the pressing order and color.
For example, by setting the pressing order to 4 choices as described above, and further setting the color of the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 to 2 choices each (pressing the correct symbol color), the color of the correct symbol There are four options. As a result, the biased bell becomes "4 selections in push order x 4 choices in color = 16 choices in total" (hereinafter referred to as "16 selections biased bell").
In this case, when the 16-choice-biased bell is won, the system may be configured so that when the 16-choice-biased bell is won, the 1-card winning combination is "PB=1". On the other hand, when the 16-choice-biased bell is won, if the pushing order and color are correct, the winning combination may be configured so that "PB=1" and a 15-card combination is won.

Furthermore, when winning a 16-choice-biased bell, if it is an irregular push and the push order and color are not correct, it can be configured so that 1 card wins or is lost (0 cards). Can be mentioned.
Then, when you win the 16-choice-biased bell, if you randomly press the irregular press, the probability of winning a 15-card winning combination is "1/16", and the winning winning combination of 1-card winning is a probability of "7.5/16", When configured so that the probability of winning is 7.5/16 (0 coins), the base can be further lowered than when using the biased bell shown in Fig. 105, and the medal payout during AT is possible. The number can be increased.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, a rare combination having a unilaterally advantageous pressing order is provided, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order when the rare combination is won, an AT lottery is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rare combination may be a combination that can be pressed in any order, similar to watermelon and the like.
Also, when winning a biased bell, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended push order, an AT lottery will be executed (or the AT lottery will be given preferential treatment), and if the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended push order, an AT lottery will be executed. It may be configured such that the lottery is not executed (or the AT lottery is ignored).
(7) In the advantageous zone and non-AT, if you operate in the recommended push order, the number of ceiling games and number of periodic games (described later) will be updated for each game, but if you operate in the non-recommended push order, One example is that the number of ceiling games and the number of periodic games are not updated regardless of the winning combination.
Here, the "number of periodic games" includes, for example, one in which an AT lottery is held every time a predetermined number of games (for example, "100") are played.
In addition, in a game in which the winning combination is won in any pressing order, the number of ceiling games and the number of periodic games may or may not be updated.

(8) In the case of an advantageous zone and non-AT, when the player was operated in a non-recommended push order in a game in which he won a winning combination of push order, a recommended image was displayed. Here, when executing an AT lottery etc. in a game where the winning combination does not matter in the push order, if the operation is performed in a non-recommended press order, the AT lottery etc. will be executed or not (the AT lottery etc. lottery results will be ).
Since the expected value of the push-order-independent combination does not change depending on the push order, in games where the push-order does not matter role is won, an AT lottery etc. cannot be executed even if the player is operated in a non-recommended push order. It is possible. As a result, even if the player presses in the wrong order in a game where he or she wins a combination that does not require any pressing order, the result will not be disadvantageous to the player, and the results of the AT lottery etc. will be reflected in the performance image after the recommended image has been displayed. Therefore, players will not be disappointed. At the same time, by displaying the recommended image, it becomes possible to inform the player of the recommended pressing order in an advantageous section and non-AT.
On the other hand, in a game where you win a combination that does not require a push order, if you operate in a non-recommended push order, and you do not want to perform an AT lottery, etc. (invalidate the results of an AT lottery, etc.), the display of the recommended image ends. Since the results of the AT lottery etc. are not reflected later, it becomes possible to clearly communicate to players the disadvantages of operating in a non-recommended press order, and to urge players to be careful. Become.

(9) In the ninth embodiment (including modified examples), the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of a gaming machine, but it may also be applied to, for example, a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine). can.
(10) The first to ninth embodiments (including modified examples) are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combination with other embodiments.

<Tenth embodiment>
The tenth embodiment includes a medal selector 110 for sorting the medals M input from the medal input port 47, a chute member 120 for guiding the medals M allowed to be input by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, The present invention relates to a slot machine 10 having a return member 130 for guiding medals M whose insertion is not permitted by a medal selector 110 to a medal receiving tray 19.

The tenth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 124 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 125 is a block diagram schematically showing control of the slot machine 10 in the tenth embodiment.
Note that, in FIG. 125, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, a setting change (reset) switch 153, a push button 86, and a cross key 87 are added to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 124, the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front, and a front door 12 attached to cover the opening of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the cabinet 13 is configured into a box shape with an open front by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a top plate 13c, a right side plate, a left side plate (not shown), and the like.
Furthermore, the front door 12 is attached to the cabinet 13 so as to cover the front opening of the cabinet 13.

The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are confirmed, when an error occurs, when medals are replenished, etc.
Specifically, the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 are attached via a hinge (not shown).
Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player).

Furthermore, a door key insertion slot (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the locking device. The door key insertion slot is a portion into which a door key for operating the locking device is inserted.
When the front door 12 is closed and locked, inserting the door key into the door key insertion slot and turning the door key clockwise in this state unlocks the door. When the front door 12 is pulled in the unlocked state, the front door 12 rotates about the hinge, and the front door 12 is opened.

Further, the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 is provided with a door switch 17 (FIG. 125) for detecting whether the front door 12 is opened. When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on.
Furthermore, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (FIG. 125).
Then, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in a closed state when the door switch 17 is off, and determines that the front door 12 is in an open state when the door switch 17 is on. It is configured to judge that.

Further, a display window 18 is provided at the center of the front door 12. The display window 18 is configured to be located in front of the symbol display device 14 when the front door 12 is closed. The three reels 31 included in the symbol display device 14 can be viewed through the display window 18.
Further, below the display window 18 on the front side of the front door 12 (the side facing the player), a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, etc. are provided. There is. The medal insertion slot 47 is a part into which the player inserts the medal M when betting or crediting the medal M.

Furthermore, a medal payout port 16 and a medal receiving tray 19 for receiving the medals M discharged from the medal payout port 16 are provided at the lower front of the front door 12. The medal payout port 16 is an opening through which the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 and the medals M whose insertion is not permitted by the medal selector 110 pass.
Further, at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player), there is a medal selector for sorting the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47. 110 is provided.

Specifically, a selector base 113 (FIG. 126) is fixed to a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 on the back side of the front door 12, and a medal selector 110 is removably attached to this selector base 113. .
The selector base 113 is for removably holding the medal selector 110, and is formed by bending sheet metal, and has a screw installed at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 on the back side of the front door 12. is fixed. The medal selector 110 is detachably attached to the selector base 113.

Furthermore, a chute member 120 is provided on the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position adjacent to the medal selector 110 for guiding the medals M permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35 .
Furthermore, at a position on the back side of the front door 12 corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout port 16, a return member 130 is provided for guiding medals M that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal receiving tray 19.

Further, a medal payout device 15 is disposed at the lower inside of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The medal dispensing device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals M, a hopper motor 36 (FIG. 125) that is driven when dispensing the medals M stored in the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 (FIG. 125) for dispensing the medals M stored in the hopper 35. A dispensing sensor 37 (FIG. 125) for detecting M is provided.

The hopper 35 is for storing the medals M. In addition, a storage receiving port 35a, which is an opening that receives the medals M guided by the chute member 120, is provided at the top of the hopper 35. The storage receiving port 35a opens downward from the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the end on the downstream side of the medal guide passage 121).
As explained in the first embodiment, the dispensing sensor 37 is composed of a pair of dispensing sensors 37a and 37b (Figure 125) arranged at a predetermined interval.
When a medal M is paid out, a predetermined moving member (not shown) is moved by the medal M, and the movement of the predetermined moving member turns on/off the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b.

Further, in FIG. 125, the hopper motor 36 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the output port 52, and the dispensing sensor 37a and the dispensing sensor 37b are connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51. It is electrically connected to the control board 50.
The main control board 50 drives the hopper motor 36 when dispensing the medals M from the medal dispensing device 15.
Further, the main control board 50 determines whether the medals M have been normally paid out based on whether the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

In FIG. 124, a power supply unit (not shown) is arranged in the lower part of the interior of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The power supply unit includes a power supply board (not shown) that supplies power to the main control board 50, sub-control board 80, etc., a power switch 11 (FIG. 125) that is operated to turn on/off the power, and a power switch 11 (FIG. 125) that supplies power to the main control board 50, sub-control board 80, etc. A setting key switch 152 (FIG. 125) that is operated when changing the state or setting confirmation state, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 (FIG. 125) that is operated when changing a setting value or canceling an error. It is equipped with

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated to turn the power on and off.
Turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "powering on,""turning on the power," or "resume power supply."
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the power supply."

The setting key switch 152 is a switch operated to transition to a setting change state in which setting values can be changed, or a setting confirmation state in which setting values cannot be changed but can be confirmed.
Inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion slot 151 (FIG. 125) and rotating the setting key approximately 90 degrees clockwise turns on the setting key switch 152. When the setting key is returned to its original position, the setting key The switch 152 is configured to be turned off.

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves as both the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153.
Further, the setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing the set value in the setting change state.
Furthermore, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to cancel error notification after the cause of the error has been removed.
In this way, the setting change (reset) switch 153 functions as the setting change switch 153 in the setting change state, and functions as the reset switch 153 when notifying an error.

Hereinafter, it will be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 153,""setting change switch 153," and "reset switch 153."
Regarding various switches such as the setting change (reset) switch 153, turning on the switch is referred to as "operating", the on state is referred to as "being operated", and the off state is referred to as "being operated". This is sometimes referred to as "not being operated."
Note that in the tenth embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are used in common, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

In FIG. 125, a setting key switch 152 and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51.
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on, the configuration changes to a setting change state, and when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state. has been done.

When the setting change state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 mounted on the main control board 50. Furthermore, in the setting change state, the setting value is changed (increased by "1") each time the setting change switch 153 is operated. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state ends and the setting value display LED 73 goes out. Note that after the start switch 41 is operated, the setting value can no longer be changed even if the setting change switch 153 is operated.

Further, the set value is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
In the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value is changed, and the changed setting value is stored (overwritten) at a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
In addition, in the setting change state, simply operating the setting change switch 153 will not store (overwrite) the changed setting value in the predetermined address of the RWM 53, and operating the start switch 41 will confirm the setting value, and at this time, The determined setting value may be stored (overwritten) at a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Further, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends and the setting value display LED 73 turns off.

Next, the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130 will be described in further detail with reference to Figures 126 to 134.
Figure 126 is a diagram showing the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130, and is a diagram explaining the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.
Figure 127 is a diagram in which a hopper 35 is added to Figure 126, and explains the relationship between the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the hopper 35.

FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the width of the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the thickness of the medal M.
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the dimensions of each part of the chute member 120 and the diameter and radius of the medal M.
Figure 130 is a diagram explaining the relationship between one medal M that has fallen into the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and another medal M traveling from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the width of the medal guiding passage 121 of the chute member 120 and the dimensions of each part of the screw 127 that fixes the chute member 120.
FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example in which neither the return receiving port 131 nor the upper edge 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a closing member 140 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, and a part of the return acceptance port 131 is blocked by the closing member 140. It is.
FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a part of the return acceptance port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

As shown in FIG. 126, the medal selector 110 has a medal passage 111 through which medals inserted from the medal slot 47 pass. The medal passage 111 is formed in a substantially L-shape, and as shown in FIG. 126, it has a vertical portion 111a extending substantially vertically downward from the left side of the top surface of the medal selector 110, and a vertical portion 111a extending diagonally downward to the right from the lower end of the vertical portion 111a. It has an inclined part 111b that is inclined and reaches the lower right side of the medal selector 110. Further, an entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the medal selector 110, and an exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided on the lower right side of the medal selector 110.

When the medal selector 110 is attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the front door 12, the entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is located vertically below the medal slot 47. The medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 are sent to a medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110.
Further, as shown in FIG. 126, a blocker 45 for allowing/disallowing the insertion of medals M is provided at an intermediate position of the inclined part 111b of the medal passage 111. An input sensor 44 capable of detecting medals M passing through the medal passage 111 is provided downstream of the blocker 45.

The blocker 45 is for permitting/disallowing the insertion of medals M, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an output port 52 (FIG. 125).
The main control board 50 controls the amount of medals M during the game (from the time when the reels 31 start rotating until the time when all the reels 31 stop and when the winning combination ends the payout of the medal M corresponding to the winning combination). The blocker 45 is controlled to disallow input.

Further, when the specified number of medals M has already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, it is not possible to bet or credit any more medals M. The blocker 45 is controlled to disallow input.
On the other hand, when a game is not being played (after the end of the payout of medals M and before the start of rotation of the reel 31), the number of bets on medals M has not reached the specified number, or the number of credits has reached the upper limit. When the medal M has not been reached, the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to permit the insertion of the medal M.

When the insertion of medals M is not permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to remove the medals M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 from the medal path 111 at the position of the blocker 45 and cause them to fall downward. . Further, the medals M that have come off the medal path 111 at the blocker 45 and fallen downward are guided by the return member 130, ejected from the medal payout port 16, and stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

On the other hand, when the insertion of medals M is permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to guide the medals M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111. . Further, the medals M guided to the downstream side from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 pass through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b (hereinafter both are collectively referred to as the "insertion sensor 44"), and exit the medal passage 111. 111d, guided by the chute member 120, and stored in the hopper 35.

The input sensor 44 is for detecting the medal M guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, and as shown in FIG. 126, a pair of input sensors 44a are arranged at a predetermined interval. and an input sensor 44b. The input sensor 44a is placed on the upstream side, and the input sensor 44b is placed on the downstream side. Moreover, the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (FIG. 125).

The medals M guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 are first detected by the upstream input sensor 44a, and then detected by the downstream input sensor 44b.
Specifically, when the medal M is guided to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, the input sensor 44a on the upstream side first detects the medal M (changes from OFF to ON).
When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44b on the downstream side detects the medal M (turns on from off).

When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the upstream insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (turns from on to off).
When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the downstream insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (turns from on to off).
Then, the main control board 50 determines whether the medal M has passed through the medal path 111 normally based on whether the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on/off within a predetermined time range. do.

The chute member 120 is for guiding the medals M, which are allowed to be inputted by the medal selector 110 and discharged from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, to the hopper 35 disposed in the lower part of the interior of the cabinet 13. It is provided on the back side of the door 12 at a position adjacent to the medal selector 110.

Further, the chute member 120 has a medal guide path 121 for guiding the medals M from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.
The medal guide path 121 is gently inclined so that the height thereof gradually decreases from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.

Further, in FIG. 126, the medal M is allowed to be inserted by the medal selector 110, and when it passes through the medal passage 111, it is discharged from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111. Here, the medal selector 110 is attached to the back surface of the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 124. Therefore, the exit 111d is located closer to the back surface of the front door 12. On the other hand, the hopper 35 is located closer to the center inside the cabinet 13, as shown in FIG. 124. In other words, the hopper 35 is located on the near side with respect to the outlet 111d in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 126. Therefore, there is a certain distance between the outlet 111d and the hopper 35. Therefore, the medal guide passage 121 has a shape curved in an arc toward the hopper 35 side in order to guide the medals M discharged from the outlet 111d toward the hopper 35 side.

126, the chute member 120 has a bottom portion 122 that constitutes the bottom surface of the medal guide passage 121, an inner wall portion 123 that constitutes the inner side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121, and an outer wall portion 124 that constitutes the outer side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121. The upper part of the medal guide passage 121 is open.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the chute member 120 has a step portion 125 at a position on the bottom surface 122 corresponding to the middle of the medal guide passage 121, the step portion 125 being lower on the hopper 35 (downstream) side than on the medal selector 110 (upstream) side.

As described above, the medal guide passage 121 is formed in a curved arc shape. Therefore, the medal M moves from the upstream side to the downstream side on the bottom surface 122 of the medal guide passage 121, and its speed is decelerated by coming into contact with the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124 midway along the medal guide passage 121.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 129, a step portion 125 is provided at a position on the bottom surface portion 122 that corresponds to the middle of the medal guide path 121, where the downstream side is lower in height than the upstream side. Then, the medal M moving from the upstream side to the downstream side of the medal guide path 121 is dropped at the step portion 125. This allows the medal M that has decelerated due to contact with the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124 to be accelerated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, a fixing portion 126 is provided near the end of the outer wall portion 124 of the chute member 120 on the medal selector 110 side. The fixing portion 126 is for fixing the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12, and protrudes upward from the upper end of the outer wall portion 124. Further, the fixing portion 126 is provided with a screw hole (not shown) that penetrates from the front side to the back side. Further, the screw hole passing through the fixing part 126 is provided above the upper end of the outer wall part 124.

The chute member 120 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through a screw hole in the fixing part 126. Further, when the chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127, the screw 127 is located above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124.

Here, as shown in FIG. 128, the thickness of the medal M is assumed to be "T".
Further, as shown in FIG. 129, the diameter of the medal M is "D", and the radius of the medal M is "R". Furthermore, the height of the stepped portion 125 is "H1," the height of the inner wall 123 is "H2," and the height of the outer wall 124 is "H3."
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 131, the width of the medal guiding passage 121 (the distance between the inner wall 123 and the outer wall 124) is set as "L1", the total length of the screw 127 is set as "L2", and the diameter of the screw head is set as "L1". Let it be "L3".

The width "L1" of the medal guiding path 121, the thickness "T" of the medal M, and the diameter "D" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "L1>T" and "L1<D". There is. That is, the width "L1" of the medal guiding path 121 is wider (larger) than the thickness "T" of the medal M, and narrower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M.
Thereby, the medal M is moved on the bottom part 122 of the medal guiding path 121 in an upright state.

Furthermore, the height “H2” of the inner wall portion 123, the height “H3” of the outer wall portion 124, and the diameter “D” of the medal M are set so that “H2<D” and “H3<D” are satisfied. It is configured. That is, the height "H2" of the inner wall part 123 is lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M, and the height "H3" of the outer wall part 124 is also lower than the diameter "D" of the medal M ( small).
As a result, the medal M moves on the bottom surface 122 of the medal guiding path 121 with the upper part of the medal M projecting upward from the upper ends of the inner wall 123 and the outer wall 124.

Furthermore, regarding the height “H1” of the stepped portion 125, the height “H2” of the inner wall portion 123, the height “H3” of the outer wall portion 124, and the radius “R” of the medal M, “H1<H2”. , "H1<H3", and "H1<R". That is, the height "H1" of the step part 125 is lower (smaller) than the height "H2" of the inner wall part 123 and lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall part 124, and Lower (smaller) than radius "R".
This prevents the medal M from climbing over the inner wall 123 and the outer wall 124 and jumping out of the medal guiding path 121 when falling at the stepped portion 125.

Note that the height “H2” of the inner wall portion 123 and the height “H3” of the outer wall portion 124 may be configured to satisfy “H2=H3”, or may satisfy “H2<H3”. It may be configured so that "H2>H3" is satisfied.
That is, the height "H2" of the inner wall 123 may be equal to the height "H3" of the outer wall 124, or may be higher (larger) than the height "H3" of the outer wall 124. , may be lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124.

Further, the width "L1" of the medal guiding passage 121, the total length "L2" of the screw 127, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head are configured to satisfy "L1<L2" and "L1<L3". . That is, the overall length “L2” of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width “L1” of the medal guiding path 121, and the diameter “L3” of the screw head is thicker (larger) than the width “L1” of the medal guiding path 121.
Thereby, even if the screw 127 comes off from the back surface of the front door 12, it is possible to prevent the removed screw 127 from entering the medal guiding passage 121, so that the passage of the medal M can be prevented from being obstructed. .
Further, it is configured to satisfy "L2>L3". That is, the total length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the diameter "L3" of the screw head. Thereby, the chute member 120 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 with the screws 127.

Note that a locking portion (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the chute member 120. This locking portion is for locking the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12. Then, while the sheet member 120 is locked to the back surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 using the screw 127 passed through the screw hole of the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes off, the chute member 120 will not separate from the back surface of the front door 12 and fall.

Moreover, the medal slot 47 has a medal placement part (not shown) on which a plurality of medals M can be placed in a lined state. In the tenth embodiment, the medal placement section is capable of placing ten medals M in a row. Then, a plurality of medals M placed on the medal placement section in a lined manner can be successively inserted from the medal insertion slot 47.

Further, when the thickness of the medal M is "T", the width of the medal guide path 121 is "L1", and the number of medals M that can be placed on the medal placement section is "M", "L1< (M÷2)×T”. In other words, the width “L1” of the medal guide path 121 is narrower than the thickness “(M÷2)×T” of half the number of medals M that can be placed on the medal placement portion of the medal slot 47. (small).

The return member 130 is for guiding the medals M whose input is not permitted by the medal selector 110 and the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal receiving tray 19, It is provided at a position corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout port 16 on the back surface.
When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, a medal return passage 132 and a medal payout passage 134 are formed between the back surface of the front door 12 and the return member 130, as shown in FIG. be done.

Further, the medal return passage 132 is a passage for guiding the medals M whose insertion is not permitted by the medal selector 110 to the medal payout port 16.
Furthermore, the medal payout passage 134 is a passage that guides the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16.
Note that the medal return passage 132 and the medal payout passage 134 merge in the middle to become one passage.

126, a return receiving opening 131 is provided on the upper part of the return member 130. The return receiving opening 131 is an opening for receiving a medal M that has been prohibited from being inserted by the medal selector 110 and has fallen downward after falling out of the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45, and is an opening that serves as the entrance to a medal return passage 132.
Then, the medal M, which is not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and falls downward off the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45, passes through the return receiving port 131, is guided by the medal return passage 132, passes through the medal payout port 16, and is stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

Further, a payout receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the return member 130 and toward the right in Fig. 126. The payout receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15, and serves as an entrance to the medal payout passage 134, and is configured to be located in front of the medal payout device 15 when the front door 12 is closed.
Then, the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass through the payout receiving port 133, are guided by the medal payout passage 134, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

126, the peripheral edge of the return receiving opening 131 at the upper part of the return member 130 is referred to as the "upper edge 135." In other words, the upper edge 135 is a part that corresponds to the peripheral edge of the return receiving opening 131. When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be approximately horizontal.
126, a gap 112 is provided between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. An upper edge portion 135 is disposed vertically below the gap 112. As a result, the return receiving opening 131 is not disposed vertically below the gap 112.

Also, as shown in FIG. 128, the thickness of the medal M is "T", the spacing of the gap 112 is "W", and the width of the upper edge 135 is "B".
The thickness "T" of the medal M and the spacing "W" of the gap 112 are configured to satisfy "W>T." In other words, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is larger than the thickness "T" of the medal M. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 130, the medal M can be inserted into the gap 112.
More specifically, it is configured to satisfy "W ≈ 2 × T". In other words, the width "W" of the gap 112 is set to be approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, "2" medals M can be placed in the gap 112.

In the tenth embodiment, a selector base 113 (Figure 126) is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal insertion slot 47, and a medal selector 110 is removably attached to this selector base 113.
126 , the right side of the selector base 113 is disposed between the right side surface of the medal selector 110 (the surface on which the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided) and the upstream end of the chute member 120. The gap 112 is provided between the right side of the selector base 113 and the upstream end of the chute member 120.

Further, the selector base 113 is formed by bending a sheet metal, and the thickness of the sheet metal constituting the selector base 113 is set to be 0.8 mm to 1.0 mm.
Furthermore, the thickness "T" of the medal M is "1.6" mm, and the interval "W" between the gaps 12 is "3.2" mm.
Therefore, the distance from the right side surface of the medal selector 110 (the surface where the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided) to the upstream end of the chute member 120 is 4.0 mm to 4.2 mm. ” mm.

Further, the upper edge portion 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, and further, regarding the thickness “T” of the medal M, the interval “W” between the gap 112, and the width “B” of the upper edge portion 135, It is configured to satisfy "B>T" and "B>W". That is, the width “B” of the upper edge portion 135 is larger than the thickness “T” of the medal M and larger than the interval “W” between the gaps 112. In addition, the upper edge 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal. Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 can be placed on the upper edge 135.

For example, a hall clerk may insert a medal M into the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 during maintenance of the medal selector 110. At this time, since the medal M is placed on the upper edge 135, the medal M can remain in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.
However, there are cases where the clerk at the hall forgets that the medal M is still in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and closes the front door 12. In this case, the medal M falls from the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 due to the impact when the front door 12 is closed.

At this time, the upper edge 135 is located vertically below the gap 112, and the return receiving port 131 is not located there, so the medal M that falls from the gap 112 does not fall into the return receiving port 131. Therefore, the medal M that falls from the gap 112 does not pass through the medal return passage 132, the medal payout port 16, and reach the medal tray 19. This makes it possible to prevent the medal M that has been placed in the gap 112 by a hall staff member for maintenance of the medal selector 110 from being given to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127, the gap 112 is arranged above the storage receiving port 35a of the hopper 35. That is, the storage receiving port 35a of the hopper 35 opens at a position lower than the gap 112. Thereby, the medals M that have fallen from the gap 112 when the front door 12 is closed can be dropped into the storage receiving opening 35a, and thus can be stored in the hopper 35.

Further, as described above, the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, so when "1" medal M is inserted into the gaps 112, the gaps 112 Since there is a gap between the medal M and the medal M, there is no possibility that "1" medal M cannot be taken out from the gap 112.
Then, when the front door 12 is closed with this "1" medal M placed in the gap 112, this "1" medal M falls from the gap 112 due to the impact and enters the storage receiving port 35a. It falls and is stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, if the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly wider (larger) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, when "two" medals M are placed in the gap 112, the "two" medals M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112.
When the front door 12 is closed with these "2" medals M remaining in the gap 112, just as when the front door 12 is closed with "1" medal M remaining in the gap 112, the medal falls from the gap 112 due to the impact of closing the front door 12, falls into the storage receiving port 35a, and is stored in the hopper 35.

Conversely, if the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly narrower (smaller) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, "2" medals M will be forced into the gaps 112. In this case, it will not become impossible to take out the "2" pushed medals M from the gap 112.
However, if the front door 12 is closed with "2" medals M being pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may remain in the gap 112.

Here, as shown in FIG. 130, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 is inserted into the gap 112 so as to block the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110. Stay in. Therefore, when one medal M remains within the gap 112, when another medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and heads toward the chute member 120, It hits the first medal M in the gap 112 and stops.

Furthermore, when another medal M passing through the medal passage 111 hits one medal M within the gap 112, the upper end of the one medal M within the gap 112 is at the center of the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111. Located higher up. Therefore, other medals M passing through the medal passage 111 will not cross over the one medal M in the gap 112.
Therefore, when one medal M enters the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

Further, although it is not possible to directly detect that the medal M remains within the gap 112, as described above, when one medal M remains within the gap 112, it is not possible to directly detect that the medal M remains within the gap 112. The other medals M hit the one medal M in the gap 112 and stop. At this time, other medals M remain near the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, so that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on.

In addition, if the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error has been detected in which the medal M is stuck (remains) in the medal selector 110, and notifies the user of this fact. This makes it possible to indirectly detect that the medal M is stuck in the gap 112. The detection and notification of errors will be described later.

Further, when the chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127, the return receiving port 131 is not arranged vertically below the screw 127.
Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes off from the back surface of the front door 12, the removed screw 127 will not fall into the return acceptance slot 131. Therefore, the screw 127 that has come off does not pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and reach the medal receiving tray 19.

Further, as shown in FIG. 125, the medal selector 110 includes a passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine whether there is an error in which the medals M become clogged (stagnated) or if there is a trifle. Although not shown in FIG. 126, the passage sensor 46 is provided in the vertical portion 111a of the medal passage 111. That is, the passage sensor 46 is provided upstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111.

Therefore, the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 are first detected by the passage sensor 46. In addition, the passage sensor 46 detects the amount of medals inserted from the medal slot 47 regardless of whether the blocker 45 allows the insertion of medals M (on state) or disallows the insertion of medals M (off state). M can be detected.

Although not shown in FIGS. 124 to 134, the chute member 120 is provided with a chute sensor in the middle of the medal guide path 121. The chute sensor, like the passage sensor 46, is a sensor provided to determine whether there is an error in which the medal M gets stuck (stagnated) or if there is a trifle. Since the chute member 120 is for guiding the medals M permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, the chute sensor is provided downstream from the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b.

Further, the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51.
Note that both the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor may be provided, only one of them may be provided, or both may be provided.

Next, error detection, error notification, and cancellation of error notification in the tenth embodiment will be described.
For example, when the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 generates an error in which the medal M gets stuck (remains) in the medal selector 110 (hereinafter referred to as a "selector retention error"). ) is detected, and a notification indicating a selector retention error (hereinafter referred to as "selector retention notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating a selector retention error (for example, "CE") on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification.

Further, when the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it transmits a command indicating the selector retention error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector retention command") to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the selector retention command, it executes selector retention notification through the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a selector retention notification, and displays the words "Selector error" on the image display device 23, for example.

Also, for example, if the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b are not turned on in this order (the medal M does not pass normally), the main control board 50 determines that it has detected an error in which the medal M does not pass normally (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passage error"), and issues an alert indicating the selector passage error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passage error alert").

As described above, when the medals M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44a is first turned on from off, and then the insertion sensor 44b is turned on. The input sensor 44a changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44a changes from on to off, and finally the input sensor 44b changes from on to off.
Then, when the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on and off in the above order, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on and off in the above order. If it does not turn off, it is determined that a selector passing error has been detected.

Further, when the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally, it executes a process of adding "1" to the number of bets or the number of credits for the medal M.
On the other hand, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passing error, it displays a code (for example, "CP") indicating the selector passing error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector passing error notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passing error, it transmits a command indicating the selector passing error (hereinafter referred to as the “selector passing error command”) to the sub-control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the selector passing error command, it issues a selector passing error notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the selector passing error notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Selector error" on the image display device 23.

Note that it may be determined that a selector passage error (or selector backflow error) has been detected when the input sensor 44b is turned on from off while the input sensor 44a is in an off state.
Also, the input sensor 44b changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44b changes from on to off, and finally, the input sensor 44a changes from on to off. When this happens, it may be determined that a selector passage error (or selector backflow error) has been detected.

Further, when the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined period of time after detecting the medal M, and stops detecting the medal M after the elapse of the predetermined time, the main control board 50 detects that the medal M has passed normally. I judge that I did.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the passage sensor 46 detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Further, when the passage sensor 46 stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed since the passage sensor 46 detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has been detected.

In addition, when the chute sensor continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined time from the time it detects the medal M, and the medal M is no longer detected after the predetermined time has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally.
In contrast, if the chute sensor continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the chute sensor first detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Furthermore, if the chute sensor no longer detects the medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed since it detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has been detected.

The main control board 50 also includes an input monitoring counter (not shown).
The insertion monitoring counter is incremented by 1 when the medal M passes normally through the passage sensor 46 when the blocker 45 is in the ON state (a state that allows passage of the medal M), and the medal M is added to the input sensor 44a. This is a counter that is decremented by "1" when the input signal passes through the input sensor 44b normally. Therefore, the input monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0" during normal operation.
Note that when the blocker 45 is in an off state (a state in which passage of the medal M is not permitted), "1" is not added to the input monitoring counter even if the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46.
Further, the input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from an off state (a state in which the passage of the medal M is not permitted) to an on state (a state in which the passage of the medal M is permitted).

When the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally, and the medal M is added to the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b. When it passes normally, "1" is subtracted from the input monitoring counter.
When the blocker 45 is in the ON state, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the passage of the medal M and only the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b detect the passage of the medal M, the input monitoring counter is set to "-1'', and the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has been detected.

Further, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the passage sensor 46 detects the passage of the medal M, but the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, and then the passage sensor 46 detects the passage of the medal M. , the input monitoring counter becomes "2" and the main control board 50 determines that a loading monitoring error has been detected.

In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the input monitoring counter is incremented by 1 when the medal M passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally, and when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally. It may also be a counter that is decremented by "1" from time to time.
That is, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the medal M passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally, the main control board 50 increments the input monitoring counter by "1" and the medal M is sent to the shoot. When the sensor passes normally, "1" may be subtracted from the input monitoring counter.

When the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b detect the passage of the medal M, but the chute sensor does not detect the passage of the medal M, and then the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b When detecting passage of the medal M, the input monitoring counter becomes "2", and the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected.
In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, when only the chute sensor detects the passage of the medal M without the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b detecting the passage of the medal M, the input monitoring counter is set to "-". 1'', and the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected.

The normal value of the input monitoring counter is not limited to "0" to "1". In other words, the main control board 50 does not necessarily determine that an input monitoring error has occurred when the input monitoring counter reaches "2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "3" or more, or a predetermined value of "-2" or less.

In addition, when adding/subtracting the input signal from the passage sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b to the loading monitoring counter, the main control board 50 switches the blocker 45 from the OFF state to the ON state. Clear the input monitoring counter when
However, when adding/subtracting the input signal from the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor to the input monitoring counter, the main control board 50 changes the blocker 45 from the off state to the on state. When doing so, the input monitoring counter may or may not be cleared.
That is, when the input signal from the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor are added/subtracted by the input monitoring counter, when the blocker 45 changes from the OFF state to the ON state, It may be cleared or may not be cleared.

Further, a charge monitoring counter for the passage sensor 46 and a charge monitoring counter for the chute sensor may be provided separately.
That is, the input monitoring counter can include a first input monitoring counter and a second input monitoring counter.
Further, the first input monitoring counter is a counter that is added/subtracted by the input signal from the passage sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b.
Furthermore, the second input monitoring counter is a counter that is added/subtracted by the input signals from the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor.

That is, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the first input monitoring counter, and the medal M is added to the input sensor 44a. And when it passes through the input sensor 44b normally, "1" is subtracted from the first input monitoring counter.
Then, the main control board 50 detects a loading monitoring error when the first loading monitoring counter is no longer a normal value (for example, when it reaches a predetermined value of "-1" or less or a predetermined value of "2" or more). I judge that I did.

In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the medal M passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the second input monitoring counter, and the medal M When it passes through the chute sensor normally, "1" is subtracted from the second input monitoring counter.
Then, the main control board 50 detects a loading monitoring error when the second loading monitoring counter is no longer a normal value (for example, when it reaches a predetermined value of "-1" or less or a predetermined value of "2" or more). I judge that I did.

For example, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the main control board 50 may issue an error message indicating that no medals M are stored in the hopper 35. (hereinafter referred to as "hopper empty error") is detected, and a notification indicating the hopper empty error (hereinafter referred to as "hopper empty notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code (for example, "HE") indicating a hopper empty error on the acquisition number display LED 78 (FIG. 125) as a hopper empty notification.

In addition, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper empty error, it sends a command indicating that the hopper is empty (hereinafter referred to as an “empty command”) to the sub-control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the empty command, it executes a hopper empty notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the hopper empty notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Hopper empty" on the image display device 23.

Further, for example, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b remain on, the main control board 50 detects an error in which the medal M is jammed in the hopper 35 (hereinafter referred to as "hopper jam error"). It is determined that a hopper jam error has occurred, and a notification indicating a hopper jam error (hereinafter referred to as "hopper jam notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code (for example, "HP") indicating a hopper jam error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a hopper jam notification.

Further, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it transmits a command indicating a hopper jam (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam command") to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, it issues a hopper jam notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the attendant" from the speaker 22 as a hopper jam notification, and displays the words "Hopper Jam" on the image display device 23.

When the various errors described above are detected, the main control board 50 stops the progress of the game until the various error notifications are canceled.
Moreover, if the causes of the various errors mentioned above are removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect various errors, but once the various error notifications are executed, the causes of the corresponding errors will be removed (error It is not canceled just when the reset switch 153 is no longer detected, but continues until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). Then, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 cancel various error notifications.

For example, in the event of a selector retention error, the cause of the selector retention error can be removed by opening the front door 12 and removing the medals M stuck (retained) in the medal selector 110. Thereafter, by operating the reset switch 153, the selector retention notification can be canceled.
In the case of a selector passage error, the cause of the selector passage error can be removed by opening the front door 12 and removing the medal M in the medal selector 110, as in the case of a selector retention error. Thereafter, by operating the reset switch 153, the selector passing error notification can be canceled.

Furthermore, in the event of a hopper empty error, the front door 12 is opened and the hopper 35 is replenished with medals M, thereby eliminating the cause of the hopper empty error. Thereafter, by operating the reset switch 153, the hopper empty notification can be canceled.
The hopper empty notification can also be canceled by turning the door key counterclockwise about 45 degrees and turning the release switch from off to on after replenishing the hopper 35 with medals M.

Furthermore, when a hopper jam error occurs, the cause of the hopper jam error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the medals M stuck in the hopper 35. The hopper jam notification can then be cancelled by operating the reset switch 153.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 (hereinafter referred to as "door opening") by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 sends a notification indicating that the front door 12 is opened (hereinafter referred to as "door opening"). , referred to as "door open notification"). Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code (for example, "dE") indicating that the front door 12 is opened on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a door opening notification.
Further, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 issues a command indicating the opening of the front door 12 (hereinafter referred to as a "door open command"). It is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it issues a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the door open notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice message such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

Also, a release switch (not shown) for releasing the door open notification is provided near the locking device on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player). When the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot and turned counterclockwise about 45 degrees in this state, the release switch changes from off to on. In other words, when the door key is turned about 45 degrees in the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12, the release switch changes from off to on.
As described above, when the door key is inserted into the door key slot and turned 90 degrees clockwise in this state, the lock is released. When the front door 12 is pulled in the unlocked state, the front door 12 rotates about the hinge and opens.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, but once the door open notification is executed, it cannot be canceled by simply closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17; Continues until the switch is turned from off to on.
Then, while the door open notification is being executed, close the front door 12, turn off the door switch 17, and in this state turn the door key counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked) by about 45 degrees. , when the release switch is turned on from off, the door open notification is released.

In this way, the operation of turning the door key in the opposite direction to that for unlocking the front door 12 is the operation for canceling the door open notification.
Furthermore, when the door open notification is canceled, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the release switch is turned on from off, the main control board 50 transmits a command (hereinafter referred to as "notification cancellation command") indicating cancellation of the door open notification to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 ends the door open notification that is being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 135 to 145, operating modes at the time of error detection, error notification, and error cancellation in the tenth embodiment will be described.
FIGS. 135 to 142 are time charts showing operating modes at the time of error detection and error cancellation in the tenth embodiment.
FIG. 135 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the selector retention error, and when the release switch is operated after the front door 12 is closed.

When a selector retention error occurs at timing “X11” in FIG. 135, the main control board 50 detects the selector retention error. Further, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 execute selector retention notification.
Specifically, at the timing “X11” in FIG. 135, when the medal M is clogged in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 controls the selector It is determined that a retention error has been detected. Then, the main control board 50 displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80.
When the sub control board 80 receives the selector retention command, the sub control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a selector retention notification, and displays a "selector retention error" message on the image display device 23. Display characters.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened at timing "X12" in FIG. 135, the main control board 50 determines that the opening of the front door 12 (door opening) has been detected.
Specifically, when the front door 12 is opened at timing "X12" in FIG. 135, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 (door opening). I judge that I did. However, while the selector retention notification is in progress, even if the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification.

Further, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened, it transmits a door open command indicating the opening of the front door 12 to the sub control board 80.
However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification even if it receives a door open command.

After that, when the medal M stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is removed at the timing "X13" in FIG. will no longer be detected. However, once the selector retention notification is executed, it cannot be canceled simply by removing the cause of the selector retention error (no longer detecting the selector retention error), but by operating (turning on) the reset switch 153. Continue until.

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X14" in FIG. 135, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the error cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification that was being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, at the timing "X14" in FIG. 135, even if the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector retention notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. After canceling the selector retention notification, the main control board 50 then executes door open notification using the acquisition number display LED 78. Specifically, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 (door open).
Further, after canceling the selector retention notification, the sub control board 80 then executes door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound saying "The door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is closed at timing "X15" in FIG. 135, the door switch 17 is turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects opening of the front door 12. However, once the door open notification is executed, it is not canceled by simply closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17, but continues until the release switch is operated (turned on).

Thereafter, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on) at timing "X16" in FIG. 135, the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. Thereby, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying the error code on the acquisition number display LED 78, and transmits a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the door open notification that is being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

FIG. 136 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error.
In FIG. 136, at timing "X21", when the medal M is clogged in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge that.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification, and transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80.
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector retention command, it outputs the voice "Please call the staff member" from the speaker 22 as a selector retention notification, and displays the words "Selector retention error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X22" in FIG. 136, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12.
However, while the selector retention notification is in progress, even if the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, it transmits a door open command indicating the opening of the front door 12 to the sub control board 80.
However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification even if it receives a door open command.

After that, at timing "X23" in FIG. 136, the medal path 111 of the medal selector 110 is clogged with medals M, and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, that is, the cause of the selector retention error is removed. When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the selector stay notification is not activated, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the error cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification that was being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
However, although the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is then executed again at the timing "X24".

Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in FIG. 136 in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 The notification is canceled, and control is then performed to execute the door open notification. Thereafter, at timing "X24" in FIG. 136, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the selector retention notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 at the timing "X23" in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of "X24", the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is controlled to be switched from "dE" to "CE". Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 at timing "X24" in FIG.

Further, when receiving the error cancellation command at timing "X23" in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. Thereafter, when receiving the selector retention command at timing "X24" in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the selector retention notification again.

That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open" at the timing "X23" in FIG. control to switch the display from "selector retention error" to "door open". Thereafter, at the timing of "X24", the audio output from the speaker 22 is switched from "The door is open" to "Please call the attendant", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "Door open" to " Control to switch to "selector retention error".

Here, various errors such as selector congestion errors, selector passing errors, hopper empty errors, hopper jam errors, etc. are managed (detected, notified, released) by the main control board 50, but door opening is managed (detected, notified, released) in some cases by the main control board 50 and in other cases by the sub-control board 80 (detected, notified, released).
In addition, the door open notification may be deactivated (terminated) when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the door was detected as open, when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, or when the release switch is operated (from off to on, or from off to on and back to off) with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off.

Furthermore, regarding the door open notification, a code such as "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, an audio output such as "the door is open" from the speaker 22, and "door open" is displayed on the image display device 23. etc., and outputting a voice such as "The door is open" from the speaker 22, and displaying characters such as "Door open" on the image display device 23. There are two cases: a case where only a voice output such as "The door is open" is executed from the speaker 22, and a case where only a text display such as "Door is open" is executed on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, in FIG. 136, depending on the content of the processing executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", the time required from "X23" to "X24" may be extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) so as not to be discernible by human perception, or it may be relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) so as to be discernible by human perception.
For this reason, by combining the various cases described above, various operating modes are possible between the time when the selector stuck notification is temporarily released at timing "X23" in FIG. 136 and the time when the selector stuck notification is executed again at timing "X24."

In other words, in FIG. 136, when the door open notification is executed between once the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" and the time when the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", There is also a case where release notification is not executed.
In addition, in FIG. 136, when the door open notification is executed after the selector retention notification is once released at the timing "X23" and until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", the door open notification is executed. There are times when it is possible to recognize with human sight and hearing that the door open notification has been executed, and times when the human sight and hearing cannot recognize that the door open notification has been executed, or even if it is recognized, it is only for a moment. has.

Furthermore, in FIG. 136, when the door open notification is not executed between once the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" and the time when the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", When it is possible to recognize with human vision and hearing that a selector retention notification has been once canceled and then executed again, and when it is possible to recognize with human vision and hearing that a selector retention notification has been once canceled and then executed again. There are times when I can't recognize it, or even when I can recognize it, it's only for a moment.

For example, door opening is managed by the main control board 50, and the condition for canceling (terminating) the door open notification is that the release switch is operated while the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. As the opening notification, a code such as "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, an audio output such as "The door is open" is output from the speaker 22, and a character display such as "Door is open" is displayed on the image display device 23. There are cases where three are executed.

In this case, in FIG. 136, the door open notification can be executed between once the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" and the time when the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24".
In addition, in FIG. 136, the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing "X23" to re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing "X24" has been reduced to a level that can be recognized by human perception. If it is relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds), when the door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X24", this door open notification can be recognized visually and audibly by humans. .

On the other hand, in FIG. 136, the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing "X23" to re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing "X24" is so long that it cannot be recognized by human perception. If the time is extremely short (for example, 1ms to 5ms), even if the door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X23", it is difficult for humans to recognize this door open notification visually or audibly. be.
However, even if the time required from "X23" to "X24" is extremely short to the extent that it cannot be recognized by human perception, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23" and the timing of "X24" is There are cases where the re-execution of the selector retention notification can be recognized by human hearing.

In other words, when the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice outputting from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff member" is interrupted, and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". When doing so, the voice "Please call the staff member" is output from the beginning. Therefore, since it sounds like, for example, "Please call the staff member... please call the staff member," it is possible to recognize with the human auditory sense that the selector retention notification was once canceled and then re-executed.
In addition, when an alarm sound such as "boo" or "beep" is output from the speaker 22 as a selector retention notification, it is difficult for human hearing to recognize that the selector retention notification has been canceled and then re-executed. Or even if I could recognize it, it would only be for a moment.

Further, for example, the door opening is managed by the sub control board 80, and the condition for canceling (terminating) the door opening notification is that a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the detection of the door opening, and as the door opening notification, There are two cases in which a voice output such as "door is open" from the speaker 22 and a character display such as "door open" on the image display device 23 are executed.
In this case, if the selector retention notification is to be canceled and executed again before a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the detection of the door opening, the selector retention notification should be canceled once at the timing "X23" in FIG. , until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", the door open notification can be executed.

On the other hand, since the door open notification is not executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the detection of the door open, if the selector retention notification is canceled once and executed again after the predetermined time has elapsed from the detection of the door open, In FIG. 136, the door open notification is not executed after the selector retention notification is once released at the timing "X23" until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24".

In addition, in FIG. 136, when the door open notification is not executed between once the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" and the time when the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", The time required from "X23" to "X24" is sometimes relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) to the extent that it can be recognized by human perception.
In this case, from "X23" to "X24", the acquisition number display LED 78 displays the acquisition number before displaying "CE", and the speaker 22 outputs the voice "Please call the staff". The image display device 23 displays the screen (for example, the game screen or the game standby screen) before the words "SELECTOR ERROR" are displayed. These displays between "X23" and "X24" can be recognized visually and audibly by humans. Therefore, it is possible for humans to visually and audibly recognize that the selector retention notification is once canceled and then executed again.

In addition, in FIG. 136, when the door open notification is not executed between once the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" and the time when the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", There are times when the time required from "X23" to "X24" is extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) to the extent that it cannot be recognized by human perception.
In this case, it is difficult for humans to recognize the acquisition number display LED 78, the display on the image display device 23, and the audio from the speaker 22 between "X23" and "X24" with human vision and hearing. .

However, when the selector stuck notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", the voice "Please call an attendant" output from the speaker 22 is interrupted halfway, and when the selector stuck notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant", for example, so that it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stuck notification was cancelled and then executed again.

Furthermore, in FIG. 136, the following patterns (1) to (6) can be considered as patterns of processing executed between "X23" and "X24".
(1) In the same interrupt process (Figure 47), a pattern in which selector retention notification is once canceled and selector retention notification is executed again (2) In one interrupt process, selector retention notification is canceled once, and then in the next Pattern for re-executing selector retention notification during interrupt processing

(3) In the case where the selector retention notification is once canceled in the first interrupt processing and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern that requires multiple interrupt processing and does not execute the door open notification during that time. (4) In the first interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is released, and in the subsequent interrupt processing, In the case of re-executing the notification, multiple interrupt processing is required between once the selector retention notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again, and a pattern in which the door open notification is executed during that time.

(5) In the case where the selector retention notification is once canceled in the first interrupt processing and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to elapse before execution, and the door open notification is not executed during that time (6) In the first interrupt process, the selector retention notification is once released, and then In the interrupt processing, when the selector retention notification is executed again, a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required between once the selector retention notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern in which a door open notification is executed during a period of time.

First, the pattern (1) of canceling the selector retention notification and re-executing the selector retention notification in the same interrupt process will be described.
In this case, when proceeding to the input port 51 reading process (step S457) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 controls various switches (such as the reset switch 153) and various sensors (the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b). etc.) reads the input signal. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the input error check processing (step S463) is started, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and when it determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and executes a selector retention notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
Furthermore, canceling the selector retention notification and re-notifying the selector retention are executed in the same interrupt process. Furthermore, interrupt processing is executed every 2.235ms. Therefore, the time required from canceling selector retention notification to executing selector retention notification again is less than the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms).

Therefore, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled at the timing "X23", and then the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", but between "X23" and "X24", It is difficult for humans to recognize the acquisition number display LED 78, the display on the image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22 visually or audibly.

However, when the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is cut off, and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". If the voice ``Please call the staff member'' is output from the beginning, it will sound like ``Please call the staff member... Please call the staff member.'' It is possible to recognize with human hearing that the process was executed again later.

Next, a pattern in which the selector retention notification is once canceled in the interrupt process (2) 1 above, and then the selector retention notification is executed again in the next interrupt process will be described.
In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. Load. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, similarly to pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and inputs the When it is determined that the sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether or not the start switch 41 is on (step S278), or when all the reels 31 are turned on. Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing subsequent to the determination process (step S289) as to whether or not it has stopped. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case as well, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
However, unlike the pattern (1) above, in the first interrupt process, the selector retention notification is canceled, and in the main process that is executed after that, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. be done. Then, in the interrupt processing that is executed thereafter, selector retention notification is executed again. Therefore, the time required from canceling selector retention notification to executing selector retention notification again is approximately 1 interrupt time (2.235 ms) to 2 interrupt time (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms). Become.

In this case as well, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 136, and then the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24". In between, it is difficult for humans to recognize the display on the acquired number display LED 78, the image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22 visually or audibly.

However, when the selector stuck notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", the voice "Please call an attendant" output from the speaker 22 is interrupted halfway, and when the selector stuck notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant", for example, so that it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stuck notification was cancelled and then executed again.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which the selector hold notification is cancelled once in the above (3)-1 interrupt process, and then executed again in the subsequent interrupt process, in which multiple interrupt processes are required between the time the selector hold notification is cancelled once and the time the selector hold notification is executed again, and in which the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as in the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector dwell notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether or not the start switch 41 is on (step S278), or when all the reels 31 are turned on. Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing subsequent to the determination process (step S289) as to whether or not it has stopped. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily releases the selector retention error state.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after canceling the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays "CE" on the acquisition number display LED 78. ” Displays the number of acquisitions before displaying.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.

After that, in the next interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and turns on the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b. If it is determined that it remains the same, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, the selector retention notification is also cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
Furthermore, in the "Z"th interrupt process ("Z" is an integer), the selector stuck notification is temporarily released, and in the main process executed thereafter, the selector stuck error state is temporarily released. Then, in the "Z+1"th interrupt process, the number of wins before "CE" was displayed is displayed on the win number display LED 78, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt process, a selector stuck error is detected. Furthermore, in the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector stuck error state. Then, in the "Z+3"th interrupt process, a selector stuck notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from canceling selector retention notification to executing selector retention notification again is the time for 3rd interrupt (2.235ms x 3 = 6.705ms) to the time for 4th interrupt (2.235ms x 4 = 8.94ms).
Therefore, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled at the timing "X23", and then the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", but the acquisition between "X23" and "X24" is It is difficult for humans to recognize the display on the number display LED 78, the image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22 visually or audibly.

However, when the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is cut off, and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". If the voice ``Please call the staff member'' is output from the beginning, it will sound like ``Please call the staff member... Please call the staff member.'' It is possible to recognize by human auditory sense that it has been executed again later.

Next, when the selector retention notification is once canceled in the interrupt processing in (4) 1 above, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is A pattern will be described in which interrupt processing is required multiple times until the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. Load. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above and 17 is on, it is determined that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and an error flag indicating door opening is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the door to an open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the door is set to the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as a door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command sending process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 sends a door open command to the sub control board 80.

After that, in the next interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and turns on the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b. If it is determined that it remains the same, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, the door open notification is canceled and an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, at the timing "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again.
In addition, in the "Z"-th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door opening is detected, and in the main processing that is executed thereafter, the game progresses as the door is opened. Error handling to stop is executed. Thereafter, in the "Z+1"-th interrupt process, a door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"-th interrupt process, the door open notification is canceled and a selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. Thereafter, in the "Z+3"-th interrupt process, selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from canceling selector retention notification to executing selector retention notification again is the time for 3rd interrupt (2.235ms x 3 = 6.705ms) to the time for 4th interrupt (2.235ms x 4 = 8.94ms).
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed, but the fact that the door open notification has been executed may not be recognized visually or audibly by humans, or may not be recognized. Even if it were possible, it would only be for a moment. Then, at the timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again.

Next, when the selector retention notification is once canceled in the interrupt processing in (5) 1 above, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is A pattern will be described in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to elapse before the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as in the case of the above pattern (1), when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.
Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the timer setting process (not shown), the main control board 50 sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the selector retention notification was released.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily releases the selector retention error state.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is released by the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Then, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits an error release command to the sub-control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt process (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the elapsed time check process (not shown), the main control board 50 determines that a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector retention notification was canceled. Determine whether or not.
When it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector retention notification was canceled, and when it is determined in the input error check process (step S463) that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, The main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
Further, in the first interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time after the selector retention notification is canceled. In the main processing executed after that, the selector retention error state is temporarily released. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, and an error cancellation command is sent to the sub control board 80. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector retention notification was canceled, a selector retention error is detected. In the main processing executed after that, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. In the subsequent interrupt processing, selector retention notification is executed and a selector retention command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required after the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification is executed again.
In addition, in FIG. 136, after canceling the selector retention notification at the timing "X23" and before re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing "X24", the sub control board 80 displays the image. The screen (for example, a game screen or a game standby screen) before displaying the characters "SELECTOR ERROR" is displayed on the device 23 without displaying the characters "SELECTOR ERROR".

Therefore, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24". can be recognized by human vision and hearing.
Note that instead of setting the condition that a predetermined period of time has elapsed between once the selector retention notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again, for example, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned on. The condition may be that it is turned off from on.
In this case as well, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24". This makes it possible for humans to recognize things visually and audibly.

In addition, in the above (5)-1 interrupt processing, when the selector stuck notification is once cancelled and then executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) must elapse between the time the selector stuck notification is cancelled and the time the selector stuck notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. As an example of such a pattern, the following is also conceivable.

First, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches and various sensors. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily releases the selector retention error state.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after canceling the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays "CE" on the acquired number display LED 78. ” Displays the number of acquisitions before displaying.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command sending process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 sends an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt process (FIG. 47), when it is determined in the input error check process (step S463) that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. It is determined that this has occurred, and an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when the timer set processing (not shown) is performed, the main control board 50 causes the selector retention error state to be changed to the selector retention error state. Set a timer to measure elapsed time.
In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector retention error state. to judge.

When it is determined that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the selector retention error state was entered, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 issues a code "CE" indicating a selector retention error as a selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.

Further, in the first interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled, and in the main processing executed thereafter, the selector retention error state is temporarily canceled. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, and an error cancellation command is sent to the sub control board 80. If a selector retention error is detected in the subsequent interrupt processing, then in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state, and in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention error is detected. Set a timer to measure the elapsed time since the error condition occurred. Then, in the interrupt process executed thereafter, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector retention error state was entered, a selector retention notification is executed and a selector retention command is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

Therefore, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required after the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification is executed again.
In addition, in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 controls the image display device 23 after once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing “X23” until re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing “X24”. , instead of displaying the words "SELECTOR ERROR", the screen (for example, the game screen or the game standby screen) before the words "SELECTOR ERROR" is displayed is displayed.

Furthermore, in FIG. 136, after once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing "X23" and before re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing "X24", the sub control board 80 transmits the " To output the voice before outputting the voice "Please call the staff member" instead of outputting the voice "Please call the staff member."
Therefore, in FIG. 136, after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" and until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", it is determined that the selector retention notification is canceled. It can be recognized by human vision and hearing.

Finally, when the selector retention notification is once canceled in the interrupt processing in (6) 1 above, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is A pattern will be described in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to elapse before the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. Load. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above and determines whether the door switch 17 is on, it is determined that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and an error flag indicating door opening is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the timer set processing (not shown) is performed, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, stores an error flag indicating that the door is opened, and then Set a timer to measure elapsed time.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the door to an open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the door is set to the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as a door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command sending process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 sends a door open command to the sub control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 and determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since storing an error flag indicating that the door is open.
Then, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since detecting the opening of the front door 12 and storing an error flag indicating that the door is open, and the input error check process (step S463) determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, at the timing "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again.
Further, in the first interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled, door opening is detected, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time after the door opening is detected. In the main process executed after that, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game with the door open. In the subsequent interrupt process, a door open notification is executed and a door open command is sent to the sub control board 80. Furthermore, in the interrupt processing executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the door opening was detected, the door opening notification is canceled and a selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. In the subsequent interrupt processing, selector retention notification is executed and a selector retention command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required after the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification is executed again.
In addition, in FIG. 136, after canceling the selector retention notification at the timing "X23" and before re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing "X24", the sub control board 80 displays the image. The words "door open" are displayed on the device 23 without displaying the words "selector error".

Therefore, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24". , and that the door open notification has been executed can be visually and auditorily recognized by humans.
Note that instead of setting the condition that a predetermined period of time has elapsed between once the selector retention notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again, for example, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned on. The condition may be that it is turned off from on.
In this case as well, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24". It is possible to visually and audibly recognize the fact that the door has been opened and that the door open notification has been executed.

In addition, the system measures the elapsed time after detecting the opening of the front door 12 and storing an error flag indicating the opening of the door, and does not issue a door opening notification until a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed. During this time, even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated, the door open notification can be prevented from being released. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify that the front door 12 has been opened.

The same applies when an error such as a selector stuck error is detected. That is, the time that has elapsed since an error such as a selector stuck error was detected and an error flag indicating this was stored is measured, and an error notification such as a selector stuck error notification is executed until a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed, and during that time, the error notification such as the selector stuck error notification is not cancelled even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated. This makes it possible to reliably notify that an error such as a selector stuck error has been detected.

Here, in FIG. 136, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error has been explained using the selector retention error as an example. In the case of a hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error, the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs.

For example, when the dispensing sensor 37a and the dispensing sensor 37b are not turned on/off even though the hopper motor 36 is driven at the timing "X21" in FIG. is determined to have been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects the hopper empty error, it displays "HE" indicating the hopper empty error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a hopper empty notification, and sends an empty command indicating the hopper empty error to the sub control board 80. Send to.

Further, upon receiving the empty command, the sub control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a hopper empty notification, and displays the words "Hopper empty" on the image display device 23. .
Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X22" in FIG. 136, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door.

However, while the hopper empty notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification and continues the hopper empty notification even if it detects the door opening.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80.
However, while the hopper empty notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification and continues the hopper empty notification even if it receives a door open command.

Thereafter, at timing "X23" in FIG. 136, the reset switch 153 is operated ( When the hopper empty notification is turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty notification.
Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the error cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the hopper empty notification that was being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, although the hopper empty notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 136, the hopper empty notification is then executed again at the timing "X24".
Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing “X23” in FIG. 136 in a situation where the cause of the hopper empty error has not been removed, the main control board 50 The notification is canceled, and control is then performed to execute the door open notification. Thereafter, at timing "X24" in FIG. 136, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper empty notification again.

That is, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to change from "HE", which indicates a hopper empty error, to "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at the timing of "X24", controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to change from "dE" to "HE". Furthermore, the main control board 50 sends an empty command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 136.

Further, when receiving the error cancellation command at timing "X23" in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper empty notification and controls the door open notification to be executed this time. Thereafter, when receiving the empty command at timing "X24" in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper empty notification again.

That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open" at the timing "X23" in FIG. control to switch the display from "hopper empty" to "door open". Thereafter, at the timing of "X24", the audio output from the speaker 22 is switched from "The door is open" to "Please call the attendant", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "Door open" to " Hopper empty”.

Note that even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, if the dispensing sensor 37a and the dispensing sensor 37b are not turned on/off after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds to 5 seconds), the main control board 50 will It is determined that a hopper empty error has been detected, and "HE" indicating a hopper empty error is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 as a hopper empty notification. Thereafter, even if the hopper 35 has not been replenished with medals M (the cause of the hopper empty error has been removed), when the reset switch 153 is operated, the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty notification. Drive the hopper motor 36 again. However, since the hopper 35 is not replenished with medals M, the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has passed after the hopper motor 36 is driven again. Therefore, the main control board 50 executes the hopper empty notification again. Therefore, the time required from once canceling the hopper empty notification until executing it again is approximately 3 to 5 seconds.

Furthermore, when the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and acquires "CE" indicating a selector retention error as a selector retention notification. It is displayed on the number display LED 78. Thereafter, even if the medal M remains jammed in the medal selector 110 (the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed), when the reset switch 153 is operated, the main control board 50 issues a selector retention alarm. Release it once. However, since the medals M remain jammed in the medal selector 110, the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, so the main control board 50 executes the selector retention notification again. At this time, the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification to executing it again is about the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms×2=4.47 ms).

In this way, the time required from once canceling the hopper empty notification to executing it again is about 3 to 5 seconds, whereas the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification until executing it again is about 3 to 5 seconds. is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms×2=4.47 ms).
For this reason, the time required from once canceling the hopper empty notification until it is executed again is longer than the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification until it is executed again.

Further, for example, when the input sensor 44b is turned on from off at timing "X21" in FIG. 136, and then the input sensor 44a is turned on from off, the main control board 50 issues is determined to have been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects a selector passing error, it displays "CP" indicating the selector passing error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector passing error notification, and sends a selector passing error command indicating the selector passing error to the sub-control. It is transmitted to the board 80.

Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector passage error command, it outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a selector passage error notification, and displays the text "Selector error" on the image display device 23. Display.
Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X22" in FIG. 136, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door.
However, while the selector passage error notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification even if it detects the door opening, and continues to notify the selector passage error.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80.
However, while the selector passage error notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification even if it receives a door open command, and continues to notify the selector passage error.

After that, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, a situation in which the cause of the selector passage error is not removed (the input sensor 44b is turned on from off, and then the input sensor 44a is turned on from off, When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the error cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the selector passage error notification that was being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
Here, although the selector passage error notification is canceled, since the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and "X24 ”, the selector retention notification is executed.

Specifically, in FIG. 136, at the timing "X23", the cause of the selector passage error is not removed (the input sensor 44b is turned on from off, and then the input sensor 44a is turned on from off). When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification and issues the door open notification. control to execute.
Since the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b continue to be on after that, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and at the timing "X24" in FIG. The door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is controlled to be executed.

That is, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 136, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to change from "CP", indicating a selector pass error, to "dE", indicating the opening of the front door 12.
Thereafter, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 136, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to change from "dE", indicating that the front door 12 is open, to "CE", indicating a selector retention error.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a selector dwell command to the sub-control board 80 at timing "X24" in FIG.

Also, when an error clear command is received at the timing of "X23" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 clears the selector passing error notification and then controls the system to execute a door open notification.
Thereafter, when a selector dwell command is received at the timing of "X24" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and instead controls to execute the selector dwell notification.

That is, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 controls the voice output from the speaker 22 to be changed from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and the display on the image display device 23 to be changed from "Selector error" to "Door open."
Thereafter, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 controls the voice output from the speaker 22 to be changed from "Door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and controls the display on the image display device 23 to be changed from "Door open" to "Selector error."

In this way, when a selector passage error is detected, a selector passage error notification is executed, and if the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector passage error has not been removed, the selector passage error is canceled, This time, there is a case where a selector retention error is detected and a selector retention notification is executed.
Further, as described above, when a selector retention error is detected, a selector retention notification is executed, and then, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is issued once. After the release, the selector retention notification may be executed again.
That is, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the same error notification may be issued before and after the reset switch 153 is operated, and different error notifications may be issued before and after the reset switch 153 is operated. and when it is executed.

In Fig. 136, the selector passing error notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", but there are cases where the door open notification is not executed at this timing. And there are cases where the selector dwell notification is executed at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
For example, in the same interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when reading the input port 51 (step S457 in FIG. 47), input error checking (step S463 in FIG. 47), and error processing (not shown) are performed, a door open notification is not performed.

Specifically, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the input port 51 reading processing (step S457) is proceeded, the main control board 50 controls various switches (such as the reset switch 153) and various sensors (the input sensor 44a and the input port 51). (sensor 44b, etc.). Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on. When it is determined that this is the case, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and executes selector retention notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the control command transmission processing (step S464) is advanced, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, the selector passage error notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, at the timing of "X24", the selector retention notification is executed this time without executing the door open notification.
Furthermore, canceling the selector passage error notification and selecting selector retention notification are executed in the same interrupt process. Therefore, the time required from canceling the selector passing error notification to executing the selector retention notification is less than the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms).

In addition, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), reading of the input port 51 (step S457 in FIG. 47) and input error check (step S463 in FIG. 47) are executed, and then in the main processing (FIG. 46) to be executed, Door open notification is not performed even when error processing (not shown) is performed.

Specifically, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches and various sensors. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on. When it is determined that this is the case, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector stuck error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, the selector dwell notification is also cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector dwell notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
In addition, in one interrupt process, the selector passing error notification is released, and in the main process executed after that, the progress of the game is stopped as a selector retention error state, and in the interrupt process executed after that, the selector retention notification is executed this time. Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector passing error notification to the execution of the selector retention notification is about the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).

In addition, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector passage error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized by human vision or hearing, or it can be recognized. However, there are cases where it is instantaneous. Then, at timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed this time.
In some cases, a plurality of interrupt processes are required from reading the input port 51 and checking input errors in the interrupt process to executing error processing in the main process. In such a case, the door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized visually or audibly by humans, or even if it is recognized, it is only for a moment.

Specifically, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches and various sensors. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and when it is determined that the door switch 17 is on. determines that opening of the front door 12 is detected, and stores an error flag indicating door opening in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the door to an open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the door is set to the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as a door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command sending process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 sends a door open command to the sub control board 80.

After that, in the next interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and turns on the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b. If it is determined that the condition remains unchanged, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, the door open notification is canceled and an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is reached in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE", indicating a selector stuck error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, at the timing "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector passage error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed this time.
In addition, in the "Z"-th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, the selector passing error notification is canceled and the door opening is detected, and in the main processing that is executed thereafter, the game is stopped as the door is open. Error handling is performed that halts progress. Thereafter, in the "Z+1"-th interrupt process, a door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"-th interrupt process, the door open notification is canceled and a selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. Thereafter, in the "Z+3"-th interrupt process, selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from canceling the selector passing error notification to executing the selector retention notification is the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms x 3 = 6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms x 4 = 8 .94ms). During that time, door open notification is executed.
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector passing error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized by human visual or auditory sense, or it can be recognized. However, it is only a moment. Then, at the timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed this time.

Further, the sub control board 80 stores an error history in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83, and is capable of displaying the stored error history when there is a request to display the error history.
In the tenth embodiment, the error history can be displayed in the setting confirmation state.
Specifically, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the player is waiting for a game (before the game starts), and the number of bets is "0", the setting confirmation state is entered.

Further, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and a menu screen for the administrator is displayed on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, the menu screen for the administrator is provided with an "error history" item.
Then, while the administrator's menu screen is displayed, operate the cross key (Fig. 125) to select the "Error History" item, and in this state operate (turn on) the push button 86 to display the image display device. 23, an error history screen is displayed.

In addition, the error history screen displays an error code indicating the type of error (for example, "CE", "CP", "dE", etc.) and the error notification time (for example, "September 17, 2021 15:35:25"). "Second" etc.) are displayed.
Here, for example, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is executed at the timing "X21", the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23", the door open notification is executed, and the Assume that the door open notification is canceled at the same timing and the selector retention notification is executed again.
In this case, for example,
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 Ru.

For example, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is executed at the timing "X21", and the selector retention notification is once released at the timing "X23", but the door open notification is not executed, and after that, the door open notification is not executed. Assume that the selector retention notification is executed again at timing "X24" without the release notification being executed.
In this case, for example,
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 is displayed.

For example, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is executed at the timing "X21", and at the timing "X23", the medal M remains stuck in the medal selector 110 (the cause of the selector retention error is removed). Suppose that the reset switch 153 is operated a plurality of times (for example, "3" times) in a row in a situation where the reset switch 153 is not operated. In this case, the release and re-execution of the selector retention notification may be repeated a plurality of times (for example, "3" times).
Also in this case, for example,
"CE" Occurrence September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" Released September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" Occurrence September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" ” Cancellation September 17, 2021 15:35:25 “CE” Occurrence September 17, 2021 15:35:25 “CE” Cancellation Displayed as follows: September 17, 2021 15:35:25 can do.

Note that even if the reset switch 153 is operated multiple times in succession and the selector retention notification is canceled and re-executed multiple times in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, these histories cannot be saved. Instead of storing and displaying the history, the history may be stored and displayed only when the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector retention notification is canceled in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has been removed.

For example, in FIG. 136, at the timing "X21", the selector passing error notification is executed, and at the timing "X23", the selector passing error notification is once canceled, and the door open notification is executed, and at the timing "X24". It is assumed that the door open notification is canceled at the timing of , and the selector retention notification is executed this time.
In this case, for example,
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 "CP" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 Ru.

For example, in FIG. 136, the selector passing error notification is executed at the timing "X21", and the selector passing error notification is once canceled at the timing "X23", but the door open notification is not executed, and thereafter , it is assumed that the selector retention notification is executed at timing "X24" without the door open notification being executed.
In this case, for example,
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CP" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 is displayed.

The push button 86 is also referred to as a sub-button 86, a performance button 86, a performance switch 86, etc., and is operated when advancing (developing) a performance.
The cross key 87 is also referred to as a selection switch 87 or the like, and is operated when moving the cursor position on a menu screen or the like.
The push button 86 and cross key 87 are electrically connected to the sub-control means 80 via the input port 81.
Further, the error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning the power on/off or changing settings. Unless a serious error (unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, the error history will not be erased.

In this way, when a specified error is detected, a specified error notification can be executed, and when the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated and an operation to cancel the specified error notification, i.e., operation of reset switch 153, is performed, the specified error notification is once canceled and then the specified error notification can be executed again.
This makes it possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 is functioning normally, and also to inform the user that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

FIG. 137 shows when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, when the reset switch 153 is operated after the cause of the selector retention error is removed, and when the release switch is pressed with the front door 12 open. It is a time chart showing the operation mode when operated.
In FIG. 137, at timing "X31", when the medal M is clogged in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge that.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification, and transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80.
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector retention command, it outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff member" from the speaker 22 as a selector retention notification, and displays the words "Selector retention error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X32" in Figure 137, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door is open.
However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, even if the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector dwell notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80.
However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification even if it receives a door open command.

After that, at the timing "X33" in FIG. 137, the medal path 111 of the medal selector 110 is clogged with medals M, and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, that is, the cause of the selector retention error is removed. When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the selector stay notification is not activated, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that was being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
However, although the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X33" in FIG. 137, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X34".

Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X33" in FIG. 137 in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 The notification is canceled, and control is then performed to execute the door open notification. Thereafter, at timing "X34" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the selector retention notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 at the timing "X33" in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of "X34", the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is controlled to be switched from "dE" to "CE". Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 at timing "X34" in FIG.

Further, when receiving the error cancellation command at timing "X33" in FIG. 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. Thereafter, when receiving the selector retention command at timing "X34" in FIG. 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the selector retention notification again.

That is, at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 137, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open". Then, at the timing of "X34", the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant" and the image display device 23 to switch from "Door open" to "Selector stuck error".

After that, when the medal M stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is removed at the timing "X35" in FIG. will no longer be detected. However, simply removing the cause of the selector retention error (no longer detecting the selector retention error) does not cancel the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X36" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that was being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 137, even though the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the selector stuck notification, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on, so the main control board 50 now issues a door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "CE", which indicates a selector stuck error, to "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Further, at timing "X36" in FIG. 137, the sub control board 80 releases the selector retention notification and then executes the door open notification. That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open," and changes the display on the image display device 23 from "Selector retention error" to " control to switch to "door open".

Thereafter, at timing "X37" in FIG. 137, with the front door 12 remaining open, that is, with the door switch 17 remaining on, the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is turned. Even if the main control board 50 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 continues to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

Furthermore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is on), the main control board 50 sends a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification. is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is turned on), the sub-control board 80 continues to issue the door open notification without canceling it. and execute it.

Here, in FIG. 137, using a selector retention error as an example, operations are explained when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated after the cause of the error is removed. However, in the event of a selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated after the cause of the error has been removed. operates in the same way as when a selector retention error occurs.

For example, when the dispensing sensor 37a remains off and the dispensing sensor 37b remains on at timing "X31" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 determines that a hopper jam error has been detected. to decide.
When the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it displays "HP" indicating the hopper jam error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a hopper jam notification, and sends a hopper jam command indicating the hopper jam error to the sub control board. Send to 80.
Further, when the sub control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, it outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a hopper jam notification, and displays the words "Hopper jam error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X32" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door.
However, while the hopper jam notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification even if it detects the door opening, and continues the hopper jam notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80.
However, while the hopper jam notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification and continues the hopper jam notification even if it receives a door open command.

Thereafter, at timing "X33" in FIG. 137, the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the medal M remains jammed in the hopper 35, that is, the cause of the hopper jam error has not been removed. ), the main control board 50 controls to cancel the hopper jam notification.
Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it controls the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. to cancel the hopper jam notification.

However, although the hopper jam notification is once canceled at the timing "X33" in FIG. 137, the hopper jam notification is executed again at the timing "X34".
Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing “X33” in FIG. 137 in a situation where the cause of the hopper jam error has not been removed, the main control board 50 The notification is canceled, and control is then performed to execute the door open notification. Thereafter, at timing "X34" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper jam notification again.

That is, at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to change from "HP", which indicates a hopper jam error, to "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at the timing of "X34", controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to change from "dE" to "HP". Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a hopper jam command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 137.

In addition, when an error clear command is received at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 137, the sub-control board 80 clears the hopper jam notification and controls the system to issue a door open notification this time. After that, when a hopper jam command is received at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 137, the sub-control board 80 clears the door open notification and controls the system to issue a hopper jam notification again.

That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open" at the timing "X33" in FIG. 137, and also switches the audio output from the image display device 23 control to switch the display from "Hopper Jam Error" to "Door Open". Thereafter, at the timing of "X34", the audio output from the speaker 22 is switched from "door is open" to "please call the attendant", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to " Hopper jam error".

After that, when the medal M stuck in the hopper 35 is removed at the timing "X35" in FIG. 137, that is, when the cause of the hopper jam error is removed, the main control board 50 no longer detects the hopper jam error. . However, simply removing the cause of the hopper jam error (no longer detecting the hopper jam error) will not cancel the hopper jam notification.

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X36" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 controls to cancel the hopper jam notification.
Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it controls the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. to cancel the hopper jam notification.

However, at the timing "X36" in FIG. 137, even if the reset switch 153 is operated and the hopper jam notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. , the main control board 50 then controls to execute door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch the display from "HP" indicating a hopper jam error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12.

Further, at timing "X36" in FIG. 137, the sub control board 80 cancels the hopper jam notification and then controls the door open notification to be executed. That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open," and changes the display on the image display device 23 from "Hopper jam error" to " control to switch to "door open".

Thereafter, at timing "X37" in FIG. 137, with the front door 12 remaining open, that is, with the door switch 17 remaining on, the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is turned. Even if the main control board 50 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 continues to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

Furthermore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is on), the main control board 50 sends a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification. is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is turned on), the sub-control board 80 continues to issue the door open notification without canceling it. and execute it.

In this way, when a predetermined error is detected, the predetermined error notification can be executed, and in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, the predetermined error notification can be canceled by an operation, that is, a reset switch. When the operation 153 is performed, the predetermined error notification is once canceled and then the predetermined error notification can be executed again.
Thereby, it can be confirmed that the reset switch 153 functions normally, and it can be notified again that the cause of the error has not been removed.

Furthermore, when the opening of the front door 12 (door open) is detected, the door open alarm can be executed, and when the front door 12 is open, the release switch for canceling the door open alarm is operated (turned on). ), the door open notification can be executed continuously without canceling it.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraud from being committed without any notification even though the front door 12 remains open.

In addition, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and a door open notification is issued. However, for example, the door open notification may be issued when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and then turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes capable of being opened; at this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the door has been unlocked and the front door 12 is capable of being opened.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked and can be opened by turning on the door switch 17, the front door 12 is opened. Even if the door is closed, the door open notification may be executed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 is configured to release the door open notification. be able to.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door switch 17 has been turned on, unlocking the front door 12 and making it possible to open the front door 12, it may send a door open command indicating the opening of the front door 12 to the sub-control board 80, even if the front door 12 is closed.
Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 may be configured to execute a door open notification via the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc., when the door open command is received, even if the front door 12 is closed.

That is, when it is detected that the front door 12 has been opened or can be opened, the door open notification is enabled, and the door open notification is executed when the front door 12 is opened or can be opened. Even if an operation for canceling (operation of a release switch) is performed, the door open notification may be configured to continue to be executed without canceling the notification.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraud from being committed without any notification even though the front door 12 is open or can be opened.

FIG. 138 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and after the selector retention notification is once canceled, the selector retention notification can be executed again. This figure shows the relationship between the time "T1" and the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the input sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b. .

In FIG. 138, selector retention detection is turned on/off, door open detection is turned on/off, selector retention notification is turned on/off, door open notification is turned on/off, reset switch 153 is turned on/off, and release switch is turned on/off. Regarding OFF, it is the same as in FIG. 136.
Also, the timings of "X41", "X42", "X43" and "X44" in FIG. 138 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 136, respectively. .

In FIG. 138, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X43" in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification. Thereafter, at the timing of "X44", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector retention notification again.
The time from "X43" to "X44" is the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Further, in FIG. 138, assuming that a medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 at a timing immediately before "X43" and that the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a at a timing "X43", then, At timing "X45", the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.
The time from "X43" to "X45" is the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the insert sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the insert sensor 44b. .

Furthermore, "when the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a" means that the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the blocker 45 This means the moment when the vehicle is allowed to pass through the vehicle, approaches the input sensor 44a, and the input sensor 44a is turned on from off.
Furthermore, "when the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 are no longer detected by the input sensor 44b" means that the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 pass through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the blocker 45, passes through the input sensor 44a, and also passes through the input sensor 44b, meaning the moment when the input sensor 44b changes from on to off.

Here, the medal M falls from the medal slot 47 at an initial speed of "0", passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, and passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b in this order. It shall be detected by these. It is also assumed that the blocker 45 allows the medal M to pass through.
That is, the medal M is released from the hand at the medal slot 47 without gaining momentum, passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is allowed to pass through the blocker 45, and passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor. 44b in order, and at this time, they are detected by the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b, respectively.

The tenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T2." In other words, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once released until the selector retention notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

For example, suppose that the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) and a medal M is inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 to check whether the selector retention error has been cleared. Then, at the timing of "X43" in FIG. 138, the selector retention notification is cleared and at the same time the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, if the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X44" in FIG. 138, and then, at the timing of "X45", the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

Therefore, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 does not pass through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally, and the medal M is swallowed. It is possible to prevent the process of adding "1" to the number of bets or the number of credits from being executed.
In addition, in FIG. 138, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error has been explained using the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs.

Figure 139 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stuck error, and shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is released until the selector stuck notification can be executed again, and the time "T3" from when digit 5 is lit until digit 1 is lit.

The tenth embodiment also includes digits 1 to 5, similar to the third embodiment.
Digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit number (reserved number) display LED 76, and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76. Digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78, and digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78. Digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73.

Further, the address "F051(H)" shown in FIG. 33 of the third embodiment is a 1-byte storage area in which the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated every interrupt.
Furthermore, each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned to the D0 bit to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit to the digit 2 signal, the D2 bit to the digit 3 signal, the D3 bit to the digit 4 signal, and the D4 bit to the digit 5 signal. . In the first interrupt processing, dynamic lighting control of digits 1 to 5 is executed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 1 is lit.

The LED display counter 1 has an initial value of "00010000(B)". Then, for each interrupt, the LED display counter 1 updates by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 one digit to the right. Also, at the next interrupt after the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001(B)", the LED display counter 1 shifts one digit to the right to become "00000000(B)", but at the time of that interrupt, the LED display counter 1 is initialized and the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000(B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 has one cycle of five interrupts.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is
"N" interrupt number: 00010000 (B)
“N+1” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
“N+3” interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
“N+6” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the tenth embodiment, as in the third embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit.
Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. Then, by outputting the digit 5 signal, digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) can be turned on (digits 1 to 4 are turned off).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00001000 (B)", and at this time, the digit 4 signal is output, and digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED 78) can be lit (digit 1 to digit 3 and digit 5 are off).

At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100 (B)", at which time a digit 3 signal is output and digit 3 (the most significant digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) can be lit (digit 1, digit 2, digit 4 and digit 5 are turned off).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010 (B)", at which time a digit 2 signal is output and digit 2 (the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be lit (digit 1 and digits 3 to 5 are turned off).
At the time of the next interrupt process, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)", at which time a digit 1 signal is output and digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be lit (digits 2 to 5 are turned off).

In FIG. 139, selector retention detection is turned on/off, door open detection is turned on/off, selector retention notification is turned on/off, door open notification is turned on/off, reset switch 153 is turned on/off, and release switch is turned on/off. Regarding OFF, it is the same as in FIG. 136.
Also, the timings of "X51", "X52", "X53" and "X54" in FIG. 139 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 136, respectively. .

In Figure 139, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X53" when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification, and then, at timing "X54", the main control board 50 will execute the selector stuck notification again.
The time from "X53" to "X54" is the time "T1" from the moment the selector retention notification is cancelled until the moment the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Furthermore, in FIG. 139, assuming that digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) lights up at the timing of "X53", then digit 1 (the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) lights up at the timing of "X55". .
The time from "X53" to "X55" is the time "T3" from lighting up digit 5 (set value display LED 73) to lighting up digit 1 (upper digit of credit number display LED 76).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, dynamic lighting control is performed in which digits 5 to 1 are sequentially lit for each interrupt. Further, it takes 4 interrupts from lighting up digit 5 to lighting up digit 1. Therefore, the time "T3" is the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms×4=8.94 ms).
The tenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T3". In other words, the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled to when the selector retention notification can be executed again is the time "T1" from when digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) is turned on to when digit 1 (the upper part of the credit number display LED 76). The time required for lighting up the digit) is configured to be shorter than "T3".

Here, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X53" in FIG. 139 in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 issues a selector retention notification. Once released, control is performed to execute door open notification. At this time, the main control board 50 controls the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch the display from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 (door open). Thereafter, at the timing "X54", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector retention notification again. At this time, the main control board 50 controls the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch the display from "dE" to "CE". Then, assuming that digit 5 (set value display LED 73) lights up at timing "X53", digit 1 (upper digit of credit number display LED 76) lights up at timing "X55". That is, from "X53" to "X55", digits 5 to 1 light up once each.

Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from "CE" to "dE" at the timing of "X53", and then the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from "dE" to "CE" at the timing of "X54". However, from "X53" to "X54", "dE" lights up only once in the acquisition number display LED 78, or "dE" does not light up even once. Therefore, it is difficult for the human eye to confirm that "dE" is lit on the acquisition number display LED 78, so it is possible to prevent the user from mistakenly believing that the cause of the selector retention error has been removed.
In addition, in FIG. 139, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs.

FIG. 140 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and after the selector retention notification is once canceled, the selector retention notification can be executed again. The relationship between the time "T1" and the design value "T4" of the period from the time when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the time when the event where the power supply is cut off is detected. This shows that.

In FIG. 140, selector retention detection is turned on/off, door open detection is turned on/off, selector retention notification is turned on/off, door open notification is turned on/off, reset switch 153 is turned on/off, and release switch is turned on/off. Regarding OFF, it is the same as in FIG. 136.
Also, the timings of "X61", "X62", "X63" and "X64" in FIG. 140 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 136, respectively. .

In FIG. 140, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed at the timing “X63”, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification. Thereafter, at the timing "X64", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector retention notification again.
The time from "X63" to "X64" is the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Furthermore, in FIG. 140, assuming that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at the timing "X63", then an event in which the power supply is cut off at the timing "X65" occurs. It is detected, and power-off processing is executed at the timing of "X66".
The time from "X63" to "X65" is the design value of the period from the time when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs until the time when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected. It is "T4".
Further, the time from "X65" to "X66" is the time "T5" from when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) is detected until the power cutoff process is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 140, when an event (power outage) that cuts off the power supply to the slot machine 10 occurs (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, the breaker is activated). Indicates the voltage level at the time of a power failure, power outage, etc.).
In FIG. 140, the voltage level when the power is on is set to "V0". Further, the voltage level (power-off detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off is defined as "V1". When the power supply voltage is at voltage level "V0", the slot machine 10 operates normally. Further, when the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1", it becomes possible to detect that an event in which the power supply is cut off has occurred.

FIG. 140 shows an example in which an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) occurs at timing "X63". When the power is cut off at the timing "X63", the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1" at the timing "X65". Further, the time from "X63" to "X65" is "T4". That is, when a power-off occurs, the power supply voltage decreases to voltage level "V1" at time "T4".

In addition, the period from the time when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs until the time when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected is the time of 20 interrupts (2.235ms x 20 = 44 .7ms) or more.
Note that the period from the time when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs until the time when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected is not limited to the 20th interrupt time, but the voltage monitoring device ( It can be set as appropriate depending on the performance of the main CPU 55 (power-off detection circuit) and the main CPU 55.

A voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) is provided on the main control board 50. When the power supply voltage falls below the power-off detection level "V1", a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and the power-off is detected by detecting whether or not the signal is input. Detect.

Further, when the power supply voltage further decreases from the power-off detection level "V1" and becomes less than the driving limit voltage level of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
The main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process if the power supply voltage becomes less than the drive limit voltage level, so if the power-off occurs at the timing of "X63", the power supply will be stopped by the timing of "X66". The settings are set so that the disconnection process can be terminated.

Detection of power outage is executed within the interrupt processing that is executed every 2.235 ms, but when it is detected that the power supply voltage is below the power outage detection level "V1" for 2 consecutive interrupts, the next interrupt processing is executed. Executes power-off processing. Therefore, in FIG. 140, the timing "X65" is the timing when it is detected twice in a row that the power supply voltage is lower than the power-off detection level "V1" by the interrupt process. Then, the main control board 50 executes the power-off process in the next interrupt process (timing "X66" in FIG. 140).

The main control board 50 backs up data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 during power-off processing. Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed (power is turned on, power is turned on, power is restored from power off), the main control means 50 executes the power restoration process and transfers the backed up data to the RWM 53. Return to the specified storage area. Thereby, when the device returns from a power-off, it is possible to return to the state at the time the power-off was detected.

In addition, in FIG. 140, the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed (the timing of "X63"), and the timing when the selector retention error is canceled and then the selector is reset again. The timing for executing the stay notification (timing of "X64") is illustrated.
Furthermore, FIG. 140 shows the timing at which an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs and the timing at which the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed. It is matched.

The tenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T4". In other words, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once released until the selector retention notification can be executed again is the period from when the power supply is cut off (power cutoff). It is configured so that it is shorter than the design value "T4" of the period until the event of interruption is detected.

In FIG. 140, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed at the timing “X63”, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification. control to execute door open notification. Further, it is assumed that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) occurs approximately at the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). In this case, the selector retention notification is controlled to be executed again at the timing "X64" in FIG. Power-off processing is executed at the timing of "X66".

Therefore, in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, if an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs almost simultaneously with the operation (on) of the reset switch 153, the power outage is detected. Then, before executing the power-off process, the selector retention notification is controlled to be executed again. Therefore, during power-off processing, it is possible to back up data indicating that selector retention notification is being executed, so that selector retention notification can be executed when power supply is resumed (recovered from power-off). be able to.
In addition, in FIG. 140, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs.

FIG. 143 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the power supply is cut off during door open notification, then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off, and then the power supply is restarted. It is.
In FIG. 143, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when a breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.

When the front door 12 is opened at timing "X91" in FIG. 143, the main control board 50 determines that the door opening has been detected.
Specifically, when the front door 12 is opened at timing "X91" in FIG. 143, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 determines that the door opening has been detected. Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door, it issues a door opening notification. Specifically, as door opening notification, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is opened is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is opened, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80. Then, upon receiving the door open command, the sub control board 80 executes door open notification. Specifically, as the door open notification, the speaker 22 outputs a voice saying "the door is open", and the image display device 23 displays the words "door open".

Thereafter, if the power supply is cut off (for example, the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, the breaker trips, or a power outage occurs) at the timing of "X92" in Fig. 143, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will operate, and the door open notification will also stop. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power cut process. As a result, data in a specified memory area in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is backed up.
Thereafter, at the timing "X93" in Figure 143, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.

Thereafter, when the power supply is restarted at timing "X94" in FIG. 143, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 each execute a power-off recovery process. As a result, the data backed up during the power-off process is restored to the predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. As a result, the state returns to the state at the time of power-off detection. At this time, although the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute door open notification.

143, when the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78, and transmits a notification release command to the sub-control board 80 to release the door open notification.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancel command, it cancels the door open notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

In addition, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and a door open notification is issued. However, for example, the door open notification may be issued when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion port of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes openable, and at this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released and the front door 12 is openable. When it is detected that the front door 12 is openable, a door open notification may be issued even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened while power is being supplied, door open notification can be executed. In addition, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off, when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification will be sent. be executable.

Here, the front door 12 is opened by a fraudulent act, and then the power supply is cut off by a fraudulent act while the door open notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off. This may be an attempt to hide fraudulent activity. Even in such a case, with the above configuration, when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification can be executed even if the front door 12 is closed, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be prevented. can do.

FIG. 144 shows a state in which the power supply is cut off during door open notification, then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, and then the door key is turned to the left (the release switch is operated). ) is a time chart showing an operation mode when power supply is restarted.
In FIG. 144, as in FIG. 143, the time when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when a breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.

When the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X101" in FIG. 144, the main control board 50 determines that the door opening has been detected. Then, as a door opening notification, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is opened is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs the sound "The door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23. do.

Thereafter, when the power supply is cut off at timing "X102" in FIG. 144, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 cease to operate, and the door open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 each execute a power-off process and back up data in a predetermined storage area.
Thereafter, at timing "X103" in FIG. 144, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.

Thereafter, at timing "X104" in FIG. 144, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked). This state continues until the timing "X105" in FIG. 144.
Thereafter, at timing "X105" in FIG. 144, the power supply is restarted with the door key being turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked). At this time, the door key is turned counterclockwise, so when the power supply is resumed, the release switch is turned on. Therefore, the main control board 50 does not issue door open notification. Further, the main control board 50 transmits a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancellation command and does not execute the door open notification.

In addition, instead of configuring the door switch 17 to turn on and execute a door open notification when the front door 12 is opened, the vehicle may be configured to execute a door open notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion port of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes openable, and such a state may be detected by the door switch 17. When it is detected that the front door 12 is openable, a door open notification may be executed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when power is being supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door open notification can be executed. Also, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being executed and then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, if the power supply is subsequently resumed with the door key turned counterclockwise (the release switch is operated), it is possible to prevent the door open notification from being executed.

Note that while the door open notification is being executed, if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and in this state the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked), the door open notification will be released. Although the configuration is such that the switch is turned on and the door open notification is canceled, the configuration may be made as shown below, for example.

While the door open notification is being executed, close the front door 12 and turn off the door switch 17. In this state, turn the door key counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked) to turn off the release switch. The door open notification may be configured to be canceled when the door key is turned on from then on, and then the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch is turned from on to off.
In this case, the operation for canceling the door open notification is to turn the door key in the opposite direction to that for unlocking the front door 12 and then return the door key to its original position.

In Figure 145, turn the door key counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked) to turn the release switch from off to on, then return the door key to its original position and turn the release switch from on to on. It is a time chart which shows the operation mode in the case where it is configured so that the door open notification is canceled when it is turned off.

In FIG. 145, similarly to FIG. 144, the power supply is cut off during door open notification, and then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, and then the door key is turned to the left. (with the release switch operated), power supply is resumed.
Also, in FIG. 145, as in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when a breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc. means.

When the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X111" in FIG. 145, the main control board 50 determines that the opening of the front door 12 (door opening) has been detected. Then, as a door opening notification, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is opened is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs a sound saying "The door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23. do.

Thereafter, when the power supply is cut off at timing "X112" in FIG. 145, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 cease to operate, and the door open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 each execute a power-off process and back up data in a predetermined storage area.

Thereafter, at timing "X113" in FIG. 145, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.
Thereafter, at timing "X114" in FIG. 145, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked). This state continues until the timing "X116" in FIG. 145.

Thereafter, at timing "X115" in FIG. 145, the power supply is restarted with the door key being turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked). At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power-off recovery process. As a result, the data backed up during the power-off process is restored to the predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. As a result, the state returns to the state at the time of power-off detection. At this time, although the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute door open notification.

Also, since the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked), the release switch will be turned on when the power supply is resumed; Since this alone does not cancel the door open notification, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 each continue without canceling the door open notification.

145, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch is turned from on to off, the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78, and transmits a notification release command to the sub-control board 80 to release the door open notification.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancel command, it cancels the door open notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

Moreover, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door switch 17 is not configured to issue a door open notification, but for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to open. , the door open notification may be executed.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to release the lock, the front door 12 becomes openable. It may be configured such that the door switch 17 detects this. When it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door open notification may be executed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened while power is being supplied, door open notification can be executed. In addition, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off, the door key is rotated counterclockwise (the front door 12 is locked). When the supply of power is resumed while the door is turned in the opposite direction to that when the door is released, the door open notification can be executed. Thereafter, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch is turned from on to off, the door open notification is released.

As a result, it is possible to open the front door 12 due to a fraudulent act, then cut off the power supply due to a fraudulent act while the door open notification is being executed, and then close the front door 12 while the power supply is cut off. Even if the front door is closed, even if the front door is closed, even if the front door is closed, the door open notification can be executed when the power supply is resumed, even if an attempt is made to hide the fraudulent activity. This prevents the fraudulent activity described above. can.

Although the tenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the tenth embodiment, the door switch 17 is turned off when the front door 12 is closed, and the door switch 17 is turned on when the front door 12 is opened. Not limited to.
For example, when the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned on, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned off. The opening may be detected.

(2) In the tenth embodiment, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, a notification indicating the opening of the front door 12 (door open notification) is executed. Not exclusively.
For example, if a door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state, the lock will be released. You can also do this.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17, it issues a door open notification even if the front door 12 is closed. It's okay.
Further, the main control board 50 can display, for example, "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a door open notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 opens the front door 12 even if the front door 12 is closed. A command indicating this (door open command) may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, the sub control board 80 may issue the door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. even if the front door 12 is closed.
Further, the sub-control board 80 can output a sound saying "The door is open" from the speaker 22 or display the words "Door open" on the image display device 23 as a door open notification, for example. .

(3) In the tenth embodiment, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 indicate that the front door 12 is open. Although the notification (door open notification) was executed, the notification is not limited to this.
When the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected, the main control board 50 executes door open notification, but the sub control board 80 does not need to execute door open notification. good.

Furthermore, when the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected, the main control board 50 does not issue a door open notification, and only the sub control board 80 issues the door open notification. It's okay.
In this case, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 does not issue a door open notification, but the main control board 50 does not issue a command indicating the opening of the front door 12 (door open command ) may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it can issue a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

(4) In the tenth embodiment, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, but the door switch 17 is not limited to this, and may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 detects that the front door 12 is opened by turning on the door switch 17, it can issue a door-opening notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, commands are sent in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, if the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 and the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 cannot detect the opening of the front door 12, nor can it receive a door open command from the sub-control board 80. Therefore, even if the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 does not execute a door open notification, nor does it stop the progress of the game by marking the door open state. In other words, the main control board 50 can continue the game even when the front door 12 is open.

(5) In the tenth embodiment, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and in this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked). ) and turn the release switch from off to on, the door open notification is released, but the invention is not limited thereto.
For example, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and in this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked) and the release switch is turned off. The door open notification may be canceled by turning the door key from off to on, then returning the door key to its original position, and turning the release switch from on to off.

In this case, simply turning the door key counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked) and turning the release switch from off to on will not release the door open notification and will continue.
Then, turning the door key in the opposite direction to unlocking the front door 12 and then returning the door key to its original position is an operation for canceling the door open notification.

(6) In the tenth embodiment, by arranging the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, the return receiving opening 131 is not arranged. configured, but is not limited to this.
For example, as shown in FIG. 132, by arranging the return receiving port 131 and the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 on the left side of the vertically downward side of the gap 112, the return receiving port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112. It may be configured not to do so. In this case, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112 either.

Furthermore, even if the upper edge portion 135 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, if the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, "1" By pushing the medal M into the gap 112, "1" medal M can be kept in the gap 112. In this case, there is no possibility that the pushed "1" medal M cannot be taken out from the gap 112.

If the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, "1" medal M may fly out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. At this time, since the return receiving port 131 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, the "1" medal M that has jumped out from the gap 112 does not fall into the return receiving port 131, but instead is placed in the storage receiving port 35a. The hopper 35 can fall into the hopper 35 and be stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, even if the upper edge 135 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, " By pushing ``2'' medals M into the gap 112, the ``2'' medals can be kept within the gap 112. In this case, the two pushed medals M will not become impossible to take out from the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with "2" medals M being pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may fly out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. Then, in the same way as when the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M that pop out from the gap 112 do not fall into the return acceptance slot 131. First, it can fall into the storage receiving port 35a and be stored in the hopper 35.

(7) In the tenth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but this is not limited to this.
133, for example, a blocking member 140 may be provided vertically below gap 112, and this blocking member 140 may block the portion of return receiving opening 131 that is vertically below gap 112. In other words, the portion of return receiving opening 131 that is vertically below gap 112 may be blocked by blocking member 140. Also, blocking member 140 may be configured to be approximately horizontal.

In this case, the medal M inserted into the gap 112 can be placed on the cover member 140. Then, when the front door 12 is closed with the medal M placed in the gap 112, the medal M falls from the gap 112 due to the impact. At this time, since the portion of the return acceptance port 131 that corresponds to the vertically downward direction of the gap 112 is blocked by the closing member 140, the medal M that has fallen from the gap 112 does not fall into the return acceptance port 131. It can fall into the storage receiving port 35a and be stored in the hopper 35.

(8) In the tenth embodiment, the return acceptance port 131 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as shown in FIG. As shown, a portion of the return acceptance port 131 may be arranged vertically below the gap 112.
Furthermore, even if a part of the return receiving port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, if the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, By pushing one medal M into the gap 112, "1" medal M can be kept within the gap 112. In this case, there is no possibility that the pushed "1" medal M cannot be taken out from the gap 112.

If the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, "1" medal M may fly out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. At this time, since a part of the return acceptance port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, the "1" medal M that jumped out from the gap 112 falls into the return acceptance port 131, and is placed in the medal return passage 132. , through the medal payout port 16 , and guided to the medal receiving tray 19 .

Further, even if a part of the return receiving port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, By pushing "2" medals M into the gap 112, "2" medals can be kept within the gap 112. In this case, the two pushed medals M will not become impossible to take out from the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with "2" medals M being pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may fly out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. Then, in the same way as when the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, "2" medals M that pop out from the gap 112 fall into the return acceptance slot 131, It is possible to pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and be guided to the medal receiving tray 19.

(9) In the tenth embodiment, regarding the width “L1” of the medal guide passage 121, the length “L2” of the screw 127, and the width “L3” of the screw 127, “L1<L2” and “L1<L3” are satisfied. It was configured to satisfy the following. That is, the length "L2" of the screw 127 is made longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding passage 121, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 is also made thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding passage 121. ), but it is not limited to this.

For example, the configuration may be such that "L1<L2" and "L1>L3" are satisfied. That is, the length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding path 121, but the width "L3" of the screw 127 is thinner (smaller) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding path 121. ) may be done.
With this, when the screw 127 comes off from the back side of the front door 12, the screw 127 that came off can enter into the medal guide path 121, so it is possible to prevent the screw 127 that came off from being lost. .

Note that, as described above, a locking portion for locking the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12 is provided at a predetermined position of the chute member 120. Then, while the sheet member 120 is locked to the back surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 using the screw 127 passed through the screw hole of the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes off, the chute member 120 will not separate from the back surface of the front door 12 and fall.

(10) In the tenth embodiment, when one medal M enters the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, even when one medal M enters the gap 112, other medals M may be configured to be able to pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.
As a result, when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M placed in the gap 112, even if the first medal M remains in the gap 112, the other medals M are directed from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120. Since the passage is not obstructed, the progress of the game can be prevented from being obstructed.

(11) In the tenth embodiment, five digits (indicator), digit 1 to digit 5, are provided, and dynamic lighting control is performed in which digit 5 to digit 1 are sequentially lit, with 5 interrupts as one cycle.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to include four digits, digit 1 to digit 4, and to sequentially light up digits 4 to 1 by dynamic lighting control, with 4 interrupts as one cycle.
That is, the number of digits (indicators) is not limited to five, but can be set as appropriate as necessary. Furthermore, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control is not limited to 5 interrupts, but can be set as appropriate depending on the number of digits, etc.

(12) In the tenth embodiment, the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again, and the event that the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) occur. The design value "T4" for the period from time to time when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected is configured to satisfy "T1<T4", but conversely, it is configured to satisfy "T1>T4". It may be configured as follows.

FIG. 141 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and after the selector retention notification is canceled once, the selector retention notification can be executed again. The relationship between the time "T1" and the design value "T4" of the period from the time when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the time when the event where the power supply is cut off is detected. This shows that.

In FIG. 141, selector retention detection is turned on/off, door open detection is turned on/off, selector retention notification is turned on/off, door open notification is turned on/off, reset switch 153 is turned on/off, and release switch is turned on/off. Regarding OFF, it is the same as in FIG. 136.
Furthermore, the timings of "X71", "X72", and "X73" in FIG. 141 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", and "X23" in FIG. 136, respectively.

When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X73" in FIG. 141 in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. . Thereafter, if an event that cuts off the power supply (power cutoff) does not occur, the main control board 50 enables the selector retention notification to be executed again at the timing of "X76".
The time from "X73" to "X76" is the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Also, assuming that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at timing "X73" in FIG. 141, then, at timing "X74", an event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, and at timing "X75", power outage processing is executed.
The time from "X73" to "X74" is the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.
The time from "X74" to "X75" is the time "T5" from when an event that cuts off the supply of power (power failure) is detected to when power failure processing is executed.

Further, similarly to FIG. 140, FIG. 141 also shows the voltage level when an event in which the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off (power cutoff) occurs.
In FIG. 141, the voltage level when the power is on is "V0". Further, the voltage level (power-off detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off is defined as "V1".

Further, FIG. 141 shows an example in which an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) occurs at timing "X73". When the power is cut off at the timing "X73", the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1" at the timing "X74". Further, the time from "X73" to "X74" is "T4".
Furthermore, if the power supply voltage becomes less than the drive limit voltage level, the power-off process cannot be executed, so if the power-off occurs at the timing "X73" in FIG. The disconnection process is set to end.

In addition, in FIG. 141, the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed (the timing of "X73") and the timing when the power supply is turned off after the selector retention notification is once canceled are shown. The figure shows the timing (timing of "X76") at which the selector retention notification can be executed again if an event that cuts off the supply (power cutoff) does not occur.
Furthermore, FIG. 141 shows the timing at which an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs and the timing at which the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed. It is matched.

And, it is configured to satisfy "T1>T4". In other words, the design value "T4" for the period from the time when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs until the time when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected is the design value "T4", which is the period when the selector retention notification is once released. After that, if an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) does not occur, the time required until the selector retention notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than "T1".

If the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X73" in FIG. 141 in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification and execute a door open notification. Also, assume that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at approximately the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). In this case, the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected at the timing of "X74" in FIG. 141, and then the power off process is executed at the timing of "X75". If no event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs thereafter, the selector stuck notification can be executed again at the timing of "X76" in FIG. 141.

Therefore, in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, if an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at approximately the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (on), the selector retention alarm is issued. Once released, and then before re-executing the selector retention notification, a power-off is detected and a power-off process is executed. Therefore, in the power-off process, data indicating execution of selector retention notification is not backed up, so that when power supply is resumed (recovery from power-off), selector retention notification can be prevented from being executed.

In Fig. 141, at the timing of "X75", a door open notification is executed instead of a selector retention notification. Therefore, in the power off process, data indicating that the door open notification is being executed is backed up, so when the power supply is resumed (recovered from a power off), the door open notification is executed.
Also, in FIG. 141, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using the selector retention error as an example, but in the case of a selector pass error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation will be the same as in the case of a selector retention error.

(13) In the tenth embodiment, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled once, and then the operation is performed again without requiring any operation. Although selector retention notification has been executed, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled, the door open notification is executed, and then the front When the release switch is operated in a situation where the door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the door open notification may be canceled and the selector retention notification may be executed again. .

FIG. 142 shows a case where the reset switch 153 is operated with the front door 12 open and the cause of the selector retention error not removed, and a case where the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error is removed. 12 is a time chart showing an operation mode when a release switch is operated in a situation where the release switch is not in use.
In FIG. 142, at timing "X81", when the medal M is clogged in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge that.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnation error, it displays "CE", indicating a selector stagnation error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification, and transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.
In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector stuck command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stuck notification, and displays the words "Selector stuck error" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X82" in Figure 142, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, but while the selector dwell notification is being executed, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector dwell notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it transmits a door open command, which indicates that the front door 12 is open, to the sub-control board 80. However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X83" in FIG. 142 and the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 cancels selector retention notification and executes door open notification. Specifically, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12.

When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error clear command, it clears the selector stuck notification and issues a door open notification. Specifically, it switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call an attendant" to "Door is open," and switches the display on the image display device 23 from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open."

Thereafter, at timing "X84" in FIG. 142, when the front door 12 is closed in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the door switch 17 is turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects opening of the front door 12. However, the door open notification is not canceled even if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and continues until the release switch is operated (turned on).

Thereafter, at timing "X85" in FIG. 142, the front door 12 is closed and the door key is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise) to release the door key, with the cause of the selector retention error not being removed. When the switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and executes the selector retention notification. Specifically, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from "dE" indicating a selector retention error to "CE" indicating opening of the front door 12.

Further, when the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancellation command, it cancels the door open notification and executes the selector retention notification. Specifically, the audio output from the speaker 22 is changed from "door is open" to "please call the attendant", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to "selector retention error". Switch to

Here, in FIG. 142, the selector retention error is taken as an example, and when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the error has not been removed, and when the front door 12 is closed and We have explained the operation when the release switch is operated in a situation where the cause of the error has not been removed.
However, this is not limited to this, and also applies to selector passing errors, hopper empty errors, and hopper jam errors when the reset switch 153 is operated while the front door 12 is open and the cause of the error has not been removed. , and when the release switch is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the error has not been removed, the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs.

Furthermore, in FIG. 142, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door open notification is executed. When detected, the configuration may be such that a door open notification is executed.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to release the lock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the front door 12 is unlocked and can be opened.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked and can be opened by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 closes the front door 12. Even if the door is closed, the door open notification may be executed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 is configured to release the door open notification. be able to.

In this way, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification can be executed. Thereafter, when it is detected that the front door 12 has been opened or can be opened, and the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, an operation for canceling the predetermined error notification (pressing the reset switch 153) is performed. operation) is performed, the predetermined error notification is once canceled, and then the door open notification is made executable. After that, when the front door 12 is closed or locked and the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, if an operation to cancel the door open alarm (operation of the release switch) is performed, the door open alarm will be activated. After canceling the error notification, the predetermined error notification can be notified again.

Thereby, it can be confirmed that the reset switch 153 functions normally, and it can be notified again that the cause of the error has not been removed.
In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, the predetermined error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Since it is possible to notify the user that the front door 12 is open, fraudulent acts can be prevented.

(14) In the tenth embodiment, processes related to error detection, execution of error notification, and cancellation of error notification are executed in interrupt processing.
Then, in the same interrupt process, there is a case where the error notification is once canceled and then the error notification is executed again.
In the example shown in FIG. 136, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door is opened. A notification was issued. Thereafter, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification was canceled and the selector retention notification was executed again.

However, in the same interrupt process, the selector retention notification may be canceled and then the selector retention notification may be executed again. In this case, door open notification is not executed.
In this way, the selector retention notification is canceled according to the order of error detection, error notification execution, and error notification cancellation in the interrupt processing, and then the selector retention notification is executed again without executing the door open notification. There are cases where

Further, in one interrupt process, only one of the processes related to error detection, execution of error notification, and cancellation of error notification may be executed. In such a case, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled, the door open notification is executed, and then, There is a case where the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again.

(15) In the tenth embodiment, when the return member 130 is fixed to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that the height gradually decreases from the front side to the back side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of Fig. 126. In other words, the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that the height is high on the front side and low on the back side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of Fig. 126.

In this case, when a medal M is inserted into the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135, a force that tends to cause the medal M to slide toward the back in the direction perpendicular to the page of FIG. 126 is applied to the medal M. work. That is, a force acts on the medal M to cause it to slide toward the back surface of the front door 12. Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 tends to stay within the gap 112. Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with the medal M placed in the gap 112, the medal M is unlikely to fall from the gap 112 even if a shock is applied when the front door 12 is closed.

Then, while one medal M remains within the gap 112, another medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 hits the first medal M within the gap 112 and stops. At this time, as the other medals M stay in the medal passage 111, the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, and the selector retention notification is performed. It is possible to indirectly detect that

Further, contrary to the above, the upper edge portion 135 may be inclined so that the height thereof gradually decreases from the back side to the front side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 126. That is, the upper edge portion 135 may be inclined so that the height on the back side is high and the height on the near side is low in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 126.

In this case, when a medal M is placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135, a force acts on the medal M trying to slide towards the front in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 126. In other words, a force acts on the medal M trying to slide in the opposite direction to the back surface of the front door 12 (towards the inside of the cabinet 13). For this reason, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 is likely to slide down from the gap 112 towards the inside of the cabinet 13. Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 is less likely to remain in the gap 112.

(16) In the tenth embodiment, the opening at the top of the hopper 35 is the storage receiving port 35a. The storage receiving port 35a is provided below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the upper edge of the side wall of the hopper 35 may be disposed above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). In other words, the upper opening of the hopper 35 may be disposed above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121).

In this case, for example, a recess cut out downward from the upper end of the side wall of the hopper 35 is provided at a predetermined position on the side wall of the hopper 35. Further, the lower end of this recess is disposed below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide path 121). This concave portion can be used as a storage receiving opening 35a for receiving medals M guided by the chute member 120.

In this case, with the front door 12 closed, the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guiding path 121) should face the recessed portion serving as the storage receiving port 35a. .
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the vicinity of the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guiding passage 121) is inserted into the inside of the recessed portion serving as the storage receiving port 35a. You can do it like this.

(17) The various modifications shown in the first to tenth embodiments and the first to tenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations. It is.

Eleventh Embodiment
The eleventh embodiment relates to error detection. In the eleventh embodiment, after an error is detected, the error cannot be released until a predetermined condition is satisfied.
In the following description, "error" corresponds to a "recoverable error" and does not include an "unrecoverable error".
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered from by removing the cause of the error without turning the power on and off.
In the following, a hopper error, a selector error, and a door open error will be given as examples of errors.
Examples of hopper errors include:
"HP" error: medal clogging (stagnation) error in the hopper 35; "HE" error: medal empty error in the hopper 35; "H0" error: abnormality in the payout sensor 37 of the hopper 35.
Note that the above errors do not represent all hopper errors.

The "HP" error occurs if, for example, after the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b detects a medal (the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b is turned on), the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b remains off even after a predetermined period has elapsed. This is an error when there is no power on (always on).
The "HE" error is an error that occurs when the hopper motor 36 is driven and the payout process is executed, but the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b does not detect a medal (the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b is off). be. Specifically, this error occurs when the medals in the hopper 35 run out.
The "H0" error occurs when the on/off timing of the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b is not within the standard value range, for example, the time from when the dispensing sensor 37a is turned on until when the dispensing sensor 37b is turned on is the standard time. This is an error when the value is not within the range.

Also, selector errors include, for example,
"CE" error: Medal retention error in the medal selector "CP" error: Medal incorrect passage error in the medal selector "CH" error: Abnormality in the passage sensor 46 located in the medal selector "C0" error: Inside the medal selector An example of this is an abnormality in the insertion sensor 44 located at the "C1" error: Abnormal medal insertion error.
Note that the above error does not mean all selector errors.
A "CE" error occurs when the input sensor 44b, which is located on the downstream side of the two input sensors 44a and 44b, turns on (after detecting a medal), but the input sensor 44b remains off even after a predetermined period has elapsed. This is an error if it does not.
The "CP" error is an error that occurs when, for example, after the input sensor 44a is turned on, the input sensor 44a is turned off without the input sensor 44b being turned on.

The "CH" error is an error that occurs when an abnormality in the passage sensor 46 is detected. For example, this error occurs when the passage sensor 46 does not turn off even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the passage sensor 46 detects a medal (the passage sensor 46 is turned on).
The "C1" error is an error that occurs when an abnormality in the passage time of the passage sensor 46 or the input sensor 44a or 44b is detected.

Furthermore, the door opening error is referred to as a "dE" error, and is an error detected when the front door 12 is opened. The error is canceled by closing the front door 12 and turning the door key in a predetermined direction to perform an error cancellation operation (described later).
Hereinafter, when a hopper error is referred to as an error, it is an error related to any of the above-mentioned hoppers, or an error related to a hopper other than the above-mentioned ones.
Similarly, when a selector error is referred to below, it is an error related to any of the above-mentioned selectors, or an error related to a selector other than the above-mentioned ones.

Errors such as the above "HP" and "CE" are displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (error display on the main side). For example, when the display of the obtained number display LED 78 before the error occurs is "*0"("*" indicates off), if a "HP" error occurs, the display of the obtained number display LED 78 changes from "*0" to "HP" error. Switch to "HP". Then, when the "HP" error is canceled, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 returns from "HP" to "*0".
Furthermore, when an error occurs, a command to that effect is sent to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it displays an image corresponding to the received error command on the image display device 23, outputs a sound corresponding to the error from the speaker 22, and sets the production lamp 21 to the error state. Lights up in the corresponding color.
Then, when the error is cleared, a command to that effect is sent to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it returns the states of the image display device 23, the speaker 22, and the production lamp 21 to the state before the error occurred.

In addition, in the following example, when the second error, the selector error, occurs while the first error, the hopper error, occurs (Fig. 146), and when the second error, the selector error, occurs while the first error, the selector error, occurs, the second error occurs. A case in which a hopper error occurs (FIG. 147) is illustrated.
Here, it is almost impossible for a selector error and a hopper error to occur simultaneously during a game. Specifically, this is because it is actually impossible for the medal payout process to be executed when a selector error occurs.
Further, when a hopper error occurs, the blocker 45 is turned off, so even if medals are thrown in, the medals do not reach the positions of the throwing sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, it is actually impossible for a selector error to occur when a hopper error occurs.

However, first, for example, when a medal is inserted while a hopper error (for example, "HE" error) occurs, it passes through the blocker 45 for some reason (for example, when a problem occurs in the drive of the blocker 45, etc.), and the medal is inserted into the input sensor 44a. and 44b. In addition, there are cases where an act of medal insertion is performed during the occurrence of a hopper error, and abnormal medal insertion is detected.
Secondly, there is a case where the hopper is disturbed during the occurrence of the selector error, and an abnormality in the payout sensor 37 is detected.
In this way, there is a possibility that a selector error may occur while a hopper error is occurring, or a hopper error may occur while a selector error is occurring.
Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, error notification is controlled including the above event.

Next, the flow from error detection to notification will be described using the flowchart shown in the third embodiment.
In the main processing (M_MAIN) of FIG. 46, the main control board 50 proceeds to step S276 when it is determined in step S274 that medals have been inserted, and executes medal management. In this process, the presence or absence of a selector error is determined based on the detection by the passage sensor 46 and the input sensors 44a and 44b. Specifically, in step S463 (input error check) of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 47, it is determined whether a selector error is detected for each interrupt process.
When the main control board 50 detects a selector error, it sends a command to that effect to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it can issue a selector error notification.

Further, when the main control board 50 determines that a small winning combination has been won in the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 46, it executes a medal payout process in step S294. Alternatively, when the main control board 50 determines that the settlement switch 43 has been operated in the medal management in step S276, the main control board 50 moves to the settlement process and executes the medal payout process for the stored medals.
During the medal payout process, the payout sensors 37a and 37b determine whether there is a hopper error. Specifically, in step S463 (input error check) of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 47, it is determined whether a medal hopper error is detected for each interrupt process.

When the main control board 50 detects a hopper error, it sends a command to that effect to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it becomes possible to notify the hopper error.
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during error detection or error notification and it is necessary to back up the data related to the error, in the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48, for example, before the processing in step S2772, Then, backup processing of the data related to the error is executed.
Then, when the power is turned on, at some timing in the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. 42, the backed up data related to the error is read, and the state before the power is turned off is restored.

FIG. 146 is a time chart showing example 1 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment, and shows the first error detection status, the first error notification status, the second error detection status, and the second error notification status, respectively. It shows.
In example 1 of FIG. 146, the first error is a hopper error and the second error is a selector error. However, it is not limited to this error.
Error notification is performed on both the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.
The main control board 50 provides error notification using the acquisition number display LED 78. For example, when the medal retention error described above is detected, "CE" is displayed as a segment on the acquired number display LED 78. Further, the sub-control board 80 performs error notification using the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23. “BGM” of the error notification shown in the example below corresponds to the output of the error notification sound by the sub-control board 80.

First, it is assumed that no other errors have occurred when the cause of the first error occurs. When the cause of the first error occurs, the first error is detected by the main control board 50. In this example, it is assumed that the timing at which the cause of the first error occurs and the timing at which the first error is detected are simultaneous (there is no time lag). In reality, when an error factor occurs, the error is detected (determined that an error has occurred) by the interrupt processing that is executed afterwards, so the maximum time required is one interrupt time (for example, 2.235 ms). However, this time lag will be ignored here.

As described above, when the main control board 50 detects the first error, it transmits an error command related to the first error to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command related to the first error, it notifies the user of the first error.
On the other hand, the main control board 50 performs control so that the operation to clear the first error is not valid for a predetermined period of time after the first error is detected. Here, the cause of the first error can be removed even within the predetermined period of time. However, even if the cause of the first error is removed within the predetermined period of time, the operation to clear the first error is invalidated until the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Of course, the cause of the first error can be removed even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.
For this reason, the notification of the first error is executed for at least a predetermined period of time. The BGM related to the error is configured to make one loop within this predetermined period of time. In other words, the BGM will make at least one loop as the notification of the first error. The sub-control board 80 stores sound source data for outputting the BGM, and the playback of this sound source data from start to finish corresponds to "one loop" of the BGM.
If the first error clearing operation is not performed even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the notification of the first error continues and the BGM moves to the second loop.

Here, the start of the "predetermined period" is "a predetermined timing after the first error is detected." The "predetermined timing after detecting the first error" means that when the main control board 50 detects the first error, when the main control board 50 sets an error state, the main control board 50 issues an error command. When the sub-control board 80 starts error notification, etc. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the "predetermined timing after detecting the first error" is "when the first error is detected."
From the above, in the eleventh embodiment, "when the first error is detected" is "when the cause of the first error occurs" and "a predetermined timing after detecting the first error" It is.
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, when performing the operation to cancel the first error, insert the door key DK into the door key insertion slot 160a of the front door 12 and turn it counterclockwise by 45 degrees, as will be described in detail in the twelfth embodiment below. This is done by rotating it and turning on the reset sensor 175 (FIG. 160) provided inside.
Note that the error cancellation operation is not limited to turning the door key DK counterclockwise, and various methods may be used. For example, pressing the reset switch 153 shown in FIG. 125 may be used as an error release operation.

When the reset sensor 175 detects that it is turned on, it is determined whether the cause of the detected first error has been removed. When it is determined that the predetermined period of time has elapsed and the cause of the first error has been removed, the notification of the first error on the main control board 50 side is ended. Additionally, a command is sent to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the first error has been cleared. Upon receiving the command, the sub control board 80 ends the first error notification. On the other hand, when it detects that the reset sensor 175 is turned on but determines that the cause of the first error has not been removed, the main control board 50 continues to notify the first error. Furthermore, no error cancellation command is sent to the sub-control board 80. As a result, notification of the first error continues on the sub-control board 80 side as well.

Further, even if it is detected that the reset sensor 175 is turned on and it is determined that the cause of the first error has been removed, if the predetermined period has not elapsed, the main control board 50 Continue reporting errors. Furthermore, no error cancellation command is sent to the sub-control board 80. As a result, notification of the first error continues on the sub-control board 80 side as well.
Note that the determination as to whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed is made, for example, as follows. First, at the start of a predetermined period, a timer value corresponding to the predetermined period is set in the RWM 53, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing. Then, it is determined whether the timer value has become "0" for each interrupt processing, and when it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed, and the timer value is "0". When it is determined that this is the case, it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed.

The example in Figure 146 shows an example in which an operation to clear the first error (turning the door key DK) is performed before a specified period of time has elapsed after the cause of the first error is removed, but in this case the operation to clear the first error is invalid and the notification of the first error cannot be terminated.
If the first error is cleared again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the clearing operation becomes valid, and the main control board 50 transmits a command to the sub-control board 80 to the effect that the first error has been cleared. Upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 ends the notification of the first error.

Also, Example 1 in Fig. 146 shows an example in which the cause of the second error occurs during the specified period. In this Example 1, no other errors are detected during the specified period. Therefore, although the cause of the second error occurs before the specified period has elapsed, the second error is not detected during the specified period.
One method of such control is to prevent the main processing from proceeding to the second error detection processing during a predetermined period of time.
In this example 1, the second error (selector error) is not detected during the predetermined period, but other errors may be detectable.
When the predetermined period for the first error has elapsed, the main control board 50 detects the second error and sends a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. This causes the sub-control board 80 to notify the second error. Therefore, the second error is notified at approximately the same time as the end of the predetermined period for the first error (the start of the predetermined period for the second error).
In this manner, in this embodiment, the notification of the first error and the notification of the second error are not executed in a duplicated manner. Therefore, the notification of the second error starts after the notification of the first error ends. Of course, the second error is detected before the notification of the second error starts.
In addition, when notification of the second error starts, the operation to clear the second error becomes invalid for a certain period of time from the start of notification of the second error. This is the same as in the case of the first error. Therefore, the second error cannot be cleared (notification of the second error cannot be ended) during the certain period of time.

Similar to the first error notification, the second error notification is configured such that the BGM loops once in a predetermined period. Therefore, the BGM is configured to loop at least once upon notification of the second error.
After the predetermined period has elapsed, the second error can be cleared. The second error cancellation operation is the same as the first error cancellation operation, which is an operation of turning the door key DK counterclockwise by 45 degrees.
When the cause of the second error is removed and the second error cancellation operation is performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the cancellation operation becomes effective, so the main control board 50 The error notification is ended, and a command is sent to the sub-control board 80 to the effect that the second error has been cleared. Upon receiving the command, the sub control board 80 ends the second error notification.

In this way, when a first error occurs, the notification of the first error is made for at least a predetermined period. Also, when a second error occurs, the notification of the second error is made for at least a predetermined period. Therefore, even if a second error occurs before the notification of the first error ends after the occurrence of the first error, the notification period (predetermined period) of the first error is not shortened.
In addition, since the first error is detected at approximately the same time as the cause of the first error occurs, the time when the first error was detected is stored in the error log (history) in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 as the date and time when the first error occurred.
In contrast, for the second error, the time when the second error was detected is stored as the date and time when the second error occurred. Therefore, strictly speaking, there may be a discrepancy between the date and time when the second error actually occurred and the date and time when the second error occurred (actually the date and time when the second error was detected) stored in the RWM 53.

Fig. 147 is a time chart showing Example 2 of error notification. Example 2 differs from Example 1 of Fig. 146 in that a second error is detected even during a predetermined period of a first error. In Example 2, the first error is a selector error, and the second error is a hopper error. However, the errors are not limited to these.
In FIG. 147, if the cause of the second error occurs during a predetermined period after the first error is detected, the second error is detected even during the predetermined period. However, the notification of the second error is not executed in overlap with the notification of the first error. When the cause of the first error is removed, the predetermined period for the first error has elapsed, and an operation to release the first error is performed, the notification of the first error is terminated. When the notification of the first error is terminated, the notification of the second error that has already been detected is started. When the notification of the second error is started, a new predetermined period is started as the notification period for the second error, and the operation to release the second error is invalid until the predetermined period has elapsed. When the cause of the second error is removed, the predetermined period has elapsed, and an operation to release the second error is performed, the notification of the second error is terminated.
In this way, when a first error occurs, the notification of the first error is made for at least a predetermined period. Also, when a second error occurs, the notification of the second error is made for at least a predetermined period. Therefore, even if a second error occurs after the occurrence of a first error, the notification period (predetermined period) of the first error is not shortened.

FIG. 148 is a time chart showing example 3 of error notification. In Example 3, the first error is either a hopper error or a selector error. Alternatively, it may be a recoverable error other than these two errors.
Example 3 in FIG. 148 shows an example in which the front door 12 is opened within a predetermined period after the first error is detected, and a door opening error (hereinafter simply referred to as "door error") is detected.
In the eleventh embodiment, door errors can be detected and reported even during a predetermined period. Further, the door error can be canceled at any time (even during a predetermined period), and if the cancellation operation is performed by closing the front door 12, the notification of the door error ends at that point. In other words, unlike the first error and the like, the door error is not an error that is notified for a predetermined period of time once it occurs.
When the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened. When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened, it notifies the main side of an error (displays "dE") and sends a command to that effect to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it notifies the door error.
When the above-mentioned selector error or hopper error occurs, the hall clerk opens the front door 12 in order to eliminate the cause of the error, but at this time, the opening of the front door 12 is detected and a door error occurs. becomes.

In Example 3 of FIG. 148, if the front door 12 is opened during a predetermined period after the first error is detected, a door error is immediately detected regardless of whether the predetermined period is still in progress. Furthermore, when the door error is detected, a door error notification is immediately performed. Therefore, the notification of the first error and the notification of the door error are performed in a duplicated manner. For example, the background music corresponding to the notification of the first error and the door error sound (for example, an alarm sound or a voice repeatedly saying "The door is open") are output in a duplicated manner.
Here, while the door error is being notified, the volume of the notification of the first error may be lower than normal. Alternatively, while the door error is being notified, the notification of the first error may be only an image, and no audio output may be provided. Furthermore, while the door error is being notified, the notification of the first error may be interrupted.

When the front door 12 is closed and a door error release operation is performed, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is closed, regardless of whether it is within a predetermined period of time, and the front door 12 is closed ( When it is determined that the door error has been cleared, the door error notification ends. Therefore, only the notification of the first error continues.
Similar to the above example, the first error cannot be canceled until a predetermined period has elapsed, and can be canceled by performing the first error cancellation operation after the predetermined period has elapsed.
Although not shown in FIG. 148, when the front door 12 is closed and the door error release operation is performed after the predetermined period of time for the first error has elapsed and after the cause of the first error has been removed, the door error notification and Both notifications of the first error may be terminated. In this case, the door error cancellation operation also serves as the first error cancellation operation.

FIG. 149 is a time chart showing a fourth example in which a power outage (an event that cuts off power supply) occurs during the occurrence of the first error.
In this example, it is assumed that "predetermined period=time t1+time t2", and after the first error is detected and the predetermined period is started, the power is cut off when time t1 has elapsed.
When the first error is detected, the first error notification is performed, but when the power is cut off, the power supply is eventually stopped, so the first error notification is also interrupted.
Here, in this embodiment, data indicating that time t1 of the predetermined time period has elapsed is stored in the RWM 53 as backup data during the power-off process.
When the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the state returns to the state before the power was turned off (regardless of whether an error was detected before the power was turned off). If an error is detected before the power is turned off, after the power restoration process shown in FIG. 42 is completed, the data related to the time t1 that was backed up at the time of the power cut is read, and the notification of the first error is restarted at a predetermined timing. Ru.

After the power is restored from the power failure, the operation to clear the first error is invalid until the time t2 has elapsed. This makes it possible to secure a notification period (predetermined period) for the first error, in other words, a period during which the operation to clear the first error is invalid, in the total period before and after the power failure. By doing this, even if the power is cut off due to cheating after the first error is detected, the first error can be notified after the power is restored from the power failure, and a predetermined period can be secured in total before and after the power failure.
When the notification of the first error is resumed after recovery from a power outage, the first error cannot be cleared until a time t2 has elapsed since the notification was resumed. After the time t2 has elapsed, if the cause of the first error has been removed, the first error can be cleared.

Example 5 in FIG. 150 is a time chart illustrating an example when power is cut off while the first error occurs, and is a modification of FIG. 149.
In this example, if power is cut off when time t1 has elapsed during the predetermined period, data related to time t1 is not backed up.
After the power is restored, even if the notification time of the first error is less than time t2 after the power is restored, provided that the cause of the first error has been removed. Make it possible to cancel the notification. In this way, although the first error notification is resumed after the power is restored from the power cut, the predetermined time period before and after the power cut may not be secured.
When controlling in this manner, for example, when the power is restored from a power-off, "0" is stored in the RWM 53 as a timer value corresponding to the remaining time of the predetermined period. Therefore, if the cause of the first error has been removed after recovery from power-off, the notification of the first error can be ended immediately after the first error cancellation operation is performed.

Next, various occurrence situations of selector errors and hopper errors and specific examples of notification modes in such cases will be explained. In the following explanation, selector error 1 is an error caused by the occurrence of backflow of medals. For example, when the input sensor 44a (upstream side) detects a medal after the input sensor 44b (downstream side) first detects a medal, it is determined that a backflow of medals has occurred, and selector error 1 occurs.
Further, selector error 2 is an error caused by the occurrence of accumulation of medals. For example, the input sensors 44a and/or 44b turn off->on->off as the medal passes, which corresponds to a case where the on state continues for a predetermined period of time.
In the following example, selector error 1 occurs first, and then selector error 2 occurs immediately thereafter.

Here, when a backflow of medals occurs (including illegal medal insertion due to a rash act), selector error 1 (backflow) occurs by detecting an abnormality in the insertion sensor 44. However, when a backflow of medals occurs, Usually, medals get jammed in the medal selector. Therefore, by removing the medal jam that has occurred, the cause of selector error 1 is removed.
Similarly, when selector error 2 (retention) occurs, medals are jammed in the medal selector, and the cause of selector error 2 is removed by removing the jammed medals.
Furthermore, if the hopper error is, for example, a hopper empty error, the cause of the hopper error is removed by replenishing the hopper with medals. Furthermore, if the hopper error is, for example, a medal jam at the hopper exit, the cause of the hopper error is removed by removing the jammed medals.
Furthermore, if the hopper error is, for example, an abnormality in the dispensing sensor 37a (including unauthorized dispensing due to a trifling act), there is no operation to remove the cause of the hopper error, and after the error cancellation operation is performed, , the presence or absence of an abnormality in the payout sensor 37 is determined.

In addition, in the example below, the cause of the error has been removed at the time the error cancellation operation is performed, regardless of whether the error cannot be canceled during the period when the error cannot be canceled (corresponding to the "predetermined time" above). (This error has not occurred.)
Furthermore, the "error cancellation operation" corresponds to an operation of turning the door key DK counterclockwise by 45 degrees (however, as described above, it may also be an operation of turning on the reset switch 153, etc.).

FIG. 151(a) is a time chart showing an example 6 of error notification.
In this example, first the cause of selector error 1 occurs, and immediately after that selector error 2 occurs. In this case, notification of selector error 1 is executed based on selector error 1 that occurred first. Once notification of selector error 1 has started, the notification of selector error 1 will not end during the "(error) unrecoverable period 1"("fiveseconds" in this example) even if a selector error cancel operation is performed.
Furthermore, the figure shows an example in which the cause of a hopper error occurs during the notification of selector error 1 and during the unrecoverable period 1. As described above, after the occurrence of a selector error, the progress of the game is interrupted and no medals are paid out, so it is difficult to imagine that a hopper error will occur, but there is a risk that the payout of medals will be forcibly executed due to cheating, for example, and in such a case a hopper error will occur.

From the above, three errors, selector error 1, selector seller 2, and hopper error, overlap during the notification of selector error 1 (during uncancellable period 1).
Then, when the cause of the selector error is removed and a selector error cancellation operation is performed during the first uncancellable period 1, the notification of the selector error 1 does not end because the cancellation operation is invalid.
Next, when a selector error cancellation operation is performed five seconds after the start of notification of selector error 1, the operation is valid, and therefore notification of selector error 1 ends.
Note that the error cancellation operation performed 5 seconds after the non-cancellable period may be performed at any time as long as 5 seconds have elapsed (the same applies to other non-cancellable periods).
When the selector error release operation (valid) is executed and the notification of selector error 1 is completed, the notification is then switched to the notification of selector error 2. The non-releasable period 2 for notifying this selector error 2 also continues for "5 seconds" again. Therefore, even if 5 seconds or more have passed since the cause of selector error 2 occurred and the cause of selector error 2 has been removed, the notification of selector error 2 will not be sent until the irreversible period 2 ends. cannot be terminated.

If a selector error cancel operation is performed 5 seconds after the start of the notification of selector error 2, the operation is valid and the notification of selector error 2 ends. When the notification of selector error 2 ends, it switches to the notification of a hopper error. The uncancellable period 3 during which the hopper error is notified also continues for another 5 seconds. Therefore, even if 5 seconds or more have passed since the cause of the hopper error occurred and the cause of the hopper error has been removed, the notification of the hopper error cannot be ended until the uncancellable period 3 ends.
If an operation to cancel the hopper error is performed 5 seconds after the start of the hopper error notification, the operation is valid and the notification of the hopper error ends.
In this way, even if three errors occur at the same time, an error notification is executed for each error for "5 seconds," and each "5 seconds" is a period during which the error cannot be reset.

FIG. 151(b) is a time chart showing a modification of (a).
The example in FIG. 151(b) shows a case where the operation to clear the selector error is performed 20 seconds after the first notification of the selector error 1 in FIG. 151(a).
In this case, the operation to cancel the selector error is performed 20 seconds after the notification of the selector error 1, and therefore the first uncancellable period 1 (5 seconds) has passed. Therefore, the notification of the selector error 1 ends due to the error cancel operation, just like in FIG. 151(a).
However, no matter how many seconds have passed since the lapse of the unrecoverable period 1 when the error cancellation operation is performed, the other unrecoverable periods (unrecoverable period 2 and unrecoverable period 3) will not be canceled or shortened.
Therefore, even if an operation to cancel the selector error is performed 20 seconds after the notification of selector error 1, the notification of selector error 1 will end, but then the notification of selector error 2 will begin. And since the notification of selector error 2 has a non-cancelable period 2 of 5 seconds, any operation to cancel the selector error during this non-cancelable period 2 will be invalid. If an operation to cancel the selector error is performed after the 5 seconds of the non-cancelable period 2 have elapsed, the cancellation operation will be valid and the notification of selector error 2 will end. However, a hopper error notification will then be issued.

FIG. 152 is a time chart showing example 7 of error notification.
In this example 7, if a plurality of errors occur within "5 seconds" which is the first non-cancellable period, the non-cancelable period continues for more than 5 seconds.
In the example of FIG. 152, a hopper error factor occurs first, and a hopper error notification is performed. Next, selector error 1 (reverse flow) and selector error 2 (stagnation) occur before "5 seconds" have elapsed since the hopper error notification.
In this case, the hopper error notification cannot be terminated even if the hopper error cancellation operation is performed after "5 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the hopper error notification. In Example 7, the hopper error cancellation operation becomes effective after 10 seconds have elapsed since the hopper error notification.
In this example 7, the period until the hopper error cancellation operation becomes effective is set to "10 seconds," but the period is not limited to this, and may be "15 seconds." If it is "15 seconds", then "period when hopper error notification cannot be canceled (5 seconds) + period when selector error 1 notification cannot be canceled (5 seconds) + period when selector error 2 notification cannot be canceled (5 seconds)" is equal to

Additionally, if 10 seconds have elapsed after the hopper error was reported, if you remove all the causes of the hopper error, selector error 1, and selector error 2, and then perform the error cancellation operation, the hopper error will be canceled. End notification. Furthermore, after the notification of the hopper error ends, the notification of the selector error 1 and the notification of the selector error 2 are not executed.
As in this example 7, if other errors occur cumulatively during the first error notification period and a sufficient error notification period is secured, if the first error release operation is executed, The normal state may be restored without reporting other errors. It goes without saying that all the causes of the error need to be removed when the error cancellation operation is executed and the error notification is ended.

FIG. 153 is a time chart showing example 8 of error notification.
In this example 8, the cause of the hopper error first occurs, and after the hopper error is reported, selector error 1 (backflow) and selector error 2 (stagnation) occur within the first non-releasable period 1 (5 seconds). This is an example of what happened. That is, the error occurrence situation is the same as in Example 7 of FIG. 152.
In this example, the first non-releasable period 1 (5 seconds) is a period corresponding to a hopper error, and even if the hopper error release operation is performed during this non-releasable period 1, the notification of the hopper error does not end.
If a hopper error cancellation operation is performed after the non-cancellation period 1 has elapsed, the cancellation operation becomes effective and the notification of the hopper error ends. When the notification of the hopper error ends, the process moves to the next notification of the selector error 1 (non-cancellable period 2 (5 seconds)).

The unresolvable period 2 (5 seconds) is a period corresponding to the selector error 1, and even if the selector error resetting operation is performed during the unreleasable period 2, the notification of the selector error 1 does not end.
After the uncancellable period 2 has elapsed, if a selector error canceling operation is performed, the canceling operation becomes effective and the notification of selector error 1 ends. When the selector error 1 notification ends, the selector error 2 notification (unresolvable period 3 (5 seconds)) is started.
The unresolvable period 3 (5 seconds) is a period corresponding to the selector error 2, and even if the selector error resetting operation is performed during the unreleasable period 3, the notification of the selector error 2 does not end.
After the uncancellable period 3 has elapsed, if a selector error canceling operation is performed, the canceling operation becomes effective and the notification of the selector error 2 ends.

Next, when the notification of selector error 2 ends, notification of the hopper error is executed again (second time). Note that no hopper error has occurred at this point. This system calls attention to the first hopper error by notifying the user again.
The notification of the second hopper error continues for a non-releasable period 4 (5 seconds). Even if the error cancellation operation is performed during the non-cancellable period 4, the notification of the second hopper error does not end. When the error cancellation operation is performed after the uncancellable period 4 has elapsed, the cancellation operation becomes effective and the notification of the second hopper error ends. When the second hopper error notification ends, the system returns to normal.
As described above, although no error has occurred at that time (the cause of the error has been removed), the first error that has occurred may be notified again to call attention to it.

Example 9 in FIG. 154 is a time chart showing a situation in which errors occur in the order of hopper error, selector error 1, and selector error 2, similar to FIG. 153.
In example 9 of FIG. 154, a hopper error factor first occurs, a hopper error notification is performed, and during this hopper error notification, the hopper error factor is removed, and the selector error factor is also removed. This is an example.
If all error factors are removed within unresolvable period 1, and the hopper error is cleared after the unremovable period 1 has elapsed, the hopper error notification will end and the next selector error 1 will be notified. Start. In other words, the cause of the selector error has been removed at this point, but based on the fact that selector error 1 has occurred, selector error 1 is reported regardless of whether the cause of the selector error has been removed at that point. Then, the notification will continue until the non-cancellable period 2 has elapsed. Until the uncancellable period 2 has elapsed, even if an error cancellation operation is performed, it will be invalid.

If an operation to cancel the error is performed after the unrecoverable period 2 has elapsed, the notification of selector error 1 ends and the notification of the next selector error 2 begins. As above, the cause of the selector error has been removed at this point, but based on the occurrence of selector error 2, selector error 2 is notified regardless of whether the cause of the selector error has been removed at that point or not, and this notification continues until the unrecoverable period 3 has elapsed. Until the unrecoverable period 3 has elapsed, any operation to cancel the error will be invalid.
If an operation to cancel the error is performed after the lapse of the irrecoverable period 3, the notification of the selector error 2 ends and the normal state is restored.
In this way, error notifications having an unrecoverable period may be issued in the order in which the errors occurred, regardless of whether the cause of the error has been eliminated at that point.

Although the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the example of FIG. 149, it is also possible to continue the notification of the first error for a predetermined period after recovery from power-off. That is, the first error cancellation operation is disabled during a predetermined period after recovery from power-off.
An example of such a control method is to back up data corresponding to the entire predetermined period when a power outage is detected and the process is shifted to a power outage process.
Furthermore, in this case, after the power is restored from a power outage, it is possible to issue a notification again for a predetermined period of time, but if the first error is canceled during this predetermined period, the notification will be made before the elapse of the predetermined period. It may also be possible to terminate notification of the first error.

(2) In the example shown in Figure 149, if the power is cut off after a predetermined time has elapsed after the first error is detected and before the first error cancellation operation is executed, the following control is performed. It is possible to do so.
A first method is not to notify the first error after recovery from power-off. This is because the notification of the first error has already been executed for a predetermined period of time before the power is turned off.
The second method is to restart notification of the first error after recovery from power-off, but for a specific period of time (from the time the first error notification resumes) without performing the operation to clear the first error. When the period has passed, the first error notification may be ended even if the first error cancellation operation is not performed.
Furthermore, as a third method, similar to the example in FIG. 150, the first error notification is restarted after the power is restored from the power cut, but the first error notification is restarted at the time when the first error cancellation operation is executed. You may quit.

(3) In Example 1 of FIG. 146, after the first error is detected, the second error is not detected until a predetermined time has elapsed. Furthermore, in Example 2 of FIG. 147, the second error is detected even before a predetermined time has elapsed after the first error was detected.
As a method other than these, for example, once the first error is detected, the first error may also not be detected until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it may be determined whether the cause of the first error has been eliminated.
In this case, if the cause of the first error has not been removed, the notification of the first error is continued. Furthermore, even if the cause of the first error has been removed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the notification of the first error is continued if the operation to clear the first error is not performed.
On the other hand, after the predetermined period has elapsed, if the cause of the first error has been removed and the first error cancellation operation is being performed, the first error notification is ended.

For example, suppose that a cheating offense is committed against the hopper, resulting in an illegal payout. When a hopper error is detected based on the first illegal payout, the hopper error is notified. Next, suppose that a second illegal payout is committed while the hopper error is being notified. In this case, the second illegal payout may or may not be detected.
And, even if an error clearing operation is performed before the predetermined period has elapsed, the operation is invalid and the hopper error notification does not end. Next, when an error clearing operation is performed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the hopper error notification ends and the normal state is restored. In other words, after the error clearing operation is performed, the hopper error notification corresponding to the second unauthorized payout is not executed again.
It is also possible to control as described above.

(4) If the cause of the first error has been removed, the notification of the first error has ended, and no other errors have been detected, the game can be played immediately.
Furthermore, when the cause of the first error has been removed, the notification of the first error has ended, and no other errors have been detected, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state. When the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 during game standby and the setting key CK is rotated 90 degrees clockwise (FIG. 163, which will be described later), it is possible to proceed to the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 45. be.
(5) In the above embodiments, the specific "predetermined period" can be set in various ways. When the "predetermined period" is set to be a short period, for example, it may be set to about "5 seconds". On the other hand, if the period is to be longer, it may be set to about 60 seconds, for example.

<Twelfth embodiment>
The twelfth embodiment relates to a door key (including a setting key as opposed to a door key).
In the twelfth embodiment (which is the same for the other embodiments), the clockwise (also referred to as "right-handed") and counterclockwise (also referred to as "left-handed") rotations of the door key DK and the setting key CK refer to the rotation directions as seen from the key side.
Figure 155 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10. When the slot machine 10 is viewed from the player's side, a door key insertion port 160a is provided near the right edge of the front door 12 (the side panel 13d on the right side) and below the medal insertion port 47. When a door key DK (described later) is inserted into this door key insertion port 160a and rotated 45 degrees clockwise, the front door 12 can be opened. When the front door 12 is opened, it is opened with respect to the cabinet 13 around the left side of the front door 12 in Figure 155 as an axis.

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing the door key DK and the door key cylinder 160.
156, (a) is a front view showing the door cylinder 160, and (b) is a side view showing a state in which the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion port 160a of the door cylinder 160. In the same figure (b), the door key DK is illustrated by a solid line, and the door key cylinder 160 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.
156(a), the door key cylinder 160 includes an outer cylinder 161 and an inner cylinder 162 housed therein. The outer cylinder 161 of the door key cylinder 160 is fixed to the front door 12, and the inner cylinder 162 is formed to be rotatable relative to the outer cylinder 161.

The inner cylinder 162 includes a door key insertion opening 160a in the center thereof for inserting the door key DK. Furthermore, the outer cylinder 161 is provided with grooves 161a at two locations on the inner cylinder 162 side.
On the other hand, the door key DK is provided with protrusions DK1 at two locations, and when the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, the two protrusions DK1 enter into the two grooves 161a, respectively. The total length L11 of the door key cylinder 160 is longer than the length of the key way DK2 (the part where the key groove is formed) of the door key DK. When the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, and the groove shape of the key way DK2 of the door key DK fits with the internal shape of the door key cylinder 160 (a door key DK that matches the internal shape of the door key cylinder 160 is inserted) 2), the door key DK can be rotated, and the inner cylinder 162 can be rotated.

As shown in FIG. 156(b), a cam 171 is connected to the tip of the door key cylinder 160. When the door key DK is inserted and the inner cylinder 162 is rotated, the cam 171 is configured to rotate simultaneously in conjunction with the inner cylinder 162. Details of the cam 171 will be described later (see FIG. 159, etc.).

FIG. 157 is a front view showing the positional relationship between the door key insertion slot 160a and the inserted door key DK. In FIG. 157, the door key DK is indicated by a two-dot chain line.
The state shown in FIG. 157(b) is a so-called initial state (the state shown in FIG. 156(a)), and shows the position of the inner cylinder 162 when the door key DK is not inserted. In this state, the door key insertion slot 160a (the space into which the door key DK of the inner tube 162 is inserted) extends in the vertical direction in the figure. Note that when the front door 12 is closed and in the state shown in FIG. 157(b), the front door 12 is locked with respect to the cabinet 13 regardless of whether or not the door key DK is inserted. The front door 12 is in a closed state (a state in which it cannot be opened).

On the other hand, in FIG. 157, the state shown in (a) shows a state in which the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise with respect to the state shown in FIG. 157 (b). This state indicates the direction of the door key DK to be operated when canceling an error that has occurred in the slot machine 10.
As mentioned above, when a hopper error, selector error, etc. occurs and the hall clerk removes the cause of the error, the error notification will continue and the state before the error will be restored as long as the cause of the error is removed. do not. After eliminating the error factor, the front door 12 is closed, the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, and the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise by 45 degrees to obtain the state shown in FIG. 157(a). In other words, in the eleventh embodiment, the "error cancellation operation" corresponds to turning the door key DK to the position shown in FIG. 157(a).
As a result, a reset sensor 175, which will be described later, detects the error cancellation operation. When an error cancellation operation is detected, it is determined whether the error cause has been removed, and if it is determined that the error cause has not been removed, the error notification continues without being canceled. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cause of the error has been removed, the error notification ends and the state returns to the state before the error was detected.

When the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion port 160a in the state shown in Fig. 157(b) and the keyway DK2 of the door key DK enters the inner cylinder 162 as shown in Fig. 156(b), the two protrusions DK1 of the door key DK enter into the groove 161a of the outer cylinder 161. When the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in this state as shown in Fig. 157(a), the protrusions DK1 of the door key DK move to a position inside the outer cylinder 161 where the groove 161a is not formed. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull out the door key DK in the state shown in Fig. 157(a), the protrusions DK1 come into contact with the outer cylinder 161, and the door key DK cannot be pulled out. The door key DK inserted into the door key insertion port 160a can be pulled out only when the position shown in Fig. 157(b), i.e., when the protrusions DK1 of the door key DK are aligned with the positions of the grooves 161a.
Furthermore, the movable range of the door key DK when rotated counterclockwise is 45 degrees. Therefore, the door key DK cannot be rotated counterclockwise beyond the position shown in Fig. 157(a). Even if an attempt is made to rotate the door key DK counterclockwise beyond the position shown in Fig. 157(a), it is restricted by a stopper (not shown).

Further, when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 157(b), rotational torque is generated in the door key DK. After rotating the door key DK to the position shown in FIG. 157(a), when you release your hand from the door key DK (removing the force acting on the door key DK), a force acts on the inner cylinder 162 to return it to its initial position. . Therefore, if the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 157(b) to the state shown in FIG. 157(a), and then the door key DK is released, the state shown in FIG. 157(b) is obtained. return. The state shown in FIG. 157(a) can be returned to the state shown in FIG. 157(b) by rotating the door key DK clockwise while grasping it.

Further, when the door key DK is released after being in the state shown in FIG. 157(a), the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 157(b), but the inner cylinder 162 does not rotate clockwise any further. This is because rotational torque is required to rotate the inner cylinder 162 clockwise. Therefore, even if the force acting on the door key DK in the state shown in FIG. 157(a) is removed, the door key DK will hardly overflow from the state shown in FIG. 157(b) in the direction shown in FIG. 157(c). do not.
As a result, for example, a hopper empty error occurs, and the hall clerk opens the front door 12, replenishes the hopper 35 with medals (removes the cause of the hopper empty error), closes the front door 12, and turns the door key DK counterclockwise. To prevent the front door 12 from being opened unintentionally because the door key DK does not turn to the opening position of the front door 12 even if the door key DK is released at that position by performing a release operation by turning it. Can be done.

The state in FIG. 157(c) shows the state in which the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state in FIG. 157(b). When the door key DK is turned to the state shown in FIG. 157(b), the front door 12 can be opened.
The clockwise movable range of the door key DK is also 45 degrees, and the state shown in FIG. 157(c) is the limit. That is, the door key DK is no longer rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 157(c). Even if an attempt is made to rotate the door key DK clockwise beyond the position shown in FIG. 157(c), it is restricted by a stopper (not shown).
Also in the state of FIG. 157(c), the protrusion DK1 of the door key DK moves to a position inside the outer cylinder 161 where the groove portion 161a is not formed, as in the state of FIG. 157(a). Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull out the door key DK in the state shown in FIG. 157(c), the protrusion DK1 and the outer cylinder 161 come into contact with each other, making it impossible to pull out the door key DK. The door key DK inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a can be pulled out only when it is returned to the position shown in FIG. 157(b).

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed and the state shown in FIG. 157(b) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 157(c), when the door key DK is released, the state shown in FIG. 157(b) is changed. However, the inner cylinder 162 does not rotate counterclockwise any further. This is because rotational torque is required to rotate the inner cylinder 162 counterclockwise. Therefore, even if the force acting on the door key DK in the state shown in FIG. 157(c) is removed, the door key DK will hardly overflow from the state shown in FIG. 157(b) in the direction shown in FIG. 157(a). do not.
As a result, even if the hall clerk opens the front door 12 and releases the door key DK before checking the error details, the door key DK will not turn to the error release operation position, so the error may be canceled unintentionally. It is possible to prevent the error contents from being stored away (inability to confirm the error details).
Moreover, when the door key DK is turned from the state shown in FIG. 157(b) to the state shown in FIG. 157(c) and the front door 12 is opened, when the door key DK is released, the state shown in FIG. 157(b) The state may be returned to the state shown in FIG. 157(c), or the state shown in FIG. 157(c) may be maintained. If a locking mechanism that locks in the position shown in FIG. 157(c) is not provided, the state shown in FIG. 157(c) can be returned to the state shown in FIG. 157(b) by releasing the door key DK. . If the door key DK is automatically returned in this way, the work efficiency of the hall clerk can be improved.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 162, which will be described later, after the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise to open the front door 12, the door key DK has a locking mechanism that maintains the state shown in FIG. 157(c). It is also possible to provide one. This locking mechanism (FIG. 162) will be described later.

FIG. 158(a) is a front view illustrating various dimensions of the door key cylinder 160, and FIG. 158(b) is a plan view and a side view illustrating the dimensions of the power plug.
As shown in FIG. 158(a), the length of the door key insertion slot 160a in the longitudinal direction (excluding the groove 161a) is L14, and the length (width) of the door key insertion slot 160a in the width direction is L13.
Further, as shown in FIG. 158(a), the distance from the center of the door key insertion slot 160a to the side plate 13d is L12.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 158(b), in the power plug PP, the length of the plug blade PP3 is L15, and the thickness is L16. Further, the distance between the two plug blades PP3 (distance between centers) is L17. Furthermore, the width of the plug blade PP3 is set to L18.
Here, if the power plug PP is type A defined in "JIS C 8303",
L15: 17±1.3 (mm)
L16: 1.5±0.13 (mm)
L17: 12.7±0.13 (mm)
L18: 6.35±0.25 (mm)
It is.
In the following description, it is assumed that the power plug PP is of type A according to "JIS C 8303".

Here, when focusing on one blade PP3,
Width L18 of the blade PP3 < length L14 of the door key insertion opening 160a in the longitudinal direction
The thickness L16 of the blade PP3 is smaller than the length L13 of the short side of the door key insertion opening 160a.
If so, the blade PP3 can enter the door key insertion opening 160a.
If the blade PP3 could be inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, there is a risk that the blade PP3 of the power plug PP may be used to commit a thief act.
Therefore, the distance L17 between the blades of the power plug PP and the distance L12 between the door key insertion port 160a and the side plate 13d are set to:
L17 < L12
It states that:
As a result, even if one of the blades PP3 of the power plug PP is attempted to be inserted into the door key insertion port 160a, the other blade PP3 abuts against the front door 12, so that the one blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key insertion port 160a.

Second, if the depth (L11 in FIG. 156(b)) of the door key insertion slot 160a is sufficiently longer than the length L15 of the plug blade PP3, even if the plug blade PP3 is Since it is considered that the inner cylinder 161 cannot be rotated even if the inner cylinder 161 is inserted therein, such a configuration is preferable.
Furthermore, thirdly, the relationship between the width L13 of the door key insertion slot 160a and the thickness L16 of the plug blade PP3 is as follows.
L13<L16
If it is,
and/or
The relationship between the length L14 in the longitudinal direction of the door key insertion slot 160a and the width L18 of the plug blade PP3 is as follows.
L14<L18
In this case, the plug blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, so such a configuration is preferable.
moreover,
If "L13<L16" and/or "L14<L18" is set, it becomes possible to prevent the cheating action without setting "L17<L12" as described above (even if "L17>L12").
If the structure is such that the plug blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, for example, when you purchase a real machine and play games at home, the plug blade PP3 will accidentally stick into the door key insertion slot 160a, and the plug blade PP3 will become the door key. It is possible to prevent an accident in which the device breaks while remaining in the insertion port 160a.

Next, a locking device operated by the door key cylinder 160 will be explained.
FIG. 159 is a schematic diagram illustrating the locking device 170 in the twelfth embodiment, and is a front view seen from the inside of the front door 12 toward the outside (player side).
As shown in FIG. 156(b), the cam 171 is connected to the tip of the inner cylinder 162 of the door key cylinder 160, and rotates simultaneously with the rotation of the door key DK and the inner cylinder 162. Since FIG. 159 is a view seen from the back side of the front door 12, when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the outside as shown in FIG. 157(a), the cam 171 in FIG. Rotate clockwise. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 157(c), when the door key DK is rotated clockwise when viewed from the outside, the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 159.

159 shows a state in which the front door 12 is closed, and the position of the cam 171 in FIG. 159 is the position shown in FIG. 157(b). In this position, the cam 171 is engaged with an engaging member (not shown) provided on the cabinet 13 side, and the front door 12 is closed (locked) with respect to the cabinet 13. has been done.
The cam 171 includes two protrusions 171a and 171b. In this example, protrusions 171a and 171b are provided at 90 degree intervals.
The locking device 170 includes moving members 172 and 173 configured to be movable in the vertical direction in the figure. A coil spring 176 is connected to the moving member 172 via a hook 172c.
Similarly, a coil spring 177 is connected to the moving member 173 through a hook 173b, and a coil spring 178 is connected through a hook 173c.

Furthermore, the moving member 172 is supported by a predetermined member (not shown). Then, when the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure, the coil spring 176 is stretched, and an elastic force acts on the coil spring 176.
Similarly, the moving member 173 is supported by a predetermined member (not shown). Then, when the moving member 173 moves downward in the figure, the coil springs 177 and 178 are stretched, so that an elastic force acts on the coil springs 177 and 178.
The moving member 172 is provided with a driven portion 172a that extends toward the cam 171, and the tip of the driven portion 172a and the protrusion 171b of the cam 171 are in contact with each other. The movement of the movable member 172 in the downward direction in the figure is restricted by the contact between the driven portion 172a and the protrusion 171b.

Further, the moving member 173 is provided with a driven portion 173a extending toward the cam 171, and the tip of the driven portion 173a and the protrusion 171a of the cam 171 are in contact with each other. The movement of the movable member 173 in the upward direction in the figure is restricted by the contact between the driven portion 173a and the protrusion 171a.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 159, the length of the movable member 173 in the vertical direction in the figure is longer than the length of the movable member 172 in the vertical direction in the figure. That is, moving member 173 is larger than moving member 172. Therefore, the weight of the moving member 173 is heavier than the weight of the moving member 172.

Here, it is assumed that the coil springs 176, 177, and 178 all have the same shape (same performance). Therefore, the elastic force of the coil spring 176 when the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure is F1, and the elastic force of each of the coil springs 177 and 178 when the moving member 173 moves downward in the figure is F2. When
2×F1≒F2
It is configured so that
With the above configuration, even including the influence of gravity, the force for moving the movable member 173 downward in the figure is greater than the force for moving the movable member 172 upward in the figure. It is configured to be.
With this configuration, when turning the door key DK clockwise with the front door 12 closed, a larger force (rotational torque) is required than when turning the door key DK counterclockwise. Thereby, for example, even if an unauthorized instrument is inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a and an attempt is made to open the front door 12, the front door 12 can be prevented from being easily opened. On the other hand, since a large force is not required when turning the door key DK counterclockwise, the hall clerk can easily perform the error release operation.

Note that in the position shown in FIG. 159, almost no tensile force is acting on the coil spring 176. Therefore, even if the contact between the driven portion 172a and the protrusion 171b is released, the moving member 172 is configured not to move further downward in the figure from the position shown in FIG. 159.
Further, in the position shown in FIG. 159, almost no tensile force is applied to the coil springs 177 and 178. Therefore, even if the contact between the driven portion 173a and the protrusion 171a is released, the moving member 173 is configured not to move further upward in the figure from the position shown in FIG. 159.
Further, the protrusion 171a of the cam 171 is in contact with the driven portion 174.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the driven portion 174 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction in the figure. When the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise and the tip of the protrusion 171a moves downward, the driven portion 174 is configured to be able to move downward while in contact with the protrusion 171a.

A detection piece 172b is provided on the moving member 172. Meanwhile, a reset sensor 175 is attached to the locking device 170. In the position shown in Fig. 159, the reset sensor 155 detects the detection piece 172b. The state in which the reset sensor 175 detects the detection piece 172b is referred to as "off."
In contrast, when the movable member 172 moves upward in the figure, the detection piece 172b is no longer detected by the reset sensor 175. As a result, the reset sensor 175 detects "ON."

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a state when the cam 171 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 159.
In the state shown in FIG. 157(b), when the door key DK is inserted and the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise to the state shown in FIG. 157(c), the cam 171 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. Then, the state shown in FIG. 160 is reached. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 160 is a state in which the front door 12 can be opened.
When the cam 171 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise, the driven portion 174 that is in contact with the protrusion 171a moves downward while maintaining the contact state with the protrusion 171a. Further, the driven portion 173a moves downward while maintaining the state of contact with the protrusion 171a. As a result, the moving member 173 moves downward in the figure, and the coil springs 177 and 178 are stretched, so that a rotational torque acts on the cam 171 to cause it to rotate clockwise (to return to its original position). This rotation torque is the elastic force of the coil springs 177 and 178.
On the other hand, the contact between the protrusion 171b of the cam 171 and the driven portion 172a is released. The moving member 172 maintains the position shown in FIG. 159 even when the contact state with the protrusion 171b is released. Therefore, the detection piece 172b remains detected by the reset sensor 175 (off state). Further, since the moving member 172 does not move, no elastic force acts on the coil spring 176.

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a state when the cam 171 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 159.
In the state of FIG. 157(b), when the door key DK inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise to the state of FIG. 157(a), the cam 171 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in FIG. It rotates and enters the state shown in FIG. 161. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 161 is the state at the time of error release operation.
When the cam 171 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 159, the contact between the protrusion 171a and the driven portion 174 is released, but the driven portion 174 is configured to remain at the uppermost position. Therefore, the driven portion 174 does not move downward even if the contact state with the protrusion 171a is released.

Furthermore, when the cam 171 rotates clockwise, the driven portion 172a is moved upward in the figure by the protrusion 171b. As a result, the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure. When the movable member 172 is moved upward in the figure, the coil spring 176 is stretched, so a rotational torque acts on the cam 171 to cause it to rotate counterclockwise (to return to its original position). This rotational torque is the elastic force of the coil spring 176.
Note that since the driven portion 173a and the cam 171 are not in contact with each other, the position of the driven portion 173a does not change even if the cam 171 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 159 to the state shown in FIG. 161. Therefore, the position of the moving member 173 does not change.
Further, when the state shown in FIG. 159 changes to the state shown in FIG. 161, the detection piece 172a is no longer detected by the reset sensor 175. As a result, the reset sensor 175 is turned on, so it is determined that the error cancellation operation has been performed.

In Figure 162, the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise (the state shown in Figure 157(c)), the front door 12 is opened, and then the door key DK is locked in that position (the state rotated 45 degrees clockwise). FIG. 3 is a front view showing the structure.
In FIG. 162, (a) shows the state in FIGS. 157(b) and 159 (before the door key DK is rotated, that is, before the moving member 173 moves downward), and (b) shows the state in FIG. 157(c) and the state of FIG. 160 (the state after the door key DK has been rotated 45 degrees clockwise and the moving member 173 has moved downward).
In FIG. 162, a fixing member 179 is a member fixed to the front door 12 side. Therefore, the movable member 173 moves vertically with respect to the fixed member 179.
As shown in FIG. 162, the moving member 173 has an opening 173d formed therein. A substantially cylindrical stopper 173e projects from this opening 173d toward the front in the figure. The stopper 173e is movably attached within the opening 173d.

In the state shown in FIG. 162(a), the fixing member 179 and the opening 173d are located at a height where they partially overlap in the vertical direction. Therefore, the stopper 173e is in contact with the outer edge of the fixing member 179 on the right side in the figure.
When the movable member 173 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. 162(a) and enters the state shown in FIG. 162(b), the opening 173d is located below the fixed member 179. Then, when the front door 12 is opened, the stopper 173e moves to the left in the figure and comes into contact with the lower outer edge of the fixing member 179. This restricts the force that causes the moving member 173 to return upward. Therefore, even if the door key DK is turned 45 degrees clockwise and the user releases the door key DK, the movable member 173 cannot move upward, so the door key DK does not return automatically. In other words, after rotating the door key 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 157(b) (to the state shown in FIG. 157(c)) and opening the front door 12, even if you let go of the door key DK, The state shown in FIG. 157(c) is maintained.
Then, when the front door 12 is closed, the position of the stopper 173e is returned to the right, and the movable member 173 becomes movable upward. As a result, the moving member 173 returns to the state shown in FIG. 162(a), and the door key DK automatically returns from the state shown in FIG. 157(c) to the state shown in FIG. 157(b).

Note that even if the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in Fig. 157(b), the front door 12 will not open and will not be locked as shown in Fig. 162. Therefore, when the door key DK is released in the state shown in Fig. 157(a), it will automatically return to the state shown in Fig. 157(b).
In this embodiment, the lock shown in Fig. 162 is applied when the front door 12 is opened. Therefore, when the door key DK is turned from the state in Fig. 157(b) to the state in Fig. 157(c) without opening the front door 12 and then released, it returns to the state in Fig. 157(b).

Next, the setting key CK will be described for comparison with the above-mentioned door key DK.
Fig. 163 shows the setting key CK and the setting key cylinder 154. Fig. 163(a) is a side view showing the state in which the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion port 151, and Fig. 163(b) is a side view showing the state in which the setting key CK is rotated 90 degrees clockwise. In Fig. 163, the setting key cylinder 154 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
The setting key insertion port 151 is mounted on the main control board 50 as shown in Fig. 125. When the setting key CK is inserted from the setting key insertion port 151 as shown in Fig. 163(a) and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees as shown in Fig. 163(b), the setting key switch 152 provided inside turns on, enabling the setting to be changed or the setting value to be confirmed.
The movable range of the setting key CK is from the state shown in FIG. 163(a) (rotation angle 0 degrees) to the state shown in FIG. 163(b) (rotation angle 90 degrees clockwise).
Also, unlike the locking device 170, even if the setting key CK is released in the 90-degree rotated state shown in FIG.
Moreover, within the rotational range of the setting key CK, the rotational torque is approximately constant, and the rotational torque hardly changes according to the rotation angle of the setting key CK.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the relationship between the rotation angle of each key and the rotation torque corresponding to the rotation angle for the door key DK and setting key CK. In the example of FIG. 164, it is assumed that the front door 12 is not opened after the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise (the lock shown in FIG. 162 is not engaged).
As described above, the door key DK has a movable range of "-45 degrees" to "+45 degrees". Furthermore, as described above, the rotational torque when rotating clockwise is greater than the rotational torque when rotating counterclockwise.

On the other hand, the movable range of the setting key CK is "0 degrees" to "+90 degrees". Furthermore, unlike the door key DK, the rotation angle and acting rotation torque of the setting key CK are substantially constant. In this example, the rotation torque of the setting key CK is smaller than the rotation torque (T1) when the rotation angle of the door key DK is "0 degree", but the present invention is not limited to this. The rotation torque of the setting key CK may be larger than the rotation torque "T1" when the rotation angle of the door key DK is "0 degree". Furthermore, the rotational torque of the setting key CK is larger than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "-45 degrees" and smaller than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "+45 degrees". You may. Alternatively, the rotational torque of the setting key CK may be greater than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "+45 degrees".

Although the twelfth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the above embodiment, when the front door 12 is in the open state, the door key DK maintains the position shown in FIG. 157(c) and does not return to the position shown in FIG. 157(b), but the invention is not limited to this. .
For example, if the structure shown in FIG. 162 is eliminated and the front door 12 is opened with the door key DK rotated 45 degrees clockwise, when the door key DK is released, the elastic force of the coil springs 177 and 178 causes the cam 171 to open. may return to the initial position, thereby returning the door key DK to the position shown in FIG. 157(b). When the door key DK returns to the position shown in FIG. 157(b), the door key DK can be pulled out even while the front door 12 is being opened.

(2) The shape of the door key DK shown in the twelfth embodiment is an example, and the shape is not limited to this. For example, a door key DK without the protrusion DK1 may be used. In this case, the door key DK can be pulled out even when the door key DK is rotated.
(3) The configuration of the locking device 170 shown in the twelfth embodiment is not limited to what is illustrated. For example, it may be designed so that the rotational torque is the same when the door key DK is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. In addition, the rotational range of the door key DK is not limited to "-45 degrees" to "+45 degrees"; for example, when opening the front door 12, it can be rotated up to "+90 degrees" (same as the setting key CK). It is also possible to do so.

(4) The maximum clockwise rotation amount and the maximum counterclockwise rotation amount of the door key DK can both be set arbitrarily. In the above embodiment, the door key DK is rotatable up to 45 degrees clockwise and up to 45 degrees counterclockwise.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a slight difference between the maximum clockwise rotation amount and the counterclockwise rotation amount of the door key DK.
On the other hand, it is also possible to provide a sufficient difference between the maximum amount of clockwise rotation and the maximum amount of counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK. For example, it is also possible to set the maximum amount of rotation in the clockwise direction to "+60 degrees" and the maximum amount of rotation in the counterclockwise direction to "-30 degrees."
Alternatively, on the contrary, it is also possible to set the maximum amount of rotation in the clockwise direction to "+30 degrees" and the maximum amount of rotation in the counterclockwise direction to "-60 degrees".

(5) The rotational torque (the force required to rotate the door key DK) when rotating the door key DK may be set to be the same in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions, or may be set to be different.
For example, first, if the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise by ``+45 degrees'' is ``T1'', and the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK by ``-45 degrees'' counterclockwise is ``T2'', It may be any of "T1≈T2", "T1>T2", and "T1<T2".

Moreover, the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise (toward the open side of the front door 12) may be the same or different between the closed state and the open state of the front door 12. For example, the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise when the front door 12 is in the closed state may be greater than the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise when the front door 12 is in the open state.
Particularly, when rotating the door key DK clockwise with the front door 12 in the closed state, a force is required to release the lock, so the rotational torque becomes large. On the other hand, even if the door key DK is rotated clockwise when the front door 12 is in the open state, no force is applied to unlock the door, so the rotational torque is smaller than that described above.

Furthermore, whether the front door 12 is open or not and the clockwise/counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK can be set in various ways.
in particular,
a) When the front door 12 is closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK ≒ counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK; b) When the front door 12 is closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK > counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK; c) When the front door 12 is closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK < counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK; d) When the front door 12 is open, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK ≒ counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK; e) When the front door 12 is open, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK > counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK; f) When the front door 12 is open, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK < counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK.

Thirteenth embodiment
The thirteenth embodiment is an invention relating to cuts and branching of effects.
The meanings of terms used in the thirteenth embodiment are as follows.
The "effect stage" refers to an image of a background effect that is displayed over multiple games. In this embodiment, the term "image" refers to both "moving image (video)" and "still image."
The presentation stage is determined by lottery or the like based on the game state, winning combination, number of games played, etc. During a game, for example, for each game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, whether or not to execute a change in the presentation stage is determined by lottery or the like. When it is determined to execute a change in the presentation stage, the presentation stage is changed during the current game or between the end of the current game and the start of the next game.
As with events described later, the display of a production stage begins when a player performs an operation (such as placing a bet or operating the start switch 41) and continues to display that production stage until a trigger occurs to switch to the next production stage.
As the production stage, for example, a normal stage, a premonition stage, a CZ stage, an AT stage, and the like are provided.
Here, the "premonition stage" refers to a stage when it is suggested whether or not to transition to the AT. Note that the premonitions include a true premonition that indicates a transition to the AT and a false premonition that indicates no transition to the AT.
In addition, the "CZ (chance zone) stage" is a stage where the expectation of transition to the AT (winning) is higher than that of a non-CZ stage. In other words, the CZ stage is a stage that is more advantageous to the player than the normal stage (a stage where it is easier to transition to a state advantageous to the player).
Furthermore, the term "normal stage" does not include the premonition stage or CZ stage.
In addition, when referring to an "AT stage," it refers to the normal stage during the AT, and does not include the AT specialized zone stage or the sub-bonus stage during the AT. The normal stage during the AT is the stage with the highest stay ratio during the AT.

An "event" is an effect that occurs in response to an operation by a player, specifically, a bet operation (insertion of medals or operation of the bet switch 40), operation of the start switch 41, or operation of the stop switch 42. , refers to a new performance that is output, or a performance that is different from the previous one. An event is the minimum unit of a performance, and by combining events, various performances such as a single performance and a continuous performance, which will be described later, are constructed.
As described above, during the game, one of the performance stages is selected and the background performance is displayed. When a performance in the current game is selected, the event defined in the performance is output at a predetermined timing. In this case, the event will be displayed as an image superimposed on the background production (production stage).
For example, as shown in FIG. 167, which will be described later, when performance number 01 is selected, no event occurs, or one or more events are determined to be output in response to a predetermined operation. For example, when event "0101" is selected, event "0101" is output when the start switch 41 is operated.

A "cut" refers to the minimum unit of a continuous (unbroken) moving image, and is also called a "shot." For example, if there is a video in which character A speaks a word, and then the screen switches to character B, and there is a video in which character B speaks, the video in which character A speaks words appears at the break. If there is not, it becomes one cut, and when the next character B changes, it becomes another cut, and after that, as long as the moving image in which the character B speaks continues without interruption, it becomes one cut.
Therefore, if there is one cut as an unbroken moving image of appearing character A and then one cut as an unbroken moving image of appearing character B, there will be a total of 2 cuts.
On the other hand, if the angle of character A changes in the middle of a video in which character A speaks words, and the video continues with character A speaking, the angle will be changed to one cut before the angle changes. With the last cut, there are 2 cuts in total.
On the other hand, for example, a moving image in which a vertically elongated moving image is panned up from the bottom is a continuous (unbroken) moving image, and thus becomes one cut.
Note that an event may consist of one cut or may consist of multiple cuts.
Furthermore, in a moving image, a series of cuts (one cut or a collection of two or more cuts) at a certain location may be referred to as a "scene." Therefore, one event can also be called one scene.

In this embodiment, "branching" refers to switching from a previous event to a new event. This switches the cut or scene.
Further, the "number of branches" refers to the total number of destination performances when the performances are divided.
For example, in a case where only event A can be output at a certain operation trigger and no other events are output (for example, at the start of production 15 (when the start switch 41 is operated) in FIG. 168, which will be described later. , in which only event "1501" is output), the number of branches is set to "1".
In addition, if event A has been output until then and is switched to either event B or event C at a certain operation trigger (for example, in FIG. ” or “1504”), the number of branches at the relevant operation trigger is set to “2”.
Furthermore, when there is a case in which an event is not output and a case in which event A is output in a certain operation trigger (for example, in FIG. 167, which will be described later, at the start of production 01, there is no event or event "0101 ” is output), the number of branches at the relevant operation trigger is set to “2”.
Furthermore, if event A has been output until then, and there is no new event to be output at a certain operation trigger (for example, if no event is selected at the first stop of the effect 14 in FIG. 167, which will be described later), displays the number of branches as "-".

In addition, from the viewpoint of how many games the performance lasts, there are a single performance and a continuous performance.
A "single performance" refers to a performance that can be completed in one game. For example, it is output between the time the start switch 41 is operated and the time the game is fully stopped (furthermore, from the time the product is completely stopped until the bet operation is made, or from the time the product is completely stopped until the time the start switch 41 is operated for the next game), and is output when the start switch 41 is operated for the next game. This is a performance that does not carry over the performance.
Furthermore, a "chance up pattern" is a performance that is output in a single performance or a continuous performance, and is output as the game progresses or triggered by a predetermined operation, and the level of expectation is higher than before. refers to Here, the "expectation level" includes the expectation level related to winning a special role (bonus), moving to CZ (chance zone), winning AT, moving to AT specialized zone, winning sub-bonus during AT, etc. included.
Furthermore, a "confirmed performance" is a performance that is output in a single performance, and the result is confirmed at the time the performance is output (confirmation of winning of special role, AT, sub bonus during AT, confirmation of winning to CZ, etc.) Refers to the performance (premium performance) that means the transition is confirmed, the transition to the AT specialized zone is confirmed, etc. As will be described later, during a continuous performance, there is a case where a "success performance" is output, which means confirmation of a result advantageous to the player, but a "confirmed performance" is output as a single performance, and a "success performance" is Output as a continuous performance.

On the other hand, "continuous performance" is different from the above-mentioned "single performance" and refers to a series of performances that are output in multiple (at least two or more) games. The continuous performance includes an "introduction performance" (a performance indicating that the continuous performance is about to start) as the first performance output. However, the introduction performance may be omitted and the game may be started from the first game of the continuous performance.
Further, as the final game of the continuous performance (game that announces the result), there are "failure performance", "success performance", and "reversal performance".
The continuous performance is a performance that announces the winning of a special role (bonus), transition to CZ (chance zone), AT winning, transition to AT specialized zone, winning of sub bonus during AT, etc. , "Failure production" means not winning the special role, not moving to CZ, not winning AT, not moving to the AT specialized zone, not winning the sub bonus during AT. This is a performance to announce the following.
On the other hand, "successful performance" means winning a special role, moving to CZ, winning AT, moving to an AT specialized zone, and winning a sub bonus during AT. This is a performance to announce that the event is going on.
Note that even in the above-mentioned one-shot performance, a failure performance or a success performance may be output in order to indicate the outcome of the performance.

In addition, "reversal performance" refers to when a bet operation for the next game is performed after a "failure performance" is output in the final game of a continuous performance, or when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated. The trigger is a performance that switches from a "failure performance" to a "success performance."
In a continuous performance, when a reversal performance is not output in the next game after a failure performance is output, the game in which the failure performance is output becomes the final game of the continuous performance.
On the other hand, when a reversal performance is output in the next game after a failure performance is output, the game in which the reversal performance is output becomes the final game of the continuous performance.

The "ending performance" is a performance that is output when the completion of the AT is confirmed, and continues until the game ends when the AT ends. Note that "complete AT" means to continue until the parameters (number of games, number of payouts, difference number of coins) during AT exceed the upper limit (or reach the upper limit). Specifically, this corresponds to a case where, for example, the difference counter value continues until it exceeds the upper limit value (for example, "2400").

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a production stage in the thirteenth embodiment. The production stages shown in FIG. 165 are merely examples, and therefore are not limited to these 12 stages. In addition, in FIG. 165, the number of cuts at each performance stage is displayed.
Normal stage 0 is a production stage that is selected only in non-advantageous sections. In this way, a production stage specific to the non-advantageous section may be provided, but it is also possible to use it as a production stage (for example, normal stage 1) for the advantageous section.
The production stages selected during the normal advantageous section include normal stages 1 to 5. The "advantageous section (normal)" is non-AT and does not include a sign or a CZ. CZ stage 1 is selected during CZ, and precursor stage 1 is selected during precursor.

Further, an AT stage 1 is provided as a production stage during the advantageous section AT. A plurality of types of performance stages may be provided during the advantageous section AT. Furthermore, the "advantageous section AT" does not include (additional) specialized zones in the advantageous section AT or sub-bonus states during the advantageous section AT. AT specialized stages 1 and 2 are provided as production stages in the specialized zone during the advantageous section AT, and an SB stage during AT is provided as the production stage in the sub-bonus during the advantageous section AT.
As shown in FIG. 165, the number of production stages (5) selected in the advantageous section normal (non-AT) is greater than the number (1) of production stages selected in the advantageous section AT. . This is to prevent players from getting bored by increasing the variety of performance during normal advantageous sections.

FIG. 165 also shows the image capacity of the production stage. The image capacity of the production stage (normal stage 0) used in the non-advantageous section is C1 (MB), and the total image capacity of the production stage (normal stages 1 to 5) used in the normal (non-AT) advantageous section is C2 (MB). , when the image capacity of the production stage (AT stage 1) used in the advantageous section AT is C3 (MB),
C1<C3<C2
It is.
In the non-advantageous section, the stay ratio is extremely low and, for example, AT lottery etc. are not performed, so the image capacity of the effect is the smallest.
Furthermore, since the number of production stages in the advantageous section normal (non-AT) is greater than the number of production stages in the advantageous section AT, the image capacity is also larger in proportion.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of performance stages during the advantageous section AT may be increased. Furthermore, the number of performance stages during the advantageous section AT may be greater than the number of performance stages during the advantageous section normal (non-AT).
Then, the capacity of each image is
C1<C2<C3
You can also use it as

Fig. 166 is a diagram showing types of effects in the thirteenth embodiment. Fig. 166 shows only some of the effects, and does not mean that the effects shown in Fig. 166 include all of the effects.
For the performance, one of the performance numbers is selected for each game or by lottery, depending on whether or not it is in a favorable zone, the winning role for the current game, whether or not it is in a CZ, whether or not it is in a premonition, whether or not it is in an AT, etc.
Effects 01 to 18 are effects that are selected during normal advantageous periods.
Moreover, effects 14 to 18 are effects selected in consecutive effects. When consecutive effects are selected, effect 14 is selected first, notifying the player that consecutive effects will start from the next game. Then, effects 15, 16, and 17 are selected for the first, second, and third games of the consecutive effects in the next game, respectively. Furthermore, if a failure effect (described later) is selected for the third game of the consecutive effects and the game transitions to a state advantageous to the player, effect 18 (reversal effect) is selected for the fourth game of the consecutive effects.
When the AT starts, effect 21 is selected to notify the start of the AT, and when the AT ends, effect 25 is selected to notify the end of the AT.

FIGS. 167 to 170 are diagrams showing the event name, number of cuts, and number of branches extracted from some effects in FIG. 166, respectively.
In FIGS. 167 to 170,
Performance 01 (normal expectation performance) (Figure 167)
Performance 03 (normal expectation performance) (Figure 167)
Performance 14 (Continuous performance (introduction)) (Figure 167)
Performance 15 (Continuous performance (1st game)) (Figure 168)
Performance 16 (Continuous performance (2nd game)) (Figure 168)
Production 17 (Continuous production (3rd game)) (Figure 168)
Production 18 (Continuous production (reversal)) (Fig. 169)
Performance 20 (confirmed performance) (Fig. 169)
Performance 21 (AT start performance) (Figure 169)
Performance 22 (AT normal performance) (Fig. 169)
Production 23 (AT additional production) (Figure 170)
Performance 24 (AT expectation performance) (Figure 170)
Performance 25 (AT end performance) (Figure 170)
is exemplified.

First, in FIG. 167, the event, number of cuts, and number of branches corresponding to the performance will be explained using performance 01 (normal expectation performance) as an example.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the event name is shown as a four-digit number, the upper two digits of the four digits represent the performance number, and the lower two digits are the event number under the current performance, starting from "01". ing.
In the case of a normal performance in an advantageous section and not a continuous performance (performances 01 to 13 in FIG. 166), "no event" may be selected. Production 01 includes seven types of events, "0101" to "0107."

“No event” may be selected at all operation triggers. For example, at the time of start (when the start switch 41 is operated or when the reels 31 start rotating), there are cases where "no event" is selected and cases where event "0101" is selected. Similarly, at one stop (when the first stop switch 42 is operated or when the first reel 31 is stopped), "No event", event "0102", "0103", "0104", or "0106" is displayed. There are cases where either one is selected.
Furthermore, for example, the event "0102" is the first stop, the second stop (when the second stop switch 42 is operated, or the second reel 31 is stopped), and the third stop (when the third stop switch 42 is operated, or the third reel 31 is stopped). When the reels 31 are stopped), the selection may be made at any of the following operation triggers. In the case of an event that has the possibility of being selected by multiple operation triggers, if it is selected by any of the operation triggers, the same event will not be selected twice in the game. For example, if event "0102" is selected at the first stop, event "0102" will not be selected at the second or third stop. Furthermore, in production 01, there is no event that is selected after all stops.
From the above, if production 01 is selected in this game, for example,
At start: Event “0101”
1 stop: Event “0104”
2nd stop: No event 3rd stop: Event “0102”
Events are output in the following order: After complete stop: No event.

In addition, when production 01 is selected in the current game, there is a case where an event is selected at all operation triggers.
for example,
At start: Event “0101”
1 stop: Event “0104”
2nd stop: Event “0102”
3rd stop: Event “0105”
This is the case.
Furthermore, in contrast to this, when performance 01 is selected in the current game, there is a case where an event is not selected at all operation triggers.
for example,
At the start: no event, at the 1st stop: no event, at the 2nd stop: no event, and at the 3rd stop: no event.
In this case, since one of the production stages has been selected, the game is played in which only the background image is output.

When an event can be output in response to multiple operation triggers, the same event may be output in response to multiple operation triggers. For example, after the event "0102" is output at the first stop, the event "0102" may also be output at the third stop.

Further, the number of cuts for each event "0101" to "0107" is "1". Therefore, no matter which event in presentation 01 is selected, a continuous moving image without a break is output at least until the next operation trigger.
However, the number of cuts is limited and the length (time) is determined in advance. For example, assume that the playback time of event "0101" is "T1". Assume that event "0101" is selected at the start.
In this case, if the first stop switch 42 is not operated until the time "T1" has elapsed after the start switch 41 is operated, one cut of the event "0101" is output to the end, and then the one cut It will stop at the final image.
Further, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated before the time "T1" elapses after the start switch 41 is operated, but no event is selected at the time of the first stop. Then, assuming that time "T1" has elapsed before two stops, one cut of event "0101" will be output to the end between after one stop and before two stops, and after that, the final image of the one cut will be output. It will be in a stopped state.
Furthermore, it is assumed that after operating the start switch 41, the first stop switch 42 is operated before time "T1" has elapsed, and that event "0102" is selected at the first stop. In this case, the first stop is used as an opportunity to switch from event "0101" to "0102". In other words, even if one cut of event "0101" has not been output to the end, the output of one cut of event "0101" will be stopped after one stop, and the output of one cut of event "0102" will be output. Start.

Further, the branching of performance 01 is as follows.
First, at the start, there are cases where there is no event or event "0101" is selected, so the number of branches at the start is "2".
Similarly, at the time of one stop, there are cases in which there is no event or events "0102", "0103", "0104", or "0106" are selected, so the number of branches at the time of one stop is "5". ”. In other words, when there is one stop, there is a branch to one of five events: no event, event "0102", "0103", "0104", or "0106".
Furthermore, similarly, as shown in FIG. 167, the number of branches when there are two stops is "2", and the number of branches when there are three stops is "6".

Performance 03, like performance 01, is a performance that can be selected during the normal advantageous section (non-AT). As described above, if the performance is during the normal advantageous section and is not a continuous performance, "no event" may be selected.
Further, as shown in event "0307", the number of cuts in one event is not limited to "1", but may be "2" or more.
In addition, there are operation triggers in which an event is not selected, such as at the second stop of presentation 03.

As shown in Production 03, the average number of cuts for events triggered by 3 stops (referring to the average value for all productions; the same applies hereinafter) is higher than the average number of cuts for events triggered by 1 or 2 stops. It is set to increase. Taking production 03 as an example,
Average number of event cuts per stop: 1
Average number of event cuts during 3 stops: 1.2
It is.
The average number of cuts for events triggered by each operation is as follows:
a) The average number of cuts for events during 3 stops is the highest;
b) The average number of event cuts at the start is equal to or less than the average number of event cuts at the 3rd stop;
c) The average number of cuts for 1st and 2nd stop events is smaller than the average number of cuts for 3rd stop events.
Furthermore, even when single effects and continuous effects are combined, as effects executed in one game, the average number of cuts for events at 3 stops is the average number of cuts for events at 1 and 2 stops. More than value.

The reason for this is that the third stop is the timing when the player's operations necessary for one game are completed, so the player can concentrate on the production (the event can be fully shown). be.
In addition, even if the number of event cuts is increased at the end of the game, the tempo of the game will not deteriorate, and the event that the player wants to see will not be accidentally skipped during the flow of operations by the player. It's for a reason.
Note that the greater the number of cuts, the longer the duration (time) of one event does not necessarily mean, but in terms of the overall average value, the greater the number of cuts, the longer the duration of one event.

Furthermore, the average value of the number of branching effects (excluding after full stop; the same applies hereinafter) at the time of operation is:
a) The average value of the number of branches in the production at 3 stops is the highest,
b) The average value of the number of branches in the performance at the start is equal to or less than the average value of the number of branches in the performance at the 3rd stop,
c) The average number of branches for the 1st and 2nd stops is less than the average number of branches for the 3rd stop.
d) The average number of branches during two stops is the lowest.
In production 01, the number of branches at the 3rd stop is the highest (branch number "6"), and in production 03, the number of branches at the start and at the 3rd stop is the largest (branch number "6").
Furthermore, for both presentation 01 and presentation 03, the number of branches in the presentation at the second stop is the smallest (for example, in the case of presentation 03, the number of branches in the presentation at the second stop is "1").
Furthermore, when single effects and continuous effects are added up, the average number of branches for the effect at 3 stops is the average number of branches for the effects at 1 and 2 stops as effects executed in one game. More than value.
However, as for performances executed in one game among the continuous performances, the average value of the number of branches for performances at 1st stop and 2nd stop is greater than the average value of the number of branches for performances at 3rd stop.

In the continuous effects 14 to 18, unlike normal effects, if there is an event set for an operation trigger, the event is always output at that operation trigger. Also, if there are multiple events set for an operation trigger, one of the events is output at that operation trigger. Therefore, if at least one event is set for a certain operation trigger, it will not be "no event."
For example, in performance 14, event "1401" is always selected at the start. Then, at the first stop and the second stop, no event is selected because there is no defined event, and at the third stop, either event "1402" or "1403" is selected.
In effect 15, the number of branches at the start is "1", the number of branches at one stop is "2", and the number of branches at three stops is "1". In effect 15, event "1501" is always selected at the start. Furthermore, at one stop, either event "1502" or "1504" is selected. Here, event "1504" is a chance-up pattern. Therefore, at the first stop, the chance-up pattern may or may not be output. Furthermore, at three stops, event "1503" is always output.

Also, the chance-up pattern of the event "1504" is an event that can be selected at one stop. In this embodiment, the chance-up patterns are all events that can be selected at one stop, and are not selected at other operation triggers. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up pattern may be selectable at other operation triggers.
However, it is preferable that the chance-up pattern is output early during the progress of one game. Therefore, it is preferable to set the chance-up pattern to be more likely to be selected at the first stop (or at the start) than at the third stop. This is to give the player a sense of expectation earlier within one game. In both single-shot and continuous performances, the chance-up pattern is more likely to appear at the first stop than at the second or third stop.
For this reason, in the continuous performance, the number of branches for the 1-stop trigger is set to be greater than the number of branches for the 2-stop or 3-stop triggers. This is because it is easier to give surprise to the player and can increase the expectation for a successful performance.
There are cases where the chance-up pattern is selected in the second or third game of the following consecutive performances, but in all cases, the pattern is selected when one stop occurs.

Performance 16 is a performance that is output in the second game of the continuous performance (the next game after the game in which performance 15 is output), and the cut number of all events is "1". Event "1604" is a chance-up pattern like the above event "1504".
For the second and subsequent games of the continuous performance, similarly to performance 15, when there is an event determined by the operation trigger, one of the events is selected and output. Therefore, in production 16, the event at the start is always "1601", the event at the 1st stop is either "1602" or "1604", there is no event at the 2nd stop, and the event at the 3rd stop is always "1601". is "1603".

Effect 17 is an effect that is output in the third game of the continuous effects. The number of cuts for each event in effect 17 is relatively greater than the number of cuts for events selected in the first and second games of the continuous effects. The average number of cuts for events selected in the first game of the continuous effects (effect 15) is 1.25, the average number of cuts for events selected in the second game of the continuous effects (effect 16) is 1.0, and the average number of cuts for events selected in the third game of the continuous effects (effect 17) is 1.83.
In this embodiment, the continuous effects continue for three games in principle, so effect 17 is the effect for the final game. However, if the end of the continuous effects is advantageous to the player (such as winning some kind of lottery or transitioning to a game state advantageous to the player) and event "1704" (failure) is selected in the third game of the continuous effects (effect 17), then as an exception, the continuous effects transition to the fourth game, and effect 18 event "1801" is output. Therefore, only in this case will the continuous effects continue for four games.

The third game of the continuous performance is, in principle, positioned as the final game of the continuous performance, so after all stops, either event "1704" meaning "failure" or event "1705" meaning success will occur. selected and output. For example, in a continuous performance, some kind of mission performance is output, and if the mission can be accomplished, it is a "success", and if the mission cannot be achieved, it is a "failure".
For example, when winning CZ, winning AT, or winning a special prize, event "1705" which is a "success" is selected as a general rule. On the other hand, if, for example, the CZ is not won, the AT is not won, or the special prize is not won, the event "1704" which results in "failure" is selected.

However, even if, for example, the CZ is won, the AT is won, or a special role is won, there is a predetermined probability (for example, 20%) that the event "1705", which is a "failure", will be selected, and the event "1801" of performance 18 will be selected in the next play.
Here, the number of cuts for the event "1704" corresponding to a failure is "2", while the number of cuts for the event "1705" corresponding to a success is "4". This is because by increasing the number of cuts in the performance when the event is successful, it is possible to create a sense of expectation of receiving a special benefit.

In addition, when event "1704 (failure)" is selected after all stops, the probability that the chance up pattern of event "1706" is selected at the first stop is "X1", and event "1705 (success)" is selected after all stops. When the probability that the chance up pattern of event "1706" is selected at the first stop when is selected is "X2",
"X1<X2"
It is.
In other words, when the chance-up pattern is selected, the expected value of "success" is set to be high.

Production 18 is a production in which event "1801" is output at the start. The number of cuts for this event is "4", which is a high number for one event. In the above example, this corresponds to a production in which the mission is "failed" once, but then "succeeded" by trying again (for example, the character is revived).
Although the above describes a continuous effect, for example, an effect similar to the continuous effect is output from the start to the end of the CZ. In the final game of the CZ, a success or failure event is output.

Performance 20 is selected when outputting a confirmed performance during normal times. In production 20, the one-cut event "2001" is selected at the start and continues until the full stop. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the event may be selected at the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop, and a confirmed effect may be output.
This confirmed performance is a so-called premiere performance, and when a normal performance is being performed, the winning of a special role, the winning of a CZ, or Selected when announcing the winning of AT.
The reason why the confirmed performance event "2001" is composed of one cut is to draw attention to the confirmed performance by deliberately reducing the number of cuts in the confirmed performance.

Performances 21 to 25 are performances selected during AT.
The effect 21 corresponds to an AT start effect. The number of cuts for the event "2101" selected here is "3" and is selected at the start. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the event may be selected at the first stop, second stop, or third stop, and an AT start effect may be output.
On the other hand, the number of event cuts in the AT end performance (performance 25), which will be described later, is "1". This is to enliven the AT start scene and create a sense of anticipation by increasing the number of cuts (creating a production with a lot of movement). On the other hand, the number of cuts is purposefully reduced at the end of the AT to create the effect of fading out the AT.

Performance 22 is an AT normal performance. During AT, a different event is selected and always output at every game, at the start, at the 1st stop, at the 2nd stop, and at the 3rd stop. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even during AT, when a winning combination is not won or when a winning combination is won in a replay, the unique event may not be outputted at all operation triggers.
On the other hand, when the push order bell is won during AT, the correct push order is announced at the start, and unique events are selected and output at the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd stops.
Performance 23 is an additional performance during AT. Many types of events are provided as additional effects during AT, making it possible to diversify the effects.
Furthermore, in the performance 24, an event is output for each operation opportunity in the expectation performance during AT (for example, the performance output when winning a role that is subject to an additional lottery).
As shown in Production 22 to Production 24, similar to the normal production, the average number of cuts of events that are output at the start or 3rd stop is the same as the average number of cuts that are output at the 1st or 2nd stop. This is more than the average number of cuts for events.
Performance 25 is an AT end performance. At the start, an event with a cut number of "1" is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the event may be selected after one stop, two stops, three stops, or after all stops, and an AT end effect may be output. In the performance 25, one of the events is determined by lottery or the like depending on the game results during AT.

Note that in the above description, when a performance is selected, which event to select is determined by lottery or the like, but a pattern of combinations of events may be selected. For example, by storing patterns of combinations of events that can occur for each production, and determining the production that will be output in the current game at the start (for example, production 01, etc.) and the pattern of combinations of events in that production, It is also possible to output effects according to the pattern.

Although the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the explanation has been centered on the number of cuts and the number of branches of each effect, but the volume of the effect may be configured as follows, for example.
First, when one of the production stages shown in FIG. 165 is selected, background music (background music, hereinafter simply referred to as "BGM") unique to that production stage is selected and output.
For example, if production 20 (confirmed production) is selected and event "2001" is output, the volume of the BGM corresponding to event "2001" will be higher than the volume of general BGM on the production stage at that time. . With this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the confirmed performance and draw the attention of the player.
However, the volume of BGM output when an error is detected is higher than the volume of BGM related to all effects. With this configuration, when an error is detected, it is possible to alert the surroundings and to easily make the hall staff aware of the occurrence of an error.

Further, for example, in the third game of the continuous performance (game in which performance 17 is selected), when the event "1705 (success)" is output after all stops, the BGM is changed. Here, if changing the BGM is one of the effects that means "success", the BGM may be changed at the same time as the output of the event "1705" starts, or the BGM may be changed before the output of the event "1705" starts. , the output of event "1705" may be suggested.
Furthermore, the tempo (song speed) of the BGM of the event "1705 (success)" is faster than the tempo of the BGM of the event "1704 (failure)". Furthermore, the volume of the BGM for the event "1705 (success)" is higher than the volume of the BGM for the event "1704 (failure)".

Furthermore, in AT, the tempo of the BGM of event "2101" of production 21 (AT start production) is faster than the BGM tempo of event "2501" or "2502" of production 25 (AT end production).
Further, the volume of the BGM of the event "2101" of the performance 21 (AT start performance) is higher than the volume of the BGM of the event "2501" or "2502" of the performance 25 (AT end performance).
As described above, when the AT starts, the tempo of the BGM is made faster and the volume is increased, thereby enlivening the start of the AT and creating a sense of anticipation.

(2) Furthermore, regarding the color of the effect image, for example, the following configuration may be mentioned.
First, in production 17, the average values of brightness and saturation of images that can be displayed in event "1705 (success)" are higher than the average values of brightness and saturation of images that can be displayed in event "1704 (failure)". expensive. This is to create a sense of expectation for the granting of benefits by making the presentation bright when the event is successful.
On the other hand, for example, the normal stage has a low probability stage, a normal stage, and a high probability stage with different expected winning values for AT and CZ, but the average value of brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed in the high probability stage is , lower than the average values of brightness and saturation of images that can be displayed on the normal stage or low-accuracy stage. For example, a high-accuracy stage may be an image with a night motif, a normal stage may be an image with an evening motif, and a low-accuracy stage may be an image with a daytime motif.

In addition, it may be configured so that when a high probability stage develops into a continuous performance, the brightness and saturation of the images that may be displayed during the continuous performance are relatively low, compared to when a low probability stage develops into the continuous performance. In this way, it is possible to match the brightness and saturation during the continuous performance to the stage (brightness and saturation) before the continuous performance.
Also, in the effects that are output during normal play, the average brightness and saturation of images that can be displayed in effects with high winning expectation of CZ, AT, and special combinations (so-called hot effects) is lower than the average brightness and saturation of images that can be displayed in other effects. By establishing a relationship between brightness and saturation and winning expectation in this way, it becomes possible for a player to guess the winning expectation from the brightness and saturation of the current game, in other words, to suggest the winning expectation.
However, the brightness and saturation of UI images such as the current stage, characters, game information (number of credits), etc., remain constant throughout the game (regardless of the expected probability of winning CZ, AT, special roles, etc.).

<Fourteenth embodiment>
The fourteenth embodiment relates to a slot machine 10 which has a case where the game result (number of coins paid out) differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed when the small win A1 condition device (left, center, right correct bell 1) to the small win F2 condition device (right, center, left correct bell 2) are activated (when the push order bell is won), and which displays an image relating to the push order of the stop switch 42 which will result in a predetermined game result (the symbol combination corresponding to the role with the largest number of coins paid out can be stopped and displayed) when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated during the AT, and which erases the image relating to the push order when the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the displayed push order, and in particular relates to the image display when the power supply is cut off while the image relating to the push order is displayed and then the power supply is resumed.
The fourteenth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings.
Figure 171 is a diagram showing an outline of the image display device 23, reel 31, stop switch 42, and speaker 22 in the 14th embodiment, and shows an example of the display of an image regarding the order of pressing when the small prize A1 condition device (left center right correct bell 1) is activated.
171, in the 14th embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the slot machine 10 includes three (left, center, right) reels 31, and three (left, center, right) stop switches 42 corresponding to each reel 31. In addition, an image display device 23 is provided above the three reels 31, and a speaker 22 is provided below the three stop switches 42.

Furthermore, as in the first embodiment, the fourteenth embodiment also includes a main control board 50 that controls the progress of the game and a sub-control board 80 that controls the output of the performance, as shown in FIG. There is.
Further, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, "3" (left, middle, right) stop switches 42, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51. Three motors 32 for rotating each reel 31, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when dispensing medals from the hopper 35, and the like are electrically connected via an output port 52.
Furthermore, an image display device 23, a speaker 22, etc. are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via an output port 82.
Further, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) is unidirectional with respect to the sub-control board 80, which is necessary for outputting the effects. Send information (commands).

Further, the symbol arrangement on each reel 31 in the fourteenth embodiment is similar to the symbol arrangement on each reel 31 in the first embodiment shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the combination of symbols of the winning combination and the number of coins to be paid out in the fourteenth embodiment are the same as the symbol combination of the winning combination and the number of coins to be paid out in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 4 and 5.
Further, the condition device in the fourteenth embodiment is similar to the condition device in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 6 to 9.
Also, in the fourteenth embodiment, the main control board 50 is provided with a winning combination lottery means 61 (FIG. 1), as in the first embodiment.
The winning combination lottery means 61 performs lottery (selection, determination) of winning numbers. Then, when the winning number is determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the prize condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay conditions that can be activated in the current game are determined. The equipment and accessories will be determined.

Also, in the 14th embodiment, as in the first embodiment, as shown in Figs. 6 to 8, 17 types of small win condition devices from the small win A1 condition device to the small win ALL condition device are provided.
Furthermore, when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated, a state will occur in which multiple types of small wins (bells) with different payout amounts are won.
Furthermore, the stop control of the reel 31 when multiple types of small winning combinations (bells) with different payout amounts are won can be performed using number priority and quantity priority.
In addition, "number of coins priority" refers to the process of giving priority to the symbols that constitute the symbol combination of the winning combination with the greatest number of coins paid out among the symbol combinations of the winning combinations that are overlappingly winning, and stopping and displaying them on the winning line.
On the other hand, "number priority" refers to giving priority to the symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the pay lines and that will have the greatest number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the pay lines.

Here, the times when multiple types of small winning combinations (bells) with different payout numbers are won repeatedly are collectively referred to as push order bell winning times. In the fourteenth embodiment, the operation of the small win A1 condition device (left middle right correct bell 1) to the small win F2 condition device (right middle left correct bell 2) corresponds to the time when the push order bell is won.
In addition, when the push order bell is won, the reel 31 is stopped with priority given to the number of medals, and the push order in which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination with the highest number of payouts is stopped and displayed is referred to as the "correct push order". Other pressing orders are referred to as "incorrect pressing orders."
Furthermore, operating the stop switches 42 in the correct pressing order is referred to as "correct pressing order", and operating the stop switches 42 in the incorrect pressing order is referred to as "incorrect pressing order".
That is, when the push order bell is won and the push order is correct, the reel 31 is stopped with priority given to the number of medals, so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination with the largest number of payout medals is stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, if the push order bell is won and the push order is incorrect, the reel 31 is stopped with priority given to the number of pieces, so the symbol that has the largest number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line is placed on the active line. Since the symbols are displayed in a static manner, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination with the largest number of payouts is not displayed in a static manner.
In addition, when the push order bell is won, the push order (correct push order) in which the reel 31 is stopped with priority given to the number of winnings is notified (instructed), and the stop switch 42 is operated in the notified push order. The operation of the stop switch 42 in a press order different from the notified press order (incorrect press order) is referred to as a "push order mismatch."

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment, since there are three stop switches 42 (left, center, right), there are six possible orders for pressing the stop switches 42: left center right, left left center, center left right, center right left, right left center, and right center left.
6 and 7, "push order 123" indicates the push order of left, center, and right, and "push order 132" indicates the push order of left, right, and center. Furthermore, "push order 213" indicates the push order of center, left, and right, and "push order 231" indicates the push order of center, right, and left. Furthermore, "push order 312" indicates the push order of right, left, and center, and "push order 321" indicates the push order of right, center, and left.
In addition, when the correct pressing order is left, center, right, it is called "left, center, right correct," and when the correct pressing order is left, center, it is called "left, center correct." Furthermore, when the correct pressing order is center, left, right, it is called "center, left, right correct," and when the correct pressing order is center, right, left, it is called "center, right, left correct." Furthermore, when the correct pressing order is right, left, center, it is called "right, left, center correct," and when the correct pressing order is right, center, left, it is called "right, center, left correct."

In addition, the push order bell in which the correct push order is the left middle right is called the "left middle right correct answer bell," and the push order bell in which the correct push order is the left middle right is called the "left right middle correct answer bell." to be called. Furthermore, a push order bell in which the correct press order for middle left and right is the correct answer press order is referred to as a ``middle left right correct answer bell'', and a press order bell for which the press order for middle right and left is the correct answer press order is referred to as a ``middle right left correct answer bell''. . Furthermore, a push order bell in which the right, left, and middle presses are the correct order is called a "right, left, and middle correct answer bell," and a push order bell in which the right, center, and left presses are the correct order is called a "right, middle, and left correct answer bell." to be called.
In addition, the instruction (notification) of the left-center-right pressing order is referred to as a "left-center-right instruction," and the instruction of the left-right middle press order is referred to as a "left-right middle instruction." Furthermore, the instruction to press the middle left and right keys is referred to as a "middle left and right instruction," and the instruction to press the center right and left buttons is referred to as a "middle right left instruction." Furthermore, the instruction to press the middle right, left, or right is referred to as a "right, left, or middle instruction," and the instruction to press the right, middle, or left button is referred to as a "right, middle, or left instruction."

Moreover, the "first stop operation" means the first operation of the stop switch 42, and the "first stop switch 42" means the first stop switch 42 operated.
Furthermore, the "second stop operation" means the operation of the second stop switch 42, and the "second stop switch 42" means the second stop switch 42 operated.
Further, the "third stop operation" means the operation of the third stop switch 42, and the "third stop switch 42" means the third stop switch 42 operated.
Moreover, the "first stop reel 31" means the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 that is operated first. That is, it means the reel 31 that stops first.
Furthermore, "second stop reel 31" means the reel 31 corresponding to the second operated stop switch 42. That is, it means the reel 31 that stops second.
Furthermore, the "third stop reel 31" means the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 operated third. That is, it means the reel 31 that stops third.

Further, "first stop correct answer" means that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first was operated first, and "first stop incorrect answer" means that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first. This means that the stop switch 42 was operated first.
Furthermore, "second stop correct answer" means that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second, and "second stop incorrect answer" means that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second This means that a stop switch 42 different from switch 42 was operated second.
In addition, "first stop press order matching" means that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is notified (instructed), and the notified stop switch 42 is operated first (the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the first stop switch 42 to be operated first). (operated).
On the other hand, "first stop push order mismatch" means that the stop switch 42 to be operated first was notified (instructed), but a stop switch 42 different from the notification was operated first (the stop switch 42 to be operated first This means that a stop switch 42 different from switch 42 was operated first.
In addition, "second stop press order matching" means that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is notified (instructed), and the notified stop switch 42 is operated second (stop switch to be operated second 42 was operated second).
On the other hand, "second stop push order mismatch" means that the stop switch 42 to be operated second was notified (instructed), but a stop switch 42 different from the notification was operated second (second stop switch 42 was operated second). This means that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should have been operated was operated second.

Moreover, when the winning number "1" is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination and replay condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "1". Then, the small win A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "1" is activated.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, the player enters a state in which the seven types of small winning combinations listed in the winning combination column in FIG. 6 are repeatedly won.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, the pressing order of the left middle right becomes the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders become the incorrect pressing order. That is, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, the correct answer is left middle right.
When the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of left-center-right (correct pressing order), the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 01 (payout of 10 pieces) is given priority to the number of pieces. is stopped and displayed on the active line.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than left-center-right (incorrectly pressed order), the small winning combination 07 etc. (each with 1 piece The symbol combination corresponding to the payout) can be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 (10 pieces paid out) cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the small role A2 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 2) is activated, the pressing order of left center right is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are incorrect, similar to when the small role A1 condition device is activated. In order of pressing. That is, even when the small winning combination A2 condition device is activated, the correct answer is left middle right. Then, when the small winning combination A2 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 as when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated is performed.

Further, when the small winning combination B1 condition device (right and left middle correct answer bell 1) is activated, the left and right middle press order becomes the correct answer press order, and the other press orders become the incorrect answer press order. That is, when the small winning combination B1 condition device is activated, the correct answer is left and right.
When the small winning combination B1 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the right and left middle pressing order (the correct pressing order), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 02 (payout of 10 pieces) stops on the active line. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than left/right/center (incorrectly solved pressing order), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11, etc. (each pays out 1 piece) can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 02 (10 pieces paid out) is not stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, when the small role B2 condition device (right and left middle correct answer bell 2) is activated, the pressing order of the left and right middle is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order, similar to when the small role B1 condition device is activated. becomes. That is, even when the small winning combination B2 condition device is activated, the correct answer is left and right. Then, when the small winning B2 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 as when the small winning B1 condition device is activated is performed.

Further, when the small combination C1 condition device (middle left/right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the pressing order of the middle left/right is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order. That is, when the small winning combination C1 condition device is activated, the middle left and right are correct.
When the small winning combination C1 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of the middle left and right (the correct pressing order), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 03 (payout of 10 pieces) stops on the active line. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than middle left/right (incorrectly solved pressing order), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 15, etc. (each pays out 1 piece) can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 03 (10 pieces paid out) is not stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the small role C2 condition device (center left/right correct answer bell 2) is activated, the pressing order of the middle left/right is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order, just like when the small role C1 condition device is activated. becomes. That is, even when the small winning combination C2 condition device is activated, the correct answer is center left and right. Then, when the small winning combination C2 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 as when the small winning combination C1 condition device is activated is performed.

Further, when the small winning combination D1 condition device (center right left correct answer bell 1) is activated, the pressing order of the middle right and left becomes the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders become the incorrect pressing order. That is, when the small winning combination D1 condition device is activated, the correct answer is middle, right, left.
When the small winning combination D1 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle right/left pressing order (the correct pressing order), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 04 (payout of 10 pieces) stops on the active line. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than center-right-left (incorrectly-resolved pressing order), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19, etc. (each pays out 1 piece) can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 04 (10 pieces paid out) is not stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the small role D2 condition device (center right left correct answer bell 2) is activated, the press order of the center right left is the correct press order, and the other press orders are the incorrect press order, similar to when the small role D1 condition device is activated. becomes. That is, even when the small winning combination D2 condition device is activated, the correct answer is center, right, left. Then, when the small winning combination D2 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 as when the small winning combination D1 condition device is activated is performed.

Further, when the small combination E1 condition device (right/left middle correct answer bell 1) is activated, the right/left middle press order becomes the correct answer press order, and the other press orders become the incorrect answer press order. That is, when the small winning combination E1 condition device is activated, the correct answer is right, left, middle.
When the small winning combination E1 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of right, left, middle (correct pressing order), the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 05 (payout of 10 pieces) stops on the active line. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than right, left, middle (incorrectly solved pressing order), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 23, etc. (each pays out 1 piece) can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 05 (10 pieces paid out) is not stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, when the small role E2 condition device (right/left middle correct answer bell 2) is activated, the pressing order of right, left, and middle is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order, similar to when the small role E1 condition device is activated. becomes. That is, even when the small winning combination E2 condition device is activated, the correct answer is right, left, middle. Then, when the small winning combination E2 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 as when the small winning combination E1 condition device is activated is performed.

Further, when the small win F1 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 1) is activated, the pressing order of the right middle left becomes the correct pushing order, and the other pushing orders become the incorrect pushing order. That is, when the small winning combination F1 condition device is activated, the correct answer is the right middle left.
When the small win F1 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the right-center-left press order (correct press order), the symbol combination corresponding to small win 06 (payout of 10 pieces) is on the active line. Stop display. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than right-center-left (incorrectly solved pressing order), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 27, etc. (each pays out 1 piece) is stopped and displayed on the active line. The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 06 (payout of 10 pieces) is not stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the small role F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) is activated, the pressing order of the right middle left is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are incorrect, just like when the small role F1 condition device is activated. Press in order. That is, even when the small win F2 condition device is activated, the correct answer is right middle left. Then, when the small win F2 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 as when the small win F1 condition device is activated is performed.
In this way, when the small winning combination A1 condition device to the small winning combination F2 condition device are activated (when the pressing order bell is won), the type of winning combination (symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line) is determined depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 42. As a result, the game results (number of coins paid out) are different.
That is, a game in which the game result differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed corresponds to a game when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated (when the press order bell is won).

Also, in the 14th embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated (when the push order bell is won), the 14th embodiment has an AT (notification game state) that notifies the player of the push order (correct push order) of the stop switch 42, which displays the symbol combination corresponding to the role with the largest number of payout coins in a stopped state.
Then, when the small prize A1 condition device to the small prize F2 condition device are activated during the AT (when the push order bell is won), the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information (described later) corresponding to the correct push order on the acquisition number display LED 78 (FIG. 1), and the sub-control board 80 displays a push order image indicating the correct push order on the image display device 23, and outputs a sound effect indicating the correct push order from the speaker 22. In this way, when the small prize A1 condition device to the small prize F2 condition device are activated during the AT (when the push order bell is won), the correct push order is announced.

When one of the winning numbers "13" to "15" is won in the lottery by the prize lottery means 61 (any of the minor prize G condition device (corner cherry) to the minor prize I condition device (watermelon) is activated) , execute the AT lottery.
Winning numbers "13" to "15" have relatively low winning probabilities and are called rare winning combinations. The probability of winning the AT lottery when the winning numbers ``13'' to ``15'' are won is set to ``10''%.
Furthermore, if you win the AT lottery, you will be given the right to perform AT. Then, in the case where the user has the right to execute AT, if the AT start condition is satisfied, AT is started.
Further, the initial value of the number of AT games is set to "50" games. When the right to execute AT is granted and the AT start conditions are met, AT will be executed for "50" games.
Furthermore, if you already have the AT execution right and win the AT lottery, the number of AT execution rights is added (added). For example, if you have "2" AT execution rights, you can execute AT for "(50+50=)100" games.
Furthermore, when the AT lottery is won during AT, the remaining number of AT games is added (added). For example, if the AT lottery is won when the remaining number of AT games is "20" games, the remaining number of AT games will be "(20+50=)70" games.

In the fourteenth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. We are prepared.
The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects (determines) the push order instruction number based on the lottery result of the winning numbers by the combination lottery means 61.
The push order instruction numbers in the fourteenth embodiment are determined as follows.
When specifying left center right: Press order instruction number "A1"
When specifying left/right middle: Press order instruction number "A2"
When specifying middle left/right: Press order instruction number "A3"
When specifying middle right/left: Press order instruction number "A4"
When specifying right/left/middle: Press order instruction number "A5"
When specifying right center left: Press order instruction number "A6"
Therefore, for example, when a winning number that is the correct answer in the left middle right is won (for example, when the small win A1 condition device is activated), the push order instruction number "A1" is selected.

Further, the performance group number selection means 64 selects (determines) a performance group number based on the lottery result of the winning numbers by the role lottery means 61.
The presentation group number in the fourteenth embodiment is determined as follows.
Winning number “1” (when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated): Production group number “1”
Winning number “2” (when the small role A2 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 2) is activated): Production group number “1”
Winning number "3" (when the small role B1 condition device (right and left middle correct answer bell 1) is activated): Production group number "1"
Winning number “4” (when the small role B2 condition device (right and left middle correct answer bell 2) is activated): Production group number “1”
Winning number “5” (when the small role C1 condition device (center left/right correct answer bell 1) is activated): Production group number “1”
Winning number “6” (when the small role C2 condition device (center left/right correct answer bell 2) is activated): Production group number “1”
Winning number “7” (when the small role D1 condition device (center right left correct answer bell 1) is activated): Production group number “1”
Winning number “8” (when the small role D2 condition device (center right left correct answer bell 2) is activated): Production group number “1”
Winning number “9” (when the small role E1 condition device (right, left, middle correct answer bell 1) is activated): Production group number “1”
Winning number “10” (when the small role E2 condition device (right/left center correct answer bell 2) is activated): Production group number “1”
Winning number “11” (when the small role F1 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 1) is activated): Production group number “1”
Winning number “12” (when the small role F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) is activated): Production group number “1”
Winning number “13” (when the small role G condition device (corner cherry) is activated): Production group number “2”
Winning number “14” (when the small role H condition device (middle cherry) is activated): Production group number “3”
Winning number “15” (when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated): Production group number “4”
Winning number “16” (when the 1-card ALL condition device is activated): Production group number “5”
Winning number “17” (when the small role ALL condition device is activated): Production group number “6”
Winning number “18” (when replay condition device is activated): Production group number “7”

Further, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (commands) necessary for controlling the performance to the sub-control board 80.
During the AT, one of the winning numbers "1" to "12" is won by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 (small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) to minor role F2 condition device (right center left) When one of the correct answer bells 2) is activated, the push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number corresponding to the correct answer press order, and the main control board 50 selects the press order instruction number corresponding to the correct answer press order. The information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
The push order instruction information in the fourteenth embodiment is defined as follows.
When specifying left middle right: Press order instruction information “=1”
When specifying left/right middle: Press order instruction information “=2”
When specifying middle left/right: Press order instruction information “=3”
When specifying middle right/left: Press order instruction information “=4”
When specifying right/left/middle: Press order instruction information “=5”
When specifying right center left: Press order instruction information “=6”
For example, suppose that during AT, the winning number "1" is won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 (the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated). In this case, since the correct pressing order is left-center-right, the press-order instruction number selection means 63 selects the press-order instruction number "A1" corresponding to the left-center-right correct answer, and the main control board 50 selects the press order instruction number "A1" corresponding to the left-center-right correct answer. Press order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the correct answer is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78.

Also, during the AT, one of the winning numbers "1" to "12" is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 (small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to minor role F2 condition device (right When the correct answer bell 2) is activated, the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) will be activated at some point at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). (before the stop switch 42 is also operated), the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Then, the sub-control board 80 stores the received push order instruction number in a predetermined address of the RWM 83, and displays an image showing the correct push order on the image display device 23 based on the received push order instruction number. , and a sound effect indicating the correct pressing order is output from the speaker 22.
Note that the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot determine the winning number.
However, regardless of whether it is during AT or not, each time a winning number is determined in each game, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number, and selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number. is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmitting means 71.

That is, unlike the push order instruction number, the performance group number is selected every game and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
Then, the sub-control board 80 receives the performance group number for each game, stores the received performance group number in a predetermined address of the RWM 83, and outputs the performance related to the winning combination based on the received performance group number. It becomes possible.
Moreover, since the sub-control board 80 cannot determine the correct pressing order from the presentation group number, it cannot notify the correct pressing order based on the presentation group number.
Therefore, during AT, when the push order bell is won, the push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number corresponding to the correct push order, and the control command transmission means 71 sends the selected push order instruction number to the sub It is transmitted to the control board 80.
Thereby, when the push order bell is won during AT, the sub control board 80 can notify the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

In addition, examples of information (commands) transmitted by the control command transmitting means 71 to the sub-control board 80 include information indicating the operation of the bet switch 40, information indicating the operation of the start switch 41, push order instruction number (only when the push order bell is won during the AT), performance group number, information indicating the operation of each stop switch 42, information indicating the stop of rotation of each reel 31, information indicating a winning combination, information indicating the start of the medal payout process, information indicating the end of the medal payout process, information indicating the game status, information indicating the AT lottery has been won, information indicating the AT start conditions have been met, information indicating the AT is in progress, information indicating the remaining number of plays in the AT, and information indicating the AT end conditions have been met.
In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives information (commands) transmitted from the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71), it stores the received information in a specified address of the RWM 83 and controls the output of the performance based on the received information.

Here, an image related to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed, which is displayed on the image display device 23, is referred to as a "press order image."
As shown in FIG. 171, in the fourteenth embodiment, the push order image includes a push order number image and a push order background image.
The "push order numeric image" refers to an image of numbers indicating the push order of each stop switch 42, and the "push order background image" corresponds to each push order number image, and the "push order background image" corresponds to each push order number image. An image displayed as a background.
The push order number image "1" (image with the number "1") is an image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated first, and the push order number image "2" (image with the number "2") is an image showing the stop switch 42 to be operated first. This is an image showing the stop switch 42 to be operated second, and the press order number image "3" (image with the number "3") is an image showing the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
When the push order number image "1" is displayed on the left side of the image display device 23 (above the left reel 31), it indicates that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42.
Further, when the push order number image "1" is displayed at the center of the image display device 23 (above the middle reel 31), it indicates that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the middle stop switch 42.
Further, when the push order number image "1" is displayed on the right side of the image display device 23 (above the right reel 31), it indicates that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the right stop switch 42.

When the push order number image "2" is displayed on the left side of the image display device 23 (above the left reel 31), this indicates that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is the left stop switch 42.
In addition, when the push order number image "2" is displayed in the center of the image display device 23 (above the middle reel 31), it indicates that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is the middle stop switch 42.
Furthermore, when the push order number image "2" is displayed on the right side of the image display device 23 (above the right reel 31), this indicates that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is the right stop switch 42.
When the push order number image "3" is displayed on the left side of the image display device 23 (above the left reel 31), this indicates that the stop switch 42 to be operated third is the left stop switch 42.
In addition, when the push order number image "3" is displayed in the center of the image display device 23 (above the middle reel 31), it indicates that the stop switch 42 to be operated third is the middle stop switch 42.
Furthermore, when the push order number image "3" is displayed on the right side of the image display device 23 (above the right reel 31), this indicates that the stop switch 42 to be operated third is the right stop switch 42.

When the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the first stop switch 42 to be operated is the left stop switch 42, the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, The third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42. In this case, the push order number image "1" is displayed on the left side (above the left reel 31), the push order number image "2" is displayed in the center (above the middle reel 31), and the push order number image "2" is displayed on the right side (above the right reel 31). ) to display the number image "3" in the pressing order.
In a game where the push order bell is won during AT, at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined, but before any stop switch 42 is operated), the sub control board 80 displays the first stop/press order instruction image on the image display device 23.
The "first stop push order instruction image" means an image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 to be operated first. By displaying the first stop push order instruction image on the image display device 23, the user is prompted to operate the stop switch 42, which should be operated first.
Specifically, the sub-control board 80 sets the push order number image "1" (an image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated first) to the push order number image "2" as the first stop push order instruction image. ” and the push order number image “3” (an image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated second or later) is displayed on the image display device 23. As a result, the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is emphasized and the user is encouraged to operate the stop switch 42 that should be operated first.
Further, the first stop push order instruction image may be an image in which the push order number image "1" is displayed in a large size at the time of display start (from the beginning), It may also be an image (video) in which the push order number image "1" is displayed in a small size, and then the push order number image "1" is displayed so as to gradually become larger.
Furthermore, the first stop push order instruction image may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "1" increases in size immediately after the display starts, or may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "1" becomes larger immediately after the display starts, or for a predetermined period of time (for example " It is also possible to create an image (video) in which the press order number image "1" becomes larger after the elapse of 0.1" to "0.2" seconds).

During the AT, the start switch 41 is operated, and the winning number "1" to "12" is won by the winning lottery means 61 (small winning A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) - small winning When one of the F2 condition devices (right-center-left correct answer bell 2 is activated), the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) is activated at the start of the game (when the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). (after that, before any stop switch 42 is operated), the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the push order instruction number, the sub control board 80 displays the first stop push order instruction image on the image display device 23.
The first stop push order instruction image is an image that continues to be displayed (maintained) until the first stop switch 42 is operated (first stop operation). That is, the sub-control board 80 continues (maintains) the display of the first stop push order instruction image until the first stop switch 42 is operated (first stop operation).

In a game in which the push order bell is won during the AT, when the stop switch 42, which should be operated first, is operated first, the first stop push order is matched, and the sub-control board 80 displays a first stop push order match image on the image display device 23.
"First stop press sequence matching image" means an image indicating that the stop switch 42, which should be operated first, has been operated first (first stop press sequence matching).
Specifically, the sub-control board 80 displays, as the first stop push order match image, for example, an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles (shines) on the image display device 23. This indicates that the stop switch 42, which should be operated first, has been operated first (first stop push order match).

Further, the first stop/press order matching image is an image that ends display and disappears after a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the start of display. That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of displaying the first stop/press order matching image on the image display device 23, the display of the first stop/push order matching image ends and is deleted from the image display device 23.
When the first stop switch 42 is operated (first stop operation), information (command) indicating this is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating the first operation of the stop switch 42 (first stop operation), and when determining that the first stop press order matches, displays a first stop press order matching image on the image display device 23. to be displayed. Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first operation of the stop switch 42 (the first stop operation, the reception of information indicating the first stop operation, and the start of displaying the first stop press order matching image), the first stop press order matching image is displayed. is erased from the image display device 23 after the display of the image is completed.

Further, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first, the sub-control board 80 displays a second stop push order instruction image on the image display device 23.
The "second stop push order instruction image" means an image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 to be operated second. By displaying the second stop push order instruction image on the image display device 23, the user is prompted to operate the stop switch 42 that should be operated second.
Specifically, the sub-control board 80 uses, for example, the push order number image "2" (an image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated second) as the second stop push order instruction image, and the push order number image "2" (the image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated second). 3" (image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated third) is displayed on the image display device 23. This emphasizes the stop switch 42 that should be operated second and prompts the user to operate the stop switch 42 that should be operated second.
Further, the second stop push order instruction image may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "2" is displayed in a large size at the time of display start (from the beginning), ) It may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "2" is displayed in a small size, and then the push order number image "2" is displayed so as to gradually become larger.
Furthermore, the second stop push order instruction image may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "2" becomes larger immediately after the start of display, or may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "2" becomes larger immediately after the start of display. It is also possible to create an image (video) in which the press order number image "2" becomes larger after the elapse of 0.1" to "0.2" seconds).
When the first stop switch 42 is operated (first stop operation), information (command) indicating this is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating the first operation of the stop switch 42 (first stop operation), and when determining that the first stop press order matches, displays a second stop press order instruction image on the image display device 23. to be displayed.
The second stop push order instruction image is an image that continues to be displayed (maintained) until the second stop switch 42 is operated (second stop operation). That is, the sub-control board 80 continues (maintains) the display of the second stop push order instruction image until the second stop switch 42 is operated (second stop operation).

Here, both the first stop press order matching image and the second stop press order instruction image are images that start displaying in response to the first operation of the stop switch 42 (first stop operation). That is, the trigger for starting the display of both the first stop press order matching image and the second stop press order instruction image is the first operation of the stop switch 42 (first stop operation).
In addition, the first stop press order matching image and the second stop press order instruction image are displayed overlappingly on a layer on the front (front, upper) side of the background effect (background video and background still image) on the image display device 23. This is an image that is possible.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 determines that the first stop switch 42 is operated (first stop operation) (receives information indicating the first stop switch 42 operation) and that the first stop press order matches, The display of the first stop press order matching image and the display of the second stop press order instruction image can be started simultaneously. In this case, the second stop push order instruction image may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "2" becomes larger immediately after the start of display, or may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "2" becomes larger immediately after the start of display. For example, it may be an image (video) in which the press order number image "2" becomes larger after the elapse of "0.1" to "0.2" seconds.
Further, when the sub-control board 80 determines that the first stop switch 42 is operated (first stop operation) (receives information indicating the first stop switch 42 operation) and that the first stop press order matches, First, the display of the first stop press order matching image is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, "0.1" to "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display of the first stop press order matching image, the second stop push is started. Display of the order instruction image can be started. In this case, the second stop/push order instruction image may be, for example, an image (video) in which the push order number image "2" becomes larger immediately after the display starts.

As a result, for example, an image indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first (first stop press order matching image) is displayed and then erased, and then the stop switch 42 to be operated second is displayed. It is possible to make it appear as if an image emphasizing 42 (second stop/press order instruction image) is displayed.
For example, an image indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first (first stop press order matching image) is displayed, and then an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated second is displayed. (second stop press order instruction image) is displayed, and then the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first was operated first (first stop press order matching image) appears to be erased. It can also be done.
Furthermore, for example, an image indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first (first stop press order matching image) is displayed, and at the same time, the stop switch 42 to be operated second is highlighted. An image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first was operated first (second stop press order instruction image) is displayed, and then an image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (first stop press order matching image) is erased. You can also make it visible.
Further, for example, an image indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first (first stop press order matching image) is displayed, and then, after that, an image indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first is displayed. At the same time as the image indicating that the stop switch 42 is to be operated second (the first stop press order matching image) is erased, an image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 to be operated second (second stop press order instruction image) appears to be displayed. You can also do it like this.

In a game where the push order bell is won during AT, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second, the second stop push order matches, and the sub control board 80 determines that the second stop push order matches. The image is displayed on the image display device 23.
The "second stop press order matching image" means an image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second (second stop press order matching).
Specifically, the sub control board 80 displays on the image display device 23, for example, an image in which a push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" is sparkling (shining) as the second stop press order matching image. indicate. This indicates that the stop switch 42, which should be operated second, has been operated second (second stop press order matches).
Further, the second stop press order matching image is an image that ends display and disappears after a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the start of display. That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of displaying the second stop and press order matching image on the image display device 23, the display of the second stop and press order match image ends and is deleted from the image display device 23.
When the second stop switch 42 is operated (second stop operation), information (command) indicating this is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating the operation of the second stop switch 42 (second stop operation), and when determining that the second stop press order matches, displays the second stop press order matching image on the image display device. Displayed on 23. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the second stop switch 42 (second stop operation, reception of information indicating the second stop operation, and start of display of the second stop press order matching image), the second stop press order matches. After the display of the image is finished, it is deleted from the image display device 23.

Further, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second, the sub-control board 80 displays a third stop push order instruction image on the image display device 23.
The "third stop push order instruction image" means an image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 to be operated third. By displaying the third stop push order instruction image on the image display device 23, the user is prompted to operate the stop switch 42 that should be operated third.
Specifically, the sub-control board 80 displays, for example, a push order number image "3" (an image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated third) larger than before as the third stop push order instruction image. The image is displayed on the image display device 23. As a result, the stop switch 42 to be operated third is emphasized and the stop switch 42 to be operated third is urged to be operated.
Further, the third stop push order instruction image may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "3" is displayed in a large size at the time of display start (from the beginning), ) It may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "3" is displayed in a small size, and then the push order number image "3" is displayed so as to gradually become larger.
Furthermore, the third stop push order instruction image may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "3" becomes larger immediately after the start of display, or may be an image (video) in which the push order number image "3" becomes larger immediately after the start of display, or for a predetermined period of time after the start of display (for example " It is also possible to create an image (video) in which the press order number image "3" becomes larger after the elapse of 0.1" to "0.2" seconds).
When the second stop switch 42 is operated (second stop operation), information (command) indicating this is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating the operation of the second stop switch 42 (second stop operation), and when determining that the second stop press order matches, displays a third stop press order instruction image on the image display device. Displayed on 23.
Further, the third stop push order instruction image is an image that continues to be displayed (maintained) until the third stop switch 42 is operated (third stop operation). That is, the sub-control board 80 continues (maintains) the display of the third stop push order instruction image until the third stop switch 42 is operated (third stop operation).

Here, both the second stop push order matching image and the third stop push order instruction image are images that begin to be displayed in response to the operation (second stop operation) of the second stop switch 42. That is, the second stop push order matching image and the third stop push order instruction image begin to be displayed in response to the operation (second stop operation) of the second stop switch 42.
In addition, the second stop push order matching image and the third stop push order instruction image are images that can be displayed superimposed on a layer in front of (at the front, above) the background performance (background video and background still image) in the image display device 23.
Then, when the second stop switch 42 is operated (the second stop operation) (the information indicating the operation of the second stop switch 42 is received) and the sub-control board 80 determines that the second stop push order coincides, it can simultaneously start displaying the second stop push order coincidence image and the third stop push order instruction image. In this case, the third stop push order instruction image may be, for example, an image (video) in which the push order number image "3" gets larger immediately after the display starts, or an image (video) in which the push order number image "3" gets larger after a predetermined time (for example, "0.1" to "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the display starts.
In addition, when the second stop switch 42 is operated (the second stop operation) (the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating the operation of the second stop switch 42) and determines that the second stop push order is a match, it can first start displaying the second stop push order match image, and then start displaying the third stop push order instruction image after a predetermined time (for example, "0.1" to "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the start of displaying the second stop push order match image. In this case, the third stop push order instruction image can be, for example, an image (moving image) in which the push order number image "3" becomes larger immediately after it starts to be displayed.

As a result, for example, an image indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated first (second stop press order matching image) is displayed and then erased, and then the stop switch 42 to be operated third is displayed and then erased. It can be made to appear as if an image (third stop/push order instruction image) emphasizing the switch 42 is displayed.
For example, an image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second (second stop press order matching image) is displayed, and then the stop switch 42 that should be operated third is highlighted. An image (third stop press order instruction image) is displayed, and then an image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second (second stop press order matching image) is erased. You can also make it look like this.

Furthermore, for example, an image indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second (second stop press order matching image) is displayed, and at the same time, the stop switch 42 to be operated third is displayed. An image (third stop press order instruction image) that emphasizes is displayed, and then an image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second (second stop press order matching image) disappears. It is also possible to make it appear as if it were done.
Further, for example, an image indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second (second stop press order matching image) is displayed, and then the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second. At the same time as the image indicating that the stop switch 42 was operated third (second stop press order matching image) is erased, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated third (third stop press order instruction image) is displayed. You can also make it look like it is.

In a game where the push order bell is won during AT, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated third is operated third, the third stop push order matches, and the sub control board 80 determines that the third stop push order matches. The image is displayed on the image display device 23.
The "third stop press order matching image" means an image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated third is operated third (third stop press order matching).
Specifically, the sub-control board 80 displays, on the image display device 23, an image in which a push order background image corresponding to the push order numeric image "3" sparkles as the third stop press order matching image. indicate. This indicates that the stop switch 42, which should be operated third, has been operated third (the third stop press order matches).

Further, the third stop press order matching image is an image that ends display and disappears after a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the start of display. That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the display of the third stop/push order matching image started on the image display device 23, the display of the third stop/push order matching image ends and is deleted from the image display device 23.
When the third stop switch 42 is operated (third stop operation), information (command) indicating this is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Then, upon receiving the information indicating the operation of the third stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the sub control board 80 displays the third stop press order matching image on the image display device 23 . Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the third stop operation, the reception of information indicating the third stop operation, and the start of displaying the third stop press order matching image), the third stop press order matches. After the display of the image is finished, it is deleted from the image display device 23.

In addition, when a symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations is displayed frozen on an active line and the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the number of medals won on the image display device 23 .
The "image of the number of medals acquired" refers to an image showing the number of medals paid out (the number of medals acquired).
Specifically, for example, when "10" medals are paid out, the sub-control board 80 can display, as the medal acquisition number image, an image of "GET 10" indicating that "10" medals will be paid out on the image display device 23. Similarly, for example, when "3" medals are paid out, the sub-control board 80 can display, as the medal acquisition number image, an image of "GET 3" indicating that "3" medals will be paid out on the image display device 23.
The image of the number of acquired medals is an image (video) that is terminated and erased when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of its display. In other words, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of displaying the image of the number of acquired medals on the image display device 23, the display of the image of the number of acquired medals is terminated and erased from the image display device 23.

When the symbol combination corresponding to one of the winning combinations is stopped and displayed on the active line and the medal payout process is started, information (command) indicating this is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Then, upon receiving the information indicating the start of the medal payout process, the sub control board 80 displays an image of the number of medals acquired on the image display device 23. Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process (reception of information indicating the start of the medal payout process, start of display of the medal acquisition number image), the display of the medal acquisition number image ends and is deleted from the image display device 23. be done.
Note that during the medal payout process, a "medal acquisition image" (for example, an image of "GET") indicating that medals are being paid out (medals have been acquired) is used instead of a medal acquisition number image that indicates the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals acquired). may be displayed on the image display device 23. Furthermore, the medal acquisition image may also be an image (video) that ends its display and disappears after a predetermined period of time (for example, "0.5" seconds) has elapsed since the start of display.

In addition, when an image emphasizing the stop switch 42 that should be operated first (first stop push order indication image) is displayed on the image display device 23 when a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (first stop push order mismatch), the sub-control board 80 erases the image relating to the stop switch 42 that should be operated first, the image relating to the stop switch 42 that should be operated second, and the image relating to the stop switch 42 that should be operated third from the image display device 23. In other words, when the push order mismatch occurs, the sub-control board 80 erases all images relating to the push order of the stop switches 42 from the image display device 23.
Specifically, when the push order bell during AT is won, if an image is displayed on the image display device 23 in which the push order number image "1" (an image indicating the stop switch 42 that should be operated first) is displayed larger than the push order number image "2" and the push order number image "3" (an image indicating the stop switch 42 that should be operated second or subsequent times), when a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (when the first stop push order does not match), the sub-control board 80 erases all of the push order number image "1", push order number image "2", push order number image "3" and the corresponding push order background images from the image display device 23.

Further, when the push order bell is won during AT, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (when the first stop push order matches), the sub control board 80 An image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (first stop press order matching image) is displayed on the image display device 23 and then erased, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is highlighted. (second stop/push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23. In this case, when a stop switch 42 that is different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second (when the order of second stop presses does not match), the sub-control board 80 controls the switch 42 that should be operated second. The image related to the stop switch 42 and the image related to the stop switch 42 to be operated third are erased from the image display device 23. That is, when the pressing order does not match, the sub-control board 80 erases all images related to the pressing order of the stop switches 42 from the image display device 23.

Specifically, when the push order bell is won during AT, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (when the first stop push order matches), the sub control board 80 operates as described above. , an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles (first stop push order matching image) is displayed on the image display device 23 and then erased, and the push order number image An image that displays "2" (image showing the stop switch 42 to be operated second) larger than the push order number image "3" (image showing the stop switch 42 to be operated third) (second stop push (order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23. In this case, when a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated (when the second stop press order does not match), the sub-control board 80 displays the press order number image "2", the press The order number image "3" and the corresponding push order background images are all erased from the image display device 23.

When the pressing order is inconsistent (when a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated is operated/when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the notified pressing order), instead of erasing the image relating to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 from the image display device 23, a pressing order inconsistent image indicating that the pressing order is inconsistent may be displayed on the image display device 23 and then erased. The case where the pressing order inconsistent image is displayed when the pressing order is inconsistent will be described in detail in the sixteenth embodiment.
In a game in which the push order bell is won during the AT, if a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first, the first stop push order will be inconsistent, and the sub-control board 80 will display a first stop push order inconsistent image on the image display device 23.
The "first stop press order inconsistent image" means an image indicating that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first has been operated first (first stop press order inconsistent).

Specifically, the sub-control board 80 displays, as the first stop push order mismatch images, a push order number image "1", a push order number image "2", a push order number image "3", and their corresponding ones. The image display device 23 displays an image in which the background image in the order of pressing is displayed in a darker color than before. This indicates that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first was operated first (the order of the presses did not match in the first stop).
Furthermore, the first stop/press order mismatch image is an image that ends its display and disappears after a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the start of display. That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of displaying the first stop/press order mismatch image on the image display device 23, the display of the first stop/push order mismatch image ends and is deleted from the image display device 23.
When the first stop switch 42 is operated (first stop operation), information (command) indicating this is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating the first operation of the stop switch 42 (first stop operation), and when determining that the first stop press order does not match, displays an image of the first stop press order mismatch on the image display device 23. to be displayed. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first operation of the stop switch 42 (first stop operation, reception of information indicating the first stop operation, and start of display of the first stop press order mismatch image), the first stop press order mismatch image is displayed. is erased from the image display device 23 after the display of the image is completed.

In a game where you win the push order bell during AT, the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (the first stop press order matches), and the image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 that should be operated second (the first 2 stop push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23, if a stop switch 42 that is different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second, the second stop push order will not match. , the sub-control board 80 displays the second stop press order mismatch image on the image display device 23.
The "second stop press order mismatch image" means an image indicating that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second (second stop press order mismatch).
Specifically, the sub-control board 80 uses, for example, a push order number image "2", a push order number image "3", and their corresponding push order background images as the second stop push order mismatch images. An image to be displayed in a darker color is displayed on the image display device 23. This indicates that a stop switch 42 that is different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second (the order of presses did not match in the second stop).

In addition, the second stop push order mismatch image is an image that is terminated and erased when a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of display. In other words, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying the second stop push order mismatch image on the image display device 23, the display of the second stop push order mismatch image is terminated and erased from the image display device 23.
When the second stop switch 42 is operated (second stop operation), information (command) indicating this is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating the operation of the second stop switch 42 (second stop operation) and, if it determines that the second stop press sequence is inconsistent, displays a second stop press sequence inconsistent image on the image display device 23. Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the second stop switch 42 (second stop operation, reception of information indicating the second stop operation, start of display of the second stop press sequence inconsistent image), the display of the second stop press sequence inconsistent image is terminated and is erased from the image display device 23.

FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing text image display processing by the sub-control board 80 in the fourteenth embodiment.
Here, the "text image" means an image of characters, numbers, etc. that is displayed in a layer on the front (front, upper) side of the background effect (background moving image and background still image) on the image display device 23.
The text image display process is a process for displaying text images such as letters and numbers on a layer on the front side of the background effect in the image display device 23.
When starting the text video display process, the sub control board 80 first determines whether or not AT is in progress in step S391.
When AT is in progress, main control means 50 transmits information (command) indicating that AT is in progress to sub-control means 80. Moreover, when the sub-control means 80 receives information indicating that AT is in progress, it stores this in a predetermined address of the RWM 83. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can determine whether or not AT is in progress.
If it is determined that AT is in progress, the process advances to step S392, and if it is determined that AT is not in progress (non-AT is in progress), the process according to this flowchart is ended.

Proceeding to step S392, the sub control board 80 controls the small win A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to the small win F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) when they are activated (when the push order bell is won). Determine whether it exists or not.
As described above, during AT, when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated, the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80. Further, when the sub control board 80 receives the push order instruction number, it stores this in a predetermined address of the RWM 83. Thereby, the sub control board 80 can judge whether or not the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are in operation.
When it is determined that the small role A1 condition device to the small role F2 condition device are activated, the process proceeds to step S400, and when it is determined that the minor role A1 condition device to the minor role F2 condition device are not activated, The process advances to step S393.
Proceeding to step S400, the sub control board 80 executes a text image display process when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated. The specific contents of this process will be described later. Then, when the text image display processing during the operation of the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device is completed, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
Proceeding to step S393, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated.

When the winning number “15” is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 (the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated), the main control board 50 selects the performance group number “4” corresponding to the winning number “15”. ” and send it to the sub control board 80. Further, when the sub-control means 80 receives the production group number "4" corresponding to the winning number "15", it stores this in a predetermined address of the RWM 83. Thereby, the sub control board 80 can judge whether or not the small win I condition device (watermelon) is in operation.
When it is determined that the small win I condition device (watermelon) is activated, the process proceeds to step S430, and when it is determined that the small win I condition device (watermelon) is not activated, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
Proceeding to step S430, the sub control board 80 executes a text image display process when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated. The specific contents of this process will be described later. Then, when the text image display process when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated is finished, the process according to this flowchart is finished.

FIG. 173 is a text image when the small win A1 condition device (left middle right correct bell 1) to the small win F2 condition device (right middle left correct bell 2) are activated (when the push order bell is won) in step S400 in FIG. 172. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing.
When starting the text image display process during the operation of the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device in step S400, the sub control board 80 executes the first stop push order instruction image display process in step S401. This process is a process of displaying on the image display device 23 an image (first stop press order instruction image) that emphasizes the stop switch 42 to be operated first.
For example, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the correct push order is left middle right, so the sub control board 80 sets the left side (left middle right) as the first stop push order instruction image. The push order number image "1" (the image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated first) is displayed on the top of the reel 31, and the push order number image "2" (the second one is displayed in the center (above the middle reel 31)). An image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated) is displayed, and a press order number image "3" (image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated third) is displayed on the right side (above the right reel 31). Further, the sub control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 an image in which the push order number image "1" is displayed larger than the push order number image "2" and the push order number image "3".
As described above, the first stop push order instruction image continues to be displayed (maintained) until the first stop switch 42 is operated (first stop operation).
After executing the first stop/press order instruction image display process, the process advances to the next step S402.

In step S402, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a first stop operation (first operation of the stop switch 42) has been performed.
If it is determined that the first stop operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S403, and if it is determined that the first stop operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S402.
When proceeding to step S403, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the first stop press sequence matches (whether the stop switch 42, which should be operated first, is operated first).
For example, if (when the small prize A1 condition device (left, center, right correct bell 1) is activated), the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42, so the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not it is the left first stop (the left stop switch 42 is operated first).
As described above, when each stop switch 42 is operated, the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) transmits information (commands) indicating the operation of each stop switch 42 to the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating the operation of each stop switch 42, it stores this information at a specified address in the RWM 83. This allows the sub-control board 80 to determine whether or not the first stop press sequence is the same (the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first).
If it is determined that the first stop press sequence matches (the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first), the process proceeds to step S404, and if it is determined that the first stop press sequence does not match (a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first), the process proceeds to step S414.

Proceeding to step S404, the sub-control board 80 executes a first stop press order matching image display process. This process is a process of displaying on the image display device 23 an image (first stop press order matching image) indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first has been operated first.
Specifically, the sub control board 80 displays a shimmering press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "1" (an image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated first) as the first stop press order matching image ( A shining image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Note that, as described above, the first stop press order matching image ends displaying (is erased) when a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the start of display.
After executing the first stop press order matching image display process, the process advances to the next step S405.
Proceeding to step S405, the sub-control board 80 executes a second stop/push order instruction image display process. This process is a process of displaying on the image display device 23 an image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 to be operated second (second stop press order instruction image).
Specifically, the sub-control board 80 sets the push order number image "2" (the image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated second) to the push order number image "3" (the image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated second) as the second stop push order instruction image. An image that is displayed larger than the image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated third is displayed on the image display device 23.
As described above, the second stop push order instruction image continues to be displayed (maintained) until the second stop switch 42 is operated (second stop operation).
Further, as described above, the display of the first stop/push order matching image and the display of the second stop/push order instruction image may be started at the same time.
After executing the second stop/press order instruction image display process, the process advances to the next step S406.

Proceeding to step S406, the sub-control board 80 determines whether a second stop operation (operation of the second stop switch 42) has been performed.
When it is determined that the second stop operation has been performed, the process advances to step S407, and when it is determined that the second stop operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S406 again.
Proceeding to step S407, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the second stop press order matches (the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second).
For example, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, so the sub control board 80 controls the middle second stop ( It is determined whether or not the middle stop switch 42 was operated second.
When it is determined that the second stop press order matches (the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second), the process advances to step S408, and the second stop press order does not match (the stop switch 42 that should be operated second If it is determined that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 was operated second, the process advances to step S414.

Proceeding to step S408, the sub-control board 80 executes a second stop press order matching image display process. This process is a process of displaying on the image display device 23 an image (second stop press order matching image) indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second has been operated second.
Specifically, the sub-control board 80 displays a shimmering press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "2" (an image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated second) as the second stop press order matching image. Displays a (shining) image.
Note that, as described above, the display of the second stop press order matching image ends (is erased) when a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the start of display.
After executing the second stop press order matching image display process, the process advances to the next step S409.
Proceeding to step S409, the sub-control board 80 executes a third stop/push order instruction image display process. This process is a process of displaying on the image display device 23 an image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 to be operated third (third stop press order instruction image).
Specifically, the sub-control board 80 displays an image that displays a push order number image "3" (an image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated third) larger than before as the third stop push order instruction image. Displayed on the image display device 23.
As described above, the third stop push order instruction image continues to be displayed (maintained) until the third stop switch 42 is operated (third stop operation).
Further, as described above, the display of the second stop/push order matching image and the display of the third stop/push order instruction image may be started simultaneously.
After executing the third stop/press order instruction image display process, the process advances to the next step S410.

Proceeding to step S410, the sub-control board 80 determines whether a third stop operation (operation of the third stop switch 42) has been performed.
When it is determined that the third stop operation has been performed, the process advances to step S411, and when it is determined that the third stop operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S410 again.
Proceeding to step S411, the sub-control board 80 executes a third stop press order matching image display process. This process is a process of displaying on the image display device 23 an image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated third has been operated third (third stop press order matching image).
Specifically, the sub control board 80 displays a shimmering press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "3" (an image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated third) as the third stop press order matching image. Displays a (shining) image.
Note that, as described above, the display of the third stop press order matching image ends (is erased) after a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the start of display.
After executing the third stop press order matching image display process, the process advances to the next step S412.
Proceeding to step S412, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the medal payout process has started.
As described above, when the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) starts the medal payout process, it transmits information (command) indicating the start of the medal payout process to the sub control board 80. . Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating the start of the medal payout process, it stores this in a predetermined address of the RWM 83. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can determine whether or not the medal payout process has started.
When it is determined that the medal payout process has started, the process advances to step S413, and when it is determined that the medal payout process has not started, the process returns to step S412 again.

Proceeding to step S413, the sub-control board 80 executes a medal acquisition number image display process. This process is a process of displaying an image (a medal acquisition number image) indicating the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals acquired) on the image display device 23.
Specifically, for example, when a winning combination with a payout of 10 medals is won and a payout process for 10 medals is executed, the sub-control board 80 displays "10" medals as the medal acquisition number image. An image of "GET10" indicating that a payout will be made is displayed on the image display device 23.
Note that, as described above, the display of the medal acquisition number image ends (is erased) after a predetermined time (for example, "0.5" seconds) has elapsed from the start of display.
In addition, in step S413, instead of an image (medal acquisition number image) indicating the number of medals to be paid out (number of acquired medals), an image indicating that medals are to be paid out (medals have been acquired) (medal acquisition image/for example, "GET"). image) may be displayed on the image display device 23.
Then, when the medal acquisition number image display process is executed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Further, when the process proceeds to step S414, the sub control board 80 executes a press order image deletion process. This process is a process for erasing the press order image from the image display device 23.
When the result in step S403 is "No" and the process proceeds to step S414, the sub-control board 80 displays the first stop push order instruction images (push order number image "1", push order number image "2", push order number image “3” and the corresponding press order background images) are deleted from the image display device 23.
Further, when the result in step S407 is "No" and the process proceeds to step S414, the sub-control board 80 displays the second stop push order instruction image (push order number image "2", push order number image "3", and (corresponding to the press order background image) is deleted from the image display device 23.
Then, when the press order image deletion process is executed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the text image display process when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated in step S430 of FIG. 172.
When starting the text image display process when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated in step S430, the sub-control board 80 first displays the left side (above the left reel 31) and the center (above the left reel 31) of the image display device 23 in step S431. Processing is executed to display the "!" image on the upper part of the middle reel 31) and the right side (above the right reel 31).
When the small winning combination I condition device (watermelon) is activated, the symbol combination ("watermelon" - "watermelon" - "watermelon") corresponding to the small winning combination 82 is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the order of pressing. For this reason, it is not necessary to display the push order image, but as mentioned above, when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated, the AT lottery is held, so in order to increase players' expectations for the AT lottery, the image A "!" image is displayed at a position corresponding to the upper part of each reel 31 on the display device 23.
After executing the process of step S431, the process advances to the next step S432.

Proceeding to step S432, the sub-control board 80 determines whether a first stop operation (first operation of the stop switch 42) has been performed.
When it is determined that the first stop operation has been performed, the process advances to step S433, and when it is determined that the first stop operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S432 again.
Proceeding to step S433, the sub-control board 80 causes the background image of the "!" image displayed above the first stop reel 31 (the reel 31 corresponding to the first operated stop switch 42) to sparkle (shine). By displaying such an image, the "!" image displayed above the first stop reel 31 is emphasized.
Further, when a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the start of the process in step S433 (the start of displaying an image that emphasizes the "!" image above the first stop reel 31), the first stop reel 31 Stop displaying (delete) the "!" image above.
After executing the process of step S433, the process advances to the next step S434.

Proceeding to step S434, the sub-control board 80 determines whether a second stop operation (operation of the second stop switch 42) has been performed.
When it is determined that the second stop operation has been performed, the process advances to step S435, and when it is determined that the second stop operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S434 again.
Proceeding to step S435, the sub control board 80 causes the background image of the "!" image displayed above the second stop reel 31 (reel 31 corresponding to the second operated stop switch 42) to sparkle (shine). ) is displayed to emphasize the "!" image displayed above the second stop reel 31.
Further, when a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the start of the process in step S435 (the start of displaying an image that emphasizes the "!" image above the second stop reel 31), the second stop reel 31 Stop displaying (delete) the "!" image above.
After executing the process of step S435, the process advances to the next step S436.

Proceeding to step S436, the sub-control board 80 determines whether a third stop operation (operation of the third stop switch 42) has been performed.
When it is determined that the third stop operation has been performed, the process advances to step S437, and when it is determined that the third stop operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S436 again.
Proceeding to step S437, the sub control board 80 causes the background image of the "!" image displayed above the third stop reel 31 (reel 31 corresponding to the third operated stop switch 42) to sparkle (shine ) is displayed to emphasize the "!" image displayed above the third stop reel 31.
Further, when a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the start of the process in step S437 (the start of displaying an image that emphasizes the "!" image above the third stop reel 31), the third stop reel 31 Stop displaying (delete) the "!" image above.
After executing the process in step S437, the process advances to the next step S438.

Proceeding to step S438, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the medal payout process has started.
When it is determined that the medal payout process has started, the process advances to step S439, and when it is determined that the medal payout process has not started, the process returns to step S438.
Proceeding to step S439, the sub-control board 80 executes a medal acquisition number image display process. This process is a process of displaying an image (a medal acquisition number image) indicating the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals acquired) on the image display device 23.
Specifically, for example, when a winning combination that results in a payout of 3 medals is won and a payout process for 3 medals is executed, the sub-control board 80 displays "3" medals as the medal acquisition number image. An image of "GET3" indicating that a payout will be made is displayed on the image display device 23.
Note that, as described above, the display of the medal acquisition number image ends (is erased) after a predetermined time (for example, "0.5" seconds) has elapsed from the start of display.
In addition, in step S439, instead of an image (medal acquisition number image) indicating the number of medals to be paid out (number of acquired medals), an image indicating that medals are to be paid out (medals have been acquired) (medal acquisition image/for example, "GET") image) may be displayed on the image display device 23.
Then, when the medal acquisition number image display process is executed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the processing in the main control board 50 when the power is turned off (when the power supply is cut off) and when the power is restored (when the power supply is resumed) will be described.
A voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) (not shown) is provided on the main control board 50. When this voltage monitoring device detects that the power supply voltage has fallen below the power-off detection level, a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51 (FIG. 1).
Further, the main control board 50 detects whether or not a power-off detection signal is input in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) executed every 2.235 ms. When the input of the power-off detection signal is detected in two consecutive interrupts, the power-off process (step S2771 in FIG. 47, FIG. 48) is executed in the next interrupt process.

Furthermore, in the power-off process (FIG. 48), the main control board 50 saves various registers to the stack area of the RWM 53 (step S2772 in FIG. 48).
Furthermore, in the power-off process (FIG. 48), the main control board 50 turns off the output of all output ports 52 (FIG. 1) (step S2773 in FIG. 48). As a result, for example, when the motor 32 (FIG. 1) is being driven (while the reel 31 is rotating) or the hopper motor 36 (FIG. 1) is being driven (while medals are being paid out), the drive is stopped. Stop.
Furthermore, in the power-off process (FIG. 48), the main control board 50 stores (saves) the stack pointer at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 (step S2774 in FIG. 48).
In addition, in the power-off process (FIG. 48), the main control board 50 calculates a checksum of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, and calculates RWM checksum data (complement data) that becomes "0" when added to the calculated checksum. Then, the calculated RWM checksum data is stored (saved) at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 (step S2776 in FIG. 48, FIG. 49).

Further, the main control board 50 is configured to maintain (retain) the data stored in the RWM 53 even when the power supply is cut off (during a power outage).
Then, when the power supply is resumed (the power is turned on, the power is turned on, the power is restored from a power-off), the main control means 50 performs a program start process (FIG. 41) and a power recovery process ( Step S2721 in FIG. 41 (FIG. 42) is executed.
In addition, in the program start process (FIG. 41), the main control board 50 calculates the checksum of the RWM 53 in the same range as that at the power-off process, and stores (saves) the calculated checksum at the time of the power-off process. The added RWM checksum data is added to determine whether it becomes "0" or not. When it is "0", it is determined that the data in the RWM 53 is normal, and when it is not "0", it is determined that the data in the RWM 53 is not normal (abnormal) (step S2703 in FIG. 41).
Furthermore, in the power recovery process (FIG. 42), the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer stored (saved) during the power-off process (step S2722 in FIG. 42).
In this way, the main control board 50 maintains (holds) the data stored in the RWM 53 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, the data in the RWM 53 is normal (power outage is interrupted). It is determined whether the data in the RWM 53 is the same before and after. When it is determined that the data in the RWM 53 is normal, the stack pointer stored (saved) at the time of power-off processing is restored. As a result, when the power supply is restarted, the state is restored to the state when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred).

Here, when the power supply is cut off while the reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed (power cutoff occurs), and then the power supply is restarted, the following occurs.
As described above, when a power outage is detected in the interrupt process, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off, and therefore the drive signal for the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is also turned off. As a result, the driving of the motor 32 is stopped, so the rotating reel 31 is also stopped.
Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state returns to the state at the time of power-off detection. As a result, the same drive signal for the motor 32 is output from the output port 52 as at the time of power-off detection. Here, the drive signal for the motor 32 at the time of power failure detection is a signal that maintains a constant speed state. However, even if a constant speed drive signal is output from the beginning to the stopped motor 32, the motor 32 cannot be driven because its rotational torque is weak.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the reel sensor 33 (FIG. 1) does not detect the index of the reel 31 (the index does not cut the reel sensor 33).
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 determines that the reel sensor 33 does not detect the index for a certain period of time despite outputting a drive signal that drives the motor 32 at a constant speed, the reel 31 rotates. It is determined that the motor 32 has not been accelerated, and the acceleration process of the motor 32 is executed. Thereby, the rotation of the reel 31 can be restarted, and the speed can be returned to a constant speed state.
Therefore, for example, if the power supply is cut off while all "3" reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, and then the power supply is restarted, all "3" reels 31 will be rotating at a constant speed. It can be returned to a rotating state.
Further, for example, when the left reel 31 stops, the power supply is cut off while the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating at a constant speed, and then the power supply is restarted, the left reel 31 stops. The middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 can be returned to a state in which they rotate at a constant speed.

Next, the processing in the sub-control board 80 when the power is turned off (when the power supply is cut off) and when the power is restored (when the power supply is resumed) will be described.
Similarly to the main control board 50, a voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) (not shown) is provided on the sub-control board 80 as well. When this voltage monitoring device detects that the power supply voltage has fallen below the power-off detection level, a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 81 (FIG. 1).
Further, the sub-control board 80 detects whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input in an interrupt process (not shown) executed every 1 ms. When it is detected that the power-off detection signal has been input, the power-off process shown in FIG. 176 is executed.

Figure 176 is a flowchart showing the power-off processing in the sub-control board 80.
176 starts, the sub-control board 80 calculates a checksum for a predetermined range of the RWM 83 in step S481, and then stores (saves) the calculated checksum in a predetermined address of the RWM 83 in the next step S482. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Furthermore, like the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 is configured to maintain (retain) the data stored in the RWM 83 even when the power supply is cut off (during a power outage).
Then, when the power supply is resumed (the power is turned on, the power is supplied, or the power is restored from a power outage), the sub-control board 80 executes the power restoration process shown in FIG. 175.

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing power restoration processing in the sub-control board 80.
When the power recovery process in the sub control board 80 shown in FIG. 175 is started, the sub control board 80 calculates a checksum in a predetermined range of the RWM 83 (the same range as in the power cut process) in step S471, and performs the next step. Proceeding to S472, the checksum calculated in step S471 is compared with the checksum calculated and stored (saved) during the power-off process.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step S473, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether the checksum calculated in step S471 matches the checksum calculated and stored (saved) during the power-off process. Here, when it is determined that both checksums match, the process advances to step S474, and when it is determined that both checksums do not match, the process advances to step S477.
Proceeding to step S474, the sub control board 80 searches the data stored in the RWM 83 for the process that was being executed when the power outage was detected, and in the next step S475, the sub control board 80 searches for the process that was being executed when the power outage was detected. Determine whether the power has been cut off (a power outage has occurred). If "Yes" in step S475, the process advances to step S476, and if "No" in step S475, the process advances to step S478.

Proceeding to step S476, the sub-control board 80 resumes the text image display process from the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Proceeding to step S477, the sub control board 80 clears the RWM 83. Then, the process advances to step S478.
Proceeding to step S478, the sub control board 80 restarts the text image display process from the beginning (first address). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In this way, like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 also maintains (retains) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, It is determined whether the data in the RWM 83 is normal (the data in the RWM 83 is the same before and after the power is turned off). When it is determined that the data in the RWM 83 is normal, the text image display process is restarted from the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). As a result, when the power supply is restarted, the state is restored to the state when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred).

FIG. 177 shows a press order image (text image) when the correct press order is notified when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the notified press order. It is a figure which shows the example of a display. In FIG. 177, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8).
(1) in FIG. 177 shows that at the start of the game (start switch 41 is operated, winning number "1" is won, and after the small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) is activated, which The figure shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before the stop switch 42 is also operated, and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.
When the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, the first stop switch 42 to be operated is the left stop switch 42, the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and 3 The stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 displays the push order number image "1" on the left side of the image display device 23 (above the left reel 31), and displays the push order number image "2" in the center (above the middle reel 31). is displayed, and a press order number image "3" is displayed on the right side (above the right reel 31).

Furthermore, at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined, but before any stop switch 42 is operated), the sub-control board 80 displays the push order number image "1". , is displayed on the image display device 23 in a larger size than the press order number image "2" and the press order number image "3". That is, the first stop push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23. This emphasizes that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the left stop switch 42.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs from the speaker 22 a sound effect of "left" indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42. This prompts the left stop switch 42 to be operated.

When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 177 (first left stop), the first stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (2) in FIG. 177 is reached.
(2) in FIG. 177 shows the state of the image display device 23 at the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). The display contents are shown, and a display example of the first stop press order matching image is shown.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time (left first stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the left stop switch 42 was operated first and the first stop press order matched (emphasized).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (3) in FIG. 177 is reached.

(3) in FIG. 177 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating. 23, and shows a display example of the second stop/press order instruction image.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), a first stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "1" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "1" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Furthermore, in response to the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the second stop push order instruction image (an image in which the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3") is displayed. will be started. This emphasizes that the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.

As described above, it can be made to appear as if the display of the first stop/push order matching image is started and then ends (erased), and then the display of the second stop/push order instruction image is started.
In addition, after the display of the first stop press order matching image starts, the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the first stop press order matching image ends (is erased). You can also make it look like this.
Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the first stop press order matching image starts, the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the first stop press order matching image ends (is erased). ) can also be made to look like this.
Furthermore, the display of the first stop press order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the first stop press order matching image is finished (erased), the display of the second stop press order instruction image is started. You can also make it look like this.
Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the sub-control board 80 displays "Middle" indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is the middle stop switch 42. The sound effect is output from the speaker 22. This prompts the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.

When the middle stop switch 42 is operated second in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 177 (second middle stop), the second stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (4) in FIG. 177 occurs.
(4) in FIG. 177 shows the image display device 23 at the second middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated second and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 stops). This shows a display example of the second stop press order matching image.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the second time (second middle stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the middle stop switch 42 was operated second and the order of pressing the second stop matches (emphasized).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the state shown in (5) in FIG. 177 is reached.

(5) in FIG. 177 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. 23, and shows a display example of the third stop push order instruction image.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), a second stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "2" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "2" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Furthermore, in response to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), display of a third stop push order instruction image (an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before) is started. This emphasizes that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the right stop switch 42.

As described above, it can be made to appear as if the display of the second stop/push order matching image is started and then ends (erased), and then the display of the third stop/push order instruction image is started.
In addition, after the display of the second stop press order matching image starts, the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the second stop press order matching image ends (is erased). You can also make it look like this.
Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the second stop push order matching image starts, the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the second stop push order matching image ends (is erased). ) can also be made to look like this.
Furthermore, the display of the second stop press order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the second stop press order matching image is finished (erased), the display of the third stop press order instruction image is started. You can also make it look like this.
Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the sub-control board 80 displays "Right" indicating that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42. The sound effect is output from the speaker 22. This prompts the user to operate the right stop switch 42.

When the right stop switch 42 is operated third in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 177 (right third stop), the order of pressing the third stop matches, and the state shown in (6) in FIG. 177 is reached.
(6) in FIG. 177 shows the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). , and shows a display example of the third stop press order matching image.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly (right third stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "3" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the right stop switch 42 was operated third and that the third stop press order matches (emphasized).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the state shown in (7) in FIG. 177 is reached.

(7) in FIG. 177 shows an image display in a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), all reels 31 have stopped, and before the medal payout process is started. The display contents of the device 23 are shown.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), a third stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "3" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "3" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 177 is reached.
(8) in FIG. 177 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 after the start of the medal payout process.
When the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 an image of "GET10" indicating that "10" medals will be paid out.
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 177, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the "GET10" image is erased from the image display device 23. After that, the game enters a standby state.

FIG. 178 shows the order in which the correct answer is pressed when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display of a press order image (text image) when the press order does not match the stop press order. FIG. In FIG. 178, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8).
(1) in FIG. 178 shows that at the start of the game (start switch 41 is operated, winning number "1" is won, and after the small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) is activated, which This shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before the stop switch 42 is also operated, and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.

The display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 178 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 177.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect of "Left" to the speaker indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42 (prompting operation of the left stop switch 42). Output from 22. This point is also similar to (1) in FIG. 177.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 178 (first middle stop), the order in which the first stops are pressed does not match, resulting in the state shown in (2) in FIG. 178.
(2) in FIG. 178 shows the state of the image display device 23 at the first stop of the middle reel (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 is stopped). Indicates the displayed content.

When the small win A1 condition device (left, middle, right correct bell 1) during AT is activated and the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time (middle first stop), the first stop push order is inconsistent, and the sub-control board 80 erases all of the push order number images "1", "push order number image "2", "push order number image "3", and the corresponding push order background images from the image display device 23.
In addition, when the button press order is inconsistent, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect specific to when the button press order is inconsistent (for example, a sound effect such as "What are you doing?") from the speaker 22.
After that, when the center reel 31 stops, the state shown in (3) in Figure 178 is reached.
(3) in Figure 178 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the center reel 31 is stopped and the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are spinning.
Even when the center reel 31 is stopped and the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are spinning, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (it remains hidden).
When the left stop switch 42 is operated second (left second stop) in the state shown in FIG. 178(3), the state shown in FIG. 178(4) is reached.

(4) in Figure 178 shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the time of the second left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated secondly and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops).
When the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the sub-control board 80 also does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
After that, when the left reel 31 stops, the state shown in (5) in Figure 178 appears.
(5) in Figure 178 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are stopped and the right reel 31 is spinning.
Even when the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are stopped and the right reel 31 is spinning, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (it remains hidden).
When the right stop switch 42 is operated third (right third stop) in the state shown in FIG. 178 (5), the state shown in FIG. 178 (6) is reached.

(6) in FIG. 178 shows the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
Even when the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, when the right reel 31 stops, the state shown in (7) in FIG. 178 is reached.
(7) in FIG. 178 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when all the reels 31 are stopped.
Even when all the reels 31 are stopped, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, the game enters a standby state as shown in (8) in FIG. 178.

FIG. 179 shows a press order image (text image) when the correct press order is notified when the small winning combination D1 condition device (middle right left correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the notified press order. It is a figure showing an example of a display. In FIG. 179, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8).
(1) in FIG. 179 shows that at the start of the game (start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "7" is won, and after the small role D1 condition device (middle, right, left, correct answer bell) is activated, any stop switch is activated. 42 also shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before being operated), and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.

When the small role D1 condition device (middle right left correct answer bell 1) is activated, the first stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42, and the third The stop switch 42 to be operated is the left stop switch 42. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 displays the push order number image "1" in the center of the image display device 23 (above the middle reel 31), and displays the push order number image "2" on the right side (above the right reel 31). is displayed, and a press order number image "3" is displayed on the left side (above the left reel 31).
Furthermore, at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined, but before any stop switch 42 is operated), the sub-control board 80 displays the push order number image "1". , is displayed on the image display device 23 in a larger size than the press order number image "2" and the press order number image "3". That is, the first stop push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23. This emphasizes that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the middle stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs a "middle" sound effect from the speaker 22 indicating that the first stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and Encourage operation.

When the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 179 (first middle stop), the first stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (2) in FIG. 179 is reached.
(2) in FIG. 179 shows the state of the image display device 23 at the first stop of the middle reel (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 stops). The display contents are shown, and a display example of the first stop press order matching image is shown.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time (first middle stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the middle stop switch 42 was operated first and the first stop press order matched (emphasized).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (3) in FIG. 179 is reached.

(3) in FIG. 179 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the middle reel 31 has stopped, and the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are rotating. 23, and shows a display example of the second stop/press order instruction image.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (first stop operation), a first stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "1" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "1" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Furthermore, in response to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the second stop push order instruction image (an image in which the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3") is displayed. Begins. This emphasizes that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is the right stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the right stop switch 42.

As described above, it can be made to appear as if the display of the first stop/push order matching image is started and then ends (erased), and then the display of the second stop/push order instruction image is started.
In addition, after the display of the first stop press order matching image starts, the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the first stop press order matching image ends (is erased). You can also make it look like this.
Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the first stop push order matching image starts, the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the first stop push order matching image ends (is erased). ) can also be made to look like this.
Furthermore, the display of the first stop press order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the first stop press order matching image is finished (erased), the display of the second stop press order instruction image is started. You can also make it look like this.
Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the sub-control board 80 displays "Right" indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is the right stop switch 42. A sound effect is output from the speaker 22 to prompt the user to operate the right stop switch 42.

When the right stop switch 42 is operated second in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 179 (second right stop), the second stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (4) in FIG. 179 is reached.
(4) in FIG. 179 shows the image display device 23 at the second right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated second and stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). , and shows an example of the display of the second stop press order matching image.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated for the second time (second right stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the right stop switch 42 was operated second and that the second stop press order matches (emphasized).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the state shown in (5) in FIG. 179 is reached.

(5) in FIG. 179 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 have stopped, and the left reel 31 is rotating. 23, and shows a display example of the third stop push order instruction image.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (second stop operation), a second stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "2" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "2" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Further, in response to the operation of the right stop switch 42 (second stop operation), display of a third stop push order instruction image (an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before) is started. This emphasizes that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the left stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the left stop switch 42.

As described above, it can be made to appear as if the display of the second stop/push order matching image is started and then ends (erased), and then the display of the third stop/push order instruction image is started.
In addition, after the display of the second stop press order matching image starts, the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the second stop press order matching image ends (is erased). You can also make it look like this.
Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the second stop push order matching image starts, the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the second stop push order matching image ends (is erased). ) can also be made to look like this.
Furthermore, the display of the second stop press order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the second stop press order matching image is finished (erased), the display of the third stop press order instruction image is started. You can also make it look like this.
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the sub-control board 80 displays "Left" indicating that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the left stop switch 42. A sound effect is output from the speaker 22 to prompt the user to operate the left stop switch 42.

When the left stop switch 42 is operated third in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 179 (left third stop), the order of pressing the third stop matches, and the state shown in (6) in FIG. 179 is reached.
(6) in FIG. 179 shows the image display device 23 at the third left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). , and shows a display example of the third stop press order matching image.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated thirdly (left third stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "3" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the left stop switch 42 was operated third and that the third stop press order matches (emphasized).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the state shown in (7) in FIG. 179 is reached.

(7) in FIG. 179 shows the image display device in a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (third stop operation), all reels 31 have stopped, and the medal payout process has not started. 23 shows the display contents.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (third stop operation), a third stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "3" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "3" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 179 is reached.
(8) in FIG. 179 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 after the start of the medal payout process.
When the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 an image of "GET10" indicating that "10" medals will be paid out.
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 179, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the display of the "GET10" image ends (is erased). After that, the game enters a standby state.

Figure 180 shows an example of a push order image (text image) displayed when the correct push order is notified when the small win D1 condition device (middle right left correct bell 1) during AT is activated, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (matching the first stop push order), but a different stop switch 42 from the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second (mismatching the second stop push order). In Figure 180, the chronological order is (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8).
In Figure 180, (1) shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "7" is won, and the small prize D1 condition device (middle right left correct bell) is activated, but before any of the stop switches 42 are operated), and shows an example of the display of the first stop press order instruction image.

The display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 180(1) are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 179(1).
In addition, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs the sound effect "It's in the middle" from the speaker 22, which indicates that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the middle stop switch 42. This point is also the same as (1) in FIG.
When the middle stop switch 42 is first operated (middle first stop) in the state shown in (1) in Figure 180, the first stop press sequence matches, and the state shown in (2) in Figure 180 occurs.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 180(2) are the same as those of the image display device 23 in FIG. 179(2).
After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (3) in FIG. 180 is reached.

(3) in FIG. 180 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the middle reel 31 has stopped, and the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are rotating. 23, and shows a display example of the second stop/press order instruction image.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 180 is also the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 179.
Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the sub-control board 80 displays "Right" indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is the right stop switch 42. The sound effect is output from the speaker 22. This point is also similar to (3) in FIG. 179.
If the left stop switch 42 is operated second in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 180 (second left stop), the order of pressing the second stops will not match, resulting in the state shown in (4) in FIG. 180.
(4) in FIG. 180 shows the image display device 23 at the second left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated second and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.

When the left stop switch 42 is operated second when the small role D1 condition device (center right left correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, the second stop press order does not match, and the sub control board 80 displays the press order number image "2'', the press order number image ``3'', and the corresponding press order background images are all erased from the image display device 23.
Further, when the pressing order does not match, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect specific to the pressing order mismatching from the speaker 22.
Thereafter, when the left reel 31 stops, the state shown in (5) in FIG. 180 is reached.
(5) in FIG. 180 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state where the left reel 31 is stopped and the right reel 31 is rotating.
Even when the left reel 31 is stopped and the right reel 31 is rotating, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
When the right stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 180, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 180 is reached.

(6) in FIG. 180 shows the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
Even when the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, when the right reel 31 stops, the state shown in (7) in FIG. 180 is reached.
(7) in FIG. 180 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when all the reels 31 are stopped.
Even when all the reels 31 are stopped, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, a game standby time shown in (8) in FIG. 180 occurs.

FIG. 181 shows that after the correct press order is notified when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, the power supply is cut off without any stop switch 42 being operated (power cut off). FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display of a press order image (text image) when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is restarted. In FIG. 181, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8).
(1) in Fig. 181 shows that at the start of the game (start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "1" is won, and after the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, which The figure shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before the stop switch 42 is also operated, and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 181 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 177.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs from the speaker 22 a sound effect of "left" indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42. This point is also similar to (1) in FIG. 177.

In the state shown in (1) in FIG. 181, if the power supply is cut off without any stop switch 42 being operated (power cutoff occurs), the state shown in (2) in FIG. 181 occurs.
(2) in FIG. 181 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during a power outage).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off, and the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel are stopped.
Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state shown in (3) in FIG. 181 is reached.
(3) in FIG. 181 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
As described above, the sub-control board 80 maintains (retains) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, the data in the RWM 83 is returned to normal (power It is determined whether the data in the RWM 83 is the same before and after the disconnection. When it is determined that the data in the RWM 83 is normal, the text image display process is restarted from the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). Thereby, when the power supply is resumed, the state is restored to the state when the power supply was cut off.

As a result, the display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 181(3) become the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 181(1).
That is, the sub-control board 80 displays the push order number image "1" on the left side of the image display device 23 (above the left reel 31), displays the push order number image "2" in the center (above the middle reel 31), and displays the push order number image "3" on the right side (above the right reel 31). The sub-control board 80 also displays the push order number image "1" larger than the push order number images "2" and "3" on the image display device 23. That is, the first stop push order instruction image is displayed again on the image display device 23. This emphasizes that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is the left stop switch 42, and encourages the operation of the left stop switch 42.
However, in the state shown in (3) in Figure 181, the sub-control board 80 does not output from the speaker 22 the sound effect "It's left" indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42 (prompting the operation of the left stop switch 42).
The sub-control board 80 maintains (holds) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, restores the state when the power supply was interrupted. However, for sounds that are output in one shot from the speaker 22, such as the "left" sound effect, data indicating that this should be output is not stored in the RWM 83.
For this reason, when the power supply is resumed, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 the same image as when the power supply was cut off, but does not output from the speaker 22 the sound effect "It's left" which indicates that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is the left stop switch 42 (prompting the operation of the left stop switch 42).

Note that regarding the BGM output from the speaker 22, data indicating that this is to be output is stored in the RWM 83. Therefore, when the power supply is restarted, the speaker 22 outputs the same BGM that was being output when the power supply was cut off.
However, data indicating the playback position of BGM is not stored in the RWM 83. Therefore, when the power supply is restarted, the same BGM that was being output when the power supply was cut off is output from the speaker 22, but from the playback position from when the power supply was cut off. Instead of playing BGM, play BGM from the beginning (beginning).
Further, regarding the background effect (background moving image and background still image) to be displayed on the image display device 23, data indicating that this is to be displayed is stored in the RWM 83. Therefore, when the power supply is resumed, the image display device 23 displays the same background effect as that displayed when the power supply was cut off.
However, data indicating the playback position of the background video is not stored in the RWM 83. Therefore, when the power supply is resumed, the image display device 23 displays the same background video as the one that was displayed when the power supply was cut off, but when the power supply is cut off, Instead of playing the background video from the playback position, play the background video from the beginning (beginning).

In addition, in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 181, the main control board 50 accelerates the motors 32 corresponding to the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31. The rotation of the reel 31 and the right reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31 are returned to a state in which they rotate at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (1) in FIG. 181.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 181 (first left stop), the first stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (4) in FIG. 181 is reached.
(4) in FIG. 181 shows the state of the image display device 23 at the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). The display contents are shown, and a display example of the first stop press order matching image is shown.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time (left first stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the left stop switch 42 was operated first and the first stop press order matched (emphasized).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (5) in FIG. 181 is reached.

(5) in FIG. 181 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating. 23, and shows a display example of the second stop/press order instruction image.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), a first stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "1" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "1" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Furthermore, in response to the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the second stop push order instruction image (an image in which the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3") is displayed. Begins. This emphasizes that the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.

As described above, it can be made to appear as if the display of the first stop/push order matching image is started and then ends (erased), and then the display of the second stop/push order instruction image is started.
In addition, after the display of the first stop press order matching image starts, the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the first stop press order matching image ends (is erased). You can also make it look like this.
Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the first stop push order matching image starts, the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the first stop push order matching image ends (is erased). ) can also be made to look like this.
Furthermore, the display of the first stop press order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the first stop press order matching image is finished (erased), the display of the second stop press order instruction image is started. You can also make it look like this.
Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the sub-control board 80 displays "Middle" indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is the middle stop switch 42. A sound effect is output from the speaker 22 to prompt the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.

Then, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated second (middle second stop) in the state shown in (5) in Figure 181, the second stop press sequence matches, and the state shown in (6) in Figure 181 occurs.
(6) in Figure 181 shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the time of the second middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated second time and stop control of the middle reel 31 is started and before the middle reel 31 stops), and shows an example of the display of the second stop push order matching image.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated second (middle second stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" sparkles (glows), thereby indicating (emphasizing) that the middle stop switch 42 was operated second and that the second stop push order has been matched.
After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the state shown in (7) in FIG. 181 is reached.

(7) in FIG. 181 shows the image display device in a state where the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped and the right reel 31 is rotating after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation). 23, and shows a display example of the third stop push order instruction image.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), a second stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "2" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "2" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Furthermore, in response to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), display of a third stop push order instruction image (an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before) is started. This emphasizes that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the right stop switch 42.

As described above, it can be made to appear as if the display of the second stop/push order matching image is started and then ends (erased), and then the display of the third stop/push order instruction image is started.
In addition, after the display of the second stop press order matching image starts, the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the second stop press order matching image ends (is erased). You can also make it look like this.
Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the second stop push order matching image starts, the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the second stop push order matching image ends (is erased). ) can also be made to look like this.
Furthermore, the display of the second stop press order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the second stop press order matching image is finished (erased), the display of the third stop push order instruction image is started. You can also make it look like this.
Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the sub-control board 80 displays "Right" indicating that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42. A sound effect is output from the speaker 22 to prompt the user to operate the right stop switch 42.

When the right stop switch 42 is operated third in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 181 (right third stop), the order of pressing the third stop matches, and the state shown in (8) in FIG. 181 is reached.
(8) in FIG. 181 shows the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). This shows a display example of the third stop press order matching image.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly (right third stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "3" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the right stop switch 42 was operated third and that the third stop press order matches (emphasized).
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 181, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the press order number image "3" and the corresponding press order background image are displayed on the image display device. It will be deleted from 23. After that, when the medal payout process is started, the image "GET10" indicating that "10" medals will be paid out is displayed, and when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the "GET10" image is displayed. The image will be deleted. After that, the game enters a standby state.

As described above with reference to FIG. 181, when the small win A1 condition device (left center right correct bell 1) to the small win F2 condition device (right center left correct bell 2) during the AT are activated (when the push order bell is won), an image emphasizing the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is displayed, and a sound effect indicating the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is output. After that, when the power supply is cut off without any stop switch 42 being operated and the power supply is resumed, an image emphasizing the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is displayed again, but a sound effect indicating the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is not output.
When the power supply is resumed, the image emphasizing the stop switch 42 which should be operated first is displayed again, thereby once again informing the player which stop switch 42 should be operated first and allowing the player to correctly understand the progress of the game.
In addition, when the power supply is resumed, the processing load on the sub-CPU 85 can be reduced by not outputting a sound effect indicating the stop switch 42 that should be operated first, and accordingly, an image emphasizing the stop switch 42 that should be operated first can be quickly displayed.

FIG. 182 shows the order in which the correct answer is pressed when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 that is different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (the first 1), the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch 42 being operated (second stop operation) (a power outage occurs), and then the power supply is resumed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display example of a press order image (text image) when the button is pressed. In FIG. 182, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8).
(1) in Fig. 182 shows that at the start of the game (the start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "1" is won, and the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, The figure shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before the stop switch 42 is also operated, and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 182 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 177.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect of "Left" to the speaker indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42 (prompting operation of the left stop switch 42). Output from 22. This point is also similar to (1) in FIG. 177.

When the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 182 (first middle stop), the order in which the first stops are pressed does not match, resulting in the state shown in (2) in FIG. 182.
(2) in FIG. 182 shows the state of the image display device 23 at the first stop of the middle reel (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 stops). Indicates the displayed content.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated first (middle 1st stop) when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, the first stop push order will be inconsistent, and the sub control board 80 will: The press order number image "1", the press order number image "2", the press order number image "3", and the corresponding press order background images are all erased from the image display device 23.
Further, when the pressing order does not match, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect specific to the pressing order mismatching from the speaker 22.
After that, when the power supply is cut off (power cutoff occurs), the state shown in (3) in FIG. 182 occurs.
(3) in FIG. 182 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during power interruption).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off, and the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel are stopped.
Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state shown in (4) in FIG. 182 is reached.

(4) in FIG. 182 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
As described above, the sub-control board 80 maintains (retains) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, Return to the state it was in when the power was cut off.
As a result, the display content of the image display device 23 in (4) in FIG. 182 becomes the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 182. That is, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
However, in the state shown in (4) in FIG. 182, the sub-control board 80 does not output from the speaker 22 the sound effect specific to when the order of pressing does not match.
The sub-control board 80 maintains (retains) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, it However, the RWM 83 does not store data indicating that a sound effect specific to when the pressing order does not match is to be output.
Therefore, when the power supply is resumed, the sub-control board 80 displays the same image on the image display device 23 as when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred), but the order of presses does not match. Time-specific sound effects are not output from the speaker 22.

In addition, in the state shown in (4) in FIG. 182, the main control board 50 accelerates the motors 32 corresponding to the left reel 31 and the right reel 31, so that the middle reel 31 remains stopped and the left Rotation of the reel 31 and the right reel 31 is restarted.
As a result, as shown in (5) in FIG. 182, the middle reel 31 stops, and the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 enter a state in which they are rotating at a constant speed.
In the state shown in (5) in FIG. 182, the middle reel 31 is stopped, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating, and the push order image on the image display device 23 remains hidden.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 182, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 182 is achieved.
(6) in FIG. 182 shows the image display device 23 at the second left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated second and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
Even when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, when the left reel 31 stops, the state shown in (7) in FIG. 182 is reached.

(7) in FIG. 182 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state where the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped and the right reel 31 is rotating.
Even when the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 are stopped and the right reel 31 is rotating, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
When the right stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 182, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 182 is reached.
(8) in FIG. 182 shows the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
Even when the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
After that, although not shown in FIG. 182, when the right reel 31 stops, all the reels 31 come to a stopped state, and even in this state, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (hidden). leave it as is). After that, the game enters a standby state.

As explained above using FIG. 182, when the small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) to small role F2 condition device (right center left correct answer bell 2) during AT is activated (press order bell won) When a stop switch 42 that is different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated for the first time (when the first stop press order does not match), an image related to the stop switch 42 that should be operated first (pressing order number image "1"), the image related to the stop switch 42 to be operated second (press order number image "2"), and the image related to the stop switch 42 to be operated third (press order number image "3") are deleted. do.
After that, the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch 42 being operated (second stop operation), and when the power supply is restarted, an image related to the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed. , an image related to the stop switch 42 to be operated second, and an image related to the stop switch 42 to be operated third are not displayed.
Then, when the power supply is cut off after the first stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the notification, and then the power supply is restarted, an image regarding the push order of the stop switches 42 is not displayed. , it is possible to prevent the player from having the misunderstanding that the stop switches 42 were operated in the notified order of presses.
Furthermore, by the time the power supply is resumed, the pressing order has already been mismatched, so it is possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage even if the image regarding the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is not displayed. can.

Fig. 183 is a diagram showing an example of a push order image (text image) displayed when the small role A1 condition device (left, center, right correct bell 1) during AT is activated to notify the correct push order, the power supply is cut off (power outage occurs) before the medal payout process when the push order matches, and then the power supply is resumed. In Fig. 183, the chronological order is (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10).
In Figure 183, (1) shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "1" is won, and the small prize A1 condition device (left, center, right correct bell 1) is activated, but before any of the stop switches 42 are operated), and shows an example of the display of the first stop press order instruction image.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 183(1) are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 177(1).
In addition, at the start of a game, the sub-control board 80 outputs the sound effect "left" from the speaker 22 to indicate that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42 (to encourage the operation of the left stop switch 42). This point is also the same as (1) in FIG. 177.

When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 183 (first left stop), the first stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (2) in FIG. 183 is reached.
(2) in FIG. 183 shows the state of the image display device 23 at the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). The display contents are shown, and a display example of the first stop press order matching image is shown.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time (left first stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the left stop switch 42 was operated first and the first stop press order matched (emphasized). That is, the first stop press order matching image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (3) in FIG. 183 is reached.

(3) in FIG. 183 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating. 23, and shows a display example of the second stop/press order instruction image.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), a first stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "1" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "1" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
In addition, in response to the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the second stop push order instruction image (an image in which the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3") is displayed. Begins. This emphasizes that the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.

As described above, it can be made to appear as if the display of the first stop/push order matching image is started and then ends (erased), and then the display of the second stop/push order instruction image is started.
In addition, after the display of the first stop press order matching image starts, the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the first stop press order matching image ends (is erased). You can also make it look like this.
Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the first stop push order matching image starts, the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the first stop push order matching image ends (is erased). ) can also be made to look like this.
Furthermore, the display of the first stop press order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the first stop press order matching image is finished (erased), the display of the second stop press order instruction image is started. You can also make it look like this.
Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the sub-control board 80 displays "Middle" indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is the middle stop switch 42. A sound effect is output from the speaker 22 to prompt the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.

Then, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated second in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 183 (second middle stop), the second stop press order matches, and the state shown in (4) in FIG. 183 is reached. .
(4) in FIG. 183 shows the image display device 23 at the second middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated second and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 stops). This shows a display example of the second stop press order matching image.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the second time (second middle stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the middle stop switch 42 was operated second and the order of pressing the second stop matches (emphasized). That is, the second stop press order matching image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the state shown in (5) in FIG. 183 is reached.

(5) in FIG. 183 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. 23, and shows a display example of the third stop push order instruction image.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), a second stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "2" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "2" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Furthermore, in response to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), display of a third stop push order instruction image (an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before) is started. This emphasizes that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the right stop switch 42.

As described above, it can be made to appear as if the display of the second stop/push order matching image is started and then ends (erased), and then the display of the third stop/push order instruction image is started.
In addition, after the display of the second stop press order matching image starts, the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the second stop press order matching image ends (is erased). You can also make it look like this.
Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the second stop push order matching image starts, the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the second stop push order matching image ends (is erased). ) can also be made to look like this.
Furthermore, the display of the second stop press order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the second stop press order matching image is finished (erased), the display of the third stop press order instruction image is started. You can also make it look like this.
Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the sub-control board 80 displays "Right" indicating that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42. A sound effect is output from the speaker 22 to prompt the user to operate the right stop switch 42.

When the right stop switch 42 is operated third in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 183 (third right stop), the order of pressing the third stop matches, and the state shown in (6) in FIG. 183 is reached.
(6) in FIG. 183 shows the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). This shows a display example of the third stop press order matching image.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly (right third stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "3" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the right stop switch 42 was operated third and that the third stop press order matches (emphasized). That is, the third stop press order matching image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the state shown in (7) in FIG. 183 is reached.

(7) in Figure 183 shows the display content of the image display device 23 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), after all the reels 31 have stopped, and before the medal payout process is started.
When a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the display of the third stop push order matching image (an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "3" sparkles (shines)) ends (is erased). This ends (erases) the display of the push order number image "3" and the push order background image corresponding to it.
In the state shown in (7) in Figure 183, if the power supply is cut off (a power outage occurs) before the medal payout process is started, the state will become as shown in (8) in Figure 183.
(8) in FIG. 183 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (power outage).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off. Also, the left reel 31, the center reel 31, and the right reel remain stopped.

Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state shown in (9) in FIG. 183 is reached.
(9) in FIG. 183 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
The sub control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Further, the main control board 50 keeps the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel stopped.
Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, the state shown in (10) in FIG. 183 is reached.
(10) in FIG. 183 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 during the medal payout process.
When the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 an image of "GET10" indicating that "10" medals will be paid out.
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 183, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the display of the "GET10" image ends (is erased). After that, the game enters a standby state.

As explained above using FIG. 183, when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) during AT is activated (press order bell won) (time), an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed, and when the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated for the first time, an image indicating this is displayed and then erased.
Thereafter, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated second is displayed, and when the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second, an image indicating this is displayed and then erased.
Thereafter, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated third is displayed, and when the stop switch 42 to be operated third is operated third, an image indicating this is displayed and then erased.
After that, the power supply is cut off, and when the power supply is restarted, an image related to the stop switch 42 to be operated first, an image related to the stop switch 42 to be operated second, and an image related to the stop switch 42 to be operated third are displayed. An image related to the stop switch 42 is not displayed.
Then, when the power supply is cut off after the third correct answer and the power supply is restarted, the image regarding the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed is not displayed, so that the operation of the stop switches 42 is not required. It is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that this is the case.

In Fig. 184, when the small win A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, the correct pressing order is notified, and after the medal payout process when the pressing order matches, the power supply is cut off (power cutoff occurs). ), and is a diagram illustrating a display example of a press order image (text image) when power supply is resumed after that. In Figure 184, the time series is (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
Since the contents of (1) to (7) in FIG. 184 are the same as the contents of (1) to (7) in FIG. 183, the differences from FIG. 183 will be mainly explained below.
(7) in FIG. 184 shows the display content of the image display device 23 in a state after all the reels 31 have stopped and before the medal payout process is started.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), a third stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "3" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "3" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 184 is reached.

(8) in FIG. 184 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 during the medal payout process.
When the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 an image of "GET10" indicating that "10" medals will be paid out.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the display of the "GET10" image ends (is erased).
After that, when the power supply is cut off (power cutoff occurs), the state shown in (9) in FIG. 184 occurs.
(9) in FIG. 184 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during a power outage).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off. Furthermore, the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel remain stopped.
Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state shown in (10) in FIG. 184 is reached.
(10) in FIG. 184 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
The sub control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden). Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 does not display the image of "GET10" either.
Further, the main control board 50 keeps the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel stopped.
After that, the game enters a standby state.

As explained above using FIG. 184, when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) during AT is activated (press order bell won) When the pressing order matches from the first stop to the third stop and all reels 31 stop, all images related to the pressing order of the stop switches 42 are erased. Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, an image related to the medal payout is displayed, and when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the image related to the medal payout is deleted. After that, the power supply is cut off, and when the power supply is restarted, the image regarding the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed is not displayed. In addition, images related to medal payout are not displayed.
Then, when the power supply is cut off after the medal dispensing process is finished and then the power supply is restarted, the operation of the stop switches 42 is not required by not displaying an image regarding the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the situation is such that the player cannot play the game.

FIG. 185 shows an example of the display of the "!" image (text image) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the left, middle, right pressing order (pressing order) when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated during AT. It is a diagram. In FIG. 185, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8).
(1) in Fig. 185 indicates that at the start of the game (the start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "15" is won, and after the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated (Fig. 8), any stop The display contents of the image display device 23 are shown before the switch 42 is also operated.
As mentioned above, when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated, "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" are stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the order of pressing, so it is not necessary to display the image of the pressing order. However, when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated, an AT lottery is held. Therefore, in order to increase players' expectations for the AT lottery, the sub-control board 80 is configured such that at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined, any stop switch 42 is not operated). ! image is displayed at a position corresponding to the upper part of each reel 31 on the image display device 23.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 185, the state shown in (2) in FIG. 185 is reached.

(2) in FIG. 185 shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the time of the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 is stopped). It shows.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 causes the "!" background image (the image displayed as the background of the "!" image) corresponding to the "!" image on the left side to sparkle (shine). By displaying the image, it is shown (emphasized) that the left stop switch 42 has been operated.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (3) in FIG. 185 is reached.
(3) in FIG. 185 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating. 23 shows the display contents.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the left side stops displaying the shimmering (shining) image, and the "!" !” image and the corresponding “!” background image are deleted.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 185, the state shown in (4) in FIG. 185 is reached.

(4) in FIG. 185 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the time of the second middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 is stopped). It shows.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the center "!" image is sparkling (shining), and the middle stop switch 42 is operated. (emphasize)
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the state shown in (5) in FIG. 185 is reached.
(5) in FIG. 185 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. 23 shows the display contents.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the display of the "!" background image that corresponds to the "!" image in the center will stop sparkling (shining), and the "!" !” image and the corresponding “!” background image are deleted.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 185, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 185 is reached.

(6) in Figure 185 shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the time of the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops).
When the right stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 indicates (emphasizes) that the right stop switch 42 has been operated by displaying an image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the right side sparkles (glows).
Thereafter, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the state shown in (7) in FIG. 185 is reached.
(7) in Figure 185 shows the display content of the image display device 23 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), after all the reels 31 have stopped, and before the medal payout process is started.
When a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the display of the image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the right side sparkles (glows) ends, and the "!" image on the right side and the corresponding "!" background image are erased. As a result, all "!" images and "!" background images are erased from the image display device 23.
Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 185 is reached.
(8) in FIG. 185 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 during the medal payout process.
When the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of "GET 3" on the image display device 23, indicating that "3" medals will be paid out.
After that, although not shown in Figure 185, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the medal payout process, the display of the image "GET3" is terminated (erased), and the game goes into a standby state.

FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a display example of a "!" image (text image) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of middle, right, and left when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated during AT. In FIG. 186, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8).
(1) in Fig. 186 indicates that at the start of the game (start switch 41 is operated, winning number "15" is won, and after the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated (Fig. 8), any stop The display contents of the image display device 23 are shown before the switch 42 is also operated.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 186 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 185.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 186, the state shown in (2) in FIG. 186 is achieved.

(2) in FIG. 186 shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the time of the first middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 is stopped). It shows.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the center "!" image is sparkling (shining), and the middle stop switch 42 is operated. Indicate that something has been done (emphasize).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (3) in FIG. 186 is reached.
(3) in FIG. 186 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the middle reel 31 has stopped, and the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are rotating. 23 shows the display contents.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the center stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the display of the image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the center "!" image is shimmering (shining) ends, and the center "!" !” image and the corresponding “!” background image are deleted.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 186, the state shown in (4) in FIG. 186 is achieved.

(4) in FIG. 186 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 during the second right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 is stopped). It shows.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the right side is sparkling (shining), so that the right stop switch 42 is operated. (emphasize)
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the state shown in (5) in FIG. 186 is reached.
(5) in FIG. 186 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 have stopped, and the left reel 31 is rotating. 23 shows the display contents.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the right side stops displaying the shimmering (shining) image, and the "!" !” image and the corresponding “!” background image are deleted.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 186, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 186 is reached.

(6) in Figure 186 shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the time of the third left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops).
When the left stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 indicates (emphasizes) that the left stop switch 42 has been operated by displaying an image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the left side sparkles (glows).
Thereafter, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the state shown in (7) in FIG. 186 is reached.
(7) in Figure 186 shows the display content of the image display device 23 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (third stop operation), after all the reels 31 have stopped, and before the medal payout process is started.
When a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the display of the sparkling (shining) image of the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the left side ends, and the "!" image on the left side and the corresponding "!" background image are erased.
Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, the state shown in (8) in FIG.
(8) in FIG. 186 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 during the medal payout process.
When the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of "GET 3" on the image display device 23, indicating that "3" medals will be paid out.
After that, although not shown in Figure 186, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the medal payout process, the display of the image "GET3" is terminated (erased), and the game goes into a standby state.

FIG. 187 shows that when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated during AT, the power supply is cut off without any stop switch 42 being operated (power cutoff occurs), and then the power supply is restarted. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the "!" image (text image) of time. In Figure 187, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
(1) in Fig. 187 indicates that at the start of the game (the start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "15" is won, and the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated (Fig. 8), any stop The display contents of the image display device 23 are shown before the switch 42 is also operated.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 187 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 185.
In the state shown in (1) in FIG. 187, if the power supply is cut off without any stop switch 42 being operated (power cutoff occurs), the state shown in (2) in FIG. 187 occurs.
(2) in FIG. 187 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during a power outage).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off, and the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel are stopped.
Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state shown in (3) in FIG. 187 is reached.

(3) in FIG. 187 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
As described above, the sub-control board 80 maintains (retains) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, the data in the RWM 83 is returned to normal (power It is determined whether the data in the RWM 83 is the same before and after the disconnection. When it is determined that the data in the RWM 83 is normal, the text image display process is restarted from the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off. Thereby, when the power supply is resumed, the state is restored to the state when the power supply was cut off.
As a result, the display content of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 187 becomes the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 187.
That is, the sub-control board 80 displays the "!" image at a position corresponding to above each reel 31 on the image display device 23.
In addition, in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 187, the main control board 50 accelerates the motors 32 corresponding to the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31. Rotation of the reel 31 and the right reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31 are returned to a state in which they rotate at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (1) in FIG. 187.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 187, the state shown in (4) in FIG. 187 is achieved.

(4) in FIG. 187 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the time of the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). It shows.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (4) in FIG. 187 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 185.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (5) in FIG. 187 is reached.
(5) in FIG. 187 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating. 23 shows the display contents.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the left side stops displaying the shimmering (shining) image, and the "!" !” image and the corresponding “!” background image are deleted.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 187, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 187 is reached.

(6) in FIG. 187 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the time of the second middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 is stopped). It shows.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the center "!" image is sparkling (shining), and the middle stop switch 42 is operated. Indicate that something has been done (emphasize).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the state shown in (7) in FIG. 187 is reached.
(7) in FIG. 187 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. 23 shows the display contents.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the display of the image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the center "!" image is shimmering (shining) ends, and the center "!" !” image and the corresponding “!” background image are deleted.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 187, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 187 is reached.

(8) in FIG. 187 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). It shows.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the right side is sparkling (shining), so that the right stop switch 42 is operated. (emphasize)
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the state shown in (9) in FIG. 187 is reached.
(9) in FIG. 187 shows an image display in a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), all reels 31 have stopped, and before the medal payout process is started. The display contents of the device 23 are shown.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the display of the shimmering (shining) "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the right ends, and the "!" !” image and the corresponding “!” background image are deleted.
Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, the state shown in (10) in FIG. 187 is reached.
(10) in FIG. 187 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 during the medal payout process.
When the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 an image of "GET3" indicating that "3" medals will be paid out.
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 187, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the display of the "GET3" image ends (is erased). After that, the game enters a standby state.

As described above using FIG. 187, when the small win I condition device (watermelon) during the AT is activated, at the start of the game, an "!" image corresponding to each stop switch 42 is displayed. That is, an "!" image is displayed at a position above each reel 31 on the image display device 23. After that, the power supply is cut off without any stop switch 42 being operated, and then, when the power supply is resumed, an "!" image corresponding to each stop switch 42 is displayed again.
When the small win I condition device (SUIKA) is activated during the AT, the power supply is cut off without any of the stop switches 42 being operated, and when the power supply is subsequently resumed, the "!" images corresponding to each stop switch 42 are displayed again, thereby enabling the player to correctly understand the progress of the game.
In addition, when the small prize I condition device (SUIKA) is activated, the player is given the privilege of executing an AT lottery, so when the power supply is resumed, the "!" image is displayed again to maintain the player's anticipation for the AT lottery.

FIG. 188 shows that when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated during AT, the first stop switch 42 is operated and the reel 31 corresponding to the first operated stop switch 42 is stopped (first stop). The "!" image ( FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a text image (text image). In Figure 188, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
(1) in Fig. 188 indicates that at the start of the game (the start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "15" is won, and after the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated (Fig. 8), any stop The display contents of the image display device 23 are shown before the switch 42 is also operated.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 188 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 185.
(2) in FIG. 188 shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the time of the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). It shows.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 188 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 185.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (3) in FIG. 188 is reached.

(3) in FIG. 188 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating. 23 shows the display contents.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 188 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 185.
That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the left side stops displaying the shimmering (shining) image, and The "!" image and the corresponding "!" background image are deleted.
In the state shown in (3) in FIG. 188, if the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch 42 being operated (power interruption occurs), the state shown in (4) in FIG. 188 occurs.
(4) in FIG. 188 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during a power outage).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off, and the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel are stopped.
Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state shown in (5) in FIG. 188 is reached.

(5) in FIG. 188 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
As described above, the sub-control board 80 maintains (retains) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, the data in the RWM 83 is returned to normal (power It is determined whether the data in the RWM 83 is the same before and after the disconnection. When it is determined that the data in the RWM 83 is normal, the text image display process is restarted from the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off. Thereby, when the power supply is restarted, the state is restored to the state when the power supply was cut off.
As a result, the display content of the image display device 23 in (5) in FIG. 188 becomes the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 188.
In addition, in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 188, the main control board 50 accelerates the motors 32 corresponding to the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31, thereby keeping the left reel 31 stopped. Rotation of the reel 31 and the right reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31 stops, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 return to a state in which they rotate at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (3) in FIG. 188.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 188, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 188 is reached.

(6) in FIG. 188 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the time of the second middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 is stopped). It shows.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the center "!" image is sparkling (shining), and the middle stop switch 42 is operated. (emphasize)
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the state shown in (7) in FIG. 188 is reached.
(7) in FIG. 188 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. 23 shows the display contents.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the display of the image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the center "!" image is shimmering (shining) ends, and the center "!" !” image and the corresponding “!” background image are deleted.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 188, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 188 is reached.

(8) in FIG. 188 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). It shows.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the right side is sparkling (shining), so that the right stop switch 42 is operated. (emphasize)
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the state shown in (9) in FIG. 188 is reached.
(9) in FIG. 188 shows an image display in a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), all reels 31 have stopped, and before the medal payout process is started. The display contents of the device 23 are shown.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the display of the shimmering (shining) "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the right ends, and the "!" !” image and the corresponding “!” background image are deleted.
Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, the state shown in (10) in FIG. 188 is reached.
(10) in FIG. 188 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 during the medal payout process.
When the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 an image of "GET3" indicating that "3" medals will be paid out.
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 188, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the display of the "GET3" image ends (is erased). After that, the game enters a standby state.

As described above using FIG. 188, when the first stop switch 42 is operated when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated during AT, the corresponding "!" background image sparkles (shines). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first operation of the stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the corresponding "!" image and "!" background image are deleted. Thereafter, the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch 42 being operated, and when the power supply is restarted, the "!" images corresponding to the second and subsequent stop switches 42 are displayed again. indicate.
When the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated during AT, the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch 42 being operated, and then when the power supply is resumed, the second and subsequent By displaying the "!" images corresponding to the stop switches 42 again, the player can correctly understand the progress of the game.
In addition, when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated, the player is given the privilege of executing the AT lottery, so when the power supply is resumed, the “!” image is displayed again, so the AT It is possible to maintain players' expectations regarding the lottery.

<15th embodiment>
In the 15th embodiment, the operation of the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to the small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) whose game results (number of coins paid) differ depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed (when the push order bell is won), and when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device during AT are activated, the predetermined game result (the symbol combination corresponding to the win with the highest number of payouts) Regarding the slot machine 10 that displays images related to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed, in particular when the power supply is cut off while the image related to the push order is displayed, and then the power supply is restarted. , relates to a case where the images regarding the push order are different before and after the power is turned off.
The fifteenth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing power restoration processing by the sub-control board 80 in the fifteenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 175.
In FIG. 189, steps that are different from those in FIG. 175 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 175 are assigned the same step numbers.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 175 will be mainly explained.

In step S474, the sub-control board 80 searches the data stored in the RWM 83 for the process that was being executed when the power-off was detected, and in the next step S475, the sub-control board 80 searches for the process that was being executed when the power-off was detected. (a power outage has occurred). Then, if "Yes" in step S475, the process advances to step S479, and if "No" in step S475, the process advances to step S478.
Proceeding to step S479, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 a text image corresponding to the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). Then, the process advances to the next step S476.
Proceeding to step S476, the sub-control board 80 resumes the text image display process from the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Here, the sub control board 80 maintains (retains) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, in step S473, the data stored in the RWM 83 is It is determined whether the data in the RWM 83 are the same. If it is determined that the data in the RWM 83 is normal, the process advances to step S474. Therefore, from the data stored in the RWM 83 (for example, information indicating that AT is in progress, push order instruction number, information indicating operation of the left stop switch 42, information indicating stopping of the left reel 31, etc.), the power supply It is possible to determine the processing steps that were being executed when the supply of

For example, in the text image display process when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct bell 1) to small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct bell 2) shown in FIG. 173 are activated (when the push order bell is won), It is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the second stop/press order instruction image display process in step S405 is being executed. In this case, when the power supply is resumed, for example, the first stop press order matching image display process in step S403 is executed, and then from step S405, the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to It is possible to restart the text image display process when the small win F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) is activated (when the push order bell is won).
That is, when a power outage occurs during the execution of step S405, when the power is restored from the power outage, first, for example, a first stop press order matching image is displayed on the image display device 23 as a text image corresponding to step S405. After that, from step S405, text image display processing is performed when the minor winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to the small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) is activated (when the push order bell is won) can be restarted.
In this way, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 first displays on the image display device 23 a text image corresponding to the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off, Thereafter, the text image display process is restarted from the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off.

FIG. 190 shows that the correct press order is notified when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (the first stop press order matches). ), the power supply is cut off without any operation of the second stop switch 42 (second stop operation), and then the power supply is resumed. Display example of the push order image (text image) FIG. In Figure 190, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
(1) in FIG. 190 shows that at the start of the game (start switch 41 is operated, winning number "1" is won, and after the small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) is activated, which This shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before the stop switch 42 is also operated, and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 190 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 177.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect of "Left" to the speaker indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42 (prompting operation of the left stop switch 42). Output from 22. This point is also similar to (1) in FIG. 177.

When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 190 (first left stop), the first stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (2) in FIG. 190 is reached.
(2) in FIG. 190 shows the state of the image display device 23 at the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). The display contents are shown, and a display example of the first stop press order matching image is shown.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time (left first stop), the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles (shines). This indicates that the left stop switch 42 was operated first and the first stop press order matched (emphasized). That is, the first stop press order matching image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (3) in FIG. 190 is reached.
(3) in FIG. 190 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating. 23, and shows a display example of the second stop/press order instruction image.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), a first stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "1" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "1" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Furthermore, in response to the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the second stop push order instruction image (an image in which the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3") is displayed. Begins. This emphasizes that the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.
As described above, it can be made to appear as if the display of the first stop/push order matching image is started and then ends (erased), and then the display of the second stop/push order instruction image is started.
In addition, after the display of the first stop press order matching image starts, the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the first stop press order matching image ends (is erased). You can also make it look like this.
Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the first stop push order matching image starts, the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the first stop push order matching image ends (is erased). ) can also be made to look like this.
Furthermore, the display of the first stop press order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the first stop press order matching image is finished (erased), the display of the second stop press order instruction image is started. You can also make it look like this.
Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the sub-control board 80 displays "Middle" indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is the middle stop switch 42. A sound effect is output from the speaker 22 to prompt the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.

If the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch 42 being operated in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 190, the state shown in (4) in FIG. 190 occurs. Become.
(4) in FIG. 190 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during a power outage).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off, and the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel are stopped.
Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state shown in (5) in FIG. 190 is reached.
(5) in FIG. 190 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
Here, in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 190, the main control board 50 accelerates the motors 32 corresponding to the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31, while keeping the left reel 31 stopped. The rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31 is stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are returned to a state in which they rotate at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (3) in FIG. 190.

In addition, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 first displays a push order image (text image) corresponding to the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). ) is displayed on the image display device 23.
In the example shown in FIG. 190, the power is cut off when the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3" (while step S405 in FIG. 173 is being executed). If step S405 in FIG. 173 is being executed when the power is turned off, the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" will sparkle (shine) as the push order image (text image) displayed when the power is restored. An image (first stop press order matching image) is set.
For this reason, the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3" (image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 to be operated second/second stop push order instruction image). Sometimes, when the power supply is cut off, the sub-control board 80 first makes the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkle (shining) when the power supply is restarted. An image (image indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first/first stop press order matching image) is displayed on the image display device 23.

Here, in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 190, the press order number image "1" and the corresponding press order background image are erased from the image display device 23.
Furthermore, in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 190, the left reel 31 is stopped.
However, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 displays the push order number image "1" again on the image display device 23, as shown in (5) in FIG. An image in which the press order background image corresponding to "1" sparkles (shines) (first stop press order matching image) is displayed again. This indicates that the left stop switch 42 was operated first and the order of pressing the first stop matches (emphasized). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the first stop/press order matching image was displayed again, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 190 is reached.
In the state shown in (6) in FIG. 190, the left reel 31 is stopped, and the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are rotating at a constant speed.
Further, the sub control board 80 erases the push order number image "1" and the corresponding push order background image from the image display device 23, and erases the push order number image "2" from the push order number image "3". An image to be displayed larger (second stop/press order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23. This emphasizes that the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.
That is, when the power supply is resumed, the first stop press order matching image is displayed again, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first stop press order matching image is displayed again, the first stop press order matching image is displayed again. At the same time, the second stop/push order instruction image is displayed again.

Here, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power supply was resumed, the display of the first stop push order matching image (an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles (shines)) ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the push order number image "1" and the push order background image corresponding to it ends (is erased).
In addition, when the power supply is resumed, the display of the second stop push order instruction image (an image in which the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3") is started. This emphasizes that the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and encourages the operation of the middle stop switch 42.
From the above, in the example shown in Figure 190, it can be made to appear that the display of the first stop push order matching image begins and then ends (is erased), and then the display of the second stop push order instruction image begins.
In addition, after the display of the first stop push order matching image is started, the display of the second stop push order instruction image is started, and then the display of the first stop push order matching image can be made to appear to end (be erased).
Furthermore, at the same time that the display of the first stop push order matching image is started, the display of the second stop push order instruction image is started, and then it can be made to appear as if the display of the first stop push order matching image has ended (been erased).
Furthermore, it is also possible to make it appear as if the display of the first stop push order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the first stop push order matching image ends (is erased), the display of the second stop push order instruction image is started.
However, in the state shown in (6) in FIG. 190, the sub-control board 80 does not output from the speaker 22 the sound effect “It’s in the middle” which indicates that the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 (prompting the operation of the middle stop switch 42).

The sub-control board 80 maintains (holds) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, it returns to the state it was in when the power supply was cut off. let However, for a sound that is output in one shot from the speaker 22, such as the sound effect of "maka da", data indicating that this is output is not stored in the RWM 83.
Therefore, when the power supply is restarted, the sub-control board 80 can display the same push order image on the image display device 23 as when the power supply was cut off, but the second operation The sound effect of "middle" indicating that the stop switch 42 to be used is the middle stop switch 42 (which prompts the user to operate the middle stop switch 42) is not output from the speaker 22.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated second in the state shown in (6) in FIG. 190 (second middle stop), the second stop press order matches, and the state shown in (7) in FIG. 190 is reached. .
(7) in FIG. 190 shows the image display device 23 at the second middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated second and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the second time (second middle stop), the sub-control board 80 displays a shimmering (shining) image (a second By displaying the stop press order matching image), it is shown (emphasized) that the middle stop switch 42 was operated second and the second stop press order matches.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the state shown in (8) in FIG. 190 is reached.

(8) in FIG. 190 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the middle reel 31 has stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. , which shows a display example of the third stop push order instruction image.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), a second stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "2" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "2" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Further, in response to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), display of a third stop push order instruction image (an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before) is started. This emphasizes that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the right stop switch 42.

As described above, it can be made to appear as if the display of the second stop/push order matching image is started and then ends (erased), and then the display of the third stop/push order instruction image is started.
In addition, after the display of the second stop press order matching image starts, the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the second stop push order matching image ends (is erased). You can also make it look like this.
Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the second stop push order matching image starts, the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts, and then the display of the second stop push order matching image ends (is erased). ) can also be made to look like this.
Furthermore, the display of the second stop press order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the second stop press order matching image is finished (erased), the display of the third stop push order instruction image is started. You can also make it look like this.
Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the sub-control board 80 displays "Right" indicating that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42. A sound effect is output from the speaker 22 to prompt the user to operate the right stop switch 42.

Then, when the right stop switch 42 is operated third in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 190 (right third stop), the third stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (9) in FIG. 190 is reached. .
(9) in FIG. 190 shows the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly (right third stop), the sub-control board 80 displays a shimmering (shining) image (third By displaying the stop press order matching image) on the image display device 23, it is shown (emphasized) that the right stop switch 42 was operated third and the third stop press order match.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the third stop press order matching image (the press order background image corresponding to the press order numeric image "3" becomes sparkling). image) ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "3" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 190, when the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of "GET10" indicating that "10" medals will be paid out on the image display device 23. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the display of the "GET10" image ends (is erased). After that, the game enters a standby state.

As explained above using FIG. 190, when the small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) to small role F2 condition device (right center left correct answer bell 2) during AT is activated (press order bell won) (time), an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed, and when the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first, an image indicating this is displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first operation of the stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the image indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first was operated first is erased.
After that, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated second is displayed, and the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch 42 being operated, and then when the power supply is restarted, An image showing that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first is displayed again and then erased, and then an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated second is displayed again.
Then, after the first stop press order matches, the power supply is cut off without the second stop operation being performed, and then when the power supply is restarted, the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first. The image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is displayed again and then erased, and then the image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is displayed again. This allows the player to be reminded of the current situation, and also allows the player to correctly understand the progress of the game.

The fifteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but when the power supply is cut off while displaying the push order image (text image) and then the power supply is restarted, the Different forward images (text images) are not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible, for example.
FIG. 191 shows that the correct press order is notified when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (the first stop press order matches). ), the power supply is cut off without any operation of the second stop switch 42 (second stop operation), and then the power supply is resumed. Display example of the push order image (text image) 190, the push order image (text image) displayed when power supply is restarted is different from that in FIG. 190. In Figure 191, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
(1) in FIG. 191 shows that at the start of the game (start switch 41 is operated, winning number "1" is won, and after the small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) is activated, which This shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before the stop switch 42 is also operated, and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 191 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 190.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect of "Left" to the speaker indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42 (prompting operation of the left stop switch 42). Output from 22. This point is also similar to (1) in FIG. 190.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 191, the first stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (2) in FIG. 191 is reached.

(2) in Figure 191 shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the time of the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is first operated and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, and before the left reel 31 stops), and shows an example of the display of the first stop push sequence matching image.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 191(2) are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 190(2).
Thereafter, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (3) in FIG. 191 is reached.
(3) in Figure 191 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are spinning, and shows an example of the display of the second stop press order instruction image.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 191(3) are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 190(3).
In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the sub-control board 80 outputs the sound effect "It's in the middle" from the speaker 22, indicating that the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 (prompting the operation of the middle stop switch 42). This point is also the same as in Fig. 190 (3).
Then, when the power supply is cut off in the state shown in FIG. 191(3) without the second stop switch 42 being operated, the state shown in FIG. 191(4) is reached.

(4) in FIG. 191 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during a power outage).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off, and the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel are stopped. This point is also similar to FIG. 190(4).
Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state shown in (5) in FIG. 191 is reached.
(5) in FIG. 191 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted. The display contents of the image display device 23 in (5) in FIG. 191 are different from the display contents of the image display device 23 in (5) in FIG. 190.
Here, also in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 191, the main control board 50 performs acceleration processing of the motor 32 corresponding to the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31, similarly to the state shown in (5) in FIG. By executing this, the rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is restarted while the left reel 31 remains stopped. As a result, the left reel 31 is stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are returned to a state in which they rotate at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (3) in FIG. 191.

Furthermore, when the power supply is resumed, the sub-control board 80 first displays on the image display device 23 a text image corresponding to the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off.
In the example shown in FIG. 191, a power outage occurs when an image (second stop push order instruction image) is displayed in which the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3" (while step S405 in FIG. 173 is being executed). If step S405 in FIG. 173 is being executed when the power is out, the push order image (text image) to be displayed when the power is restored is set to an image in which the push order number image "1" and the push order number image "2" are displayed larger than the push order number image "3", and the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles (shines).
Therefore, if the power supply is cut off while an image is being displayed in which the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3" (an image emphasizing the stop switch 42 that should be operated second/second stop push order instruction image), when the power supply is resumed, the sub-control board 80 will first display on the image display device 23 an image in which the push order number image "1" and the push order number image "2" are displayed larger than the push order number image "3", and will also display on the image display device 23 an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles (glows). In other words, the first stop push order match image and the second stop push order instruction image are displayed on the image display device 23 simultaneously.

Here, in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 191, the press order number image "1" and the corresponding press order background image are erased from the image display device 23.
Further, in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 191, the left reel 31 is stopped.
However, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 displays the push order number image "1" again on the image display device 23, as shown in (5) in FIG. An image that displays "1" and the push order number image "2" larger than the push order number image "3" is displayed on the image display device 23, and furthermore, a push order background corresponding to the push order number image "1" is displayed. A shimmering (shining) image is displayed on an image display device 23.

Here, when the power supply is resumed, the display of the first stopped push order matching image (an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles (glows)) begins.
In addition, when the power supply is resumed, the display of the second stop push order instruction image (an image in which the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3") begins.
As a result, when the power supply is started, the display of the first stop push order matching image starts and the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts at the same time, so it looks like (5) in Figure 191. That is, the first stop push order matching image and the second stop push order instruction image are displayed at the same time.
At this time, when the display of the second stop push order instruction image starts, the push order number image "2" is displayed small (initially), and then the push order number image "2" can be displayed so as to gradually become larger.
In addition, the push order number image "2" can be displayed in large size from the start of displaying the second stop push order instruction image (from the beginning).
In addition, in the state shown in (5) in Figure 191, the push order number image "1" and the push order number image "2" are displayed larger than the push order number image "3", but the sub-control board 80 does not output from the speaker 22 the sound effect "It's left" to prompt the user to operate the left stop switch 42, nor the sound effect "It's middle" to prompt the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.
The sub-control board 80 maintains (holds) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, restores the state when the power supply was cut off. However, for sounds that are output in one shot from the speaker 22, such as the sound effects "left" and "center," data indicating that these should be output is not stored in the RWM 83.
Therefore, when the power supply is resumed, the sub-control board 80 will not output the "left" sound effect or the "center" sound effect from the speaker 22.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the image shown in (5) in FIG. 191 was displayed, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 191 is reached. That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first stop push order matching image and the second stop push order instruction image were simultaneously displayed on the image display device 23, the first stop push order matching image is deleted from the image display device 23. However, the display of the second stop/press order instruction image is maintained. This results in the state shown in (6) in FIG. 191.
Here, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power supply was resumed, the display of the first stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "1" sparkles) ends ( ). As a result, the display of the press order numeral image "1" and the corresponding press order background image is completed (erased), as shown in (6) in FIG. 191.
Further, in the state shown in (6) in FIG. 191, the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 can be operated. That is, the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are brought into a stoppable state.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated second in the state shown in (6) in FIG. 191 (second middle stop), the second stop press order matches, and the state shown in (7) in FIG. 191 is reached. .

(7) in FIG. 191 shows the image display device 23 at the second middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated second and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the second time (second middle stop), the sub-control board 80 displays a shimmering (shining) image (a second By displaying the stop press order matching image), it is shown (emphasized) that the middle stop switch 42 was operated second and the second stop press order matches.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the state shown in (8) in FIG. 191 is reached.
(8) in FIG. 191 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the middle reel 31 has stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. It shows.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the display of the second stop push order matching image (an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" sparkles (shines)) ends (is erased). This ends (erases) the display of the push order number image "2" and the push order background image corresponding to it.
In addition, the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation) triggers the display of a third stop push order instruction image (an image in which the push order number image "3" is displayed larger than before). This emphasizes that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42, and encourages the operation of the right stop switch 42.
As a result of the above, it can be made to appear that the display of the second stop push order matching image begins and then ends (is erased), and then the display of the third stop push order instruction image begins.
In addition, after the display of the second stop push order matching image is started, the display of the third stop push order instruction image is started, and then the display of the second stop push order matching image can be made to appear to end (be erased).
Furthermore, at the same time that the display of the second stop push order matching image is started, the display of the third stop push order instruction image is started, and then it can be made to appear that the display of the second stop push order matching image has ended (is erased).
Furthermore, it is also possible to make it appear as if the display of the second stop push order matching image is started, and then, at the same time as the display of the second stop push order matching image ends (is erased), the display of the third stop push order instruction image is started.
In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the sub-control board 80 outputs the sound effect "right" from the speaker 22, indicating that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42, thereby prompting the user to operate the right stop switch 42.

Then, when the right stop switch 42 is operated third in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 191 (right third stop), the third stop press order matches, and the state shown in (9) in FIG. 191 is reached. .
(9) in FIG. 191 shows the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly (right third stop), the sub-control board 80 displays a shimmering (shining) image (third By displaying the stop press order matching image), it is shown (emphasized) that the right stop switch 42 was operated third and the third stop press order matches.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), the state shown in (10) in FIG. 191 is reached.
(10) in FIG. 191 shows an image display in a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), all reels 31 have stopped, and before the medal payout process is started. The display contents of the device 23 are shown.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), a third stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "3" sparkles) The display ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "3" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 191, when the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of "GET10" indicating that "10" medals will be paid out on the image display device 23. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the display of the "GET10" image ends (is erased). After that, the game enters a standby state.

As explained above using Fig. 191, when the small win A1 condition device (left center right correct bell 1) to the small win F2 condition device (right center left correct bell 2) during AT are activated (when the push order bell is won), an image emphasizing the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is displayed, and when the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated for the first time, an image indicating that is displayed. After that, when a predetermined time has passed since the first operation of the stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first has been operated for the first time is erased.
Thereafter, an image emphasizing the stop switch 42 to be operated second is displayed, and when the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch 42 being operated and then the power supply is resumed, the image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated first (push order number image "1") and the image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated second (push order number image "2") are displayed larger than the image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated third (push order number image "3").
Then, after the first stop press sequence matches, the power supply is cut off without the second stop operation being performed, and then when the power supply is resumed, the image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated first and the image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated second are displayed larger than the image indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated third, thereby allowing the player to correctly understand the progress of the game.

FIG. 192 shows the correct pressing order when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (the first stop pressing order matches). , after the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second (second stop press order matches), power is not supplied without operating the third stop switch 42 (third stop operation). It is a figure which shows the display example of the press order image (text image) when power supply is cut off and then restarted, and the press order image is different before and after the power supply is cut off. In Figure 192, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
(1) in FIG. 192 shows that at the start of the game (start switch 41 is operated, winning number "1" is won, and after the small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) is activated, which This shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before the stop switch 42 is also operated, and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 192 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 177.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect of "Left" to the speaker indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42 (prompting operation of the left stop switch 42). Output from 22. This point is also similar to (1) in FIG. 177.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 192 (left first stop), the first stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (2) in FIG. 192 is reached.

(2) in FIG. 192 shows the state of the image display device 23 at the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). The display contents are shown, and a display example of the first stop press order matching image is shown.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 192 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 177.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the state shown in (3) in FIG. 192 is reached.
(3) in FIG. 192 shows the image display device in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating. 23, and shows a display example of the second stop/press order instruction image.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 192 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 177.
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the sub-control board 80 indicates that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is the middle stop switch 42 (the middle stop switch 42) outputs a sound effect of "Middle" from the speaker 22. This point is also similar to FIG. 177(3).
Then, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated second in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 192 (second middle stop), the second stop press order matches, and the state shown in (4) in FIG. 192 is reached. .

(4) in Figure 192 shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the time of the second middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated second time and stop control of the middle reel 31 is started and before the middle reel 31 stops), and shows an example of the display of the second stop push sequence matching image.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 192(4) are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 177(4).
After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the state shown in (5) in FIG. 192 is reached.
(5) in Figure 192 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 is spinning, and shows an example of the display of the third stop press order instruction image.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 192 (5) are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in FIG. 177 (5).
In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 (second stop operation), the sub-control board 80 outputs the sound effect "Right" from the speaker 22, indicating that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42 (prompting the operation of the right stop switch 42). This point is also the same as in FIG. 177 (5).
If the power supply is cut off (power outage occurs) without the right stop switch 42 being operated in the state shown in FIG. 192 (5), the state shown in FIG. 192 (6) will result.

(6) in FIG. 192 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during power outage).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off, and the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel are stopped.
Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state shown in (7) in FIG. 192 is reached.
(7) in FIG. 192 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted. The display content of the image display device 23 in (7) in FIG. 192 is different from the display content of the image display device 23 in (5) in FIG. 192. That is, the push order images (text images) are different before and after the power is turned off.
Here, in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 192, the main control board 50 executes acceleration processing of the motor 32 corresponding to the right reel 31, while keeping the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 stopped. The rotation of the right reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped, and the right reel 31 is returned to a state in which it rotates at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (5) in FIG. 192.

In addition, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 first displays a push order image (text image) corresponding to the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). ) is displayed on the image display device 23.
In the example shown in FIG. 192, when an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than the previous one (third stop push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23 (step S409 in FIG. 173 is executed) (middle) is experiencing a power outage. If step S409 is being executed when the power is turned off, the push order image (text image) to be displayed when the power is restored is an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" sparkles (shining). 2nd stop press order matching image) is set.
For this reason, an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before (an image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 to be operated third/a third stop push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23. If the power supply is cut off while the power supply is being restarted, the sub-control board 80 will first make the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" sparkle (shine) when the power supply is resumed. (an image showing that the stop switch 42 to be operated second was operated second/second stop press order matching image) is displayed on the image display device 23.

Here, in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 192, the press order number image "2" and the corresponding press order background image are erased from the image display device 23. Moreover, in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 192, the middle reel 31 is stopped. However, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 displays the push order number image "2" again on the image display device 23, as shown in (7) in FIG. An image in which the press order background image corresponding to "2" sparkles (shines) (second stop press order matching image) is displayed again on the image display device 23. This indicates that the middle stop switch 42 was operated second and the order of pressing the second stop matches (emphasized).
When a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the image shown in (7) in FIG. 192 was displayed, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 192 is reached.
That is, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the second stop press order matching image is displayed again on the image display device 23, the second stop press order matching image is erased from the image display device 23, and the third stop push order instruction image is displayed. is displayed again on the image display device 23. This results in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 192.

Here, when the power supply is restarted, display of the second stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "2" sparkles) starts to be displayed.
Further, with the restart of the power supply as a trigger, the display of the third stop push order instruction image (an image in which the push order number image "3" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3") is started.
As a result, when the power supply starts, the display of the second stop press order matching image starts and ends (is erased), and then the display of the third stop press order instruction image starts. It looks like (7) to (8) in FIG. 192.
Alternatively, when the power supply starts, the display of the second stop press order matching image starts, and then, at the same time as the display of the second stop press order matching image ends (is erased), the third stop press Since the display of the order instruction image appears to be starting, it appears as shown in (7) to (8) in FIG. 192.
In addition, the push order number image "2" and the corresponding push order background image are erased, and an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before (third stop push order instruction image) is displayed as an image. By displaying this on the device 23, it is emphasized that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42, and the operation of the right stop switch 42 is prompted.
Further, in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 192, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed. As a result, in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 192, the right stop switch 42 can be operated. That is, the right reel 31 becomes in a state where it can be stopped.

However, in the state shown in (8) in Figure 192, the sub-control board 80 does not output from the speaker 22 the sound effect "It's right" indicating that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42 (prompting the operation of the right stop switch 42).
The sub-control board 80 maintains (holds) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, restores the state when the power supply was cut off. However, for sounds that are output in one shot from the speaker 22, such as the "turn right" sound effect, data indicating that this should be output is not stored in the RWM 83.
For this reason, when the power supply is resumed, the sub-control board 80 is capable of displaying on the image display device 23 the same image as when the power supply was cut off, but the sound effect "Go right" indicating that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42 (prompting operation of the right stop switch 42) is not output from the speaker 22.

Then, when the right stop switch 42 is operated third in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 192 (right third stop), the third stop press order matches, and the state shown in (9) in FIG. 192 is reached. .
When the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly (right third stop), as shown in (9) in FIG. 192, the sub control board 80 displays a push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "3". By displaying a shimmering (shining) image (third stop press order matching image) on the image display device 23, it is possible to indicate that the right stop switch 42 was operated third and the third stop press order matched. show (emphasize).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 (third stop operation), as shown in (10) in FIG. The display of the shimmering (shining) background image ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "3" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 192, when the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of "GET10" indicating that "10" medals will be paid out on the image display device 23. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the display of the "GET10" image ends (is erased). After that, the game enters a standby state.

As explained above using FIG. 192, when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) during AT is activated (press order bell won) At the start of the game, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed. Thereafter, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated for the first time, an image indicating this is displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first operation of the stop switch 42, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first was operated first is erased.
Thereafter, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated second is displayed. After that, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second, an image indicating this is displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second stop switch 42 was operated, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second is erased.

Thereafter, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated third is displayed. Thereafter, the power supply is cut off without the third stop switch 42 being operated, and when the power supply is restarted, the image related to the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is not displayed, and the second stop switch 42 is not operated. The image indicating that the stop switch 42 which should be operated the second time is displayed again and then erased. Thereafter, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated third is displayed again.
Then, if the first stop and second stop match the pressing order, then the power supply is cut off without the third stop operation being performed, and then the power supply is resumed, the first operation should be performed. The image related to the stop switch 42 is not displayed, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second is displayed again and then erased, and then the stop switch 42 that should be operated third is displayed. By displaying the emphasized image again, the player can correctly understand the progress of the game.
Furthermore, by not displaying an image related to the stop switch 42 that should be operated first, the processing load on the sub CPU 85 can be reduced, and an image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 that should be operated third can be quickly displayed. can do.

FIG. 193 shows the correct pressing order when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (first stop pressing order matches). , the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second (second stop press order matches), and then power is not supplied without operating the third stop switch 42 (third stop operation). It is a diagram showing an example of a display of a push order image (text image) when the power is cut off and then the supply of power is resumed, and the push order images are different before and after the power is cut off, and are displayed when the power is restored. The push order image is different from that in FIG. 192.
In Figure 193, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
The contents of (1) to (6) and (8) to (10) in Figure 193 are the same as the contents of (1) to (6) and (8) to (10) in Figure 192, so below, The differences from FIG. 192 will be mainly explained.

(7) in FIG. 193 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted. The display content of the image display device 23 in (7) in FIG. 193 is different from the display content of the image display device 23 in (7) in FIG. 192.
Here, in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 193, the main control board 50 accelerates the motor 32 corresponding to the right reel 31, thereby keeping the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 stopped. The rotation of the right reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped, and the right reel 31 is returned to a state in which it rotates at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (5) in FIG. 193.
In addition, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 first displays a push order image (text image) corresponding to the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). ) is displayed on the image display device 23.

In the example shown in Figure 193, a power outage occurs when an image (third stop push order instruction image) in which the push order number image "3" is displayed larger than before is displayed on the image display device 23 (while step S409 in Figure 173 is being executed). If step S409 is being executed when the power is out, the push order image (text image) to be displayed when the power is restored is set to an image in which the push order number image "2" and the push order number image "3" are displayed large, and the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" sparkles (shines) (second stop push order matching image).
For this reason, if the power supply is cut off while an image in which the push order number image "3" is displayed larger than before (an image emphasizing the stop switch 42 that should be operated third/third stop push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23, the sub-control board 80, when the power supply is resumed, first displays the push order number image "2" and the push order number image "3" larger, and also displays an image on the image display device 23 in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" sparkles (glows). In other words, the second stop push order match image and the third stop push order instruction image are displayed simultaneously on the image display device 23.
This indicates (highlights) that the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, matching the second stop push sequence.

Here, when the power supply is restarted, display of the second stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "2" sparkles) starts to be displayed.
Furthermore, upon restarting the power supply, the display of the third stop push order instruction image (an image that displays the push order number image "3" in a large size) is started.
As a result, when the power supply starts, the display of the second stop press order matching image starts, and at the same time, the display of the third stop press order instruction image starts, so that (7) in FIG. Looks like it shows. That is, the second stop/push order matching image and the third stop/push order instruction image appear to be displayed simultaneously.
At this time, at the start of the display of the third stop push order instruction image, the push order number image "3" is displayed small (at first), and then the push order number image "3" is displayed gradually larger. be able to.
Further, the push order number image "3" can be displayed in a large size (from the beginning) at the time when the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed since the image shown in (7) in FIG. 193 was displayed, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 193 appears.
That is, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second stop push order matching image and the third stop push order instruction image are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 23, the second stop push order matching image is erased from the image display device 23, and the display of the third stop push order instruction image is maintained. This results in the state shown in (8) in Figure 193, which emphasizes that the right stop switch 42 is the third stop switch 42 to be operated, and encourages the operation of the right stop switch 42.
Here, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power supply was resumed, the display of the second stop push order matching image (an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" sparkles (shines)) ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the push order number image "2" and the push order background image corresponding to it ends (is erased), and it appears as shown in (8) in FIG. 193.
193 (8), the left and center reels 31 and 32 are stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed. As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 193 (8), the operation of the right stop switch 42 is acceptable. In other words, the right reel 31 is in a state where it can be stopped.
However, in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 193, the sub-control board 80 does not output from the speaker 22 the sound effect “Right” indicating that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42 (prompting operation of the right stop switch 42).
Then, when the right stop switch 42 is operated third (right third stop) in the state shown in (8) in Figure 193, the third stop press sequence matches, and the state shown in (9) in Figure 193 is obtained.

As explained above using FIG. 193, when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) during AT is activated (press order bell won) At the beginning of the game, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed, and when the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first, an image indicating this is displayed. .
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first operation of the stop switch 42, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is erased, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is highlighted. Display the image to be displayed. Then, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second, an image indicating this is displayed.
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second stop switch 42 was operated, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is erased, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated third is erased. 42 is displayed.
Thereafter, the power supply is cut off without the third stop switch 42 being operated, and when the power supply is restarted, the image related to the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is not displayed, and the second stop switch 42 is not operated. An image showing that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second and an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated third are displayed simultaneously. This allows the player to correctly understand the progress of the game.

FIG. 194 shows the correct press order when the small win A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (first stop press order matches). , the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second (second stop press order matches), and then power is not supplied without operating the third stop switch 42 (third stop operation). It is a diagram showing an example of a display of a push order image (text image) when the power is cut off and then the supply of power is resumed, and the push order images are different before and after the power is cut off, and are displayed when the power is restored. The push order image is different from FIGS. 192 and 193.
In Figure 194, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
The contents of (1) to (6) and (8) to (10) in Figure 194 are the same as the contents of (1) to (6) and (8) to (10) in Figures 192 and 193. Hereinafter, the differences from FIGS. 192 and 193 will be mainly explained.

(7) in FIG. 194 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted. The display content of the image display device 23 in (7) in FIG. 194 is different from the display content of the image display device 23 in (7) in FIGS. 192 and 193.
Here, in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 194, the main control board 50 accelerates the motor 32 corresponding to the right reel 31, while keeping the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 stopped. The rotation of the right reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped, and the right reel 31 is returned to a state in which it rotates at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (5) in FIG. 194.
In addition, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 first displays a push order image (text image) corresponding to the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). ) is displayed on the image display device 23.

In the example shown in FIG. 194, when an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before (third stop push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23 (step S409 in FIG. 173 is executed) (middle) is experiencing a power outage. If step S409 is being executed when the power is turned off, the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", and the push order number image "3" are displayed as the push order images (text images) when the power is restored. is displayed in a large size, and the push order background images corresponding to the push order number image "1" and the push order number image "2" are set to sparkle (shine).
For this reason, an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before (an image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 to be operated third/a third stop push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23. If the power supply is cut off while the power is being supplied, the sub-control board 80 will first display the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", and the push order number image when the power supply is restarted. "3" is displayed in a large size, and an image in which the push order background images corresponding to the push order number image "1" and the push order number image "2" are sparkling (shining) is displayed on the image display device 23. That is, the first stop push order matching image, the second stop push order matching image, and the third stop push order instruction image are displayed on the image display device 23 at the same time.
This indicates that the left stop switch 42 was operated first, matching the first stop push order, and the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, matching the second stop push order (emphasis added). ).

Here, upon restarting the power supply, a first stop/push order matching image (an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles), a second stop/push order matching image ( An image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" is sparkling) and a third stop push order instruction image (an image that displays the push order number image "3" in a large size) begin to be displayed. be done.
As a result, when the power supply starts, the display of the first stop press order matching image, the second stop press order matching image, and the third stop push order instruction image starts at the same time. ) as shown. That is, the first stop/push order matching image, the second stop/push order matching image, and the third stop/push order instruction image appear to be displayed simultaneously.
At this time, at the start of displaying the third stop push order instruction image, the push order number image "3" is displayed small (initially), and then the push order number image "3" is displayed so as to gradually become larger. be able to.
Further, the push order number image "3" can be displayed in a large size (from the beginning) at the time when the display of the third stop push order instruction image starts.

When a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the image shown in (7) in FIG. 194 was displayed, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 194 is reached.
That is, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the first stop press order matching image, the second stop press order matching image, and the third stop press order instruction image are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 23, the first stop press order is changed. The matching image and the second stop/push order matching image are deleted from the image display device 23, and the third stop/push order instruction image is maintained on display. This results in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 194, emphasizing that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42, and prompting the user to operate the right stop switch 42.
Here, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power supply was resumed, the first stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "1" sparkles) and the second stop press The display of the order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "2" sparkles) ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", and the corresponding push order background images are finished (erased), and as shown in (8) in FIG. appear.
Further, in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 194, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed. As a result, in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 194, the right stop switch 42 can be operated. That is, the right reel 31 becomes in a state where it can be stopped.
However, in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 194, the sub-control board 80 displays "Right The sound effect "" is not output from the speaker 22.
Then, when the right stop switch 42 is operated third in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 194 (right third stop), the third stop press order matches, and the state shown in (9) in FIG. 194 is reached. .

As explained above using FIG. 194, when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) during AT is activated (press order bell won) At the start of the game, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed, and when the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first, an image indicating this is displayed. .
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first operation of the stop switch 42, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is erased, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is highlighted. Display the image to be displayed. Then, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second, an image indicating this is displayed.
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the second stop switch 42, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is erased, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated third is erased. 42 is displayed.
After that, when the power supply is cut off without the third stop switch 42 being operated, and then the power supply is restarted, this indicates that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first was operated first. An image, an image showing that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second, and an image emphasizing the stop switch 42 to be operated third are displayed simultaneously. This allows the player to correctly understand the progress of the game.

FIG. 195 shows the correct pressing order when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (first stop pressing order matches). , the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second (second stop press order matches), and then power is not supplied without operating the third stop switch 42 (third stop operation). It is a diagram showing an example of a display of a push order image (text image) when the power is cut off and then the supply of power is resumed, and the push order images are different before and after the power is cut off, and are displayed when the power is restored. The push order images are different from those shown in FIGS. 192 to 194.
In Figure 195, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
Since the contents of (1) to (6) in Figure 195 are the same as the contents of (1) to (6) in Figures 192 to 194, the following will mainly explain the differences from Figures 192 to 194. .

(7) in FIG. 195 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when the power supply is resumed.
The display contents of the image display device 23 are different between (7) in Fig. 195 and (5) in Fig. 195. That is, the push sequence image (text image) is different before and after the power is turned off.
In addition, the display contents of the image display device 23 are different between (7) in Fig. 195 and (7) in Fig. 192 to Fig. 194. That is, the push order image (text image) displayed when the power supply is resumed (when the power is restored) is different between Fig. 192 to Fig. 194 and Fig. 195.
Here, in the state shown in (7) in Fig. 195, the main control board 50 executes an acceleration process for the motor 32 corresponding to the right reel 31, thereby restarting the rotation of the right reel 31 while keeping the left reel 31 and center reel 31 stopped. As a result, similar to the state shown in (5) in Fig. 195, the left reel 31 and center reel 31 stop, and the right reel 31 returns to a state in which it rotates at a constant speed.

In addition, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 first displays a push order image (text image) corresponding to the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). ) is displayed on the image display device 23.
In the example shown in FIG. 195, when an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than the previous one (third stop push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23 (step S409 in FIG. 173 is executed) (middle) is experiencing a power outage. If step S409 is being executed when the power is turned off, the push order image (text image) to be displayed when the power is restored is an image (shining) in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" is sparkling (shining). A first stop/push order matching image) and an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" sparkles (shining) (second stop/push order matching image) are set.
For this reason, when an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before (an image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 that should be operated third/a third stop push order instruction image) is displayed, the power supply is turned off. When the power supply is cut off, the sub-control board 80 first displays the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" as shown in FIG. 195 (7) when the power supply is restarted. A shimmering (shining) image (image indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first was operated first/first stop press order matching image) is displayed on the image display device 23.
After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the image shown in FIG. The push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" is erased from the image display device 23, and the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "2" is changed to a shimmering (shining) image (the stop switch 42 to be operated second is displayed as the second stop switch 42). An image indicating that the second stop press has been operated/a second stop press order matching image) is displayed on the image display device 23.

Here, in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 195, the press order number image "1", the press order number image "2", and the corresponding press order background images are erased from the image display device 23. Further, in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 195, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped.
However, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 displays the push order number image "1" and the push order number image "2" on the image display device 23 again, as shown in (7) in FIG. At the same time, an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" sparkles is displayed again on the image display device 23.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the display of the image shown in FIG. 195 (7), the press order number image "1" and the corresponding The push order background image is erased from the image display device 23, and an image in which the push order background image corresponding to the push order number image “2” sparkles is displayed on the image display device 23 again.
This indicates that the left stop switch 42 was operated first, resulting in the first stop push order matching, and then the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, resulting in the second stop push order matching (emphasis added). ).
Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the image shown in FIG. 195(8) was displayed, the state shown in FIG. 195(9) is reached.

In the state shown in (9) in FIG. 195, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed.
Further, the sub control board 80 erases the push order number image "2" and the corresponding push order background image from the image display device 23, and creates an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before. The image is displayed again on the image display device 23. This emphasizes that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the right stop switch 42.
However, in the state shown in (9) in FIG. 195, the sub-control board 80 displays "Right The sound effect "" is not output from the speaker 22.
The sub-control board 80 maintains (retains) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, it returns to the state it was in when the power supply was cut off. let However, for a sound that is output in one shot from the speaker 22, such as the sound effect of "It's on the right," the RWM 83 does not store data indicating that this is to be output.
Therefore, when the power supply is restarted, the sub-control board 80 can display the same image on the image display device 23 as when the power supply was cut off, but the stop switch that should be operated third The sound effect "It's right" indicating that 42 is the right stop switch 42 (which prompts operation of the right stop switch 42) is not output from the speaker 22.

When the right stop switch 42 is operated third in the state shown in (9) in FIG. 195 (third right stop), the order of pressing the third stop matches.
Thereafter, as shown in (10) in FIG. 195, when the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly (right third stop), the sub control board 80 controls the push order corresponding to the push order number image "3". By displaying an image in which the background image is sparkling (shining) (third stop press order matching image) on the image display device 23, the right stop switch 42 is operated third, and the third stop press order matches. Show (emphasize) that.
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 195, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42, the sub-control board 80 displays the push order number image "3" and the corresponding push order background image on the image display device. Delete from 23. Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, the sub control board 80 displays an image of "GET10" indicating that "10" medals will be paid out on the image display device 23, and starts the medal payout process. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the display of the "GET10" image ends (is erased). After that, the game enters a standby state.

As explained above using FIG. 195, when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) during AT is activated (press order bell won) At the start of the game, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed. Thereafter, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated for the first time, an image indicating this is displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first operation of the stop switch 42, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first was operated first is erased.
Thereafter, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated second is displayed. After that, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second, an image indicating this is displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second stop switch 42 was operated, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second is erased.

Thereafter, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated third is displayed. After that, the power supply is cut off without the third stop switch 42 being operated, and then when the power supply is restarted, the stop switch 42 that should be operated first must be operated first. The image indicating that the stop switch 42 which should be operated second is operated second is displayed again and then erased. Thereafter, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated third is displayed again.
In this way, when the first stop and the second stop match the pressing order, and then the power supply is cut off without the third stop operation being performed, and then the power supply is restarted, the first The image indicating that the stop switch 42 which should be operated for the first time is operated for the first time is displayed again and then erased. Next, an image indicating that the stop switch 42 which should be operated second is operated second is displayed again and then erased. Thereafter, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated third is displayed again. This allows the player to correctly understand the progress of the game.

FIG. 196 shows the correct pressing order when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (first stop pressing order matches). , the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second (second stop press order matches), and then power is not supplied without operating the third stop switch 42 (third stop operation). It is a diagram showing an example of a display of a push order image (text image) when the power is cut off and then the supply of power is resumed, and the push order images are different before and after the power is cut off, and are displayed when the power is restored. The push order images are different from those in FIGS. 192 to 195.
In Figure 196, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
Since the contents of (1) to (6) in Figure 196 are the same as the contents of (1) to (6) in Figures 192 to 195, the differences from Figures 192 to 195 will be mainly explained below. .

(7) in FIG. 196 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
Here, in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 196, the main control board 50 accelerates the motor 32 corresponding to the right reel 31, thereby keeping the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 stopped. The rotation of the right reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped, and the right reel 31 is returned to a state in which it rotates at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (5) in FIG. 196.
In addition, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 first displays a push order image (text image) corresponding to the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). ) is displayed on the image display device 23.

In the example shown in FIG. 196, when an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than the previous one (third stop push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23 (step S409 in FIG. 173 is executed) (middle) is experiencing a power outage. If step S409 is being executed when the power is turned off, the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", and the push order number image "3" are displayed as the push order images (text images) when the power is restored. is displayed in a large size, and the push order background images corresponding to the push order number image "1" and the push order number image "2" are set to sparkle (shine).
For this reason, an image that displays the push order number image "3" larger than before (image that emphasizes the stop switch 42 to be operated third/third stop push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23. If the power supply is cut off while the power supply is restarted, the sub-control board 80 first displays the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", and the push order number image when the power supply is restarted. "3" is displayed in a large size, and an image in which the push order background images corresponding to the push order number image "1" and the push order number image "2" are shimmering (shining) is displayed on the image display device 23. That is, the first stop push order matching image, the second stop push order matching image, and the third stop push order instruction image are displayed on the image display device 23 at the same time.
This indicates that the left stop switch 42 was operated first, matching the first stop push order, and the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, matching the second stop push order (emphasis added). ).

When a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the image shown in (7) in FIG. 196 was displayed, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 196 is reached.
That is, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the first stop press order matching image, the second stop press order matching image, and the third stop press order instruction image are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 23, the first stop press order matching image is displayed. is deleted from the image display device 23, and the display of the second stop/push order matching image and the third stop/push order instruction image is maintained. This results in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 196.
Further, when a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the image shown in (8) in FIG. 196 was displayed, the state shown in (9) in FIG. 196 is reached.
That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first stop press order matching image is erased and the display of the second stop press order matching image and the third stop press order instruction image is maintained, the second stop press order matching image is deleted. While erasing from the image display device 23, the display of the third stop/press order instruction image is maintained. This results in the state shown in (9) in FIG. 196, emphasizing that the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42, and prompting the user to operate the right stop switch 42.
Further, in the state shown in (9) in FIG. 196, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed. As a result, in the state shown in (9) in FIG. 196, the right stop switch 42 can be operated. That is, the right reel 31 is brought into a state where it can be stopped.
However, in the state shown in (9) in FIG. 196, the sub-control board 80 displays "Right The sound effect "" is not output from the speaker 22.
When the right stop switch 42 is operated third in the state shown in (9) in FIG. 196 (third right stop), the third stop press order matches, and the state shown in (10) in FIG. 196 is reached. .

As explained above using FIG. 196, when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) to small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) is activated during AT (press order bell won) At the start of the game, an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed, and when the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first, an image indicating this is displayed. .
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first operation of the stop switch 42, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is erased, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is highlighted. Display the image to be displayed. Then, when the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second, an image indicating this is displayed.
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the second stop switch 42, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is erased, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated third is erased. 42 is displayed.
After that, when the power supply is cut off without the third stop switch 42 being operated, and then the power supply is restarted, this indicates that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first was operated first. An image, an image showing that the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second, and an image emphasizing the stop switch 42 to be operated third are displayed simultaneously. After that, the image showing that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first is erased, and then the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second is erased. , the image emphasizing the stop switch 42 to be operated third remains displayed. This allows the player to correctly understand the progress of the game.

FIG. 197 shows that when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated during AT, the power supply is cut off without any stop switch 42 being operated (power cutoff occurs), and then the power supply is restarted. It is a figure showing an example of a display of a "!" image (text image) when the power is turned off, and the text image is different before and after the power is turned off. In Figure 197, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
(1) in Figure 197 indicates that at the start of the game (the start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "15" is won, and the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated (Figure 8), any stop The display contents of the image display device 23 are shown before the switch 42 is also operated.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 197 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 185.

In the state shown in (1) in FIG. 197, if the power supply is cut off without any stop switch 42 being operated (power cutoff occurs), the state shown in (2) in FIG. 197 occurs.
(2) in FIG. 197 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during a power outage).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off, and the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel are stopped.
Thereafter, when power supply is resumed, the state shown in (3) in FIG. 197 is reached.
(3) in FIG. 197 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
The sub-control board 80 maintains (retains) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed (power restoration), the power supply is interrupted. However, the "!" image and the "!" background image are not displayed (hidden) on the image display device 23 when the power is restored. Therefore, the text images differ before and after the power is turned off.

When the small winning combination I condition device (watermelon) is activated (Figure 8), "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" corresponding to the small winning combination 82 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the order of pressing. Therefore, even if the "!" image is not displayed, the player will not be disadvantaged.
Furthermore, when the power is restored, the processing load on the sub CPU 85 can be reduced by not displaying (hiding) the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23.
In addition, in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 197, the main control board 50 accelerates the motors 32 corresponding to the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31. The rotation of the reel 31 and the right reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31 are returned to a state in which they rotate at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (1) in FIG. 197.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 197, the state shown in (4) in FIG. 197 is reached.

(4) in FIG. 197 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the time of the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 is stopped). It shows.
Even when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 does not display the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23 (remains hidden).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the state shown in (5) in FIG. 197 is reached.
(5) in FIG. 197 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the left stop switch 42 was operated, the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating. ing.
Even when the left reel 31 stops after a predetermined period of time has passed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the sub-control board 80 does not display the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23 (i.e., the hidden leave it as is).
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 197, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 197 is reached.

(6) in FIG. 197 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the time of the second middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 is stopped). It shows.
Even when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 does not display the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23 (keep them hidden).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the state shown in (7) in FIG. 197 is reached.
(7) in FIG. 197 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. ing.
Even when a predetermined period of time has passed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 and the middle reel 31 has stopped, the sub-control board 80 does not display the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23 (the hidden leave it as is).
When the right stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 197, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 197 is achieved.

(8) in FIG. 197 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). It shows.
Even when the right stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 does not display the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23 (keep them hidden).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the right stop switch 42 was operated, the state shown in (9) in FIG. 197 is reached.
(9) in FIG. 197 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 and all the reels 31 have stopped, but before the medal payout process is started. It shows.
Even when the right reel 31 stops after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42, the sub-control board 80 does not display the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23 (the hidden leave it as is).
Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, the state shown in (10) in FIG. 197 is reached.
(10) in FIG. 197 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 during the medal payout process.
When the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 an image of "GET3" indicating that "3" medals will be paid out.
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 197, when the medal payout process is completed, the sub-control board 80 erases the "GET3" image from the image display device 23. After that, the game enters a standby state.

FIG. 198 shows that when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated during AT, the second stop switch 42 is operated (second stop operation) after the first stop switch 42 is operated (first stop operation). This is a diagram showing an example of displaying the "!" image (text image) when the power supply is cut off without being interrupted (a power outage occurs) and then the power supply is resumed. The images are different. In Figure 198, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
(1) in Fig. 198 indicates that at the start of the game (the start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "15" is won, and after the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated (Fig. 8), any stop The display contents of the image display device 23 are shown before the switch 42 is also operated.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 198 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 185.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 198, the state shown in (2) in FIG. 198 is achieved.

(2) in FIG. 198 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the time of the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 is stopped). It shows.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 displays an image in which the "!" background image corresponding to the "!" image on the left side is sparkling (shining). (emphasize)
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the state shown in (3) in FIG. 198 is reached.
(3) in FIG. 198 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the left stop switch 42 was operated, the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are rotating. ing.
When the left reel 31 stops after a predetermined period of time has passed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the sub-control board 80 erases the “!” image on the left side and the corresponding “!” background image from the image display device 23. .
If the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch 42 being operated in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 198, the state shown in (4) in FIG. 198 occurs. Become.
(4) in FIG. 198 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during a power outage).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off, and the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel are stopped.
Thereafter, when power supply is resumed, the state shown in (5) in FIG. 198 is reached.

(5) in FIG. 198 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
The sub-control board 80 maintains (retains) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed, the data stored in the RWM 83 is maintained, and when the power supply is resumed, it is ), but the "!" image and the "!" background image are not displayed (hidden) on the image display device 23 when the power is restored. Therefore, the text images differ before and after the power is turned off.
When the small win I condition device (watermelon) is activated (Figure 8), "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" corresponding to the small win 82 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the order of pressing. Therefore, even if the "!" image is not displayed, the player will not be disadvantaged.
Further, when the power is restored, the processing load on the sub CPU 85 can be reduced by not displaying (hiding) the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23.
In addition, in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 198, the main control board 50 accelerates the motors 32 corresponding to the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31, thereby keeping the left reel 31 stopped. The rotation of the reel 31 and the right reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31 is stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are returned to a state in which they rotate at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (3) in FIG. 198.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 198, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 198 is reached.

(6) in FIG. 198 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the time of the second middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 is stopped). It shows.
Even when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 does not display the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23 (keep them hidden).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the state shown in (7) in FIG. 198 is reached.
(7) in FIG. 198 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. ing.
Even when a predetermined period of time has passed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 and the middle reel 31 has stopped, the sub-control board 80 does not display the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23. leave it as is).
When the right stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 198, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 198 is reached.
(8) in FIG. 198 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated and stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 is stopped). It shows.
Even when the right stop switch 42 is operated, the sub-control board 80 does not display the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23 (remains hidden).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the right stop switch 42 was operated, the state shown in (9) in FIG. 198 is reached.

(9) in FIG. 198 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 and all the reels 31 have stopped, but before the medal payout process is started. It shows.
Even when the right reel 31 stops after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42, the sub-control board 80 does not display the "!" image and the "!" background image on the image display device 23 (the hidden leave it as is).
Thereafter, when the medal payout process is started, the state shown in (10) in FIG. 198 is reached.
(10) in FIG. 198 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 during the medal payout process.
When the medal payout process is started, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 an image of "GET3" indicating that "3" medals will be paid out.
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 198, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the medal payout process, the sub-control board 80 erases the image of "GET3" from the image display device 23. After that, the game enters a standby state.
187 and 188 of the fourteenth embodiment show an example in which the power supply is cut off while the "!" image is being displayed, and then when the power supply is resumed, the display of the "!" image is restarted. However, as shown in FIGS. 197 and 197 of the fifteenth embodiment, when the power supply is cut off while the "!" image is being displayed, and then the power supply is restarted, the "!" does not need to be displayed.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
In the 16th embodiment, the game results (number of coins paid) differ depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. (when the push order bell is won), and when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device during AT are activated, the predetermined game result (the symbol combination corresponding to the win with the highest number of payouts) Regarding the slot machine 10 that displays an image related to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed so that the stop switch 42 can be stopped, and when the order of presses does not match, an image indicating this is displayed. This relates to image display when the power is cut off and then the power supply is restarted.
The sixteenth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 199 shows the operation of the small win A1 condition device (left middle right correct bell 1) to the small win F2 condition device (right middle left correct bell 2) during AT by the sub control board 80 in the 16th embodiment (press order). 174 is a flowchart showing text image display processing (when the bell is won), and corresponds to FIG. 173.

In FIG. 199, steps that are different from those in FIG. 173 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 173 are given the same step numbers.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 173 will be mainly explained.
In step S403, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the first stop press order matches (the stop switch 42 that should be operated first was operated first).
For example, when the small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) is activated (FIG. 6), the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42, so the sub control board 80 1 stop (left stop switch 42 is operated first).
When it is determined that the first stop press order matches (the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first), the process advances to step S404, and the first stop press order does not match (the stop switch 42 that should be operated first If it is determined that a different stop switch 42 was operated first, the process advances to step S421.

In step S421, the sub-control board 80 executes a first stop press sequence mismatch image display process. This process is a process for displaying on the image display device 23 an image indicating that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first has been operated first.
Specifically, the sub-control board 80 displays, as the first stop push order mismatch image, for example, push order number image "1", push order number image "2", push order number image "3", and the corresponding push order background images in a darker color than before, on the image display device 23. This indicates (emphasizes) that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first has been operated first.
As described above, the first stop push order mismatch image will cease to be displayed (will be erased) when a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed since its display began.
Then, once the first stop push order mismatch image display process is executed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S407, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the second stop press order matches (the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second).
For example, when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated (FIG. 6), the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, so the sub control board 80 It is determined whether or not there is a second stop (the middle stop switch 42 is operated second).
When it is determined that the second stop press order matches (the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second), the process advances to step S408, and the second stop press order does not match (the stop switch 42 that should be operated second If it is determined that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 was operated second, the process advances to step S422.

Proceeding to step S422, the sub-control board 80 executes a second stop press order mismatch image display process. This process is a process of displaying on the image display device 23 an image indicating that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated second has been operated second.
Specifically, the sub-control board 80 uses, for example, a push order number image "2", a push order number image "3", and their corresponding push order background images as the second stop push order mismatch images. An image to be displayed in a darker color is displayed on the image display device 23. This indicates that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first was operated first (emphasized).
Note that, as described above, the display of the second stop press order mismatch image ends (is erased) after a predetermined time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed from the start of display.
Then, when the second stop press order mismatch image display process is executed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 200 notifies the correct press order when the small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and when a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated (the first FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of display of a press order image (text image) when the stop press order does not match. In the diagram 200, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8).
(1) in Fig. 200 indicates that at the start of the game (start switch 41 is operated, winning number "1" is won, and after the small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) is activated, which This shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before the stop switch 42 is also operated, and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 200 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 177.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect of "Left" to the speaker indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42 (prompting operation of the left stop switch 42). Output from 22. This point is also similar to (1) in FIG. 177.
Then, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 200 (first middle stop), the first stop press order does not match, and the state shown in (2) in FIG. 200 occurs.

(2) in Figure 200 shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the time of the first middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is first operated and stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, and before the middle reel 31 stops), and shows an example of the display of a first stop push order mismatch image.
When the small win A1 condition device (left, middle, right correct bell 1) during AT is activated and the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time (middle first stop), the first stop push order is inconsistent, and the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 an image in which the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3", and the corresponding push order background images are displayed in a darker color than before (first stop push order inconsistent image).
In addition, in (2) of Figure 200, the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", and the push order number image "3" are shown in white, and each push order background image is shown in black, which indicates that the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3", and their corresponding push order background images are displayed on the image display device 23 in a darker color than in (1) of Figure 200.
In addition, when the button press order is inconsistent, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect specific to when the button press order is inconsistent from the speaker 22.
After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the center stop switch 42, the state shown in (3) in FIG. 200 is reached.

(3) in FIG. 200 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the middle reel 31 has stopped, and the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are rotating. ing.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the first stop push order mismatch images (push order number image "1", push order number image "2", push order number image "3", and their corresponding The display of the press-order background image (image that displays the background image in a darker color than before) ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "1", the press order number image "2", the press order number image "3", and the press order background images corresponding to these ends (is erased).
When the left stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 200, the state shown in (4) in FIG. 200 is reached.
(4) in FIG. 200 shows the image display device 23 at the second left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated second and the stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
Even when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the left stop switch 42 was operated, the state shown in (5) in FIG. 200 is reached.

(5) in FIG. 200 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. ing.
Even when the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 are stopped and the right reel 31 is rotating, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
When the right stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 200, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 200 is reached.
(6) in FIG. 200 shows the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
Even when the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the right stop switch 42 was operated, the state shown in (7) in FIG. 200 is reached.
(7) in FIG. 200 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 and all the reels 31 have stopped.
Even when all the reels 31 are stopped, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, the game enters a standby state shown in (8) in FIG. 200.

FIG. 201 indicates the order in which the correct answer is pressed when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and when a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated (the first 200 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a press order image (text image) when the stop press order does not match), and the press order image when the first stop press order does not match is different from FIG. 200. FIG.
In FIG. 201, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8).
Since the contents other than (2) in FIG. 201 are the same as the contents other than (2) in FIG. 200, the differences from FIG. 200 will be mainly explained below.

(2) in FIG. 201 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when the first stop pressing order does not match.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated first (middle 1st stop) when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, the first stop push order will be inconsistent, and the sub control board 80 will: The push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3", and the push order background images corresponding to these are displayed on the image display device 23 in a manner different from the previous ones.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 201(2), the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", and the push order number image "3" are displayed in the same size. Further, the press order number image "1", the press order number image "2", the press order number image "3", and the corresponding press order background images are displayed in a color and manner specific to when the press orders do not match.
Further, when the pressing order does not match, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect specific to the pressing order mismatching from the speaker 22.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the state shown in (3) in FIG. 201 is reached.
In this way, when the push order does not match, the push order image displayed on the image display device 23 may be replaced, and the push order image may be displayed in a manner specific to the push order mismatch.

FIG. 202 shows the correct press order when the small role D1 condition device (middle right left correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (first stop press order matches) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display of a press order image (text image) when a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second (when the second stop press order does not match). In FIG. 202, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8).
(1) in Figure 202 shows that at the start of the game (the start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "7" is won, and the small role D1 condition device (center, right, left, correct answer bell) is activated, any stop switch is activated. 42 also shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before being operated), and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 202 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 179.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 plays a sound effect of "Middle" on the speaker indicating that the first stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 (prompting operation of the middle stop switch 42). Output from 22. This point is also similar to (1) in FIG. 179.

When the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 202 (first middle stop), the first stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (2) in FIG. 202 is reached.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 202 are also the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 179. That is, the first stop press order matching image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the state shown in (3) in FIG. 202 is reached.
(3) in FIG. 202 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the middle reel 31 has stopped, and the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are rotating. This shows a display example of the second stop push order instruction image.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 202 are also the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 179.
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the sub-control board 80 indicates that the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the right stop switch 42 (prompts operation of the right stop switch 42). A sound effect of "It's on the right" is output from the speaker 22. This point is also similar to (3) in FIG. 179.

When the left stop switch 42 is operated second (left second stop) in the state shown in (3) in Figure 202, the second stop press order is inconsistent, resulting in the state shown in (4) in Figure 202.
In Figure 202, (4) shows the display content of the image display device 23 at the time of the second left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated secondly and stop control of the left reel 31 has begun, but before the left reel 31 stops), and shows an example of the display of a second stop push order mismatch image.
When the small win D1 condition device (middle right left correct bell 1) during AT is activated, if the left stop switch 42 is operated second (left second stop), the second stop push order is inconsistent, and the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 an image in which the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3", and the corresponding push order background images are displayed in a darker color than before (second stop push order inconsistent image).
In addition, in (4) of Figure 202, the push order number image "2" and the push order number image "3" are shown in white, and each push order background image is shown in black, which indicates that the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3", and their corresponding push order background images are displayed on the image display device 23 in a darker color than (3) of Figure 202.
In addition, when the button press order is inconsistent, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect specific to when the button press order is inconsistent from the speaker 22.
After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the state shown in (5) in FIG. 202 is reached.

(5) in FIG. 202 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. ing.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the second stop push order mismatch images (the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3", and the corresponding push order background images are changed from those before). (Images displayed in dark colors) are no longer displayed (erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "2", the press order number image "3", and the corresponding press order background images is ended (erased).
When the right stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 202, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 202 is reached.
(6) in FIG. 202 shows the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
Even when the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42, the state shown in (7) in FIG. 202 is reached.
(7) in FIG. 202 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 and all the reels 31 have stopped.
Even when all the reels 31 are stopped, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, a game standby time shown in (8) in FIG. 202 occurs.

FIG. 203 shows the order in which the correct answer is pressed when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated (first stop When the power supply is cut off without operating the second stop switch 42 (second stop operation) after pressing the button (inconsistency in the order of pressing) (a power outage occurs), and then the power supply is resumed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an order image (text image), and a press order image differs before and after power-off. In Figure 203, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
(1) in Figure 203 shows that at the start of the game (the start switch 41 is operated, the winning number "1" is won, and the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, The figure shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before the stop switch 42 is also operated, and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 203 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 200.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect of "Left" to the speaker indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42 (prompting operation of the left stop switch 42). Output from 22. This point is also similar to (1) in FIG. 200.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 203, the first stop press order does not match, and the state shown in (2) in FIG. 203 occurs.

(2) in FIG. 203 shows the state of the image display device 23 at the first stop of the middle reel (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 stops). Indicates the displayed content.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 203 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 200.
That is, if the middle stop switch 42 is operated first (middle 1st stop) when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, the first stop push order will not match, and the sub control board 80 is an image that displays the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3", and the corresponding push order background images in a darker color than before (the first stop push (order mismatch images) are displayed on the image display device 23.
Further, when the pressing order does not match, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect specific to the pressing order mismatching from the speaker 22.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the state shown in (3) in FIG. 203 is reached.

(3) in FIG. 203 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the middle reel 31 has stopped, and the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are rotating. ing.
The display contents of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 203 are the same as the display contents of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 200.
That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42, the first stop push order mismatch images (push order number image "1", push order number image "2", push order number image "3", and The display of the corresponding press-order background image (an image that displays the background image in a darker color than before) ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "1", the press order number image "2", the press order number image "3", and the press order background images corresponding to these ends (is erased).
If the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch 42 being operated in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 203, the state shown in (4) in FIG. 203 occurs. Become.
(4) in FIG. 203 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during power interruption).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off, and the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel are stopped.
Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state shown in (5) in FIG. 203 is reached.

(5) in FIG. 203 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
Here, in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 203, the main control board 50 accelerates the motors 32 corresponding to the left reel 31 and the right reel 31, while keeping the middle reel 31 stopped. Rotation of the left reel 31 and right reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the middle reel 31 stops, and the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 return to a state in which they rotate at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (3) in FIG. 203.
Furthermore, in the sixteenth embodiment, as in the fifteenth embodiment, when the power supply is restarted, the sub-control board 80 first performs the steps that were being executed when the power supply was cut off. A corresponding push order image (text image) is displayed on the image display device 23.
In the example shown in FIG. 203, the first stop press order mismatch occurs (“No” in step S402 of FIG. 199), the first stop press order mismatch image is displayed (step S421 of FIG. 199), and the press order image is erased. (Step S423 in FIG. 199), after which the power is cut off. In this case, the push order images (text images) to be displayed when the power is restored include a push order number image "1", a push order number image "2", a push order number image "3", and their corresponding push order background images. An image that displays the image in a darker color than before (first stop/press order mismatch image) is set.
Therefore, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 first displays the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3", and the corresponding numbers. An image in which the push order background image is displayed in a darker color than before (first stop push order mismatch image) is displayed on the image display device 23 again. Therefore, the push order images (text images) differ before and after the power is turned off.

Here, in the state shown in (3) in Fig. 203, the push order image is erased from the image display device 23. However, when the power supply is resumed, the sub-control board 80 displays again on the image display device 23 an image (first stop push order mismatch image) in which the push order number image "1", the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3" and the corresponding push order background image are displayed in a darker color than before, as shown in (5) in Fig. 203. This indicates (emphasizes) that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first has been operated first, resulting in a first stop push order mismatch.
However, in the state shown in (5) in Figure 203, the sub-control board 80 does not output from the speaker 22 the sound effect specific to when the button press sequence does not match.
After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the image in (5) in FIG. 203, the state shown in (6) in FIG. 203 appears.
In the state shown in (6) in Fig. 203, the center reel 31 is stopped. Also, the left reel 31 and the right reel 32 return to a state in which they rotate at a constant speed, the left stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 can be operated, and the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 can be stopped.
In addition, the sub-control board 80 erases all of the push order number images "1", "2", "3", and their corresponding push order background images from the image display device 23.
That is, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power supply was resumed, the display of the first stop push order mismatch image (the push order number image "1", push order number image "2", push order number image "3", and the corresponding push order background image in a darker color than before) ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the push order number image "1", push order number image "2", push order number image "3", and the corresponding push order background image ends (is erased), and it appears as shown in (6) in FIG. 203.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 203(6), the state shown in FIG. 203(7) is reached.

(7) in FIG. 203 shows the image display device 23 at the second left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated second and the stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
Even when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 203 is reached.
(8) in FIG. 203 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 is rotating. ing.
Even when the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 are stopped and the right reel 31 is rotating, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
When the right stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 203, the state shown in (9) in FIG. 203 is reached.

(9) in FIG. 203 shows the image display device 23 at the third right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
Even when the right stop switch 42 is operated thirdly, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the right stop switch 42 was operated, the state shown in (10) in FIG. 203 is reached.
(10) in FIG. 203 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42 and all the reels 31 have stopped.
Even when all the reels 31 are stopped, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 203, the game enters a standby state.

As explained above using FIG. 203, when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) during AT is activated (press order bell won) (time), an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed, and when a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first, an image indicating this is displayed. do. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first operation of the stop switch 42, the image indicating that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated first was operated first is erased.
After that, the power supply is cut off without the second stop switch 42 being operated, and when the power supply is restarted, the stop switch 42 that is different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first. The image indicating what has been done will be displayed again and then deleted. As a result, the player can be informed again that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated first has been operated, and the player can be made to correctly understand the progress of the game.

FIG. 204 shows that the correct press order is notified when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (first stop press order matched). ), but the stop switch 42 that was different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second (the order of pressing the second stop did not match), and then the third stop switch 42 was operated (the third stop This is a diagram showing an example of a display of a push order image (text image) when the power supply is cut off (a power outage occurs) without any operation (operation) being performed, and then the power supply is resumed. The front and rear press order images are different. In Figure 204, the time series is in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
(1) in Fig. 204 shows that at the start of the game (start switch 41 is operated, winning number "1" is won, and after the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated, which This shows the display contents of the image display device 23 before the stop switch 42 is also operated, and shows a display example of the first stop push order instruction image.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 204 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (1) in FIG. 177.
Furthermore, at the start of the game, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect of "Left" to the speaker indicating that the stop switch 42 to be operated first is the left stop switch 42 (prompting operation of the left stop switch 42). Output from 22. This point is also similar to (1) in FIG. 177.
When the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time in the state shown in (1) in FIG. 204 (left first stop), the first stop pressing order matches, and the state shown in (2) in FIG. 204 is reached.

(2) in FIG. 204 shows the state of the image display device 23 at the first left stop (after the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time and stop control of the left reel 31 is started, but before the left reel 31 stops). The display contents are shown, and a display example of the first stop press order matching image is shown.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 204 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (2) in FIG. 177.
That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the sub-control board 80 displays a shimmering (shining) push order background image corresponding to the push order number image "1" (first stop push order matching image). ) indicates that the left stop switch 42 is operated first (left first stop) and the first stop press order matches (emphasized).
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the state shown in (3) in FIG. 204 is reached.

(3) in FIG. 204 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the left reel 31 has stopped, and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating. This shows a display example of the second stop push order instruction image.
The display content of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 204 is the same as the display content of the image display device 23 in (3) in FIG. 177.
That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the first stop press order matching image (the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "1" sparkles). image) ends (is erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "1" and the corresponding press order background image is ended (erased).
In addition, in response to the operation of the left stop switch 42 (first stop operation), the second stop push order instruction image (an image in which the push order number image "2" is displayed larger than the push order number image "3") is displayed. Begins. This emphasizes that the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and prompts the user to operate the middle stop switch 42.
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the left stop switch 42, the sub-control board 80 indicates that the second stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 (prompts operation of the middle stop switch 42). A sound effect of "inside" is output from the speaker 22.
If the right stop switch 42 is operated second in the state shown in (3) in FIG. 204 (second right stop), the order of pressing the second stops will not match, resulting in the state shown in (4) in FIG. 204. .
(4) in FIG. 204 shows the image display device 23 at the second right stop (after the right stop switch 42 is operated second and the stop control of the right reel 31 is started, but before the right reel 31 stops). This shows a display example of a second stop/press order mismatch image.

If the right stop switch 42 is operated second (right second stop) when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, the order of pressing the second stop will not match, and the sub control board 80 is an image display device that displays the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3", and the corresponding push order background images in a darker color than before (second stop push order mismatch image). Displayed on 23.
In addition, in (4) in FIG. 204, the push order number image "2" and the push order number image "3" are shown in white, and each push order background image is shown in black. This shows that the number image "2", the push order number image "3", and the corresponding push order background images are displayed on the image display device 23 in a darker color than (3) in FIG.
Further, when the pressing order does not match, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect specific to the pressing order mismatching from the speaker 22.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42, the state shown in (5) in FIG. 204 is reached.
(5) in FIG. 204 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the right stop switch 42 was operated, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 have stopped, and the middle reel 31 is rotating. ing.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the right stop switch 42, the second stop push order mismatch images (the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3", and their corresponding push order background images are changed from those before). (Images displayed in dark colors) are no longer displayed (erased). As a result, the display of the press order number image "2", the press order number image "3", and the corresponding press order background images is ended (erased).
If the power supply is cut off (power cutoff occurs) without operating the middle stop switch 42 (third stop operation) in the state shown in (5) in FIG. 204, (6) in FIG. The state shown in is reached.

(6) in FIG. 204 shows the display contents of the image display device 23 when the power supply is cut off (during a power outage).
During the power outage, the image display device 23 is turned off, and the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel are stopped.
Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed, the state shown in (7) in FIG. 204 is reached.
(7) in FIG. 204 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
Here, in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 204, the main control board 50 accelerates the motor 32 corresponding to the middle reel 31, while keeping the left reel 31 and right reel 31 stopped. The rotation of the middle reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are stopped, and the middle reel 31 is returned to a state in which it rotates at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (5) in FIG. 204.

Also, in the 16th embodiment, as in the 15th embodiment, when the power supply is restarted, the sub control board 80 first operates when the power supply is cut off (a power outage occurs). A press order image (text image) corresponding to the step that was being executed is displayed on the image display device 23.
In the example shown in FIG. 204, the second stop press order does not match ("No" in step S406 in FIG. 199), the second stop press order mismatch image is displayed (step S424 in FIG. 199), and the push order image is erased. (Step S426 in FIG. 199), after which the power is cut off. In this case, the first stop press order matching image (an image in which the press order background image corresponding to the press order number image "1" sparkles) is used as the press order image (text image) to be displayed when the power is restored. A second stop push order mismatch image (an image that displays the push order number image "2", the push order number image "3", and the corresponding push order background images in a darker color than before) is set. .
Therefore, when the power supply is resumed, the sub-control board 80 first displays the first stop press order matching image (corresponding to the press order number image "1") as shown in (7) in FIG. A shimmering (shining) background image is displayed on the image display device 23 again. This indicates that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first, and the first stop press order matches.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of display of the first stop/push order matching image shown in (7) in FIG. 204, a second stop/push order matching image (push order numeric image ``2'', the press order number image ``3'', and the corresponding press order background image in a darker color than before) are displayed again on the image display device 23. This indicates that a stop switch 42 that is different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is operated second, resulting in a mismatch in the second stop press order.
As a result, the push order images (text images) differ before and after the power is turned off.
However, in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 204, the sub-control board 80 does not output from the speaker 22 the sound effect specific to when the order of pressing does not match.
Thereafter, when the middle reel 31 returns to a state where it rotates at a constant speed, the state shown in (9) in FIG. 204 is reached.

In the state shown in (9) in FIG. 204, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are stopped, and the middle reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed.
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the display of the second stop/push order mismatch image shown in (8) in FIG. 204, the display of the second stop/push order mismatch image ends (is erased).
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in (9) in FIG. 204, the state shown in (10) in FIG. 204 is reached.
(10) in FIG. 204 shows the image display device 23 at the third middle stop (after the middle stop switch 42 is operated third and the stop control of the middle reel 31 is started, but before the middle reel 31 stops). This shows the displayed content.
Even when the middle stop switch 42 is operated thirdly, the sub-control board 80 does not display the push order image (remains hidden).
After that, although not shown in FIG. 204, the middle reel 31 stops, all the reels 31 come to a stopped state, and then the game enters a waiting state.

As explained above using FIG. 204, when the small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1) to small role F2 condition device (right center left correct answer bell 2) during AT is activated (press order bell won) (time), an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed, and at this time, when the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first, an image indicating this is displayed.
After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first stop switch 42 was operated, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is erased, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is highlighted. Display the image to be displayed. At this time, if a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second, an image indicating this is displayed.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second stop switch 42 was operated, the image indicating that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated second was operated second is erased.
After that, the power supply is cut off without the third stop switch 42 being operated, and then when the power supply is restarted, the stop switch 42 that should be operated first must be operated first. The image showing the image will be displayed again and then deleted. Next, an image indicating that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second is displayed again and then erased.
This makes it possible to notify the player again that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first has been operated first, and that a stop switch 42 that is different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated second has been operated second. At the same time, it is possible to make the player understand the progress of the game correctly.

FIG. 205 shows that the correct press order is notified when the small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) is activated during AT, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is operated first (first stop press order matches). ), but the stop switch 42 that was different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated second was operated second (the order of pressing the second stop did not match), and then the third stop switch 42 was operated (the third stop This is a diagram showing a display example of a push order image (text image) when the power supply is cut off (a power outage occurs) without any operation (operation) being performed, and then the power supply is restarted. The push order images are different before and after, and the push order image displayed when the power is restored is different from that shown in FIG. 204.
In Figure 205, the time series is (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7) → (8) → (9) → (10). ing.
Since the contents of (1) to (6) in FIG. 205 are the same as the contents of (1) to (6) in FIG. 204, the differences from FIG. 204 will be mainly explained below.

(7) in FIG. 205 shows the display content of the image display device 23 when the power supply is restarted.
Here, in the state shown in (7) in FIG. 205, the main control board 50 accelerates the motor 32 corresponding to the middle reel 31, thereby keeping the left reel 31 and right reel 31 stopped. The rotation of the middle reel 31 is restarted. As a result, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are stopped, and the middle reel 31 is returned to a state in which it rotates at a constant speed, similar to the state shown in (5) in FIG. 205.
In addition, when the power supply is resumed, the sub control board 80 first displays a push order image (text image) corresponding to the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred). ) is displayed on the image display device 23.

In the example shown in FIG. 205, the push order matches at the first stop, the push order mismatches at the second stop, and thereafter, the power supply is cut off without the third stop operation being performed. In this case, as the press order image (text image) to be displayed when the power supply is resumed, the first stop press order matching image and the second stop press order mismatching image are displayed as shown in (7) in FIG. 205. The images are set so that they are displayed at the same time.
Therefore, the press order matches at the first stop, the press order mismatches at the second stop, and then the power supply is cut off without the third stop operation being performed, and then, when the power supply is restarted, As shown in (7) in FIG. 205, the sub control board 80 displays the push order number image "1" and the push order number image "2" larger than the push order number image "3", and displays the push order number image "3". The press order background image corresponding to "1" is displayed in a sparkling manner, and the press order number image "2" and the press order background image corresponding thereto are displayed in a dark color. That is, the first stop/press order matching image and the second stop/press order mismatching image are displayed on the image display device 23 at the same time.
This indicates that the press order matches at the first stop, and the press order mismatches at the second stop (emphasized).

When a predetermined period of time (for example, "0.2" seconds) has elapsed since the image shown in (7) in FIG. 205 was displayed, the state shown in (8) in FIG. 205 is reached.
That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first stop press order matching image and the second stop press order mismatch image were simultaneously displayed on the image display device 23, these images are erased from the image display device 23. This results in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 205.
Further, in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 205, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are stopped, and the middle reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed. As a result, in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 205, the middle stop switch 42 can be operated, and the middle reel 31 can be stopped.
When the middle stop switch 42 is operated third in the state shown in (8) in FIG. 205 (middle third stop), the state shown in (9) in FIG. 205 is reached. Thereafter, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the middle stop switch 42 and the middle reels 31 have stopped, all the reels 31 are in a stopped state as shown in (10) in FIG. 205.

As explained above using FIG. 205, when the small winning combination A1 condition device (left middle right correct answer bell 1) to small winning combination F2 condition device (right middle left correct answer bell 2) during AT is activated (press order bell won) (time), an image highlighting the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed, and at this time, when the stop switch 42 to be operated first is operated first, an image indicating this is displayed.
After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first operation of the stop switch 42, the image indicating that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first is erased, and the stop switch 42 that should be operated second is highlighted. Display the image to be displayed. At this time, if a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated second, an image indicating this is displayed.
Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second stop switch 42 was operated, the image indicating that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated second was operated second is erased.
After that, when the power supply is cut off without the third stop switch 42 being operated, and then the power supply is restarted, this indicates that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first was operated first. The image and an image indicating that a stop switch 42 different from the stop switch 42 to be operated second is operated at the same time, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display of these images, these images are displayed. to erase.
This makes it possible to notify the player again that the stop switch 42 that should be operated first has been operated first, and that the stop switch 42 that is different from the stop switch 42 that should be operated second has been operated second. At the same time, it is possible to make the player understand the progress of the game correctly.

Although the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments, "3" (left, middle, right) reels 31 are provided, and "3" (left, middle, right) reels 31 are provided corresponding to each reel 31. Right) Although a stop switch 42 is provided, the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is not limited to "3", and may be, for example, "4", or may be "5" or more.
(2) In the 14th to 16th embodiments, when the small winning combination I condition device (watermelon) is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the order of pressing.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the small winning combination I condition device (watermelon) is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination will stop on the active line in the pressing order of the first left stop (left middle right, or left and right middle). However, in the pressing order other than the first left stop (middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, or right middle left), the symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined combination may be stopped and displayed on the active line.

(3) In the 14th to 16th embodiments, when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated, the AT lottery is held, so in order to increase the player's expectations for the AT lottery, the image display device 23 is A "!" image was displayed at a position corresponding to the upper part of each reel 31, respectively. Further, when the small winning combination I condition device (watermelon) is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the order of pressing.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the winning combination lottery means 61, a privilege such as execution of an AT lottery is given, and a position corresponding to the upper part of each reel 31 on the image display device 23 is provided. A "!" image and a background image may be displayed respectively. That is, in a game that has a predetermined lottery result that is a condition (trigger) for granting a benefit such as an AT lottery, a "!" image and a background image are displayed at a position corresponding to the upper part of each reel 31 on the image display device 23. You may. In this case, in a game with a predetermined lottery result, symbol combinations corresponding to a predetermined combination may be stopped and displayed on the active line (a predetermined combination wins) regardless of the order in which they are pressed. The symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination may or may not be displayed on the activated line depending on the order in which the keys are pressed or the timing of the operation.

(4) In the 14th to 16th embodiments, when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated, the "!" image and the background image are respectively displayed at a position corresponding to the upper part of each reel 31 on the image display device 23. did. Then, each time the stop switch 42 is operated, the background image of the "!" image displayed above the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 displays a shimmering (shining) image, and then, The "!" image and background image were deleted. That is, each time the stop switch 42 was operated, the corresponding "!" image and background image were erased one by one. When all stop switches 42 are operated, all "!" images and background images are erased.
However, this is not limited to this, and for example, at the start of the game when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined, but before any stop switch 42 is operated) ), a "!" image and a background image are displayed respectively at a position corresponding to the upper part of each reel 31 on the image display device 23, and when the first stop switch 42 is operated, all "!" images and background images are displayed. may be deleted. That is, all "!" images and background images may be deleted at the first stop.

In this case, when the first stop switch 42 is operated and all "!" images and background images are erased, the power supply is cut off, and then when the power supply is restarted, the The “!” image and the background image may be displayed again at positions corresponding to the upper part of each reel 31, and all “!” images and background images may not be displayed on the image display device 23 (non- (You can leave it as it is displayed.)
In addition, at the start of the game when the small role I condition device (watermelon) is activated, the "!" When the power supply is cut off without the switch 42 being operated, and then the power supply is restarted, a "!" image and a background image are displayed at the positions above each reel 31 on the image display device 23 may be displayed again, and all "!" images and background images may not be displayed on the image display device 23.

(5) In the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments, the push order image includes a push order number image indicating the order in which each stop switch 42 is pressed, and a push order background image displayed as a background of each push order number image. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the push order image may be configured with only the push order number image without displaying the push order background image.
In addition, when the press order matches, a shimmering (shining) image is displayed on the press order background image, but if the press order image is composed of only the press order numeric images, when the press order matches, for example, the press order numerals By displaying a shimmering (shining) image, it may be possible to indicate (emphasize) that the presses match (the stop switches 42 were operated in the notified press order).
In addition, when the push order does not match, the push order number image and the push order background image are displayed in a darker color than before, but if the push order image is composed of only the push order number images, when the push order does not match, for example, By displaying the push order number image in a darker color than before, it is shown (emphasized) that there is a mismatch in the push order (the stop switch 42 was operated in a push order different from the notified push order). Good too.

(6) In the 14th to 16th embodiments, push order number images (images of numbers "1", "2", and "3") are used as push order images showing the push order of each stop switch 42. However, the pressing order is not limited to this, for example, the pressing order may be displayed using hiragana images such as ``ichi'', ``ni'', ``san'', or ``ichi'', ``ni'', ``san''. The pressing order may be displayed using katakana images, such as ``1'', ``2'', and ``san'', or the pressing order may be displayed using kanji images, such as ``1'', ``2'', and ``3''.
(7) In the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments, the sub-control board 80 maintains (retains) the data stored in the RWM 83 even during a power outage, and when the power supply is resumed. determines whether the data in RWM83 is normal (the data in RWM83 is the same before and after the power is cut off), and if it is judged to be normal, the text image is saved from the step that was being executed when the power supply was cut off. Display processing has resumed.
However, the sub-control board 80 is not limited to this, and for example, when the power supply is cut off (when a power outage occurs) or when the power supply is restarted (when the power is restored), the sub-control board 80 can update the data of the RWM 83. It may be cleared (initialized).

In addition, the sub-control board 80 does not maintain (retain) the data stored in the RWM 83 during a power outage, but clears (initializes) the data in the RWM 83 when the power supply is resumed (when the power is restored). ) may be used.
In this case, the data in the RWM 83 will be different before and after the power is turned off. Therefore, on the main control board 50 side, the data in the RWM 53 is set to be the same before and after the power is turned off, and when the power supply is resumed, a predetermined data is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. The information (command) may be transmitted, and the sub-control board 80 may return to the state when the power supply was cut off (power cutoff occurred) based on the received predetermined information (command).
(8) The various modifications shown in the first embodiment to the sixteenth embodiment and the first embodiment to the sixteenth embodiment are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations. It is.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
FIG. 206 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the seventeenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 206, in the seventeenth embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames.
Further, in the seventeenth embodiment, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 stop is set to "4".
Therefore, by arranging four predetermined symbols at intervals of five symbols on one reel 31, the predetermined symbols can always be stopped and displayed on the active line no matter where the stop switch 42 is operated. Specifically, for example, on the left reel 31, "Replay" is placed at No. 17, No. 12, No. 7, and No. 2. Therefore, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged at four 5-symbol intervals. Therefore, for the left reel 31, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "replay" can always be stopped at the active line. Such a symbol arrangement may be referred to as a "PB=1" arrangement. On the other hand, a case where such a symbol arrangement is not used may be referred to as a "PB≠1" arrangement.

On the left reel 31, "Replay", "Watermelon", and "Bell A" are each arranged at "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Watermelon", and "Bell A" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Further, for example, on the left reel 31, "Blank B" and "Cherry" are arranged in "PB=1" in total. Therefore, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, either "Blank B" or "Cherry" can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. In this way, there is a place where the "PB=1" symbol is arranged in total of two symbols.
Furthermore, for example, on the left reel 31, "White BAR", "Red 7", "Black BAR", and "Blank A" are arranged in "PB=1" as a total of these four symbols. Therefore, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "White BAR", "Red 7", "Black BAR", and "Blank A" can be stopped at the effective line. In this way, there is a place where the "PB=1" symbol is arranged in total of 4 symbols.

Further, the effective line in the seventeenth embodiment is one line in the middle row in the horizontal direction, similar to the first embodiment (FIG. 3(A)). As in the first embodiment, each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 18. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (pieces) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10.
In the seventeenth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment (FIG. 3(B)), the symbol positions visible from the display window 18 when stopped are referred to as "upper row,""middlerow," and "lower row" in order from the top. In the case of the left reel 31, they are referred to as "upper left row,""middle left row," and "lower left row," respectively.

FIGS. 207 to 214 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (such as winning numbers corresponding to the winning numbers drawn by the winning winning lottery means 61), symbol combinations, number of coins to be paid out, etc. in the seventeenth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 207, the game states of the 17th embodiment include when the accessory is not activated (non-special game state) and when the RB is activated (when the accessory is activated, special game state). The prescribed number (number of bets) is set to "3".
As shown in FIG. 207, the symbol combination of the special winning combination (official object) is only 1BB with the winning number "001".
If you win 1BB in the non-special gaming state (when the accessory is not activated) and 1BB is won, no medals will be paid out in this game, but from the next game, you will move to the 1BB gaming (special gaming state) and will be playing the 1BB game. is in the RB (continuous) operation (accessory object operation) state until the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied.
When 1BB is won, the winning is carried over to the next game until 1BB is won. A state in which the winning of 1BB is not carried over is referred to as "non-internal", and a state in which the winning of 1BB is carried over is referred to as "internal". In addition, the game in which 1BB is won is considered to be "non-internal". That is, when it is called "internal", it refers to a state in which 1BB has been won by the previous game.
In the 17th embodiment, it is not assumed that 1BB wins, and the game is played with 1BB inside.
In contrast to 1BB in which winnings are carried over to the next game, in replays and small winnings, winnings are valid only in the game concerned and are not carried over to the next game.

As shown in FIGS. 207 to 210, the types of replays include replays 01 to 22. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to any replay is stopped and displayed, the game will be replayed.
The symbol combination of Replay 04 with winning number "008" is "Red 7", and as will be described in detail later, when the winning combination includes Replay 04 and the device is activated, the stop switch 42 is pressed in a predetermined order. When operated, the "Red 7" set can be stopped and displayed, and it is possible to move to a sub-bonus (also referred to as a "sub-bonus game", which corresponds to AT in the 17th embodiment. Details will be described later).

In FIGS. 210 to 214, the types of small winnings include small winnings 01 to 87.
Small roles 01 to 08 are small roles that pay out 14 pieces, and when a predetermined condition device (Winning A condition device or Winning B condition device described later) is activated, the game result varies depending on the order of pressing. This is a small winning combination that can be won if the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order that allows a winning combination (also referred to as an "advantageous pressing order" or "correct pressing order").
In addition, small winnings 09 to 13 are small winnings that pay out 3 pieces, and the game results vary depending on the order in which they are pressed. ) is activated, a small winning combination can be made by operating the stop switch 42 in a pressing order that allows a 3-card winning combination (same as the above, also referred to as an "advantageous pressing order" or "correct pressing order"). It is.
Furthermore, small winnings 14 to 69 (one-card winnings) are winnings that can be made when the stop switch 42 is operated in an unadvantageous pressing order when a conditional device is activated in which the game result varies depending on the pressing order. .

FIG. 215 is a diagram showing RT transition in the seventeenth embodiment. First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it shifts to non-RT. "RWM initialization" here is executed, for example, when the power is turned on with a setting change, and indicates the initialization of the entire range of RWM53, including information on winning 1BB and initialization of the RT state. It includes. When the data in the RT state is initialized, it becomes "0", but when the data in the RT state is "0", it corresponds to non-RT.
Non-RT is in 1BB non-internal and continues until 1BB is won. As will be described later, the winning probability of 1BB in non-RT is "7564/65536 (approximately 11%)".

If the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed in a game in which 1BB is won, the next game will be RT1 (inside 1BB). In addition, in this embodiment, when it comes to RT1 (inside 1BB), there are no small winning combinations or replay non-winning games. Therefore, there is no case where 1BB is won in RT1. Therefore, 1BB wins are limited to games in which 1BB wins in non-RT games. Furthermore, the game in which 1BB is won in this embodiment includes a case where 1BB is won alone and a case where 1BB and a small winning combination (winning E) are won multiple times. In a game in which 1BB and a small winning combination (winning E) are won twice, the symbols related to the small winning combination (winning E) are prioritized and displayed in a stopped state, so there is no case where 1BB is won in the game.
Therefore, 1BB wins only in non-RT games where 1BB wins alone (as described later, the probability is "4/65536"). Therefore, such cases rarely occur.
On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed in a game where 1BB is won, 1BB is in operation (RB is in operation) (special game state) until the end condition of 1BB operation is met (for example, 100 coins are paid out). ) to continue. When the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are met, the state shifts to non-RT again.

FIGS. 216 to 221 are diagrams showing numbers (winning probabilities) for each winning number in the seventeenth embodiment. 216 and 217 show the numeric table for non-RT, FIGS. 218 and 219 show the numeric table for RT1, and FIGS. 220 and 221 show the numeric table during RB operation.
Divide the number in each number table by "65536" to get the probability of winning. For example, in FIG. 216, the winning number "1" (Replay A) is set to "8943" for all settings, so the probability of winning is "8943/65536" (approximately "1/7.3"). ).
Further, as in the first embodiment, the "setting value" relates to the player's advantage, and has six levels, "setting 1" to "setting 6."
In this way, a set number is determined for each RT (gaming state) and each set value.

Furthermore, in each number table, the "advantageous section" indicates the presence or absence of a transition lottery for the advantageous section. "○" means that the advantageous section lottery will be executed when the winning number concerned is won, and " x " means that the advantageous section lottery will not be executed when the winning number concerned is won. "-" means that it is not a lottery target for the advantageous section because it is not a lottery target (because the number is "0"). Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, it is set so that the probability of winning the advantageous section is "1/1".
For example, if the game is in the normal section and the winning number "1" (replay A) in FIG. 216 is won, the player will definitely win the transition to the advantageous section in the game and will be in the advantageous section from the next game.
Note that when the game is in an advantageous section, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 216 and 218, when the winning number "2" (replay B) is won for both non-RT and RT1, the advantageous section transfer lottery is not executed, so the transfer to the advantageous section is not carried out. Therefore, when winning number "2" is won in the normal section, the next game will also be in the normal section.
Further, as shown in FIG. 219, when winning numbers "60" to "71" (winning E1 to winning 12) are won in RT1, the advantageous section transfer lottery is not executed, so the transfer to the advantageous section does not occur. Therefore, similarly to the winning number "2", when winning numbers "60" to "71" are won in the normal section, the next game will also be in the normal section.
It should be noted that a winning number to be transferred to the advantageous section may be determined without executing the transfer lottery for the advantageous section, and when the winning number is won, the game may be transferred to the advantageous section from the next game. For example, if you win a winning number marked with "○" in the column of advantageous section in each number table shown in FIGS. 216 to 219, you will move to the advantageous section from the next game without executing the advantageous section transition lottery. You can do it like this.

As shown in Figures 216 and 217, the winning numbers for 1BB in non-RT (non-internal) include the winning number "0", which is a single winning number, and the winning numbers "60" to "71", which are double winning numbers with the winning number E.
In contrast, there is no chance of winning 1BB in RT1 (inside). Therefore, there is no chance of winning the winning number "0" in RT1. Also, winning numbers "60" to "71" in RT1 will result in the sole winning of the prize E.
In this embodiment, the non-RT state occurs after RWM initialization, that is, after power-on with a setting change, as shown in Fig. 215. If 1BB is not won in a game in which 1BB is won, the state remains RT1 (inside the game).
On the other hand, the advantageous zone ends when the difference in number (the number of payouts minus the number of inserts) from the start of the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, and the next game after the difference exceeds 2400 becomes the normal zone. However, even if the zone is changed to the normal zone, the 1BB win is carried over, so the zone remains in RT1.
Therefore, in the case of this embodiment, after RWM initialization (after the settings are changed), it is non-RT and in the normal zone, but if 1BB is won, it becomes RT1, and if a winning number that transitions to the advantageous zone is won, the zone will transition to the advantageous zone from the next play.
After entering the RT1 and advantageous zone, if the difference number exceeds "2400", the next game will be RT1 and normal zone. If a winning number that transitions to the advantageous zone is won during the RT1 and normal zone, the next game will be RT1 and advantageous zone.

222 to 229 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc.
First, in the winning combination lottery means 61, a winning number is drawn with a winning probability corresponding to the above-mentioned number table according to each gaming state. For example, if the winning number "0" (1BB) is won in non-RT, the game becomes a game in which the 1BB condition device with accessory condition device number "1" can be activated. In a game where the 1BB condition device can be activated, the winning combination included in the 1BB condition device, that is, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB, can be stopped on the active line.
Further, for example, if the winning number "1" (Replay A) is won in non-RT, the game becomes a game in which the Replay A condition device among the small winning combinations and the Replay condition device can be activated. In a game in which the replay A condition device is activated, the winning combination included in the replay A condition device, specifically any one symbol combination of replays 01, 03 to 05, can be stopped on the active line.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game when the Replay B condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the reverse direction (press order 321 (right center left)), the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 04 ("Red 7" all together) is created. can be stopped, and if the stop switch 42 is operated in any other pressing order, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 can be stopped.
In addition, in the game when the Replay A, Replay C to Replay G condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 can be stopped regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.
For example, the symbol combination for Replay 01 is "Blank B"-"Blank B"-"Replay" for the winning number "001" in FIG. 207, but "Blank B" on the left and middle reels 31 is "PB=1". ” arrangement, and “Replay” on the right reel 31 is “PB=1” arrangement. Therefore, in a game when the Replay A to Replay G conditions are activated, Replay 01 can be stopped and displayed no matter what order the stop switches 42 are pressed.

In addition, the symbol combinations of Replay 01 to 05, which are the winning combinations included in the Replay B condition device, are as follows:
Replay 01: "Blank B" - "Blank B" - "Replay"
Replay 02: "Bell A" - "Replay" - "Bell A"
Replay 03: "White BAR" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 03: "Red 7" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 03: "Black BAR" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 03: "Blank A" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 04: "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
Replay 05: "White BAR" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
Replay 05: "Black BAR" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
Replay 05: "Blank A" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
It is.
In a game when the replay B condition device is activated, for example, if "Red 7" can be stopped at the first stop on the right, "Red 7" is stopped at the middle right stage. If "Red 7" cannot be stopped in the middle right row, "Replay" is stopped in the middle right row.
After "Replay" is stopped in the middle right row, "Blank B" is stopped in the middle row, and "Blank B" is stopped in the middle left row.

On the other hand, after stopping "Red 7" at the first stop on the right, if it is possible to stop "Red 7" in the middle middle row at the second stop in the middle, "Red 7" is stopped in the middle middle row. If it is not possible to stop "Red 7" in the middle middle row, "Replay" is stopped in the right middle row. In addition, if you stop "Red 7" at the first stop on the right and stop "Replay" at the second stop in the middle, then at the third stop on the left, "White BAR", "Red 7", "Black BAR" or "Blank A" (symbols with "PB=1" in total of 4 symbols) is stopped. As a result, Replay 03 is stopped and displayed.
Next, if "Red 7" is stopped at the first right stop, and "Red 7" is stopped at the middle middle row when the middle second stop is stopped, "Red 7" is stopped at the left middle row when the left third stop is stopped. If possible, stop "Red 7" in the middle left row. As a result, the symbol combination of Replay 04 is stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, when "Red 7" cannot be stopped at the left middle row at the time of the third left stop, "White BAR", "Black BAR", or "Blank A" is stopped at the left middle row. As a result, Replay 05 is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the first stop is at the left reel 31, "Bell A" is stopped at the middle left row (PB=1). After that, when the middle reel 31 stops, "Replay" is stopped at the middle middle row (PB=1), and when the right reel 31 stops, "Bell A" is stopped at the right middle row (PB=1). As a result, Replay 02 is stopped and displayed.
The same applies when the first stop is the middle reel 31. When the middle reel 31 stops, "Replay" is stopped in the middle middle row, then when the left reel 31 stops, "Bell A" is stopped in the left middle row, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" is stopped in the right middle row. let

Furthermore, since RT1 carries over the winning of 1BB, when any replay is won, the game will operate the 1BB condition device and the winning replay condition device. However, in a game in which both 1BB and replay can be stopped and displayed, priority is given to stopping and displaying the replay. Furthermore, the replay is "PB=1". Therefore, in a game in which the replay condition device is activated in RT1, there is no case in which 1BB is stopped and displayed.
Furthermore, in RT1, when any of the small roles is won, the 1BB condition device and the winning small role condition device are activated. However, in a game in which both the 1BB and the small role can be stopped and displayed, priority is given to stopping and displaying the small role. Here, the small role includes a small role with "PB=1" and a small role that is not "PB=1". However, if priority is given to stopping and displaying the small role, the 1BB is configured not to be stopped and displayed. In other words, even in a game in which the small role cannot be stopped and displayed, the 1BB will not be stopped and displayed.
Specifically, when playing a game by pressing the reels in order, in order to display the symbol combination of 1BB, it is necessary to stop "blank B" in the left middle row when the left reel 31 stops. However, the symbols on the left reel 31 that are "blank B" are only the small role 72 with the role number "276", the small role 76 with the role number "280", and the small role 78 with the role number "282". However, in a game when the small role condition device is activated, there is no case where the stop display of the small role 72, the small role 76, or the small role 78 takes precedence. For example, the winning A1 condition device includes the small role 72 as a winning role, but when pressing the reels in order, the stop display of the small role 52 or 54 takes precedence.
From the above, in RT1, there is no game in which the 1BB pattern combination is displayed when any of the condition devices are activated.

Next, a so-called pressing order bell condition device will be explained.
The push order bell condition device consists of the following types.
Winning A condition device: Winning A1 condition device - Winning A16 condition device Winning B condition device: Winning B1 condition device - Winning B16 condition device Winning C condition device: Winning C1 condition device - Winning C8 condition device Winning D condition device: Winning D1 condition Device - Winning D12 condition device Winning E condition device: Winning E1 condition device - Winning E12 condition device And, for the winning A condition device and the winning B condition device, irregular presses (first stop in the middle or first stop on the right) are pressed in the order This is a conditional device that gives the correct answer. In a game when these conditional devices are activated, when the pressing order is correct, a small winning combination with a payout of 14 pieces is won, and when the pressing order is incorrect, a small winning combination, which is a payout of 1 piece, is won or lost.
On the other hand, the winning C condition device is a condition device in which pressing in order (left first stop) is the correct answer in the pressing order. In a game when the winning prize C condition device is activated, a small winning combination resulting in three payouts is won when the pressing order is correct, and a small winning combination resulting in one payout is won or lost when the pressing order is incorrect.
Also, among the games when the winning D condition device is activated, the first left stop 1 is the correct pressing order in the game with the winning D1 to D4 condition device, and the middle first stop is the correct press in the game when the winning D5 to D8 condition device is activated. In the game when the prize winning D9 to D12 condition device is activated, the first stop on the right is the correct answer in the pressing order. In the game when these conditional devices are activated, when the pressing order is correct, a small winning combination that results in three payouts is won, and when the pressing order is incorrect, a small winning combination that results in one payout is won or is missed.
Furthermore, among the games when the winning E condition device is activated, the first stop on the left is the correct pressing order for the game when the winning E1 to E4 condition device is activated, and the middle first stop is the correct pressing order for the game when the winning E5 to E8 condition device is activated. The pressing order is correct, and in the game when the winning E9 to E12 condition device is activated, the first stop on the right is the correct pressing order. In the game when these conditional devices are activated, when the pressing order is correct, a small winning combination that results in three payouts is won, and when the pressing order is incorrect, a small winning combination that results in one payout is won or is missed.

Hereinafter, some condition devices related to the push order bell will be selected and reel stop control when the condition devices are activated will be explained. Furthermore, in the following explanation, even if the winning of 1BB is carried over in RT1, the stop control related to 1BB will be omitted.
(Example 1) Small role A1 condition device (press order 213 correct answers)
For example, in a game where the winning number is "8" in RT1 and the small win A1 condition device is activated, as shown in FIG. Become. However, the minor winnings that can actually win are any of the minor winnings 01, 14, 32, 52, and 54. The small winning combinations 70 to 72 are control winning combinations (the control winning combination is a winning combination for differentiating the stop control of the reels 31, and is not a winning combination).
As explained in the first embodiment, when multiple types of small winning combinations are won overlappingly (simultaneously), if the pressing order is correct, the reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority given to the number of pieces, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority given to the number of pieces. Control the stop.
As shown in FIG. 222, when the winning A1 condition device is activated,
Press order 123 (incorrect): Small role 52, 54 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/2")
Press order 132 (incorrect): Small role 52, 54 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/2")
Press order 213 (correct answer): Small role prize 01 (14 pieces) (PB = 1)
Press order 231 (incorrect): Small role 14 (winning rate "1/2")
Press order 312 (incorrect): Small role 32 (winning rate "1/8")
Press order 321 (incorrect): Small role 32 (winning rate "1/8")
are each eligible for prizes.
Note that the pressing order shown above is the same as in the first embodiment.
Press order 123: Press order left, middle right Press order 132: Press order left, right, middle Press order 213: Press order middle left, press order 231: Press order middle right, left Press order 312: Press order right, left, middle Press order 321: Press order right, middle left each means.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to each minor combination included in the winning A1 condition device are as follows.
Small role 01: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Watermelon"
Small role 14: "White BAR" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small role 14: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small role 32: "Black BAR" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 32: "Blank A" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "White BAR"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Black BAR"
Small role 54: "Replay" - "Blank B" - "White BAR"
Small role 54: "Replay" - "Blank B" - "Black BAR"
Minor role 70: "Bell A" - "Replay" - "Watermelon"
Small role 71: "Cherry" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Small role 72: "Cherry" - "Replay" - "Blank B"
Small role 72: "Blank B" - "Replay" - "Blank B"
First, at the time of the first stop in the middle, the pressing order is correct at this point, so in order to win the small winning combination 01, "Bell A" is stopped in the middle middle row with priority on the number of pieces (PB=1).
Next, at the second stop on the left, since the pressing order is correct at this point, "Watermelon" is stopped at the middle row on the left with priority given to the number of sheets (PB=1).
Then, at the third stop on the right, the "watermelon" is stopped at the middle right stage (PB=1).
As a result, the small winning combination 01 is won.
Furthermore, when the right second stop occurs after the middle first stop, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so "Bell A" is stopped at the right middle stage with priority given to the number of objects (PB=1).
At the third stop on the left, if the "white BAR" or "red 7" can be stopped at the middle row on the left, either of these symbols is stopped (PB≠1). If "White BAR" or "Red 7" can be stopped in the middle left row, it will be a small winning combination of 14.
Here, the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 is placed at number "16", and the "red 7" is placed at number "11". Therefore, the probability (pull rate (PB)) of being able to pull "White BAR" or "Red 7" into the middle left row is "1/2". Therefore, when the push order is 231, the small winning combination 14 can be won, and the winning rate is "1/2".

Next, at the first stop on the right, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so if number priority is adopted, the symbols with the largest number on the right reel 31 are "Bell A", "Replay", "White BAR". ”, “Black BAR”, and “Blank B” (2 pieces each). If there is a plurality of symbols having the maximum number as described above, it can be arbitrarily determined, so it is determined that priority is given to "Replay" among these symbols, and "Replay" is stopped at the middle right row (PB=1).
Then, at this point, only the small winning combination 32 can be won.
Next, at the second left stop, if the "black BAR" or "blank A" can be stopped in the middle left row, either of these symbols is stopped in the middle left row. The pull rate of "black BAR" or "blank A" to the left middle row is "1/2".
Furthermore, at the time of the third stop in the middle, if the "white BAR" can be stopped in the middle middle row, the symbol is stopped in the middle middle row. The pull rate to the middle row of the "white BAR" is "1/4".
Therefore, when the push order is 312, it becomes possible to win the small winning combination 32, and the winning rate becomes "1/8".
Furthermore, after the first stop on the right, at the second stop in the middle, the "white BAR" stops at a pull-in rate of "1/4" as described above. Furthermore, at the third stop on the left, the "black BAR" or "blank A" stops at a pull-in rate of "1/2" in the same manner as described above.
Therefore, when the push order is 321, the small winning combination 32 can be won, and the winning rate is "1/8".

Next, when the left first stop occurs, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so if number priority is adopted, the most common symbols on the left reel 31 are "Replay" (4 symbols). Therefore, it is determined that "replay" (PB=1) is to be stopped.
Then, at this point, it becomes possible to win the small winning combination 52 or 54.
Next, at the second middle stop, if it is possible to stop "Watermelon" or "Blank B" in the middle middle row, either of these symbols is stopped in the middle middle row (total "PB=1").
Furthermore, at the third stop on the right, if the "white BAR" or "black BAR" can be stopped at the middle right row, either of these symbols is stopped at the middle right row. The pull rate of the "white BAR" or "black BAR" to the right middle row is "1/2".
Therefore, when the push order is 123, the small winning combination 52 or 54 can be won, and the winning rate is "1/2".
Further, after the first stop on the left, at the second stop on the right, the "white BAR" or "black BAR" can be stopped at a pull-in rate of "1/2" as described above. Furthermore, when stopping at the middle third stage, it is possible to stop "Watermelon" or "Blank B" at the middle middle stage with "PB=1" in the same manner as above.
Therefore, when the push order is 132, it becomes possible to win the small winning combination 52 or 54, and the winning rate becomes "1/2".

(Example 2) Small role A13 condition device (press order 321 correct answer)
In the game in which the small winning combination A13 condition device is activated, any of the small winning combinations 04, 20, 36, 60, 62, 77, 78, and 80 can be won as shown in FIG.
When the winning A13 condition device is activated,
Press order 123 (incorrect): Small role 60, 62 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/4")
Press order 132 (incorrect): Small role 60, 62 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/4")
Press order 213 (incorrect): Small role 36 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/8")
Press order 231 (incorrect): Small role 36 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/8")
Press order 312 (incorrect): Small role 20 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/2")
Press order 321 (correct answer): Small role 04 (14 pieces) (PB = 1)
are each eligible for prizes.
In addition, the symbol combinations for each small role are as follows.
Small role 04: "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Replay"
Small role 04: "Watermelon" - "Blank B" - "Replay"
Small role 20: "Bell A" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 20: "Bell A" - "Red 7" - "Replay"
Small role 36: "White BAR" - "Replay" - "White BAR"
Small role 36: "Red 7" - "Replay" - "White BAR"
Small role 60: "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Red 7"
Small role 62: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Red 7"
Minor role 77: "Cherry" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small role 78: "Blank B" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small role 80: "Black BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Watermelon"
Small role 80: "Blank A" - "Black BAR" - "Watermelon"

Here, we will explain using push sequence 123 and push sequence 132 (which result in a winning probability of 1/4) as examples.
If the first stop is on the left, the push order is incorrect, so the symbols are stopped in order of number. In this case, the number of symbols for "watermelon", "bell A", and "replay" is "2", but here we define "replay" (PB=1).
Also, when the middle (second or third) reel stops, if the "Bell A" or "Watermelon" can be stopped in the middle row, one of these symbols will be stopped. Note that the middle reel 31 has only the "Bell A", and "PB=1".
Furthermore, when the right reel (second or third) stops, if a "red 7" can be stopped in the right middle row, that symbol is stopped (PB≠1). Note that since there is only one "red 7" on the right reel 31, the draw rate is "1/4".
Therefore, when the small prize A13 condition device is activated, the winning rate of small prize 60 or 62 in push sequence 123 and push sequence 132 is "1/4".

(Example 3) Small role B15 condition device (press order 321 correct answer)
In a game in which the small winning combination B15 condition device is activated, any of the small winning combinations 08, 21, 50, 64, 65, and 77 to 79 can be won as shown in FIG. 226.
In addition, when the winning B15 condition device is activated,
Press order 123 (incorrect): Small role 64, 65 (1 piece) (winning rate "3/4")
Press order 132 (incorrect): Small role 64, 65 (1 piece) (winning rate "3/4")
Press order 213 (incorrect): Small role 50 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/8")
Press order 231 (incorrect): Small role 50 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/8")
Press order 312 (incorrect): Small role 21 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/2")
Press order 321 (correct answer): Small role 08 (14 pieces) (PB = 1)
are each eligible for prizes.
In addition, the symbol combinations for each small role are as follows.
Small role 08: "Watermelon" - "Replay" - "Replay"
Small role 21: "Bell A" - "Black BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 21: "Bell A" - "Cherry" - "Replay"
Small role 50: "Black BAR" - "Bell A" - "Cherry"
Small role 50: "Blank A" - "Bell A" - "Cherry"
Small role 64: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Blank B"
Small role 65: "Replay" - "Blank B" - "Blank B"
Minor role 77: "Cherry" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small role 78: "Blank B" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small role 79: "White BAR" - "White BAR" - "Watermelon"
Small role 79: "Red 7" - "White BAR" - "Watermelon"

Here, the push order 123 and the push order 132 (in the case where the winning rate is "3/4") will be described as an example.
When it is the first stop on the left, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so the symbols are stopped with priority given to the number of pieces. In this case, "Watermelon", "Bell A", and "Replay" each have the number of symbols "2", but here they are defined as "Replay" (PB=1).
In addition, at the time of the middle (second or third) stop, if it is possible to stop "Watermelon" or "Blank B" in the middle middle row, either of these symbols is stopped. Note that the middle reel 31 has a total of two symbols, ``Watermelon'' and ``Blank B'', which is ``PB=1''.
Furthermore, when stopping on the right (second or third), if it is possible to stop "Blank B" in the middle right row, the symbol is stopped (PB≠1). It should be noted that on the right reel 31, "Blank B" is arranged at three locations at intervals of 5 symbols, so the pull-in rate is "3/4".
Therefore, the winning rate of the small winning combination 64 or 65 in the push order 123 and the pushing order 132 when the small winning combination B15 condition device is activated is "3/4".

As described above, in the game when the win A condition device and the win B condition device are activated, the irregular press is the correct press order, and when the press order is correct, "PB=1" and a 14-card winning combination is won.
Furthermore, when the first stop is correct and the second stop is incorrect, a winning combination of one card is won at a winning rate of "1/2".
Furthermore, when it is the first stop on the left (press in order), a winning combination of one card is won with a winning rate of "1/1", "1/2", "1/4", or "3/4".
Furthermore, if the first stop is incorrect due to an irregular press, a one-card winning combination is won with a winning rate of "1/8".

(Example 4) Winning C1 condition device (first correct answer on the left)
In a game in which the small winning combination C1 condition device is activated, any of the small winning combinations 09, 28, 29, 44, and 45 can be won as shown in FIG. 226.
Also, when the winning C1 condition device is activated,
Press order 1--(correct answer): Small role 09 (3 pieces) (PB=1)
Press order -1- (incorrect): Small role 44, 45 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/4")
Press order--1 (incorrect): Small role 28, 29 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/4")
are each eligible for prizes.
In addition, the symbol combinations for each small role are as follows.
Small role 09: "Replay" - "Replay" - "Watermelon"
Small role 28: "White BAR" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 28: "Red 7" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 29: "White BAR" - "Red 7" - "Replay"
Small role 29: "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Replay"
Small role 44: "White BAR" - "Bell A" - "White BAR"
Small role 44: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "White BAR"
Small role 45: "White BAR" - "Bell A" - "Black BAR"
Small role 45: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Black BAR"
First, when it is the first stop on the left (correct press order), "Replay" is stopped at the middle row on the left (PB=1). Further, when stopping later in the middle, "Replay" is stopped at the middle middle row (PB=1), and when stopping on the right, "Watermelon" is stopped at the middle right row (PB=1).
As a result, the small winning combination 09 is won.
Furthermore, when it is the first stop in the middle, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, and "Bell A", which has the largest number of symbols, is stopped in the middle middle row due to number priority (PB=1).
Furthermore, when stopping on the left after that, "White BAR" or "Red 7" is stopped at the middle row on the left (the pull-in rate is "1/2" as the sum of the two symbols). Furthermore, when stopping on the right after that, "Cherry" or "Blank A" is stopped at the middle right row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" in total of the two symbols).
Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop, the small winning combination 44 or 45 is stopped and displayed with a winning rate of "1/4".
Next, when it is the first stop on the right, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, and the "Replay" with the largest number of symbols is stopped at the middle row on the right by giving priority to the number of symbols (PB=1).
Furthermore, when stopping on the left after that, "White BAR" or "Red 7" is stopped at the middle row on the left (the pull-in rate is "1/2" as the sum of the two symbols). Furthermore, at the subsequent middle stop, "Black BAR" or "Cherry" is stopped at the middle middle row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" in total of the two symbols).
Therefore, at the first stop on the right, the small winning combination 28 or 29 is stopped and displayed with a winning rate of "1/4".

(Example 5) Prize D5 condition device (1st correct answer)
In a game in which the small winning combination D5 condition device is activated, any of the small winning combinations 11, 52, and 66 can be won as shown in FIG. 227.
Also, when the winning D5 condition device is activated,
Press order 1 - (incorrect): Small role 52 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/4")
Press order -1- (correct answer): Small role 11 (3 pieces) (PB = 1)
Press order--1 (incorrect): Small role 66 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/4")
are each eligible for prizes.
In addition, the symbol combinations for each small role are as follows.
Small role 11: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Replay"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "White BAR"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Black BAR"
Small role 66: "White BAR" - "White BAR" - "Bell A"
Small role 66: "White BAR" - "Red 7" - "Bell A"
Small role 66: "Red 7" - "White BAR" - "Bell A"
Small role 66: "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Bell A"
First, when it is the middle first stop (the correct pressing order), "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage (PB=1). Furthermore, when stopping on the left, "Watermelon" is stopped at the middle row (PB=1), and when stopping on the right, "Replay" is stopped at the middle row on the right (PB=1).
As a result, the small winning combination 11 is won.
Also, if it is the first stop on the left, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, and depending on the number of objects, either "Replay", "White BAR", or "Red 7" will be stopped at the middle left row. , here it is determined that "replay" is to be stopped (PB=1).
Moreover, at the time of a subsequent middle stop, the "watermelon" is stopped at the middle middle stage (retraction rate "1/2"). Furthermore, when stopping on the right after that, the "white BAR" or "black BAR" is stopped at the middle right row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" for the sum of the two symbols).
Therefore, at the first stop on the left, the small winning combination 52 is stopped and displayed with a winning rate of "1/4".
Next, when it is the first stop on the right, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, and "Bell A", which has the largest number of symbols, is stopped at the middle row on the right due to number priority (PB=1).
Furthermore, when stopping on the left after that, "White BAR" or "Red 7" is stopped at the middle left row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" for the sum of the two symbols). Furthermore, at the subsequent middle stop, "White BAR" or "Red 7" is stopped at the middle middle row (the pull rate is "1/2" in total of the two symbols).
Therefore, at the first stop on the right, the small winning combination 66 is stopped and displayed with a winning rate of "1/4".

(Example 6) Winning E9 condition device (first correct answer on the right)
In a game in which the small winning combination E9 condition device is activated, any of the small winning combinations 12, 42, 43, and 52 can be won, as shown in FIG. 228.
Also, when the winning E9 condition device is activated,
Press order 1 - (incorrect): Small role 52 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/4")
Press order -1- (incorrect): Small role 42, 43 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/4")
Press order--1 (correct answer): Small role 12 (3 pieces) (PB = 1)
are each eligible for prizes.
In addition, the symbol combinations for each small role are as follows.
Small role 12: "Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Replay"
Small role 42: "Black BAR" - "Replay" - "Cherry"
Small role 42: "Blank A" - "Replay" - "Cherry"
Small role 43: "Black BAR" - "Replay" - "Blank A"
Small role 43: "Blank A" - "Replay" - "Blank A"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "White BAR"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Black BAR"
First, when it is the first stop on the right (correct press order), "Replay" is stopped in the middle right row with priority given to the number of sheets (PB=1). Further, when stopping later on the left, "Watermelon" is stopped at the middle row on the left (PB=1), and when stopping in the middle, "Bell B" is stopped at the middle row on the right (PB=1).
As a result, the small winning combination 12 is won.
Also, if it is the first stop on the left, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, and depending on the number of items, either "Replay", "Black BAR", or "Blank A" will be stopped at the middle left row. , here it is determined that "replay" is to be stopped (PB=1).
Further, at the time of the subsequent middle stop, the "watermelon" is stopped at the middle middle stage (the retraction rate is "1/2"). Furthermore, when stopping on the right after that, the "white BAR" or "black BAR" is stopped at the middle right row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" for the sum of the two symbols).
Therefore, when the first stop is on the left, the small winning combination 52 is won at a winning rate of "1/4".
Next, when it is the middle first stop, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, and the "Replay" with the largest number of symbols is stopped at the middle middle stage due to number priority (PB=1).
Further, when stopping on the left after that, "Black BAR" or "Blank A" is stopped at the middle left row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" in total of the two symbols). Furthermore, when stopping on the right after that, "Cherry" or "Blank A" is stopped in the middle row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" in total of the two symbols).
Therefore, at the middle first stop, the small winning combination 42 or 43 wins with a winning rate of "1/4".

In non-RT or RT1, there is a possibility that winning numbers "72" to "75" may be won (Figures 217 and 219), and when these winning numbers are won, the winning F condition device, winning G condition device, winning H condition device, and winning I condition device will be activated, respectively.
In addition, while the RB is in operation, there is a possibility that the winning numbers "76" to "78" will be won (Figure 221), and when these winning numbers are won, the winning J condition device, winning K condition device, and winning L condition device will be activated, respectively.
An explanation of the reel stop control when these condition devices are activated will be omitted.

Figure 230 is a diagram showing the performance group number in the 17th embodiment.
As shown in step S182 of Fig. 115 (ninth embodiment), in the main process, a performance group number corresponding to the lottery result (winning number) for each game is selected (performance group number selection means 64 in Fig. 1), and the selected performance group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 determines and outputs the performance for the current game based on the received performance group number.
The feature of the seventeenth embodiment is that the winning A1 to A16, winning B1 to B16, and winning C1 to C8 all have the same group number 8. Therefore, when the sub-control board 80 receives the group number 8, it can determine that the push order bell of the winning A1 to A16, winning B1 to B16, or winning C1 to C8 has been won in the current game, but it cannot determine the correct push order.

Here, among the performance group number "8", winnings A1 to A16 and winnings B1 to B16 are all correct answer presses in an irregular press order, so the number of each winning number and the payout in the correct answer press order. Depending on the number of cards, there is a possibility that the expected value when making an irregular push exceeds the specified number (bet number). However, in this embodiment, even if the player knows that the effect group number of the current game is "8" and makes an irregular press, the expected value of the current game is set to be less than or equal to the specified number.
As a result, even if the performance group number transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 is fraudulently acquired due to, for example, cheating, the system is configured such that medals exceeding the specified number cannot be obtained.

FIG. 231 is a diagram explaining the expected value when the performance group number is "8" in the 17th embodiment.
Here, as an example of irregular button presses, the button press sequence 213 will be taken. Although calculations will be omitted, in irregular button presses, the expected value is the same for all of the button press sequences 213, 231, 312, and 321.
In addition, for example, push order 123 will be used. Although calculations are omitted, the expected value for push order 123 and the expected value for push order 132 are the same value.
First, when any of the winning numbers A1 to A16 is won, the payout of 14 coins is obtained when the winning numbers are A1 to A4 in the push order 213. Therefore, when the winning numbers are A1 to A4 in the push order 213, the winning rate of 14 coins is 1/1, so the expected value is 14 (coins).
In addition, in the push order 213, when the winning combination is A5 to A8, the winning rate of 1 coin is 1/2, so the expected value is 0.5 (coins).
Furthermore, in the push sequence 213, when the winning combination is A9 to A16, the winning rate of 1 coin is 1/8, so the expected value is 0.125 (coins).
The above also applies to the winning numbers B1 to B16.
Furthermore, in the push order 213, when the winning combination is C1 to C8, the winning rate of 1 coin is 1/4, so the expected value is 0.25 (coins).

Next, in the pressing sequence 123, if the winning combination is A1 to A8, the winning rate of 1 coin is 1/2, so the expected value is 0.5 (coins).
Furthermore, in the push sequence 123, when the winning combination is A9 to A12, "PB=1" results in a 1-coin combination, so the expected value is "1 (coin)."
Furthermore, in the push sequence 123, when the winning combination is A13 to A14, the winning rate of 1 coin is 1/4, so the expected value is 0.25 (coins).
Also, in the push sequence 123, when the winning combination is A15 to A16, the winning rate of 1 coin is 3/4, so the expected value is 0.75 (coins).
The above also applies to the winning numbers B1 to B16.
Furthermore, in the pressing sequence 123, when the winning combination is C1 to C8, "PB=1" results in a three-coin combination, so the expected value is "3 (coins)."

From the above, when the push order is 213, the expected value when there are prizes A1 to A16 and prizes B1 to B16 is "3.6875 (pieces)".
Further, in the case of the push order 213, the expected value when the winning prize is C1 to C8 is "0.25 (pieces)".
On the other hand, when the push order is 123, the expected value when there are prizes A1 to A16 and prizes B1 to B16 is "0.625 (coins)".
Further, in the case where the push order is 123, the expected value when the winning prize is C1 to C8 is "3 (pieces)".
The winning probabilities (set number "1112") of prizes A1 to A16 are the same. Furthermore, the winning probabilities (input number "1112") of prizes B1 to B16 are the same. Furthermore, the winning probabilities (set number "1113") of prizes C1 to C8 are the same.
Therefore, the total number of prizes A1 to A16, B1 to B16, and C1 to C8 is:
1112×16+1112×16+1113×8
=44488
It is.
Therefore, the probability of winning A1 to A16 when the production group number is "8" is:
(1112×16)/44488
≒0.399928
It is.
The probability of winning B1 to B16 when the performance group number is "8" is also "0.399928" as described above.
Also, when the performance group number is “8”, the probability of winning C1 to C8 is:
(1113×8)/44488
≒0.200144
It is.

Therefore, the expected value when pressing in the order 213 for the performance group number "8" is:
0.399928 x 3.6875 + 0.399928 x 3.6875 + 0.200144 x 0.25
≒ 2.9995 (pieces)
This falls below the specified number of 3.
In addition, the expected value when pressing in the order 123 for the performance group number "8" is:
0.399928 x 0.625 + 0.399928 x 0.625 + 0.200144 x 3
≒ 1.1003 (sheets)
This falls below the specified number of 3.
From the above, even if the player knows that the current game is for the performance group number "8" and presses the irregular buttons, the expected value cannot exceed the specified number "3".

As described above, when the effect group number is "8", the expected value when pressing buttons in an irregular order is higher than the expected value when pressing buttons in the normal order.
However, in the 17th embodiment, in the same manner as in Fig. 105(b) (the 9th embodiment), in the current game in which irregular pushes are performed during a non-AT, the sub-bonus (corresponding to the AT) lottery is not executed, the sub-bonus lottery performed during the current game is invalidated, or a sub-bonus lottery with a lower probability of winning than that during normal pushes is executed. In other words, the expectation degree for the AT in the current game in which irregular pushes are performed during a non-AT is configured to be relatively lower than the expectation degree for the AT in the current game in which normal pushes are performed during a non-AT.
In the case of "invalidating the sub-bonus drawing performed in the current game," for example, when start switch 41 is operated, the sub-bonus drawing is performed as normal (because it is not determined at this point whether or not an irregular press will be performed), and when it is determined that an irregular press has been performed when all buttons are stopped, the sub-bonus drawing for the current game is invalidated (cleared or discarded).
Therefore, similarly to the ninth embodiment, when playing by pressing buttons in order during non-AT and playing according to the pressing order instructions during the AT, the total ball output performance is higher than when playing by pressing buttons in an irregular manner during non-AT and playing according to the pressing order instructions during the AT.
Here, the lower the base during non-AT, the higher the ratio of the role with instructions. Therefore, a common bell can be provided to lower the ratio of the role with instructions. However, since the common bell is a role that can be won regardless of the pressing order (pressing position), the payout rate when pressing irregularly becomes high.
Therefore, by providing a left-biased bell (a push order bell where pushing in order is the correct answer) as in this embodiment, the base during non-AT when playing in order can be lowered while suppressing the ratio of the role with instructions. Furthermore, the payout rate during irregular pushes can be suppressed more than when a common bell is provided to suppress the ratio of the role with instructions.

Furthermore, the seventeenth embodiment includes an SP flag. The SP flag is a flag for determining whether or not it was pressed irregularly in the previous game. For example, when the current game is completely stopped, the SP flag is turned off once, and then when it is determined that the current game is operated in order, the SP flag is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game was operated by irregular pressing, the SP flag is kept off.
Then, move on to the next game, and when the SP flag is on, the normal sub-bonus drawing is executed, and when the SP flag is off, the normal sub-bonus drawing is not executed (whether the sub-bonus drawing is not executed or not). , Although the sub-bonus drawing itself is executed, the sub-bonus drawing result is invalidated afterwards, or a sub-bonus drawing with a lower winning probability than when playing in order is executed), and the SP flag is temporarily set when the next game is completely stopped. is turned off, and then when it is determined that the next game has been operated in order, the SP flag is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined that the next game is operated by an irregular press, the SP flag remains off.
In this way, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated and a hot performance is output (when there is a certain level of expectation of winning the sub-bonus), the order is pressed, and at other times, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, the game When the effect is not output, it is possible to prevent a strategy attack such as an irregular press.

Next, mode lottery in the seventeenth embodiment will be explained.
As described above, in the seventeenth embodiment, a sub-bonus is provided as the same concept as AT. For the sub-bonus, when the sub-bonus starts, a unique symbol combination (a set of "red 7") indicating the start of the sub-bonus is stopped and displayed. Then, when moving to the sub-bonus, in the same way as AT, when a pressing order bell (for example, the above-mentioned prize A to prize E) is won, the correct pressing order is notified. Then, the sub-bonus is continued until the number of coins to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300 coins), and the sub-bonus is ended in a game where the number of coins to be paid out reaches the predetermined number, and the game shifts to a non-AT (normal game).
As the mode lottery of the 17th embodiment,
1) Initial normal mode lottery in the normal section 2) Normal mode lottery executed in the first game of the advantageous section when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section 3) Mode transition lottery executed at the start of the sub-bonus It will be done.
The degree of expectation of transition to the sub-bonus (the degree of expectation of winning, the number of ceiling games, the degree of expectation of transition to a more advantageous mode) differs for each mode (see FIG. 234(a) described later).

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing the initial normal mode lottery in the normal section in the seventeenth embodiment, and (a) shows a flowchart of the normal section lever process (meaning the process when the start switch 41 is operated); b) indicates the lottery number.
The following two types usually stay in the section.
First, when the power is turned on and the RWM is initialized (settings changed), the gaming section is cleared and becomes a normal section. Therefore, the first game after RWM initialization is a normal section.
Second, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the next game will shift to the normal section. In this embodiment, when the difference from the start of the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (coins)", the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ends, and the next game will be the normal section.
Here, it is known that the advantageous section ends when the number of games played since the start of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500 games, 3000 games, etc.). In the seventeenth embodiment, the advantageous section is configured not to end when the number of games is played.

In FIG. 232(a), when the normal section is started, in step S492, it is determined whether the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the current game is the performance group number "2". The performance group number "2" corresponds to the winning of Replay B (winning number "2"). When it is determined that the performance group number is not "2", the process proceeds to step S493, and when it is determined that the performance group number is "2", the process according to this flowchart is ended. That is, when the effect group number is "2" (when replay B is won), the advantageous section transfer lottery is not executed, so the transfer to the advantageous section does not occur (see FIG. 216). Therefore, when it is determined that the production group number is "2", the following initial normal mode lottery is not executed, the next game will also be in the normal section, and the normal section lever process will be executed again.
Proceeding to step S493, it is determined whether the current game is non-RT. The main control board 50 stores current RT information in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and makes decisions based on this information. When it is determined that it is a non-RT (1BB non-internal), the process advances to step S495, and when it is determined that it is not a non-RT, the process advances to step S494.
It is assumed that the RT transition occurs at the end of the current game. Therefore, even if you win 1BB in the current game, it is determined in step S493 that it is a non-RT game.

Here, after the RWM is initialized after power-on, the state is non-RT. This is because after the RWM is initialized after power-on, even if 1BB was won before power-on, the winning information of the 1BB is cleared, and the RT information is also cleared (thereby the RT state becomes non-RT).
In the following explanation, the period not inside the 1BB may be referred to as "first thing in the morning," and the favorable period that has transitioned to not inside the 1BB may be referred to as the "favorable period that has transitioned to first thing in the morning."
On the other hand, the period within 1BB is sometimes referred to as "not first thing in the morning," and the favorable zone that transitioned into within 1BB is sometimes referred to as "the favorable zone that transitioned into other than first thing in the morning."
In addition, when it is unclear whether the favorable zone was entered first thing in the morning, this is sometimes referred to as "first thing in the morning uncertain."

In step S493, it is determined that it is not a non-RT, and when the process proceeds to step S494, it is determined whether or not the performance group number of the current game is "10". The performance group number "10" corresponds to the winning prize E (winning numbers "60" to "71"; see FIG. 219). When it is determined that the performance group number is not "10", the process proceeds to step S495, and when it is determined that the performance group number is "10", the process according to this flowchart is ended. This is because, as shown in FIG. 219, when winning the prize E in RT1, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed, so the next game will not proceed to the advantageous section. Therefore, in this case as well, the normal section lever process will be executed again in the next game. From the above, the normal section lever processing will be executed in the next game (not moving to the advantageous section) when the production group number becomes "2" regardless of non-RT or RT1 (when replay B is won) or first thing in the morning. This is when the performance group number becomes ``10'' (at the time of winning the prize E) other than (RT1).

In step S495, an initial normal mode lottery is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S496, where the lottery result is saved (stored), and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
The initial normal mode lottery in step S495 is performed by the number of entries shown in Fig. 232(b). Note that the denominator of the number of entries shown in Fig. 232(b) is "240", and when the number of entries is "240", the probability of winning is "1/1".
First, in a non-RT, when the presentation group number becomes "0" (1BB only is won), or when the presentation group number becomes "10" (1BB and prize E are both won), normal mode 0 is won.
Here, winning 1BB means that it is determined that the time before the start of the current game is non-RT (not in 1BB mode), so it is determined that it will be first thing in the morning.
Similarly, when the effect group number is "10" and not non-RT, the initial normal mode lottery is not executed, so the effect group number "10" in the current game means that it is non-RT. Therefore, when the effect group number is "10" in the current game, it is confirmed that it is first thing in the morning.

On the other hand, in non-RT or RT1, if the performance group number is "1", "3" to "9", or "11" to "14", the normal mode 1 is won. In addition, the above performance group number has the possibility of winning both when it is the first thing in the morning and when it is not the first thing in the morning, and if you win the above performance group number, you will be eligible for an advantageous section regardless of whether you are in the 1BB non-interior. Therefore, in the game of the above performance group number, it will be uncertain in the morning.
From the above, normal modes 0 and 1 are modes for determining whether it is first in the morning or not, drawn by lottery when the next game shifts to the advantageous section in the normal section, and if normal mode is 0, first in the morning is confirmed. However, if it is normal mode 1, the first thing in the morning is uncertain.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing the normal mode transition process, in which (a) shows a flowchart, and (b) shows the lottery number.
When the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, a normal mode lottery is executed in the first game of the advantageous section. The normal mode after the second game in the advantageous section has numbers "2" to "9" as described later. Therefore, in the advantageous section, the first game is in the normal mode 0 or 1, and the second and subsequent games are in any of the numbers "2" to "9".
In (a) of the figure, when the normal mode transition process is started, it is determined in step S502 whether the normal mode is 0 or 1. When the normal mode is 0 or 1, the process advances to step S503, and when the normal mode is not 0 or 1, the process according to this flowchart is ended. That is, in this example, the normal mode transition process is executed for every game during the advantageous section, but since the answer in step S502 is "No" in any game other than the first game in the advantageous section, the normal mode lottery in step S503 is not executed.
Then, if it is determined in step S502 that the normal mode is 0 or 1 (this is the first game in the advantageous section), the process advances to step S503, and a normal mode lottery is executed. Then, the process advances to step S504, where the normal mode determined by lottery is saved (memorized), and the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 232(b) shows the numbers for the normal mode lottery in four types of patterns.
First, "Non-RT and normal mode 0" corresponds to the case where the performance group number becomes "0" first thing in the morning (winning 1BB alone) and winning 1BB in the game. Note that the normal mode lottery is not executed during the 1BB game (the normal mode transition process is not entered). Therefore, "Non-RT and normal mode 0" indicates the normal mode lottery in the first game (non-RT) after the end of the 1BB game. This kind of thing can actually happen, but it is a rare case.
In addition, "RT1 and normal mode 0" means that first thing in the morning the production group number is "0" (1BB wins alone) and 1BB does not win, or first thing in the morning the production group number is "10" (1BB and winning E). (in this case, the minor winning combinations included in winning E are won with priority, so there is no case where 1BB wins), which corresponds to the case where the winning is shifted to an advantageous section.
Furthermore, "Non-RT and normal mode 1" corresponds to a case where the production group number is other than "0" or "10" first thing in the morning and shifts to an advantageous section.
Furthermore, "RT1 and normal mode 1" corresponds to a case where the vehicle shifts to an advantageous section other than first thing in the morning. In addition, at times other than first thing in the morning, the performance group number "0" (single winning of 1BB) will not be achieved. Furthermore, in cases other than first thing in the morning, the performance group number becomes "10" and does not shift to the advantageous section.
Therefore, the case where the transition to the advantageous section occurs other than first thing in the morning corresponds to when the production group number becomes "1", "3" to "9", or "11" to "14" other than first thing in the morning.

In the above normal mode lottery,
Winning number “0”: Heaven B preparation mode Winning number “1”: Normal A mode Winning number “2”: Normal B mode Winning number “3”: Normal C mode Winning number “4”: Heaven A mode Get elected.
The normal A mode, normal B mode, and normal C mode are modes that are not advantageous to the player (it is difficult to win a sub-bonus). On the other hand, the heaven B preparation mode and the heaven A mode are modes that are advantageous to the player (in which it is easy to win a sub-bonus).

In "Non-RT and normal mode 0", "RT1 and normal mode 0", and "Non-RT and normal mode 1", the setting number to shift to Heaven B preparation mode is "0", Moreover, since the number set to shift to the heaven A mode is "1", the mode does not shift to a mode advantageous to the player in most cases.
On the other hand, in "RT1 and normal mode 1", there is a 100% probability of transition to heaven B preparation mode.
Here, there is no case where the production group number becomes "0" (single winning of 1BB) other than first thing in the morning, and if the production group number becomes "10" other than first thing in the morning, the advantageous section transition lottery will not be executed, so the advantageous section does not move to
Therefore, if the normal mode lottery is executed other than first thing in the morning, there is a 100% probability that the game will shift to Heaven B preparation mode (a mode advantageous to players), and if the normal mode lottery is executed first thing in the morning, most of the Since the game does not shift to a mode advantageous to the player, it is configured such that the ball payout rate in advantageous sections to which the mode is shifted other than first thing in the morning is higher than the ball payout rate in advantageous sections to which the shift is made first thing in the morning.
In other words, it is possible to make the advantageous section that has shifted to the first in the morning (non-internal) more disadvantageous to the player (lower the ball payout rate) than the advantageous section that has shifted to other than the first in the morning (internal), so the settings can be changed. It is possible to prevent the advantageous section first thing in the morning from becoming excessively advantageous in the event of a situation (so-called morning countermeasures). Furthermore, since the advantageous section that is shifted to other than first thing in the morning always starts from the heaven B preparation mode, the player's desire to play can be increased even after completing the advantageous section.
Note that, contrary to the above, if it is made to be advantageous for the player (increasing the ball payout rate) when the player moves to the advantageous section first thing in the morning, it is possible to promote the first thing in the morning.

FIG. 234 is a diagram explaining the types and characteristics of normal modes "2" to "9".
(a) in the figure shows the characteristics of each normal mode (2 to 9), and (b) in the figure shows the transition probability (lottery placement number) of the normal mode at the start of the sub-bonus.
As described above, the normal mode is drawn at the first game in the advantageous section, and after that, the normal mode transition drawing is executed every time the sub-bonus starts.
In (a) of the figure, the normal modes advantageous to the player are heaven B preparation mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode. Furthermore, the heaven B pullback mode is advantageous for the player in terms of the probability of winning the sub-bonus.
In each normal mode, the ceiling number of games until winning the sub-bonus and the probability of winning the sub-bonus are set. During each normal mode, a sub-bonus is drawn based on the winning numbers in each game with the winning probability shown in FIG. 234(a). Further, each normal mode has a ceiling number of games, and when the ceiling number of games is reached without winning a sub-bonus, the sub-bonus winning flag is forcibly set (the sub-bonus is won). After winning the sub-bonus, after a predetermined number of premonitory games from "0", the symbol combination ("red 7" all together) corresponding to the sub-bonus can be stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to the sub-bonus (“red 7” all together) is stopped, the sub-bonus will be executed from the next game.

On the other hand, regardless of the normal mode in which the player is playing, if the winning number "2" (Replay B) is won, the sub-bonus will be won. When the winning number "2" is won, as described above, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 04, i.e., the "red 7" combination, can be stopped by pressing the stop switch 42 in the reverse order. Therefore, in a game in which the winning number is "2", a notification is issued instructing the player to press the stop switch 42 in the reverse order, making it possible to stop the "red 7" combination, and when the "red 7" combination is stopped and displayed in that game, the sub-bonus will start from the next game.

Here, when the winning number "2" is won and the stop switch 42 is pushed backwards to stop and display the "Red 7" series, the game is the main game.
On the other hand, any other game that stops and displays "Red 7" matches is not a real game but a pseudo (also referred to as "pseudo") game effect.
Here, "pseudo game production" is a stop for operating a rotation stop device for the rotating reels 31 after the reels 31 start rotating until the rotation speed of the reels 31 becomes constant. Triggered by the operation of the switch 42, the reels 31 are pseudo-stopped (the stop in this case is also referred to as a "temporary stop" or "pseudo-stop". Hereinafter, referred to as a "temporary stop"), and an arbitrary symbol combination is displayed. It refers to a performance that causes The "pseudo game performance" is also referred to as the "reel performance."
On the other hand, in contrast to the above-mentioned "pseudo game performance," a game for displaying a symbol combination as a game result (a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination lottery result) is referred to as a "main game."
The symbol combination temporarily stopped by the pseudo game performance does not display the game result. After the symbol combination is temporarily stopped by the pseudo game performance, the symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the main game, and the game result is displayed.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a sub-bonus is won and the conditions for executing a pseudo-game presentation are met (for example, when the number of premonition plays has been exhausted), the pseudo-game presentation will be executed a maximum of four times until the "red 7" pattern temporarily stops.
Also, during the pseudo game presentation, it may be possible to inform the player that it is a pseudo game presentation, in other words, that it is not a real game. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game presentation for the real game.
Furthermore, when all reels 31 are temporarily stopped during the pseudo game presentation, the reels 31 are not stopped, but the motor 32 is driven and controlled so that the patterns move up and down at predetermined time intervals (so that they vibrate slightly up and down) (this is called ``swing fluctuation'' or ``swing fluctuation control''), thereby informing the player that this is a temporary stop in the pseudo game presentation, and not a stop that displays the game result in the actual game (actual stop).
When the game is shifted to the main game after all the reels 31 are stopped by the pseudo game presentation, when the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation start timing of each reel 31 is made different by random delay processing.

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing a pseudo game presentation of "Red 7". This flowchart does not include the main game when the winning number "2" is won and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed by pressing the reverse button.
First, in step S581, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated, and when determining that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S582. In step S82, it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting the pseudo game are satisfied. Here, it means the sub-bonus confirmed state (main gaming state) after winning the sub-bonus and exhausting the number of portent games.
When it is determined that the conditions for starting the pseudo game are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S583, and when it is determined that the conditions are not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S583, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the number "N" of consecutive pseudo game effects. The initial value of "N" is "0".

Next, the process advances to step S584, and the main control board 50 determines whether "N" is "4" or not. When it is determined that "N" is not "4", the process advances to step S585, and when it is determined that "N" is "4", the process advances to step S591.
In step S585, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect that informs the player that he will aim for "red 7" by pressing in order. Then, the process advances to step S586. In step S586, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated, and when determining that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S587. In step S587, the reel control means 65 executes a temporary stop process to draw "Red 7" into the active line within a maximum of four frames.
Next, the process advances to step S588, and the main control board 50 determines whether all the reels 31 have temporarily stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have been temporarily stopped, the process proceeds to step S589, and when it is determined that all the reels 31 have not been temporarily stopped, the process returns to step S586.

In step S589, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the "Red 7" set has temporarily stopped on the valid line. When it is determined that the "Red 7" set has been temporarily stopped, the process proceeds to step S590, and the process moves to the sub-bonus. On the other hand, when it is determined that the "Red 7" set is not temporarily stopped and displayed, the "Red 7" match pseudo game effect is repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S584 that "N" is "4", the process advances to step S591. In step S591, the reel control means 65 automatically temporarily stops all the rotating reels 31 and temporarily stops them when all the reels 31 are aligned with "Red 7". Here, the reels 31 may be temporarily stopped in the order of the left, middle, and right reels 31, or all the reels 31 may be temporarily stopped almost simultaneously. Then, the process proceeds to step S590, and the sub-bonus is started.
The pseudo-game presentation described above allows the player to match "Red 7", but if the player fails to match "Red 7" three times in a row, the fourth pseudo-game presentation requires the player to press the stop switch. To automatically temporarily stop a set of "red 7" without operating 42. Thereby, the transition process to the sub-bonus can be quickly performed.

Although not shown, when the winning number "2" is won when the sub-bonus is not in progress, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect informing the player that he is aiming for "red 7" by pressing the reverse button. Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated by a reverse push, the reel control means 65 executes a stop control process (main game) to draw "Red 7" to the active line with a maximum of four frames. As mentioned above, in a game where the winning number "2" is won, by pressing the reverse button, "Red 7" can be arranged, that is, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 04 can be stopped on the active line. Further, when it is not possible to stop the "Red 7" alignment by reverse pressing (the player fails to press the eyes), the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, even in a game in which the winning number "2" is won, if the stop switch 42 is not operated by reverse pressing, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 is stopped and displayed.
When it is not possible to stop and display a set of "red 7" in a game in which the winning number "2" is won, a pseudo game performance (pseudo game) of a set of "red 7" is executed in the next game. However, this is not limited to this, and if it is not possible to stop and display "Red 7" in a game in which the winning number "2" is won, the sub-bonus will be started from the next game without going through the pseudo game. Good too.
Note that even if the main game state is the sub-bonus confirmed state, the sub-state may be in the premonitory state (a state in which the confirmation screen is not displayed). In such a case, it is optional whether or not it is determined that the conditions for starting the pseudo game are satisfied. However, in the sub-state, the notification of "Red 7" is not executed because it is a sign, but in the main game state, if the sub-bonus is confirmed, a pseudo-game is executed, and in the pseudo-game, the player aims for "Red 7". It can be stopped by

The explanation returns to FIG. 234.
As described above, the heaven B preparation mode is a normal mode that is selected with a 100% probability when the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section other than first thing in the morning.
Then, when the sub-bonus starts under the condition of Heaven B preparation mode, a normal mode transition lottery is made, and as shown in FIG. Even after the bonus ends, it will remain in Heaven B Preparation Mode) and will transition to Heaven B Mode with a 50% probability. That is, while the player continues to stay in the heaven B preparation mode, the heaven B preparation mode is maintained or the player shifts to the heaven B mode, which is advantageous for the player.
Further, the normal A mode, normal B mode, and normal C mode are disadvantageous modes for the player. Then, as the mode changes to normal A mode, normal B mode, and normal C mode, the mode becomes closer to heaven. For example, in normal A mode, the probability of no transition is highest, and in the case of transition, the probability of transition to normal B mode is highest. Further, in the normal B mode, the probability of no transition is the highest, and in the case of a transition, the probability of transitioning to the normal C mode is the highest. Furthermore, there is no case of falling from the normal B mode to the normal A mode. Furthermore, in normal C mode, the probability of transitioning to heaven A mode is the highest, and there is no case of falling to normal A mode or normal B mode.
As shown in FIG. 234(b), when changing from the normal A mode to another normal mode, the normal mode B is transferred, and when changing from the normal B mode to another normal mode, the normal mode is transferred to the normal C mode. Therefore, when staying in the normal C mode, there is a high possibility of staying in the normal mode for the longest time. Of the normal A mode, normal B mode, and normal C mode, the normal C mode is the easiest to shift to the heaven C mode. In other words, the difference counter value is not referred to when shifting to the normal mode, but the longer the normal C mode continues to be disadvantageous to the player, the easier it is to shift to the heaven C mode.

Heaven A mode is a mode that does not transition (loops) with a probability of 60% (144/240), and if the loop is missed, it transitions to normal A mode or normal B mode.
The heaven B mode is a mode that does not transition (loops) with a probability of 90% (216/240), and if it leaks from the loop, it transitions to the heaven B pullback mode.
In the heaven B pullback mode, the pullback rate to the heaven B mode is 20% (48/240), and if the pullback is not possible, the mode transitions to the normal A mode or the normal B mode.
Heaven C mode is a mode without transition, and is a so-called completion mode that is maintained until the end of the advantageous section, that is, until the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section exceeds "2400."
Further, conditions for transition to heaven C mode are defined. In the case where the transition to heaven C mode is won, if the remaining difference number at that time is "1000" or more, the transition to heaven C mode is made. On the other hand, in the case where the transition to heaven C mode is won, if the remaining difference number at that time is less than "1000", the transition to heaven A mode is made.

From the above, for example,
1) When the number of differences in the advantageous section exceeds "2400" after repeating the 60% loop in Heaven A mode,
2) When the number of differences in the advantageous section exceeds "2400" by maintaining Heaven B preparation mode or transitioning to Heaven B mode,
3) If the number of differences in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 after transitioning to Heaven C mode, the respective advantageous section ends.
When the advantageous section ends, the next game will shift to the normal section.
When the normal section is entered, the normal section lever process shown in FIG. 232 is executed, and the normal mode 1 is entered. Then, in the case of RT1 and normal mode 1, as shown in FIG. 233, the heaven B preparation mode is definitely won.
When transitioning to heaven B preparation mode, the vehicle stays in heaven B preparation mode until transitioning to heaven B mode, and after transitioning to heaven B mode, heaven B mode loops at 90%. As a result, there is a high possibility that in the next advantageous section, the difference number in the advantageous section will exceed "2400" and the advantageous section will end.
In this way, it is possible to repeat the advantageous section that ends with the difference number exceeding "2400" multiple times.

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the effect processing when the advantageous section is repeated a plurality of times as described above. This process is performed by the sub-control board 80.
First, in step S622, it is determined whether the advantageous section has started. When it is determined that the advantageous section has started, the process advances to step S623.
In step S623, it is determined whether the heaven modes (any one of heaven A mode, heaven B preparation mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode) in the advantageous section are continuous. Here, if the end of the previous advantageous section is one of Heaven A mode, Heaven B preparation mode, Heaven B mode, or Heaven C mode, and the start of the next advantageous section is Heaven B preparation mode, determines that the heaven mode in the advantageous section is continuous. When it is determined that the heaven mode in the advantageous section is continuous, the process proceeds to step S624, and when it is determined that the heaven mode in the advantageous section is not continuous, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S624, the advantageous section continuous counter provided on the sub-control board 80 side is set to "+1". Then, the process proceeds to step S625, and the sub-control board 80 executes continuous production of advantageous sections. Here, based on the value of the advantageous section continuous counter, for example, when the value of the advantageous section continuous counter is "1" (the number of consecutive advantageous sections is "2"), the frame lamp among the production lamps 21 is lit in blue. For example, when the value of the continuous advantageous section counter is "2", the frame lamp is lit in yellow, and when the value of the continuous advantageous section counter is "3", the frame lamp is lit in green. . In other words, by looking at the display of the frame lamp (casing) of the gaming machine 10, it is possible to roughly understand how many consecutive times the advantageous section has been played in heaven mode.
Further, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the total number of coins acquired in the heaven mode in the previous advantageous section, and stores the total number of coins acquired. Then, after moving to the next advantageous section, if it is in heaven mode, the cumulative value from the total number of coins acquired in heaven mode in the previous advantageous section is displayed as an image, and the predetermined number of games from the start of the current advantageous section ( For example, when the sub-bonus is started within 100 games, it is assumed that the heaven mode continues, and the total number of acquired coins continues to be displayed.
Note that during the heaven mode loop, the total number of acquired coins may be displayed even when the sub-bonus is not in progress, but the total acquired number may be displayed only during the sub-bonus.

Furthermore, when displaying an image of the total number of coins acquired across multiple advantageous sections, a predetermined image (for example, an icon) is displayed every time the number of acquired coins reaches "+2000" until the heaven loop is passed. (From then on, the predetermined image is changed or increased every time the number of images increases to +2000.)
Note that at the end of the advantageous section, the main control board 50 side clears the parameters related to the advantageous section, but the sub control board 80 side does not clear the parameters related to the advantageous section (such as the above-mentioned total number of acquired coins).
However, this is not limited to the above, and if the advantageous section is crossed, the total number of acquired coins may not be carried over and may be reset.

After outputting the advantageous section continuous effect in step S625, in the next step S626, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has ended. When it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, the process returns to step S622, and when it is determined that the advantageous period has not ended, the process proceeds to step S627.
In step S627, it is determined whether the heaven mode of the advantageous section has ended. Here, when the loop of the heaven mode is exited, it is determined that the heaven mode of the advantageous section has ended. When it is determined that the heaven mode of the advantageous section has ended, the process proceeds to step S628, and when it is determined that the heaven mode of the advantageous section has not ended, the process returns to step S625.
In step S628, the continuous performance of the advantageous section is ended. For example, when a frame lamp effect is being executed as described above, the effect is ended. Further, when the total number of coins acquired from the heaven mode in the previous advantageous section is being displayed, the display is ended.
Next, the process advances to step S629, where the advantageous section continuous counter is cleared. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
As described above, by performing a continuous performance of advantageous sections, it is possible to appeal to those around the player that the player has acquired a large amount of medals. Particularly in the case of a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, since the medals that have actually been won cannot be seen, the continuous production of advantageous sections becomes more effective.
Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 236, the advantageous section continuous presentation ends when the heaven mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the advantageous section continuous presentation ends after the end of the heaven mode, for example, up to about 100 games. good.
Furthermore, when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section, in this embodiment, in most cases, the first game of the normal section wins the advantageous section transition lottery, and the next game becomes the advantageous section again. In this case, an advantageous section continuous effect may be performed including a normal section between an advantageous section and the next advantageous section.
When performing advantageous section continuous performance during the normal section, it is possible to notify that the heaven loop continues even during the normal section, so it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously quitting the game.
On the other hand, in the normal section, it is not necessary to perform the advantageous section continuous effect. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the AT lottery will be executed even in the normal section.

Next, a complete function in the seventeenth embodiment will be explained. The "complete function" corresponds to the stop function of the gaming machine (ending the subsequent games of the day).
In the seventeenth embodiment, first, a difference counter counts the number of differences in the advantageous section.
Here, "the number of difference in the advantageous section" refers to the difference in the number of sheets when the start time of the advantageous section is set to "0". In other words, unlike the difference counters of the other embodiments described above, the starting time of the advantageous section is used as the reference ("0") instead of the difference number (MY) from the minimum value in the advantageous section. Therefore, when the difference number becomes a negative value during the advantageous section, the negative value is counted. Also, similar to the other embodiments described above, the difference counter does not count the number of games during the normal period.
For example, the difference counter is a 2-byte decrement counter. Then, when the difference in number during the advantageous section exceeds "+2400 (sheets)," it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
Here, as a first example of the difference counter, "+2415" (sheets) ("096Fh" in hexadecimal) is set as the initial value at the start of the advantageous section, and when the difference number of the current game is negative. A method is to add the difference number to a difference number counter, and when the difference number of the current game is positive, to subtract the difference number from the difference number counter.
To explain specifically, first, at the start of the advantageous period, "+2415" was set, and the difference in the first game was "-3 (sheets)" (number of bets: "3", number of payouts: "0") If so, "3" is added to the difference counter and the difference counter is updated to "+2418". On the other hand, if the difference number in the first game is "+11 (sheets)" (number of bets "3", number of payouts "14"), "11" is subtracted from the difference number counter, and the difference number counter is is updated to "+2404".
When the difference counter becomes "0", it is determined that the difference number in the advantageous section exceeds "+2400", and the advantageous section ends.
It is assumed that the difference counter value in the examples of FIGS. 237 and 238, which will be described later, increases as the difference number in the current game increases.

In addition, as a second example of the difference counter, the start of the advantageous section is set to "0", and when the difference counter exceeds "+2400" (in hexadecimal notation), the difference counter is One method is to determine that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied when the value is equal to or greater than "0961h."
In addition, in the difference counter and stop counter shown below, when indicating a hexadecimal number, "h" is attached to the numerical value. If "h" is not added to a numerical value, it is a decimal number. Moreover, when a minus sign is not attached to the difference counter value, it indicates that it is plus.
Furthermore, as described above, in the seventeenth embodiment, the number of games played during the advantageous period is not included in the end condition of the advantageous period, so the number of games played during the advantageous period is not counted.
In both the first example and the second example, when the advantageous section ends, the difference counter is cleared.

Further, in the seventeenth embodiment, secondly, a stop counter counts MY from the time of power-on. Here, "MY" is a value when the minimum value is "0", similar to the difference counter in the other embodiments described above.
The stop counter is initialized to "0000h" when the power is turned on.
For example, when the power is turned on,
1st game: Number of bets “3”, number of payouts “0”, stop counter “0000h”
2nd game: Number of bets “3”, number of payouts “14”, stop counter “000Bh”
3rd game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", stop counter "0008h"
4th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", stop counter "0005h"
5th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", stop counter "0002h"
6th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", stop counter "0000h"
:
becomes.
Here, in the first game above, the difference number is "-3", so if you add the difference number "-3" to the initial value "0000h" of the stop counter, it becomes "FFFDh", but the digit is lowered. When this occurs, it is corrected to "0000h" each time.
Similarly, in the sixth game, the difference number is "-3", so adding the difference number "-3" to the stop counter "0002h" results in "FFFFh", which becomes "0000h" by correction.
When the value of the stop counter from when the power is turned on reaches "19000" (4A38h), the complete function is activated, the game machine 10 is stopped, and subsequent games (operation for the day) are ended. do.
Note that, unlike the difference counter, the stopping counter counts MY even in the normal section.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing changes in the difference counter and stop counter in the seventeenth embodiment.
First, the point when the power is turned on and the RWM is initialized corresponds to "A" in the figure. At point "A" in the figure, both the difference counter and the stop counter are "0".
Immediately after the power is turned on for RWM initialization, it is a normal section, so the normal section is started, and it is assumed that the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section at the point "B" in the figure. Therefore, at this time point "B" (at the start of the advantageous section), the difference counter is "0". During the normal period, the difference counter is not updated.

Furthermore, the difference number decreases from point "B" in the figure, and when it reaches point "C", the difference number counter value at this point "C" is "B-C". Also, the hit limit counter value is "0".
Then, if a sub-bonus or the like is executed in the advantageous zone, and the difference number increases to reach point "D", and the difference number "D-B" exceeds "2400", the condition for ending the advantageous zone is met at point "D", the advantageous zone ends, and the next game will be in the normal zone, and if the condition for transitioning to the advantageous zone is met in the normal zone, the game will transition to the advantageous zone.
Next, when the point "E" in the figure is reached and the play-stop counter value "EC" reaches "19000", the complete function is activated and the gaming machine 10 comes to a play-stop.

In addition, in FIG. 237, the dashed line indicates the case where the number of differences continues to increase after the power is turned on, and the stop counter reaches "19000" in the shortest time.
In the figure, "FA" is "19000".
Here, the minimum game time (the shortest time from the start of rotation of the reels 31 in the current game to the start of rotation in the next game) is set to "4.1" seconds.
On the other hand, under the Act on the Regulation of Entertainment Businesses, etc. and the Appropriation of Business Operations (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "Entertainment Business Law,""Entertainment Business Law," or "Entertainment Business Law"), "Pachinko ``ya'' is stipulated. The Entertainment Business Act does not, in principle, permit all entertainment businesses to operate from midnight to 6 a.m. (Article 13 of the Act). For this reason, the maximum number of hours a pachinko parlor can operate in a day is 18 hours. Furthermore, among the business hours stipulated by each prefecture's ordinances, the shortest is 13 hours.
Furthermore, although specific calculations are omitted, based on the number table and condition device mentioned above, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and furthermore to the sub-bonus will occur in the shortest possible time until the difference counter exceeds "2400". Considering that if the sub-bonus is continued and the difference counter exceeds "2400", the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section, the net increase in the number of coins per game is set to about "6".
That is, if each game takes 4.1 seconds and the net number of coins added per game is 6, the net number of coins added per hour is approximately 5268. Therefore, it takes approximately 3.6 hours for MY to reach 19000.
Therefore, the stop counter may reach "19000" within one day's business hours (minimum 13 hours, maximum 18 hours).
In this way, by setting the value of the stop counter at which the complete function will be activated and the net increase in the number of coins per game so that the complete function can be activated during the business hours of a pachinko parlor in one day, It is possible to prevent a player's gambling spirit from being significantly stimulated.

FIG. 238 is a diagram showing the relationship between the difference counter, stop counter, and power on/off. It is assumed that "power off" and "power return" in the graph in FIG. 238 are simple power on/off operations, and RWM clear (setting change) has not been performed.
As shown in FIG. 238, for example, when the power is cut off in a situation where the stop counter and difference counter values are predetermined values, and then the power is restored, the stop counter is cleared. Therefore, after recovery from power-off, the process starts from "0000h" (dotted chain line in the figure).
On the other hand, the difference counter is not cleared. Therefore, after recovery from a power outage, the value resumes from the value before the power outage (solid line in the figure).
In addition, the lower table in FIG. 238 shows the status of the difference counter and stop counter between power on/off without RWM clear and power on/off with RWM clear.
As described above, when the power is turned on/off without clearing the RWM, the difference counter is held, but the stop counter is cleared. On the other hand, when the power is turned on/off (for example, when changing settings) when the RWM is cleared, both the difference counter and the stop counter are cleared.

Furthermore, the "complete function activation flag" is a flag that turns on when the stop counter reaches "19000" and the complete function is activated. For example, it is composed of 1 byte data, and when it is off. is a flag that is "00h" and is "FFh" when it is on.
Furthermore, the "complete function provisional flag" is turned on when the stop counter reaches "19000" but the complete function cannot be activated, for example, in a special game state (accessories are in operation). This flag is composed of, for example, 1-byte data, and is "00h" when off, and "FFh" when on.
These complete function activation flags and complete function temporary flags are configured not to be cleared by turning on/off the power without clearing the RWM.

Therefore, although the details will be described later, for example, when the stoppage counter reaches "19000" during the special game state, the complete function activation flag remains off, but the temporary complete function flag turns on. Then, if the power is turned off before the special gaming state ends and then returns, the complete function provisional flag will be turned on, so when the special gaming state ends after the power is turned off, the complete function will be returned. The complete function can be activated by turning on the function activation flag.
However, when the power is turned on/off (when changing settings) with RWM clear, both the complete function activation flag and the temporary complete function flag are cleared.

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the flow from power-on to main processing, and includes processing related to the complete function.
In this flowchart, each process of FIG. 42 (power recovery process) and FIG. 46 (main process) is shown in a simplified manner.
First, when the power is turned on in step S511, a power-on process is executed in the next step S512. One of the power-on processes includes initialization processing of a predetermined storage area. Here, in the case of power-on without RWM clearing, initialization processing (clearing processing) of a stop counter is executed as one of the initialization processing. On the other hand, the initialization process of the difference counter, complete function activation flag, and complete function temporary flag is not executed.
On the other hand, in the case of power-on with RWM clear, all of the stop counter, difference counter, complete function activation flag, and complete function temporary flag are initialized.
Next, the process advances to step S513, where error processing is performed. During this error processing, processing related to the complete function is executed as described later.
The processing from the next step S515 to step S523 is the same as the processing from step S273 to step S300 in FIG. 46, so a description thereof will be omitted.
Furthermore, in this example, complete function calculation processing is executed in step S525 after the game ends. This process is a process of updating a stop counter, etc., and is a process shown in FIG. 241, which will be described later.
Next, the process advances to step S526, and a gaming state update process is executed. This process is the same as the process in step S301 in FIG. 46, so the explanation will be omitted. Then, the process returns to step S513.

FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing error processing in step S513 of FIG. 239.
First, in step S531, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is in a special game state (accessories are in operation). This is because, in this embodiment, the complete function is not activated even if the complete function activation condition (stopping condition) is satisfied in the special game state. When it is determined that the special game state is in effect, the process proceeds to step S537, and other error processing other than the processing related to the complete operation is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S531 that there is no special gaming state, the process advances to step S532. In step S532, the complete function activation flag is read. Then, in the next step S533, it is determined whether the complete function activation flag is "FFh" (on). When it is determined that it is "FFh", the process advances to step S534, and when it is determined that it is not "FFh", the process advances to step S537.

In step S534, the main control board 50 notifies the operation of the complete function. In this process, a complete function activation signal is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, and a completion function activation signal is notified on the image display device 23 or the like.
Next, the process advances to step S535, and the main control board 50 executes automatic payment processing. Note that it is optional whether or not to automatically settle the credited medals when the complete function is activated, and if automatic settlement is to be performed when the complete function is activated, automatic settlement processing is executed in step S535. do. On the other hand, if automatic payment is not to be executed when the complete function is activated, the process of step S535 is not executed.
Next, the process advances to step S536, and a complete signal is output to the outside. This ends the error handling. Further, when the process advances to step S536, the process does not proceed to steps S515 and subsequent steps in FIG. 239. As a result, the operation switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42) are not accepted, and the game cannot proceed.
In this example, the process related to the activation of the complete function is executed within the error process in step S513, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the process related to the activation of the complete function can be provided independently as the process following the error process, The processes of steps S531 to S536 in FIG. 240 may be executed.

FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the complete function calculation process in step S525 of FIG. 239.
First, in step S541, the main control board 50 determines whether the temporary complete function flag is on (FFh). If it is determined that the temporary complete function flag is not on, the process advances to step S542, and if it is determined that it is on, the process advances to step S548.
In step S542, the main control board 50 determines whether the complete function activation flag is on (FFh). If it is determined that the complete function is on, that is, the complete function is already in operation, the process according to this flowchart ends. This is because if the complete function has already been activated, the process of updating the stop counter etc. will not be executed.
In step S542, it is determined that the complete function activation flag is not on, and when the process proceeds to step S543, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a replay operation is in progress. In this embodiment, the stop counter is not updated during the replay operation, so when it is determined that the replay operation is in progress, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
When it is determined that the replay operation is not in progress, the process advances to step S544. In step S544, the stop counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts for the current game.

In the next step S545, it is determined whether the stop counter has become less than "0", that is, whether a digit has fallen. When it is determined that the stop counter is not less than "0", the process advances to step S546, and when it is determined that it is less than "0", the process advances to step S551.
In step S551, the stop counter value is corrected to "0". As a result, the minimum value of MY becomes "0". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when the process advances from step S545 to step S546, the main control board 50 determines whether the stop counter value has reached "19000". As described above, when the stop counter value is equal to or greater than "4A38h", it is determined that it has reached "19000". When it is determined that the stop counter has reached "19000", the process advances to step S547, and when it is determined that the stop counter has not reached "19000", the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S547, the temporary complete function flag is turned on (FFh). Next, the process proceeds to step S548, and it is determined whether or not the current game is in a special game state (during 1BB game, RB game, etc.). Note that when the special game state ends in the current game (for example, when it is the final game of a 1BB game), the special game state has ended at the time of step S525, so it is determined that the special game state is not in the special game state.
When it is determined that the special gaming state is in effect, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. Therefore, in the special game state, when the stop counter reaches "19000", the complete function provisional flag is turned on in step S547, but the complete function activation flag is not turned on (FFh) since step S549 is not executed. Therefore, the complete function does not operate in the special game state.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S548 that there is no special gaming state, the process advances to step S549. In step S549, the main control board 50 turns on the complete function activation flag (FFh). Next, the process advances to step S550, and the temporary complete function flag is turned off (00h). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. When the complete function activation flag is turned on in step S549, the complete function is activated in steps S513 of FIG. 239 and FIG. 240 at the start of the next game.
In addition, in the special game state, when the complete function temporary flag is turned on in step S547, the complete function temporary flag remains on (the complete function activation flag is turned off) until the special game state ends, and the special game state is At the end of the process, the complete function activation flag is turned on (step S549), and the temporary complete function flag is turned off (step S550).

Next, image control by the sub-control board 80 regarding the complete function will be explained.
FIG. 242 shows images for advance notice (advance notification) of the completion function operation, in which (a) shows a game screen, (b) shows a demonstration screen, and (c) shows a menu screen.
After the power is turned on, the sub-control board 80 independently counts the stopping counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop counter value may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 at the end of each game.
If the complete function is suddenly activated when the stop counter reaches "19000", the player will be surprised. Therefore, when the activation of the complete function is approaching, the player is notified of the activation of the complete function.

The sub-control board 80 notifies the activation of the complete function when the stop counter reaches "18900", in other words, when there are "100" sheets remaining until the complete function is activated.
As shown in (a), (b), and (c) in the figure, whether it is a game screen, a demonstration screen, or a menu screen, for example, as in this example, the message "100 cards remaining until the complete function is activated" is displayed. " is displayed.
Further, when the stop counter reaches, for example, "+11" pieces in the next game, the preview image of the complete function activation is updated to display "89 pieces remaining until the complete function activates." In this way, the completion function activation is announced in such a way that the quantitative change until the complete function activation condition (the stop counter reaches "19000") can be visually recognized.
In the figure, the region of the preview image of the complete function activation is shown by a dot pattern, and this dot pattern region represents the forefront layer. Therefore, for example, if there is an area where a predetermined display on the screen and a preview image for activation of the complete function overlap, the preview image for activation of the complete function is displayed for the overlapping area, and the predetermined image (back layer) is displayed. Not done.
Also in other drawings to be described later, the area indicated by the dot pattern indicates the foremost layer.

In the above example, when the complete function is activated when the stop counter reaches "19000", the complete function activation is announced when the stop counter reaches "18900".
Here, if the stop counter value reaches ``19000'' without decreasing after the complete function activation is announced, the time limit from when the stop counter value reaches ``18900'' until it reaches ``19000'' is determined. All the while, the complete function operation is announced.
On the other hand, when the value of the stop counter decreases after the stop counter reaches "18900" and the value of the stop counter reaches a predetermined value, the notification of the complete function operation is ended.
Here, if the stop counter rises and falls with the progress of the game with the threshold value "18900", the state in which the complete function is activated and the state in which the complete function is not activated will frequently change, for example, when the complete function is activated. Preview images are sometimes displayed and sometimes not.
Therefore, in this embodiment, once the completion function activation is announced, the completion function activation warning is maintained until the stop counter becomes less than a predetermined value ("18850" in this embodiment).

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing a transition between a section in which the complete function operation is announced (advance notification) and a section in which no advance notice is given. In the figure, the solid line is the section where the complete function operation is predicted, and the wavy line is the section where it is not predicted.
In FIG. 243, when the value of the stop counter reaches "A"(MY1="18900") in the figure, the condition for foretelling the complete function operation is satisfied, and therefore the complete function operation is announced from this point on.
Then, as the game progresses, the value of the stop counter falls below "MY1 (18900)" at point "B" in the figure, but the notice of the completion function activation continues.
Then, when the value of the stop counter becomes less than "MY2 (18850)" at point "C" in the figure, the advance notice of the complete function operation ends and the process moves to a section where no advance notice is given.

Once the transition is made to the section where no advance notice is given, the next time the stop counter does not reach "18900" (MY1), the section does not become the section where the complete function operation is given notice. In the example of FIG. 243, the stop counter reaches "18900" (MY1) at time "D" in the figure, and the time period is again set to foretell that the complete function will be activated.
Note that when the stop counter reaches "19000", the complete function is activated, so the advance notice of the complete function activation ends.
Further, the difference "MY1-MY2" between the stop counter "MY1", which is the section where the complete function operation is predicted, and the stop counter "MY2", which is the section where no notice is given, is set to "50" in this example. Here, "MY1-MY2" is preferably larger than the maximum number of differences in one game ("11 pieces" in the 17th embodiment). In this way, it is possible to prevent the interval in which the complete function operation is foretold and the interval in which it is not forewarned to change (frequently) in one game.

Fig. 244 is a diagram showing an example of displaying an image of the complete function in full screen. In the figure, the dot pattern display area is the image display area of the complete function in operation. Therefore, when the image of the complete function in operation is displayed in full screen as in this example, the game screen up to that point becomes completely invisible.
Here, when the complete function is activated, there are cases where automatic settlement is performed and cases where automatic settlement is not performed. When the complete function is activated, the operation of the bet switch 40, start switch 41, and stop switch 42 is invalidated, and the game cannot proceed thereafter. However, for gaming machines 10 that permit the operation of the settlement switch 43, the settlement switch 43 can be operated after the complete function is activated to discharge all of the stored medals into the medal tray. In this case, a display prompting settlement is displayed, as shown in FIG. (a).
On the other hand, when the complete function is activated, in order to execute automatic settlement, all of the stored medals are automatically discharged into the medal tray without the player having to operate the settlement switch 43. In this case, as shown in FIG. 1(b), a message is displayed to that effect.
Furthermore, in the case of a "medalless gaming machine" explained in the 18th embodiment (FIG. 255) described later, when the counting switch 47 is operated, the gaming media (electronic medals) stored in the gaming machine 10 are transmitted to the lending unit 200. In the case of a medalless gaming machine, when the complete function is activated, it is necessary to operate the counting switch 47 to transmit the gaming media to the lending unit 200. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25(c), a display is displayed encouraging the user to count.

FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying an image of complete function activation in a partial area. In the figure, the dot pattern display area is the image display area for the complete function operation.
(a) in the figure is an example in which the complete function is activated during a sub-bonus game (AT), for example. The image layer of the complete function operation is displayed on top of the game screen layer. Therefore, in the range where the game image and the image of the complete function operation overlap, the image of the complete function operation is displayed on top. Note that the image of the complete function activation may be of a transparent type so that the game screen can be seen under the image of the complete function activation.
Furthermore, if the game screen is left as it is and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the screen shifts to a demonstration screen as shown in (b) in the figure. Even when moving to the demonstration screen, the image of the complete function activation continues to be displayed without being erased. Further, in a range where the image of the demonstration screen and the image of the complete function operation overlap, the image of the complete function operation is displayed as a layer on the near side.
Furthermore, even after the complete function is activated, it is possible to move to the menu screen. Even when moving to the menu screen, the image of the complete function activation continues to be displayed without being erased. Further, in a range where the image of the menu screen and the image of the complete function operation overlap, the image of the complete function operation is displayed as a layer on the near side.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an example when the stop counter reaches "19000" in a special gaming state (for example, during a 1BB game or RB game), (a) shows a time chart, (b) and (c) shows an example of image display.
Note that the seventeenth embodiment is a game feature in which a sub-bonus (AT) can be executed on the premise that 1BB is within (1BB is not won). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 246, for example, when 1BB or RB (accessories) is won during a game and the stop counter reaches "19000" when the special game state is in progress (during 1BB game or RB game). An example is shown below.
In (a) of the figure, at the time when the special gaming state is started, the stop counter is less than "18900", the temporary complete function flag is off, and the complete function activation flag is off. First, when the stop counter reaches "18900", the sub-control board 80 displays an image foretelling the completion function operation. (b) in the figure shows an image at this time. On the game screen in the special game state, a preview image of the completion function activation is displayed superimposed on a part of the area.
Next, when the stop counter reaches "19000" in the special game state, the temporary complete function flag is turned on. However, since it is a special game state, the complete function activation flag remains off.
Furthermore, based on the complete function provisional flag being turned on, the sub-control board 80 displays an image indicating that the complete function is on standby (the complete function will operate after the special game state ends). . (c) in the figure shows an image at this time. Therefore, based on the stop counter reaching "19000", the image display shown in (b) in the figure changes to the image display shown in (c) in the figure.
With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the stoppage counter has reached "19000" during the special gaming state (no more games can be played on the day), so it is possible to notify the player that the special gaming state ends. Troubles between pachinko parlor staff and players can be prevented when the game machine 10 is stopped later.

When the special game state ends, the complete function activation flag is turned on (the temporary complete function flag is turned off). As a result, the image shown in FIG. 244(c) is switched to the image shown in FIG. 244 or FIG. 245(a), for example.
Note that once the stop-stop counter reaches "19,000" in the special game state, the count of the stop-stop counter ends, but if the number of acquired medals decreases after that (for example, after the stop-stop counter reaches "19,000") , assuming that the subsequent counting continues without ending, even if the count value becomes less than "19000" at the end of the special gaming state), the complete function provisional flag is set at the end of the special gaming state. remains on, and the complete function activation flag turns on.
In the example of FIG. 241, when the temporary complete function flag is on ("Yes" in step S541), the process does not go through step S544, so the abort counter is not updated. Therefore, in this case, even if the number of acquired medals decreases in the subsequent special game state, the stop counter does not change.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the abort counter may be updated even after the temporary complete function flag is turned on. In this case, even if the stop counter is less than "19000" at the end of the special game state, if the complete function provisional flag is once turned on during the special game state, the special game state will end. At the end of the game, a complete function activation flag is turned on and the game machine 10 is discontinued.

In addition, in FIG. 246, after the stop counter reaches "19000", the power is turned off before the special gaming state ends, and then when the power is turned on and the special gaming state ends, the special gaming state ends. Sometimes the complete function is activated. When the stop counter reaches "19000" during the special game state, the complete function activation flag does not turn on, but the temporary complete function flag turns on. The stop counter is cleared by turning on/off the power, but the temporary complete function flag is not cleared by turning on/off the power. Therefore, after the power is turned on and before the end of the special game state, the temporary complete function flag is on and the complete function activation flag is off. When the special gaming state ends, the temporary complete function flag is turned off, the complete function activation flag is turned on, and the complete function is activated.
With this configuration, a situation where the game machine 10 is not stopped after the stoppage counter reaches "19000" (for example, the stoppage counter reaches "19000" during a special gaming state) Even if a power outage or the like occurs in the situation (the situation reached) and the power is then turned on and the discontinuation counter is cleared, the game machine 10 can be discontinued based on the temporary complete function flag and the complete function activation flag. , it is possible to prevent the player's gambling desire from being significantly aroused.

FIG. 247 shows a state in which the complete function is activated (advance notification) (for example, the state shown in FIG. 246(b)), and a game in which the complete function is activated after payout (a game in which the stop counter reaches "19000") (The same applies hereinafter.) is a time chart showing an example in which a power outage occurs and the payout process ends before the start of the power outage process.
First, it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated, the last stop switch 42 is released, and the payout process is performed in a state where the completion function is predicted to be activated. It is assumed that the power is cut off immediately before the end of the payout process, and the payout process ends before the power cutoff process starts.
When the payout process is completed, the stop counter is updated, and as a result of the stop counter reaching "19000", the complete function activation state is shifted to the complete function activation state. Although the power is cut off at about the moment when the notification state is switched to the operating state, the operating state is reached before the power-off processing starts. Therefore, the complete function activation flag is turned on before the power-off process starts.
After the power-off process is completed, the power is turned off.
Next, when the power is turned on, a power-on process is executed. When the power-on process is completed, the complete function operation state is restored. As described above, when the power is turned on/off, the stop counter is cleared, but the complete function activation flag is not cleared. Therefore, the value of the complete function activation flag is read during the power-on process, and when the complete function activation flag is on, the complete function activation state is entered.

Figure 248 is a time chart showing an example in which, in a game in which the activation of the complete function is predicted and the complete function is activated after a payout, a power outage occurs in the middle of the payout process, and the power outage process begins.
FIG. 248 shows Example 1 (a) and Example 2 (b), but first, Example 1 (a) will be described.
In the state where the complete function is to be activated, the stop switch 42 is operated, the last stop switch 42 is released, and the payout process is performed. Then, the power is turned off during the payout process, and the power-off process starts before the entire payout process is completed (before all medals are paid out). Therefore, when the power-off process ends and the power is turned off, the hit-stop counter has not yet reached "19000". Therefore, the power is turned off while the complete function is still in the state where it is to be activated. In other words, the complete function activation flag is off when the power is turned off.
In addition, when the power is turned off, the payout process that has been completed and the advance notice state of the completion function operation are backed up.

Next, when the power is turned on, a power-on process is executed. When the power-on process is completed, the payout process continues based on the backup data. Also, based on the backup data at the time of power outage, the system returns to the state where the complete function is activated.
When the payout process is completed, the stoppage counter is updated, but the stoppage counter is cleared by turning off the power. Therefore, even if the subsequent payout process is executed after the power is turned on and the stoppage counter is updated, the stoppage counter does not reach "19000". Furthermore, the value of the stop counter has not reached the value (for example, "18900" in the example of FIG. 243) for entering the complete function activation warning state. Therefore, after the dispensing process is completed, the complete function operation is not notified but the normal state is entered.
Furthermore, Example 2 shown in FIG. 2B is an example in which the advance notice state of complete function activation is not backed up when the power is turned off.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the complete function activation warning state is not restored. Therefore, when the power-on process is completed, the normal state is established.
Note that FIG. 248 shows a state in which the complete function is activated, and this applies even if the complete function does not operate after payout (the stop counter does not reach "19000").
Further, in Example 2 shown in FIG. 2(b), the advance notice state of the complete function operation is backed up when the power is cut off, but it may be configured such that the advance notice state of the complete function operation is cleared in the process when the power is restored. Processing in this manner also applies to FIG. 249(b), FIG. 250(b), and FIG. 251(b), which will be described later.

Figure 249 shows a state in which the complete function is activated, and in a game where the complete function is activated after a payout, if the power is cut off before you release your hand from the last stop switch and the payout process is completed halfway. 3 is a time chart illustrating an example in which a power-off process is executed.
FIG. 249 illustrates example 1 in (a) and example 2 in (b), but first, example 1 in (a) will be explained.
It is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the advance notice state of the complete function activation, the last stop switch 42 is released, and the payout process is performed. Here, it is assumed that the power is cut off before the last stop switch 42 is released. Furthermore, it is assumed that the power-off process starts before all payout processes are completed (before all medals are paid out). Therefore, when the power-off process is completed and the power is turned off, the abort counter has not reached "19000". For this reason, the power is turned off while the complete function is still in the warning state.
In addition, when the power is turned off, the partial payout process and the notification state of the completion function activation are backed up.

Next, when the power is turned on and a power-on process is executed, the payout process is continued based on the backup data. Also, based on the backup data at the time of power outage, the system returns to the state where the complete function is activated.
When the payout process is completed, the stoppage counter is updated, but the stoppage counter is cleared by turning off the power. Therefore, even if the subsequent payout process is executed after the power is turned on and the stoppage counter is updated, the stoppage counter does not reach "19000". Furthermore, the value of the stop counter has not reached the value required to enter the completion function activation warning state. Therefore, after the dispensing process is completed, the complete function operation is not notified but the normal state is entered.
Furthermore, Example 2 shown in FIG. 2B is an example in which the advance notice state of complete function activation is not backed up when the power is turned off.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the complete function activation warning state is not restored. Therefore, when the power-on process is completed, the normal state is established.
Note that FIG. 249 shows a state in which the complete function is activated, and this applies even when the complete function does not operate after payout (when the stop counter does not reach "19000").
Furthermore, when comparing the example in FIG. 248 and the example in FIG. 249, the results are the same. In the example shown in FIG. 248, the power is turned off after the last stop switch 42 is released, and in the example shown in FIG. 249, the last stop switch 42 is removed after the power is turned off.
In both cases, the power-off process is completed in the middle of the payout process. As a result, after the power is turned on, the dispensing process continues, and if the complete function activation notice state is backed up, it returns to the complete function activation notice state, but since the stop counter has been cleared, , after which it becomes normal.
Note that the following two methods can be used to update the stop counter when the power is turned on/off.
The first method is to update the stop counter based on the number of payouts and the number of bets in the game.
The second method is to update the stop counter based on the number of coins paid out after the power is turned on.
For example, in a game where 3 coins are bet and 10 coins are paid out, the power-off process is completed when 5 out of 10 coins are paid out, and then the power is turned on and the remaining payouts are made. ,
When the first method is adopted, after the power is turned on, the stop counter is updated by the difference number of seven sheets.
As a result, even if the power is turned on or off during the payout process, the same difference number can be updated as when the power was not turned on or off, simplifying the process. . However, the value of the stop counter updated after the power is turned on may not match the number of coins paid out after the power is turned on.
Furthermore, when the second method is adopted, the stop counter is updated by the amount of five coins paid out after the power is turned on.
As a result, the value of the stop counter updated after the power is turned on matches the number of coins paid out after the power is turned on, which confuses players when a notice of the completion function activation is given after the power is turned on. Never.

Figure 250 is a time chart showing an example of a game in which the activation of the complete function is predicted and the complete function is activated after a payout, in which the last stop switch is released just before the power-off process begins (T1) or after the power-off process (T2).
The result is the same whether the last stop switch is released just before the power-off process begins (T1) or between the end of the power-off process and before the power is turned on (T2).
FIG. 249 shows Example 1 (a) and Example 2 (b), but first, Example 1 (a) will be described.
In the advance notice state of the complete function operation, after the stop switches 42 are operated, the hand is released from the last stop switch 42 immediately before the start of the power-off process (T1) or after the power-off process (T2). When the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, the payout process is executed, but since the hand is released from the last stop switch 42 immediately before the start of the power-off process (T1) or after the power-off process (T2), the power-off process has ended before the payout process is started.
Therefore, when the power-off process is completed and the power is turned off, the stop counter has not yet reached 19000. Therefore, the power is turned off while the completion function is still in a warning state.
In addition, when the power is turned off, the winning combination and the advance notice of the complete function operation are backed up.

Next, when the power is turned on and a power-on process is executed, a payout process is executed based on the backup data. Also, based on the backup data at the time of power outage, the system returns to the state where the complete function is activated.
When the payout process is completed, the stoppage counter is updated, but the stoppage counter is cleared by turning off the power. Therefore, even if the payout process is executed after the power is turned on and the stop counter is updated, the stop counter does not reach "19000". Furthermore, the value of the stop counter has not reached the value required to enter the completion function activation warning state. Therefore, after the dispensing process is completed, the complete function operation is not notified but the normal state is entered.
Furthermore, Example 2 shown in FIG. 2B is an example in which the advance notice state of complete function activation is not backed up when the power is turned off.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the complete function activation warning state is not restored. Therefore, when the power-on process is completed, the normal state is established.

FIG. 251 is a time chart illustrating an example in which the completion function is in a notice state and the last stop switch is released after the power is turned on after the power is turned off.
Even if the last stop switch 42 is released after the power is turned off after the power is turned off, the same result as in the example shown in FIG. 250 described above is obtained.
Specifically, as in (a) Example 1, if the advance notice state of the complete function activation is backed up when the power is turned off, after the power is turned on and before the end of the payout process, the complete function is activated based on the backup data. Returns with advance notice of function activation. Then, after the payout process is completed, the state shifts to the normal state.
On the other hand, as in Example 2 (b), if the advance notice state of the complete function operation is not backed up when the power is turned off, the normal state will occur after the power is turned on.

FIG. 252 is a time chart illustrating an example of a case where a power outage occurs in a situation where a notice of completion function activation is made during a sub-bonus. In this example, it is assumed that there is no payout process before or after the power is turned off.
In the sub-bonus, the complete function is activated, so the remaining number of sheets until the complete function activates is displayed as an image. For example, the image display is as shown in FIG. 246(b). Additionally, the number of coins acquired during the sub-bonus is displayed as an image.
When the power is turned on after a power cut occurs while the remaining number of coins until the completion function is activated and the number of acquired sub-bonuses are displayed as images, a power-on process is executed. When the power-on process is completed, the stop counter is cleared, so the value of the stop counter does not reach the value required to enter the complete function activation notice state. This prevents the complete function from being activated. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the remaining number of sheets until the complete function is activated is not displayed as an image.
On the other hand, when the power-on process is completed, the number of acquired sub-bonuses is displayed as an image based on the backup data.
As described above, before the power is turned off, the number of coins remaining until the complete function is activated and the number of coins acquired in the sub-bonus are displayed as images, but after the power is turned on, the number of coins acquired in the sub-bonus is displayed as an image.

Figure 253 shows a case in which a notice of the completion function activation is notified, and when the complete function is activated after the payout process and the complete function activation is notified, a hopper empty error occurs during automatic payment after the payout process. It is a figure which shows an example. (a) shows a time chart, and (b) to (d) show image display contents.
In (a) of the figure, when the dispensing process is completed in a situation where a notice of activation of the complete function is being notified, the stop counter reaches "19000" and the complete function activation flag is turned on. This notifies the user that the complete function has been activated. In (b) of the figure, "Complete function in operation, please call the attendant" is an example of notifying the operation of the complete function.
Furthermore, in this example, it is assumed that the payment is automatically settled when the complete function is activated, similar to the example of FIG. 244(b). Therefore, when the activation of the complete function is notified, automatic payment is started. (b) in the figure is an example of notifying the operation of the complete function and notifying that automatic payment is in progress.

Next, if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic payment, the hopper empty error is notified. (c) in the figure is an example in which the operation of the complete function is notified and the occurrence of a hopper empty error is notified.
Then, when the hopper empty error is resolved and the automatic checkout is completed, only the activation of the complete function is notified, as shown in (d) in the figure.
In the case of (c) in the figure, if priority is given to the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the notification of the hopper empty error may be displayed larger than the notification of the complete function activation. Alternatively, if priority is given to notification of complete function activation, the notification of complete function activation may be displayed larger than the notification of hopper empty error.

FIG. 254 is an example of notifying the complete function activation after automatic payment when the complete function activation is announced and the complete function activates after the payout process. Furthermore, it is a diagram showing an example in which a hopper empty error occurs during the automatic payment. (a) shows a time chart, and (b) to (d) show image display contents.
The difference between FIG. 254 and FIG. 253 is that the complete function operation is not notified during automatic payment after payout processing, but the complete function activation is notified after automatic payment.
In (a) of the figure, when the payout process is completed in a situation where a notice of activation of the complete function is being notified, the stop counter reaches "19000" and the complete function activation flag is turned on. Next, before notifying the activity of the complete function, automatic payment processing is executed, so that a message indicating that automatic payment is in progress is displayed. (b) in the figure shows the state at this time.

In the example of FIG. 240, when it is determined in step S533 that the complete function activation flag is on, the process proceeds to step S534, and the activation of the complete function is notified. Next, the process went to step S535 to execute automatic payment processing. Therefore, an example of this flowchart is that of FIG. 253.
On the other hand, in the case of processing as shown in FIG. 254, if it is determined in step S533 in FIG. 240 that the complete function activation flag is on, the process proceeds to step S535 and automatic payment processing is executed. Then, after the automatic payment process, the process advances to step S534 to notify the operation of the complete function.
If a hopper empty error occurs during automatic payment, the display switches from "Automatic payment in progress" to "Hopper empty error" as shown in (c) in the figure.
Then, when the hopper empty error is resolved and the automatic checkout is completed, a complete function operation is notified as shown in (d) in the figure.
With this configuration, the operation of the complete function is not notified when automatic payment is not completed, so it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game and losing money when automatic payment is not completed. Can be done.

Further, in the example of FIG. 254, when the payout process is completed, the stop counter reaches "19000", and at that point, the complete function activation flag is turned on, and the complete function is activated. However, the operation of the complete function is not notified during automatic payment, which is performed after the payout process.
Here, if the power is turned off during the hopper empty error during automatic payment, and then the power is turned on and the hopper empty error is cleared, a notification that automatic payment is in progress will be notified before the automatic payment process ends (complete). Activation of the function is not notified), but when the automatic payment process is completed, the activation of the complete function is notified.
As a result, even if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic payment when the complete function is activated, and the power is cut off while the hopper empty error occurs, the complete function activation flag will be reset after the hopper empty error is cleared. Since it is possible to stop the gaming machine 10 based on the complete function provisional flag, it is possible to prevent the player's gambling desire from being significantly agitated.

Next, in the seventeenth embodiment, power recovery processing in the sub-control board 80 will be described.
In the seventeenth embodiment, the return screen from power cutoff is changed depending on whether the gaming state before power cutoff was a gaming state advantageous to the player or not.
Here, "gaming conditions advantageous to the player" are not limited to during the sub-bonus (AT), but also include the so-called chance zone (CZ) during the main sign of the sub-bonus (AT) and the so-called chance zone (CZ) where the expectation of AT winning is high. It's okay. The case of this sign includes both the case where the winning of the sub-bonus (AT) is notified to the player and the case where the winning of the sub-bonus (AT) is not notified.
However, the "gaming state advantageous to the player" does not include a mere advantageous section (when AT is not won).
Although different from the specifications of the 17th embodiment, in the case of a specification in which a won special combination is won and a special game is executed (transition to a special gaming state), a "gaming state advantageous to the player" means a special It is not limited to the gaming state, but may also include the internal state where the winning of the special role is carried over. Furthermore, the internal case includes both the case where the winning of the special prize is announced and the case where it is not announced.

In this embodiment, if the state was not advantageous to the player before the power was cut off, a game standby screen (normal return screen) is displayed after the power is restored from the power cut. On the other hand, if the player was in an advantageous state before the power was cut off, a predetermined return screen is displayed. As a result, for example, when a hall clerk turns on the power to the gaming machine 10, he or she can determine whether or not the previous day's hall business ended in a favorable state for the player (when the power was turned off). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately select whether to change the settings and start business in a normal state, or to start business in a state advantageous to players without changing settings.
Furthermore, when the complete function activation screen is being displayed before the power is turned off, the game state is almost always advantageous to the player before the power is turned off. However, if the player is in an advantageous gaming state and the complete function activation screen is being displayed before the power is turned off, after the power is restored, the complete function will be activated with priority over the predetermined return screen. Display the screen. This allows the hall clerk to be informed that the game cannot be played unless the settings are changed.

The main control board 50 transmits information such as the current gaming state, winning of the sub bonus (AT), and winning of the special role to the sub control board 80. Based on this information, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the current gaming state is advantageous to the player. For example, a flag is provided that is turned on when the game is in an advantageous state for the player (including during the above-mentioned main sign or inside), and it is stored whether or not the game is in an advantageous state for the player.
Further, if a predetermined error (selector error, door opening error, etc.) occurs while displaying the predetermined return screen, the predetermined return screen is replaced with an error screen in order to prioritize notification of the predetermined error. However, the fact that a predetermined error has occurred may be displayed on a part of the predetermined return screen. Alternatively, it may be displayed on a part of the error screen that a predetermined return screen is being displayed. In other words, when displaying that a predetermined error has occurred while displaying a predetermined return screen, both the predetermined return screen and the error screen may be displayed in a distinguishable manner.
In addition, when the power is cut off while the reels 31 are rotating and the reel returns from the power cut, the error screen is not displayed while the reels 31 are rotating, and an error notification is performed after the reels 31 have completely stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the error notification may be performed while the reels 31 are rotating.

When the complete function activation screen is displayed, it will not be erased unless the power is turned on/off with a setting change.
On the other hand, the display of the predetermined return screen ends when the game starts (when the start switch 41 is operated). However, betting operations alone are not enough.
Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on and the predetermined return screen is displayed, the display of the predetermined return screen is ended and the display shifts to the demonstration screen.
Here, when the time from when the game standby screen is displayed to when the demonstration screen is displayed is T1, and the time from when the predetermined return screen is displayed until the time when the demonstration screen is displayed is T2,
T2>T1
It is configured so that

As a result, when the power is turned on in the hall and the game returns to the predetermined return screen, the game standby screen (in the first game, this is the game screen that is displayed after a complete stop as the game progresses, (It is not a dedicated screen. Also, it is a different screen from the demonstration screen.) Since it takes longer to transition to the demonstration screen than the previous screen, it is possible to make it easier for hall staff to notice that the specified return screen is displayed. can.
Note that when a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation being performed from a predetermined timing after the end of the game (such as after all reels 31 have stopped or after the payout process has ended), the display shifts to a demonstration screen. When the time from the end of the game to the transition to the display of the demonstration screen is T0,
T0≒T1
It is.
therefore,
T2>T0
It is.

Further, if a bet operation is performed after the display of the game standby screen or the predetermined return screen shifts to the display of the demonstration screen, the display of the demonstration screen is ended and the screen returns to the game standby screen. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated from the game standby screen, a game start screen (normal effect screen displayed at the start of the game) is displayed.
Further, when a bet operation is performed while the demonstration screen is being displayed and the screen shifts to the game standby screen, the screen does not shift to the demonstration screen even if time passes thereafter.

FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the process flow of the return screen after power-off in the sub-control board 80.
First, in step S561, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not it is in the setting change mode. When the power is turned on in the setting change mode, a command indicating that the main control board 50 is in the setting change mode is sent to the sub control board 80, so that the setting change mode is established based on reception of the command. Determine whether or not.
When it is determined that the mode is not the setting change mode, the process advances to step S562, and when it is determined that the mode is the setting change mode, the process according to this flowchart is ended. In this way, when in the setting change mode, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without displaying a predetermined return screen or the like (a screen specific to the setting change mode is displayed).

When proceeding from step S561 to step S562, the sub-control board 80 judges whether or not the complete function operation screen was displayed before the power was turned off. When the power was turned off, information on whether or not the operation of the complete function was notified is also backed up. If it is judged that the complete function operation screen was not displayed before the power was turned off, the process proceeds to step S563, and if it is judged that the complete function operation screen was displayed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S563, the sub-control board 80 judges whether the game state before the power cut was advantageous to the player. As described above, the sub-control board 80 stores whether the game state is advantageous to the player based on the information transmitted from the main control board 50. When the power is cut, the sub-control board 80 backs up the information, and when the power is turned on, reads the information and judges the game state before the power cut. If it is judged that the game state before the power cut was advantageous to the player, the process proceeds to step S564, and if it is judged that the game state was not advantageous to the player, the process proceeds to step S572.

When proceeding to step S564, that is, when the complete function activation screen is not displayed before the power is turned off, and when the state before the power is turned off is advantageous to the player, the sub control board 80 displays the predetermined return screen. indicate. Then, the process advances to step S565.
In step S565, the sub-control board 80 determines whether a medal has been bet. When it is determined that a medal has been bet, the process proceeds to step S576, and when it is determined that a medal has not been bet, the process proceeds to step S566.
In step S566, the sub-control board 80 determines whether time T2 has elapsed since the start of displaying the predetermined return screen. When it is determined that the time T2 has elapsed, the process advances to step S567, and when it is determined that the time T2 has not elapsed, the process returns to step S565.
Proceeding to step S567, the sub-control board 80 ends displaying the predetermined return screen and starts displaying the demonstration screen. Next, the process advances to step S568, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not medals have been bet. When it is determined that a medal has been bet, the process advances to step S569. That is, the demonstration screen continues until medals are bet. When determining that medals have been bet and proceeding to step S569, the sub-control board 80 displays a game standby screen.

After displaying the game standby screen in step S569, the process advances to step S570, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. In other words, in step S570, it is determined whether the game has started. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S571 and a game start screen is displayed. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, after displaying a predetermined return screen in step S564, it is determined in step S565 that a medal has been bet, and when the process proceeds to step S576, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. Note that at the stage of step S576, a predetermined return screen is displayed. When it is determined in step S576 that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S571 and a game start screen is displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S576 that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process advances to step S577. In step S577, the sub-control board 80 determines whether time T2 has elapsed since the start of displaying the predetermined return screen. When it is determined that the time T2 has elapsed, the process advances to step S578, and when it is determined that the time T2 has not elapsed, the process returns to step S576.
Proceeding to step S578, the sub-control board 80 ends displaying the predetermined return screen and starts displaying the demonstration screen. Next, the process advances to step S579, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S571 and a game start screen is displayed.

On the other hand, in step S563, it is determined that the gaming state before the power is turned off is not advantageous to the player, and when the process proceeds to step S572, the sub-control board 80 displays a gaming standby screen. Next, the process advances to step S573, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not medals have been bet. When it is determined that a medal has been bet, the process advances to step S575. If it is determined that no medals have been bet, the process advances to step S574. In step S574, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not time T1 has elapsed since the start of display of the game standby screen. As described above, "time T1<time T2". When it is determined that the time T1 has not elapsed, the process returns to step S573 and the game standby screen is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time T1 has elapsed, the process advances to step S567 and a demonstration screen is displayed.
Furthermore, when it is determined in step S573 that a medal has been bet and the process proceeds to step S575, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S571 and a game start screen is displayed.
Note that after displaying the predetermined return screen in step S564, if it is determined in step S565 that there is a bet before it is determined in step S566 that time T2 has elapsed, the process moves to step S579 (instead of step S576). It's okay. In other words, after the bet, the demonstration screen may not be displayed even after the time T2 has elapsed, and the predetermined return screen may be maintained until the start switch 41 is operated.
Alternatively, after displaying the predetermined return screen in step S564, the display of the predetermined return screen may be maintained until a bet is placed and the start switch 41 is operated. In other words, after step S564, the process may proceed to step S570, and the predetermined return screen may be maintained until (a bet is placed and) the start switch 41 is operated in step S570.

<18th embodiment>
Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described.
The gaming machine of the 18th embodiment relates to a medalless gaming machine (also referred to as a "smart slot").
In the 18th embodiment, the meanings of terms are as follows.
"Game media (gaming value)" in a medalless gaming machine is "electronic information (electronic medals, electronic gaming media)." In the following explanation, it will simply be referred to as "game media."
"Renting" refers to transferring game media from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine and crediting the gaming machine.
"Credit" refers to storing gaming media in a gaming machine. In a general medal game machine, the maximum number of game media that can be stored is "50", but in a medalless game machine, the maximum number of game media that can be stored is, for example, "16384".
In particular, "credit" in a medalless gaming machine specifically refers to the storage (of electronic medals, electronic gaming media) in the gaming media number control board 100 (more specifically, the gaming media number storage means 103a), which will be described later. corresponds to The "game media number control board 100" is also referred to as the "game medal number control board 100."
Therefore, "credited game media" in the medalless gaming machine corresponds to game media stored in the game media number control board 100 or game medals stored in the game medal number control board 100.
“Bet” refers to betting game media in order to play a game. When the bet switch 40 is operated, a predetermined number (for example, "3") of the credited game media is bet. This point is the same as a medal game machine.

"Settlement" is different from settlement in a medal game machine, and refers to returning betted game media to credits. That is, to set the betted game media to "0" (to set the number of bets to "0").
“Counting” refers to returning the gaming media credited to the gaming machine to the rental unit 200.
"Return" refers to storing the game media stored in the rental unit 200 on a card or the like (storage medium such as a magnetic card or an IC card) and ejecting the card or the like from the rental unit 200.

256 is a block diagram of the gaming machine 10 (slot machine) in the 18th embodiment. As described above, the gaming machine 10 in the 18th embodiment is a medal-less gaming machine.
In Figure 256, the gaming machine 10 in the 18th embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 in the first embodiment (Figure 1) in that it does not have a medal insertion port 47 or a medal selector (passage sensor 46, blocker 45, insertion sensor 44).
Furthermore, no medal payout device (hopper 35, hopper motor 36, payout sensor 37) is provided.
The main control board 50 corresponds to the main control board 50 in the first embodiment (FIG. 1).
The bet number display unit 77 is a two-digit LED that displays the current bet number.
The awarded number display unit 78 corresponds to the acquired number display LED 78 in the first embodiment.

The game media number control board 100 is a board that manages the number of game media credited to the gaming machine 10.
The game media number control board 100 includes a second main control board (means), a payout control board (means), a medal number control board (means), a medal number display control board (means), or a game media number display control board (means). ) etc. Like the main control board 50, the game media number control board 100 is required to have security to prevent fraud, so it is housed in a board case and sealed with crimping (sealing member) to prevent the board case from being opened. It is configured such that (access to the inside of the game media number control board 100) is difficult.
A main control board 50, a counting switch 47, a game media number display board 120, a rental unit 200, etc. are electrically connected to the game media number control board 100 via an input port 101 or an output port 102.

Similar to the main control board 50, the game media number control board 100 includes an independent RWM 103, a ROM 104, and a CPU 105. These RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105 may be built into one chip.
The RWM 103 is a storage means that temporarily stores data etc. taken in when the CPU 105 manages the number of gaming media (number of credits). The RWM 103 includes a game media number storage means 103a that stores the number of game media. When game media are rented out from the rental unit 200, the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is updated (added). Further, when game media are awarded by winning a small prize, the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is updated (added).

Further, when the bet switch 40 is operated to start a game, the number of game media is stored in memory for the number of game media corresponding to the number of bets (for example, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the number of bets is "3"). The game medium (data) of the means 103a is updated (subtracted).
Furthermore, the ROM 104 stores programs and various data for managing the number of credits.
Further, the CPU 105 is a CPU (IC with a calculation function) provided on the game media number control board 100, and executes programs, calculations, etc. necessary for managing the number of game media.

Note that when the main control board 50 is viewed as one of the main control boards, the game medium number control board 100 is another one of the main control boards. Therefore, the RWM 53, ROM 54, and CPU 55 of the main control board 50 are respectively indicated as (first main control) RWM 53, (first main control) ROM 54, and (first main control) CPU55.
The RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105 of the game media number control board 100 are respectively indicated as (second main control) RWM 103, (second main control) ROM 14, and (second main control) CPU 105.
In the 18th embodiment, the main control board 50 and the game medium number control board 100 are configured as separate bodies, but they can also be configured as a single main control board. However, also in this case, the first main control RWM 53, the first main control ROM 54, the first main control CPU 55, the second main control RWM 103, the second main control ROM 104, and the second main control CPU 105 are provided on one control board. It will be done.
Further, the sub-control board 80 corresponds to the sub-control board 80 of the first embodiment (FIG. 1). The RWM 83, ROM 84, and CPU 85 of the sub-control board 80 are respectively indicated as (sub-control) RWM 83, (sub-control) ROM 84, and (sub-control) CPU85.

A game media number display board 120 is electrically connected to the game media number control board 100. On this game media number display board 120, a game media number display section 121 is mounted. The game media number display section 121 displays the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a, and is composed of, for example, a 5-digit LED.
For example, it is assumed that "100" is stored as the number of game media in the game media number storage means 103a. In this case, "100" is displayed on the game media number display section 121.

When, for example, the 3 bet switch 40b is operated to start a game, the bet operation signal is sent from the main control board 50 to the gaming media count control board 100. The gaming media count control board 100 determines whether or not the bet is possible based on the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media count storage means 103a, and when it determines that the bet is possible, it sends a bet signal to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 receives the bet signal, it executes a bet process and stores the number of bets in the bet count storage means 53a. When the number of bets stored in the bet count storage means 53a is updated from "0" to "3", the display (lowest digit) of the bet number display unit 77 is also updated from "0" to "3".

On the other hand, the gaming media number control board 100 receives a bet operation signal from the main control board 50, and when it determines that a bet is possible, it updates the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a. In this example, for example, if the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a before a bet is "100", this is updated to "97" when "3" is bet. The display on the gaming media number display unit 121 is also updated from "100" to "97".

Furthermore, when the settlement switch 46 is operated, the betted game media is returned to credits (in other words, the number of bets becomes "0").
In a situation where the number of bets is stored in the number of bets storage means 53a and the number of bets is displayed on the number of bets display section 77, the settlement switch 46 is operated before operating the start switch 41 (before starting the game). , the number of bets is returned to credits.
For example, when the settlement switch 46 is operated in a situation where "3" is stored in the bet number storage means 53a and "97" is stored in the game media number storage means 103a, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is The stored number of bets is updated from "3" to "0". As a result, the display on the bet number display section 77 is updated from "3" to "0".

Further, based on the operation of the settlement switch 46, a settlement signal (a signal corresponding to returning the number of bets to "3") is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the number of game media control board 100. When the gaming media number control board 100 receives this settlement signal, it updates the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a from "97" to "100". As a result, the display on the game media number display section 121 is updated from "97" to "100".

In this way, the settlement switch 46 is used to return betted game media to credits (set the number of bets to "0"). Therefore, even if the settlement switch 46 is operated, the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a will not be subtracted.
Further, even if the settlement switch 46 is operated in a situation where the bet number is not stored in the bet number storage means 53a, the bet number stored in the bet number storage means 53a remains "0" and the game The number of game media stored in the number of media storage means 103a also remains unchanged.

The game is started by operating the start switch 41 in a situation where game media are bet. Next, the reel 31 is stopped by operating the stop switch 42. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, game media is awarded. This point is similar to the first embodiment.
When game media are given, the main control board 50 stores the number of game media given in the given number storage means 53b. Further, the main control board 50 transmits a number of awarded (number of payouts) signal to the number of game media control board 100. When the game medium number control board 100 receives the given number signal, it adds the number of game media corresponding to the given number signal to the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a. For example, if the number of game media stored in the number of game media storage means 103a is "97" before the end of the game and the number of game media awarded is "14", the number of game media stored in the number of game media storage means 103a is "97" and the number of game media given is "14". The number of game media currently available is updated to "111". Further, the display on the game media number display section 121 is also updated from "97" to "111".

Further, after the awarded number is stored in the awarded number storage means 53b, the awarded number storage means The number of grants stored in 53b is cleared. When the grant number stored in the grant number storage means 53b is cleared, the display on the grant number display section 78 is also updated to "0".

Further, the game media number control board 100 is provided with a total number of game media clear switch 112. When the total number of gaming media clear switch 112 is operated, the (total) number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a of the gaming media number control board 100 can be cleared ("0" is stored). . When the number of game media stored in the number of game media storage means 103a is cleared, the number of game media displayed on the number of game media display section 121 is also updated to "0".
Here, the total number of gaming media clear switch 112 becomes effective by turning off the power of the gaming machine 10 and turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 with the total number of gaming media clearing switch 112 turned on. (The number of game media stored in the number control board 100 is cleared). Therefore, even if the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated, for example, while waiting for a game after the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the number of game media will not be cleared.
Note that the information that is cleared by operating the total number of game media clear switch 112 is only the total number of game media stored in the number of game media storage means 103a, and other information is not cleared.

For example, when the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "3" and the number of game media stored in the number of game media storage means 103a is "1000", the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a remains "3", but the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a becomes "0". In other words, by operating the total number of game media clear switch 112, the number of bets stored in the number of bets storage means 53a is not cleared.
Furthermore, in the example of the 18th embodiment, a role ratio monitor 113 (management information display LED 74 in the first embodiment (FIG. 1)) is mounted on the game media number control board 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the role ratio monitor 113 may be mounted on the main control board 50 similarly to the first embodiment.

The lending unit (also referred to as "management device" or "CR unit") 200 is a device for lending and refunding gaming media, and is provided for each gaming machine and is placed adjacent to the gaming machine. be done. In a hall, the lending unit 200 is sometimes called a sandbox because it is placed between gaming machines. Further, a "gaming system" is constituted by a gaming machine and a lending unit 200 corresponding to the gaming machine.
Through communication between the lending unit 200 and the gaming media number control board 100, it is possible to transfer (rent) gaming media from the lending unit 200 to the gaming media number control board 100, and the lent gaming media can be transferred to the gaming media number control board 100. Credit can be made to the control board 100.
Furthermore, it is possible to return the game media credited to the gaming machine 10 (game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a) to the lending unit 200.
The lending unit 200 includes a lending switch 202, a return switch 203, a lentable game media number display section 204, and a lentable gaming media number storage means 206.

The loanable game media number storage means 206 stores the number of game media that can be loaned from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10, and is configured, for example, by an RWM provided inside the lending unit 200. . The number of lentable gaming media stored in the lentable gaming media number storage means 206 is displayed on the lentable gaming media number display section 204. The loanable game media number display section 204 is composed of, for example, 7 segments of 3 digits.
When a bill is inserted into the lending unit 200, the frequency corresponding to the inserted bill (for example, the frequency "50" by inserting 1,000 yen) is stored in the loanable game media number storage means 206, and the loanable game media number storage means 206 is stored. It is displayed on the medium number display section 204.
The lending switch 202 is a switch operated when lending game media to the gaming machine 10. When lentable gaming media are stored in the lentable game media number storage means 206, for example, each time the lending switch 202 is pressed, the number of lentable game media is "50" (if the number of lentable gaming media is less than "50") The game media corresponding to the total number of times that can be lent out will be lent out.

When a game medium is lent out from the lending unit 200, the information is transmitted to the game medium number control board 100, and the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated. Furthermore, the display of the number of gaming media by the gaming media number display section 121 is also updated. For example, when the number of credits is "10" and "50" game media are lent from the lending unit 200, the number of game media stored in the number of game media storage means 103a and the number of game media display section 121 are displayed. The number of game media displayed is updated from "10" to "60".

On the other hand, when the player stops playing or when the number of game media displayed on the number of game media display section 121 (the number of game media stored in the number of game media storage means 103a) becomes excessive, The counting switch 47 is operated to transfer all or part of the gaming media from the gaming machine 10 to the lending unit 200.
Although the details will be described later, when the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a reaches "15,000" or more, it is configured to output an effect to encourage counting. In particular, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of game media that can be stored in the number of game media storage means 103a is set to "16384", so the number of game media stored in the number of game media storage means 103a is the upper limit value. When the number approaches "16384", it is recommended that at least some of the game media be returned to the lending unit 200.
Furthermore, when the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a reaches "15,000" or more, the game can be played and counted, but the game media cannot be lent from the rental unit 200. is not allowed.

When the counting switch 47 is operated, the game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a are transmitted to the lending unit 200 via the connection terminal board 130. For example, in a situation where the number of game media "1000" is stored in the game media number storage means 103a, the counting switch 47 is operated once and the information "50" is transmitted to the connection terminal board 130 as the counted value. Then, information "50" is transmitted to the rental unit 200 as a count value. After transmitting the count value, "950" is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. Furthermore, when the game media are returned as described above, on the lending unit 200 side, the number of game media stored in the loanable game media number storage means 206 increases by "50".
Note that the number of game media sent to the lending unit 200 is configured to vary depending on how long the counting switch 47 is pressed. For example, when the counting switch 47 is pressed for a short time (for example, less than 0.5 seconds), the number of gaming media "1" is transmitted to the lending unit 200. Further, when the counting switch 47 is pressed for a long time (for example, for 0.5 seconds or more), the number of game media "50" is transmitted to the rental unit 200 for one long press. By repeatedly pressing and holding the counting switch 47, the number of game media is sent to the lending unit 200 in increments of "50".
Specifically, the gaming machine 10 transmits a gaming machine information notification and a count notification to the lending unit 200, and then the lending unit 200 transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine 10. When the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notification, it transmits a lending reception result response to the lending unit 200. The gaming machine 10 transmits the gaming machine information notification so that the time from the transmission of the gaming machine information notification to the transmission of the next gaming machine information notification is 300 ms.
The counting notification mentioned above includes the number of medals counted. When the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted, the number of counted medals ("1" or "50") is transmitted at the timing of the counting notification.

In addition, when the game media number display unit 121 displays "1000" before the counting switch 47 is operated, when information of "50" is sent to the lending unit 200 as a counting value, the display on the game media number display unit 121 is updated to "950."
Furthermore, when the player stops playing, the total number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is transmitted to the lending unit 200, and the return switch 203 of the lending unit 200 is operated. When the return switch 203 is operated, the total number of game media stored in the lendable game media number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200 is stored on a card or the like, and the card or the like is ejected from the lending unit 200. Here, the number of game media may be converted into a number of points and stored on the card or the like.
Furthermore, even if the number of game media stored in the game media number memory means 103a of the game media number control board 100 is "1" or more, if the number of game media (number of game media available for lending) stored in the lendable game media number memory means 206 of the lending unit 200 is "0", cards, etc. will not be ejected even if the return switch 203 is operated.
On the other hand, when the number of game media stored in the game media number memory means 103a of the game media number control board 100 is "1" or more, and the number of game media stored in the loanable game media number memory means 206 of the lending unit 200 is "1" or more, operating the return switch 203 causes the total number of game media stored in the loanable game media number memory means 206 to be stored on a card or the like, and the card or the like is ejected.

Therefore, in the above case, by operating the counting switch 47, the game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is transmitted to the lending unit 200, and the game media are stored in the rentable game media number storage means 206. do. Thereafter, when the return switch 203 is operated, the game media stored in the loanable game media number storage means 206 are stored on a card or the like and ejected from the rental unit 200. When the game media stored in the number storage unit 206 of rentable game media is stored in a card or the like, the number of game media stored in the number storage unit 206 that can be rented is updated to “0”.

Hall computer 300 is a computer for collecting data for hall business. For example, the number of games played, the number of inputs, the number of outs, the number of differences, MY, the number of accessory items activated, the number of loans, etc. on the day are totaled.
Furthermore, since the lending unit 200 is electrically connected to the hall computer 300, information regarding lending, refunding, etc. of game media is transmitted from the lending unit 200 to the hall computer 300 in one direction.
The management computer 400 is a computer for transmitting information to the outside (outside the hall, for example, to an external center). Note that the management computer 400 is also installed in the hall, similar to the hall computer 300.
In the 18th embodiment, the hall computer 300 and the management computer 400 are provided separately, but they may be integrated into one computer.

In the medalless gaming machine having the above configuration, as described above, when the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a reaches "15,000" or more, an effect to promote counting is output.
Further, as a result of one player playing a game, if the difference obtained by subtracting the number of loans from the counted value is "15,000" or more, a congratulatory performance is output.
However, in order to output the blessing effect when the player ends the game, the blessing effect is not output only by counting a part of the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. Then, a blessing performance is output on the condition that the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is counted to be "0".
Furthermore, in order to output the blessing performance when the player finishes the game, the blessing performance is not output during the sub-bonus (AT) or special game state, even if counting is performed, for example.

FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing count-related effects in the 18th embodiment.
First, in step S601, the game medium number control board 100 determines whether or not the counting switch 47 has been operated.
When it is determined that the counting switch 47 has been operated, the process advances to step S602, and the gaming media number control board 100 executes counting processing. Then, in the next step S603, the game medium number control board 100 stores (updates) the count value.
Next, the process advances to step S604, and the game media number control board 100 determines whether the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a has become "0", that is, whether all the game media have been counted. to judge. When it is determined that the number of game media is "0", the process advances to step S605, and when it is determined that the number of game media is not "0", the process advances to step S610.
In step S605, the gaming media number control board 100 determines whether the number of bets is "0" or not. For example, after the bet switch 40 is operated and the number of bets is subtracted from the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means 103a, it is determined that the game has not started and the settlement switch 46 has not been operated. When this happens, it is determined that the number of bets is not "0". When it is determined that the number of bets is "0", the process advances to step S606, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "0", the process advances to step S613.

In step S613, the game medium number control board 100 requests the sub-control board 80 to output a settlement promotion effect. This is because in this case, all the game media have been counted but the number of bets remains, so there is a high possibility that the player forgets to count the number of bets. Then, the process proceeds to step S614, and the gaming media number control board 100 determines whether the payment switch 46 has been operated (or not) (whether the payment processing has been executed). As described above, when the settlement switch 46 is operated, a settlement signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game media number control board 100, so when the settlement signal is received, it is determined that there is a settlement. When it is determined that there is no payment, the process returns to step S613, and when it is determined that there is payment, the process returns to step S601. When the settlement process is executed, the betted game media are returned to the game media number storage means 103a, so the operator waits for the counting switch 47 to be operated again.
In step S605, it is determined that the number of bets is "0", and when the process proceeds to step S606, the game media number control board 100 calculates the difference between the counted value and the number of loans.

Next, the process advances to step S607, and the game media number control board 100 determines whether the difference number is "15,000" or more. When it is determined that the difference number is "15,000" or more, the process advances to step S608, and when it is determined that the difference number is not "15,000" or more, the process advances to step S610.
In step S608, the game medium number control board 100 determines whether or not it is in a normal state. Here, the "normal state" corresponds to not being in a sub-bonus (AT). Further, if the specification is to win a special winning combination and execute a special game, this corresponds to not being in a special game state. This is to proceed to step S609 on the condition that the state is normal. In other words, if it is a sub-bonus or the like, it can be assumed that the player will not stop playing the game yet. This is to output a blessing effect when the player finishes the game.
The game medium number control board 100 receives information indicating that a sub-bonus (AT) is in progress or a special game state from the main control board 50, stores it, and uses it for the determination in step S608.

When it is determined in step S608 that the state is normal, the process advances to step S609, and when it is determined that the state is not normal, the process advances to step S610.
In step S609, the game medium number control board 100 requests the sub-control board 80 to output a blessing effect. Then, the process advances to step S610. This blessing performance is one of the premium performances for large acquisitions, since the difference in the number of players was ``15,000'' or more.
In step S610, the game medium number control board 100 requests the sub-control board 80 to output an attention-calling effect. This attention-calling performance is output after counting, and is intended to output a message that the player should not forget to take out the card or the like storing the counted game media from the rental unit 200. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S601 that the counting switch 47 is not operated, the process advances to step S611, and the game media number control board 100 determines that the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is "15000". Determine whether or not the above is true. When it is determined that the number of game media is "15,000" or more, the process advances to step S612, and when it is determined that the number of game media is not "15,000" or more, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S612, the game medium number control board 100 requests the sub control board 80 to output a counting promotion effect. As mentioned above, the upper limit of the number of game media that can be stored in the game media number storage means 103a is "16,384", so when it reaches "15,000" or more, the player is notified that they should count them quickly. .

Although the seventeenth and eighteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, when a sub-bonus is won, a predetermined number of premonition games and pseudo games (games in which "red 7" is lined up) are played before the sub-bonus starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A pseudo game may be played in the game next to the game in which the sub-bonus is won, and a transition to the sub-bonus may be made.
(2) In the above embodiment, a game in which the winning number "2" (Replay B) is won is regarded as a sub-bonus winning game, and the player is required to make a "red 7" by pressing the reels in reverse.
However, for example, even if the winning number is "1" (Replay A), since the winning combination includes Replay 04, it may be possible to display a "red 7" line (Replay 04) by pressing the reels in reverse.
In addition, since the winning number "1" has an approximately 1/7.3 chance of being won, when the winning number "1" is won after the sub-bonus is won, an effect aiming for a "red 7" line by pressing the buttons in reverse can be output, and when the "red 7" line is displayed, a transition to the sub-bonus can be made from the next game.
(3) In the above embodiment, the condition for ending the advantageous period is set to be that the difference number during the advantageous period exceeds "2400." However, the advantageous period may be ended when the number of times of play in the advantageous period reaches a predetermined number. Examples of the "predetermined number" include "3000" or "4000" games.
In this case, the advantageous zone is terminated when either the difference number during the advantageous zone exceeds "2400" or the number of times of play in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number is satisfied. Note that the advantageous zone may be configured to be terminated when any advantageous zone termination condition (for example, after the AT ends or when more than a predetermined number of game media are acquired in one AT) is satisfied in addition to the difference number during the advantageous zone exceeding "2400" or the number of times of play in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number.

(4) When the complete function is activated, it has a specification that automatically settles the credit. Here, for example, if a bet operation is performed at the moment the game is finished and the complete function is activated thereafter, there is a risk that the bet number will remain in the gaming machine. Therefore, in automatic settlement when the complete function is activated, both the number of credits and the number of bets may be performed.
(5) The preview (advance notification) image of the activation of the complete function may be displayed all the time during the game, but it may also be displayed, for example, at a turning point when the number of remaining coins is reached. For example, when the stop counter reaches "18500,""18600,""18700,""18800," and "18900," a notice (advance notice) corresponding to each number of sheets may be given. .
In addition, in order to ensure that players are fully aware of this, specific notification methods include, for example, flashing the performance lamp 21, playing a notification sound such as "Picone" once or a predetermined number of times, and further announcing "Complete Function". An example of this is outputting a voice from the speaker 22 such as "There are ○○○ sheets left until operation."

(6) As with the above notice, the notification of the completion function activation is not limited to the image display, but also the notification sound such as "picone", or "the complete function has been activated" or "the complete function has been activated." The speaker 22 may output a voice such as "The game is over for today." Further, the effect lamp 21 may be caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the operation of the complete function.
Furthermore, notification of complete function activation can be executed not only on the sub-control board 80 side but also on the main control board 50 side. Specifically, the fact that the complete function is operating may be notified by displaying, for example, "Ed" on the acquisition number display LED 78 or the credit number display LED 76 after automatic payment.
(7) After the start of the notification, the notification of the completion function activation may be continued until the gaming machine 10 is powered off, or may be performed for a certain period of time. When executing for a certain period of time, it is preferable to continue for 10 seconds or more to ensure that the player is informed.
(8) It is preferable that the preview image for activation of the complete function is displayed immediately when all reels 31 have stopped, the payout process has finished, and the stop counter has reached a predetermined value (for example, "18900"). . For example, when displaying after the end of the payout process, it may be displayed in a shorter time than the time it takes to count up one medal after the end of the payout process.
On the other hand, when all the reels 31 have stopped, the number of coins to be paid out has been determined, and it has been determined that the stop counter has reached a predetermined value, the display may be started before the end of the payout process.

(9) When a preview image of the complete function operation is displayed, the image is displayed in the forefront layer, but when, for example, a push order navigation is displayed, the preview image of the complete function operation is displayed so as not to interfere with the display of the push order navigation. Also, when a preview image of the complete function operation is displayed during a sub-bonus (AT), the preview image is displayed so as not to interfere with the display of game information such as the number of remaining games, the number of coins won, etc.
(10) When the replay display stops in a game in which the play stop counter reaches "19000", first, the automatic bet process is not executed.
Secondly, the automatic bet itself is executed, but, for example, the operation of the start switch 41 is invalidated before the automatic bet process is completed, thereby disabling replay games.
(11) When the completion function provisional flag is turned on during a special game state, the completion function is activated regardless of the value of the play stop counter at the end of the special game state, and automatic settlement is performed in the case of a specification having an automatic settlement function.
For example, in the case of a special game state in which the winning combination lottery result may not be a winning combination, the stop counter value may decrease after the completion function provisional flag is turned on. However, when the completion function provisional flag is turned on once in the special game state, the completion function is activated even if the number of coins at the end of the special game state is less than the notification of the completion function activation.

(12) As shown in Figure 253(b), when an error (hopper empty error in this example) occurs during the operation of the complete function, an image notifying the operation of the complete function and an image showing the error that has occurred are displayed. are displayed at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this. Priority may be given to the error image, and the image notifying the complete function operation may not be visible while an error occurs.
(13) In advance of the activation of the complete function and notification of the activation of the complete function, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with an image display device 23, an image is displayed, and furthermore, the speaker 22 is used to notify the player by voice.
On the other hand, in the case of a gaming machine that does not include the image display device 23, the speaker 22 is used to give a preview of the complete function activation or a notification of the complete function activation by voice. Furthermore, in conjunction with these, these notifications may be made by causing the effect lamp 21 (frame lamp, etc.) to emit light in a specific pattern.
In addition, for game machines that are not equipped with the image display device 23, regarding the activation notice of the complete function,
a) As a first example, the number of coins to be paid out is displayed by a payout number display (in the example of FIG. 1, the obtained number display LED 78) during the operation notice, and the number of coins to be paid out is not displayed during the operation notice.
b) A second example is to provide a dedicated lamp for notifying the operation of the complete function.
(14) If the winning combination has a payout when starting the special gaming state, and the stop counter reaches "19000" or more at the start of the special gaming state, when the winning combination or the special gaming state From the start of the special game state to the end of the special game state, notification may be given to the effect that the complete function will be activated.
In addition, if you start a special game state in a situation where it is highly likely that the stop counter will be 19000 or more at the end of the special game state, a message such as "The complete function will be activated when the special game state ends" will be displayed. For example, the notification may be made at the time of winning a special winning combination or at the start of a special game state.
Specifically, in a gaming machine that is capable of executing a special game in which a payout of 150 coins is expected, when starting the special game in a situation where the complete function is activated with 100 coins remaining, the special game cannot be started. At times, notifications such as ``the complete function will be activated when the special game ends'' are executed.

(15) When the game state is advantageous to the player but is not in AT mode, an image indicating that the order of presses is not recommended due to an irregular press is displayed (for example, Fig. 107(c)), or when the In the event that the power is cut off while a game is being played with 2 cards when the number of cards is 3 and this is displayed, when the power is restored from the power cut, priority is given to the display of the specified recovery screen. Then, an image indicating that the pushing order is not recommended or an image indicating that the game is played with two cards may be displayed. Thereby, even if a power outage occurs during a game in which an irregular press is performed, an appropriate game method can be communicated to the player.
On the other hand, contrary to the above, priority may be given to displaying a predetermined recovery screen when recovering from a power-off. By prioritizing the display of the predetermined return screen, it is possible to hide the fact that the player has made an irregular press, which may be disadvantageous to the player, and thus it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.
(16) In the final game of the sub-bonus (AT), when the power is cut off while at least one reel 31 is rotating and the power is restored from the power cut, both the prescribed return screen and the addictive prevention screen can be identified after the power is completely stopped. may be displayed.
(17) When the power is turned off in a gaming state that is not advantageous to the player, and when the power is restored, the game standby screen is returned in the above example, but the demonstration screen is not limited to this, and the demonstration screen is displayed after the power is turned off. You may.

(18) If the power is cut off in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the power is restored from the power cut and a predetermined return screen is displayed, and the power is cut off again while the predetermined return screen is being displayed, the following controls are performed. Can be mentioned.
a) Display the predetermined return screen again for time T2.
b) When the total of the display time of the first predetermined return screen and the display time of the second predetermined return screen reaches time T2, the display of the predetermined return screen is ended.
c) When the device recovers from another power-off, the demonstration screen is displayed without displaying the predetermined recovery screen.
(19) In the above example, the display of the predetermined return screen was ended by operating the start switch 41 until the time T2 elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the predetermined return screen is ended by a bet operation and the display returns to the game standby screen. You may migrate.
(20) During the sub-bonus (AT), the power is cut off while the push order navigation is being displayed (while all the reels 31 are rotating), and when the power is restored from the power cut off, the push order navigation is displayed together with a predetermined return screen.

(21) When the power is turned off while the complete function activation screen is being displayed and the power is restored from the power failure, it is preferable that the complete function activation screen is displayed in priority to the predetermined recovery screen. Therefore, in this case, the predetermined return screen may not be displayed. However, the complete function activation screen and the predetermined return screen may be displayed simultaneously.
(22) In the process shown in FIG. 257, when there is a bet, the payment promotion performance is output without shifting to the blessing performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence or absence of a bet may be determined after executing a blessing performance, and if there is a bet, a payment promotion performance may be output while outputting a blessing performance.
(23) In the above embodiment, the sub-bonus is exemplified as a set of "Red 7", but a plurality of types may be provided as the sub-bonus. For example, the first sub-bonus is started by matching "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Red 7", and the second sub-bonus is started by matching "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Black BAR". may be provided. Furthermore, in the case where multiple types of sub-bonuses are provided, the number of winning coins may be made different for each sub-bonus. For example, the first sub-bonus may end with a payout of approximately "300" coins (AT "50" game), and the second sub-bonus may end with a payout of approximately "90" coins (AT "15" game). Can be mentioned.

<Additional notes>
Examples of the inventions (original inventions) described in the original specification of the present application include the following original inventions 1 to 15.
1. Original invention 1
Initial invention 1 (17th embodiment) is
It has a game that results in a first specific lottery result (winnings of prizes A1 to A16 and prizes B1 to B16 in FIG. 216) and a game that results in a second specific lottery result (winnings of prizes C1 to C8 in FIG. 217),
In a game that resulted in the first specific lottery result, when the stop switch (42) is operated in the first press order (irregular presses (correct press order)), the number of game media given is the first given number (14 pieces). The symbol combination that results in a payout can be stopped and displayed,
In a game that resulted in the first specific lottery result, when the stop switch is operated in the second press order (order presses (incorrectly released press order)), the number of game media awarded changes to the second award number (second award number). <First award number) (one payout) symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed,
In a game that resulted in the second specific lottery result, when the stop switch is operated in the first press order (irregular press (incorrect release press order)), the symbol combination in which the number of game media awarded is the second number Can be stopped and displayed
In a game with a second specific lottery result, when the stop switch is operated in the second press order (order of presses (order of correct presses)), the number of game media awarded is the third number of grants (third number of grants > The symbol combination that results in the second award number) (3 pieces paid out) can be stopped and displayed,
The first number of grants is greater than the number of game media bets (3), and the third number of grants is less than or equal to the number of game media bets,
The main control means is capable of transmitting predetermined information regarding the performance (performance group number "8" in FIG. 230) to the sub control means in the game that has the first specific lottery result,
The main control means is capable of transmitting predetermined information regarding the performance (performance group number "8" in FIG. 230) to the sub control means in the game that has the second specific lottery result,
In a game in which predetermined information regarding the performance is transmitted to the sub-control means, the expected value of the number of game media awarded for each press order is less than or equal to the bet number of game media (as shown in FIG. 231, the irregular press 213 (other The expected value for the irregular push is "2.9995", and the expected value for the forward push 123 (same for the forward push 132) is "1.1003", both of which are less than or equal to the number of bets "3". )
It is characterized by
Here, the lower the base of the non-information gaming state (non-AT), the higher the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio becomes. Therefore, it is possible to provide a common bell in order to reduce the ratio of accessories that include instructions. However, since the common bell is a winning combination regardless of the pressing order (pressing position), the probability of balls appearing in the first pressing order (irregular pressing) increases accordingly.
Therefore, as in the original invention 1, the second specific lottery result (left-biased bell, that is, the push order bell in which the correct answer is the push order ), it is possible to lower the base in the non-informed gaming state when playing in the second push order and to suppress the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio. Furthermore, the payout rate during the first push order can be suppressed compared to the case where a common bell is provided for suppressing the ratio of designated accessories.
Furthermore, even if the predetermined information regarding the performance is obtained illegally, the expected value is less than the number of bets, so it is possible to eliminate damage caused by cheating.

2. Original invention 2
Initial invention 2 (17th embodiment) is
It has a normal section and an advantageous section,
a first counter (difference counter) that counts the cumulative value of the difference from the start of the advantageous section (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game media awarded; the same applies hereinafter);
A second counter (stop counter) that counts the cumulative value of the number of differences since the power was turned on, with the minimum value being "0",
When the first counter reaches the first value (exceeds "2400"), it is possible to end the advantageous section,
When the second counter reaches the second value (when it reaches "19000"), a function (complete function) that stops the further progress of the game is enabled,
In the normal section, the first counter is not updated, but the second counter can be updated,
At the end of the advantageous section, the first counter can be initialized, but the second counter is not initialized,
When the power is turned on, the second counter can be initialized, but the first counter is not initialized (Figure 237, Figure 238)
It is characterized by
According to the second invention, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature by limiting the upper limit of the number of coins to be acquired while preventing the number of coins to be acquired in an advantageous section from becoming significantly smaller.

3. Initial invention 3
(a) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 3 Initial invention 3 (17th embodiment) is,
A predetermined counter (play end counter) is provided which counts the cumulative value of the difference number (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game media awarded) from the time the power is turned on, and the minimum value of the cumulative value is "0";
When the predetermined counter reaches a first value (when it reaches "19000"), a function for stopping the progress of the game (a complete function) is enabled;
When the predetermined counter reaches a second value (second value < first value) (for example, when it reaches "18900"; MY1 in FIG. 243), a predetermined notification (advance notification of completion function activation) indicating that activation of a function to stop the progress of the game is approaching can be executed;
After the predetermined counter becomes the second value, the predetermined notification can be continuously executed until the counter becomes the third value (the third value<the second value) (for example, until the counter reaches "18850" (MY2 in FIG. 243 )).
A feature of the present invention is that when the specified counter becomes a fourth value (fourth value < third value) (for example, when it becomes less than "18850"; in FIG. 243, when it becomes less than MY2), the specified notification is terminated.
According to the initial invention 3, it is possible to prevent the function to stop the progress of a game from being suddenly activated and to notify the player in advance.

4. Original invention 4
Initial invention 4 (17th embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined counter (stop counter) that counts the cumulative value of the difference number (value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game media given) from the time of power-on, with the minimum value being "0",
When a predetermined counter reaches a predetermined value (when it reaches "19000"), a function (complete function) for stopping the subsequent progress of the game can be activated,
When the special symbol combination stops, a special game state can be started,
When a predetermined counter reaches a predetermined value in the special game state, the function to stop the progress of the game is not activated in the special game state, and the function to stop the progress of the game is enabled after the special game state ends. ,
When a predetermined counter reaches a predetermined value in a special game state, a function is activated to stop the progress of the game at the end of the special game state even if the predetermined counter is less than the predetermined value at the end of the special game state. Enable (Figure 246)
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 4, even if a predetermined counter reaches a predetermined value, the special game state can be executed until the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, and the predetermined counter is When the value reaches a predetermined value, the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the special game state, making it possible to suppress the gambling nature.

5. Original invention 5
Initial invention 5 (17th embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined counter (stop counter) that counts the cumulative value of the difference number (value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game media given) from the time of power-on, with the minimum value being "0",
When a predetermined counter reaches a predetermined value (when it reaches "19000"), a function (complete function) for stopping the subsequent progress of the game can be activated,
In games that have a predetermined lottery result, a predetermined number of game media can be awarded,
In a game that has a predetermined lottery result and in which a predetermined counter reaches a predetermined value when a predetermined number of game media are awarded, the power is cut off before the predetermined number of game media are awarded; After that, when the power is turned on and a predetermined number of game media have been awarded, the function that stops the progress of the game is not activated, and a predetermined counter can be updated based on the fact that a predetermined number of game media have been awarded. (Figure 248, Figure 249)
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 5, it becomes possible to strictly operate a predetermined counter.

6. Original invention 6
Initial invention 6 (17th embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined counter (stop counter) that counts the cumulative value of the difference number (value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game media given) from the time of power-on, with the minimum value being "0",
When a predetermined counter reaches a first value (when it reaches "19000"), a function (complete function) for stopping the subsequent progress of the game is activated;
When the predetermined counter reaches the second value (for example, when it reaches "18900"; MY1 in FIG. 243), a predetermined notification indicating that the function to stop the progress of the game is about to be activated is issued. (advance notice of complete function activation) can be executed,
Game media that executes a predetermined notification in a state that is advantageous to the player, displays the remaining number of game media to be awarded until a function to stop the progress of the game is activated, and that is in a state that is advantageous to the player. If the power is turned off in a situation where the number of game media awarded is displayed, and the power is turned on again, the number of game media remaining until the game stop function is activated will not be displayed, and the number of game media awarded to the player will not be displayed. It is possible to display the number of game media awarded in an advantageous state (FIG. 252)
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 6, when the power is turned off and then turned on, the number of game media remaining until the function to stop the game is activated is not displayed, so the predetermined counter is not initialized. This makes it possible to prevent the user from being mistakenly identified as not being present.

7. Original invention 7
Initial invention 7 (17th embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined counter (stop counter) that counts the cumulative value of the difference number (value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game media given) from the time of power-on, with the minimum value being "0",
When a predetermined counter reaches a predetermined value (when it reaches "19000"), a function (complete function) for stopping the subsequent progress of the game is activated,
The shortest time it will take for a predetermined counter to reach a predetermined value if the game is continued for the minimum playing time (referring to the shortest time from when the reels start rotating in the current game to when the reels start rotating in the next game). The time is shorter than the available playing time in a day at a pachinko parlor (dotted chain line in Figure 237)
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 7, when the number of differences continues to increase from the time when the pachinko parlor starts business, it is possible to activate a function to stop the progress of the game during business hours.

8. Original invention 8
Initial invention 8 (17th embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined counter (stop counter) that counts the cumulative value of the difference number (value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game media given) from the time of power-on, with the minimum value being "0",
When a predetermined counter reaches a predetermined value (when it reaches "19000"), a function (complete function) for stopping the subsequent progress of the game can be activated,
In a situation where the function to stop the progress of the game is activated, it is possible to display an image indicating that the function to stop the progress of the game is activated,
If the automatic payment process is executed in a situation where the function to stop the progress of the game is activated, and a hopper empty error occurs during the automatic payment process, the function to stop the progress of the game is activated. In addition to the image indicating that a hopper empty error has occurred, it is possible to display an image indicating that a hopper empty error has occurred (Figure 253(b))
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 8, it is possible to notify both the activation of the function to stop the progress of the game and the occurrence of the hopper empty error.

9. Original invention 9
Original invention 9 (17th embodiment) is
There are non-internal members who have not been elected to the special role, and internal members who have carried over the election of the special role,
There is a case where there is a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section during non-interior,
There are cases where there is a transition from a normal section to an advantageous section during the interior,
The expected value of the number of gaming media given in the advantageous section when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section during the internal period is the number of gaming media given in the relevant advantageous section when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section during the non-internal period. is higher than the expected value (in Figure 233(b), if you shift to an advantageous section other than first thing in the morning (RT1 and normal mode 1), you will definitely shift to Heaven B preparation mode)
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 9, the expected value in the subsequent game can be varied depending on the gaming state (RT state) of the game in which the transition to the advantageous section has been determined.

10. Original invention 10
Initial invention 10 (17th embodiment) is
There are non-internal members who have not been elected to the special role, and internal members who have carried over the election of the special role,
There is a case where there is a transition from a normal section to an advantageous section during non-interior,
There are cases where there is a transition from a normal section to an advantageous section during the interior,
The expected value of the number of gaming media given in the advantageous section when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section during the internal period is the number of gaming media given in the relevant advantageous section when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section during the non-internal period. higher than the expected value (in FIG. 233(b), if it shifts to an advantageous section other than first thing in the morning (RT1 and normal mode 1), it always shifts to Heaven B preparation mode),
When the end conditions of one advantageous section are met and the transition is made to a normal section, and the transition is made from that normal section to the next advantageous section, a predetermined effect (advantageous section continuous effect shown in Figure 236) is performed in the next advantageous section. It is characterized by being executable.
According to the tenth aspect of the invention, the expected value in subsequent games can be varied depending on the gaming state (RT state) of the game in which the transition to the advantageous section has been determined.
Furthermore, it is possible to notify that the player is staying in an advantageous gaming state across an advantageous section.

11. Original invention 11
Original invention 11 (17th embodiment) is
After starting the advantageous section, when the cumulative value (difference counter) of the difference from the start of the advantageous section (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game media given) reaches a predetermined number ("2400") (when exceeded), it is possible to end the advantageous section,
It has a predetermined mode (Heaven C mode in FIG. 234(b)) that continues or loops the advantageous state for the player until the cumulative value of the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number. ,
When the cumulative value of the difference number from the start of the advantageous section is more than a specific number (when the difference number remaining is less than "1000". In other words, the cumulative value of the difference number is "1400" or more ) is characterized by not shifting to a predetermined mode.
According to the eleventh aspect of the invention, after shifting to the predetermined mode, the predetermined mode does not end early (accompanied by the end of the advantageous section), so that it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation.

12. Original invention 12
Original invention 12 (18th embodiment) is
Total stored number storage means (game media number storage means 103a) capable of storing the total number of electronic game media stored in the gaming machine;
and a counting switch (47) that is operated when transmitting the electronic game media stored in the total stored number storage means to the outside,
When the counting switch is operated and the number of electronic gaming media stored in the total stored number storage means becomes "0", the total number of electronic gaming media stored in the total stored number storage means is calculated from the total number of electronic gaming media stored in the total stored number storage means. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of lent electronic game media is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a blessing performance can be output (FIG. 257)
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 12, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

13. Original invention 13
Original invention 13 (17th embodiment) is
When transitioning to a state advantageous to the player, it is possible to stop displaying a specific symbol combination through a pseudo game,
From the first game to the "N" game of the pseudo game, a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed by temporarily stopping the reels based on the player's operation of the stop switch.
If a specific symbol combination does not temporarily stop by the "N" game of the pseudo game, the reels will automatically be temporarily stopped at the "N+1" game of the pseudo game regardless of the player's operation of the stop switch. , it is possible to stop displaying a specific symbol combination (Fig. 235)
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 13, when shifting to a state advantageous to the player, it is possible to perform an effect as if the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination based on the winning winning lottery result was stopped and displayed.

14. Original invention 14
Initial invention 14 (17th embodiment) is
It has a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
Equipped with a predetermined storage means for storing the gaming state,
If the power is turned off while the second gaming state is stored, and then the power is turned on, a predetermined image (predetermined return screen) can be displayed at a predetermined timing after the power is turned on. In FIG. 255, step S564),
When the power is turned off when the first gaming state is stored, and the power is turned on afterwards, the predetermined image is not displayed (the "gaming standby screen" is displayed in step S569 in FIG. 255). ,
When the cumulative value of the number of differences (value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game media given) since the power was turned on, with the minimum value being "0" (stopping counter value), reaches a predetermined value ( When reaching "19000"), activates the function (complete function) that stops the further progress of the game,
When the function to stop the progress of the game is activated, a specific image (complete function activation screen) can be displayed (step S665 in FIG. 255),
If the power is turned off while the second gaming state is stored and a specific image is being displayed, and the power is then turned on, the predetermined image will not be displayed (step S565 in FIG. 255). )
It is characterized by
According to the fourteenth aspect of the invention, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the player was in an advantageous state when the power was turned off, even after the power was turned on.
Further, if the function of stopping the progress of the game is activated when the power is turned off, this can be notified even after the power is turned on.

15. Original invention 15
The initial invention 15 (17th embodiment) is
a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state;
When all reels are stopped and the game is in the second gaming state, if the power is turned off and then turned on, a predetermined image (predetermined return screen) is displayed at a predetermined timing after the power is turned on (step S564 in FIG. 255).
When the power is turned off during the first game state and the power is turned on thereafter, the predetermined image is not displayed (in FIG. 255, in step S569, the “game standby screen” is displayed),
In a predetermined game in which a predetermined image is not displayed, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the predetermined game, a demonstration image can be displayed;
When a specific period of time ("T2" in FIG. 255) has elapsed from the predetermined timing at which the display of the predetermined image was started, the demonstration image is made displayable (step S567 in FIG. 255).
The specific period is designed to be longer than the predetermined period.
According to the initial invention 15, even after the power is turned on, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the state was advantageous to the player when the power was turned off.
Furthermore, by lengthening the transition time to the demonstration image when the predetermined image is displayed, it is possible to ensure time to check whether or not the predetermined image is being displayed.

10. Slot machines (gaming machines)
10a Lower panel 11 Power switch 12 Front door 12c Control panel 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c Top plate 13d Side plate 14 Pattern display device 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door switch 18 Display window 19 Medal tray 21 Performance lamp (decorative lamp section)
22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 (24A, 24B) Operation button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 35a Storage receiving port 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Token insertion port 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a Resistor 50b Mark number 50c Mark 50d Boundary 50e DP mark 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU (main chip)
Description of the Related Art 55a Pin 55b Depression 55c Step 55d Step 55e Two-dimensional code 55f Model number sticker 55g Product name 55h Company name 55i Step 55j Hidden characters 56 Socket 56a Hollow 56b Step 56c Pin insertion port 56d Socket pin 56e Notch 57 Connector 57a Foot 57b Lead wire 61 Role selection means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Performance group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous period display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status indicator LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Input indicator LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
Explanation of the Reference Signs 86 Push button 87 Cross key 91 Performance output control means 110 Medal selector 111 Medal passage 111a Vertical section 111b Inclined section 111c Entrance 111d Exit 112 Gap 113 Selector base 120 Chute member 121 Medal guide passage 122 Bottom section 123 Inner wall section 124 Outer wall section 125 Step section 126 Fixing section 127 Screw 130 Return member 131 Return receiving port 132 Medal return passage 133 Payout receiving port 134 Medal payout passage 135 Upper edge section 140 Closing member 151 Setting key insertion port 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 154 Setting key cylinder 160 Door key cylinder 160a Door key insertion port 161 Outer cylinder 161a Notch 162 Inner cylinder 170 Locking device 171 Cam 171a Protrusion 171b Protrusion 172 Moving member 172a Follower member 172b Detection piece 172c Hook 173 Moving member 173a Follower member 173b Hook 173c Hook 173d Opening 173e Stopper 174 Follower 175 Door sensor 176 Coil spring 177 Coil spring 178 Coil spring 179 Fixed member 200 Hall computer 301 Interrupt wait monitor register 302 Interrupt prohibition flag (IFF1 register, IFF2 register)
500 Timer circuit 501 (PTC) 8-bit counter 502 (PTC) Prescaler register 503 (PTC) Counter setting register 504 (PTC) Interrupt flag CK Setting key DK Door key DK1 Projection DK2 Keyway PP Power plug PP1 Cord PP2 Attachment plug PP3 Plug blade

Claims (1)

It has a non-internal medium state, an internal medium state, and a special game state,
If you win a special role in a non-internal medium state game and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role does not stop and display, the next game will be an internal medium state game, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role will stop and display. The next game is a game in a special game state,
There is a case where there is a transition from a normal section to an advantageous section in a game in a non-internal state,
There is a case where there is a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section in the game in the internal medium state,
In the non-internal state, there are cases where the winning of the special role, non-winning of the specified role, and non-winning of the specific role as a result of the lottery.
In the non-internal state, there are cases where the winning of the special role and the winning of the specified role as a result of the winning lottery.
In the non-internal state, there is no case where the winning of the special role is not won and the prescribed role is won as a result of the winning lottery.
In the non-internal state, there may be cases where the winning of the special role is not won and the winning of the specific role is won as a result of the winning lottery.
There is no case where a special role is won and a prescribed role is won as a result of the winning role lottery in the internal state,
In the internal state, there may be cases where the winning of the special role is not won and the specified role is won as a result of the lottery.
In the internal state, there are cases where the result of the lottery is that the special role is not won and the specific role is won.
If the result of the lottery in the normal section of the non-internal state is that the special role is won and the prescribed role is not won, it will move to the advantageous section,
If the result of the lottery in the normal section of the non-internal state is the winning of the special role and the winning of the prescribed role, it will move to the advantageous section,
If the result of the lottery in the normal section of the non-internal state is that the special role is not won and the specific role is won, it will not move to the advantageous section,
If the result of the lottery in the normal section of the internal medium state is that the special role is not won and the prescribed role is won, it will not move to the advantageous section,
If the result of the lottery in the normal section of the internal medium state is that the special role is not won and the specific role is won, it will not move to the advantageous section,
The probability of not winning the special role and winning the specific role as a result of the lottery in the internal medium state is higher than the probability of not winning the special role and winning the specific role as a result of the lottery in the non-internal medium state. has been
In games that transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the mode can be set based on the result of the winning lottery.
In the next game after the game has shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, a predetermined lottery based on the set mode and game state can be executed,
The mode that is newly set based on the result of a predetermined lottery in the situation where the mode has shifted from the normal section of the internal medium state to the advantageous section of the internal medium state is the transition from the normal section of the non-internal medium state to the advantageous section of the internal medium state. It is structured so that it is easier to set a more advantageous mode than the newly set mode based on the result of a predetermined lottery in the situation,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of transitioning from a normal section to an advantageous section in a game in an internal medium state is lower than the probability of transitioning from a normal section to an advantageous section in a game in a non-internal medium state.

Images